How industry money protects killer chemicals

0

By David Michaels | It happens almost every time. When a study is published linking a workplace chemical to serious disease, a scientist working for the industry disputes the findings. David Michaels, author of ‘Doubt is their product’, exposes industry’s dangerous tactics to protect its toxic favourites.

This strategy of “manufacturing scientific uncertainty” comes directly from the tobacco industry’s playbook. In fact, many of the same scientists who manufactured doubt for the cigarette companies are now performing that same task for a wide range of other industries.

How did we get here? In the 1950s, when scientists first showed that smokers had hugely increased risk of lung cancer, the cigarette companies ran a sophisticated public relations campaign to raise doubts about the increasingly definitive scientific evidence. The companies realised that if you could argue about the science, then you could avoid having to address solutions: how to help people stop smoking. But even when that didn’t work, Big Tobacco could always fall back on the argument that smoking was a choice — whatever the risk, smokers made the choice themselves, and that it was their right to do so.

That all changed in the 1980s and 1990s, when studies began to demonstrate that cigarette smoke killed not just smokers but their non-smoking spouses and workers employed in smoke-filled environments. Big Tobacco spent millions of dollars employing more and smarter scientists to argue that these studies were flawed.

The result was the creation of an industry of scientific consultants who specialise in “product defence,” and the recognition by corporate spin experts that manufacturing doubt works — do it well and you can stop government regulators, or at least slow them down for years.

In 1969 an executive at Brown & Williamson, a cigarette maker now owned by RJ Reynolds Tobacco Company, unwisely committed to paper the perfect slogan for his industry’s disinformation campaign: “Doubt is our product since it is the best means of competing with the ‘body of fact’ that exists in the mind of the general public.” Big Tobacco has lost all respect and credibility, but the practices it perfected have proliferated. A growing trend that disingenuously demands proof over precaution in the realm of public health.
Product defence

In field after field, year after year, conclusions that might support regulation are always disputed. Animal data are deemed not relevant, human data not representative, and exposure data not reliable. Whatever the story – workplace chemicals that cause cancer, diesel exhaust, global warming, sugar and obesity, secondhand smoke, plastics chemicals that may disrupt endocrine function – scientists in the “product defence industry” will manufacture uncertainty about it.

The “debate” over global warming is perhaps the most pernicious outgrowth of tobacco’s strategy. We can expect to see the scientists who last year claimed uncertainty about humans’ role in climate change now asserting that there is so much uncertainty about the public health impacts, or the technology required to reduce carbon emissions that we must undertake more research before setting new policy. I call it Denying Climate Change 2.0.

While much of the media has learned to be sceptical about manufactured uncertainty in the climate debate, less public attention is trained on the pervasive use of doubt-for-hire in other industries whose products threaten the health of workers and consumers.

In Doubt is their product: How industry’s assault on science threatens your health I dissect industry’s campaigns to manufacture doubt about a series of important workplace hazards, including asbestos, benzene lead, aromatic amines (dyes and rubber chemicals that cause bladder cancer), beryllium, chromium 6, diacetyl (the artificial butter flavor component that has killed or damaged the lungs of dozens of workers — Hazards 101) and ergonomic hazards. I focus largely on the US, because this country dominates the worldwide standard-setting process. When our regulators allow manufactured uncertainty to weaken or delay protections, workers across the world suffer the repercussions.
Standard response

I have had the opportunity to witness at close range the process of manufacturing scientific doubt. In the Clinton administration, I served as US Assistant Secretary for Environment, Safety, and Health in the Department of Energy (DOE), the chief safety officer for the nation’s nuclear weapons facilities. I ran the process through which we issued a strong new rule to reduce exposure to beryllium, a metal vital in nuclear weapons and now used in consumer products like golf clubs.

Beryllium causes lung disease at extremely low exposure levels, and it causes lung cancer. After leaving the government, I was able to obtain a collection of secret documents which showed that the beryllium industry has run a 30 year campaign industry attacking any study that questioned the old, out-of-date OSHA standard.

Chromium 6 is another industrial chemical featured in Doubt is Their Product. For more than five decades, we have known chromium 6 is a powerful lung carcinogen. But in the US, it has never been regulated as cancer-causing. Secret minutes of the Chrome Coalition [1], the chromium employers’ trade association, reveal that when the US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) was finally considering a new workplace exposure standard, the chromium industry brought in some of the nation’s top product defense scientists, to design a sophisticated counter attack. The chromium manufacturers also sponsored an important study which showed that chromium 6 caused lung cancer at levels far below the OSHA standard in effect at the time [2], but those results were never revealed until I discovered them.

Deadly tactic

These examples are not exceptional. I report on corporate efforts to manufacture uncertainty about asbestos, lead, vinyl chloride, diacetyl, and a host of other chemicals.

Doubt is their product is filled with never before published documents, like the never-published letter from the medical director of DuPont stating that 100 per cent of the men who made beta-naphthylamine (BNA) at one factory developed bladder cancer [3]. DuPont also produced other bladder carcinogens in that same factory; at least 450 workers at the plant developed work-related bladder cancer [4].

One of the chemicals closely related to BNA made at that plant was ortho-toluidine (OT). Through a series of DuPont letters, reports and papers, the book demonstrates that DuPont managers witnessed this development and growth of this tragic epidemic, yet refused to acknowledge that OT could also cause bladder cancer, shipping the chemical out without proper warnings. As a result, dozens of workers exposed to OT in a plant in Niagara Falls New York, USA, have developed bladder cancer.

For many years, DuPont and other manufacturers have disputed the link between OT and human bladder cancer. Earlier this year, the International Agency for Research on Cancer evaluated OT and reached the same conclusion I did, too late for the Niagara Falls workers: OT is a human bladder carcinogen.

In researching this book, I uncovered a many documents like the DuPont bladder cancer ones. Some of these documents are shocking. To ensure they can be used by activists, public health practitioners and regulators, I have posted every reference in the book, with links to all of the “smoking guns,” at DefendingScience.org.

Doubt is their product powerfully demonstrates that conflicted science is not good science. If a scientist is paid by a polluter or a manufacturer of dangerous products, her or his judgment is inevitably clouded by that financial relationship; this is true even for scientists who have great integrity and who try to be honest. As a result, we cannot rely on the judgment of these scientists when considering how to best protect workers from toxic exposures. Activists, unions and scientists need to demand that our government agencies rely on independent studies conducted by independent scientists, not ones bought and paid for by the producers of the hazards.

The mission of health and safety activists, as well as public health and environmental agencies, is to reduce hazards before people get sick or the environment is irreparably damaged. We don’t need certainty to act. It is time to return to first principles: use the best science available, but do not demand certainty where it does not exist.

 

References

1. Secret minutes of the Chrome Coalition. [pdf1] [pdf2] [pdf3]

2. Collaborative cohort mortality study of four chromate production facilities, 1958-1998, September 2002 [pdf]

3. June 18 1947 letter from the manager at DuPont’s Chambers plant [pdf]

4. 25 October 1991 email from Robert Weiss MD [pdf]

 

This article was first published in Hazards Magazine, 103, August 2008

NOAM CHOMSKY: Towards a Second Cold War?

6

NOAM CHOMSKY | Aghast at the atrocities committed by US forces invading the Philippines, and the rhetorical flights about liberation and noble intent that routinely accompany crimes of state, Mark Twain threw up his hands at his inability to wield his formidable weapon of satire. The immediate object of his frustration was the renowned General Funston. “No satire of Funston could reach perfection,” Twain lamented, “because Funston occupies that summit himself… [he is] satire incarnated.”

It is a thought that often comes to mind, again in August 2008 during the Georgia-Ossetia-Russia war. George Bush, Condoleezza Rica and other dignitaries solemnly invoked the sanctity of the United Nations, warning that Russia could be excluded from international institutions “by taking actions in Georgia that are inconsistent with” their principles. The sovereignty and territorial integrity of all nations must be rigorously honored, they intoned — “all nations,” that is, apart from those that the US chooses to attack: Iraq, Serbia, perhaps Iran, and a list of others too long and familiar to mention.

The junior partner joined in as well. British foreign secretary David Miliband accused Russia of engaging in “19th century forms of diplomacy” by invading a sovereign state, something Britain would never contemplate today. That “is simply not the way that international relations can be run in the 21st century,” he added, echoing the decider-in-chief, who said that invasion of “a sovereign neighboring state…is unacceptable in the 21st century.” Mexico and Canada therefore need not fear further invasions and annexation of much of their territory, because the US now only invades states that are not on its borders, though no such constraint holds for its clients, as Lebanon learned once again in 2006.

“The moral of this story is even more enlightening,” Serge Halimi writes in Le Monde Diplomatique and CounterPunch newsletter, “when, to defend his country’s borders, the charming pro-American Saakashvili repatriates some of the 2,000 soldiers he had sent to invade Iraq,” one of the largest contingents apart from the two warrior states.

Prominent analysts joined the chorus. Fareed Zakaria applauded Bush’s observation that Russia’s behavior is unacceptable today, unlike the 19th century, “when the Russian intervention would have been standard operating procedure for a great power.” We therefore must devise a strategy for bringing Russia “in line with the civilized world,” where intervention is unthinkable.

There were, to be sure, some who shared Mark Twain’s despair. One distinguished example is Chris Patten, former EU commissioner for external relations, chairman of the British Conservative Party, chancellor of Oxford University and a member of the House of Lords. He wrote that the Western reaction “is enough to make even the cynical shake their heads in disbelief” — referring to Europe’s failure to respond vigorously to the effrontery of Russian leaders, who, “like 19th-century tsars, want a sphere of influence around their borders.”

Patten rightly distinguishes Russia from the global superpower, which long ago passed the point where it demanded a sphere of influence around its borders, and demands a sphere of influence over the entire world. It also acts vigorously to enforce that demand, in accord with the Clinton doctrine that Washington has the right to use military force to defend vital interests such as “ensuring uninhibited access to key markets, energy supplies and strategic resources” — and in the real world, far more.

Clinton was breaking no new ground, of course. His doctrine derives from standard principles formulated by high-level planners during World War II, which offered the prospect of global dominance. In the postwar world, they determined, the US should aim “to hold unquestioned power” while ensuring the “limitation of any exercise of sovereignty” by states that might interfere with its global designs. To secure these ends, “the foremost requirement [is] the rapid fulfillment of a program of complete rearmament,” a core element of “an integrated policy to achieve military and economic supremacy for the United States.” The plans laid during the war were implemented in various ways in the years that followed.

The goals are deeply rooted in stable institutional structures. Hence they persist through changes in occupancy of the White House, and are untroubled by the opportunity for “peace dividends,” the disappearance of the major rival from the world scene, or other marginal irrelevancies. Devising new challenges is never beyond the reach of doctrinal managers, as when Ronald Reagan pulled on his cowboy boots and declared a national emergency because the Nicaraguan army was only two days from Harlingen Texas, and might lead the hordes who are about to “sweep over the United States and take what we have,” as Lyndon Johnson lamented when he called for holding the line in Vietnam. Most ominously, those holding the reins may actually believe their own words.

Returning to the efforts to elevate Russia to the civilized world, the seven charter members of the Group of Eight industrialized countries issued a statement “condemning the action of our fellow G8 member,” Russia, which has yet to comprehend the Anglo-American commitment to non-intervention. The European Union held a rare emergency meeting to condemn Russia’s crime, its first meeting since the invasion of Iraq, which elicited no condemnation.

Russia called for an emergency session of the Security Council, but no consensus was reached because, according to Council diplomats, the US, Britain, and some others rejected a phrase that called on both sides “to renounce the use of force.”

The typical reactions recall Orwell’s observations on the “indifference to reality” of the “nationalist,” who “not only does not disapprove of atrocities committed by his own side, but … has a remarkable capacity for not even hearing about them.”

The basic facts are not seriously in dispute. South Ossetia, along with the much more significant region of Abkhazia, were assigned by Stalin to his native Georgia. Western leaders sternly admonish that Stalin’s directives must be respected, despite the strong opposition of Ossetians and Abkhazians. The provinces enjoyed relative autonomy until the collapse of the USSR. In 1990, Georgia’s ultranationalist president Zviad Gamsakhurdia abolished autonomous regions and invaded South Ossetia. The bitter war that followed left 1000 dead and tens of thousands of refugees, with the capital city of Tskhinvali “battered and depopulated” (New York Times).

A small Russian force then supervised an uneasy truce, broken decisively on August 7, 2008, when Georgian president Saakashvili’s ordered his forces to invade. According to “an extensive set of witnesses,” the Times reports, Georgia’s military at once “began pounding civilian sections of the city of Tskhinvali, as well as a Russian peacekeeping base there, with heavy barrages of rocket and artillery fire.” The predictable Russian response drove Georgian forces out of South Ossetia, and Russia went on to conquer parts of Georgia, then partially withdrawing to the vicinity of South Ossetia. There were many casualties and atrocities. As is normal, the innocent suffered severely.

Russia reported at first that ten Russian peacekeepers were killed by Georgian shelling. The West took little notice. That too is normal. There was, for example, no reaction when Aviation Week reported that 200 Russians were killed in an Israeli air raid in Lebanon in 1982 during a US-backed invasion that left some 15-20,000 dead, with no credible pretext beyond strengthening Israeli control over the occupied West Bank.

Among Ossetians who fled north, the “prevailing view,” according to the London Financial Times, “is that Georgia’s pro-western leader, Mikheil Saakashvili, tried to wipe out their breakaway enclave.” Ossetian militias, under Russian eyes, then brutally drove out Georgians, in areas beyond Ossetia as well. “Georgia said its attack had been necessary to stop a Russian attack that already had been under way,” the New York Times reports, but weeks later “there has been no independent evidence, beyond Georgia’s insistence that its version is true, that Russian forces were attacking before the Georgian barrages.”

In Russia, the Wall Street Journal reports, “legislators, officials and local analysts have embraced the theory that the Bush administration encouraged Georgia, its ally, to start the war in order to precipitate an international crisis that would play up the national-security experience of Sen. John McCain, the Republican presidential candidate.” In contrast, French author Bernard-Henri Levy, writing in the New Republic, proclaims that “no one can ignore the fact that President Saakashvili only decided to act when he no longer had a choice, and war had already come. In spite of this accumulation of facts that should have been blindingly obvious to all scrupulous, good-faith observers, many in the media rushed as one man toward the thesis of the Georgians as instigators, as irresponsible provocateurs of the war.”

The Russian propaganda system made the mistake of presenting evidence, which was easily refuted. Its Western counterparts, more wisely, keep to authoritative pronouncements, like Levy’s denunciation of the major Western media for ignoring what is “blindingly obvious to all scrupulous, good-faith observers” for whom loyalty to the state suffices to establish The Truth — which, perhaps, is even true, serious analysts might conclude.

The Russians are losing the “propaganda war,” BBC reported, as Washington and its allies have succeeded in “presenting the Russian actions as aggression and playing down the Georgian attack into South Ossetia on August 7, which triggered the Russian operation,” though “the evidence from South Ossetia about that attack indicates that it was extensive and damaging.” Russia has “not yet learned how to play the media game,” the BBC observes. That is natural. Propaganda has typically become more sophisticated as countries become more free and the state loses the ability to control the population by force.

The Russian failure to provide credible evidence was partially overcome by the Financial Times, which discovered that the Pentagon had provided combat training to Georgian special forces commandos shortly before the Georgian attack on August 7, revelations that “could add fuel to accusations by Vladimir Putin, Russian prime minister, last month that the US had `orchestrated’ the war in the Georgian enclave.” The training was in part carried out by former US special forces recruited by private military contractors, including MPRI, which, as the journal notes, “was hired by the Pentagon in 1995 to train the Croatian military prior to their invasion of the ethnically-Serbian Krajina region, which led to the displacement of 200,000 refugees and was one of the worst incidents of ethnic cleansing in the Balkan wars.” The US-backed Krajina expulsion (generally estimated at 250,000, with many killed) was possibly the worst case of ethnic cleansing in Europe since World War II. Its fate in approved history is rather like that of photographs of Trotsky in Stalinist Russia, for simple and sufficient reasons: it does not accord with the required image of US nobility confronting Serbian evil.

The toll of the August 2008 Caucasus war is subject to varying estimates. A month afterwards, the Financial Times cited Russian reports that “at least 133 civilians died in the attack, as well as 59 of its own peacekeepers,” while in the ensuing Russian mass invasion and aerial bombardment of Georgia, according to the FT, 215 Georgians died, including 146 soldiers and 69 civilians. Further revelations are likely to follow.

In the background lie two crucial issues. One is control over pipelines to Azerbaijan and Central Asia. Georgia was chosen as a corridor by Clinton to bypass Russia and Iran, and was also heavily militarized for the purpose. Hence Georgia is “a very major and strategic asset to us,” Zbigniew Brzezinski observes.

It is noteworthy that analysts are becoming less reticent in explaining real US motives in the region as pretexts of dire threats and liberation fade and it becomes more difficult to deflect Iraqi demands for withdrawal of the occupying army. Thus the editors of the Washington Post admonished Barack Obama for regarding Afghanistan as “the central front” for the United States, reminding him that Iraq “lies at the geopolitical center of the Middle East and contains some of the world’s largest oil reserves,” and Afghanistan’s “strategic importance pales beside that of Iraq.” A welcome, if belated, recognition of reality about the US invasion.

The second issue is expansion of NATO to the East, described by George Kennan in 1997 as “the most fateful error of American policy in the entire post-cold-war era, [which] may be expected to inflame the nationalistic, anti-Western and militaristic tendencies in Russian opinion; to have an adverse effect on the development of Russian democracy; to restore the atmosphere of the cold war to East-West relations.”

As the USSR collapsed, Mikhail Gorbachev made a concession that was astonishing in the light of recent history and strategic realities: he agreed to allow a united Germany to join a hostile military alliance. This “stunning concession” was hailed by Western media, NATO, and President Bush I, who called it a demonstration of “statesmanship … in the best interests of all countries of Europe, including the Soviet Union.”

Gorbachev agreed to the stunning concession on the basis of “assurances that NATO would not extend its jurisdiction to the east, `not one inch’ in [Secretary of State] Jim Baker’s exact words.” This reminder by Jack Matlock, the leading Soviet expert of the Foreign Service and US ambassador to Russia in the crucial years 1987 to 1991, is confirmed by Strobe Talbott, the highest official in charge of Eastern Europe in the Clinton administration. On the basis of a full review of the diplomatic record, Talbott reports that “Secretary of State Baker did say to then Soviet foreign minister Eduard Shevardnadze, in the context of the Soviet Union’s reluctant willingness to let a unified Germany remain part of NATO, that NATO would not move to the east.”

Clinton quickly reneged on that commitment, also dismissing Gorbachev’s effort to end the Cold War with cooperation among partners. NATO also rejected a Russian proposal for a nuclear-weapons-free-zone from the Arctic to the Black Sea, which would have “interfered with plans to extend NATO,” strategic analyst and former NATO planner Michael MccGwire observes.

Rejecting these possibilities, the US took a triumphalist stand that threatened Russian security and also played a major role in driving Russia to severe economic and social collapse, with millions of deaths. The process was sharply escalated by Bush’s further expansion of NATO, dismantling of crucial disarmament agreements, and aggressive militarism. Matlock writes that Russia might have tolerated incorporation of former Russian satellites into NATO if it “had not bombed Serbia and continued expanding. But, in the final analysis, ABM missiles in Poland, and the drive for Georgia and Ukraine in NATO crossed absolute red lines. The insistence on recognizing Kosovo independence was sort of the very last straw. Putin had learned that concessions to the U.S. were not reciprocated, but used to promote U.S. dominance in the world.Once he had the strength to resist, he did so,” in Georgia.

Clinton officials argue that expansion of NATO posed no military threat, and was no more than a benign move to allow former Russian satellites to join the EU (Talbott). That is hardly persuasive. Austria, Sweden and Finland are in the EU but not NATO. If the Warsaw Pact had survived and was incorporating Latin American countries — let alone Canada and Mexico — the US would not easily be persuaded that the Pact is just a Quaker meeting. There should be no need to review the record of US violence to block mostly fanciful ties to Moscow in “our little region over here,” the Western hemisphere, to quote Secretary of War Henry Stimson when he explained that all regional systems must be dismantled after World II, apart from our own, which are to be extended.

To underscore the conclusion, in the midst of the current crisis in the Caucasus, Washington professes concern that Russia might resume military and intelligence cooperation with Cuba at a level not remotely approaching US-Georgia relations, and not a further step towards a significant security threat.

Missile defense too is presented here as benign, though leading US strategic analysts have explained why Russian planners must regard the systems and their chosen location as the basis for a potential threat to the Russian deterrent, hence in effect a first-strike weapon. The Russian invasion of Georgia was used as a pretext to conclude the agreement to place these systems in Poland, thus “bolstering an argument made repeatedly by Moscow and rejected by Washington: that the true target of the system is Russia,” AP commentator Desmond Butler observed.

Matlock is not alone in regarding Kosovo as an important factor. “Recognition of South Ossetia’s and Abkhazia’s independence was justified on the principle of a mistreated minority’s right to secession – the principle Bush had established for Kosovo,” the Boston Globe editors comment.

But there are crucial differences. Strobe Talbott recognizes that “there’s a degree of payback for what the U.S. and NATO did in Kosovo nine years ago,” but insists that the “analogy is utterly and profoundly false.” No one is a better position to know why it is profoundly false, and he has lucidly explained the reasons, in his preface to a book on NATO’s bombing of Serbia by his associate John Norris. Talbott writes that those who want to know “how events looked and felt at the time to those of us who were involved” in the war should turn to Norris’s well-informed account. Norris concludes that “it was Yugoslavia’s resistance to the broader trends of political and economic reform — not the plight of Kosovar Albanians — that best explains NATO’s war.”

That the motive for the NATO bombing could not have been “the plight of Kosovar Albanians” was already clear from the rich Western documentary record revealing that the atrocities were, overwhelmingly, the anticipated consequence of the bombing, not its cause. But even before the record was released, it should have been evident to all but the most fervent loyalists that humanitarian concern could hardly have motivated the US and Britain, which at the same time were lending decisive support to atrocities well beyond what was reported from Kosovo, with a background far more horrendous than anything that had happened in the Balkans. But these are mere facts, hence of no moment to Orwell’s “nationalists” — in this case, most of the Western intellectual community, who had made an enormous investment in self-aggrandizement and prevarication about the “noble phase” of US foreign policy and its “saintly glow” as the millennium approached its end, with the bombing of Serbia as the jewel in the crown.

Nevertheless, it is interesting to hear from the highest level that the real reason for the bombing was that Serbia was a lone holdout in Europe to the political and economic programs of the Clinton administration and its allies, though it will be a long time before such annoyances are allowed to enter the canon.

There are of course other differences between Kosovo and the regions of Georgia that call for independence or union with Russia. Thus Russia is not known to have a huge military base there named after a hero of the invasion of Afghanistan, comparable to Camp Bondsteel in Kosovo, named after a Vietnam war hero and presumably part of the vast US basing system aimed at the Middle East energy-producing regions. And there are many other differences.

There is much talk about a “new cold war” instigated by brutal Russian behavior in Georgia. One cannot fail to be alarmed by signs of confrontation, among them new US naval contingents in the Black Sea — the counterpart would hardly be tolerated in the Caribbean. Efforts to expand NATO to Ukraine, now contemplated, could become extremely hazardous.

Nonetheless, a new cold war seems unlikely. To evaluate the prospect, we should begin with clarity about the old cold war. Fevered rhetoric aside, in practice the cold war was a tacit compact in which each of the contestants was largely free to resort to violence and subversion to control its own domains: for Russia, its Eastern neighbors; for the global superpower, most of the world. Human society need not endure — and might not survive — a resurrection of anything like that.

A sensible alternative is the Gorbachev vision rejected by Clinton and undermined by Bush. Sane advice along these lines has recently been given by former Israeli Foreign Minister and historian Shlomo ben-Ami, writing in the Beirut Daily Star: “Russia must seek genuine strategic partnership with the US, and the latter must understand that, when excluded and despised, Russia can be a major global spoiler. Ignored and humiliated by the US since the Cold War ended, Russia needs integration into a new global order that respects its interests as a resurgent power, not an anti-Western strategy of confrontation.”

Noam Chomsky’s most recent book is Failed States: the Abuse of Power and the Assault on Democracy.

Secret Military Technology

1

By Bruce Schneier | On 60 Minutes, in an interview with Scott Pelley, reporter Bob Woodward claimed that the U.S. military has a new secret technique that’s so revolutionary, it’s on par with the tank and the airplane:

Woodward: This is very sensitive and very top secret, but there are secret operational capabilities that have been developed by the military to locate, target, and kill leaders of al Qaeda in Iraq, insurgent leaders, renegade militia leaders, that is one of the true breakthroughs.Pelley: What are we talking about here? Some kind of surveillance, some kind of targeted way of taking out just the people that you’re looking for, the leadership of the enemy?

[…]

Woodward: It is the stuff of which military novels are written.

Pelley: Do you mean to say that this special capability is such an advance in military technique and technology that it reminds you of the advent of the tank and the airplane?

Woodward: Yeah.

 

It’s here, 7 minutes and 55 seconds in.

Anyone have any ideas?

EDITED TO ADD (9/11): One idea:

I’m going to make a wager about what I think Woodward is talking about, and I’ll be curious to see what Danger Room readers have to say. I believe he is talking about the much ballyhooed (in defense geek circles) “Tagging, Tracking and Locating” program; here’s a briefing on it from Special Operations Command. These are newfangled technologies designed to track people from long distances, without the targeted people realizing they are being tracked. That can theoretically include thermal signatures, or some sort of “taggant” placed on a person. Think Will Smith in Enemy of the State. Well, not so many cameras, maybe.

Howard Zinn – US ‘in need of rebellion’

1

Al Jazeera speaks to Howard Zinn, the author, American historian, social critic and activist, about how the Iraq war damaged attitudes towards the US and why the US “empire” is close to collapse.

Q: Where is the United States heading in terms of world power and influence?

HZ: America has been heading – for some time, and is heading right now – toward less and less world power, less and less influence.

Obviously, since the war in Iraq, the rest of the world has fallen away from the United States, and if American foreign policy continues in the way it has been – that is aggressive and violent and uncaring about the feelings and thoughts of other people – then the influence of the United States is going to decline more and more.

This is an empire which is on the one hand the most powerful empire that ever existed; on the other hand an empire that is crumbling – an empire that has no future … because the rest of the world is alienated and simply because this empire is top-heavy with military commitments, with bases around the world, with the exhaustion of its own resources at home.

[This is] leading to more and more discontent and home, so I think the American empire will go the way of other empires and I think it is on its way now.

Q: Is there any hope the US will change its approach to the rest of the world?

HZ: If there is any hope, the hope lies in the American people.

[It] lies in American people becoming resentful enough and indignant enough over what has happened to their country, over the loss of dignity in the world, over the starving of human resources in the United States, the starving of education and health, the takeover of the political mechanism by corporate power and the result this has on the everyday lives of the American people.

[There is also] the higher and higher food prices, the more and more insecurity, the sending of the young people to war.

I think all of this may very well build up into a movement of rebellion.

We have seen movements of rebellion in the past: The labour movement, the civil rights movement, the movement against the war in Vietnam.

I think we may well see, if the United States keeps heading in the same direction, a new popular movement. That is the only hope for the United States.

Q: How did the US get to this point?

HZ: Well, we got to this point because … I suppose the American people have allowed it to get it to this point because there were enough Americans who were satisfied with their lives, just enough.

Of course, many Americans were not, that is why half of the population doesn’t vote, they’re alienated.

But there are just enough Americans who have been satisfied, you might say getting some of the “goodies” of the empire, just some of them, just enough people satisfied to support the system, so we got this way because of the ability of the system to maintain itself by satisfying just enough of the population to keep its legitimacy.

And I think that era is coming to an end.

Q: What should the world know about the United States?

HZ: What I find many people in the rest of the world don’t know is that there is an opposition in the United States.

Very often, people in the rest of the world think that Bush is popular, they think ‘oh, he was elected twice’, they don’t understand the corruption of the American political system which enabled Bush to win twice.

They don’t understand the basic undemocratic nature of the American political system in which all power is concentrated within two parties which are not very far from one another and people cannot easily tell the difference.

So I think we are in a situation where we are going to need some very fundamental changes in American society if the American people are going to be finally satisfied with the kind of society we have.

Q: Do you think the US can recover from its current position?

HZ: Well, I am hoping for a recovery process. I mean, so far we haven’t seen it.

You asked about what the people of the rest of the world don’t know about the United States, and as I said, they don’t know that there is an opposition.

There always has been an opposition, but the opposition has always been either crushed or quieted, kept in the shadows, marginalised so their voices are not heard.

People in the rest of the world hear the voices of the American leaders.

They do not hear the voices of the people all over this country who do not like the American leaders who want different policies.

I think also, people in the rest of the world should know that what they see in Iraq now is really a continuation of a long, long term of American imperial expansion in the world.

I think … a lot of people in the world think that this war in Iraq is an aberration, that before this the United States was a benign power.

It has never been a benign power, from the very first, from the American Revolution, from the taking-over of Indian land, from the Mexican war, the Spanish-American war.

It is embarrassing to say, but we have a long history in this country of violent expansion and I think not only do most people in other countries [not] know this, most Americans don’t know this. 

Q: Is there a way for this to improve?

HZ: Well you know, whatever hope there is lies in that large number of Americans who are decent, who don’t want to go to war, who don’t want to kill other people.

It is hard to see that hope because these Americans who feel that way have been shut out of the communications system, so their voices are not heard, they are not seen on the television screen, but they exist.

I have gone through, in my life, a number of social movements and I have seen how at the very beginning of these social movements or just before these social movements develop, there didn’t seem to be any hope.

I lived in the [US] south for seven years, in the years of the civil rights movements, and it didn’t seem that there was any hope, but there was hope under the surface.

And when people organised, and when people began to act, when people began to work together, people began to take risks, people began to oppose the establishment, people began to commit civil disobedience.

Well, then that hope became manifest … it actually turned into change.

Q: Do you think there is a way out of this and for the future influence of the US on the world to be a positive one?

HZ: Well, you know for the United States to begin to be a positive influence in the world we are going to have to have a new political leadership that is sensitive to the needs of the American people, and those needs do not include war and aggression.

[It must also be] sensitive to the needs of people in other parts of the world, sensitive enough to know that American resources, instead of being devoted to war, should be devoted to helping people who are suffering.

You’ve got earthquakes and natural disasters all over the world, but the people in the United States have been in the same position as people in other countries.

The natural disasters here [also] brought little positive reaction – look at [Hurricane] Katrina.

The people in this country, the poor people especially and the people of colour especially, have been as much victims of American power as people in other countries.

Q: Can you give us an overall scope of everything we talked about — the power and influence of the United States?

HZ: The power and influence of the United States has declined rapidly since the war in Iraq because American power, as it has been exercised in the world historically, has been exposed more to the rest of the world in this situation and in other situations.

So the US influence is declining, its power is declining.

However strong a military machine it is, power does not ultimately depend on a military machine. So power is declining.

Ultimately power rests on the moral legitimacy of a system and the United States has been losing moral legitimacy.

My hope is that the American people will rouse themselves and change this situation, for the benefit of themselves and for the benefit of the rest of the world.

Bush Secretly Approved Orders Allowing Raids in Pakistan

0

By ERIC SCHMITT and MARK MAZZETTI | President Bush secretly approved orders in July that for the first time allow American Special Operations forces to carry out ground assaults inside Pakistan without the prior approval of the Pakistani government, according to senior American officials.

The classified orders signal a watershed for the Bush administration after nearly seven years of trying to work with Pakistan to combat the Taliban and Al Qaeda, and after months of high-level stalemate about how to challenge the militants’ increasingly secure base in Pakistan’s tribal areas.

American officials say that they will notify Pakistan when they conduct limited ground attacks like the Special Operations raid last Wednesday in a Pakistani village near the Afghanistan border, but that they will not ask for its permission.

“The situation in the tribal areas is not tolerable,” said a senior American official who, like others interviewed for this article, spoke on condition of anonymity because of the delicate nature of the missions. “We have to be more assertive. Orders have been issued.”

The new orders reflect concern about safe havens for Al Qaeda and the Taliban inside Pakistan, as well as an American view that Pakistan lacks the will and ability to combat militants. They also illustrate lingering distrust of the Pakistani military and intelligence agencies and a belief that some American operations had been compromised once Pakistanis were advised of the details.

The Central Intelligence Agency has for several years fired missiles at militants inside Pakistan from remotely piloted Predator aircraft. But the new orders for the military’s Special Operations forces relax firm restrictions on conducting raids on the soil of an important ally without its permission.

Pakistan’s top army officer said Wednesday that his forces would not tolerate American incursions like the one that took place last week and that the army would defend the country’s sovereignty “at all costs.”

It is unclear precisely what legal authorities the United States has invoked to conduct even limited ground raids in a friendly country. A second senior American official said that the Pakistani government had privately assented to the general concept of limited ground assaults by Special Operations forces against significant militant targets, but that it did not approve each mission.

The official did not say which members of the government gave their approval.

Any new ground operations in Pakistan raise the prospect of American forces being killed or captured in the restive tribal areas – and a propaganda coup for Al Qaeda. Last week’s raid also presents a major test for Pakistan’s new president, Asif Ali Zardari, who supports more aggressive action by his army against the militants but cannot risk being viewed as an American lap dog, as was his predecessor, Pervez Musharraf.

The new orders were issued after months of debate inside the Bush administration about whether to authorize a ground campaign inside Pakistan. The debate, first reported by The New York Times in late June, at times pitted some officials at the State Department against parts of the Pentagon that advocated aggressive action against Qaeda and Taliban targets inside the tribal areas.

Details about last week’s commando operation have emerged that indicate the mission was more intrusive than had previously been known.

According to two American officials briefed on the raid, it involved more than two dozen members of the Navy Seals who spent several hours on the ground and killed about two dozen suspected Qaeda fighters in what now appeared to have been a planned attack against militants who had been conducting attacks against an American forward operating base across the border in Afghanistan.

Supported by an AC-130 gunship, the Special Operations forces were whisked away by helicopters after completing the mission.

Although the senior American official who provided the most detailed description of the new presidential order would discuss it only on condition of anonymity, his account was corroborated by three other senior American officials from several government agencies, all of whom made clear that they supported the more aggressive approach.

Pakistan’s government has asserted that last week’s raid achieved little except killing civilians and stoking anti-Americanism in the tribal areas.

“Unilateral action by the American forces does not help the war against terror because it only enrages public opinion,” said Husain Haqqani, Pakistan’s ambassador to Washington, during a speech on Friday. “In this particular incident, nothing was gained by the action of the troops.”

As an alternative to American ground operations, some Pakistani officials have made clear that they prefer the C.I.A.’s Predator aircraft, operating from the skies, as a method of killing Qaeda operatives. The C.I.A. for the most part has coordinated with Pakistan’s government before and after it has launched missiles from the drone. On Monday, a Predator strike in North Waziristan killed several Arab Qaeda operatives.

A new American command structure was put in place this year to better coordinate missions by the C.I.A. and members of the Pentagon’s Joint Special Operations Command, made up of the Army’s Delta Force and the Navy Seals.

The move was intended to address frustration on the ground about different agencies operating under different marching orders. Under the arrangement, a senior C.I.A. official based at Bagram air base in Afghanistan was put in charge of coordinating C.I.A. and military activities in the border region.

Spokesmen for the White House, the Defense Department and the C.I.A. declined to comment on Wednesday about the new orders. Some senior Congressional officials have received briefings on the new authorities. A spokeswoman for Senator Carl Levin, a Michigan Democrat who leads the Armed Services Committee, declined to comment.

American commanders in Afghanistan have complained bitterly that militants use sanctuaries in Pakistan to attack American troops in Afghanistan.

“I’m not convinced we’re winning it in Afghanistan,” Adm. Mike Mullen, the chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, told the House Armed Services Committee on Wednesday. “I am convinced we can.”

Toward that goal, Admiral Mullen said he had ordered a comprehensive military strategy to address the border region between Pakistan and Afghanistan.

The commando raid last week and an increasing number of recent missile strikes are part of a more aggressive overall American campaign in the border region aimed at intensifying attacks on Al Qaeda and the Taliban in the waning months of the Bush administration, with less than two months to go before November elections.

State Department officials, as well as some within the National Security Council, have expressed concern about any Special Operations missions that could be carried out without the approval of the American ambassador in Islamabad.

The months-long delay in approving ground missions created intense frustration inside the military’s Special Operations community, which believed that the Bush administration was holding back as the Qaeda safe haven inside Pakistan became more secure for militants.

The stepped-up campaign inside Pakistan comes at a time when American-Pakistani relations have been fraying, and when anger is increasing within American intelligence agencies about ties between Pakistan’s Inter-Services Intelligence Directorate, known as the ISI, and militants in the tribal areas.

Analysts at the C.I.A. and other American spy and security agencies believe not only that the bombing of India’s embassy in Kabul, Afghanistan, in July by militants was aided by ISI operatives, but also that the highest levels of Pakistan’s security apparatus – including the army chief, Gen. Ashfaq Parvez Kayani – had knowledge of the plot.

“It’s very difficult to imagine he was not aware,” a senior American official said of General Kayani.

American intelligence agencies have said that senior Pakistani national security officials favor the use of militant groups to preserve Pakistan’s influence in the region, as a hedge against India and Afghanistan.

In fact, some American intelligence analysts believe that ISI operatives did not mind when their role in the July bombing in Kabul became known. “They didn’t cover their tracks very well,” a senior Defense Department official said, “and I think the embassy bombing was the ISI drawing a line in the sand.”

September 20th: Stop The War Coalition Demonstration in Manchester

4

What will British foreign secretary David Miliband say in his speech to Labour’s annual conference in Manchester? It’s all too predictable. ‘We’ are ‘winning’ in Iraq, making ‘progress’ in Afghanistan, defending ‘democracy’ in Georgia, confronting Iran to protect world ‘security’ and waging endless war against ‘global terrorism’. ‘We’ stand “shoulder to shoulder” with George Bush and whoever his successor may be in following slavishly wherever US foreign policy takes ‘us’.

There will be no place in Miliband’s speech for the views of the people of Iraq, Afghanistan, Iran and anywhere else that the Bush wars have brought, or threaten to bring, mass slaughter and destruction. Only last weekend a mass demonstration of Iraqis took to the streets of Baghdad to call for all foreign troops to get out of Iraq, confirming country wide polls which show this to be the view of an overwhelming majority.

And David Miliband will not have a word to say about the large majorities in both Britain and the United States who have consistently opposed the warmongering carried out in their name and insisted that the US and British troops all be withdrawn from Iraq and Afghanistan.

David Miliband, Gordon Brown and the rest of the Labour government, who have so seamlessly adopted the war policies of Tony Blair, hope that the ever dutiful mainstream media will help delude people in this country into believing that ‘we’ are ‘winning’ and making ‘progress’ in our support for illegal invasions.

This is why Stop the War, the Campaign for Nuclear Disarmament and the British Muslim Initiative are organising a demonstration at the Labour Party conference in Manchester on Saturday 20 September, to ensure that the voice of the anti-war majority that opposes the government’s warmongering is prominently represented.

Please publicise the details of the demonstration as widely as you can and join us in Manchester on 20 September.

Leaflets are available for downloading or from the Stop the War national office. Transport details for protestors travelling to Manchester from outside London are available on the Stop the war website or by calling 020 7278 6694.

MAKE YOUR VOICE HEARD – STOP THE SPREAD OF WAR DEMONSTRATE AT THE LABOUR PARTY CONFERENCE SATURDAY 20 SEPTEMBER: ASSEMBLE 12.30PM, ALL SAINTS, MANCHESTER M15

TRANSPORT DETAILS: See http://tinyurl.com/696px8 or call 020 7278 6694 LEAFLETS: Call 020 7278 6694 or download at http://www.stopwar.org.uk

Historians: Stop Bush/Cheney From Destroying Presidential Records

0

Thirty-two of the nation’s leading historians have sent letters to congressional leaders calling on them to stregthen the Presidential Records Act (PRA). The effort, led by the Center for American Progress Action Fund and joined by the American Historical Association, the Organization of American Historians, and the National Coalition for History, notes that while the PRA requires the administration to preserve presidential records, “it fails to provide an effective means
of enforcing compliance with that requirement.” (View the letters here and here.)

This effort has taken on increased urgency as the Bush administration prepares to leave office and may be ready to expunge the record on its tenure. Bush has already repeatedly manipulated and rewritten open government laws in order to cover up his wrongdoings:

— The White House is “missing as many as 225 days of e-mail dating back to 2003 and there is little if any likelihood a recovery effort will be completed by the time the Bush administration leaves office.”

— In 2001, President Bush issued an executive order “allowing former presidents to review executive documents before they can be released.” Last year, however, a U.S. District Judge invalidated the order, ruling that former presidents would be able to “indefinitely” keep their documents secret.

— Bush plans to solicit contributions from foreign donors for his $200 million presidential library, but plans on keeping their identities secret.

CAPAF Senior Fellow Mark Agrast told ThinkProgress that although the “prospects for legislative action during the remainder of the 110th Congress are not promising, we felt it was important to lay down a marker for the next Congress and the incoming administration before this Congress adjourns.”

CREW and several historian organizations are also filing a separate lawsuit today, “asking a federal judge to declare that Cheney’s records are covered by the Presidential Records Act of 1978 and cannot be destroyed, taken or withheld without proper review.”

Agrast has more here. Source

Secret killing program is key in Iraq, Woodward says

2

The dramatic drop in violence in Iraq is due in large part to a secret program the U.S. military has used to kill terrorists, according to a new book by Pulitzer Prize-winning journalist Bob Woodward.

The program — which Woodward compares to the World War II era Manhattan Project that developed the atomic bomb — must remain secret for now or it would “get people killed,” Woodward said Monday on CNN’s Larry King Live.

“It is a wonderful example of American ingenuity solving a problem in war, as we often have,” Woodward said.

In “The War Within: Secret White House History 2006-2008,” Woodward disclosed the existence of secret operational capabilities developed by the military to locate, target and kill leaders of al Qaeda in Iraq and other insurgent leaders.

National security adviser Stephen Hadley, in a written statement reacting to Woodward’s book, acknowledged the new strategy. Yet he disputed Woodward’s conclusion that the “surge” of 30,000 U.S. troops into Iraq was not the primary reason for the decline in violent attacks.

“It was the surge that provided more resources and a security context to support newly developed techniques and operations,” Hadley wrote.

Woodward, associate editor of the Washington Post, wrote that along with the surge and the new covert tactics, two other factors helped reduce the violence.

One was the decision of militant cleric Muqtada al-Sadr to order a cease-fire by his Mehdi Army. The other was the “Anbar Awakening” movement that saw Sunni tribes aligning with U.S. troops to battle al Qaeda in Iraq.

Woodward told Larry King that while there is a debate over how much credit the new secret operations should get for the drop in violence, he concluded it “accounts for a good portion.”

“I would somewhat compare it to the Manhattan Project in World War II,” he said “It’s a ski slope right down in a matter of months, cutting the violence in half. This isn’t going to happen with the bunch of joint security stations or the surge.”

The top secret operations, he said, will “some day in history … be described to people’s amazement.”

While he would not reveal the details, Woodward said the terrorists who have been targeted were already aware of the capabilities.

“The enemy has a heads up because they’ve been getting wiped out and a lot of them have been killed,” he said. “It’s not news to them.

“If you were a member of al Qaeda or the resistance or some extremist militia, you would be wise to get your rear end out of town,” Woodward said. “It is very dangerous.”

CNN

YOUTHS BEATEN AND RAPED IN BRUTAL IRAQ PRISONS

0

By Jonathan Steele in Baghdad | Hundreds of children, some as young as nine, are being held in appalling conditions in Baghdad’s prisons, sleeping in sweltering temperatures in overcrowded cells without working fans, no daily access to showers, and subject to frequent sexual abuse by guards, current and former prisoners say.

At Karkh juvenile prison, Omar Ali, a 16-year-old who has spent more than three years there, showed the multiple skin sores he and many other fellow inmates have contracted through lying on thin, sweat-soaked mattresses night after night.

“The electricity comes from a generator and it’s only switched on during the two-hour weekly session when visitors come in, and for two or three hours in the evening. We are convinced the guards sell the generator fuel on the black market,” he said.

Daytime temperatures in Baghdad last week averaged 44C (112F). They barely drop below 38C at night. Water supplies in Karkh are spasmodic, and Omar said he was able to shower only once every three days. Boys sleep in four dormitories, averaging 75 inmates in a cell about 5 metres by 10 metres, on double bunks or the concrete floor.

Guards often take boys to a separate room in the prison and rape them, Omar alleged. They also break prison rules by lending their mobile phones to boys to ring home, on condition that each time their families top the phone up by $10 or $20. The teaching staff resigned en masse in November because of low pay, according to an international official. As a result, the children lounge around aimlessly with no daytime activities, other than an exercise yard.

Though the boys in the prison have been convicted, international standards for fair trials are never met. “Trials last on average for 25 minutes, no witnesses are called, confessions are used as the only evidence, and court-appointed defence lawyers get the case file on the day of the trial, leaving no chance to consult the defendant in private,” an international adviser in Baghdad said on condition of anonymity.

Omar Ali was 13 when interior ministry special forces raided his house in a predominantly Sunni suburb in October 2004. He and his 14-year-old brother were arrested. A week later the special forces came back and took their father. All three are still in custody.

The ministry is under Shia control and its forces have repeatedly been accused of targeting innocent Sunnis. Sahar Muhammad, the boys’ mother, told the Guardian that when she was able to visit her sons they told her they were beaten repeatedly in the first days of custody and ordered to sign a blank sheet of paper on which charges would be written later.

Raad Jamal was 17 when US forces raided his home in the mixed Sunni and Shia district of Doura in June last year. His mother, Suad Ahmed Rashid, who was with him during the interview, told the Guardian: “During the US raid an American officer told my daughter: ‘Tell your brother to confess he is with al-Qaida so we can send him to Camp Bucca [a US prison near Basra] or else we’ll hand him to the Iraqis and they will torture him’.”

Raad and a friend were taken to a US base and were transferred next morning to the seventh brigade of the Iraqi army’s second regiment. Raad said he and his friend were hung from the ceiling on ropes, beaten with electric cables, and taken for interrogation one by one. “They said everyone who comes here has to confess,” Raad said.

He was then sent to another Iraqi army base. “I stayed there about six months. I didn’t confess anything I didn’t do. They write false statements and ask you to press your thumb on it. I refused but they forced my thumb on to the paper,” he said. At the juvenile court Raad encountered a sympathetic judge.

“The judge did not accept my confession. He said I was innocent but for administrative reasons I would have to go to Tobchi until I was released.” He spent a few months in Tobchi and was released in March.

Last year officials from the United Nations Assistance Mission to Iraq (Unami) visited Baghdad’s Tobchi prison, where children awaiting trial are held. They reported that detainees provided “particularly worrisome allegations of ill-treatment or other abuse of juvenile males, several of whom told Unami they had been beaten and sexually abused while held in the custody of the ministries of the interior and defence prior to transfer to a juvenile facility. Upon examining them Unami observed injuries consistent with beatings.”

The UN found severe overcrowding at Tobchi, with around 400 inmates in a prison with an official capacity of 206. “In some cells juveniles were taking turns to sleep on the floor without mattresses,” the UN reported. The ministry of labour and social affairs (Molsa), which manages the prison, said shortages of funds prevented improvements.

Kadhim Raouf Ali, deputy director general of Molsa’s juvenile department, told the Guardian that inmate numbers in Tobchi had been sharply reduced this year thanks to speeded-up releases under the new amnesty law. There were only 226 inmates now. But he admitted Karkh was still overcrowded. It was holding 315 children while capacity was 250.

Child detainees in US custody in Iraq fare better than those in Iraqi hands, said Shatha Alobosi, an Iraqi woman MP. Former inmates interviewed by the Guardian confirmed that there is less overcrowding and brutality.

Now, as Iraqi pressure mounts for a return of sovereignty, the US has been moving to release all under-18s. In December last year it held 950 children. The current total is 180.

“We anticipate having less than 100 juveniles in detention by the end of Ramadan [later this month], and hopefully release all juveniles to their families before the end of this year,” First Lieutenant Randi Norton, a US military spokesman, said.

The Iraqi Islamic party, the main Sunni party in parliament, takes a special interest in detainees, adult as well as juvenile, since the majority are Sunnis. It gives aid to poor families who have no breadwinner, and has urged the authorities to improve conditions and release prisoners.

“We still have a long way to go. The problem is how to make a major and drastic reform of the judicial system, and change the mentality of officers in the army and police,” its leader, the Iraqi vice president Tariq al-Hashemi, told the Guardian.

· An Iraqi contributed reporting for this article. Names of inmates and family members have been changed.

UK activist faces 12 year sentence after RNC protests

5
Indymedia | Dave Mahoney was cycling to the grocery store with his girlfriend in Minneapolis on September 4th 2008, when an un-marked van pulled up, and two men wearing FBI shirts inexplicably bundled him into the back, and drove off.

Dave was part of the protesters assembled at the Republican National Convention in the City that week, and was there to peacefully remind America and the rest of the world of some of the atrocities, and in-justices millions of people endure everyday across the globe – many of which link directly to the actions & policy of the Republican party.

Instead, Dave’s become one of the victims… facing trumped up charges of Assault, and Conspiracy to Riot with a Furtherance of Terrorism; if convicted he could get up to 12 years in jail AND a $24,000 dollar fine…

ANY of Dave’s masses of friends both in America, and here in the UK would happily tell you the truth about Dave: He’s one of the gentlest, most caring, peaceful, level-headed, intelligent people you could ever imagine, working tirelessly for environmental charities and groups like Amnesty International. He would NEVER do any of the things he’s accused of, denies all the accusations vehemently, and can’t believe the charges levelled at him which are based on the flimsiest evidence imaginable.

Dave was due to return home to the UK on October 3rd, and so had very little money when he was arrested, everything he had went towards his extortionate $25,000 bail, and so his family & friends back here are desperately trying to raise much-needed money for him to just survive over there, and also to fund a decent lawyer – which he’ll inevitably need to take on organisations as deceitful and corrupt as the FBI and US Government.

For more information about Dave’s case, or to offer help (financial or otherwise) & advice please get in touch as soon as possible, by emailling helpdave@mail.com. Anything you can do to help us and Dave beat these bullshit charges would make a difference, and would be so gratefully appreciated.

ILLUMINATING FOR SOME, TERRIFYING FOR OTHERS….

0

Britain’s premier parapolitical investigative magazine has landed at RINF.

Notes from the Borderland (NFB) is a magazine like no other and covers many topics the mainstream media dare not print. The head-on approach from the NFB team leaves no stone unturned, making sure you get the facts – and all the facts.

It is meticulously researched, encouraging readers to investigate articles for themselves and provides extensive footnotes.

The NFB team states: “In a shallow age where many TV programmes and newspaper stories are spoon-fed to servile journalists by shadowy interests, NFB stands out as genuine investigative research.”

You can order your copy of the current issue today, or grab all back issues.

NFB is most definitely an eyeopner.

 

DNA Testing Expands to Lesser Crimes

0

By Dan Morse | While unusual, here is a crime as alleged by Montgomery County police that joins the list of things harder to get away with in the era of DNA evidence:

Man walks into a Starbucks, says he wants to apply for a job. He’s given an application and a complimentary cup of coffee. Minutes later, he walks around the counter and threatens a barista with a ballpoint pen. He flees with $204 from the cash register and keys to another barista’s 1993 Nissan Maxima, leaving behind the partially consumed cup of coffee.

Dominic J. Wilson is scheduled to stand trial today in the Starbucks case.

“Saliva,” said Ray Wickenheiser, director of Montgomery’s crime lab, “is a good source of DNA.”

DNA testing in the county is expanding from killings and rapes to less violent robberies, burglaries and drug deals. Prosecutors say this will lead to quicker convictions because defendants will cave and plead guilty. Defense lawyers worry that as more DNA samples are pushed through the county’s crime lab, it will boost the odds of false matches.

“It runs the risk of turning the gold standard of evidence into fool’s gold,” said Stephen Mercer, a Montgomery lawyer who has taken on so many of these cases lately that one of this clients calls him “the DNA Dude.”

To read how detectives describe the Starbucks case in their arrest documents, the case appears to reside in the gold-standard realm. The incident took place in 2002, so long ago that the Starbucks in question, along Washington Street in downtown Rockville, doesn’t exist anymore, although there is a new one around the corner.

For years, detectives didn’t make an arrest. They did have a seized coffee cup, though, from which they lifted a DNA sample, according to charging documents filed in Montgomery Circuit Court. In 2007, the details of that sample were entered into a statewide database of convicted felons.

Up popped a connection to Wilson, who shortly after the alleged Starbucks job was arrested on assault and battery charges, according to court records. In March, a Montgomery grand jury indicted Wilson on one count of theft, two counts of robbery and one count of “robbery with a dangerous weapon,” according to a copy of the indictment.

Montgomery’s crime lab has been dogged by backlogs of several hundred DNA cases. It is generally hard to keep labs fully staffed, in part because analysts are in such demand. Wickenheiser, the lab director who took over in March, said additional employees have cut the backlog to about 100 cases. His staff is running validation tests on new countertop robots that can do such things as automatically extract DNA from other cellular components. Wickenheiser hopes the robots will start producing evidence for cases by the spring. Coupled with a new gene-sequencing machine, the robots could increase DNA analysis output by at least 30 percent, he said

Wickenheiser said he wants to make DNA testing routine for all robberies and residential burglaries in Montgomery within five years. Already, courthouse attorneys are dealing with more DNA cases.

“In the early days, you would see them in rapes and murders,” said Paul DeWolfe, the chief public defender in Montgomery, who says DNA evidence now shows up in virtually every type of crime.

As that happens, evidence technicians are swabbing for DNA on such things as gun handles, car interiors, cocaine bags and articles of clothing used in strangulation attempts. The problem, said Mercer, is that although the evidence can show that a suspect was near the evidence, it doesn’t necessarily show that the suspect committed a crime.

An article of clothing used in a strangulation could have been touched by the suspect weeks earlier in innocent fashion, he said. Also, surface samples often require DNA lab analysts to sort out the suspect’s DNA from other people’s, introducing a greater chance of error.

Wickenheiser said he has established a “prioritization policy” with detectives and prosecutors that is expediting the most urgent cases. He said detectives and prosecutors know to seek other evidence tying suspects to crimes. And he said that as DNA testing gets more exacting, it simply makes sense to use it more. His analysts now can pull evidence out of DNA samples weighing 100 picograms, a picogram being one-trillionth of a gram. Such precision, he said, can also exonerate innocent suspects.

One of Montgomery’s top prosecutors, Laura Chase, a deputy state’s attorney, said defense lawyers have feared challenging DNA evidence before a jury. As DNA evidence moves to less-violent crimes, she said, “I think it will encourage pleas. It always has encouraged pleas, and that will make the system more efficient.”

ID scheme plans 50,000 cards by April

0

The National Identity Scheme will produce just 50,000 cards in its first few months — and has yet to define the role or budget of its commissioner.

In response to a parliamentary written question from Liberal Democrat shadow home secretary Chris Huhne, home secretary Jacqui Smith said that about 50,000 identity cards will be issued between the scheme’s launch for foreign nationals between November and April 2009. “Volumes will rise rapidly thereafter and will depend on the speed of implementation and the nature of the immigration categories brought into the scheme,” she added.

On 1 September, the UK Border Agency said it will start issuing cards to foreign nationals from outside the European Economic Area on 25 November, to those applying to stay in the country as students or through marriage.

The Home Office also revealed that the role and budget of the National Identity Scheme’s commissioner — a post which is required by the Identity Cards Act 2006 — has not been decided.

In response to a parliamentary question asked by Lynne Jones on the budget for the commissioner, who is meant to oversee the scheme, identity minister Meg Hillier said: “The precise definition of the role of his or her office is still being finalised and, as a result, the budget has yet to be finalised.”

An Identity and Passport Service spokesperson said that the commissioner will be primarily concerned with the National Identity Register for UK nationals, which will start next year with the introduction of identity cards for workers in sensitive posts including airside staff at airports.

The department also released information on the related e-Borders border control project. In response to questions from Damian Green, Nigel Evans and Philip Davies, Liam Byrne said that it had cost £133.5m by 31 January 2008, and that the biometric visa programme had been completed in December, “three months early and several millions pounds under budget”.

He added that 2.5m fingerprint enrolments have generated more than 19,000 matches of data “recorded in connection with a previous immigration or asylum matter”, with an average of 1,200 such matches each month. So far, this process has brought to notice more than 3,100 applications lodged using a different identity.

On the scheme’s future, Byrne said that e-Borders will check and screen 60% of all passenger and crew movements in and out of the country by December 2009, 95 per cent by December 2010 and 100% by 2014. “We do not intend to publish details of those routes for which Passenger Name Record data will be captured as this is operationally sensitive,” he added.

This article was originally published at Kablenet.

How industry money protects killer chemicals

3

It happens almost every time. When a study is published linking a workplace chemical to serious disease, a scientist working for the industry disputes the findings. David Michaels, author of ‘Doubt is their product’, exposes industry’s dangerous tactics to protect its toxic favourites.

By David Michaels | This strategy of “manufacturing scientific uncertainty” comes directly from the tobacco industry’s playbook. In fact, many of the same scientists who manufactured doubt for the cigarette companies are now performing that same task for a wide range of other industries.

How did we get here? In the 1950s, when scientists first showed that smokers had hugely increased risk of lung cancer, the cigarette companies ran a sophisticated public relations campaign to raise doubts about the increasingly definitive scientific evidence. The companies realised that if you could argue about the science, then you could avoid having to address solutions: how to help people stop smoking. But even when that didn’t work, Big Tobacco could always fall back on the argument that smoking was a choice — whatever the risk, smokers made the choice themselves, and that it was their right to do so.
That all changed in the 1980s and 1990s, when studies began to demonstrate that cigarette smoke killed not just smokers but their non-smoking spouses and workers employed in smoke-filled environments. Big Tobacco spent millions of dollars employing more and smarter scientists to argue that these studies were flawed.

The result was the creation of an industry of scientific consultants who specialise in “product defence,” and the recognition by corporate spin experts that manufacturing doubt works — do it well and you can stop government regulators, or at least slow them down for years.

In 1969 an executive at Brown & Williamson, a cigarette maker now owned by RJ Reynolds Tobacco Company, unwisely committed to paper the perfect slogan for his industry’s disinformation campaign: “Doubt is our product since it is the best means of competing with the ‘body of fact’ that exists in the mind of the general public.” Big Tobacco has lost all respect and credibility, but the practices it perfected have proliferated. A growing trend that disingenuously demands proof over precaution in the realm of public health.

Product defence

In field after field, year after year, conclusions that might support regulation are always disputed. Animal data are deemed not relevant, human data not representative, and exposure data not reliable. Whatever the story – workplace chemicals that cause cancer, diesel exhaust, global warming, sugar and obesity, secondhand smoke, plastics chemicals that may disrupt endocrine function – scientists in the “product defence industry” will manufacture uncertainty about it.

The “debate” over global warming is perhaps the most pernicious outgrowth of tobacco’s strategy. We can expect to see the scientists who last year claimed uncertainty about humans’ role in climate change now asserting that there is so much uncertainty about the public health impacts, or the technology required to reduce carbon emissions that we must undertake more research before setting new policy. I call it Denying Climate Change 2.0.

While much of the media has learned to be sceptical about manufactured uncertainty in the climate debate, less public attention is trained on the pervasive use of doubt-for-hire in other industries whose products threaten the health of workers and consumers.

In Doubt is their product: How industry’s assault on science threatens your health I dissect industry’s campaigns to manufacture doubt about a series of important workplace hazards, including asbestos, benzene lead, aromatic amines (dyes and rubber chemicals that cause bladder cancer), beryllium, chromium 6, diacetyl (the artificial butter flavor component that has killed or damaged the lungs of dozens of workers — Hazards 101) and ergonomic hazards. I focus largely on the US, because this country dominates the worldwide standard-setting process. When our regulators allow manufactured uncertainty to weaken or delay protections, workers across the world suffer the repercussions.

Standard response

I have had the opportunity to witness at close range the process of manufacturing scientific doubt. In the Clinton administration, I served as US Assistant Secretary for Environment, Safety, and Health in the Department of Energy (DOE), the chief safety officer for the nation’s nuclear weapons facilities. I ran the process through which we issued a strong new rule to reduce exposure to beryllium, a metal vital in nuclear weapons and now used in consumer products like golf clubs.

Beryllium causes lung disease at extremely low exposure levels, and it causes lung cancer. After leaving the government, I was able to obtain a collection of secret documents which showed that the beryllium industry has run a 30 year campaign industry attacking any study that questioned the old, out-of-date OSHA standard.

Chromium 6 is another industrial chemical featured in Doubt is Their Product. For more than five decades, we have known chromium 6 is a powerful lung carcinogen. But in the US, it has never been regulated as cancer-causing. Secret minutes of the Chrome Coalition [1], the chromium employers’ trade association, reveal that when the US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) was finally considering a new workplace exposure standard, the chromium industry brought in some of the nation’s top product defense scientists, to design a sophisticated counter attack. The chromium manufacturers also sponsored an important study which showed that chromium 6 caused lung cancer at levels far below the OSHA standard in effect at the time [2], but those results were never revealed until I discovered them.

Deadly tactic

These examples are not exceptional. I report on corporate efforts to manufacture uncertainty about asbestos, lead, vinyl chloride, diacetyl, and a host of other chemicals.

Doubt is their product is filled with never before published documents, like the never-published letter from the medical director of DuPont stating that 100 per cent of the men who made beta-naphthylamine (BNA) at one factory developed bladder cancer [3]. DuPont also produced other bladder carcinogens in that same factory; at least 450 workers at the plant developed work-related bladder cancer [4].

One of the chemicals closely related to BNA made at that plant was ortho-toluidine (OT). Through a series of DuPont letters, reports and papers, the book demonstrates that DuPont managers witnessed this development and growth of this tragic epidemic, yet refused to acknowledge that OT could also cause bladder cancer, shipping the chemical out without proper warnings. As a result, dozens of workers exposed to OT in a plant in Niagara Falls New York, USA, have developed bladder cancer.

For many years, DuPont and other manufacturers have disputed the link between OT and human bladder cancer. Earlier this year, the International Agency for Research on Cancer evaluated OT and reached the same conclusion I did, too late for the Niagara Falls workers: OT is a human bladder carcinogen.

In researching this book, I uncovered a many documents like the DuPont bladder cancer ones. Some of these documents are shocking. To ensure they can be used by activists, public health practitioners and regulators, I have posted every reference in the book, with links to all of the “smoking guns,” at DefendingScience.org.

Doubt is their product powerfully demonstrates that conflicted science is not good science. If a scientist is paid by a polluter or a manufacturer of dangerous products, her or his judgment is inevitably clouded by that financial relationship; this is true even for scientists who have great integrity and who try to be honest. As a result, we cannot rely on the judgment of these scientists when considering how to best protect workers from toxic exposures. Activists, unions and scientists need to demand that our government agencies rely on independent studies conducted by independent scientists, not ones bought and paid for by the producers of the hazards.

The mission of health and safety activists, as well as public health and environmental agencies, is to reduce hazards before people get sick or the environment is irreparably damaged. We don’t need certainty to act. It is time to return to first principles: use the best science available, but do not demand certainty where it does not exist.

References:

1. Secret minutes of the Chrome Coalition. [pdf1] [pdf2] [pdf3]

2. Collaborative cohort mortality study of four chromate production facilities, 1958-1998, September 2002 [pdf]

3. June 18 1947 letter from the manager at DuPont’s Chambers plant [pdf]

4. 25 October 1991 email from Robert Weiss MD [pdf]

This article was first published in Hazards Magazine, 103, August 2008

Journalists warned to get out of Afghanistan

0

AUSTRALIAN journalists in Afghanistan have been targeted by terrorists and were warned yesterday by the Federal Government to consider leaving the country.

“Credible reports suggest terrorists may be targeting journalists, including Australians, in Afghanistan,” an updated travel advisory from the Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade says.

“We continue to advise Australians not to travel to Afghanistan. If you are [there], you should consider departing.”

The advisory had previously warned of the continuing strong threat of kidnapping against Westerners, including journalists and those working for non-government and international organisations.

The department yesterday contacted senior management at large Australian media outlets to advise them of the threats and is seeking to contact freelance journalists in Afghanistan. At least four journalists have been killed there in the past year.

Jonathan Pearlman

 

Liquid bomb plot: three guilty of murder conspiracy

0

By Vikram Dodd | Three men were yesterday convicted of conspiring to commit mass murder through suicide bomb explosions, but a jury failed to reach a verdict on the allegation they were part of the biggest terrorist plot since the September 11 attacks.

The Crown had alleged that eight Britons planned to blow up at least seven airliners heading to North America with 1,500 people aboard, in attacks that would have had a global impact.

But yesterday a jury at Woolwich crown court failed to convict any of the defendants of conspiring to murder people by blowing up aircraft. After 56 hours of deliberations the jurors were hung on the central charge.

By majority verdicts, the jury convicted the three men of conspiracy to commit murder. They were the cell’s ringleader, Abdulla Ahmed Ali, the bombmaker Assad Sarwar, and Tanvir Hussain.

They had pleaded guilty to conspiracy to cause explosions.

One defendant, Mohammed Gulzar, whom the Crown alleged flew into Britain from Pakistan to oversee the plot, was acquitted of all charges.

The jury failed to reach verdicts on four other defendants, who had earlier admitted conspiracy to cause a public nuisance by making al-Qaida style suicide videos.

The alleged airline plot was disrupted in August 2006 when the men were arrested. The discovery of the cell and what counter-terrorism officials say was an al-Qaida inspired suicide mission led to weeks of chaos at airports in Britain and the US.

The restrictions on liquids travellers can take in their hand luggage as a result of the allegations remain in force today. The additional security measures brought in since the arrests continue to cause disruption and delays at the UK’s busiest airports.

Last night the government was under pressure from the airlines and Britain’s largest airport owner to review its airport security regime in the light of the verdicts. British Airways and Virgin Atlantic and BAA said the government should consider lifting the ban on carrying large amounts of liquids in hand luggage.

Ali, Sarwar and Hussain will be sentenced on October 3, and the Crown Prosecution Service has until late this month to decide what it will do over the charges on which the jury failed to reach a verdicts.

The eight men – seven from London and one from High Wycombe in Buckinghamshire – had denied the charges.

The Crown said the men planned to smuggle the parts of a liquid bomb on to passenger planes. These liquid components would be disguised in soft drinks bottles to bypass airport security. Once on board, the devices would be assembled.

Tests by government scientists, played to the jury, produced videos of the devices producing an explosion powerful enough to punch a hole in an aircraft fuselage.

The Crown believed it had overwhelming evidence. Six of the men recorded suicide videos making threats against the west, which the prosecution said would have been released after the planes were blown up in mid-air.

The security service MI5 had captured incriminating statements with covert listening and video devices planted in the east London flat which the cell used as a bomb factory.

US and UK intelligence believe the cell was directed by al-Qaida leaders in Pakistan.

Liquid explosives were to have been hidden in Lucozade and other soft drinks bottles. Disposable cameras would have been used to help set off the devices which would also contain regular batteries, hollowed out to contain chemicals.

In their defence, Ali and Sarwar said they planned to record a documentary highlighting injustices against Muslims in Iraq, Afghanistan and Lebanon.

Ali said he considered exploding a small device at the Houses of Parliament or Heathrow’s terminal three as a publicity stunt to draw attention to the programme.

He claimed martyrdom videos recorded by six of the defendants were a hoax to be used as part of the internet documentary to make it more shocking.

In April while opening its case, the Crown played videos of Ali found after his arrest. In it he warned of “body parts … decorating the streets” if Muslims were not left alone, and said he had yearned to take part in violent jihad since he was a teenager. In the martyrdom video he is seen speaking against the backdrop of a black flag with Arabic writing on it. Last night the CPS said: “The prosecution is considering the request for a retrial in respect of the plot to blow up airliners against all seven men upon which the jury could not agree.”

The home secretary, Jacqui Smith, said: “I am indebted to the police and security services who, by successfully disrupting this group, have saved countless lives. I would also thank the Crown Prosecution Service, which has worked tirelessly to ensure that these individuals have been brought to justice. I am sure they will now consider what to do where no verdict was reached.”

The trial judge, David Calvert-Smith, excused the jurors from any further service for the rest of their lives and offered his appreciation. “Depart this court with the full-hearted thanks of the community for your service to it, which is far beyond the duty for most jurors, and my personal thanks,” he told them.

Biden denies report: ‘No one’s talking about pursuing Bush criminally’

2

By David Edwards and Muriel Kane | The possibility that Barack Obama might seek to bring criminal charges against President Bush or members of his administration has been a recurring theme during the presidential campaign, especially since the Obama campaign has attempted to stress themes of bipartisanship. For that reason, Democrats have been quick to downplay any hints of possible criminal prosecutions.

Sen. Joe Biden aroused fresh speculations on Wednesday, when he suggested, “If there has been a basis upon which you can pursue someone for a criminal violation, they will be pursued, not out of vengeance, not out of retribution, out of the need to preserve the notion that no one, no attorney general, no president — no one is above the law.”

Brian Kilmeade of Fox & Friends raised that issue with Biden on Thursday morning, asking about “a report that if you guys are elected … you’re actually going to pursue criminal charges against President Bush’s administration and different people that served there.”

“That’s not true,” Biden immediately replied. “I don’t know where that report’s coming from. What is true is the United States Congress is trying to preserve records on questions that relate to whether or not the law has been violated by anyone. Anybody should be doing that.”

Biden emphasized that “no one’s talking about President Bush. … I’ve never heard anybody mention President Bush in that context.” He noted that “there’s been an awful lot of unsavory stuff that’s gone on … but I have no evidence of any of that. No one’s talking about pursuing President Bush criminally.”

Biden concluded his comments by explaining that possible misdeeds are
“being looked into now, just so it never happens again in any other administration. … The Obama-Biden administration is not going to start off saying, ‘God, let’s go take a look at what this –.’ The American people want to know what we’re going to do, not what happened.”

Biden was also lavish in his praise for Sarah Palin’s speech at the Republican National Convention on Wednesday night, saying, “The governor was impressive. She was strong, she was tough, and she delivered that speech extremely well. … I think it’s going to be a tough debate. I think she’s going to be an incredibly skillful debater. I was impressed.”

“I’m not going to attack her,” Biden emphasized. “You look at that family that she brought out last night. It was a beautiful family. … Every family has difficulty as they’re raising their children. … I think she has a fine family.”

Asked if some of the criticism aimed at Palin has been sexist, Biden said, “Yes, by you guys in the media.” He then went on to insist that it “is sexist to imply a woman is incapable of being a mother and being a great leader.”

Google Satellite Now Watching You From 423 Miles Up

0

| The GeoEye satellite that Google will use to provide mapping imagery at 50-centimeter resolution successfully blasted into space today. So don’t leave your underwear lying all over your lawn.

Andy Plesser of Beet.TV put together a cool video animation (below). Stephen Shankland of CNET has the story:

GeoEye-1 will orbit 423 miles above Earth, but it will be able to gather imagery with details the size of 41 centimeters… Google, though, is permitted to use data only with a resolution of 50cm because of the terms of GeoEye’s license with the U.S. government.

Each day, the satellite will be able to gather a high-resolution “pan-sharpened” format surface area equal to that of about New Mexico, the company said.

“The GeoEye-1 satellite has the highest ground resolution color imagery available in the commercial marketplace and will produce high-quality imagery with a very accurate geolocation,” said Google spokeswoman Kate Hurowitz, adding that most commercial satellite imagery has a resolution of 60cm. “It is our goal to display high-resolution imagery for as much of the world as possible, and GeoEye-1 will help further that goal.”

16 US troops commit suicide in Iraq

1

Sixteen US troops from the 57th Unit of the Airborne Division have committed suicide inside a military base in Iraq, security sources say.

Iraqi security sources have revealed that 21 US troops had committed suicide inside a former Iraqi air force base 27 days ago, Fars News Agency reported on Monday.

According to the sources, the 21 troops were treated in a hospital but only five soldiers have survived and they are in a critical condition. Security officials said they used potent narcotics to kill themselves.

The troops’ motivations for suicide are not known but according to Iraqi sources the servicemen belonged to the 57th Unit of the US Airborne Division that was behind the massacre of several Iraqi families– mostly women and children– in northern Baghdad, said Ali al-Baghdadi an Iraqi security official.

The suicides took place in the soldiers’ dormitory after the dinner time.
“The bodies of the US troops became misshapen such a way that they looked like 5000-year mummies,” said a witness.

According to Iraqi officials’ estimates, some 600 US troops, including senior officers, have committed suicide in Iraq since the invasion of the country in 2003. Half of the suicide attempts have been successful.

Press TV

Tools to Expose Big Oil’s Influence on Our Political System

1

You can use Oil Change USA‘s tools to educate, activate and engage people coming to your website and blog by:

  • launching an email campaign that links our tool to your recipients, telling them exactly how much oil or coal money their representatives or candidates have taken from the oil or coal industries, and how often they vote for Big Oil (see the attached image of our email mash-up campaign with True Majority);
  • posting or embedding our Oily Mystery flash video that integrates all of our tools within a story about Big Oil’s influence in politics;
  • linking to our tools on your blog or website;
  • distributing our oil dollar bills (see the attached McCain dollar bill) at local events; and
  • using our tools as a research tool on your key candidates and members of Congress.

Below is a description of the free tools we have to offer and a bit more detail about how you can use them. Take a look at them and I’ll follow up in a couple of days to see if we can work collaboratively on using these tools this fall. I hope to work with you soon!

  • Follow the Oil Money (www.FollowTheOilMoney.org) is an exciting tool that tracks which companies are pumping their dirty oil money into politics, who is receiving it, and how it correlates to key climate, energy and war votes. For the first time ever, you can see exactly how members of Congress who vote in favor of Big Oil also accept over four times more oil money than those who vote in the public interest.
  • Our Presidential Follow the Oil Money (www.PrezOilMoney.OilChangeUSA.org) tool is an essential resource for anyone interested in the presidential election. Just how far into the pockets of Big Oil has McCain fallen? Is Obama really free of PAC money from Big Oil? Drill down to find these answers and more.
  • The Oil Dollar machine (www.OilChangeUSA.org/oily-dollars) lets you download, save and print oil dollar bills that feature your member of Congress or Presidential candidate. Oil dollars show your member or candidate in the middle with their total dollar amount from Big Oil. Use them for both your online and on-the-ground advocacy!
  • Follow the Coal Money (www.FollowTheCoalMoney.org) is a collaborative project that tracks coal money in Congress. As Congress debates how to address two of coal’s biggest problems — mountaintop removal and global warming — you can find out how polluters are influencing lawmakers with their dirty coal money. Check out our widgets to help spread the word!
  • The Separation of Oil & State Pledge (www.OilChangeUSA.org/sign-the-sos-pledge) is a call to action, a call for change, a call for an end to government run by the interests of Big Oil. Join the movement for an SOS!

How can I use your tools?

Organizations such as True Majority are working with us to create hard-hitting email campaigns that connect their online actions to our FTOM tools. The attached image shows you how we built a custom action page with True Majority that linked their supporters’ zip codes to our database so they could see exactly how much their representatives have taken from the oil industry and how often they vote for Big Oil. We can do an email action mash-up for Congress or the Presidential race–whatever your need is, we’ll make it work for you. And by linking directly to our tools from your website or email alerts, we’ll list you as a participating organization in the Alliance for a Separation of Oil & State.

As you take a look at our tools, be sure to check out our Oily Mystery flash video (www.OilChangeUSA.org) that integrates all of our tools to reveal Big Oil’s influence in politics. You can embed it on your website or blog, link to it from an eblast, send it to your friends, or feature it on your social networks. While you’re at it, check out and join our new Oil Change USA Facebook group [http://www.new.facebook.com/group.php?gid=20616734308].

If you have any questions about how to use our tools, feel free to email me, Trina, or you can call us at 202.518.9029. I’ll touch base with you in the next week to see how you can utilize our tools to support your online and offline campaigns!

The Right Dictates MSNBC’s Programming Decisions

2

By Glenn Greenwald – Salon | MSNBC’s announcement that it is replacing Keith Olbermann and Chris Matthews with David Gregory as anchors for its main political events (the upcoming presidential debates and election) vividly illustrates several long-obvious facts. First, nothing changes the behavior of our media corporations more easily than vocal demands and complaints from the Right, which petrify media executives and cause them to snap into line. From today’s New York Times article identifying some of the causes for MSNBC’s decision:

The change — which comes in the home stretch of the long election cycle — is a direct result of tensions associated with the channel’s perceived shift to the political left. . . . When the vice presidential nominee Sarah Palin lamented media bias during her speech, attendees of the Republican convention loudly chanted “NBC” . . . . Mr. Olbermann, a 49-year-old former sportscaster, has become the face of the more aggressive MSNBC, and the lightning rod for much of the criticism. . . . The McCain campaign has filed letters of complaint to the news division about its coverage and openly tied MSNBC to it. . . . Al Hunt, the executive Washington bureau chief of Bloomberg News, said that the entire news division was being singled out by Republicans because of the work of partisans like Mr. Olbermann.

This was preceded by an episode in May in which White House Counselor Ed Gillespie “sent a scathing letter to NBC News, accusing the news network of ‘deceptively’ editing an interview with President Bush on the issue of appeasement and Iran.” Gillespie warned NBC as follows:

I’m sure you don’t want people to conclude that there is really no distinction between the “news” as reported on NBC and the “opinion” as reported on MSNBC, despite the increasing blurring of those lines. I welcome your response to this letter, and hope it is one that reassures your broadcast network’s viewers that blatantly partisan talk show hosts like Christopher Matthews and Keith Olbermann at MSNBC don’t hold editorial sway over the NBC network news division.

Yesterday, Gillespie got exactly the “response” that he demanded from a super-compliant MSBNC. There is no question whatsoever that the Bush administration, the McCain campaign, and the Right generally have recently made it a top priority to force MSNBC to remove Olbermann (and Chris Matthews) from playing a prominent role in its election coverage, and MSNBC has now complied with the Right’s demands. Does it need to be explained why it is disturbing in the extreme that the White House and the McCain campaign can so transparently dictate MSNBC’s programming choices?

Second, in response to media criticism that the press is insufficiently substantive and adversarial to political power, the claim is frequently made that media outlets are simply driven by the profit motive, and that their programming choices are nothing more than a by-product of ratings. But in MSNBC’s case, that is plainly untrue. Back in 2003, they actually canceled their highest-rated program, Phil Donahue’s show, for purely ideological reasons — because, at a time when the establishment “liberal media” were systematically amplifying the Government’s pro-war views and excluding anti-war views, that short-lived MSNBC show was one of the only venues in America where one could hear anti-war viewpoints, and NBC’s fear of angering the Government and the Right clearly caused them, first, to impose extreme and unusual restrictions on the show’s content, and then to cancel it altogether.

And now here is MSNBC publicly removing (and therefore diminishing) the person who is, by far, its most valuable asset: Keith Olbermann. The NYT article noted:

As Mr. Olbermann raised his voice, his ratings rose as well, and he now reaches more than one million viewers a night, a higher television rating than any other show in the troubled 12-year history of the network. As a result, his identity largely defines MSNBC. “They have banked the entirety of the network on Keith Olbermann,” one employee said. . . . At an anniversary party for Mr. Olbermann in April, [NBC CEO Jeff] Zucker called “Countdown” “one of the signature brands of the entire company.”

The irrefutable fact is that nothing attracts ratings for MSNBC — and nothing has attracted ratings in the entire history of that channel — the way that Olbermann does. Yet here is MSNBC removing him from the anchor position, reducing his role in its political coverage, and clearly diminishing his stature (and implicitly criticizing his coverage). That is extraordinary for a media company to publicly embarrass, diminish and tarnish its own principal asset. It is plainly doing so for ideological, not ratings-based, reasons: namely, it fears doing anything to anger the White House, the McCain campaign and the Right in this country.

Third, this episode demonstrates what Eric Alterman documented several years ago: that the greatest and most transparent myth in American politics is that the U.S. has a “liberal media.” That is a myth that is maintained, first and foremost, by defining anyone who isn’t Rush Limbaugh as a “liberal.” Hence, people such as the wife of Bush official Dan Senor (Campbell Brown) is a “liberal,” as is Alan Greenspan’s wife (Andrea Mitchell), along with establishment–worshipers such as Rush-Limbaugh-admirer Brian Williams, right-wing-talking-points-spouting Charlie Gibson, and anyone who writes for the war-enabling New York Times and Washington Post.

Perhaps nothing demonstrates this absurd dynamic more than the painfully inane perception that Chris Matthews — for years a prime target of liberal media critics — is some sort of “liberal.” That’s the same “liberal” Chris Matthews who, over the years, has said things like this:

I like [George Bush]. Everybody sort of likes the president, except for the real whack-jobs, maybe on the left . . . We’re proud of our president. Americans love having a guy as president, a guy who has a little swagger, who’s physical, who’s not a complicated guy like Clinton or even like Dukakis or Mondale, all those guys, McGovern. They want a guy who’s president. Women like a guy who’s president. Check it out. The women like this war. I think we like having a hero as our president. . . . Why don’t the damn Democrats give the president his day? He won today. He did well today. . . . Thank you very much. James Jeffrey, assistant to Condoleezza Rice. We’re huge fans [of Rice] — bring her back with you next time.

Or see the “liberal” Matthews fawning over Fred Thompson’s attractive manliness and Rudy Giuliani’s powerful authority and the charming masculinity of Republicans versus the “geekier, nerdier” Democrats. That is who is deemed to be a “liberal” in our political culture because the reality, as Atrios frequently puts it, is that the only hard and fast rule is: “Your liberal media: no liberals allowed.”

This has been going on for years. As I wrote in response to the uproar generated at places like The New Republic over the fact that MSNBC has now given an actual liberal, Rachel Maddow, her own show and is thereby jeopardizing non-partisan, objective, high-minded journalism:

Over the past seven years, the following people have hosted prime-time cable news shows: Joe Scarborough (MSNBC), Michael Savage (MSNBC), Glenn Beck (CNN), Tucker Carlson (MSNBC), Nancy Grace (CNN), Bill O’Reilly (Fox) and Sean Hannity (Fox). None of that seemed to bother the likes of [TNR’s Sacha] Zimmerman. None of that was depicted as the downfall of objective journalism or the destruction of civil, elevated, high-minded discourse.

Several of those hosts had and continue to have atrocious ratings (Carlson, Beck, Scarborough), yet were kept for years.

Beyond that, network and cable shows routinely convene panels filled with right-wing views and devoid of anything remotely approaching liberalism, and that creates no controversy. Just this past weekend, I subjected myself while traveling to ABC’s This Week with George Stephanopoulos, and the panel discussing Sarah Palin was composed of right-wing ideologue George Will, establishment-spokesperson Cokie Roberts, and reporter Sam Donaldson. That is typical for television panels: right-wing partisans such as Will are “balanced” not by any liberals but by allegedly “neutral journalists” such as Roberts or Donaldson. That’s because the Right has created a reality where anyone who isn’t explicitly Rush Limbaugh is deemed to be a “liberal” (hence, Donaldson likely qualifies) and no actual liberal ever needs to be included. That’s how we have a “liberal media” where the principal rule is that actual liberals are systematically excluded, and it’s why the ascent of Olbermann (who is, in fact, far more of a Bush critic than a doctrinaire liberal) has created such turmoil — because it violates that central rule prohibiting liberals from appearing in the Liberal Media.

Finally, and perhaps most notably of all, Olbermann’s role as anchor somehow destroys the journalistic brand of both MSNBC and NBC, while Fox News continues to be deemed a legitimate news outlet by our political and media establishment. Fox does this despite (more accurately: due to) its employing Brit Hume as its main anchor — someone who is every bit as partisan and ideological as Keith Olbermannn is (at least), who regularly spews the nastiest and most vicious right-wing talking points, yet because he’s not a liberal, is deemed to be a legitimate news anchor.

The Washington Post’s Howie Kurtz — while repeatedly lamenting the ascent of Olbermann (and Maddow) as a threat to objective journalism — proclaims that “Hume is no partisan brawler” while Charlie Gibson gushes: “He has a wonderful style which makes you want to hear what Brit has to say, in an age when so many people are in your face.” The Associated Press recently declared that Fox News has never gone as far as MSNBC in producing partisan news coverage, asserting that “Olbermann’s popularity and evolving image as an idealogue (sic) has led NBC News to stretch traditional notions of journalistic objectivity” and that “Fox has never done that, perhaps mindful of the immediate controversy that would result.” Even the NYT article this morning echoed this view of Fox, noting:

While some critics argued that [Olbermann’s] assignment was akin to having the Fox News commentator Bill O’Reilly anchor on election night — something that has never happened — MSNBC insisted that Mr. Olbermann knew the difference between news and commentary.

The proper analogy to Olbermann as anchor is not O’Reilly as anchor, but Brit Hume as anchor. Hume explicitly acknowledges his political conservatism. His entire show relentlessly promotes a right-wing narrative. Every night, he convenes panels composed of right-wing partisans such as Bill Kristol, Charles Krauthammer, Fred Barnes, and Mort Kondracke, and — at most — sometimes “balances” that with one of those allegedly neutral journalists such as Mara Liasson. Everything Brit Hume touches is designed to promote a right-wing perspective, yet he continues to be held out as some sort of legitimate news anchor — he actually hosted a Democratic Party presidential debate in 2004 — while MSNBC’s promotion of Keith Olbermann is some unique threat to the profession of journalism.

The single dumbest claim in our political culture is that the huge corporations which own our establishment media outlets promote a “liberal” ideology. Why would General Electric ever use NBC and its other media assets to promote political liberalism? They lavishly benefit from the whole panoply of right-wing policies — from endlessly expanding defense spending to deregulation. Their multiple businesses depend upon maintaining good relations with the right-wing ideologues who run our Government. Even ignoring all of the above-documented empirical facts, the very idea that a corporation like GE — or Viacom (CBS), Disney (ABC) and Time Warner (CNN) — would actively promote a left-wing agenda in its news divisions and undermine the very Government power centers on which they rely has been the most self-evidently moronic premise one can imagine. As Viacom CEO Sumner Redstone confessed in 2004:

Senator Kerry is a good man. I’ve known him for many years. But it happens that I vote for Viacom. Viacom is my life, and I do believe that a Republican Administration is better for media companies than a Democratic one.

And yet the myth of the large-corporation-owned “Liberal Media” persists, and even intensifies.

This decision by MSNBC is as alarming as it is illustrative. They just implicitly chided and overtly demoted their most popular and valuable news personality because the White House, the McCain campaign and the Right demanded that they do so. It’s fine for Brit Hume to host a “news program” and for hard-core right-wing ideologues to dominate cable news. The fact that Dick Cheney (understandably) viewed Tim Russert’s Meet the Press as the ideal forum to allow the White House to “control the message” bothered nobody outside of a few online critics, and didn’t remotely impede the perception of Russert as the Beacon of Tough and Objective Journalism. But MSNBC’s ratings-based decision to feature Keith Olbermann is a grave threat to modern journalism and must be stopped. So decrees the White House and the McCain campaign, and so the GE-owned MSNBC complies.

UPDATE: There’s one other point really worth making here. Throughout the primary season, Clinton supporters were furious at what they endlessly complained was MSBNC’s biased coverage in favor of Obama and, more so, its intensely hostile coverage of Hillary Clinton. Whatever one’s views on the primary war were, there is no question that Olbermann and Matthews in particular were extremely hostile to Clinton and supportive of Obama. But MSNBC executives ignored those complaints, even derided and mocked them, with MSNBC executive Phil belittling angry Clinton supporters in The New Yorker as nothing more than abused, disillusioned girlfriends with nowhere else to go:

[J]ust as Obama must work to win Clinton supporters for the fall campaign, Phil Griffin has to repair a fractured audience base, a portion of which saw sexism in his network’s Clinton coverage and vowed to boycott MSNBC. Griffin knows that some of that anger is aimed at his star anchor. “It was, like, you meet a guy and you fall in love with him, and he’s funny and he’s clever and he’s witty, and he’s all these great things,” Griffin said of the relationship between Olbermann and the Clinton supporters among his viewers. “And then you commit yourself to him, and he turns out to be a jerk and difficult and brutal. And that is how the Hillary viewers see him. It’s true. But I do think they’re going to come back. There’s nowhere else to go.”

Again, regardless of what one thought of the primary wars or even MSNBC’s coverage of the Clinton/Obama race, the contrast between (a) MSNBC’s dismissive reaction to complaints of bias from Clinton supporters and (b) its obedience to similar complaints from the Right is stark and revealing. The overriding attribute of the Liberal Media is a deep and abiding fear of angering the Right.

Relatedly, I’ll be on Rachel Maddow’s radio show tonight (exact time posted once I know it) to discuss the Right’s complaints about media bias in the context of the presidential campaign. Local listings and live audio feed are here. Rachel’s MSNBC show debuts tonight.

Glenn Greenwald was previously a constitutional law and civil rights litigator in New York. He is the author of the New York Times Bestselling book “How Would a Patriot Act?,” a critique of the Bush administration’s use of executive power, released in May 2006. His second book, “A Tragic Legacy”, examines the Bush legacy.

Copyright ©2008 Salon Media Group, Inc.

US government takes over mortgage giants to stave off financial meltdown

0

By Bill Van Auken | In the biggest government intervention in the American economy since the Great Depression of the 1930s, the US Treasury Department announced Sunday that it is effectively nationalizing the two mortgage giants Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac.

Timed to precede the opening of the stock markets in Asia, the announcement that the two firms are being placed in “conservatorship” left no doubt about the depth of the economic crisis confronting American and world capitalism.

“Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac are so large and so interwoven in our financial system that a failure of either of them would cause great turmoil in our financial markets here at home and around the globe,” said Treasury Secretary Henry Paulson Jr., at a Washington press conference. “A failure would be harmful to economic growth and job creation. That is why we have taken these actions today.”

Indeed, the bankruptcy of these two companies points to the bankruptcy of American capitalism. Between them they are responsible for funding more than two thirds of all home mortgages in the US.

While politicians from both parties as well as most media reports have tried to portray the plan as assistance to beleaguered homeowners, it is clear that the intervention will do nothing to ameliorate the crisis confronting millions of average working people.

As the New York Times acknowledged Sunday, “The plan to bail out the firms will probably do little to stop home prices from falling further. And foreclosures are almost certain to rise.

“The bailout will give the mortgage industry a stability that we haven’t had in a couple of years,” Rich Cosner, president of Prudential California Realty told the Associated Press. “But frankly no, it won’t help (struggling borrowers) to refinance.”

Its real aim is to bail out the banks which bought Fannie’s and Freddie’s unsecured debts as investments with the understanding that the US treasury ultimately stood behind these so-called “government-secured enterprises.”

The immediate cost of the bailout will be borne by taxpayers as well as shareholders, who will see their investments wiped out. Part of the plan announced Sunday authorizes the government to buy up existing assets at a nominal price of less than a $1 a share. A significant portion of these investments are held by mutual funds handling 401K plans that constitute the sole retirement savings for large sections of the American workforce.

Moreover, the terms of the takeover is expected to precipitate at least some new bank failures. The FDIC (Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation) issued a statement Sunday affirming that “while many institutions hold common or preferred shares of these two government-sponsored enterprises, a limited number of smaller institutions have holdings that are significant compared to their capital.” How “limited” this number was, the agency did not say.

The plan announced by Paulson calls for the investment of up to $200 billion in government funds to prop up the two mortgage giants.

The real cost, however, could prove significantly higher. William Poole, the former president of the Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, said Sunday that the government could be compelled to spend as much as $300 billion to rescue the two companies.

The action marks the third time since the beginning of the year that the US government has been force to bail out a major financial institution in order to stave off a threat of imminent collapse of the US and global banking system.

Last March, the injection of $29 billion from the US Federal Reserve was used to subsidize the takeover of Bear Stearns by JPMorgan Chase. And in July, the government was granted authority to inject cash into the Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, while the two government-backed private companies were allowed to borrow money directly from the Fed.

Together, the two companies had recorded $14.9 billion in net losses over the past four quarters as a result of rising foreclosures and plummeting home prices.

In selling the plan last July to the Senate Bank Committee, Paulson argued, “If you have a bazooka in your pocket and people know it, you probably won’t have to use it.” The idea was that by creating this safety net, private investors would be reassured and would lend money to the two companies, which together own or back more than $5 trillion in home mortgage debt.

As it turned out, the “bazooka” had the opposite effect, convincing investors that Fannie and Freddie were headed for bankruptcy and federal takeover. As a result, their share prices continued to plummet, having lost 80 percent of their value this year.

In after-hours trading Friday, after rumors of an imminent takeover began circulating on Wall Street, Fannie Mae stocks fell by another 21.9 per cent and Freddie Mac’s by 20.9 per cent.

One of the triggering factors in the government intervention was apparently the dumping of Fannie-Freddie holdings by Asian and other foreign investors. Bank of China, the country’s third-largest bank, announced at the end of August that it had shed some $3.14 billion in debt holdings from the two companies over the previous two months. Other central banks were apparently following suit.

Russia’s central bank, meanwhile, reportedly dumped some $40 billion in Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and Federal Home Loan Bank securities over the course of this year and further cuts were expected.

The flight from investment in these government-backed companies clearly raises the specter that a similar pull-out could be threatened from US government securities. At present, the US economy is dependent upon foreign investors, principally in Asia, purchasing up to $20 billion in US agency debt monthly.

Implicitly threatening just such a pullout, China’s leading economist, Yu Yongding, a former senior advisor to the central bank, commented last month: “If the US government allows Fannie and Freddie to fail and international investors are not compensated adequately, the consequences will be catastrophic. If it is not the end of the world, it is the end of the current international financial system.”

Significantly the bond rating agency, Standard & Poors, felt compelled to issue a statement Sunday affirming that the takeovers–adding $5 trillion in debt to Washington’s balance sheets–would not result in the downgrading of the US government’s sovereign credit rating.

The depth of the crisis and the scope of the government intervention was underscored by the fact that Paulson briefed not only President Bush before announcing the plan, but also Democratic and Republican candidates Barack Obama and John McCain, as well as senior congressional leaders.

Both candidates voiced their backing for the intervention, while criticizing the government’s past handling of the two mortgage companies.

“These entities are so big and they are so tied into the housing market that it is probably true that we have to take steps to make sure they don’t just collapse,” Obama told an audience in Terre Haute, Indiana.

“I think that we’ve got to keep people in their homes,” McCain declared in an interview aired Sunday on the CBS news program “Face the Nation.” He continued: “There’s got to be restructuring, there’s got to be reorganization, and there’s got to be some confidence that we’ve stopped this downward spiral.”

Obama proclaimed that the takeover should not be used to “protect investors and speculators who relied on the government to reap massive profits,” while McCain denounced “executives were making hundreds of–some billion dollars a year while things were going downhill.” The Republican candidate acknowledged, “This is the kind of cronyism, corruption, that’s made people so justifiably angry.”

All of this is empty demagogy. The speculation, cronyism and corruption that pervaded the operations of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac are emblematic of the parasitism and criminality of the America’s ruling financial elite as a whole.

Moreover, this bipartisan unity in support of the bailout is the clearest expression of the unconditional subordination of both major political parties to the fundamental interests of America’s financial oligarchy.

One of the deciding factors in the government’s intervention Sunday was an audit of the two companies performed by advisers hired from Morgan Stanley. While initial reports are sketchy, it appears that the auditors found that the two firms were employing Enron-style accounting methods to hide the real depth of their crisis, failing to write down the value of securities backed by subprime loans.

As a result, the amount of capital that the companies had to protect themselves from losses–extremely limited by any standards–was in actuality far less than had been presented. Their ability to raise new capital had clearly dried up with the dizzying drop in share prices in recent months.

“Freddie Mac had made accounting decisions that pushed losses into the future and postponed a capital shortfall until the fourth quarter of this year, which would not need to be disclosed until early 2009,” the New York Times reported. “Fannie Mae has used similar methods, but to a lesser degree, according to other people who have been briefed.”

Both of the mortgage giants had been involved in previous accounting scandals. Freddie Mac underwent a shakeup in 2003 after it was revealed that earnings figures had been falsified to the tune of $5 billion, while at Fannie Mae, the company was accused of “accounting errors” totaling $6.3 billion. Both Freddie and Fannie were forced to pay fines and replace their chief executives, but no criminal investigations were initiated and no substantive change was initiated in the companies’ operations.

As the New York Times described these operations, the two firms used the implicit government commitment to bail them out “to borrow money at below-market rates and lend money at above-market returns,” turning them into “what amounted to gigantic hedge funds operating with only a sliver of capital to protect them from unexpected surprises.”

Fannie Mae was set up by the federal government in 1938 as part of the New Deal to inject capital into a mortgage market mired in the Great Depression. It was a public agency with the explicit mission of providing government credit so that average families could buy homes.

In 1968, it was turned into a private but government-sponsored corporation with the aim of getting mortgage debt off of the government’s books under conditions in which the Vietnam War was creating growing fiscal pressures. Freddie Mac was created in 1970 as a similar “government sponsored enterprise.” By the 1990s, the two agencies became central to the speculative housing bubble that underlay the profit boom on Wall Street that preceded the current crisis of the world financial system.

The government’s choice of new chief executives to head the two firms it has taken over makes clear whose interests it intends to defend. Placed at the helm of Fannie Mae was Herbert Allison, a former vice-chairman at Merrill Lynch, and to head Freddie Mac, it tapped David Moffett, a former CEO at US Bancorp and current senor advisor to the Carlyle Group.

US military trained Georgian commandos

1

The US military provided combat training to 80 Georgian special forces commandos only months prior to Georgia’s army assault in South Ossetia in August.

The revelation, based on recruitment documents and interviews with US military trainers obtained by the Financial Times, could add fuel to accusations by Vlad­imir Putin, Russian prime minister, last month that the US had “orchestrated” the war in the Georgian enclave.

The training was provided by senior US soldiers and two military contractors. There is no evidence that the contractors or the Pentagon, which hired them, knew that the commandos they were training were likely be used in the assault on South Ossetia.

A US army spokesman said the goal of the programme was to train the commandos for duty in Afghanistan as part of Nato-led International Security Assist­ance Force. The programme, however, highlights the often unintended consequences of US “train and equip” programmes in foreign countries.

The contractors — MPRI and American Systems, both based in Virginia — recruited a 15-man team of former special forces soldiers to train the Georgians at the Vashlijvari special forces base on the outskirts of Tbilisi, part of a programme run by the US defence department.

MPRI was hired by the Pentagon in 1995 to train the Croatian military prior to their invasion of the ethnically-Serbian Krajina region, which led to the displacement of 200,000 refugees and was one of the worst incidents of ethnic cleansing in the Balkan wars. MPRI denies any wrongdoing.

US training of the Georgian army is a big flashpoint between Washington and Moscow. Mr Putin said on CNN on August 29: “It is not just that the American side could not restrain the Georgian leadership from this criminal act [of intervening in South Ossetia]. The American side in effect armed and trained the Georgian army.”

The first phase of the special forces training was held between January and April this year, concentrating on “basic special forces skills” said an American Systems employee interviewed by phone from the US army’s Fort Bragg.

The US military official familiar with the programme said the Pentagon hired the military contracting firms to help supplement its own trainers because of a lack of manpower.

The second 70-day phase was set to begin on August 11, a few days after war broke out in South Ossetia. The trainers arrived on August 3, four days before the conflict flared on August 7. “They would have only seen the inside of a hotel room,” quipped one former contractor. Neither MPRI nor American Systems would speak at length to the FT about the programme.

American Systems di­rected questions to the US army’s Security Assistance Training Management Organisation (Satmo) at Fort Bragg, part of the US Army’s Special Warfare Center School. Satmo sends trainers, mainly special forces but also contractors, to countries such as Yemen, Colombia and the Philippines. Satmo trainers generally work with forces involved in counter-insurgencies, counter-terrorism or civil wars. A Satmo spokesman declined to comment.

One US military official familiar with the programme said it emerged from a Georgian offer to the US in December 2006 to send commandos to Afghanistan to work alongside American special operations forces.

According to this person, the US told Georgia that the offer should be made through Nato, which welcomed the offer but informed Georgia that its forces would need additional training to meet the military alliance’s standards.

While the programme is not classified, there is a lack of transparency surrounding it, though US military officials said the lack of publicity was not part of an effort to keep the programme secret. Other US military training programmes in Georgia have their own websites and photo galleries.

A US European Command spokesman confirmed the existence of the programme only after reviewing an e-mail sent by MPRI recruiters that was obtained by the FT. According to the e-mail, which did not mention Nato operations, former US special operations forces would receive $2,000 ($1,150, €1,400) a week plus costs as trainers. “We can confirm the pro­gramme exists, but due to its nature and training ob­jectives we do not discuss specifics to ensure the integrity of the programme and force protection of the trainers and participants,” he said.

James Appathurai, Nato’s spokesman in Brussels, said: “Georgia has made an offer to provide forces to Isaf in the last two years. But until now these Georgian forces have not joined the Isaf mission.” An official at a senior Nato member state said it was understood that the forces had been trained by the US, but that the forces had not passed a certification process under which all potential members of the Isaf mission are vetted.

Additional reporting James Blitz in London

Conflict in the Caucasus

The conflict between Russia and Georgia began on the night of August 7, when Georgian forces, including commando units, tanks and artillery, assaulted the South Ossetian capital of Tskhinvali.

Russia says that at least 133 civilians died in the attack, as well as 59 of its own peacekeepers, according to figures released this week.

In response Russia launched a mass invasion and aerial bombardment of Georgia, in which 215 Georgians have died, including 146 soldiers and 69 civilians.

VIDEO: Jon Stewart : On Sarah Palin Hypocrisy

2

Wednesday night on “The Daily Show,” Jon Stewart hit Karl Rove and Bill O’Reilly with damning evidence of their hypocrisy regarding Vice Presidential nominee Sarah Palin.

While Rove recently praised Palin’s experience as the mayor of Wasilla, Alaska, Stewart showed video of Rove trashing Virginia Governor – and former Richmond Mayor – Tim Kaine’s executive experience, listing all the cities that are bigger than Richmond and calling such a pick “political.”

Then, after recent video of O’Reilly describing Bristol Palin’s pregnancy as a family issue, Stewart showed a clip of the Fox News host blaming Jamie Lynn Spears’ parents for her teenage pregnancy.

Finally, after showing video of Dick Morris complaining about the rampant sexism in the media coverage of Sarah Palin, Stewart unveiled a clip of Morris saying that Hillary hides behind the sexism defense, and that anytime “the big boys” pick on Hillary, “she retreats behind the apron strings.”

“In Dick Morris’ defense,” Stewart said, “he is a lying sack of sh*t.”

Global Realignment

0

How Bush Inspired a New World Order

By Ramzy Baroud | The series of unfortunate and costly decisions made during the two terms of the Bush administration, combined with economic decline at home, might devastate the US’s world standing much sooner than most analysts predict. What was difficult to foresee was that the weakening of US global dominance, spurred by erratic and unwise foreign policy under Bush, would re-ignite the Cold War, to a degree, over a largely distant and seemingly ethnically-based conflict — that of Georgia and Russia. Who could have predicted a possible association between Baghdad, Kabul and Tbilisi?

But to date the decline of US global power to the advent of the Bush administration, or even the horrific events of 11 September 2001, is not exactly accurate. The rapid collapse of the Soviet Union and the unravelling of the Warsaw Pact — especially as former members of that pact hurried to joined NATO in later years — empowered a new breed of US elite who boasted of the economic viability and moral supremacy of US-styled “Capitalism and Democracy”. But a unipolar world presented the US leadership with an immense, if not an insurmountable task.

While 9/11 and a gung-ho president presented a convenient opportunity to reassert US global dominance, action was taken the moment the Soviet Union collapsed. Such efforts, however, were not accentuated until 1997, with the establishment of the Project for the New American Century (PNAC), a think tank from which many neo-conservative policy advisors operated. Their aim was “to promote American global leadership… [which] is both good for America and good for the world.” William Kristol and Robert Kagan, PNAC founders, were inspired by the Reaganite policy of “strength and moral clarity”. But that supposedly inspiring model was justified on the basis of the Cold War, which no longer existed. Fashioning an enemy was a time-sensitive and essential task to justify the repositioning of US power to reclaim domains that were left vacant with the disappearance of the bipolar international system, which existed since World War II.

Even the PNAC’s more recent report, Rebuilding America’s Defences: Strategies, Forces, and Resources For a New Century, published in 2000, appeared of little relevance and urgency. It expressed the “belief that America should seek to preserve and extend its position of global leadership by maintaining the pre-eminence of US military forces”. The report would have been another neglected document were it not for the terrorist attacks of 9/11, which turned it into a doctrine defining US foreign policies for nearly a decade.

The wars and occupation of Afghanistan and Iraq were aimed at strengthening the US hand in protecting its interests and managing its international affairs. Afghanistan’s position was strategic in warding off the growth of the rising powers of Asia — aside from its military and strategic value, it was hoped to become a major energy supply route — while Iraq was to provide a permanent US military presence to guard its oil interests in the whole region and to ensure Israeli supremacy over its weaker, but rebellious Arab foes.

The plan worked well for a few weeks following the declaration of “Mission Accomplished” in Iraq. Since then, the US has learned that managing world affairs with a decidedly military approach is a recipe for disaster. Faced with foreign occupation, Iraqis fought back, creating a nightmare scenario and promising US defeat in their country. The US’s original plan to exploit the country’s fractious ethnic and religious groupings also backfired, as shifting alliances made it impossible for the US to single out a permanent enemy or a long-term ally. In Afghanistan, the picture is even more bleak as the country’s unforgivable geography, the corruption of US local allies, resurgence of the Taliban, and the US-led coalition’s brutal response to the Taliban’s emboldened ascension, has rendered Afghanistan a lost cause by any reasonable military standard.

But the trigger-happy mentality that has governed US foreign policy during the Bush years is no longer dominant and has been since challenged by a more sensible, dialogue-based foreign policy approach, as championed, reluctantly, by Democratic presidential nominee Barack Obama. The change of heart is not entirely moralistic, however, but largely pragmatic. According to a survey conducted jointly by Foreign Policy magazine and the Centre for a New American Security, published 19 February 2008, 88 per cent of present and former US military officers believe that the demands of the Iraq war alone have “stretched the US military dangerously thin”. Although not “broken”, 80 per cent believe it is “unreasonable to expect the US military to wage another major war successfully at present”, as reported by CNN. Such estimation is not too different from similar assessments provided by top US military commanders, most of who found their way to early retirement for similar reasons.

The new military limitations faced by the US in the Middle East have also resulted in the weakening of US political sway and standing. More, its regional allies have also suffered one blow after another: Israel in Lebanon, Georgia in South Ossetia, US allies in Venezuela and other South American countries, etc. Indeed, it is a matter of time before a challenger to US global hegemony arises and tests US resolve under new circumstances. While growing US involvement in Eurasia and its missile defence shield was considered part and parcel of the neo-con plan for “rebuilding America’s defences”, it was considered by Russia a threat to its national security.

The Georgian invasion of South Ossetia represented a golden opportunity for Moscow to send an unmistakable message to Washington. By crushing the US-Israeli trained Georgian army, Russia declared itself a contender to unchallenged US global dominance, which had lasted for nearly two decades. Countries such as Iran and Syria are quickly warming up to the new Russia, as the latter seeks to rebuild its own alliances and defences.

The nature and the direction of the US-Russian confrontation are yet to be determined with any reasonable preciseness. Internal and external factors for Russia itself (corruption, the oligarchs, and its ability to court a stable alliance) will all prove consequential in the current confrontation. What is clear, however, is that the upcoming US president will find himself face-to-face with a drastically altered world order, one that is defined by military pandemonium, national and global economic decline, and the rise of new powers, all vying to fill a widening, chaotic power vacuum, provided courtesy of the Bush administration.

The deconstruction of a Bush speech-writer

5

By Dr. Steve Best, Ph.D. | In 2002, arch-conservative Matthew Scully wrote a book called, Dominion: The Power of Man, The Suffering of Animals, and The Call to Mercy, that was universally and uncritically acclaimed by the animal advocacy movement. Because this movement is overwhelmingly single-issue in its focus, and in most cases doesn’t care about a person’s views or politics except how they relate to animals, no one had a problem with the fact that Scully was a senior speechwriter for President George W. Bush. He wrote some of the key fear-peddling diatribes that got Bush elected and he was recently re-enlisted to help Bush sell the Iraq war “surge” to the American people.

As someone who is concerned about a person’s overall political standpoint, and who would not embrace a Leftist who is a speciesist anymore than an animal rights person or vegan who is a racist, I had some serious problems with Scully and the fawning adulation of his book by virtually the entire animal advocacy movement. Many people, such as Karen Dawn (the founder of DawnWatch.com), saw it as a key sign of progress that the conservatives were embracing the animal cause (in welfarist form), and thus concluded that animal advocacy could be introduced to an entire new audience of people–some very rich, powerful, and influential ones at that.

No one mentioned that Scully had blood all over his hands by sycophantically serving Bush-Cheney (providing the “eloquence” they lacked) and the neo-con invasion and occupation of Iraq — all at the cost of more than 100,000 innocent Iraqi lives, over 4,000 US troop deaths, countless US troop casualties and destroyed lives, and over three trillion dollars.[i] And all based on lies and blatant deceit by Bush and his henchmen, all of whom — were there any justice in this country or backbone in the Democrats — would have been impeached and jailed for crimes of the highest order.

Nor could I understand the praise over Scully’s book. Really, Dominion is two books: the first sections are indeed well-crafted and hard-hitting critiques of factory farming and hunting. But the bulk of the book was just nauseating, amateurish, antiquated medieval/early modern natural law theory which tried to justify the critique of animal cruelty in cosmic laws, rational imperatives–as if the issue of animal welfare or rights were not controversial and could not be seen in endless ways by diverse groups of people. It had a very uncomfortable authoritarian tone to it: here are the moral laws of the universe; here is moral truth. And he urged the same naïve Socratic belief that contaminates the thinking of the pacifists who dominate the animal advocacy movement — the idea that if we can only reason with people, show them this “Truth,” they will no longer abuse animals. As if there were no violence and cruelty in the human heart, no desire to dominate the weak, no lust for profit off slavery of any group.

And consider the subtitle: notice that he is calling for MERCY (to the slaves) not LIBERATION (of the slaves). And we needed a burdensome arsenal of arcane metaphysics, philosophical, and legal theory to reach this conclusion? A few rights/abolitionist voices tried to expose the severe limitations of this overwrought speciesist and welfarist tome, but they were drowned out by the roar of the multitudes celebrating the movement’s “revolutionary” breakthrough into new social sectors — so “new,” in fact, that there were now more white, elite, and “privileged” people in the animal advocacy/vegan movements than before.

Not surprisingly, one of Scully’s strongest supporters is Wayne Pacelle, chief executive of the Humane Society of the United States (HSUS), who told me himself in 2002 that he was “very close friends” with Scully and thought his book was a “groundbreaking” contribution to animal (welfare) ethics (whereas I read it as a dogmatic rehash of stale concepts and moldy arguments, riddled with logical fallacies, and polished up in the most dogmatic and inept way to simultaneously protest cruelty and defend speciesism). And as Pacelle has long sought to model the Humane Society of the United States (HSUS) after the DC-powerhouse National Rifle Association (NRA), perhaps Scully had some connections among the power elite Pacelle could wine and dine. Certainly he saw in Scully the Yellow Brick Road to Power and Money.

To whatever degree he cares about animals, Scully’s real constituency are rich, white, Republicans and — having written speeches for Bush in the aftermath of 9/11 — he had already become a shining star in the firmament of right-wing ideologues and corporate fat cats, each of whom need the best PR and BS teams they could assemble. And thanks to the fawning adulation of the likes of Karen Dawn, Scully overnight became the new darling of the animal movement. When not making the rounds of Congress or aerial warfare conventions, Scully continued to write speeches for Bush and anyone on the Right with the right fee. And, as it turned out, as so many of us were bracing ourselves for the nauseating Republican National Convention in early September 08, not wanting to hear another disingenuous word from “straight-talking” McCain but curious to hear about unknown Alaskan female governor whom he shrewdly chose to win Hillary’s armies of disaffected, we learned — at this crisis moment and critical juncture for the Far Right — that Matthew Scully stepped in to write the kind of speech the McCain team thought necessary to disguise their malignant and predatory policies in terms of populism and family values. Right-wing soldier that he is, Scully stayed up the entire night before the speech and gave the magic words to which Sara Palin only had to give life in order to sell this sordid spectacle and sham to the US public and bring us another 4 more years of Bush—or probably much, much worse.

The moment was tense. The stakes were high. An unknown — a woman! — was walking onto the stage to accept her party’s nomination for Vice President. But could she prove herself at the podium? Thanks to Scully’s adroit words and Palin’s androgynous mix of feminine soft talk and macho militarism, the chronically anxious Right erupted into a roar of elation as they felt they had, with the addition of Palin, finally found the ticket they wanted — one entirely devoted to militarism and privatization, increasing their already obscene levels of wealth and waging a full-blown culture war against abortion, sex education in the schools, the ban on prayers in pubic places, and so on.

Well, as the right-wing pundits droned on all next day, Palin/Scully “blew it out of the water.” Even Democratic Vice Presidential candidate Joseph Biden said she was going to be “a tough debater” and had “a very skillfully written …speech.” And one awestruck fan gushed, “Palin sounded at times like she was speaking a foreign language as she gave voice to the beautifully crafted words that had been prepared for her on Wednesday night.”

Congratulations, Scully, you did it! You galvanized and unified the most reactionary forces of the country that want to finish the job — on the Constitution, liberties, privacy, human rights at home and abroad, the United Nations, international justice, restrictions on trade, unions, animal protections and the environment — that Bush brought to such a high level in eight years. There is nothing innocent about what Scully does: he is a hack, a propagandist, a demagogue, a mouthpiece for nihilistic ideologies that are anything but “pro-life.” To the degree that Bush, Cheney, McCain, and Palin are truly menacing forces — who threaten not only neighboring nation states but the entire planet itself, Scully is their Paul Joseph Goebbels: a total ideologue, a skilled orator (on paper), and a devotee to the party line.

Whereas Obama is known to have fairly progressive views on animals, Palin is an aggressive supporter of hunting and herself an avid hunter. She goes so far as to champion aerial hunting of wolves and threatened to sue the EPA if they listed the polar bear as an endangered species.[ii] Beyond her regressive views on animals, she has helped mobilize the base of the far Right in a way McCain could not do himself because she is such an extreme conservative. According to MoveOn.Org:

**Palin recently said that the war in Iraq is “God’s task.” She’s even admitted she hasn’t thought about the war much–just last year she was quoted saying, “I’ve been so focused on state government, I haven’t really focused much on the war in Iraq.”

**Palin has actively sought the support of the fringe Alaska Independence Party. Six months ago, Palin told members of the group–who advocate for a vote on secession from the union–to “keep up the good work” and “wished the party luck on what she called its ‘inspiring convention.'”

**Palin wants to teach creationism in public schools. She hasn’t made clear whether she thinks evolution is a fact.

**Palin doesn’t believe that humans contribute to global warming. Speaking about climate change, she said, “I’m not one though who would attribute it to being manmade.”

**Palin has close ties to Big Oil. Her inauguration was even sponsored by BP.

**Palin is extremely anti-choice. She doesn’t even support abortion in the case of rape or incest.

**Palin opposes comprehensive sex-ed in public schools. She’s said she will only support abstinence-only approaches.

**As mayor, Palin tried to ban books from the library. Palin asked the library how she might go about banning books because some had inappropriate language in them–shocking the librarian, Mary Ellen Baker. According to Time, “news reports from the time show that Palin had threatened to fire Baker for not giving “full support” to the mayor.” [iii]

Unfortunately, thanks to Scully, Palin’s “homespun” speech (professionally crafted by a DC-insider), was a smash at the RNC, and she “hit it out of the ballpark” as nearly every conservative pundit said the following day. And so we have Scully — who wrote a book critical of hunting — to thank not only for supporting a psychopath whose lust for killing animals perhaps rivals that of Ted Nugent, but for reinvigorating a fascist movement that has excellent chances at winning the next election, and taking the US even deeper into the innermost circles of hell, as somehow I suspect that McCain-Palin will be even worse for the US, the world, animals, and the planet than Bush-Cheney.

And yet, still we hear hardly a word from the animal community about what a thug and criminal Scully is and what a traitor he is to the animals, to fellow humans, and to the entire planet. The most pathetic comment I have heard so far is from Karen Dawn, a well-known animal activist and social butterfly who runs the newsletter, Dawnwatch, which comments on media representations of animal issues. Given her social and economic status — the fact that she lives in the affluent area along the California coastline, that she is a regular in the LA party and cocktail scene, that she loves to see and be seen with celebrities — it is not surprising she takes an apolitical view of animal issues, and in fact agrees with Wayne Pacelle that this movement ought to strive to be a powerful single-issue, DC-based powerhouse like the NRA.

 

Here is Dawn’s self-serving, cowardly, and deplorable commentary the day after Palin’s speech:

“The news this week is the Republican Convention, and the animal news is the choice of Sarah Palin as McCain’s running mate. Before I write any further on that issue, I need to stress that DawnWatch is entirely non partisan. If you’ve read [her new MTV-style book] Thanking the Monkey you know of my commitment to non-partisan animal activism. It would be unfair to the animals for their advocates to alienate half of the human population. And in Thanking the Monkey, I explain that the somewhat common assumption [which I personally have argued for in detail] that animal advocacy is a left wing issue is false. Democrat voting records are better on animal issues overall, but the exceptions are shining. Republicans John Ensign of Nevada, and Christopher Shays of Connecticut are just two of those current outstanding exceptions. And former Senator Robert Smith of New Hampshire, an ultra right wing conservative, is the only person to date to speak passionately against vivisection on the Senate Floor.

Perhaps most notably, one of the finest books ever written [!] on animal protection is “Dominion: The Power of Man, The Suffering of Animals, and The Call to Mercy.” It is by Matthew Scully, who worked as a senior speechwriter for George W Bush, penning the book on his off hours. Scully sees his compassion, or mercy, for animals, and his vegan lifestyle, as perfectly in line with his Catholic conservative values …

In an extraordinary twist of fate, Scully was selected to write Sarah Palin’s speech, which aired last night. Let us hope that in the time Scully and Palin spent together working on the speech, he began to influence her thinking. I hope every Republican on this list will urge her to read his book!”[iv]

“Let us hope that in the time Scully and Palin spent together working on the speech, he began to influence her thinking.” How naïve and deep in denial can this woman be?! Does Dawn think that Scully and Sarah had a reasonable and open chat about the evils of hunting?! That he gently reminded her that animals are not meat machines to shoot down in cold blood, just as he appreciatively received his lucrative paycheck for selling out the planet by helping some of the most dangerous forces in our history in their bid to win an election? I suspect Scully talked far more with Palin about his fee than her bloody proclivities to kill animals.

Dawn is indeed critical of Palin’s zeal for hunting and her abysmal environmental record, but she would rather be an enabler to this carnage than offend her powerful, rich, and influential friends. I do not exaggerate when I draw a line connecting McCain/Palin to Scully, to Pacelle (an animal killer in his own right), and to opportunists like Dawn.

 

In contrast to Dawn’s vapid view that we can bring all people and parties into the animal cause, another animal advocate (infinitely more authentic and profound than Dawn), Norm Phelps, penned (in a personal email to me) some extremely critical remarks on Scully and the far Right:

“I think the fact that Matthew Scully wrote her convention speech (which was a masterpiece of viciousness) should give us all pause about the notion that conservatives will ever be serious animal advocates. I used to think that AR [animal rights] was a non-political issue and that we should keep it that way in the interests of converting as many people as possible and having the greatest impact on society. I no longer think that. I now believe that the mindset that leads conservatives to pursue policies that are hostile to the well-being of most of humanity (everyone except themselves and those to whom they are close) almost invariably leads them to policies that are hostile to the well-being of most animals (everyone except those to whom they are personally close, such as their companion animals).

“There is nothing that I find more perplexing and discouraging than the blatant speciesism that is rampant in most progressive circles. But in spite of this, I have reluctantly come to the conclusion that the liberal to progressive end of the political spectrum is where we have to concentrate our efforts and where we will ultimately find our victory. Conservatives can, in many cases, be persuaded to welfarism (properly so called, not as redefined by the so-called “abolitionists”), but not to AR. Scully’s vehement denunciations of AR in Dominion are, I think, an important indicator of this, as is the fact that this man who wrote so eloquently of the suffering of animals could put his gifts in the service of a woman who practices and celebrates all manner of barbaric cruelty to animals. Scully obviously considers the lives and suffering of animals less important than politics as usual.”

Phelps is right to argue that the Left is just as abysmal in its views on animals, and yet draws this distinction:

“The speciesism of liberals/progressives contradicts their fundamental values, which creates an opportunity for animal advocates. The speciesism of conservatives reinforces their fundamental values, which creates a solid wall. But I still think it is dangerous for the AR movement, as a movement, to align with other social justice movements until we have succeeded in raising their consciousness about animals to the point that the alliance can be formed on a basis of at least approximate equality. And I think a lot of groundwork needs to be done before we reach that point. I guess where I’m headed is that we need to be taking that groundwork seriously and getting busy at it–which, of course, is what you’ve been doing for some time now.”[v]

While I agree with Phelps that Leftists are Paleolithic in their views on animals and we should not be too ready to tie ourselves to a human rights/social justice platform as it is, and that we do need indeed to educate the Left, I have also disagreed with him (in quite friendly terms) that animal liberation is winnable without human and Earth liberation and a progressive alliance politics that fights against the main threat to the planet today, which is the capitalist grow-or-die economy.[vi]

But while we examine the problems with both the Right and the Left, let us not lose focus on the idiocy, cowardice, and opportunism in our own movement, for there are far too many “animal advocates” who are in fact advocates for something far less noble: money, power, glory, fame, and self–advancement. If it was not obvious with the writing of Dominion six years ago, Scully in particular has since revealed himself to be a sham, fraud, charlatan, prevaricator, hypocrite, and (neo-)con man, an enemy not only to animals, but also a de facto opponent of women, science, secularism, freedom of speech, and the environment.

Like the politicians he serves, Scully talks out of both sides of his mouth at once and serves each and every contradictory cause that advances his own good. No principled or consistent person writes a book against hunting, and then writes a speech for a vicious defender of hunting and avid killer herself. Can any animall advocate among us ever imagine doing this?! This is the moral and logical contradiction that would haunt a Kantian, someone with a conscience, anyone with principles or moral consistency. But it never troubles a utilitarian-opportunist.

And nor is his work done. The Far Right loved his Palin speech so much that they will surely contract him again. Without hyperbole, I say that Scully is less a “progressive vegan and animal welfarist” than he is a reactionary and a dangerous man. He has been the words, phrases, metaphors, rhetoric, narratives, jokes, and overall a key voice and mouthpiece of the Extreme Right who want to take this country back to pre-Enlightenment, pre-secular medieval serfdom where rights mean only property rights, liberty falls to security and hierarchy, and democracy is a forgotten dream.

To end by reiterating a crucial point: Mathew (Straight-Laced, Compassionate Conservative, Corporate and Family Values Man,) Scully is not just a hypocrite or opportunist. He is a menace to all life, beings, species, and nature. This is not an ad hominem attack, it is simply a fact. Look who he works for and examine what they do. Because of the gigantic powers he brings to life, puffs up, drives forward, and legitimates with the rhetoric of his folksy, small-town populism, he represents gigantic global corporations that destroy families and communities. Because Scully casts the spell and brings out the smoke and mirrors that cover up lies and package a hideous program of destruction as “progress,” and because he gets the job done, time after time, Scully is a significant danger — and I do not exaggerate — to this entire planet.


Scully’s real project is not “dominion.” It is domination–corporate hegemony of the planet and the advancement of the US Empire. To the extent his discursive artistry helps to disarm Congress and to lull Americans back into their complacent and jingoistic sleep, Scully shares responsibility with Bush, Cheney, Ashcroft, Rumsfeld, Gonzalez, Rice, Halliburton, ExxonMobil, Monsanto, and ConAgra for turning this beautiful planet into a living hell for most of its inhabitants and for leaving behind a wasteland and battlefield that will prove even more difficult (if not impossible) for future generations to survive, as ever more species vanish forever.

 

Steven Best, Ph.D. is Associate Professor of Philosophy at the University of Texas, El Paso. He has published numerous books and articles on philosophy, cultural criticism, social theory and animal rights. He has appeared on TV shows like Extra! and is frequently interviewed by national print and radio media including the New York Times and National Public Radio. Best is Cyrano’s Journal Special Editor for Animal Rights, Speciesisim and Human Tyranny over Nature.

 

Notes

[i] For data on the ever-mounting numbers of Iraqi civilians and US soldiers killed and injured, see the Iraq Body Count website at: http://www.iraqbodycount.org/. On the soaring costs of the war, see Linda J. Bilmes and Joseph E. Stiglitz, “The Iraq War Will Cost Us $3 Trillion, and Much More,” Sunday March 9, 2008, The Washington Post, at: http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2008/03/07/AR2008030702846_pf.html.


[ii] On Palin’s regressive record on animals and the environment, see John Dolan, “Party whores: Sarah Palin’s Big, Sleazy Safari,” September 2, 2008, AlterNet, at: http://www.alternet.org/story/97207/sarah_palin%27s_big%2C_sleazy_safari/; “Environmentalists can’t corral Palin: GOP vice presidential candidate nicknamed the ‘killa from Wasilla’, Associated Press, posted September 4, at MSNBC.com, at:http://www.msnbc.msn.com/id/26546967/; and ““SARAH PALIN SUPPORTS SHOOTING WOLVES AND BEARS FROM AIRPLANES,” Defenders of Wildlife, at: http://www.defendersactionfund.org/. This page includes a disturbing video link to what this barbaric practice that Palin ardently supports looks like in reality.


[iii] “Who is Sarah Palin,” MoveOn.Org., at: http://pol.moveon.org/emails/palin_announcement.html?rc=homepage.


[iv] Karen Dawn, “Palin provides vital opportunities for animal friendly letters,” September 4, 2008, at:
http://www.dawnwatch.com/cgi-bin/dada/mail.cgi/archive/dw1000000dawnwat/20080904102648/


[v] Phelps cited with permission in a personal email to me on September 4, 2008.


[vi] Steven Best, “Rethinking Revolution: Animal Liberation, Human Liberation, and the Future of the Left,” The International Journal of Inclusive Democracy, Volume 2, Issue #3, June 2006; at: http://www.inclusivedemocracy.org/journal/is6/Best_rethinking_revolution.htm.

Alistair Darling and the implosion of the Labour government

5

By Chris Marsden | The August 30 Guardian interview with Britain’s Chancellor Alistair Darling was extraordinary in many respects. In the first place there can be few occasions that so dramatically reveal the sense of profound crisis within ruling circles in Britain.

Darling admitted to Decca Aitkenhead that the economic times we are facing “are arguably the worst they’ve been in 60 years… And I think it’s going to be more profound and long-lasting than people thought.”

Within 24 hours, he was accused of undermining confidence in Britain’s economy to such an extent that the pound hit a record low against the euro and a two-year low against the dollar. The FTSE 100 shares index also fell sharply.

Darling had committed the cardinal sin of stating openly, if still guardedly, that economically things are really bad and likely to get worse. His choice of 60 years was somewhat arbitrary. He could not mention the 1970s as many have done without raising the spectre of mass movements of workers bringing down governments. And references to the hungry thirties were similarly beyond the pale. But even such a partial acknowledgement as his was considered a serious blunder, even though only last week the Bank of England’s deputy governor, Charles Bean, had warned that the economy is facing a period “at least as challenging” as the 1970s.

Ian Stannard, a senior currency strategist at BNP Paribas, told the press, “Most people believed that things were probably deteriorating faster in the UK than the government was admitting, but the fact that we’ve seen the chancellor come out and admit that things are far worse have put sterling under pressure.”

The reaction was swift from both the government and the media. Prime Minister Gordon Brown instructed Darling to make a humiliating explanation of how he had been misinterpreted and was in fact focusing on the “unique problems” facing the “global economy.” Brown’s own speech to the Confederation of British Industry delivered Thursday was leaked in advance, in which he again emphasised that the problems facing Britain are international in origin, centering in the credit crunch, and that Britain was in fact well-placed to weather any downturn.

One senior Labour figure declared baldly to the Guardian, “Alistair must be insane. There is no rhyme, nor reason why he would want to talk like that.” The Financial Times declared scathingly that his “prognosis” on the economy “is too bleak,” whereas his fretting about the state of the Labour government “is nowhere near bleak enough.”

The ferocity of the reaction to Darling’s comments itself belies such efforts to belittle his estimation of the gravity of the economic crisis. Even as they were being made, reports were published that the British economy was at a standstill in the second quarter of the year, after a revision of figures wiped out the 0.2 percent growth reported earlier. The number of permanent jobs available had also plunged to its lowest level since 2001, with unemployment rising by about 70,000 this year and predicted to hit two million by Christmas. The manufacturing sector shrank for the fourth month in a row.

Mortgage approvals fell to 33,000 in July, the lowest since data was first collected in 1993, with the number of new mortgages issued down 71 percent in a year. House prices fell in August for the eleventh consecutive month and are now falling at an annual rate of over 10.5 percent.

Even as Darling was being decried for his candor by the Telegraph, the newspaper published an estimate by one of Britain’s foremost economists and former Bank of England policymaker, Charles Goodhart that “Britain is now facing a severe recession which will last for a year or longer and a worse housing crash than in the early 1990s”. Two days later, the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) predicted recession for Britain, even while the other G7 countries will see either modest growth or a standstill.

If all that Darling’s interview confirmed was the dire state of the economy it would be interesting enough. But the chancellor’s comments provided a revealing glimpse into the deep sense of crisis gripping a Labour government that is on the verge of implosion. His interview reads like a cry of despair by someone who does not want to carry the can for Labour’s failure, but apart from this sees no way out.

 

Labour’s worship of the market 

The government’s mantra, echoed here by Darling, that it is merely the victim of an unfavourable international situation should be opposed on many fronts. New Labour earned its place in power by breaking with reformism and embracing Thatcherite economic nostrums. It was the political vehicle through which big business set out to impose a discredited economic and political agenda on a hostile population.

With the Conservatives hated and unelectable after 18 years in power, it was Labour under Tony Blair and Gordon Brown that came in to continue where Margaret Thatcher and John Major had left off. Labour insisted that capitalism was not only triumphant, but that there was also no alternative to it. It was the best of all possible worlds, provided only that government abandon all attempts at national regulation and recognise the economic and political imperatives of globalised capitalist production and the need to be internationally competitive.

To this end old-style reformism must give way to government in partnership with corporate management, wholesale privatization of state assets and public services and unbridled speculation by the City of London presided over by a Bank of England set free from governmental control. Above all workers should heed the message from the government and their allies in the trade union leadership–that the class struggle was a thing of the past and participation in creating a globally efficient economy would raise all boats.

For ten years, this provided the ideological justification for Labour facilitating by every possible means a historically unprecedented transfer of societal wealth to the super-rich. With the actual wages and purchasing power of working people in constant decline, and vital social services being gutted, Labour became ever more alienated from its former working class supporters. But it was able to maintain power to the extent that a speculative boom in house prices and a flood of credit allowed people to live well beyond their actual means.

Once this speculative boom burst internationally, it was inevitable that it would hit the British economy hardest of all and would signal the end of the Labour government.

The biographical material on Darling contained in Aitkenhead’s interview is sketchy, but revealing in painting a portrait of someone who was an ideal New Labour apparatchik.

She notes that while “A blaze of glitzier New Labour stars have since fallen… Darling survived, accumulating five ministerial posts on a stainless ascent to the exchequer last year. His career had been distinguished by an almost freakish absence of failure. He has never lost an election, he joined the front bench after just 12 months in parliament, and 20 years later he has never left. Only two other members of that first cabinet, Gordon Brown and Jack Straw, are still in government with Darling today.”

This rise to prominence is incredible because Darling’s own statements make clear that he is a political zero–someone with no connection to the Labour Party, old-style reformist socialism or the working class. Both his grandfathers were Liberals, his great-uncle a Tory MP in Edinburgh, and his father, a civil engineer, voted Conservative. He was educated at a private boarding school before studying law at Aberdeen where he stood for election in the student union, “but not for a party.”

He only joined the Labour Party 1977. This was a year during which Labour was in coalition with the Liberals and imposing IMF-dictated austerity measures that met with fierce resistance from the working class and ended with the 1979 “Winter of Discontent” and the election of the Conservatives. Darling’s response? “The Labour government in 1977 was in a terrible mess, and I was getting fed up looking at all these things on the television, and thinking, God, surely we can do better than that. I wanted to do things. But I was never really interested in the theory of achieving things, just the practicality of doing things.”

Later he tells Aitkenhead, “He doesn’t call himself a socialist–‘There’s nothing wrong with the term, it’s just not one I use’–and feels uncomfortable with political labels. Class envy is a mystery to him; he sees no point in raising taxes for the super rich, because, he says, it wouldn’t raise much revenue. ‘I’m not offended if someone earns large sums of money. Is it fair or not? It’s just a fact of life.’ Asked to define his politics, he offers, ‘Pragmatic’.”

 

The party’s over 

Like his colleagues, it was precisely Darling’s “pragmatism,” his hostility to socialism, absence of “class envy” and relaxed approach to fabulous private wealth that made him so successful for so long. He was ideal material for government as far as the Labour Party and its backers were concerned because was ready to do whatever he was told, unencumbered by any extraneous ideological baggage.

He was in effect a true and unalloyed believer in capitalism.

That is why, as he states, “For 10 years as a minister, by and large I had a charmed life.”

And that is also why all this changed by the time of that fateful day in June last year when he was appointed chancellor by Brown, as Labour was attempting to distance itself from the Iraq war and the sordid record of Blair’s premiership. Instead, as his wife states, his life has been “a crisis a week.”

In an extraordinary passage, he states that although “we knew the economy was going to slow down”: “he hadn’t the faintest inkling of the financial crisis about to unfold before him. ‘No, no one did. No one had any idea’.”

“He can clearly recall the day last summer when alarm bells first began to sound. The chancellor was on holiday with his wife and their two teenage children in Majorca. ‘I remember I picked up the FT in the supermarket, as you do, and it had the European central bank starting to put money into the economy. I phoned the office to ask why they were doing quite so much. It didn’t surprise me that money was going in–there was concern going around–but it was the sheer scale of it. I said, what about our institutions? This was when Northern Rock started to figure.”

“Even then,” Aitkenhead continues, “the gravity of the credit crunch was still not fully clear. ‘No one knew how serious it was yet’,” she quotes Darling saying.

What then is the future for a party that was so enamoured of capitalism that the man it appointed as chancellor was apparently so blissfully unaware of an unfolding financial disaster sweeping the world economy?

Aitkenhead states that today, “the mood is so febrile, it’s even possible he won’t be chancellor by the time this interview appears.”

As for Darling, he doesn’t want a cabinet reshuffle that may see him replaced–“Frankly, if you had a reshuffle just now, I think the public would say, Who are they anyway? You name me a reshuffle that ever made a difference to a government, actually.” Nor does he want a leadership challenge against Brown, even though he makes clear he has little hope of winning the next election.

“This coming 12 months,” he declares, “will be the most difficult 12 months the Labour party has had in a generation, quite frankly. Both the general economic situation, and in terms of the politics. In the space of 10 months we’ve gone from a position where people generally felt we were doing OK to where we’re certainly not doing OK. We’ve got to rediscover that zeal which won three elections, and that is a huge problem for us at the moment. People are pissed off with us.”

Whatever Darling might wish for, there is little chance that Brown will survive the next months unscathed, less chance still that Labour will win an election under any leader whatsoever, and a distinct possibility of the party imploding. As if to underline such political realities, even as the government was attempting to recover from the damage inflicted by Darling the former home secretary Charles Clarke was busy telling the BBC that Labour is facing “utter destruction” at the polls and insisting that Brown must either improve the standing of Labour within a few months or resign as prime minister.

Obama: Nuclear Iran ‘unacceptable’

0

YNet News | WASHINGTON – Iran is a “major threat” and it would be “unacceptable” for the rogue nation to develop a nuclear weapon, Barack Obama said Thursday.

Obama: Nuclear Iran ‘unacceptable’

‘Iran a major threat; I would never hesitate to use our military force in order to protect homeland, US interests, Democratic presidential candidate tells FOX’s ‘The O’Reilly Factor’
Yitzhak Benhorin

WASHINGTON – Iran is a “major threat” and it would be “unacceptable” for the rogue nation to develop a nuclear weapon, Barack Obama said Thursday.

During his first-ever interview on FOX News’ “The O’Reilly Factor”, the Democratic presidential candidate said, “It is unacceptable for Iran to possess a nuclear weapon; it would be a game changer.”
 
Obama said he would not take military action off the table in dealing with Iran, but added that diplomacy and sanctions cannot be overlooked.
 
“It’s sufficient to say I would not take military action off the table and that I will never hesitate to use our military force in order to protect the homeland and the United States’ interests,” he said.
 
Obama accused the Bush Administration of bringing radical Islamic groups together, and said Iran “fueled a whole host of terrorist organizations, but we have to have the ability to distinguish between groups. … They may not all be part and parcel of the same ideology.”
 
Obama also told FOX News he “absolutely” believes the US is fighting a war on terror against “Al Qaeda, the Taliban, a whole host of networks that are bent on attacking America, who have a distorted ideology, who have perverted the faith of Islam.”
 
‘Five years of mismanagement’

He repeated his campaign’s foreign policy position that Afghanistan must become the “central front” in the war on terror.
 
During the interview Obama, who was against the US troop surge in Iraq, admitted that it has “succeeded in ways that nobody anticipated” but refused to retract his initial opposition to the surge. “I’ve already said it’s succeeded beyond our wildest dreams,” he said.
 
However, Obama added that the US has not had enough “political reconciliation” and Iraqis still have not taken responsibility for their country.
 
“We have gone through five years of mismanagement of this war that I thought was disastrous, and the president wanted to double down and continue an open-ended policy (that did not put pressure on the Iraqi government),” he said.

 
Obama said he would not take military action off the table in dealing with Iran, but diplomacy and sanctions can’t be overlooked.
 
According to a new CBS News poll conducted this week, the presidential race between Obama and John McCain is now even at 42 percent. Twelve percent are undecided according to the poll, and one percent said they wouldn’t vote.
 
This is in contrast to a poll conducted last weekend, where the Obama-Biden ticket led McCain-Palin by eight points, 48 percent to 40 percent.

IRAQ: U.S. Blamed for Increasing Iranian Influence

0

Inter Press Service | Haider returned from Iran recently, with enough money to pay for his wedding and a new car. He was trained to join Badr, the armed wing of the Supreme Islamic Iraqi Council (SIIC) led by Abdul Aziz al-Hakim.

Many more come where he recently came from.

Badr is being trained ostensibly to defend Shia leaders, under increased attacks from militant groups. Dawa is a Shia dominated party, and inevitably looks to Shia Iran for support.

The Badr militia has itself been blamed for carrying out several attacks against Sahwa forces in some areas of Iraq. Many anti-occupation militants are now members of the primarily Sunni Sahwa forces — also backed by the U.S.

“The militants believe that the Shia officials are from the Badr militia, who are trained and strongly directed by Iran, with of course the knowledge of the Americans,” said a Sahwa leader, speaking on condition of anonymity.

The Badr militia was based in Iran for 20 years during the rule of Saddam Hussein. It comprises largely Iraqi exiles, refugees and defectors who fought alongside Iran during the Iran-Iraq war. The U.S. allowed the militia to return to Iraq after the invasion of 2003.

The Iranian touch has come in all sorts of ways. Like chocolates.

“The militants (now Sahwa members) kept blocking import of goods from Iran,” Hasan Qader, a shopkeeper in Baquba told IPS. “They shot the shopkeepers who dealt with them. So it was rare to see Iranian chocolate or anything else. With the partial government control by the Shia, especially in the last six months, shopkeepers are now allowed to deal in Iranian goods.”

People in Diyala are divided over Iran. Most Shias seem supportive of it, but many Sunnis say Iran has played as great a role as the U.S. in destroying Iraq. “If the U.S. launches an assault on Iran, I’ll be the first volunteer to fight on the side of the U.S.,” Abdul-Razaq Khadem, a local trader, told IPS.

In 2003, 90 percent of the population of Diyala province was Sunni. But the Shia influence has risen now given the Shia domination in the government.

“Iran enjoys influence through the men of the United Iraqi Alliance in the Baghdad government, as represented by the Supreme Islamic Iraqi Council (SIIC), and the Dawa party,” a local teacher in Baquba, speaking on condition of anonymity, told IPS.

“The governor made a deal to import cooking oil from Iran at a very high price that has never been seen before,” an employee at the governor’s office told IPS, on condition of anonymity. Earlier, the Ministry of Trade imported cooking oil from Turkey because it was of good quality and at a reasonable price.

Some people also blame Iranian influence for corruption in local government. “I think the Iranian influence will remain as long as there are such men as the governor (Raad Rashid Jawad) in the province,” Qahtan Jasim, a local trader, told IPS. “The province was and still is the worst because of this corrupt administration.”

Iran now provides electricity to Iraq, particularly Diyala province, under a contract with the Iraqi government.

“The Iraqi government gives 5 million dollars per month to the Iranian side to cover the cost of the electricity to Diyala province,” Said Mohammed al-Nieemy, head of the directorate-general of electricity in Diyala told IPS.

Despite instances of positive assistance from Iran, like increased electricity and business deals that have aided portions of Iraq’s ailing economy, many Iraqis blame Iran for meddling in Iraq’s politics.

“We don’t have a representative government here or in Baghdad because of the heavy Iranian influence,” Omar Abdullah, a trader now unemployed told IPS in Baquba. “That influence favours only those who support them, and injures those of us who do not.”

Others, like a teacher who spoke with IPS on condition of anonymity because of the prevailing atmosphere of fear, said Iranian influence would have been impossible without the U.S. occupation.

“The Badr militia and all their political and religious leaders entered Iraq on the backs of the American tanks,” said the teacher. “Until the Americans came, there was no way they (Badr and Iranian-backed politicians and religious leaders) could set one foot in this country.”

US Hypocrisy Reaches Critical Mass

1

By Jyoti Mishra |

US Vice-President Dick Cheney has condemned what he called Russia’s “illegitimate” attempt to change Georgia’s borders last month.Mr Cheney added that Russia’s actions during the recent conflict with Georgia had cast doubt on its reliability as an international partner.
(Source: BBC News)

 

This is the same Dick Cheney that said that the butchering of over one million Iraqis by illegally invading US forces was, in his words, a “major success.” (Source: ABC)

Was Cheney so worried about borders when his country invaded a sovereign, non-aggressor nation, committing a war crime?

But the USA is a proud defender of national borders… when it suits them:

Pakistan has condemned an alleged raid by foreign [US] troops based in Afghanistan which officials say killed at least 15 villagers in a north-west tribal area.The South Waziristan raid would be the first ever ground assault into Pakistan by foreign forces from Afghanistan.

Pakistan says the raid was a violation of its sovereignty. On Thursday a US missile killed at least five people in nearby North Waziristan, officials say.
(Source: BBC News)

 

You won’t see that particular border violation on your telly. There’s not enough time, what with all the anti-Russia hype whipped-up by the warmongers of Washington.

Oh, but we must all follow the US line: Russia BAD, Georgia GOOD. After all, who started the bloodshed in the first place, them Russians, wasn’t it? Umm…

The conflict between Georgia and Russia erupted on 7 August after Georgia tried to retake the breakaway region of South Ossetia by force.Russian forces launched a counter-attack and the conflict ended with the ejection of Georgian troops from South Ossetia and another breakaway region, Abkhazia.
(Source: BBC News)

 

Now, that’s strange! The way everything is being reported on the TV news, it’s Russia that are the heartless invaders, trying to chop poor little Georgia into pieces. No doubt, this means the people of South Ossetia HATE the Russians, doesn’t it? Ermmm…

They [South Ossetians] are very clear who they blame: Georgia’s President Mikhail Saakashvili, who sent troops to re-take control of this breakaway region. That effort has clearly backfired. The pro-Russian sentiment I experienced on my last visit four years ago has become far fiercer as a result of this conflict.“They signed a ceasefire, but Saakashvili can start bombing us again any minute,” Lusya said, referring to the OSCE/EU-brokered peace plan between Moscow and Tbilisi.

“Look how many people died here! We can never join Georgia after this. We’ll cope on our own.”

“We were bombed for three days and nights. If Russia had not helped, we would have disappeared,” Lusya’s neighbour Elena said, visibly angry. “Only Russia takes us under its wing. We want to be with Russia.”
(Source: BBC News)

 

So, South Ossetia sees Russia as the saviour and Georgia as the aggressor. That’s a bit different from what good old Dick Cheney, mass-murderer of Iraqis, triumphant bomber of Afghan children says, innit?

One would think, the way every poodle of the USA, sorry, great Western democracy has backed the US that the Russian troops in South Ossetia must be lepers. They must be having as hard a time as the US troops in Iraq. Surely? Hmmm…

Despite international calls for a withdrawal, there is no sign of Russia pulling its troops out of Ossetia. By Wednesday, they had received an order to cease fire, but not to leave.Their presence is popular with many locals, who wave as soldiers drive past in the street. (Source: BBC News)

 

Ahhh, not quite the same as how the Iraqis and Afghans see the US forces in their countries, is it? But then, Cheney manages to accuse Russia of warmongering at the same time as standing on the pile of Iraqi corpses and calling that mission a success! Amazing! This man is some kind of Oscar-level actor, to be able to spout such hypocritical nonsense with a straight face.

Do you remember this?

There is convincing evidence that 60 children and 30 adults were killed in a US air strike in western Afghanistan last Friday, the United Nations says. (Source: BBC News)

Those sixty innocent children that the USA just murdered – is the US government apologetic? Guilty? Filled with remorse? Nope. It just denies it ever happened and, yet again, rubbishes the UN when it suits its purposes. So much for the US’ hand-wringing about naughty Russia and their aggression. And now the US is pumping war funds into Georgia under the guise of aid. Yeah, right.

Again, I am not saying that Russia is good. Russia is, after all, another superpower. All I’m saying is that if you want to find the most destructive, most dangerous, most imperialistic nation on earth, don’t look at Russia.

Look at the USA and their hideous record of murder, torture and kidnapping in Afganistan and Iraq. Nothing Russia has done can match the USA’s evil there.

FBI’s civil rights initiative: no trials yet

0

WASHINGTON – Flanked by officials from the NAACP and the Southern Poverty Law Center, FBI Director Robert Mueller last year announced with considerable fanfare a new partnership between his agency and civil rights organizations.

The goal: To bring justice in long-ignored murders from the civil rights era.

The outcome: Not one case has been prosecuted under the FBI’s Cold Case Initiative, which actually began two years ago with no fanfare at all.

The civil rights leaders present at Mueller’s February 2007 news conference – John Jackson of the NAACP, who now works for a private firm, and Richard Cohen, director of the Southern Poverty Law Center – have come to question the government’s motives.

“I’ve been disappointed that more cases have not been brought,” Cohen said. “I worried that too many people would get their hopes up. I don’t want to be part of a show.”

Some of the killings occurred up to 60 years ago. Evidence was sometimes destroyed to prevent further investigating. Some crime-scene samples – clothing, hair strands, blood stains – were lost. Memories have faded, and witnesses have died. Of those still alive, some are afraid to come forward even now. Others are ashamed, unwilling to bear witness against relatives who did the Ku Klux Klan’s bidding.

Yet some killers have been convicted – before the FBI’s new initiative was announced. Those successes were due in large part to the relentless efforts of survivors, journalists and prosecutors, and to the declassification of secret documents from the segregationist Mississippi State Sovereignty Commission, an agency that spied on blacks and civil rights workers and was connected to racial killings. Commission records were finally released in 1998 after a 21-year legal battle.

Since 1989, state and federal authorities have made about 29 arrests, leading to 23 convictions, according to civil rights organizations and others. Those cases include:

– Byron De La Beckwith’s conviction in 1994 of murdering Medgar Evers, the first NAACP field secretary in Mississippi, shot to death on his doorstep some three decades earlier.

– Edgar Ray Killen’s 2005 conviction on three counts of manslaughter for orchestrating the killings of civil-rights workers. The deaths of James Chaney, Andrew Goodman and Michael Schwerner – kidnapped and shot to death by Klan members – were the basis of the 1989 film “Mississippi Burning.”

But for each conviction there are many killings that have never been prosecuted or even fully investigated.

Nineteen years ago, the Southern Poverty Law Center, a civil rights group based in Montgomery, Ala., began compiling a list of those unsolved killings. It is called “The Forgotten,” and contains more than 70 names dating to the 1940s. Center researchers created case files for each. Some contain a wealth of public records and statements. Some hold a single story clipped from a Northern newspaper.

It was from those files, as well as materials submitted by the NAACP and others, that the FBI’s Cold Case Initiative found 95 cases to review.

“We cannot turn back the clock. We cannot right these wrongs. But we can try to bring a measure of justice to those who remain,” Mueller said last year, joined by then-Attorney General Alberto Gonzales.

Gonzales, seven months away from resigning under fire, also pledged to chase justice. “We hope we can bring closure to some of these cases,” he said.

Mueller promised the cases would be sent to FBI field offices for review. Months later, he testified before the Senate Judiciary Committee that 26 cases had been forwarded to the Justice Department for prosecutorial analyses.

They’ve been there for more than a year.

A bill in Congress that would have allocated $10 million annually to pursue cold civil rights cases – the so-called Till Bill, named for Emmett Till, a murdered black teenager – passed the House overwhelmingly but failed in the Senate. For two years it was blocked by a maneuver called a “hold,” initiated by Sen. Tom Coburn, R-Okla. He argued the government should not give money to new programs until it figures out what to do about chaotic fuel prices. Supporters hope Congress will revive the funding measure.

Meanwhile, the cold case initiative remains under FBI’s civil rights division, with no independent budget.

The FBI will reveal little about the initiative. Some civil rights leaders wonder whether it was more than an effort to cast the embattled Gonzales in a more favorable light.

“I’ve always wondered about the timing,” said Jackson, who was then chief policy officer for the NAACP. “There was a lot going on with the attorney general at the time,” he said, referring to Congress members’ demands that Gonzales resign amid criticism of government surveillance programs and alleged political motivations in the firing of several federal prosecutors.

“We wanted to know, after we turned over the cases, what was the next step?” Jackson said. “A lot of (FBI) staffers didn’t know how it worked.”

Southern Poverty Law Center director Cohen says he has heard little since the news conference, where he was surprised to hear the word “partnership.”

“We’d never discussed that,” he said. “I certainly don’t see myself as their ‘partner.'”

Has the initiative done nothing? In an interview at FBI headquarters, civil rights division chief Carlton Peeples replied: “I would say that’s probably untrue. We’re not going to get anywhere with these cases if people don’t come forward.”

Still, he would not say which cases are being reviewed and said he does not know how many agents are working on them. He also would not discuss details concerning some cases recently reopened and closed, including the notorious killing of Till in 1955.

Visiting his great uncle in Money, Miss., the 14-year-old Chicago boy made remarks deemed suggestive to a white woman behind the counter of a local market. When she went outside to get a gun from her car, he wolf-whistled.

The next day, he was dragged from his bed at 2:30 a.m. by at least two white men. Till’s bloated body was found snagged in the undergrowth of the Tallahatchie River. He had been beaten and shot. Barbed wire circled his neck, tied to a 70-pound fan from a cotton gin.

Two half brothers, one of them the woman’s husband, were tried for murder. An all-white jury took 68 minutes to find them not guilty. Years later, the men, now dead, confessed to Look magazine, saying they had killed the boy after he refused to apologize.

The case was reopened in 2004 – after the release of “The Untold Story of Emmett Louis Till,” a documentary film by Keith Beauchamp that included interviews with people who’d never publicly spoken about the killing.

A new FBI investigation produced a 464-page investigative report, but the FBI concluded it had no federal jurisdiction and forwarded the case to Mississippi prosecutors. Last year, a Leflore County grand jury declined to issue indictments, citing insufficient evidence.

At trial, Till’s great uncle testified he heard what could have been a woman’s voice saying, “That’s him,” after the boy was dragged from his house. Carolyn Bryant, the woman Till whistled at, has long denied being in the car that night.

Beauchamp, who’s based in Brooklyn, N.Y., is proud to call himself a partner of the FBI. He said the agency gave him a list of the top five cases reviewed under the cold case initiative.

“I’m helping them shake the trees,” he said, by producing documentaries on those killings.

Beauchamp’s re-enactments of the five cases will be the focus of a television series called “Murder in Black and White,” scheduled to run in October on cable channel TV One.

An 800 number will be shown – creating a kind of “America’s Most Wanted” tip line for racial killings.

The unsolved cases Beauchamp has dramatized:

– Lamar Smith, a 63-year-old World War II veteran, was shot to death in 1955 on a crowded Mississippi courthouse lawn in broad daylight. He had argued with a white man over registering blacks to vote. No witnesses ever came forward.

– The Rev. George Lee, a Baptist minister who urged his Belzoni, Miss. parishioners to register to vote, was killed in 1955 by a shotgun blast fired at his car. The death was never prosecuted. After Lee was sprayed with buckshot, his car crashed into the porch of a woman’s house. Initially, she told police she’d seen the shooter but later said she’d seen nothing.

– Willie Edwards Jr., 25, a truck driver, was abducted by Klansmen in Montgomery County, Ala., and ordered to jump off a bridge or face being shot. He jumped, and drowned. In 1976, one man confessed and three others were charged with murder. The charges were dismissed after a judge ruled that forcing someone to jump doesn’t necessarily result in death. The confessor, Raymond Britt, the only surviving participant, received immunity in exchange for his testimony.

– Sharecroppers George and Mae Murray Dorsey and Roger and Dorothy Malcom, were lynched at the Moore’s Ford Bridge outside Atlanta in 1946. The couples were returning from jail, where Roger Malcom had been held for allegedly stabbing a white man in a fight. A local white landowner had given them a ride to post Malcom’s bail. Afterward, he drove all four to the bridge, where a white mob opened fire with shotguns, rifles and a machine gun. FBI agents dispatched by President Truman could find no witnesses. Dorothy Malcom was allegedly seven months’ pregnant. The case was reopened eight years ago. A Georgia civil rights leader has said at least five suspects are still alive.

– Johnnie Mae Chappell, a black mother of 10, was shot to death in 1964 by the side of a Florida highway, where she was looking for her lost wallet. Four young white men were charged with her murder. They confessed to prowling Chappell’s community, looking to “get” a black person as race riots raged in nearby Jacksonville. Charges were dropped against three after they recanted. The fourth, J.W. Rich, served three years for manslaughter after telling an all-white jury that he hadn’t meant to shoot the woman. All four are still alive.

The Jacksonville detective who solved the killing, a white man named Lee Cody, has for years said the case was buried by a racist chief of detectives, now dead, who was part of the Klan.

Shelton Chappell, who was 4 months old when his mother died, has for years begged the FBI, with Cody’s help. After rejecting his pleas for years, the FBI met with Chappell in 2006 as part of the new cold case initiative, he said.

He told them everything he knew, a long and complicated story he has repeated over and over to state, local and federal authorities.

His mother knew nothing about civil rights demonstrations. She rode a bus 30 miles each way to clean the houses of white women. She had gone to get ice cream from the corner store, then realized, as she walked along darkened U.S. 1, that she’d somehow dropped her wallet.

There were headlight beams, then gunfire from a passing car, and then she was kneeling in the grass, shot in the stomach. She bled to death. Her 10 children were scattered in separate foster homes because her widower, who worked two jobs to support his family, wasn’t deemed fit by local welfare authorities to raise the children on his own.

Many didn’t see each other for years.

Chappell’s children think the FBI should use the old confessions, and the testimony of Cody, to reopen the case. Shelton Chappell says the government could have federal jurisdiction because his mother was walking along a national highway when she was shot.

But he has not heard a word since that 2006 meeting in Atlanta, and doesn’t have much hope that he will.

“It’s a dog and pony show,” he says. “Nothing has happened. I don’t see any movement. I don’t know what they’re waiting on. Are they waiting on everybody to die? What else do you need?”

FBI unit chief Nancy Nelson, who is Peeples’ boss and oversees the public corruption and civil rights operations, insists her office is “passionate about these cases” and will continue looking at them.

AP

Revealed: Brown’s £1bn power windfall

1

By Juliette Jowit |

Rising energy prices are on course to net the government a windfall of over £1bn thanks to a little-known scheme designed to promote the development of renewable energy.

The disclosure of the substantial sums made through the scheme comes as Gordon Brown has been piling pressure on power companies to plough some of the profits they have made through increased prices into helping cash-strapped consumers.

The government has faced backbench calls to impose a windfall tax on energy firms and has been criticised for rejecting plans for a one-off cash payment to householders to help pay for steep increases in fuel bills.

But after the Guardian revealed details of the government’s own sizable profits through energy sales last night, there were calls for the windfall sums to be used to reduce householders’ energy bills.

The government profits come from a scheme set up in the 1980s to support renewable energy projects by guaranteeing to pay developers building wind, biomass and other non-fossil fuel generation plants a fixed price for their electricity for 15 years.

During the first decade of the so-called Non-Fossil Fuel Obligation scheme, it ran at a loss, paid for by consumers, but over the last six years rising electricity prices have allowed the government to cash in on the energy contracts at a substantial profit.

In total ministers have now taken payments of £585m out of the fund, and have another £218m in the scheme’s account, which is held by the energy regulator, Ofgem.

This year the scheme is expected to make £200m, or more than £7 for every household in the UK.

Last night Charles Hendry, the Conservative shadow energy minister, accused the government of using the scheme as a “stealth tax” and warned it would further damage public confidence in environmental measures.

“If you’re going to tax environmental issues that money should be used for very specific projects for [the] environment, or else to help reduce taxes on families, but this seems to be going into a general pot,” said Hendry. “Certainly it would be in the spirit of it if the money was being used to deal with insulation and energy conservation.”

Energy companies have also complained about the government taking money which they feel should be paid back to customers or used to support new renewable energy.

“The money that’s accumulated was collected with the purpose of achieving environmental ends, and in this regard particularly achieving renewable energy targets, so we think it should be used for that purpose,” said Laura Schmidt, spokeswoman for the Association of Electricity Producers.

The Renewable Energy Association said: “That money is effectively raised for renewables and it isn’t right it should be used not for renewables.”

The government is expected to announce a package of measures next week under which power companies will agree to help impove the energy efficiency of poorer households but it is likley to face difficult questions over why it is not using some of its own energy windfall to help the fuel poor.

Ed Matthew, part of a powerful coalition of lobby groups which will publish a charter on fuel poverty on Monday, said the government’s windfall should be spent on speeding up work to improve insulation in the poorest homes “over and above” what is already planned.

“This is a question of life and death: 20,000 to 40,000 people die every year because of cold in this country, and energy efficiency is the only permanent solution,” said Matthew, head of UK climate for Friends of the Earth. “Huge investment is required and the money has to come partly from companies and it has to come directly from government itself if we’re going to get anywhere close to the kind of investment required to solve the problem.”

UNCONVENTIONAL

0

SchNews | As we predicted (in SchNEWS 644), last weeks protests in Denver outside the Democrat convention were nothing compared to the scenes out on the streets of St Pauls, Minnesota, during this week’s Republican National Convention (RNC). It seems that the thought of another Republican president is just too much to bear, and the Midwest city saw one of the biggest mass demonstrations in the States since the height of anti-war fervour in 2003.

While the world’s media have been fixated on the suitability of Sarah Palin for McCain’s running mate, battles have been raging outside the RNC. The party of war criminals have had to hold their convention protected by unprecedented levels of security.

Our eyewitness claims that what was different about this policing was the sheer scale of the repression, surveillance and infiltration in the weeks leading up to and during the convention. The $50 million campaign saw 35,000 law enforcement officers out on the streets – and this doesn’t include the National Guard or FBI agents. Independent media and journalists were also targeted.

Last Friday, before the convention started (Sept 1st-4th), armed riot police raided targets including the Convergence Center of the RNC Welcoming Committee in central St Paul, the meeting place and hub of the protests. Occupants were ordered to lie on the ground while laptops were taken and anything which could be used to demonstrate, including banners and several buckets, was confiscated.

Twelve were arrested and eight, alleged leaders, are under the ominous charge of ‘Conspiracy To Riot In Furtherance Of Terrorism’ — which carries a maximum seven and a half year sentence. The search warrant for this raid was supported by affidavits from police informants who had infiltrated the RNCWC, and alleged that the group intended to kidnap delegates, use explosives, and sabotage airports in St Pauls. This was all cheap talk in the pub evidently, as there is nothing to corroborate these allegations.

Other places raided over the weekend included Eyewitness Video — a group who film and monitor civil liberties. By Wednesday, after a second raid, their landlord kicked them out.

The FBI also raided a house in Minneapolis housing the free food people, Food Not Bombs, with four arrested on ‘probable cause’ for conspiracy to riot. The warrant claimed they were looking for improvised incendiary devices, and seized what they took to be a bucket of what they called ‘weaponised urine’. No it wasn’t the soup they were going to serve up the next day, it was actually just grey water being saved to use in the toilet.

And all this before the protests had even begun.
The convention — and protests — started on Monday with a large ‘permitted’ march. Some 25,000 were out in force, but so were the heavily tooled up SWAT police. Affinity groups organised to take different sectors of the city, but many were stopped from reaching their meeting points, and were detained with ID taken. The intention was to block the road to the RNC’s venue, The Xcel Center (DSEi memories anyone?), and apparently the police helped by blocking the road themselves.

Around a thousand-strong ‘Anti-Capitalist Bloc’ peeled off the march to take direct action — initiating some argybargy and window smashing… and were met with riot police, gas canisters and concussion grenades.

After day one, over 300 protesters were in the county jail. Reports from those who got out tell of extreme abuse within the cells, with many held beyond the time limit before they must be charged or released. A protest and vigil has been maintained since outside the jail, despite a belligerent police and National Guard presence.

In a move that should’ve generated more media attention than it did, journalist Amy Goodman, anchorwoman of the DemocracyNow.org internet/radio/tv programme, was arrested on Monday along with her producers — who despite carrying press badges were held on riot charges.

The next day, Tuesday, in the teeth of amassed police, was the Poor Peoples’ March For Our Lives — of around 15,000 – for the homeless, veterans, immigrants. The police demanded the march end by 7pm, and when it didn’t, waded in with batons, horses and motorbikes ramming the crowd, as well as firing tear gas, pepper spray and flash bombs. Snatch squads grabbed individuals, beating and tasering them. A city centre concert was pulled.

On Wednesday, protest continued, and further raids took place. Coaches taking delegates into the Xcel Center had be re-routed off the Minneapolis freeway system because people were throwing 40lb bags of cement off the overpasses onto them. Our reporter claims it was impossible to walk around near the centre with any sort of camera, given the tight control over media images of the protests. That night Rage Against The Machine performed an explosive gig — following on from their performance at Democrat convention protests in Denver the week before – with the audience surrounded by riot police. After their show over 100 were arrested.

Inside the Xcel Center, Thursday (4th) was the big day that John McCain gave his acceptance speech. Outside, the ruck continued, featuring a host of themed protests including a school kids ‘Walk Out Of Class’ rally. As the empty applause rattling around the Xcel Center died down, conservatives all around the country should have been comforted that the number of non-believers arrested outside during the week numbered over 400.

This year was the 40th anniversary of the 1968 Democrat convention, which shared parallels with the 2008 Republican convention: a mass demonstration against a party convention — riding on a wave of anti-war ferment — which was met with unprecedented repression by a brutal, paranoiac and deeply unpopular US state. Only this year had added kevlar body armour.

See also http://twincities.indymedia.org

* www.protestrnc2008.org *

Anti-Terror Laws Prone to Abuse, Amnesty Says

4

By Haider Rizvi | (IPS) -Numerous governments around the world are using anti-terror laws to suppress political dissent and civil liberties, according to a new report released by one of the world’s most respected human rights organisations.

Amid calls for increased U.N. scrutiny, in its report, the London-based group Amnesty International raises serious questions and concerns about the impact of the so-called war on terror on human rights and freedom of speech in many countries.

”There is a huge gap between governmental rhetoric and the reality of human rights observance on the ground,” said Amnesty in its report, entitled ”Security and Human Rights: Terrorism and the United Nations.”

The rights group released its report Thursday just a few hours before the U.N. General Assembly plenary was due to start biennial review of the ”Global Counter-Terrorism Strategy,” a documented adopted by the member states some two years ago.

The report’s authors say in a number of countries government leaders are violating human rights, although there is no provision in the document that would allow them to do so while pursuing anti-terror policies.

The report says that many governments have ”rushed through problematic laws formulating often vaguely-defined crimes, such as banning organisations, undermining fair trial standards, and suspending safeguards aimed at protecting human rights.”

The so-called war on terror, according to the report, is being used by both democratic governments and repressive regimes alike to justify restrictions on their political opponents and dissidents.

”Unfortunately,” the authors say, ”countries which have long claimed to be leaders in promoting human rights have now taken the lead the lead in enacting draconian laws.”

In addition to the United States and its close allies in the ”war on terror”, the report also names and shames several countries, including some Western democracies, for lowering their standards on human rights in the name of security.

Contrary to its image as a champion of human rights, Denmark, for example, has widened its definition of terrorism and the scope of ”aiding abetting terrorist activities,” raising concerns that the laws could be applied to those involved in non-violent activities.

Amnesty criticised the U.N. Security Council for its lack of emphasis on human rights and demanded it take responsibility for adverse impacts of the fight against terror on human rights situation worldwide.

”Human rights and security go hand in hand. Human rights are the key to achieving peace,” said Yvonne Terlingen, who represents Amnesty International at the U.N. ”The only way of countering terrorism is with justice.”

The 50-page report is laden with scores of cases illustrating human rights abuses in the name of security and counter-terrorism, such as extrajudicial trials and killings, use of torture, and enforced disappearances of suspects.

In its report, Amnesty urged the Security Council to adopt ”unambiguous and strong” language in its future resolutions on counter terrorism that member states meet their human rights obligations in the measures that it requires them to take.

The rights group also called for the Security Council to set up an independent review mechanism to examine delisting of terrorism suspects subjected to sanctions, and provide direct access to those listed to fair hearings providing basic human rights guarantees.

Amnesty’s findings appear be fully in line with those of the various U.N. rights bodies. In expressing their concerns as far back as October 2005, they warned that attempts by many states to adopt new anti-terror policies could undermine human rights standards.

In a report submitted to the General Assembly at the time, U.N. rights officials emphasised that terror required concerted action by the international community, not legislative steps that deny individual rights to a fair trial, freedom of speech, assembly, or to strike.

”Nothing can combat irrational acts and extreme forms of violence more effectively than the wisdom embodied in the rule of law,” U.N. special rapporteur on human rights Leandro Despouy told the General Assembly.

As in the past, the General Assembly meeting Thursday failed to reach a consensus on a definition of terrorism. While some think of terrorism in terms of extremists acts of non-state actors, others insist that certain states are also responsible for terrorism.

The fight against terrorism, according to a Cuban diplomat who spoke at the plenary session, is also used as a ”pretext to justify interference in the internal affairs of the other states, the aggression, and the breach of the states’ national sovereignty.”

”[It’s] a phenomenon that has to be combated by the entire international community, in an environment of close cooperation and with due respect of the Charter of the United Nations and international law,” Cuban envoy IIena Nunez Mordoche told the General Assembly plenary meeting.

Human Rights Watch: Indian forces, Maoist rebels use child fighters

0

New Delhi – Indian security forces and Maoist rebels should end the use of child fighters in their long conflict in the central state of Chhattisgarh, Human Rights Watch (HRW) said Friday.

The New York based rights group said both sides have long used children, some of them as young as 12, in armed operations.

While the Maoist rebels admit they recruit children, India’s federal Home Ministry has denied the allegations.

HRW, in its 58-page report on the involvement of children in the Chhattisgarh conflict, said the local police have recruited and used an unknown number of children as special police officers since mid-2005, though officials now say that they have been removed from the ranks.

It quotes eyewitnesses and interviews with villagers and children who say they were recruited by either the police or the Maoists.

The report says the Maoists, who have been recruiting and using children for over a decade, deploy them to gather intelligence, for sentry duty, to make and plant landmines and bombs and to fight government forces.

‘It’s shameful that both India’s government and the Naxalites (the name used for Maoist rebels in India) are exploiting children in this dangerous fashion,’ the HRW release said.

It urged India to conduct age verification tests and remove all those below 18 from policing duties and provide them education and alternative employment.

It said Maoist commanders should release all children from their ranks and take strict measures to prevent further recruitment.

Maoist rebels are active in at least 13 of India’s 29 states and say they are waging a war for the rights of poor landless and tribal people.

Prime Minister Manmohan Singh has described the Maoists as the biggest threat to India’s internal security.

Thousands of people, mostly police, paramilitary personnel and government officials as well as rebels, have been killed in the Maoist insurgency since the late 1960s.

Groups protest DNA collection law

0

The Legislative Black Caucus and civil rights activists criticized yesterday Gov. Martin O’Malley‘s plan for implementing a new program for collecting DNA samples from crime suspects, accusing the administration of turning its back on hard-fought compromises for safeguards and oversight.

O’Malley made the DNA bill one of his priorities this year and worked hard to win passage of the legislation in the Maryland General Assembly – but only after significant changes during lengthy negotiations, particularly with the Black Caucus. The law calls for DNA samples to be taken from those charged with violent crimes and burglary; previously, samples were taken only after a conviction.

The Maryland State Police issued the proposed regulations to implement the law last month. But concerns from lawmakers have prompted the Joint Committee on Administrative, Executive and Legislative Review to put a hold on the regulations. The committee doesn’t have the authority to overturn the regulations, but it often seeks tweaks during the promulgation of rules.

Leading black lawmakers, the American Civil Liberties Union, the National Association for the Advancement of Colored People and the state public defender’s office say the proposed regulations don’t ensure that DNA samples are taken only when someone has been charged with a crime, rather than at the time of arrest as would have been the case under language originally proposed by O’Malley. They also say the regulations don’t adequately address access to DNA samples or procedures for expungement, which would be required when someone isn’t convicted.

“I am really challenging the O’Malley administration to come forth and put their cards on the table,” said Sen. Verna L. Jones, a Baltimore Democrat and caucus member. “If they were not going to be fair and aboveboard with us, they should not have been in negotiations with us just to make sure that legislation got passed.”

O’Malley said his administration would entertain any suggestions for changing the regulations. The Democratic governor had championed the expansion of the DNA database as a crime-fighting tool but ran into fierce objections in the legislature, where some said it would be unconstitutional and would exacerbate racial bias in the criminal justice system because the database would primarily comprise information about African-Americans and Latinos.

“We welcome the input of the Black Caucus. We welcome the input of the ACLU,” O’Malley said. “And we also welcome the ability that local enforcement will have to solve violent crimes, to solve murders and rapes, and to lock up people for very long periods of time once we have a case on them.”

It is unclear whether substantial changes will be made to the regulations. Kristen Mahoney, head of the Governor’s Office of Crime Control and Prevention, disputed many of the issues raised by activists and emphasized that the administration would have no reason to circumvent the compromise provisions it agreed to during the General Assembly session.

“At some point, the ACLU and public defender needs to work with what the General Assembly passed rather than continuing to object to this. They just don’t like the law. That’s what this is,” Mahoney said. “And they are looking in every corner to take this tool away from law enforcement.”

The dispute could escalate. Lawmakers and activists called for hearings on the proposed regulations and threatened to sue if the administration doesn’t make changes. They argue that the proposed regulations fail to follow the spirit and letter of the newly enacted law, and in particular the negotiated provisions that were meant to limit potential abuses.

The critics contend the regulations do not explicitly address procedures for expungement from federal databases or how to prohibit familial searches that could give rise to racial profiling with DNA collected by the state when it is uploaded to the federal level. They also say the regulations invite excessive force by police officers by not defining the “reasonable force” that can be used in collecting samples.

But Mahoney said those concerns are unfounded. She said that when records are expunged from the state database, they are automatically deleted from the federal database, and she noted that Maryland regulations can’t be applied to the federal government. She also said that “reasonable force” is defined in case law and insisted that the regulations limit the taking of DNA samples to suspects who have been charged.

A number of problems with the state’s crime labs have surfaced in recent years. Last month, the Baltimore Police Department’s crime lab director was dismissed after revelations that analysts had contaminated evidence with their own DNA. A few years earlier, officials say, police practices and disorganization at the lab led to contamination and unreliable gunshot residue test results.

The legislature approved a bill in 2007 to bolster oversight of crime labs, and O’Malley is expected to appoint members to a forensic advisory board by the end of the year. While the board is expected to have support from existing state staff, lawmakers yesterday said the governor needs to step up oversight efforts not only in response to past problems but also as the database grows.

Sen. Delores G. Kelley, a Baltimore County Democrat, said, “We need to have staff and experts go out and certify to the public that we are not a kangaroo court with regard to the way we run forensic labs.”

France marches online to protest ‘security’ database

0

Personal privacy is, of course, a major issue these days, particularly when it comes to authorities gathering data in schemes such as the UK’s proposed identity card program or France’s Edvidge electronic database.

Edvidge, the French government’s new repository of information aimed at keeping an eye on citizens who it deems merit surveillance, is currently drawing mass protests two months after it was signed into law.

Kids too

Among other things, it can track people from age 13 who are involved in unions, politics or who represent a threat to public order. Although those first two categories aren’t likely to attract many 13-year-olds, this hasn’t gone down too well in France.

Alluding to the new powers to record information about an individual’s appearance, finances and even friends, former education minister François Bayrou said, “With just a few clicks of the mouse, any government official or civil servant will have access to intimate data”.

Sign up online

So far, the main protest has been online — over 100,000 signatures are listed on the anti-Edvidge website — but more will surely follow.

According to Reuters, appeals to France’s highest courts are already underway with a view to nipping the government’s giant electronic monitor in the bud.

Lib Dems would scrap ID Cards to fund radical police reforms

0

The Liberal Democrats yesterday accused both Labour and the Conservatives of ducking the hard decisions on police reform in favour of a sentencing arms race, as they launched their proposals for fundamental reform of the way the police are run.

The ideas, outlined in the paper Cutting Crime: Catching Criminals With Better Policing, highlight the urgent need to move the criminal justice debate away from what sounds tough to what actually works, with a shift away from prison towards policing and detection.

The main proposals include:
> 10,000 extra police on the streets, paid for by scrapping ID cards
> Reviewing the police contract including lifetime employment for 30 years, the single point of entry and pay levels
> Annual fitness tests for frontline officers
> Decentralising the force by scrapping counterproductive central targets, introducing the local setting of priorities and budgets and the direct election of the majority of police authority members
> Creating a National Crime Reduction Agency to assess police and criminal justice policies on evidence and to spread best practice
> Respecting police pay awards from the Police Arbitration Tribunal

Commenting, Liberal Democrat Shadow Home Secretary, Chris Huhne said:
“For too long, policing and criminal justice policy have been decided by what sounds tough, rather than what works.

“Prison, a sentencing arms race between Labour and the Tories, and Labour’s legislative diarrhoea in creating 3,600 new criminal offences since 1997, have been used as a proxy for real action on crime.

“The radical proposals outlined by the Liberal Democrats today are designed to shift the debate away from posturing on penalties and towards catching criminals.

“Labour and the Conservatives have repeatedly ducked the difficult decisions on police reform. Only the Liberal Democrats are committed to a review of outdated working practices in the police.”

Copyright Publictechnology.net

Former Yugoslav war crimes tribunal spokeswoman indicted for contempt

0

By Paul Mitchell | The International Criminal Tribunal for the former Yugoslavia (ICTY) has indicted Florence Hartmann, the spokeswoman of the tribunal’s former Chief Prosecutor Carla Del Ponte from 1999 to 2006, on two charges of contempt of court. Hartmann has been ordered to appear before the court on September 15, charged with revealing information relating to confidential decisions made by judges in the trial of the late Serbian leader Slobodan Milosevic. If found guilty, she could face seven years in jail or a fine of €100,000 (US$150,000).

According to the contempt charges, Hartmann–who has been critical of Western power–“knew that the information was confidential at the time of the disclosure was made, that the decisions from which the information was drawn were ordered to be filed confidentially, and that by her disclosure she was revealing confidential information to the public.”

The charges relate to Hartmann’s disclosure of the confidential information in her book Peace and Punishment: The Secret Wars of Politics and International Justice (Paix et Châtiment) published on September 10, 2007, and in an article entitled “Vital Genocide Documents Concealed,” published by the Bosnian Institute on January 21, 2008.

The charges say her book gives details of decisions by the appeals court between September 20, 2005, and April 6, 2006, and the confidential nature of those decisions. Lead prosecutor Sir Geoffrey Nice said he was denied “fundamental information.” The court also refused to hand the same evidence over to the International Court of Justice in a genocide case brought by Bosnia against Serbia for the massacre of 8,000 Bosnian Muslims at Srebrenica in 1995 by VRS units under the command of General Ratko Mladic–officially the largest mass murder in Europe since World War Two. The ICJ could not prove the Serbian government’s direct responsibility for the actions of the VRS, finding instead that Serbia had violated the Genocide Convention by failing to use its influence to prevent genocide or arrest Mladic.

In her article, Hartmann criticises the ICTY for contributing to “concealing the truth” and violating the UN Security Council resolution that established the tribunal in 1993, which states “the work of the ICTY shall be carried out without any prejudice to the rights of the victims to seek compensation for damages incurred as a result of international humanitarian law.”

Hartmann denies the contempt charges, saying, “For me and my lawyers, it’s a question of free speech and the right to inform, with transparency, the public on a subject of public interest.

“We cannot say international justice is not a subject of public interest; it’s a subject even of humanity interest.”

Hartmann says she found out about the charges from a news release before she had been officially notified, explaining, “The registry sent me a copy yesterday night [August 27], three hours after the press was informed, and my lawyer who was representing me at the point I was a suspect had not been informed yet.”

Her lawyer, William Bourdon, denounced the charges, saying that they were “motivated by non-legal concerns,” and added, “Taking action against Ms. Hartmann means that all those who, legitimately, in the interest of the public and of history, wish to bear witness to their actions in the service of international penal justice will be muzzled.”

Hartmann also expressed surprise at the timing of the charges a year after her book was published. They come less than a month after her outspoken criticism of the Western powers following the arrest of fugitive Bosnian Serb leader Radovan Karadzic hit the world’s headlines. She accused the West of protecting Karadzic, who was arrested in July for genocide and other war crimes allegedly committed during the war in Bosnia-Herzegovina between 1992 and 1995, when he was president of the Bosnian Serb Republic and supreme commander of the Bosnian Serb army (VRS). Karadzic is also accused of responsibility for the 44-month shelling of the Bosnian capital, Sarajevo, and the Srebrenica massacre.

Karadzic asserts that he was granted an immunity deal by former US Ambassador to the UN Richard Holbrooke, who brokered the Dayton Accord that ended the Bosnian War, provided he disappeared from public life. He has asked the Tribunal to order the appearance of Holbrooke and former US Secretary of State Madeleine Albright and two other officials allegedly involved in the deal. Holbrooke and Albright deny the accusations.

Hartmann claims that the US, Britain and France “blocked” the arrest of Karadzic and Mladic in order to prevent them putting “the blame for the crimes they have committed on the international community by saying that they have been given a green or orange light to take over the Srebrenica enclave.”

“Sometimes arrest operations were halted by [former French President Jacques] Chirac personally, other times by Clinton.

“Western powers created the conditions for mass killings to happen,” she declared.

Hartmann also maintains that from the day the ICTY was created, “there was an effort to steer justice to justify the actions of the big powers in their response to the war, the genocide.”

“They consistently tried to overlook who was indicted, and then selectively provided evidence and even altered it depending if the Tribunal mandate to establish the truth would harm them or not.”

To date, Hartmann’s book has only been published in French and Bosnian. As a result of the charges, publishers will be less inclined to publish it in English and other languages, denying the book a wider audience. They also serve as a warning to anyone else before the Karadzic trial opens to keep quiet about the role of the Western powers at Srebrenica or in the break-up of Yugoslavia.

White House spied on Iraq leaders, says Bob Woodward book

1

By Haroon Siddique | The Bush administration has spied on the Iraqi prime minister, Nouri al-Maliki, and other senior figures in his government, the Washington Post reported today.

The claim is one of many in a new book by the paper’s associate editor Bob Woodward, who with Carl Bernstein uncovered the Watergate scandal that led to Richard Nixon’s resignation.

The War Within: A Secret White House History 2006-2008 is based on more than 150 interviews with key figures in the Iraq war as well two interviews with the president himself. The books paints a picture of Bush often at loggerheads with his military advisers and other officials.

Woodward says groundbreaking surveillance techniques — and not the much-trumpeted surge by 30,000 additional troops – were the main reason for the reduction in violence in Iraq over the past 16 months.

In 2006, Bush maintained publicly that US forces were winning, while privately believing the strategy of training Iraq security forces and transferring responsibility to the new government was failing, according to the Post.

Woodward says the president lost confidence in General George Casey, then the commander of coalition forces in Iraq, and General John Abizaid, who was the head of US central command.

In October 2006 Bush asked his national security adviser, Stephen Hadley, to carry out a review of the Iraq war. But the report ignored the military and was kept secret for fear of jeopardising the Republican party’s popularity in the mid-term congressional elections, the book says.

The Pentagon reluctantly agreed to a troop surge of two brigades, but the White House decided on five. Asked how this decision was reached, Bush told Woodward: “Okay, I don’t know this. I’m not in these meetings, you’ll be happy to hear, because I got other things to do.”

Woodward says Casey described the 2007 surge as a “troop sump”. Abizaid and the then defence secretary, Donald Rumsfeld, also opposed the scale of the operation, and the secretary of state, Condoleezza Rice, had reservations.

Casey told a colleague that Bush reflected the “radical wing of the Republican party that kept saying, ‘Kill the bastards! Kill the bastards! And you’ll succeed'”, writes Woodward.

The book says joint chiefs of staff were in near revolt in late 2006, with Admiral Michael Mullen, then serving as chief of naval operations, fearing the military would “take the fall” for failure in Iraq.

Woodward does credit the influx of troops with contributing to the fall in violence. But he cites as important factors the Shia cleric Moqtada al-Sadr’s reining-in of his powerful Mahdi army, the so-called Anbar Awakening – in which Sunni fighters allied with US forces to fight against al-Qaida – and covert operations targeting key individuals in extremist groups.

While Bush developed a close relationship with Maliki, US officials feared the impact the surveillance of the prime minister would have, according to Woodward. “We know everything he says,” a source told Woodward.

The book is Woodward’s fourth on the Bush administration and its actions in Iraq and Afghanistan.

10 Ways to Reduce Plastic Consumption

0

By Neil McLaughlin | By now you have likely heard of the Great Pacific Garbage Patch, a tragic byproduct of the plastics industry and consumerism that is an island of garbage floating in the northern Pacific Ocean. Originally the size of Texas and approaching the size of the Sun, this gargantuan pile of plastic is collected by currents that swirl around in a big circle. Most of the debris is picked up from the shores of both China and North America that sandwich it.

As plastic never goes away, it eventually crumbles up into tiny bits (photo-degrades). These bits of plastic enter the food supply and are passed from the jelly fish all the way back up to humans where it is stored in their livers (that part is only fair). Plastic also pollutes the water with PCB’s (PolyChlorinated Biphenyls, dangerous carcinogens and hormone disruptors).

While no one person is to blame, every person has contributed to the Great Pacific Garbage Patch (it’s a safe bet the Atlantic also has one lurking somewhere). Whether one throws litter on the ground or trusts in their municipal trash companies to do it for them, everyone throws away plastic and it ends up in the ocean and then back in our bodies.

While some say cleanup is impossible, hopefully someday someone will find a solution. Perhaps they will find a way to convert plastic to energy (it is made of oil after all), and they can make a ship refueling station out there that will produce energy from plastic. Or perhaps nanotech robots can disassemble it and bring it to the recycler. (Such technology would be extremely dangerous as it would have to be careful not to accidentally disassemble Kenny Rogers face). In the meantime there are many things people can do to at least help prevent this pile of garbage from getting any larger.

Ways to Reduce Plastic in Landfills

1) Avoid Products that use Plastic to Begin With

Plastic is made from petroleum hence it is so ubiquitous today. Plastic is convenient but most of the cheaper grades (the clear stuff) find its way into our food, often leaving a film on anything that is wrapped in it and which we then eat. Microwaving anything in plastic cooks plastic residues right into the food, vaporizing other chemicals that contaminate the food and air. Consider the amount of sheer waste a single meal or even serving produces (Kraft Singles is second only to Individually Wrapped Breaths of Air ™ in the Most Wasteful Products Award). Reuse glass or Tupperware containers for leftovers instead of plastic wrap. Store water in the high grade blue plastic bottles only. Prefer cheese that is made from raw milk.

2) Kick the Bottle

High on the list of most wasteful products is Individually Wrapped Drinks of Water, a lingering 1990’s fad for those pretending to be health conscious. Picture a lake compared to a lake of plastic bottles and that is basically what we now have in the Pacific. Corporations are taking over town aquifers and selling it back to the people for $2 per bottle. Shipping one bottle of water costs on average 1/3 bottle of fuel. It is best to filter or distill your own water and use metal or glass containers. Companies like Nalgene make trendy reusable water containers of high grade plastic. Opt for tap water with lemon in restaurants. Note: wait staff seem trained to always supply a plastic straw with every drink (probably so you don’t notice the lipstick on the rim of the glass), so remember to request no straw with your drink.

3) Recycle or Reuse Materials

Plastic can be recycled and you will find that when you start recycling you at least save money on trash bags. Many containers can be washed out and reused (though they should be sterilized with apple cider vinegar). Note that only the higher grade plastics can be reused.

4) Choose Products with Biodegradable Plastic

Now many plastic cups along with packaging peanuts and other supplies are available in a biodegradable form. Companies like Ecosafe and Natur-Tec are providing real solutions to the plastic problem.

5) Repair, Sell or Upgrade Gadgets

Many people run out and buy the latest new cell phone or iPod more often than needed, discarding their old phones in the rubbish where they not only add to plastic landfill but also leak out various other contaminants like Mercury. Meanwhile older components, while larger, are often superior as they tend to be constructed of much more solid materials. By repairing your items you can keep things in top shape much longer. Tackle small problems when they arise. Take the time to fix things right. Buy used products when possible and sell your items when they are no longer needed. Prefer products that offer replacement parts.

6) Recycle Computer Parts

If you must discard items like monitors or printers, at least take them to an electronics recycler. Staples accepts old monitors, etc. for a small fee.

7) Use Cloth Grocery Bags

While this is more of a challenge for men as they look like pocketbooks, it is important to avoid bringing home so many plastic bags. Cloth bags can help. Some shoppers at the farmers market seem afraid to let any vegetables touch any other vegetables, insisting that each be individually wrapped. A better method is to use as few bags as possible, to reuse those taken, recycle them when they tear, and especially to avoid using them to begin with by bringing your own bag. Eventually this will save money as stores are considering charging for them.

8)Do Sweat the Small Stuff
The worst pieces of plastic are the tiny bits. These are the ones that birds, turtles and fish mistake for food and eat and then can’t pass them. Eventually these poor animals become full of plastic and they die of starvation, or they are consumed by larger animals and the process continues. After these animals die, the plastic is the only part that is left behind where it kills again.

9)Don’t be a Litter Bug
Many feel that if they don’t litter, they will be putting the garbage man out of a job. Some will simply chuck their used car batteries (full of sulfuric acid) into the woods behind their home. The truth is that this debris will persist for decades and humans leave enough of a footprint without adding insult to injury. In the 1970’s there were TV commercials with Woodsy Owl reminding us to “Give a Hoot Don’t Pollute”. In today’s corporate controlled media the best we get is talk about the Carbon Tax. Even the threat of Nuclear War is brushed aside by the media in favor of the War on Drugs, the War on Terror, and the War on Manners.

10)Clean up your Neighborhood Ponds
Many neighborhoods have small ponds containing water that is cleaner than their municipal tap water. These ponds are often teeming with fish and turtles that help keep them pure. Sadly however these ponds (and wildlife) are normally loaded with plastic debris. By taking 15 minutes each week, one person can really help clean up their neighborhood. The process is surprisingly relaxing and the animals will appreciate it. Do note that random passerby will think you are out on parole, so wearing an orange jumpsuit is not recommended. Ideally, organize a neighborhood trash pickup (nowadays that may require legal waivers in case participants obtain a boo boo).

References

GPGP Wiki
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Great_Paci…

Plastic grades:
http://www.thegreenguide.com/doc/108/plastic

Fake Soldiers Used In RNC Video

0

It was a video that was supposed to elicit soaring patriotism and real emotions about the Pledge of Allegiance. But to do that, it used fake soldiers and a staged military funeral instead of the real thing.

On Tuesday night, 15-year-old Victoria Blackstone, a sophomore at the St. Agnes School in St. Paul, led the crowd at the Xcel Energy Center in the Pledge of Allegiance. The audience heard her 434-word essay, “Pledging myself to the Flag of the United States of America,” an essay she’d entered in the “Wave the Stars & Stripes” essay contest and won. The RNC turned that essay into a three and a half minute video, a visually stirring montage rolling over Victoria’s words about sharing the Pledge with Americans who have stood at important moments in history.

There’s the Continental Congress…A real WWII vet…Photos of workers at Ground Zero. A close-up of a folded flag presented to a grieving widow at a military funeral… profiles of soldiers swelling with pride in slo-motion.

But CBS News found that the footage of the ‘funeral’ and soldiers is what is called ‘stock’ footage. The soldiers were actors and the funeral scene was from a one-day film shoot, produced in June. No real soldiers were used during production.

The footage, sold by stock-film house Getty Images was produced by a commercial filmmaker in Chicago. Both Getty and the production company, Mr. Big Films, confirmed that the footage was shot on spec and sold to the Republican National Committee.

One of the actors, Perry Denton of Chicago, Ill. also confirmed that he was hired on a day-rate as an actor for the shoot and told CBS News he was surprised to learn the footage was shown at the convention.

 

A veteran’s advocate said that with soldiers still deployed and in harm’s way, there is an obligation not to sugar coat reality.

“What it does reveal is a serious lack of understanding and a lack of personal connection to the military,” said Paul Rieckhoff, Executive Director of the Iraq and Afghanistan Veterans of America.

Rieckhoff, who is at the convention with a contingent of veterans added that a video tribute to Medal of Honor winner Michael Monsoor, a Navy Seal killed in Iraq, shown on Tuesday night, used combat video that appeared to him and several other veterans of the Iraq war to have been staged.

After a Web search of videos played at the Democratic National Convention last week, CBS News found no obvious use of stock footage.

The RNC did not respond to CBS News’ request for a comment.

Police block anti-war march to GOP convention

0

Several people who refused to clear the area Thursday were arrested after a planned, anti-war march to the site of the Republican National Convention became a sit-in after police blocked the protest route.

Hundreds tried to cross two different bridges leading from the state Capitol to the Xcel Energy Center, where Sen. John McCain was accepting his party’s nomination for president. But they were met by lines of police, in gas masks and riot gear, who blocked the bridges after the marchers’ permit expired.

Police began making arrests about two hours into the standoff as the crowd dwindled from about 1,000 to around 100.

“The important thing is even though we didn’t have a permit to march, people have decided they want to keep protesting despite all these riot police,” said Meredith Aby, a member of the Anti-War Committee.

Even as police made arrests, the mood was more relaxed than earlier in the week, when violence erupted.

It even turned festive at times.

Younger people did cartwheels, and tourists came to check out the spectacle. The chants, which were political at the outset, turned silly a couple hours in.

“You’re sexy, you’re cute, take off the riot suit,” protesters serenaded those blocking their path.

Besides the arrests at the sit-in, a young couple lying on the Capitol lawn was arrested before the march began.

St. Paul Police Sgt. John Lozoya said the man was suspected of breaking a window at a Macy’s during a march downtown on Monday. He did not know why the other person, a young woman, was arrested.

Protesters circled the officers, chanting “Let them go, let them go,” as they made the arrests.

Speakers at a rally, which attracted about 500 people, angrily accused police of trying to intimidate protesters and vowed the march would go on.

“The kids were just sitting on the ground and the police walked up to them and jumped them,” said Lisa Stone, 41, of St. Paul, who witnessed the arrests. “This is a demonstration to try to promote peace. That’s not going to happen if this is the way they’re going to act. All it’s doing is hyping everyone up.”

More than 400 people have been arrested in the past week, most on Monday, when violence broke out at the end of another anti-war march.

The Anti-War Committee, which organized Thursday’s march, urged others to join in and denounced the increased presence of police in riot gear and acts of “intimidation” in the city.

Minnesota Gov. Tim Pawlenty blamed the week’s violence on a small group of “anarchists, nihilists, and goofballs who want to break stuff and hurt people.”

“They need to be dealt with,” Pawlenty said in a radio interview with WCCO-AM of Minneapolis.

Earlier Thursday, about 150 people marched peacefully from the Capitol across the Mississippi River to a park near the Xcel center, chanting: “Hey hey, ho ho, Bush and Cheney need to go to Guantanamo.”

Associated Press

Soldiers’ Suicide Rate On Pace to Set Record

0

By Ann Scott Tyson | Suicides among active-duty soldiers this year are on pace to exceed both last year’s all-time record and, for the first time since the Vietnam War, the rate among the general U.S. population, Army officials said yesterday.

Ninety-three active-duty soldiers had killed themselves through the end of August, the latest data show. A third of those cases are under investigation by the Armed Forces Medical Examiner’s Office. In 2007, 115 soldiers committed suicide.

Failed relationships, legal and financial troubles, and the high stress of wartime operations in Iraq and Afghanistan are the leading factors linked to the suicides, Army officials said.

The officials voiced concern that an array of Army programs aimed at suicide prevention has not checked a years-long rise in the suicide rate. Still, they said, the number of deaths probably would have climbed even more without such efforts.

“What does success look like? Frankly, we do not know,” said Col. Eddie Stephens, deputy director for human resources under the Army’s personnel division.

The Army’s suicide rate has increased from 12.4 per 100,000 in 2003, when the Iraq war started, to 18.1 per 100,000 last year. Suicide attempts by soldiers have also increased since 2003, Stephens said.

This year the death rate is likely to exceed that of a demographically similar segment of the U.S. population — 19.5 per 100,000, Stephens said. According to service officials, the last time that occurred was in the late 1960s during the Vietnam War, when the United States had a draft Army that suffered from serious discipline problems. In 1973, the nation created an all-volunteer force that has generally enjoyed an above-average level of mental health, a condition contradicted by the recent rise in suicides.

The latest Army prevention efforts include the hiring of hundreds of new mental health providers, the production of an interactive video on the subject, to be released this fall, and the introduction of an intervention program aimed at teaching junior Army leaders not only suicidal symptoms but actions that can prevent suicides.

The ACE program includes handing out laminated cards decorated with the ace of hearts that advise three steps — “ask,” “care” and “escort” — that spell “ACE”: Ask your buddy direct questions such as “Are you thinking of killing yourself?”; care for your buddy by taking away weapons; and escort your buddy to a military chaplain or health provider.

“Take away the weapon if someone is playing Russian roulette with it. . . . Unfortunately, people have not always done that,” said Brig. Gen. Rhonda Cornum, the Army’s assistant surgeon general for force protection. Army prevention programs to this point have not trained soldiers adequately in what to do after they learn a comrade is in crisis, she added.

Another measure that Cornum said has proven effective is for Army commanders in combat zones to take a more “humanistic” approach and to return soldiers home so they can deal with personal crises and thereby “live another day to keep serving.”

Col. Scott McBride, commander of the 1st Brigade of the 101st Airborne Division, said such measures have helped him prevent any suicides among his 4,000 soldiers, who have been deployed in northern Iraq for the past year.

“If they’re having a problem at home and we can keep a family together, reduce stress by sending a soldier home so he can take care of that problem, we’re doing that,” McBride said yesterday by video link from Iraq.

Stand Up for Independent Journalism

4

Amy Goodman and others were released, but the story is not over.

We need you to cosign our public letter demanding that press intimidation cease immediately, and that all charges be dropped. It will be delivered immediately to St. Paul Mayor Chris Coleman, the RNC Host Committee and the local prosecuting attorneys. We need 10,000 signatures in the next 24 hours, so please take action now:

Sign the Letter: Drop All Charges Against Journalists

In addition to these arrests, police with firearms drawn raided a meeting of the video journalists’ group I-Witness and arrested independent media, bloggers and videomakers. We’re also receiving late-breaking reports of other arrests.

By signing this letter, you’re sending a powerful message: Officials must rein in aggressive and violent tactics by local law enforcement, stop the targeting of journalists and immediately drop all charges against them.

Reporting by independent journalists is vital to a functioning democracy. Americans must have access to diverse sources of information to hold their leaders accountable. Journalists must be free to do their jobs without intimidation.

Please Take Action by Signing this Letter

Don’t wait. We need a free press now more than ever. Tell your friends and take action now!

1. Watch the video of Goodman’s arrest.

2. See other journalists being arrested as reported by UpTake.

3. News of the AP arrest.

4. Learn more about the arrest of an ABC News producer during the Democratic Convention in Denver.

5. Watch the video of the police raid of I-Witness journalists (Caution: strong language).

Stand Up for Independent Journalism

RFID leakage is hushed up – claim

2

MOST RFID products — like passports and Oyster cards — leak data like sieves says Brit firm, Peratech.

By Tony Dennis | The scandal broke back in August but those affected — like government agencies and credit card companies — are trying to hush the problem up rather than fix it claims Peratech’s Taysom.

The worst offenders are the latest generation of ‘biometric’ passports, he says. These very easily leak information via RFID scanning. And the victims won’t even notice it is happening.

The information — garnered from airports — would be sufficient to enable a passport to be cloned, he reckons. But in Taysom’s opinion, the solution is easy. Just install an ultra-thin switch using Peratech’s QTC technology [see earlier INQ story].

This would mean that a biometric passport would only give its secrets up when somebody depresses the switch. That would make RFID sniffing extremely difficult.

Taysom argues that the USA is taking the whole RFID issue far more seriously than us Brits because the stakes are higher. On teh other hand they may be better at hushing it up too

Some RFID enabled credit cards have limits of around £250. In the UK, hacking an Oyster travel card would only earn you about three quid a go, so it’s currently not really worth it.

The trouble is that the wheels within the financial industry grind very slowly so Peratech shouldn’t hold its breathe waiting for credit card company execs to come knocking on its door.

U.S. Food and Water Supply Poisoned by Perchlorate

0

By Joanne Waldron | According to a report by the Organic Consumers Association, a toxic chemical that is a byproduct of rocket fuel is rapidly poisoning the food and water supply in the United States. Known as perchlorate, this chemical has been found in 93% of the nation’s milk and lettuce supply in a recent FDA study. It has also been found in the drinking water for at least 22 states at extremely alarming levels. Perhaps the scariest statistic is that perchlorate has been found in the breast milk of 97% of the mothers who were tested.

What are Americans supposed to eat?

Unfortunately, lettuce and milk weren’t the only foods that were found to be contaminated. Perchlorate was found in tomatoes, carrots, cucumbers, spinach, citrus, melons and more. Sadly, even organic vegetables were affected, because most crops are irrigated from polluted water sources. In a Wired.com article by Amit Asaravala, Bill Walker, the vice president of the Environmental Working Group’s West Coast operations, was quoted as saying, “The study confirms what we and some other people have been saying for a while — that perchlorate is not only a problem in areas with known water contamination but for anyone who eats food grown in the U.S.”

A report by the Environmental Working Group (EWG) warns that ingesting lettuce or any other vegetable that is grown anywhere irrigated by the Colorado River would result in an exposure to an unsafe level of perchlorate per standards set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Farms that use this water for irrigation are responsible for growing almost all of the lettuce sold in the United States during the winter months. The EWG also reports that if a pregnant woman were to eat an ordinary serving of vegetables with the contamination levels that were found at Lucky Farms, a San Bernardino grower of lettuce and other vegetables, she would get a dose of rocket fuel over 100 times greater than what the EPA would consider “safe” for a liter of drinking water. Wow! Health-conscious consumers who eat a plant-based diet consisting of lots of dark, leafy greens, fruits and vegetables could actually be harming their health by consuming toxic levels of perchlorate.

Health Implications

According to a website by Laura Power, MS, PhD, LDN, perchlorate is a toxin that interferes with thyroid function by supplanting iodine in the body, causing harm to iodine transporters. This can be responsible for numerous health problems, notes Dr. Power, including “hypothyroidism, thyroid cancer, goiter, breast disease, disruption of the menstrual cycle, immune system dysfunction, poor fetal development, and mental retardation of newborns.” A book by Mary J. Shomon, Living Well with Hypothyroidism: What Your Doctor Doesn’t Tell You… That You Need to Know (Revised Edition), reports that in areas with the greatest amount of perchlorate contamination, rates of congenital hypothyroidism are much higher than normal which means that pregnant mothers need to be particularly concerned about this.

To illustrate the severity of the problem, a CDC study demonstrated that in the 36% of women in the U.S. with low iodine intake, just about any exposure to perchlorate at all was associated with a substantial change in levels of thyroid hormone. That’s over one in three women. Moreover, the Organic Consumers Association reports that for every one out of ten of these women, if they were exposed to as little as 5 ppb of perchlorate in drinking water, the subsequent hormone disruption would require treatment during pregnancy for sub-clinical hypothyroidism.

Fatigued, Depressed, and Overweight?

If a woman is overly fatigued, depressed or overweight, she may be suffering from hypothyroidism caused by perchlorate contamination. According to Dr. Power, there are many other symptoms of hypothyroidism such as brittle nails, poor memory, constipation, menstrual irregularities, high cholesterol, poor concentration, irritability, dry skin, dry hair, hair loss and more. Imagine how frustrating it might be for a woman who is drinking lots of water and eating lots of healthy salads but isn’t making any progress losing weight due to thyroid disease caused by perchlorate ingestion. Clearly, anyone who has the above symptoms should consult a qualified health care provider immediately.

Check the Water Supply

One thing everyone can do is to check their water supplies. A map provided by the EPA shows the location of all of the perchlorate releases as of April 2003. The Environmental Working Group (EWG) also provides a table of where top soil or ground water is contaminated by perchlorate and a table that shows sites of known perchlorate use in 36 states. As previously noted, many who live near the Colorado River are affected (about 20 million people).

Install a Water Filter

Those who live in areas that have been contaminated should definitely install a water filter capable of removing perchlorate, probably some type of reverse osmosis filter. These filters won’t remove all of the perchlorate, but it is best to reduce the amount of perchlorate to the extent possible. Reverse osmosis filters won’t remove things like radon from the water and are probably best combined with a carbon filter. Needless to say, those with children attending schools that use water contaminated with perchlorate should take action to demand that the schools install proper filters, too, as drinking perchlorate-contaminated water could cause developmental delays in children, according to Dr. Power.

Get Sufficient Iodine

Unfortunately, there is no way to remove perchlorate from contaminated vegetables, and buying organic produce doesn’t help when it comes to perchlorate. One can try to purchase vegetables that aren’t grown in areas that use contaminated water to irrigate crops, but this probably won’t be possible for the majority of people. Obviously, people can’t stop eating. However, it is absolutely essential to ensure that one’s diet has a sufficient amount of iodine to attempt to compensate for any perchlorate ingestion. Some people may wish to supplement with kelp or eat more sea vegetables, but it is best to discuss the proper dosage of any supplements with a qualified healthcare provider.

Write and Complain

Finally, one more thing that can be done is to write to lawmakers and demand that the people who are polluting the environment with perchlorate clean it up now. A number of people in some communities in California that have water that has been poisoned by perchlorate are being charged 15% surcharges to clean up the mess made by polluters, reports The Gilroy Dispatch. This is so wrong. According to Senator Feinstein from California, “Nearly all perchlorate has been produced by the Department of Defense and its contractors and in the country’s space programs.” Maybe everyone should write to NASA and The Department of Defense and complain, too.

The EPA has not established a maximum legal limit in tap water for perchlorate, according to a database maintained by the EWG. This is outrageous —- there are millions of people in the United States drinking water that has been contaminated with this toxin. Since perchlorate is currently unregulated in tap water, there are no violations recorded in the EPA’s violations database, ironically labeled the “Safe Drinking Water Information System.” Meanwhile, under the current federal tap water law, any level of perchlorate is legal! That’s right. Water suppliers are not even required to test for perchlorate. Given the health implications of perchlorate ingestion, the stupidity of this kind of lack of regulation is just incredible. Write to the EPA, and let them know that this lack of regulation is just insanity.

A Wake-up Call

When people have to be concerned with drinking a glass of water or eating a salad, there is a problem. The FDA reports that the inhibition of iodine uptake by perchlorate is a “precursor that can lead to hypothyroidism,” and pregnant women and their fetuses are “the most sensitive populations to the health effects of perchlorate.” How bad will the situation have to get before environmental regulators will no longer be able to ignore the mass poisoning of the nation’s food and water supply?

Contact Information

Contact The Environmental Protection Agency:

Mailing address:
Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water (4601)
Ariel Rios Building
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW
Washington, DC 20460-0003

Phone and Fax:
Phone: 202-564-3750
Fax: 202-564-3753 (Director’s office)
Fax: 202-564-3751 (Drinking Water Protection Division)
Fax: 202-564-3752 (Standards and Risk Management Division)

or e-mail the Director, Cynthia Dougherty @ Dougherty.Cynthia@epa.gov

Contact the FDA:

Food and Drug Administration
5600 Fishers Lane
Rockville, Maryland 20857

or by telephone:

1-888-INFO-FDA (1-888-463-6332) — main FDA Phone Number (for general inquiries)

Contact local, state and federal officials – just enter zip code:

(http://www.congress.org/congressorg/home/)

Contact the Department of Defense:

(http://www.defenselink.mil/faq/comment.html)
or +1 (703) 428-0711 +1

Contact NASA:

((http://www.nasa.gov/about/contact/ask_n…)

Public Communications Office
NASA Headquarters
Suite 5K39
Washington, DC 20546-0001
(202) 358-0001 (Office)
(202) 358-3469 (Fax)

Judge says gov’t must produce waterboarding memos

0

A federal judge has ruled in New York that the government must either produce memos on waterboarding and other harsh interrogation methods used by the CIA or explain why they should be kept secret.

U.S. District Judge Alvin K. Hellerstein says the memos are “clearly responsive” to a lawsuit filed in 2003 by the ACLU and other civil rights groups seeking records on the treatment of prisoners in U.S. custody overseas.

The U.S. attorney’s office in Manhattan declined to comment Wednesday.

The New York Times last year disclosed the existence some of the Justice Department memos. It said they authorized interrogators to use methods like waterboarding, head slapping and exposure to freezing temperatures.

AP

Corporate Whistleblowers Are Left Dangling

0

By JENNIFER LEVITZ | The Department of Labor, charged with enforcing the federal law protecting corporate whistleblowers at publicly traded companies, has been dismissing complaints on the technicality that workers at corporate subsidiaries aren’t covered.

[Chart]

The government has ruled in favor of whistleblowers 17 times out of 1,273 complaints filed since 2002, according to department records. Another 841 cases have been dismissed. Many of the dismissals were made on the grounds that employees worked for a corporate subsidiary, says Richard Moberly, a University of Nebraska law professor. He studies issues involving workers who face retaliation from employers for reporting wrongdoing, and based his findings on department data. The rest of the cases are either pending, withdrawn or were settled.

Sen. Patrick Leahy, a Vermont Democrat who helped craft the whistleblower provision — part of the Sarbanes-Oxley corporate governance act — says the law was meant to cover workers in corporate subsidiaries. “Otherwise, a company that wants to do something shady, could just do it in their subsidiary,” he said.

Sharon Worthy, a Labor Department spokeswoman, said the agency “believes that there is no legal basis for the argument that subsidiaries of covered corporations are automatically covered” under the Sarbanes-Oxley whistleblower provision. “The plain language of the statute only applies to publicly traded corporations,” she said in a statement.

The agency declined to provide the exact number of cases dismissed because employees worked for a subsidiary. Ms Worthy said only 17 employees have won favorable findings because many cases are settled before adjudication. Records show 187 cases have been settled to date.

The dismissed cases include three whistleblower complaints against the German manufacturing conglomerate Siemens AG and two against London media giant WPP Group PLC. The Labor Department rejected all five cases because the employees worked for subsidiaries, agency records show. Both companies declined to comment.

Another pending case involves UBS AG, the Swiss bank. The plaintiff, Timothy Flynn, alleged that in June he was suspended from his job as a UBS financial adviser for cooperating with a Massachusetts investigation of the bank’s sales of auction-rate securities. Mr. Flynn’s attorney, Jason Archinaco, says the Labor Department has asked him to show that the UBS unit that employed his client is covered under the act.

UBS declined to comment.

The Sarbanes-Oxley act, passed by Congress in 2002 in response to the Enron Corp. and Worldcom Inc. scandals, included the first federal protection for corporate whistleblowers. Before, there was only a patchwork of state laws protecting them from retaliation. Under the act, remedies can include back pay, reinstatement and attorney’s fees.

The Labor Department’s division of Occupational Safety and Health Administration enforces the whistleblowers’ provision. It prohibits publicly-traded companies or “any other officer, employee, contractor, subcontractor, or agent of such company” from retaliating against employees who provide information or assist in investigations related to alleged fraud. According to Sen. Leahy, the provision was written to be “interpreted as broadly as possible.”

In a whistleblower case still pending at the Labor Department, Carri Johnson, a Minnesota woman, alleges she received a poor performance review and was fired from her job as a manager at Siemens Building Technologies Inc. in 2004 after reporting suspected fraud.

Financial figures for Siemens Building, based in Buffalo, Ill., are included in Siemens AG’s consolidated financial statements, which describe the unit as one of the company’s “operation groups.”

In a Labor Department filing, Siemens Building argued that it wasn’t covered under the whistleblower provision. In November, an administrative law judge at the department sided with the company. Ms. Johnson appealed to the Labor Department’s administrative review board, where the case is pending.

Gregory Jacob, the agency’s chief legal officer, has asked the review board to uphold the November decision, according to filings in the case. In a legal brief, he argued that Ms. Johnson had not shown that the two companies were “significantly interrelated” or that Siemens AG controls employment policies at Siemens Building. He also wrote that the Sarbanes-Oxley law does not “expressly” mention subsidiaries.

In the last two years, the Labor Department has dismissed two other Siemens whistleblower complaints because the plaintiffs worked at subsidiaries, according to agency filings. Nearly all of Siemens AG’s approximately 400,000 employees work at its business groups, according to Siemens AG’s 2007 SEC filings.

In the last year, department judges have dismissed two whistleblower complaints filed by employees at subsidiaries of WPP Group PLC, saying workers at its subsidiaries aren’t protected by Sarbanes-Oxley. In its annual report, WPP describes its various companies as being “centrally integrated.”

Joseph Burke, a former production director at Ogilvy & Mather, alleged that the WPP advertising unit decreased his job responsibilities and ultimately fired him in retaliation for his cooperation with a federal criminal investigation into his employer’s billing practices. Mr. Burke had testified in a 2005 federal trial, which led to the sentencing of two former Ogilvy executives to prison for overbilling the government for an antidrug campaign.

According to Labor Department filings, Ogilvy denied that Mr. Burke’s dismissal was related to his testimony and said he was part of a “reduction in force.” A company executive testified that Mr. Burke was a “terrific worker,” according to a summarized transcript of the hearing,

Ogilvy argued that Mr. Burke’s complaint should be dismissed because the company isn’t subject to the Sarbanes-Oxley whistleblower provision. In May, a Labor Department administrative law judge dismissed Mr. Burke’s whistleblower complaint, saying he “has not established, by a preponderance of evidence, that he is an employee of a company covered under” the Sarbanes-Oxley whistleblower provision.

Under Sarbanes-Oxley, whistleblowers eventually can appeal Labor Department’s rulings to federal circuit court. But they face “an uphill battle,” says Mr. Moberly, the law professor.

White House strategy is to help McCain win in November

0

The Fake U.S. Victory in Iraq

The Independent | Political events in Iraq are seldom what they seem. The hand- over by the US military of control of Anbar province, once the heartland of the Sunni rebellion, to Iraqi forces is a case in point. The US will keep 25,000 American soldiers in Anbar, so the extent to which the Iraqi government will really take over is debatable. But the future of Anbar is a crucial pointer to the fate of Iraq. It is a vast area and one of the few parts of Iraq that is overwhelmingly Sunni.

The Iraqi government is dominated by Shia Islamic parties in alliance with Kurdish nationalists. The vital question now is whether or not this Shia-dominated government can reassure the Sunni minority that they are not going to be overrun as the US withdraws its forces. The Prime Minister, Nouri al-Maliki, is in a very confident mood. In the past four months he feels he has successfully faced down the Shia militiamen of Muqtada al-Sadr’s Mahdi Army by taking back control of Basra, Sadr City and Amarah. Then he refused to sign a new security accord with the US which President George Bush wanted to see agreed by August 31.

In the past few weeks he has been confronting his Kurdish allies over the future of the oil city of Kirkuk and the town of Khanaqin.

Mr Maliki may be overplaying his hand but there is no doubt that the Iraqi state is becoming more powerful in Iraq and the Mahdi Army, the Americans and the Kurds less so. The Americans in particular feel that he exaggerates the extent to which his success against the Mahdi Army was because of the new strength of the Iraqi security forces.

These troops were doing badly until they received American support.
Nevertheless, Mr Maliki’s position is strong. He seems to have realized that he may need the US, but the US also cannot do without him and is in no position to replace him as it did with his predecessor, Ibrahim al-Jaafari.

Much of what the White House is now doing is done to help the Republicans in the presidential election. The aim is to give the impression that Iraq has finally come right for the US and victory is finally in its grasp. The surge is promoted as the strategy by which the tide was turned and it is true that the Sunni uprising against the US occupation has largely ended.

But it has done so for reasons that have little to do with the surge or American actions of any kind. Crucial to the success of the government against the Mahdi Army has been the support of Iran. It is they who arranged for the Shia militiamen to go home.

It takes real cheek for Mr Bush to claim yesterday that “Anbar is no longer lost to al-Qa’ida” since during the last presidential election in 2004, he was claiming that the media was exaggerating the success of the insurgents.

Patrick Cockburn is the Ihe author of “Muqtada: Muqtada Al-Sadr, the Shia Revival, and the Struggle for Iraq

Obama might pursue criminal charges against Bush administration

3

By Elana Schor in Washington | Democratic vice-presidential nominee Joe Biden said earlier this week that he and running mate Barack Obama could pursue criminal charges against the Bush administration if they are elected in November.

Biden’s comments, first reported by ABC news, attracted little notice on a day dominated by the drama surrounding his Republican counterpart, Alaska governor Sarah Palin.

But his statements represent the Democrats’ strongest vow so far this year to investigate alleged misdeeds committed during the Bush years.

When asked during a campaign event in Deerfield Beach, Florida, whether he would “pursue the violations that have been made against our Constitution by the present administration”, Biden answered in the affirmative.

“We will not be stopped from pursuing any criminal offence that’s occurred,” he continued, going on to praise congressional committees for the deliberate pace of their inquiries into alleged Bush administration misdeeds.

Members of Congress are “doing the right thing, they’re not making false accusations about anything … they’re collecting data, subpoenaing records, they’re building a file”, Biden said.

“If there has been a basis upon which you can pursue someone for a criminal violation, they will be pursued — not out of vengeance, not out of retribution, out of the need to preserve the notion that no one, no attorney general, no president — no one is above the law.”

Obama sounded a similar note in April, vowing that if elected, he would ask his attorney general to initiate a prompt review of Bush-era actions to distinguish between possible “genuine crimes” and “really bad policies”.

“[I]f crimes have been committed, they should be investigated,” Obama told the Philadelphia Daily News. “You’re also right that I would not want my first term consumed by what was perceived on the part of Republicans as a partisan witch hunt, because I think we’ve got too many problems we’ve got to solve.”

When asked about his comments by Fox news today, Biden said he has no evidence that criminal charges would be warranted and no intention of pursuing action against the current president.

“What is true is the United States Congress is trying to preserve records on questions that relate to whether or not the law has been violated by anyone,” Biden said, adding: “But, you know, there’s been an awful lot of unsavoury stuff that’s gone on. And the mere fact … that it occurred in a previous administration doesn’t mean [a subsequent] Justice Department, if, in fact, there’s evidence, shouldn’t pursue them. “But I have no evidence of any of that. No one’s talking about pursuing President Bush criminally.”

Congressional Democrats have issued a flurry of subpoenas this year to senior Bush administration aides as part of a broad inquiry into the authorisation of torturous interrogation tactics used at the Guantanamo Bay prison camp.

Three Bush White House veterans have been held in criminal contempt of congressional committees for refusing to respond to subpoenas in an inquiry on the firing of federal prosecutors: former counsel Harriet Miers, former political adviser Karl Rove, and current chief of staff Josh Bolten. The battle over Miers’s and Bolten’s testimony is currently before a federal court.

RNC protesters charged with terrorist offences

3
RNC 8 Charged with “Conspiracy to Riot in Furtherance of Terrorism”

In what appears to be the first use of criminal charges under the 2002 Minnesota version of the Federal Patriot Act, Ramsey County Prosecutors have formally charged 8 alleged leaders of the RNC Welcoming Committee with Conspiracy to Riot in Furtherance of Terrorism. Monica Bicking, Eryn Trimmer, Luce Guillen Givins, Erik Oseland, Nathanael Secor, Robert Czernik, Garrett Fitzgerald, and Max Spector, face up to 7 1/2 years in prison under the terrorism enhancement charge which allows for a 50% increase in the maximum penalty.

Affidavits released by law enforcement which were filed in support of the search warrants used in raids over the weekend, and used to support probable cause for the arrest warrants, are based on paid, confidential informants who infiltrated the RNCWC on behalf of law enforcement. They allege that members of the group sought to kidnap delegates to the RNC, assault police officers with firebombs and explosives, and sabotage airports in St. Paul. Evidence released to date does not corroborate these allegations with physical evidence or provide any other evidence for these allegations than the claims of the informants. Based on past abuses of such informants by law enforcement, the National Lawyers Guild is concerned that such police informants have incentives to lie and exaggerate threats of violence and to also act as provacateurs in raising and urging support for acts of violence.

“These charges are an effort to equate publicly stated plans to blockade traffic and disrupt the RNC as being the same as acts of terrorism. This both trivializes real violence and attempts to place the stated political views of the Defendants on trial,” said Bruce Nestor, President of the Minnesota Chapter of the National Lawyers Guild. “The charges represent an abuse of the criminal justice system and seek to intimidate any person organizing large scale public demonstrations potentially involving civil disobedience, he said.”

The criminal complaints filed by the Ramsey County Attorney do not allege that any of the defendants personally have engaged in any act of violence or damage to property. The complaints list all of alleged violations of law during the last few days of the RNC — other than violations of human rights carried out by law enforcement — and seeks to hold the 8 defendants responsible for acts committed by other individuals. None of the defendants have any prior criminal history involving acts of violence. Searches conducted in connection with the raids failed to turn up any physical evidence to support the allegations of organized attacks on law enforcement. Although claiming probable cause to believe that gunpowder, acids, and assembled incendiary devices would be found, no such items were seized by police. As a result, police sought to claim that the seizure of common household items such as glass bottles, charcoal lighter, nails, a rusty machete, and two hatchets, supported the allegations of the confidential informants. “Police found what they claim was a single plastic shield, a rusty machete, and two hatchets used in Minnesota to split wood. This doesn’t amount to evidence of an organized insurrection, particularly when over 3,500 police are present in the Twin Cities, armed with assault rifles, concussion grenades, chemical weapons and full riot gear,” said Nestor. In addition, the National Lawyers Guild has previously pointed out how law enforcement has fabricated evidence such as the claims that urine was seized which demonstrators intended to throw at police.

The last time such charges were brought under Minnesota law was in 1918, when Matt Moilen and others organizing labor unions for the Industrial Workers of the World [ed. correction-TCIMC] on the Iron Range were charged with “criminal syndicalism.” The convictions, based on allegations that workers had advocated or taught acts of violence, including acts only damaging to property, were upheld by the Minnesota Supreme Court. In the light of history, these convictions are widely seen as unjust and a product of political trials. The National Lawyers Guild condemns the charges filed in this case against the above 8 defendants and urges the Ramsey County Attorney to drop all charges of conspiracy in this matter.

Source:
Bruce Nestor, President
Minnesota Chapter of National Lawyers Guild

Cabinet Office ordered to release secret memos on Iraq dossier

0

Secret emails and memos showing how the Iraq war dossier was “sexed-up” must be released by the Cabinet Office, The Independent has learnt.

 

By James Macintyre | Richard Thomas, the information commissioner, has told civil servants to release undisclosed material which could provide “evidence that the dossier was deliberately manipulated in order to present an exaggerated case for military action”.

After repeated freedom of information requests, Mr Thomas says in a 20-page ruling given to The Independent that there is a clear public interest in seeing comments about drafts of the dossier between 11 and 16 September 2002, in the days before Alastair Campbell suggested changes. Mr Thomas adds that there is no national security justification for keeping these comments from politicians secret.

The Government’s case for the war was set out in the dossier about Saddam Hussein’s weapons capabilities, published on 24 September 2002 and overseen by the head of the Joint Intelligence Committee, Sir John Scarlett.

Mr Campbell suggested 11 changes to the draft, which were all adopted in the final week before publication, included changing how biological weapons “could be used” to “are capable of being used”, and changing “may have” to “have”, regarding the authority of Saddam’s sons’ to launch chemical or biological weapons. Tony Blair famously claimed in the document that Saddam could deploy weapons of mass destruction “within 45 minutes of an order to use them”.

The prospect of a return to the debate over the dossier — which led to a furious row between the BBC and the Government, the death of Dr David Kelly and the subsequent Hutton Inquiry — will horrify ministers who hoped Tony Blair’s departure from office last year had drawn a line under the affair.

Dr Kelly, a Ministry of Defence biological weapons inspector, committed suicide in Oxfordshire woodlands in July 2003 after finding himself at the centre of the WMD “sexing up” storm. The catalyst for the scandal was a report on Radio 4’s Today programme by the journalist Andrew Gilligan, who had met Dr Kelly to discuss Alastair Campbell’s role in the dossier.

Downing Street went on the hunt for the report’s source, and Dr Kelly’s name was mentioned in some reports before he apparently slit his wrists and took an overdose of prescription drugs.

In Lord Hutton’s subsequent inquiry into Dr Kelly’s death, a string of changes to the dossier by Mr Campbell and Jonathan Powell, Mr Blair’s chief of staff, were made public. The new ruling by the information commissioner follows a three-year campaign by the journalist Chris Ames, who believes the Government is withholding key information about its case for the war.

In a passage that appears to confirm for the first time the existence of new, so-far-undisclosed material, Mr Thomas says: “Having considered the information which was withheld by the Cabinet Office, the commissioner is not satisfied that all of the comments on the draft dossier constituted information which engages the section 24 exemption [relating to national security]”.

The commissioner points out that comments made by political figures — such as press officers in Downing Street — as opposed to intelligence officials, do not require protection on grounds of national security. “Specifically, he [the commissioner] does not consider that the comments arising from bodies other than the Defence Intelligence Staff, and some of the comments made by officials to the Defence Intelligence Staff relating solely to the drafting of the dossier, can be said to amount to information whose exemption is required for the purpose of safeguarding national security.”

The letter was signed on behalf of the commissioner by his deputy, Graham Smith. The Cabinet Office now has 35 days either to publish the information requested by Mr Ames, or to appeal.

Mr Ames said: “The commissioner has laid bare the Government’s farcical cover-up, which included shamelessly playing the national security card. He has also given a strong hint that the Government has concealed evidence of sexing-up to save political embarrassment.”

The ‘sexed-up’ dossier

Iraq’s Weapons of Mass Destruction: The Assessment of the British Government, was published on 24 September 2002 to coincide with the return of Parliament after a summer in which war in Iraq was edging closer. Tony Blair used the dossier to bolster his case for invasion. John Scarlett oversaw the compilation of the dossier, and allowed changes to be inserted by Alastair Campbell and others. The row between the Government and the BBC was ignited when Mr Campbell reacted furiously to a report by Andrew Gilligan on the Today programme implying that he had inserted a key claim in the dossier stating weapons could be launched in 45 minutes. Mr Gilligan’s report was said to have been based on conversations with intelligence sources, one of whom appeared to be Dr Kelly.

New revelations on VP choice heighten crisis of McCain campaign

1

By Patrick Martin | After a series of politically damaging reports about Alaska Governor Sarah Palin and her family, there is mounting speculation that Republican presidential candidate John McCain may be forced to replace her as his vice presidential running mate. As ABC News asked on its web site, “how long a trip is it from there to Tom Eagleton/Harriet Miers territory?” (both nominees who were compelled to withdraw.)

The candidate herself has not been heard from since her first weekend of campaigning with McCain. She has given only a single media interview–a family-oriented piece of puffery in People magazine, conducted last Friday–and will apparently accept the vice presidential nomination at Wednesday night’s session of the Republican convention without having answered a single press inquiry about her qualifications or political views.

Palin cancelled the one public appearance she was scheduled to make–a speech to the Republicans for Life caucus, a grouping of the most fanatical anti-abortion activists headed by Phyllis Schafly. The group had planned to give Palin an award for her opposition to abortion rights even before the vice presidential selection was announced.

On Monday, Palin and her husband Todd issued a brief written statement acknowledging that their oldest daughter Bristol, 17, was pregnant and planning to marry the father of her unborn child, subsequently identified as Levi Johnston, 18, a former hockey star at Wasilla High School.

While one cannot but feel sympathy for the two young people, barely more than children, now the subject of a media frenzy, there is little basis for extending that sympathy to Governor Palin or the array of reactionary, moralizing preachers and pundits who have suddenly discovered the value of privacy (something they routinely deny to young pregnant women who make a different choice than Bristol Palin).

As for claims that the candidate’s children should be off-limits in the campaign, Palin made her model family the main selling point on her fitness for the vice presidency, speaking at length of her son’s enlistment in the military and deployment in Iraq and her own efforts to combine motherhood and a political career.

In the People magazine interview, she went out of her way to mention that she was still breast-feeding her four-month-old son Trig, declaring, in response to a question about whether she was a “morning person,” that she occasionally had to “in the middle of the night, put down the BlackBerrys and pick up the breast pump.” She brought her four youngest children from Alaska to Dayton, Ohio to display on stage at the announcement of her candidacy, including the pregnant Bristol.

There is an overpowering element of hypocrisy in the whole affair. The Christian right seeks to impose fundamentalist precepts on the entire American population–by banning abortion, contraception, sex education, the teaching of evolution, stem cell research, etc. Yet they blithely defend Governor Palin on the grounds that Bristol’s pregnancy (as well as Todd Palin’s drunk-driving charge and similar incidents) are proof that the Palins are just regular folks. As McCain speechwriter Mark Salter declared, “These things happen. This has probably happened to millions of American families.”

It is certainly true that every American family has its issues and problems, immensely exacerbated by the deepening social and economic crisis of the profit system. And that is precisely why tolerance, sensitivity and social support are required, rather than the punitive, moralizing and dehumanizing strictures of those who claim to derive all of the governing principles of society from a literalist interpretation of the Bible.

There have been so many new facts uncovered about the Palin family over the last 48 hours, or assertions about her by the McCain campaign that have proven to be false, that it is possible here only to refer to them briefly.

* It was reported that Palin has hired a personal lawyer to respond to the investigation voted by the Republican-controlled state legislature of her efforts to fire her former brother-in-law from his job as a state trooper. The ethics panel was scheduled to report October 31, four days before the presidential election. Palin evidently aims to postpone this until after the vote.

* State election officials have confirmed that Todd Palin registered in 1995 and again in 2000 as a member of the Alaska Independence Party (AIP), a right-wing group dedicated to achieving a statewide referendum on secession from the United States, and whose slogan, “Alaska First,” contrasts ironically with the official McCain campaign slogan, “Country First.” Sarah Palin claims never to have been a member of the AIP, but AIP party chairwoman Lynette Clark told ABC News that both Palin and her husband belonged to the party in 1994 and attended its convention that year. Palin also addressed the AIP state convention as governor in 2007, by video hookup.

* Former officials of the town of Wasilla have said that Palin not only removed the police chief after she took office, but also sought to remove the town librarian and “asked the library how she could go about banning books.”

* While the McCain campaign has cited Palin’s titular role as head of the Alaska National Guard as constituting national security experience, officials of the Guard have rebutted this ludicrous claim. Maj. Gen. Craig Campbell, adjutant general of the Alaska National Guard, said neither he nor Palin play any role in national defense activities of the Guard, which are conducted entirely under federal control. Campbell himself was appointed in 2003 by Palin’s predecessor.

* Palin claimed to have played a leading role in rejecting the “bridge to nowhere,” a highly publicized $225 million boondoggle connecting the town of Ketchikan, Alaska to a nearby island populated by 50 people. The Washington Post reported Tuesday that she had initially supported the project, only reversing her position when the project came under attack in Congress. And in her capacity as mayor of Wasilla, she secured $27 million in federal earmarks for her town of 6,700 people–an average of more than $4,000 for every man, woman and child. The earmarks were inserted into legislation by Alaska’s senior senator, Ted Stevens, and Congressman Don Young, one indicted and the other now facing a corruption probe.

The McCain-Palin campaign was in increasingly defensive mode as media inquiries mounted. Although the Republican campaign was running television ads as recently as August 27 branding Democratic candidate Barack Obama as “dangerously unprepared to be president,” the Palin nomination has compelled them to unceremoniously scrap that line of argument, given 72-year-old McCain’s selection for his vice presidential running mate of a virtual unknown with less than two years’ experience as governor of one of the nation’s least populous states. Senior McCain adviser Charles Black blandly declared, “We never used experience as the big argument.”

Equally hollow were the complaints that false Internet rumors about Sarah Palin were now driving the media coverage of the election campaign. Chief campaign organizer Steve Schmidt blustered, “It used to be that a lot of those smears and the crap on the Internet stayed out of the newsrooms of serious journalists. That’s not the case anymore.” In reality, the McCain campaign has been profiting from Internet smears for months. A whole host of Republican Party-linked organizations have been flooding the Internet with scurrilous rumors against Obama, most notably attempts to link him with Islamic fundamentalism.

Some press accounts have begun to shed additional light on the extraordinary backstage maneuvers that produced the Palin nomination, detailing the inordinate influence of the Christian fundamentalists in vetoing McCain’s initial inclination to name Senator Joseph Lieberman or former Pennsylvania governor Tom Ridge as his running mate, because both support abortion rights.

The New York Times reported Tuesday, “With time running out–and as Mr. McCain discarded two safer choices, Gov. Tim Pawlenty of Minnesota and former Gov. Mitt Romney of Massachusetts, as too predictable–he turned to Ms. Palin. He had his first face-to-face interview with her on Thursday and offered her the job moments later. Advisers to Mr. Pawlenty and another of the finalists on Mr. McCain’s list described an intensive vetting process for those candidates that lasted one to two months. ‘They didn’t seriously consider her until four or five days from the time she was picked, before she was asked, maybe the Thursday or Friday before,’ said a Republican close to the campaign. ‘This was really kind of rushed at the end, because John didn’t get what he wanted. He wanted to do Joe or Ridge.’”

NBC Political Director Chuck Todd reported on the network’s web site, “more and more reporters are learning just how close McCain came to picking [Lieberman] as his running mate. In fact, if my sources are correct, Lieberman was virtually a done deal inside McCain’s mind as of 10 days ago. But then, he was talked out of his pick by top adviser Charlie Black and campaign manager Rick Davis. Both believed a pro-choice running mate would create convention chaos.”

National Review Online underscored the influence of the Christian fundamentalists, noting that as the McCain campaign was drafting the statement announcing Bristol Palin’s pregnancy, a group of top McCain aides met. Their assignment “was to call a list of about 40 top evangelical and other cultural conservative leaders. Each one would get a personal explanation of the story, and each was asked for his or her reaction. The McCain people reached nearly everyone before the story broke, and the verdict was unanimous–all the leaders supported Palin and her place on the McCain ticket.”

While media criticism of the Palin nomination remains tentative and muted, there are reports of intense recriminations within the Republican camp. David Frum, a former Bush speechwriter and right-wing activist, told the Los Angeles Times, “I really hope McCain did his homework. I cannot stifle a growing sense of unease that he didn’t.”

The Times also reported Tuesday: “One Republican strategist with close ties to the campaign described the candidate’s closest supporters as ‘keeping their fingers crossed’ in hopes that additional information does not force McCain to revisit the decision. According to this Republican, who would discuss internal campaign strategizing only on condition of anonymity, the McCain team used little more than a Google Internet search as part of a rushed effort to review Palin’s potential pitfalls. Just over a week ago, Palin was not on McCain’s short list of potential running mates, the Republican said.”

The picture is extraordinary: a campaign flailing about in desperation, and, for all of McCain’s professions of “independence,” completely in thrall to the most reactionary elements in American political life.

The only thing which sustains the Republican Party and the McCain-Palin campaign is the complicity of the media and, most importantly, the Democratic Party itself. Obama issued a well-publicized statement denying that his aides were responsible for the Internet rumors about Sarah Palin, and declaring that candidates’ families should be off-limits in the political campaign. But neither Obama, nor his running mate Joseph Biden, nor any other Democratic Party representative dares to put the spotlight on the critical political fact demonstrated by the Palin nomination: the ability of extreme right-wing and fascistic elements to dictate the policies and even the candidates of the Republican Party.

“Labour making our job harder” – police chief

1

By Vikram Dodd | One of Britain’s most senior police officers has claimed government policies have damaged public and police confidence in the criminal justice system.

Mike Fuller, chief constable of Kent, told the Guardian he believes dangerous criminals are avoiding jail or being released early because of a lack of places in the country’s prisons.He claims the crisis was entirely foreseeable: five years ago, ministers ordered police to bring more offenders to justice, but failed to think through the consequences.

He also said forces are over-inspected, with hours of his time each week wasted answering to 13 official national bodies, which sometimes gave contradictory advice and uncosted recommendations. Fuller said: “Sentencing policy would appear to be determined more by the number of prison places rather than the seriousness of the crimes people have committed. That means recidivist offenders are being released from prison when they should not be.”

Fuller is regarded as a contender to be the next commissioner of Scotland Yard. Several top officers are jockeying for position to succeed Sir Ian Blair, whose term must end by January 2010, though a series of crises mean some expect he may not survive until then. A report in today’s Times suggest that ministers, senior officials and leading police chiefs have secretly discussed replacement of the commissioner by the end of this year.

Fuller continued: “People committing serious and violent crimes are not receiving as long sentences as they should be, making the job of the police more difficult.”

To back up his claim, Kent police released details of some recent cases. According to the force, a burglar with 100 previous offences received a suspended sentence and then committed another one. Last week a man failed to appear in court having been given bail while awaiting sentence for 255 thefts from motor vehicles; police arrested him, and he was granted bail again – only to fail to show up at the time the court had ordered.

Fuller said he and his officers were frustrated at the overall situation that had emerged over the last two years: “The feeling is the police do their bit, they catch dangerous offenders, and sentencing policy is determined by prison places. It’s a police perception, it’s also my personal perception.” He said that five years ago the government gave a national directive to increase offenders brought to justice: “Not surprisingly, over that time, there has been increased pressure on prison places. What I’m saying, is these problems could have easily been foreseen.”

Asked who could have foreseen them he replied: “One would have to point to the government.”

It had failed to realise how important the public thought tough sentences were: “Sentencing is crucial to confidence. The government has underestimated how important sentencing is to public confidence.”

He said he was talking about offenders who commit burglary, car crime and violent street robberies, and not the most serious crimes of rape or murder.

Recorded crime has been falling for three years, and latest figures show a 12% year-on-year fall, but the prison population is up from 61,000 in 1997 to 83,000 today. The length of a typical jail sentence rose by 13% between 1996 and 2006 to 25.2 months, but has fallen from a peak of 25.9 months. Government figures also show the number of jail sentences handed out by the courts began to fall between 2005 and 2006, down 3% for crown courts and 7% for magistrates.

Richard Garside, director of the Centre for Crime and Justice Studies at King’s College London, said: “The current overcrowding crisis at most is merely intensifying the long-term problem of prisons entrenching, rather than addressing, crime and offending.

“Ministers have exacerbated the problem by setting targets for the police and other criminal justice agencies that, as our research shows, often have little if anything to do with reducing crime or increasing the safety of the public. This is an argument for reducing our reliance on prison as a means of responding to crime, not building ever more places in response to ill-thought-out policy initiatives.”

Fuller is the first chief constable from an ethnic minority background, and he is seen as a possible future commissioner of the Met. His rivals for the highest job in British policing are Ulster’s top officer, Sir Hugh Orde; Bernard Hogan-Howe from Merseyside; and Sir Norman Bettison from West Yorkshire.

Fuller became Kent’s chief constable in 2004 after a 26-year career in the Met. He helped set up Operation Trident, tackling gun violence within African-Caribbean communities, and is a former chair of the Black Police Association. Fuller is also believed to be the only chief constable who is also a qualified barrister.

In the interview, Fuller also took aim at the government’s attempts to ensure the police are up to scratch. He said up to 13 bodies had the right to inspect his force: “There’s always somebody inspecting us, or we’re under the threat of inspection. It is a constant inspection process. Probably at least a third of my time is spent dealing with inspection, inspection processes, preparing for inspection, accounting to inspection bodies.” He said some inspection bodies made contradictory recommendations: “It actually takes us away from our core role. There’s been too many targets… We’ve been over-inspected by too many agencies who often don’t cost their recommendations, who often don’t talk to each other or share information…”

He said accountability was important, but this was best done at a local level: “There is more benefit in being locally accountable than being accountable to central government bodies.”

Fuller said his force faced this level of inspection despite performing well.

He refused to comment directly on the claim of racial discrimination bought by Met assistant commissioner Tarique Ghaffur against Sir Ian Blair. However, he said of a series of race claims bought by senior ethnic minority officers against the Met: “Potentially it is very damaging for recruitment if the service can’t be seen to progress BME [black and minority ethnic] officers and retain them.”

Of his own career, he said his race had led him to be the subject of more critical scrutiny: “I’m judged more critically by the media, by my staff, by my peers, because of my colour.”He had received a friendly reception from officers when he took over Kent four years ago. But he told of one officer who, despite having a black chief constable committed to diversity as a boss, had only carried out stops and searches on black people. The officer was caught two years ago and disciplined.

A Ministry of Justice spokesperson said: “Public confidence in the criminal justice system has increased significantly in recent years and we are working hard to bring more offenders to justice and to improve services to victims and witnesses. Since 1997 the government has increased prison capacity by over 23,000 places. Sentencing in individual cases is a matter for the courts.”

Amy Goodman: Why We Were Falsely Arrested

0

By Amy Goodman | ST. PAUL, Minn.–Government crackdowns on journalists are a true threat to democracy. As the Republican National Convention meets in St. Paul, Minn., this week, police are systematically targeting journalists. I was arrested with my two colleagues, “Democracy Now!” producers Sharif Abdel Kouddous and Nicole Salazar, while reporting on the first day of the RNC. I have been wrongly charged with a misdemeanor. My co-workers, who were simply reporting, may be charged with felony riot.

The Democratic and Republican national conventions have become very expensive and protracted acts of political theater, essentially four-day-long advertisements for the major presidential candidates. Outside the fences, they have become major gatherings for grass-roots movements–for people to come, amidst the banners, bunting, flags and confetti, to express the rights enumerated in the Constitution’s First Amendment: “Congress shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof; or abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press, or the right of the people peaceably to assemble, and to petition the Government for a redress of grievances.”

Behind all the patriotic hyperbole that accompanies the conventions, and the thousands of journalists and media workers who arrive to cover the staged events, there are serious violations of the basic right of freedom of the press. Here on the streets of St. Paul, the press is free to report on the official proceedings of the RNC, but not to report on the police violence and mass arrests directed at those who have come to petition their government, to protest.

It was Labor Day, and there was an anti-war march, with a huge turnout, with local families, students, veterans and people from around the country gathered to oppose the war. The protesters greatly outnumbered the Republican delegates.

There was a positive, festive feeling, coupled with a growing anxiety about the course that Hurricane Gustav was taking, and whether New Orleans would be devastated anew. Later in the day, there was a splinter march. The police–clad in full body armor, with helmets, face shields, batons and canisters of pepper spray–charged. They forced marchers, onlookers and working journalists into a nearby parking lot, then surrounded the people and began handcuffing them.

Nicole was videotaping. Her tape of her own violent arrest is chilling. Police in riot gear charged her, yelling, “Get down on your face.” You hear her voice, clearly and repeatedly announcing “Press! Press! Where are we supposed to go?” She was trapped between parked cars. The camera drops to the pavement amidst Nicole’s screams of pain. Her face was smashed into the pavement, and she was bleeding from the nose, with the heavy officer with a boot or knee on her back. Another officer was pulling on her leg. Sharif was thrown up against the wall and kicked in the chest, and he was bleeding from his arm.

I was at the Xcel Center on the convention floor, interviewing delegates. I had just made it to the Minnesota delegation when I got a call on my cell phone with news that Sharif and Nicole were being bloody arrested, in every sense. Filmmaker Rick Rowley of Big Noise Films and I raced on foot to the scene. Out of breath, we arrived at the parking lot. I went up to the line of riot police and asked to speak to a commanding officer, saying that they had arrested accredited journalists.

Within seconds, they grabbed me, pulled me behind the police line and forcibly twisted my arms behind my back and handcuffed me, the rigid plastic cuffs digging into my wrists. I saw Sharif, his arm bloody, his credentials hanging from his neck. I repeated we were accredited journalists, whereupon a Secret Service agent came over and ripped my convention credential from my neck. I was taken to the St. Paul police garage where cages were set up for protesters. I was charged with obstruction of a peace officer. Nicole and Sharif were taken to jail, facing riot charges.

The attack on and arrest of me and the “Democracy Now!” producers was not an isolated event. A video group called I-Witness Video was raided two days earlier. Another video documentary group, the Glass Bead Collective, was detained, with its computers and video cameras confiscated. On Wednesday, I-Witness Video was again raided, forced out of its office location. When I asked St. Paul Police Chief John Harrington how reporters are to operate in this atmosphere, he suggested, “By embedding reporters in our mobile field force.”

On Monday night, hours after we were arrested, after much public outcry, Nicole, Sharif and I were released. That was our Labor Day. It’s all in a day’s work.

Amy Goodman is the host of “Democracy Now!,” a daily international TV/radio news hour airing on more than 700 stations in North America.

LSD, Ecstasy Tested on Terminally Ill Patients

0

Researchers are exploring the use of hallucinogenic drugs like LSD and ecstasy as a form of “psychedelic psychotherapy” for terminally ill patients, London’s Daily Telegraph reported Tuesday.

A clinical trial involving LSD began in Switzerland, in June. Eight patients were given 200 micrograms of LSD and four patients were given 20 micrograms. They will be assessed for anxiety levels, quality of life and pain levels.

Scientists are also looking into the possibility of using ecstasy to treat patients dealing with post-traumatic stress disorder.

The decision to study the two drugs came after two American studies showed psilocybin, the active ingredient in magic mushrooms, had promising mental health results in both sick and healthy individuals.

Charles Grob, a professor of psychiatry at Harbor-UCLA Medical Center in California, carried out a study of 12 terminally ill patients who took psilocybin.

At least one patient, who has colorectal cancer and had lost hope, said she reached an “epiphany” while taking the mushrooms, that her fear of the disease was destroying the time she had left.

Grob’s study has yet to be published, but it comes on the heels of similar work at Johns Hopkins School of Medicine in Baltimore, Md. Positive results were seen in 36 healthy individuals given psilocybin and observed in a laboratory there.

European researchers are hoping LSD and ecstasy will have similar effects.

Telegraph

‘Stealing America’: Voting-Fraud Documentary

0

The numbers don’t add up.

By Michael Ordoña | $3.8 billion: The initial Help America Vote Act allocation that California Secretary of State Deborah Bowen said “pushed many counties into buying electronic systems that … were not properly reviewed or tested.”
Images
A scene from the documentary “Stealing America: Vote by V…Dorothy Fadiman, director of the documentary “Stealing Am… View Larger Images

18,000: Votes that did not register in a 2006 Sarasota County, Fla., local election using touch-screen machines, in a Democratic stronghold that the Republican challenger won by 368 votes.

Negative 16,022: Votes counted for Al Gore on a Diebold tabulator in Volusia County, Fla., in 2000.

Zero: The number of proven instances of election fraud involving electronic voting machines, according to industry spokespeople.

John McCain, Barack Obama, Paris Hilton; it doesn’t matter who one chooses if the votes aren’t counted properly. Dorothy Fadiman’s new documentary, “Stealing America: Vote By Vote,” is the latest in a line of recent films that question our electoral system’s ability – or propensity – to do just that (among the others: HBO’s Florida election-disaster drama “Recount” with Kevin Spacey; and David Earnhardt’s crisp documentary “Uncounted: The New Math of American Elections,” on Starz this month and available on DVD).

“I was working at the polls as a volunteer in 2004, and while we were being oriented, we were told that people were reporting that when they vote for Kerry, they’re getting Bush. It was rampant in South Florida. And we were told, ‘Don’t tell people, because we may be discouraging them from voting,’ ” said Fadiman, whose earlier documentaries on abortion rights garnered her an Oscar nomination and an Emmy win. Appalled by the lack of media coverage of the vote-switching phenomenon and other apparently widespread election irregularities, she spent the next four years making “Stealing America.”

Fadiman’s no-frills documentary touches on voters being purged from rolls in Florida in 2000 (she believes purging to be the single greatest threat to the 2008 election) and suspiciously insufficient distribution of voting machines in Ohio in 2004. But its most damning segments concern results that defied exit polling and the vulnerability of electronic voting machines.

“What we have here is an extraordinarily compelling case that our electoral system has gone terribly wrong,” said Brad Friedman of BradBlog and the Huffington Post, who appears in both “Stealing America” and “Uncounted.” “We’ve got one election after another that makes no sense whatsoever. They may have been rigged, they may have failed due to error – (but because they can’t be audited) it’s 100 percent faith-based voting.”

Friedman said he personally experienced vote switching on a Diebold disabled-accessible machine in Los Angeles in 2006, as four of his 12 votes flipped: “The Kerry-Bush error has occurred all over the country. And they seem to constantly benefit the Republican over the Democrat. If this is a random error that occurs because the machines are crappy, it should be 50-50.”

Chris Riggall is a spokesperson for Premier Election Solutions (formerly Diebold), one of the leaders in the voting-machine industry. When asked by e-mail if the machines’ security vulnerabilities discussed in various scholarly studies had been addressed, he responded that “sometimes the criticisms are not factual because they are based on incorrect assumptions (such as networking or the presence of wireless ports on machines). On other occasions, the studies have recommended valuable improvements. … There’s no question that the emphasis on system security by voters, election officials and the industry is much greater now than it was, say, five years ago.”

“I think the key issue right now is voter confidence,” said Peter Lichtenheld of Hart InterCivic, another industry leader with a number of contracts with California counties. Lichtenheld blamed the controversial elections in 2000 and 2004 and the perceived misconduct of certain officials such as Katherine Harris in Florida, not faulty electronic voting systems, for generating what he called “a sense of distrust.” While pointing out that his company’s systems were the only ones for which California Secretary of State Bowen did not require changes for use in 2007, he added, “Watchdogs are appreciated, for people to say, ‘Hey, we need to pay attention to this.’ That’s a great thing. (But) the naysayer community is marketing fear and intimidation.”

Riggall and Lichtenheld roundly criticized former Diebold Chief Executive Officer Walden O’Dell for his infamous 2003 letter to Republican donors that stated, in part, “I am committed to helping Ohio deliver its electoral votes to the president next year,” agreeing that it contributed to the atmosphere of distrust.

“It was a serious error in judgment that never should have occurred,” Riggall wrote. “In the aftermath of that mistake, we instituted new prohibitions against any political contributions or support by the management and staff of our company.” Riggall also said only one Ohio county used Diebold equipment in that election, and that Kerry collected 59 percent of the votes in that county.

As to industry assertions that there are no documented incidents of election crimes involving their machines, Hart InterCivic recently issued a report that dismissed most problems with electronic voting as “technical glitches … not indicative of election fraud.” Friedman pointed out that the industry has spent a great deal on legal efforts to prevent independent examination of suspect machines.

The report, “Election Fraud: Fact or Urban Legend?,” states that voter error, or more specifically, “ballot layout was determined to be the most likely explanation for the (18,000 non-votes) in the 2006 Sarasota County election.” It also points out that taking issue with election results is natural for “supporters of the losing side.” But Fadiman rejects the notion that such concerns are partisan.

“It turns out between 1996 and 2006, when you see these discrepancies between exit polls and vote tallies, they go in one direction. So that’s like saying a film about slavery is partisan because you don’t give equal credence to the position of slave owners,” she says, then relates the story in her film of a Democratic Ohio state senator who personally experienced vote flipping and said he was told by his own party not to talk about it. “If the Republicans stole this election, the Democrats were willing accomplices.”

Fadiman’s film includes testimonials by people who saw their own votes switch.

“There were lots of tears in the interviews, anger, sadness, frustration,” Fadiman said. “There’s only one tear in the film: Kim Akins, an African American attorney doing election protection. What she saw was there were very long lines and not enough machines, and what she said was, ‘I hope these people come back and vote again.’ “

Blair bodyguard left gun in cafe

0

A police firearms officer left a gun in a coffee shop where it was discovered by a member of the public.

The pistol was reportedly left in the toilets of a central London branch of Starbucks by a police bodyguard who was once Tony Blair’s close protection officer.

A report claims the gun, a semi-automatic Glock 17, was left on the floor of the cafe’s only toilet for 20 minutes.

It belonged to a high-flying female officer in her 30s, it is claimed. She took off the belt holding the firearm when she used the toilet and then bought a coffee, forgetting she had left the gun behind.

The pistol was eventually linked to her when police compared its serial number to those logged at a police armoury.

A Scotland Yard spokesman said: “A police-issue firearm was left unattended in a central London cafe on August 29 and was found by a member of the public.

“The weapon belongs to a Metropolitan Police authorised firearms officer who was on duty at the time.”

It is understood the gun was left in the coffee shop by mistake.

An investigation is being carried out by Scotland Yard’s Directorate of Professional Standards.

Hundreds Arrested for RNC Protest

0

The Advocate | More than 300 people were arrested for protesting in St. Paul, Minn., at the Republican National Convention since its start, two of them younger than 18. As of September 2, 120 of those individuals were arrested for felonies, while 12 were arraigned.  

“With no provocation, police have indiscriminately used rubber bullets, concussion grenades, and chemical irritants to disperse crowds and incapacitate protesters,” the Coldsnap Legal Collective, an activist-based legal collective supporting the arrestees, said in a statement.

Protesters were arrested during anti\poverty and antiwar rallies. Police told the Associated Press that splinter groups of protesters have tried to get past security fencing, harassed delegates, and thrown bottles.

“Based on the vagueness of their charges and the program of police intimidation currently under way, these individuals understand how they will fare if they don’t stick together,” said Rick Kelley of Coldsnap Legal Collective.

Two unidentified minors were sentenced to 30 days in an adult jail on September 2 for refusing to divulge their identity

Marchers and protesters must be released within 36 hours of being detained if the courts cannot prove probable cause for their charges. However, Coldsnap claims medical attention is being withheld as punishment for refusal to provide identification. Detainees who refuse to identify themselves are refused medical prescriptions and charged with the maximum $2,000 bail bond.

One arrestee with hemophilia and another with asthma were denied medication while being detained. An arrestee with a broken finger is being refused medical care, as is a person who has been coughing up blood, according to Coldsnap. 

Big brother, big bother?

0

Is the proposed Communications Data Bill a step too far for the British way of life? Timothy Pitt-Payne reports

 

By Timothy Pitt-Payne | On 15 July this year, the Information Commissioner, Richard Thomas, published his annual report. At the launch of the report he commented on the Government’s proposed Communications Data Bill. Referring to media suggestions that the Bill would make provision for a massive government database holding details of everyone’s telephone and internet communications, he stated that any such proposal would be “a step too far for the British way of life”.

The way in which personal information is held by the Government is a subject of increasing public debate in the UK. There are concerns about the nature and the volume of information that is acquired and retained – this is one of the reasons why the Government’s identity card proposals are so controversial. There are also concerns about security. Public confidence was severely damaged in November 2007, when CDs containing child benefit information about some 25 million individuals were lost by HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC). Since then there has been a series of further security breaches; most recently on 19 August, when a private contractor informed the Home Office that it had lost a computer memory stick containing personal details of tens of thousands of criminals.

The legal background to the Communications Data Bill is complex, but needs to be set out in a little detail in order to make sense of the Commissioner’s concerns. The story begins with a European Union (EU) Directive of 2006 imposing requirements for the retention of “communications data” by telecoms providers and internet service providers (ISPs) across member states. Communications data in this context essentially means information about who is communicating with whom, when and where they are communicating, and what means of communication they are using. It does not include information about the actual content of the communication.

So in relation to telephone usage, communications data would include the timing and destination of phone calls, but not what was said. In relation to internet usage, communications data would not include details of the actual websites visited from a particular computer, though it would include information about when and for how long that computer had been used to access the internet. Even with these limitations, the information covered by the directive can potentially tell you a great deal about ordinary individuals. This kind of information could be used, for example, in order to try and ascertain the whereabouts of a particular individual at a specific time.

Implementation of the Directive in the UK has proceeded in two stages. The first stage was the Data Retention Regulations 2007, which implemented the directive in relation to landlines and mobile phones (but not ISPs). The regulations require telecoms providers to retain communications information for a minimum of 12 months. The regulations do not themselves confer any right for Government to obtain access to the retained information. Instead, access is governed by the Regulation of Investigatory Powers Act 2000 (RIPA 2000) and related regulations, under which various public bodies can access the retained information on request. The potential bases for access are wide-ranging, and are not confined to national security or the prevention of crime. For example, there is a right of access in the interests of the UK’s economic well-being, and another for the protection of public health. A court order is not required, though an order can be sought if access is refused by the telecoms provider.

The Government’s draft legislative programme for 2008-09 was published in May. This contained the first reference to a Communications Data Bill, intended to complete the implementation of the Directive. The draft programme
is uninformative about the detailed content of the proposed Bill, though it is envisaged that the Bill will extend to ISPs – since these were not covered by the 2007 regulations.

Media concern about the implications of the Bill began with a story in The Times on 20 May, suggesting that the Bill will adopt a radically different approach from the 2007 Regulations. According to the story, what is being contemplated is the creation of a central database under government control, containing all the retained records. Instead of merely retaining communications data and providing it on request, providers would automatically pass all of their communications data to the database.

Any proposal of this nature would prompt a number of important questions. One is whether the database would be confined to ISP records, or whether it would also cover telecoms records (the story suggested that both would be covered). A second question is what kind of information would be held. Would the database be confined to communications data, as defined in the Directive? Or would it include information about the actual content of telephone calls, emails and internet usage? And the third and most important question is who would be entitled to use the database, and in what way?

On any view a proposal of this nature would also raise some serious concerns, fully justifying the Information Commissioner’s comments. There is the obvious risk of further security breaches. The possibilities range from accidental large-scale disclosure (as in the HMRC case) to isolated instances of unauthorised access by individual employees. Imagine, for instance, an individual with access to the database who wants to know if his new partner still speaks to her ex-boyfriend on the phone. A second and even more serious risk is that, once the database has been created, more and more ways of using it will be found. Under RIPA 2000, both the range of authorities entitled to access communications data and the purposes for which they are permitted to have access can be amended without the need for primary legislation. If the Bill adopts a similar approach, then there would be the risk of incremental extensions, with limited parliamentary scrutiny. Interest in the database’s contents would not necessarily be confined to the UK. For instance, how would the UK Government respond if the US authorities asked for access to any information held on the new database about passengers intending to travel to the US?

The Information Commissioner has repeatedly warned about the danger of developing a ‘surveillance society’. The danger comes from a combination of legal and technological developments: legal developments that facilitate the collection of personal information on a wide scale, and technological developments that allow that information to be exploited in ever more sophisticated ways. In real life, the quintessentially British double-decker bus that played a starring role in the Olympic closing ceremony would undoubtedly have been monitored by CCTV cameras. Facial recognition software now allows CCTV images to be linked to databases of information about identifiable individuals. The more information about us is held on centralised databases, the greater the potential risk posed by this kind of linkage. For a description of what a surveillance society of the future might look like in practice, Cory Doctorow’s recent dystopian novel, Little Brother, is highly recommended.

Meanwhile, we wait to see the detail of the Communications Data Bill. It is hoped that the fears expressed by The Times and the Information Commissioner will not be borne out when the Bill is published. Public trust in the way in which personal information is held by Government is at a very low ebb. Proposals for massive new databases are not the right way to win it back.

Timothy Pitt-Payne is a barrister at 11KBW and visiting professor of information law at Northumbria University.

DNA databases shut after identities compromised

0

Nature | Several DNA databases run by the US National Institutes of Health (NIH) in Bethesda, Maryland, the Wellcome Trust in London and the Broad Institute in Cambridge, Massachusetts, were closed to public access last week after researchers showed it is possible to extract the supposedly confidential identities of the patients involved. The databases list the frequencies of small DNA variations called single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) from patient groups.

In the August issue of PLoS Genetics, Nils Homer and his colleagues describe a method to mine individual SNP profiles from complex mixtures, even if the person’s DNA is only 0.1% of the total. The method could be useful for ensuring patients are not listed twice when scientists combine data sets, as well as in forensic science.

The NIH has not identified any patient privacy violations, and points out that to identify a particular patient, one would need his or her genetic profile. Researchers will now have to apply for data access at the individual level, as they do for study data.

Thai government tries to shut down 400 websites

1

By Oliver Luft | Thailand’s Information and Communications Technology Ministry sought court orders yesterday to shut down about 400 websites and advised internet service providers to block 1,200 sites it considers a danger to national security or disturbing social order.

ICT minister Mun Patanotai said the department had advised ISPs to immediately block these websites, which it claimed were detected between March and August this year, and had sought court actions against them under article 20 of Thailand’s Computer Crime Act.

The Bangkok Post reported yesterday that the ministry claimed the sites “disturbed the peaceful social order and morality of the people, and/or which were considered detrimental to national security”.

This move to shut down online dissent follows the Thai authorities’ declaration of a state of emergency yesterday as thousands of demonstrators took to the streets to demand the government’s resignation.

Thai prime minister, Samak Sundaravej, announced sweeping curbs to civil liberties to maintain calm, after which the ICT Ministry said it had detected more than 1,200 websites that violated the Computer Crime Act.

In addition, a Thai court issued three orders to shut down about 400 websites, 344 of which, it claimed, carried material that was contemptuous of the country’s royal family. The other blocked websites included two with religious content, one video sex game and five sites deemed to carry obscene content.

The ICT ministry, the Bangkok Post reported, also sought help from the police to “bring all the violators to trial”.

Samak gave the army power to restore order on the streets of Bangkok yesterday after fighting started between his supporters and those demanding he quit.

One demonstrator was killed and dozens were injured during the worst violence seen since anti-government campaigns began in May.

The present crisis started just over a week ago as members of the People’s Alliance for Democracy took over government buildings in an attempt to try to force the Thai government to stand down.

McCain Strategist Blasts Media

0

By Howard Kurtz | Sen. John McCain‘s top campaign strategist accused the news media Tuesday of being “on a mission to destroy” Alaska Gov. Sarah Palin by displaying “a level of viciousness and scurrilousness” in pursuing questions about her personal life.

In an extraordinary and emotional interview, Steve Schmidt said his campaign feels “under siege” by wave after wave of news inquiries that have questioned whether Palin is really the mother of a 4-month-old baby, whether her amniotic fluid had been tested and whether she would submit to a DNA test to establish the child’s parentage.

Arguing that the media queries are being fueled by “every rumor and smear” posted on left-wing Web sites, Schmidt said mainstream journalists are giving “closer scrutiny” to McCain’s little-known running mate than to Democratic presidential nominee Barack Obama.

The McCain camp has been unusually aggressive in pushing back against the media, and it seems to hope to persuade journalists to back off in their scrutiny of Palin. Obama campaign officials have complained to news organizations that their man has been subjected to considerably more investigative reporting than McCain has, but they have done so in more low-key fashion.

By contrast, Schmidt spoke on the record in denouncing as “an absolute work of fiction” a New York Times account of the process by which the McCain campaign vetted Palin. He also charged that Newsweek columnist Howard Fineman was predicting that the governor might have to step down as McCain’s vice presidential choice.

Fineman said that he has “never, ever said that,” and that he has pointed out positive aspects of Palin’s candidacy. “They decided a long time ago that they were going to work the refs,” he said.

Elisabeth Bumiller, the lead author of the Times report, said she is “completely confident about the story.” As for the campaign’s criticism, she said: “This is what they do. It’s part of their operation.”

McCain also canceled a scheduled appearance on CNN‘s “Larry King Live” on Tuesday in retaliation for an interview a day earlier in which prime-time host Campbell Brown repeatedly pressed campaign spokesman Tucker Bounds to provide one example of a decision that Palin had made as commander of the Alaska National Guard.

“The interview was totally fair,” Brown said. “I was trying to get an answer. I was persistent, but I was respectful. That’s my job. Experience is a legitimate issue when John McCain raises it about Obama, and it’s also legitimate for us to raise it about Palin.”

Schmidt, a former spokesman for President Bush and California Gov. Arnold Schwarzenegger, talked openly about his frustrations in an interview with The Washington Post. He said the McCain camp is in the middle of the worst media “feeding frenzy” he has ever seen.

The fact that unsubstantiated allegations appear on the Internet “is not a license for smearing” Palin, he said. “The campaign has been inundated by hundreds and hundreds of calls from some of the most respected reporters and news organizations. Many reporters have called the campaign and have apologized for asking the questions and said, ‘Our editors are making us do this, and I am ashamed.’ ”

The intensity of media inquiries hit a new level after an anonymous blogger on the liberal Web site Daily Kos last weekend charged that McCain’s running mate is actually the grandmother of Trig Palin, the 4-month-old baby born with Down syndrome, and that the real mother is her daughter, 17-year-old Bristol Palin. That led to mainstream media inquiries, which prompted the McCain camp to disclose in a statement Monday that Bristol is five months pregnant and plans to have the baby and marry the teenage father.

Markos Moulitsas, the site’s founder, said he did not know the contributor’s identity but thought that the admittedly “weird” pregnancy questions were a legitimate line of inquiry that he should not suppress.

Some journalists, Schmidt said, have demanded to see Trig’s birth certificate, or have asked when Palin went into labor and whether her contractions increased or decreased as she traveled from Texas to an Alaskan hospital in her home town, Wasilla. Others, he said, have asked whether Palin’s eldest son, Track, who serves in the Army and is deploying to Iraq, is a drug addict. “Categorically false,” Schmidt said, adding: “This is crazy.”

News organizations routinely ask questions about allegations in an attempt to determine their veracity, and Schmidt did not contend that they were publishing or broadcasting false information about Palin and her family. But he said the media is asking more questions about Palin’s pregnant daughter than about Obama’s real estate deal with fundraiser Tony Rezko, who recently was convicted on corruption charges. Obama has called that transaction a “boneheaded mistake.”

Bloggers on the left and right increasingly drive media coverage by turning up the volume on questions until they are difficult to ignore. Sometimes they are right, as when they questioned what CBS‘s Dan Rather said were National Guard documents in a 2004 report on President Bush’s military service that led to Rather’s ouster as the network’s anchor. And sometimes they are wrong. Last year, the New Republic retracted a soldier’s dispatch on petty wartime cruelty in Iraq, and National Review Online acknowledged that two blog postings by a former Marine about military movements in Lebanon were misleading.

Major newspapers, magazines and networks no longer play their traditional gatekeeper role in the digital age, as was evident during the eight-month period when the National Enquirer was charging former senator John Edwards with fathering an out-of-wedlock baby. Most national news outlets did not report the allegations until last month, when Edwards acknowledged an affair with a former campaign aide but denied being her child’s father.

Still, traditional media outlets can amplify and legitimize such reports, which may be why the McCain campaign is fighting so hard to keep the Palin allegations confined to the Internet. Denouncing the news media as biased also plays well with many Republican voters.

Palin has been unavailable to the media since she became McCain’s surprise choice Friday, adding to the difficulties for news organizations pursuing stories about her life and career. Campaign manager Rick Davis said it would be unrealistic for her to grant interviews as she prepares for “the most important speech of her life,” her acceptance address at the convention here. Schmidt said she will be made available for interviews after the convention, a similar timetable followed by Obama’s running mate, Sen. Joseph R. Biden Jr. (Del.).

Perhaps the greatest concern to the McCain campaign is that the constant inquiries, amplified by cable television debates over whether a mother with a pregnant daughter and four other children can effectively function as vice president, will create a perception that her nomination is in trouble. “We are being bombarded by e-mails and phone calls from journalists asking when she will be dropping out of the race,” Schmidt said.

A High Stakes US Gamble with Russia

0

By Stephen Lendman – RINF | Prior to entering WW II, US strategists had a clear aim in mind at its conclusion – to hold unchallengeable power in a new post-war global system: military, economic and political in a “Grand Area” encompassing the West and Far East. Essentially most parts outside the communist bloc and exploiting it under disarming rhetoric like being “selfless advocates of freedom for colonial peoples (and an) enemy of imperialism.” Championing “world peace (also) through multinational control.”

Today, the facade is gone, and no pretense remains about much “grander” plans – over an “Area” comprising planet earth with “full spectrum dominance” over all land, surface and sub-surface sea, air, space, electromagnetic spectrum and information systems with enough overwhelming power to fight and win global wars against any potential challengers with all weapons in our arsenal, including nuclear and others of mass destruction.

One nation above others is an obstacle – Russia. It’s powerful and can’t be intimidated like most others. It’s also dominant where Washington wants control – the Eurasian vastness with its huge oil, gas and other resources. For years, American sought dominance over it. Saw an opening when the Soviet Union dissolved. And one way or other seeks to get it. Russia has other plans, so therein lies the root of the current conflict using Georgia as a US proxy to instigate it.

Beating up on Russia is now fair game. Moscow, for its part, won’t back off, so clear lines are drawn for protracted confrontation in a very high risk gamble for both sides. Russia prefers diplomacy to conflict and seeks alliances with the West and its neighbors. America wants conquest, and look at the stakes. An area from roughly Germany in the West to the Pacific rim. Encompassing Russia, China, the Middle East, and Asian sub-continent. Including about three-fourths of the world’s population and an equal amount of its energy resources. Most of its physical wealth overall and its GDP. No small prize, and America intends to secure it. Russia stands in the way. It controls its own part and influences much of the rest. Welcome to the new Cold War and new Great Game.

It’s only round one, but its roots go back to earlier US efforts to ally with former Soviet Republics. Encircle Russia with military bases and station offensive missiles and advanced tracking radar on its borders. Then Georgia attacked South Ossetia on August 7. Washington orchestrated the aggression. Russia counterattacked after artillery fire killed 15 or more of its peacekeepers, and partially destroyed their headquarters. The entire Tskhinvali capital as well, a civilian target of no military consequence. Border villages were burnt to the ground. Atrocities committed. Malicious attacks against non-combatants. Western media portrayed the aggressor as victim. The same game it always plays – so far with faint letup, save for the heavy Democrat and Republican conventions coverage getting top billing.

The Caucacus (hot) conflict has now ebbed. Russia controls things on the ground. In full compliance with the Sarkozy-brokered peace, according to Foreign Minister Lavrov. All six points of its original version. They include:

— renouncing the use of force;

— halting all military action;

— providing free access for humanitarian aid;

— the return of Georgian forces to their bases;

— Russian forces to their pre-conflict positions; and

— engaging in international discussions on South Ossetian and Abkhazian future status to ensure their security.

Afterwards, Georgian president Saakashvili reneged by unilaterally amending the original agreement. It bears no relation to what Moscow signed. A deliberately confrontational act. Surely directed from Washington. Sharp western criticism followed and ignited the old Cold War blame the Russians game that both surprised and angered the Kremlin.

Its leadership isn’t about to roll over. On August 26, it backed South Ossetian and Abkazian independence and their protection from further Georgian aggression. The populations of both provinces overwhelmingly approve. On August 27, Georgia, in response, withdrew all but two lower level officials from Moscow. On August 29, its parliament supported a resolution to sever diplomatic relations and cancel agreements allowing Russian peacekeepers to remain in both provinces. Russian State Duma Foreign Affairs Committee Head, Konstantin Kosachev, called the action “regrettable” but said its impact on Russia won’t be negative. Until August 29, Russia retained its full Tbilisi staff and said maintaining ties are vital.

According to The New York Times on August 29, that’s now changed after Georgia made it official – breaking diplomatic ties with Russia and Moscow responding in kind. Both countries will retain their consular offices but further political relations will be handled by intermediaries. The move doesn’t prevent both countries’ officials from meeting in neutral territory.

On August 30, RIA Novesti reported two other developments as well. According to Georgia’s reintegration minister, Temur Yakobashvili, that Tbilisi “was formally pulling out of a (May 14) 1994 UN-approved (Abkhazia and Georgia) agreement….on a ceasefire and separation of forces.” It followed Russia’s recognition of Abkhazia and South Ossetia as independent states. Earlier on August 12, Georgian president Saakashvili announced that his country was withdrawing from the Russian-dominated Commonwealth of Independent States, a loose alliance of former Soviet republics.

RIA Novesti’s other report was a slap in the face to Georgia. That the Organization for Security and Cooperation in Europe (OSCE) has evidence about “numerous wrong decisions” Georgian leaders made leading up to the Caucasus crisis – according to the German magazine Der Spiegel. It cited “detailed (Georgian) planning to move into South Ossetia” and backed Russian claims that “the Georgian offensive was already in full swing by the time Russian troops and armored vehicles entered the Roksky Tunnel (bordering Russia and South Ossetia) to protect its peacekeepers and the civilian population.” OSCE’s report went further as well citing “suspected war crimes committed by Georgians, who ordered attacks on sleeping South Ossetian civilians.”

On August 29, Russia Today reported that South Ossetia’s acting parliament chairman, Tarzan Kokoity, announced a deal to host Russian military bases as early as September 2. In addition, two others may be reactivated on their former Abkhazian sites. However, on the same date, the online service also said that Russian Foreign Ministry officials denied such a deal. Only that Russia is “currently working on a cooperation (arrangement) with Abkhazia and South Ossetia, but it’s too early to assess where this may lead.” An agreement is expected to be signed on September 2.

Diplomatic jousting continues as EU leaders weigh further responses and their relations with Russia going forward. For its part, Russia is in no mood to stand idle and is surely mindful of Barak Obama’s convention speech threat to “curb Russian aggression.”

Heated Rhetoric Instead of Hot Conflict

A war of words replaced hot conflict on the ground. Unfair condemnation and heated rhetoric. Western nations on board with Washington. Some like the UK more than others. The corporate media trumpeting approval. Spewing venom and agitprop. Their specialty and what they’re good at. Keeping their audiences uninformed. Their accustomed role. No longer even pretending to report legitimately.

For his part, President Medvedev stood firm and said: “We are not afraid of anything, including the prospect of a new Cold War, but we don’t want one, and in this situation everything depends on the positions of our partners.”

In New York Times and UK Financial Times August 26 op-eds, he explained his decision to sign Decrees to recognize South Ossetian and Abkhazian independence and “call(ed) on other states to follow (his) example.” Seeing early warning signs, he tried to dissuade Georgia from using force. He called Georgian president Saakashvili a “madman” for “tak(ing) such a gamble.” He explained that Russia had no other option than to respond. To save lives “not in a war of our choice. We have no designs on Georgian territory.”

Russia struck bases from which attacks were “launched and then left. We restored the peace but could not calm the fears and aspirations of the South Ossetian and Abkhazian peoples.” To aid them and the requests of their presidents, “I signed a decree” to recognize their independence.” He also referred to Russia’s “historic friendship and sympathy” for Georgians and said he hopes “one day (they will) have leaders they deserve, who care about their country and who develop mutually respectful relations with all the peoples in the Caucasus. Russia is ready to support the achievement of such a goal.”

On August 31, Itar Tass reported that Medvedev “spell(ed) out five principles of Russian foreign policy in a televised interview:

— the supremacy of international legal fundamentals that define relations between civilized nations;

— the importance of a multi-polar world – not one in which one nation decides for all others;

— confrontation with no other country, and Russia will work toward “friendly relations with Europe, the United States and other countries of the world;”

— an “absolute priority” of protecting life and dignity of Russian citizens “no matter where they live….aggression will be deterred; and

— like other countries, “Russia has areas of privileged interests….countries to which we are linked with friendly ties,” and not only with neighboring states.

Medvedev added that diplomatic relations going forward would depend not just on Russia but also “on our friends, partners and the international community at large. They have a choice.”

On August 28, Prime Minister Putin had his say. Was outspoken in a CNN interview, and accused the Bush administration of failing to keep Georgia from attacking South Ossetia. This, he said, damaged bilateral relations. He suggested a possible darker motive as well: “….that someone in the United States created this conflict on purpose to stir up the situation and create an advantage for one of the (presidential) candidates. They needed a small victorious war” – a clear reference to John McCain although he didn’t say.

He also said “not only (did the administration fail) to restrain the Georgian leadership from this criminal action, but the American side in fact trained and equipped the Georgian army….We (also) have serious reasons to believe that directly in the combat zone citizens of the United States were present. If the facts are confirmed….that means only one thing – that they could be there on the direct instruction of their leadership….following a direct order from their leader, and not on their own initiative.” Col. General Anatoly Nogovitsyn, Russia’s deputy chief of general staff, said Russian forces had a US passport for Michael Lee White of Texas in a ruined building near Tskhinvali and showed what was found.

Putin stressed that Russia would respond to the killing of its citizens and peacekeepers and wouldn’t let possible G-8 membership expulsion or threatened EU actions deter it.

With this going on, heavily armed US and other NATO warships entered the Black Sea on the pretext of delivering humanitarian aid. Nogovitsyn called it a task for merchant ships. Suggested it further heightens tensions and said: “I don’t think such a buildup will foster the stabilization of the atmosphere in the region.” Other Russian military officials called the intrusion provocative and accused Washington of shipping new arms supplies.

On August 27, Reuters reported US General and NATO commander John Craddock’s comments on a recent Tbilisi visit. He said Washington will likely provide military aid, and an anonymous US official confirmed that a US – Georgia dialogue is ongoing about replenishing the country’s losses. Possibly also sending sophisticated weapons like Stinger antiaircraft missiles and portable antitank ones called Javelins. Training as well.

On August 27, the Jerusalem-based DEBKAfile reported that Captain Igor Dygalo, Russian Navy’s deputy commander, said the Moskva missile cruiser would carry out a Black Sea naval exercise in response – a clear sign that Moscow intends to assert control and may interfere with 10 more encroaching Western vessels. According to Nogovitsyn: two American, four Turkish, and the others German, Polish and Spanish.

He also said NATO exhausted its Black Sea complement under international agreements and warned against sending more. DEBKAfile sources say 16 to 18 are planned, including the USS Mount Whitney, “one of the most advanced warships in the world.” If true, this will heighten tensions further.

On August 29, DEBKAfile cited a Moscow media quote from former Russian Black Sea Fleet commander, Admiral Eduard Baltin, saying: “Despite the apparent strength of the NATO naval group in the Black Sea….a single salvo from the Moskva missile cruiser and two or three missile boats would be enough to annihilate the entire group. Within 20 minutes, the waters would be clear.” He added that Russia “will not strike first….”

At the same time, Russian president Medvedev warned Moldova not to repeat Georgia’s mistake by using force against Transdniestria. Russian peacekeepers have been on the ground there since 1990 after separatists broke away and established an independent republic. Under international law, it’s more justifiable than Kosovo, but thus far with no outside recognition. Moldova is strategically located on the Black Sea’s Western shore – close to the Crimean Peninsula and Russia’s large Sevastopol, Ukraine naval headquarters.

On August 27, Ukraine upped the stakes and demanded Russia renegotiate its lease – good until 2017. A higher rental payment was asked, and (according to Russia Today) a new law was passed demanding 72 hours notice each time Russia’s fleet leaves the base. It covers air traffic as well and asks for personnel involved, time of departure, and destination. Russia says the law violates its 1997 Moscow – Kiev agreement, so it’s unclear if Ukraine will back down. Russia is in no mood to with Georgia on its mind and watching Washington behind the scenes orchestrating mischief.

Earlier on August 24, Russia’s Navy chief, Admiral Vladimir Vysotsky, said its Black Sea Fleet now commands its Mediterranean ships as well. It came as the US carrier Iwo Jima (six-vessel) Expeditionary Strike Group heads for the region to link up with other US vessels, and Russia announced it will search all cargo transiting Georgia’s Poti port that it controls. Thus far, Washington avoided confrontation by redirecting its warships to Georgian-controlled Batumi. An event duly noted in Moscow that responded by anchoring three missile boats and the Moskva missile cruiser at the Black Sea Sukhumi port.

The cat and mouse game continues, and it’s not eased if South Ossetian reports are true. They claim Georgia is deploying military forces on its border, and (late last week) overnight firing on villages was heard. Georgia says Russia wants to annex its territory. Moscow asserts its right to protect South Ossetian and Abkhazian residents from made-in-Washington aggression – many of whom hold Russian passports. Tensions continue to escalate causing some analysts to say war is inevitable, and under a US neocon administration might involve a “proactive” nuclear strike.

An August 28 DEBKAfile report suggested that Russia takes this threat seriously. It headlined: “Russia successfully tests ICBM designed to beat anti-missile systems,” according to Alexander Vovk, spokesman for Russia’s strategic nuclear forces. He referred to the Topol RS-12M to be used against ground-based missiles and capable of “beating” any US “missile shield.” The test followed Russia warning NATO against sending additional ships to the Black Sea that will only heighten tensions.

On August 28, RIA Novosti reported an escalation, a sign still more will follow – South Ossetian Interior Minister Mikhail Mindzayev stating that an unmanned Georgian reconnaissance plane was shot down over the capital, Tskhinvali at 20.10 GMT. He also said “several illegal armed groups were operating near the capital under orders from Georgian authorities to conduct subversive activities and terrorist acts.” South Ossetian security forces formed “counter-terrorist units” to respond. On August 27, Col. General Nogovitsyn said a Georgian reconnaissance drone overflew South Ossetia at 11.15 GMT – spying in violation of existing agreements. A frequent practice prior to Georgia’s August 7 aggression so it happening again is worrisome.

In an August 28 Russian newspaper, Vremya Novostei, interview, Russia’s NATO ambassador, Dmitry Rogozin, warned that any Organization Caucasus attack would “mean a declaration of war on Russia.” On August 27, The New York Times called him “a finger-wagging nationalist who hung a poster of Stalin in his new ambassadorial office….”

Rogozin named two world-changing dates of concern: “September 11, 2001 and August 8, 2008….basically identical in terms of significance” and that today heightens Russia’s fears about being surrounded by NATO. He calls the current crisis much more than “an ethnic spat between Georgia and South Ossetia.” Russians understand that Washington targets them, and a recent poll showed 74% of them believe “Georgia was a pawn of the United States.” Only 5% blamed Russia.

This at a time other reports hint at NATO divisions despite its outward appearance of toughness. The US, UK and most Eastern European states support harsh measures. In contrast, France, Germany, Portugal, Turkey and Italy are reluctant to break off Russian ties with French Foreign Minister Bernard Kouchner telling The New York Times that “Russia is a great nation. Look how we have been treating it. We need firmness, not threats” that won’t work “because everyone knows we are not going to war.”

In another report, however, RIA Novesti indicated that “EU leaders (are) considering sanctions against Russia” after earlier averring they weren’t on the agenda. Russia heard nothing about them, and so far details aren’t forthcoming. Maybe no sanctions either and just verbal threats. Kouchner later confirmed that EU leaders will weigh them at an emergency September 1 summit. Convening in Brussels, they’ll discuss Western relations with Russia, Georgia, and providing aid to the former Soviet republic.

Precisely what Russia fears because it will come in the form of more arms and munitions. On September 1, RIA Novesti reported that “Russia wants (an) arms embargo on Georgia and quoted Foreign Minister Lavrov saying he wants one in place until Georgia has a new leader. One Russia can trust and not the current Washington tool.

In his remarks Lavrov said: “To guarantee the region is protected against new outbreaks of violence, Russia will continue to take measures to make sure the (Saakashvili) regime is unable to commit evil deeds ever again. It would be appropriate to impose an embargo on arms supplies on that regime until different leaders have turned Georgia into a normal country.” He then blamed Washington for its role in the conflict and added that he hoped EU leaders in Brussels would make “the right choice” at their summit.

Possibly so according to the August 30 – 31 Wall Street Journal’s weekend edition. It reported that “the EU isn’t expected to impose sanctions on Russia,” and the previous day suggested that “Russia mocked talk” about them. The Journal stressed how divided EU nations are but admitted they have “few tools to deter Moscow.” It quoted Finnish Foreign Minister Alexander Stubb saying: “My preference is to go carefully on concrete actions but to be sufficiently tough on the language. Whether or not we like it, Russia and Europe are mutually interdependent.” And it’s likely other foreign ministers and EU leaders share that view.

Yet on August 27, BBC reported that UK Foreign Secretary David Miliband (in a Kiev, Ukraine speech) called on the EU and NATO to initiate “hard-headed engagement (and the) widest possible coalition” against Russia over Georgia along with other inflammatory comments. On August 31, UK prime minister Gordon Brown threatened a “root and branch” review of relations with Russia and accused Moscow of “aggression.”

So did Barak Obama, the official Democrat nominee, and also lashed out at Medvedev’s decree. He “condemn(ed) Russia’s decision and call(ed) upon all countries of the world not to accord (it) any legitimacy….” Said America should “further isolate Russia.” Provide Georgia $1 billion in aid. Admit it to NATO. Deny Russia WTO membership. Disband the NATO – Russia Council, and even end Russia’s Organization for Security and Cooperation in Europe (OSCE) membership.

In contrast, the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) member states of China, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan and Uzbekistan backed Russia’s action. Its role in restoring peace, and expressed “support for (Russia’s) active role in assisting peace and cooperation in the region.” However, they stopped short of endorsing South Ossetian and Abkhazian independence in their closing statement that “express(ed) their deep concern over the recent tensions surrounding the South Ossetia question and call(ed) for the sides to peacefully resolve existing problems through dialogue.”

That got the corporate media to distort their closing statement and like Reuters say “Medvedev failed to win crucial support from his Asian allies (for) Moscow’s confrontation with the West over war in Georgia.” The New York Times as well claimed that “China and four other (Asian) countries meeting with Russia for the annual (SCO) summit declined to back Russia’s military action in a joint communique.”

The Wall Street Journal echoed the same theme and then ranted about “strains” and “unease” in Russian – Chinese relations. Even hinted that Russia might be “isolated” because of its Georgian “aggression.” A word it only attributes to Russia in very hostile daily op-eds. More Journal commentary below, but first an alternative Russian view.

The Post-Communist PRAVDA On-Line

Established in January 1999, it’s editor is longtime Western journalist, Timothy Bancroft-Hinchey, who says “at this moment in time, I’m proud, very proud, to be writing for a Russian newspaper.” On August 29, 2008, his opinion piece titled “Abkhazia, Georgia, Kosovo, South Ossetia and something called international law” presented a different view from the dominant US media’s daily anti-Russian agitprop.

Straightaway aiming at George Bush and Secretary Rice he stated: They “follow the norm that laws are made to be disregarded, disrespected, ignored, manipulated or simply broken, which is patently obvious through the sheer hypocrisy of Washington’s position on the territorial integrity of Georgia.” From a “legal perspective,” Georgia was a signatory to Soviet Russia’s Constitution and bound by its provisions. One of them was “the voluntary dissolution of the Union and clause which states that minority groups (South Ossetia and Abkhazia) in other Republics (Georgia) had the statutory and constitutional right” to a (free and fair) referendum for independence.

Post-1991, Georgia broke the law by not holding them, “so just this fact makes a valid case for these two republics to decide for themselves” to be or not be part of Georgia. In addition, Moscow spent 17 years negotiating peace that aimed to satisfy Tbilisi and both breakaway provinces. Georgia’s response: “manipulation, insults, insolence” and the recent slaughter of Tskhinvali civilians. By its actions, “Georgia….blew out the candles lighting any path towards its territorial integrity.”

The right of South Ossestians and Abkhazians to independence is also fully justified under the UN Charter and customary international laws and norms – in contrast to Kosovo, an “integral part” of Serbia. “The question of Kosovo follows all the norms of international law regarding inviolability of frontiers whereas Abkhazia and South Ossetia do not. They have the legal right to independence. Kosovo never has, does not, and never will.”

But not according to George Bush’s idea “to draw lines on maps and screw up entire nations….in a civilised world, laws are made to be followed.” Modern states have no right to “base their diplomacy on illegality, boorishness, cajoling and bullying without one iota of legal fabric in their arguments….future generations (should) read these lines and judge for themselves who was right and who was wrong at this fundamental moment in the determination of the future of Mankind.”

Bashing Russia – A Different View from The Wall Street Journal on the Warpath

An August 28 Melik Kaylan op-ed is typical – headlined: “How the Georgian Conflict ‘Really’ Started.” His version (from Tbilisi) is that “Anybody who thinks that Moscow didn’t plan this invasion, that we in Georgia caused it gratuitously, is severely mistaken.” He heard it “personally” from president Saakasvili “in a late night (presidential palace) chat.” In contrast, “Russia’s version of events doesn’t jibe with the facts.” On the ground in Gori, he learned “how Russia has deployed a highly deliberate propaganda strategy. (They) made a big show of moving out in force (but) left behind a resonating threat (that) they could return at any moment. (They) flatten(ed) civilian streets in order to sow fear, drive out innocents and create massive refugee outflows.”

He gets his information right from Saakashvili and Georgia’s defense minister, so he knows it’s “accurate.” Direct quotes about Russia “planning an invasion for weeks, even months ahead of time.” Was able to once Putin “consolidate(d) power.” With the Beijing Olympics and US elections as distractions and before Georgia’s winter. A rather amateurish account and not up to the Journal’s agitprop standards.

On August 25, Max Boot did a better job in a piece headlined: “Eastern Europe Can Defend Itself.” He’s way to the right of most others, a senior Council on Foreign Relations fellow, and frequent Journal contributor.

He claims “Eastern Europeans are rightly alarmed about the brazenness and success of the Russian blitzkrieg into Georgia.” Worsened by Russian threats “to rain nuclear annihilation on Ukraine and Poland if they refuse to toe the Kremlin’s line.” Even NATO states “can take scant comfort.” Boot’s solution: “Russia’s neighbors should spend more on defense. We should supply them with more antiaircraft weapons.” No mention of how defense contractors will benefit or the importance of that side of NATO membership.

Boot sees big potential if Eastern European states spend more of their GDP on weapons. Georgia (as a US vassal) is doing it, but not its neighbors. He cites an International Institute of Strategic Studies report that only one regional state spends more than 2% of its GDP on defense – Bulgaria at 2.2%. Nor do they maintain large standing forces, yet they have millions of military aged men to draw on. Russia is the only exception with “more than a million soldiers under arms” and a growing post-Soviet defense budget – 2.5% of GDP or 8% of total spending according to an August 28 RIA Novesti report that says it’s heading much higher.

Eastern European states should react, according to Boot – to “deter Russians from threatening them in the first place….They should double their military spending (and) the US can help.” They should have “large reserves ready for fast call-up and plenty of ‘defensive’ weapons.” Clearly Boot has key things in mind – tightening the screws on Russia. Surrounding it with adversarial states. Giving America a greater edge than is possible without them, and letting US defense contractors cash in on new business.

Senators Joe Lieberman and Lindsey Graham have that and more in mind in their August 26 Journal op-ed and begin with an inflammatory headline: “Russia’s Aggression Is a Challenge to World Order.” They both visited the region, met with the leaders of Georgia, Ukraine and Poland, and say that “Supporting Georgia is only the ‘first’ step toward safeguarding freedom in Europe.”

They claim America strove for 60 years for “a Europe that is whole, free and at peace.” One of “the greatest achievements of the 20th century.” By their reasoning, “Russia’s ‘invasion’ of Georgia represents the most serious challenge to this political order since Slobodan Milosevic unleashed the demons of ethnic nationalism in the Balkans.”

Never mind their outlandish reversal of truth – about a US-led NATO aggression. Blaming Serbs for their own actions. Dismembering Yugoslavia, and falsely accusing Milosevic (in a Washington Post editorial, for example) of being “personally responsible for the most destructive conflict and most terrible atrocities recorded in Europe since World War II. Without Mr. Milosevic the Yugoslav wars wouldn’t have happened.”

At the time, Graham, a congressman, and Lieberman, a senator, both agreed. Now they claim “disturbing evidence (shows) Russia is already laying the groundwork to apply the same arguments used to justify its intervention in Georgia to other parts of its near abroad – most ominously in the Crimea.” America’s first priority is “to prevent the Kremlin from achieving its strategic objectives in Georgia….Also needed, immediately, is a joint commitment by the US and the European Union to fund large-scale, comprehensive reconstruction….in consultation with the World Bank, IMF, and other international authorities….and for the US Congress to support” it.

Rebuilding Georgia’s security forces is part of it with heavy emphasis on “antiaircraft and antiarmor systems necessary to deter any renewed Russian aggression.” Both senators want a “reinvigorated NATO” meaning an enlarged one and more heavily armed. “Missile defense (and) a new trans-Atlantic energy alliance” to counter Russia’s “willing(ness) to use its oil and gas resources as a weapon….”

US v. Russia by their calculus. Western solidarity must stand firm. Teach the Kremlin a lesson that “forced fealty to Moscow will fail (and it’s only a) question (of) how long until Russia’s leaders rediscover this lesson from their own history.” With a strong undertone that if Moscow won’t come around on its own, a US-led alliance will force it.

Perhaps the (August 27) US Navy-announced five-day US – UK naval exercises in the Gulf hints to Russia as well as Iran. Called “Exercise Goalkeeper” in the Central and Southern Arabian Gulf, it’s “to train across the spectrum of Maritime Security Operations (MSO),” according to the US Fifth Fleet press release. It began on August 24 and was scheduled for completion on August 31.

It focused on “command and control in locating and tracking specific vessels deemed to pose a threat to Coalition nations in the Gulf region. The exercise also allows Coalition teams to board the vessel and practice the procedures for handing them over to Coast Guard ships.”

Counterterrorism and security measures are also mentioned – “to disrupt violent extremists’ use of the maritime environment as a venue for attack or to transport personnel or weapons.” Clearly Iran is the focus. It follows “Operation Brimstone” in the North Atlantic. Can also apply to Russia, and may be repeated at a future time in the Black Sea – “to increase the security and prosperity of the region by working together for a better future,” according to US Naval Forces Central Command. Quite a different way than Iran and Russia see it.

But not Arthur Herman in an August 29 Wall Street Journal op-ed titled: “Russia and the New Axis of Evil.” He claims “Russian tanks (are) now presiding over the dismemberment of….Georgia” and asks can the Bush administration “rise to the challenge Russia has chosen to pose to the Free World?” He refers to “democratic governments” in Iraq and Georgia “sandwiched between Iran and Russia, two of the most authoritarian governments in the world” and for good measure adds “Venezuelan strongman Hugo Chavez” that Russia is “arming” along with Iran.

He calls Iran “the principal threat to peace in Iraq (and) Mr. Chavez’s links to the terrorist group FARC (threatening) neighboring Colombia.” Iran, Georgia and Colombia “are battlegrounds in a new kind of international conflict that will define our geopolitical future. (It) pits the US and the West against an emerging axis of oil-rich dictatorships….working together to push back against the liberalizing trends of globalization (with) their prime objective (of) toppling or undermining neighboring, pro-Western democracies.”

Russia is number one in his sights and allied with “Tehran’s mullahs clearly aim to control access to every major source of fossil energy from the western end of the Persian Gulf to the Caspian Sea.” Then add Chavez “hop(ing) for an oil and natural gas monopoly over (his) neighbors like pro-Chavez satellites Bolivia and Ecuador.”

Herman puts this kind of material in books and here says “The West has to confront the oil-rich dictatorships, flush with cash, and bent on regional domination.” What can the US and a new president do, he asks? He proposes a “broad strategy of targeted economic sanctions and multilateral diplomacy, backed by US military power….” Most important is “to secure democracy’s vital new flanks (in) Iraq, Georgia and Colombia (to send) a clear signal that liberty, not tyranny, is the wave of the globalizing future.” And for readers who believe that, consider moving to (or even visiting) one of his three favored countries.

Herman is typical of writers getting Wall Street Journal and other hard right op-ed space. He taught history at George Mason University. Also Georgetown and Catholic University and contributes to right wing publications like National Review and Commentary. As well as the Wall Street Journal. He also wrote a revisionist history of Joe McCarthy entitled: “Joseph McCarthy: Reexamining the Life and Legacy of America’s Most Hated Senator.” In it he claims that given the “communist threat” he got a bum rap even though he vilified innocent people, was a pathological liar, a consummate demagogue, and, according to David Halberstam knew how “to humiliate vulnerable, scared people (and) in the end produced little beyond fear and headlines.”

Precisely what Herman and other hawkish writers now do to Russia, Iran, Venezuela and other independent countries unwilling to roll over for Washington. Even at the risk of a catastrophic global conflict no side can win and that all sides will end up paying for dearly.

‘US troops are committing war crimes’

3

By Parwiz Shamal | AN AFGHAN human rights organisation has accused the United States army of committing war crimes in Afghanistan.

The Afghanistan Independent Human Rights Commission (AIHRC) said on Tuesday that, according to their own investigations, civilians are killed in most operations conducted by US forces.

AIHRC expressed strong concern about the death of innocent Afghans during military operations and urged those responsible for the killings to face trial.

“According to our investigations, 98% of civilian casualties caused by the coalition forces in Afghanistan are intentional,” the head of the AIHRC, Lal Gul, said.

“The actions of the coalition forces, especially the American forces, are not only against the human rights laws, but are considered war crimes. Therefore, these forces have committed war crimes in Afghanistan,” he said.

Foreign forces maintain that they try their best to minimise civilian casualties in their operations.

They also accuse the Taliban of using civilians as human shields by taking shelter in residential homes and areas.

A spokesman for the AIHRC, Nadir Nadiri, said: “Whenever a military force, or one of the two sides in a war, kill innocent people intentionally, it has broken the international human rights law, and according to the human rights law, such people must be tried.”

NATO and the US-led coalition have come under fire from Afghan politicians, ordinary people and the local media for killing innocent civilians in recent weeks.

On Monday, residents accused foreign troops of killing four members of the same family during a midnight raid in Kabul, a claim the international troops strongly deny.

On August 22, a coalition raid on a village in the western province of Herat killed as many as 90 civilians, 60 of them children, a United Nations investigation into the ground and air operation revealed.

Karzai, who has also chided western generals for their failure to minimise civilian casualties, says the death of innocent Afghans only plays into the hands of the Taliban, who use the killings to turn people against the government.

More than 500 civilians have been killed during operations led by foreign and Afghan forces against militants this year, according to the Afghan government and some aid groups.

The UN says the civilian death-toll has increased “sharply” this year on last.

Counterattacking Army recruiting

1

By Mitch Weiss | Sally Ferrell bounded from the truck and grabbed a posterboard sign that read: “War is not the Answer.”

Over the years, she’s organized dozens of peace vigils like this one being set up in a parking lot. Find common ground, she has always preached, and any conflict can be resolved.

But she’s now engaged in a conflict of her own — a dispute over military recruiting in high schools that has polarized rural Wilkes County.

For three years, Ferrell, 63, has asked permission to distribute pamphlets and other materials that warn students to think twice before joining the military. But the school superintendent has stopped her, calling her activities unpatriotic. The American Civil Liberties Union, calling it a First Amendment issue, has threatened to sue.

“The students need to know there are alternatives to the military,” said Ferrell, a Quaker. “But they’re not getting the other side.”

Recruiters have turned to high schools to help fill the ranks of the all-volunteer military. And they need them more than ever. After five years of fighting in Iraq and Afghanistan and longer deployments, the military has been hard-pressed to meet recruitment demands. They say U.S. casualties — more than 4,600 soldiers killed and 64,000 wounded in both wars — have dampened recruiting.

In recent years, thousands of people like Ferrell have joined dozens of counter recruiting groups. They say recruiters have given young people misleading information about military service and often target high schools in poor and rural areas where options for graduating students are limited; the activists want students to know they have prospects besides the military.

Most schools have allowed counter recruiters inside. Wilkes County’s opposition could trigger a legal battle.

“Are we going to pursue litigation? I think it’s pretty clear that the school board isn’t giving us any choice to do anything else,” said Katherine Parker, legal director of the ACLU’s North Carolina chapter.

Recruiters say the controversy has made it more difficult for them to do their job.

Before Ferrell’s campaign, they had unfettered access to schools and students. Now, they can only visit twice a semester. And when they do, they have to stand at a table outside the cafeterias.

Civil rights activists prompt call for Police shootings probe

0

Civil rights activists have called for an investigation of police shootings in a Los Angeles-area city where four people have been killed since May.

 

The latest was Sunday when a 56-year-old homeless man was killed by Inglewood officers who said he appeared to be armed and refused orders to raise his hands, the Los Angeles Times reported. The gun tucked into Eddie Felix Franco’s waistband proved to be a toy.

Earl Ofari Hutchinson, president of the Los Angeles Urban Roundtable, spoke Monday at the place where Franco was killed.

“This is a small city,” Hutchinson said. “It has a small police department, and when you have this number of shootings in such a short period of time, that just leaves so many questions.”

In May, a 19-year-old man was killed and two other young men wounded by police officers who mistakenly thought they had weapons. In July, police fatally shot a 23-year-old alleged gang member and, in a separate incident, killed a 38-year-old man who allegedly pointed a gun at officers responding to a call about a domestic dispute.

The shootings are being investigated by the Office of Independent Review, a county agency, but Hutchinson and others want a federal investigation.

© 2008 United Press International, Inc.

Information on use of Shannon ‘rendition’ sought

1

THE GOVERNMENT has been asked for information relating to the use of Shannon in the “extraordinary rendition” of a Guantánamo Bay detainee who could face the death penalty.

The request was sent to the Taoiseach on Friday last by lawyers representing Binyam Mohamed, a UK resident arrested in Pakistan in 2002 and held in Guantánamo Bay.

He has been charged there before the US Military Commission with terrorist offences which carry the death penalty.The request is made under the Freedom of Information Act.

This follows a previous request for information about two flights alleged to have been involved in Mr Mohamed’s rendition which were made to Mr Cowen at the beginning of August.

His private secretary responded “on an interim basis” on August 13th, stating the Government’s opposition to the “appalling practice of so-called extraordinary rendition”.

The letter also stated that the Government had received categoric assurances that no rendition had taken place through Ireland, and that no evidence had been produced that any individual had been subject to extraordinary rendition through Ireland.

The Government assured Mr Mohamed’s lawyer, Clive Stafford Smith, that his request was being urgently examined by relevant Government departments, but added that the information he sought may not be available to Irish authorities.

In response, Mr Stafford Smith, a US-trained lawyer with a background in representing prisoners on Death Row who works for human rights group Reprieve, said he was not arguing that any prisoners were rendered through Irish territory, but that CIA aircraft and crew criminally implicated in rendition to torture stopped on Irish territory en route to and from their illegal missions.

“Even if prisoners were not transported directly through Irish territory,” he said, “the movements and activities of these agents must be investigated, as should how Irish authorities came to be complicit in these activities.”

Accordingly, he is seeking information on two flights, already identified by the Council of Europe as having been involved in rendition, that stopped in Shannon on July 22nd, 2002, which he said had illegally rendered Mr Mohamed to torture in Morocco, and a flight that stopped in Shannon on September 17th, 2004, en route to rendering Mr Mohammed from Rabat in Morocco to Kabul, Afghanistan.

The information sought includes flight records, the names and passport details of all those on board, the name of the hotel where they stayed and records of the hotel, including telephone records, and records surrounding the flight, including documents filed by US representatives and private corporations involved in the planning of the trips.

The case against Mr Mohammed is based on confessions he made which he claims were made under torture after his “rendition” to third countries. The torture included beatings, sleep deprivation, starvation and the cutting of his genitals with a razor.

His lawyers seek information on what happened to him between his arrest in Pakistan in April 2002 and his arrival in Guantánamo Bay in May 2004, in order to substantiate his claims of torture.

Already, they have scored a success in the High Court in London, which last week gave the British foreign secretary, David Miliband, until Friday next to agree to hand over information possessed by the UK government about the case.

UK intelligence agents were involved in the questioning of Mr Mohamed while he was detained in Pakistan.

However, the UK government conceded to the High Court it did not know, and still did not know, his whereabouts between April 2002 and May 2004, during which he claims he was being tortured.

© 2008 The Irish Times

Holding murderers accountable

1

By William John Cox | Although Americans have access to the greatest selection of information sources in the world, including books, newspapers, magazines, radio, television, cable, and the Internet, the frequency of the news cycle has increased to the point where we have forgotten that our president and vice president have committed horrendous war crimes, or we may have missed the fact as it flashed by.

Most of us may have been fleetingly aware in 2006 that President Bush and Vice President Cheney were lying to us about their reasons for the Iraq War, which caused the murder and maiming of tens of thousands of our American troops and the waste of billions of our tax dollars. We elected a majority of Democrats to Congress to hold them accountable; however, the Democratic leadership immediately announced that impeachment was off the table and it has been business as usual ever since.

Recently, there has been a flood of new evidence clearly proving beyond any reasonable doubt that our president and vice president, along with others, conspired to engage the United States in an unnecessary and illegal war and repeatedly and deliberately lied to the American people about the true facts of the matter. Most specifically, the president committed felonies when he lied to Congress about his justification for ordering the attack on Iraq which resulted in the murder of all who have died in his fraudulent “War on Terrorism.”

As governor of Texas, Bush executed 152 people, including Karla Faye Tucker, a born-again Christian, whose plea for clemency caused Bush to purse his lips in a false smirk of desperation and to whimper, “Please don’t kill me.” Under the “Felony Murder Rule,” known in Texas as the “Law of the Parties,” if a person commits a felony and someone dies during the course of the felony, all parties to the felony are guilty of murder irrespective of which one actually does the killing.

There is strict liability under the rule, even if the death is accidental or unintended. Almost 20 percent of all murder prosecutions result from the rule, and a significant number of Bush’s 152 executions involved criminals who had engaged in felonies where the actual killing was done by others.

Not only has the president escaped all accountability for the serial murders he committed during his phony “War on Terrorism,” he recently asked Congress to further aid and abet his crimes by acknowledging “again and explicitly that this nation remains engaged in an armed conflict with Al Qaeda, the Taliban, and associated organizations, who have already proclaimed themselves at war with us and who are dedicated to the slaughter of Americans.”

We now know to a high degree of certainty who the slaughterers are. The only remaining question is whether the murderers will escape justice.

The crime

Title 18, Section 2 of the U.S. Code says, “Whoever commits an offense against the United States or aids, abets, counsels, commands, induces or procures its commission, is punishable as a principal.” Section 1111 defines murder as “the unlawful killing of a human being with malice aforethought” and specifically holds that murders perpetrated by any kind of “willful, deliberate, malicious, and premeditated killing” are murders “in the first degree. Any other murder is murder in the second degree.”

If Bush willfully and deliberately misled Congress into authorizing him to engage in an unlawful war in which American troops and Iraqis were killed, he is guilty of murder. Not only would such killings be premeditated, but they would also be the legal result of his lies to Congress.

Title 18, Section 1001 prohibits anyone from “knowingly and willfully” making “any materially false, fictitious, or fraudulent statement or representation” in “any matter within the jurisdiction of the . . . legislative . . . branch of the Government.” Felony prosecution under the statute was upheld by the U.S. Supreme Court in 1955, and a violation of the statute is a crime.

Bush lied to Congress on a number of occasions. Most specifically during his State of the Union address on January 28, 2003, Bush told the following lies to Congress:

â–º “The International Atomic Energy Agency confirmed in the 1990s that Saddam Hussein had an advanced nuclear weapons development program, had a design for a nuclear weapon and was working on five different methods of enriching uranium for a bomb.”â–º “The British Government has learned that Saddam Hussein recently sought significant quantities of uranium from Africa.”

â–º “Year after year, Saddam Hussein has gone to elaborate lengths, spent enormous sums, taken great risks to build and keep weapons of mass destruction.”

â–º “With nuclear arms or a full arsenal of chemical and biological weapons, Saddam Hussein could resume his ambitions of conquest in the Middle East and create deadly havoc in that region.”

â–º “And this Congress and the America people must recognize another threat. Evidence from intelligence sources, secret communications, and statements by people now in custody reveal that Saddam Hussein aids and protects terrorists, including members of al Qaeda.”

â–º “We seek peace. We strive for peace.”

 

 

Ignoring the reports of UN inspectors that there were no weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, Bush ordered its invasion on March 20, 2003 because: “the Iraq regime continues to possess and conceal some of the most lethal weapons ever devised” and Iraq “has aided, trained and harbored terrorists, including operatives of al Qaeda.” When Bush deceptively ordered American troops to invade Iraq, he and his co-conspirators not only became war criminals under international law, they became murderers of all those who died as a result of their felonious conduct.

It can now be proven beyond a reasonable doubt that Bush was deliberately lying about his justification for war against Iraq, and as of today 4,151 American soldiers and perhaps as many as a million Iraqis have become his victims.

The evidence

Bush’s conspiracy of deception held for several years, but on May 1, 2005, the Times of London published the first of the so-called “Downing Street Documents.” The documents informed us that Bush, irrespective of the lies he was telling at the time, was already committed to going to war with Iraq as early as 2002.

Calling the evidence of weapons of mass destruction “thin,” the British memos documented that “Military action was now seen as inevitable. Bush wanted to remove Saddam, through military action, justified by the conjunction of terrorism and WMD. But the intelligence and facts were being fixed around the policy.” Richard Dearlove, the former head of Britain’s secret intelligence service later said that the Bush administration buried British information about the lack of WMDs.

We also learned that both the CIA and the State Department attempted to keep Bush from referring in his 2003 State of the Union Address to Saddam’s attempted purchase of “yellowcake” uranium from Niger. Indeed, the unsubstantiated allegations were later found to be a complete hoax based on a crude forgery disseminated by Sismi, the Italian intelligence service.

It has been revealed that Michael Ledeen, a representative of Secretary of Defense Rumsfeld’s Office of Special Plans, had been in Rome at the same time gathering intelligence to support military intervention in Iraq and that the Sismi’s director later met with Stephen Hadley, Bush’s deputy national security advisor, after the CIA rejected his initial overtures.

Additional evidence has been provided by Pultizer Prize-winning journalist Ron Suskind in his new book, The Way of the World: A Story of Truth and Hope in an Age of Extremism. Suskind reveals that Tahir Jalil Habbush al-Tikriti, the head of Saddam’s intelligence service, was secretly reporting the true status of Iraq’s WMDs to the British.

Habbush informed the British (and the Bush administration) in January 2003 that there were no WMDs in Iraq. When CIA Director George Tenet told Bush about Habbush’s information, Bush replied, “Well, why don’t you tell him to give us something we can use to make our case?”

Rather than using Habbush to provide Saddam with effective disinformation, to arrange Saddam’s removal, or to even make operational use of the valuable intelligence, the U.S. terminated further communication with Habbush, paid him $5 million to keep quiet and resettled him in Amman, Jordan. Officially, Habbush is still wanted by the U.S. and there is a $1 million reward offered for his capture.

Further evidence that Bush had official knowledge that there were no WMDs in Iraq was provided by Naji Sabri, Iraq’s foreign minister, in autumn 2002. He passed information through a French government official that Iraq’s “WMD program” was actually a ruse to ward off Iran and other foreign enemies.

Sabri was paid at least $200,000 by the CIA and French intelligence to provide documents about Saddam’s WMDs; however, Bush rejected Sabri’s intelligence as worthless when CIA director George Tenet tried to tell him about it on September 18, 2003. According to a senior CIA officer, “Bush didn’t give a fuck about the intelligence. He had his mind made up.”

Sabri received safe passage to Cairo during the first days of the Iraq invasion and is presently enjoying a comfortable retirement teaching journalism in Qatar.

Instead of informing the military, Secretary of State Powell, or Congress about Sabri’s high-quality intelligence, the CIA rewrote the report of his debriefing into an opposite falsehood stating that Saddam was “aggressively and covertly developing” nuclear weapons and that he already had chemical and biological weapons. The restructured report was then passed on to British intelligence to share with Prime Minister Blair.

During the same period, Saad Tawfik, an electrical engineer in Iraq, was identified by the CIA as a “key figure in Saddam Hussein’s clandestine nuclear weapons program.” His sister lived in Cleveland and was recruited by the CIA to meet with her brother in Iraq and to obtain details about the program. Tawfik told her the program was completely abandoned in 1991 and there were no centrifuges or nuclear weapon facilities. The CIA obtained similar results from 30 other former Iraqi WMD experts who also told relatives the same thing.

Evidence of Bush’s consciousness of guilt can be found in Ron Suskind’s report of the White House’s subsequent attempt to create a fraudulent justification following the invasion of Iraq and the failure to find any WMDs. The White House ordered the CIA to forge a backdated letter purportedly sent from Habbush to Saddam.

The resulting handwritten forgery dated July 1, 2001 talked about Saddam buying yellowcake uranium from Niger with the help of al Qaida. Fortuitously, the phony letter also mentioned that 9-11 ringleader Mohammad Atta was in Iraq at the time being trained by al Qaida terrorist Abu Nidal for an upcoming righteous mission.

Since the CIA is prohibited by law from engaging in covert activities intended to influence the U.S. political process, public opinion, policies, or the media, the forged letter was leaked through an aide to Ayad Allawi (a member of the Interim Governing Council and British intelligence informant) in Baghdad to an English journalist.

Con Coughlin, who has previously served as a conduit for British intelligence, wrote a front-page story in London’s Sunday Telegraph on December 14, 2003 headlined, “Terrorist behind September 11 strike ‘was trained by Saddam.’” As intended, the story was picked up and recycled by the U.S. media, including William Safire and Tom Brocaw, who treated the letter as genuine.

Suskind quotes two former CIA officers, Robert Richer and John Maguire, as witnesses to the forgery. Although both officers now deny any role in fabricating the false letter, Suskind states his interviews with them were tape recorded. On one recording, Richer is heard telling Suskind how Tenet assigned him to deal with the fabricated letter: “What I remember is George saying, ‘We got this from’ — basically, from what George said was ‘downtown.’” After Suskind says, “Which is the White House?” Richer says, “Yes. . . . I would probably stand on my, basically, my reputation and say it came from the vice president.”

When asked about the forgery, Tenet said, “There was no such order from the White House to me nor, to the best of my knowledge, was anyone from the CIA ever involved in such effort.” Suskind calls such statements “part of George’s memory issue.”

On December 14, 2004, Bush engaged in yet another coverup. He rewarded Tenet with the Presidential Medal of Freedom, the nation’s highest civilian honor. Bush said that Tenet’s “tireless efforts have brought justice to America’s enemies and greater security to the American people.”

Accountability

Impeachment. On May 10, 2006, the Speaker of the House of Representatives, Democrat Nancy Pelosi stated she was not interested in pursuing impeachment of President Bush; however, she has subsequently said that “If somebody had a crime that the president had committed, that would be a different story.”

On December 8, 2006, then-Congresswoman Cynthia McKinney introduced articles of impeachment against President Bush, Vice President Cheney and Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice; however, her bill expired with the 109th Congress. McKinney is presently the Green Party’s nominee for president.

On November 6, 2007, Congressman Dennis Kucinich introduced a resolution in the House of Representatives to impeach Vice President Cheney.

On June 10, 2008, joined by Congressman Robert Wexler as cosponsor, Kucinich introduced a resolution of impeachment against President Bush listing 35 articles. The matter was referred to the Judiciary Committee by the House of Representatives; however, Speaker Pelosi refused to allow any hearings on the resolution.

On July 15, 2008, Congressman Kucinich introduced a new resolution of impeachment of President Bush limited to a single count stating that “President Bush, in violation of his oath of office, deceived Congress with fabricated threats of Iraq weapons of mass destruction to fraudulently obtain support for the authorization of use of force against Iraq and to commit troops to combat in Iraq.” The matter was again referred to the Judiciary Committee.

A hearing was held on July 25, 2008; however it was limited to “Executive Power and Its Constitutional Limitations.” Although Kucinich and others were allowed to testify, the question of impeachment was “not on the table.”

President Bush’s approval rating is around 28 percent; however, Congress’ rating, perhaps because of its inability or refusal to impose any accountability on President Bush and his co-conspirators, is just 18 percent and falling.

Impeachment is the only Constitutional way to stop a corrupt or insane president from defying the Constitution and becoming a dictator. A new president will be inaugurated on January 20, 2009, just 142 days from now. It is unlikely that Congress can or will act in that time; however, that refusal to act will surely go down in history as one of the greatest failures of our democracy.

Criminal Prosecution. It is generally assumed that a sitting president is immune from criminal prosecution while in office; however, following President Clinton’s impeachment acquittal by the Senate, the special prosecutor impaneled a grand jury to hear the same evidence and to seek an indictment once he left office. Clinton avoided indictment by entered into a plea bargain one day before he left office requiring him to publicly admit his false testimony, to surrender his law license and to pay a fine of $25,000.

Inasmuch as Attorney General Michael Mukasey serves at the pleasure of President Bush, it is highly unlikely that the current Justice Department will seek an indictment of Bush for the crimes he has committed while in office. However, given the fact that there is no statute of limitations for murder, a future Attorney General appointed by a different president may be more inclined to investigate and indict Bush and his co-conspirators for their criminal behavior.

One does not need to be a trial lawyer to review the preceding paragraphs and to identify the actual witnesses who could be called to testify, either before Congress or in a criminal trial. It is quite easy to say something like “to the best of my knowledge” to a journalist; it is much more difficult to equivocate under oath during vigorous questioning in criminal proceedings or to hide behind the Fifth Amendment.

Pardons. A president’s power to pardon is essentially absolute and is without legal review; its only constraint is the threat of impeachment. With impeachment “off the table” and with the holidays and the end of the president’s term approaching, the likelihood of mass pardons increases. There is a family precedent. With less than a month remaining in his term in 1992, President Bush’s father pardoned Caspar Weinberger, his former Secretary of Defense, and five others for the crimes they committed during the Iran-Contra fiasco.

The political pardons by Bush Sr. cancelled one conviction, three pending guilty pleas and two pending trials. Weinberger’s trial, which included charges of lying to Congress, was scheduled to commence within days of the pardon. The trial would have produced “evidence of a conspiracy among the highest ranking Reagan administration officials to lie to Congress and the American public.” By issuing the pardons, Bush Sr., who had refused to turn over his own “highly relevant contemporaneous notes,” avoided being called as a witness to testify under an oath about how he had come to be “out of the loop.”

The Constitution prohibits a president from interfering with the impeachment process; however, it is unclear if Bush can pardon his own crimes to avoid criminal prosecution. One scenario being circulated is for Bush to issue pardons to everyone conceivably subject to criminal prosecution arising out of their service in his administration, including Vice President Cheney, and for Bush to then resign from office. President Cheney could then pardon “former President” Bush for any and all crimes he committed while in office.

International Law. In one of his last official acts, President Clinton signed the “Rome” treaty establishing the International Criminal Court in the Netherlands to prosecute individuals accused of mass murders, war crimes, and other gross human rights violations. The treaty became effective on July 1, 2002; however, one of President Bush’s first acts was to “unsign” the treaty on behalf of the United States.

Even though George Bush rejected the jurisdiction of the International Court, the court has not rejected jurisdiction over him. Accordingly, while the United States can refuse to arrest and extradite a former president charged with war crimes, the treaty has been signed by 139 other sovereign nations and ratified by at least 107, all of which are legally committed to prosecuting war criminals whenever their own country refuses to or cannot do so.

Thus, while Bush may presently enjoy cutting brush in Crawford, Texas, his ability to vacation overseas might be severely curtailed in the future during his retirement years. Moreover, depending upon who the president is at the time charges are brought against Bush by the International Court, the United States could hand over Bush to the court for prosecution.

Summation

From childhood, George Bush displayed a disturbing lack of empathy. “Slapped around” by his mother as a boy, Bush enjoyed blowing up live frogs by putting firecrackers in their mouths and shooting at his brother with a BB gun. As he grew older, Bush presided over and defended the branding of pledges to his fraternity at Yale using red-hot wires and cigarettes; he became addicted to alcohol; he was arrested for drunk driving and he abused illegal drugs.

During the Vietnam War, Bush avoided military combat and was absent without leave from his stateside reserve assignment for more than a year. Using his father’s influence to gain political office, he smirked, giggled, and displayed other inappropriate behavior in response to the most serious of subjects.

Untreated, Bush’s sociopathy evolved as he achieved command of the most powerful military on earth and used its weapons to commit mass murder. Whenever a roadside IED explodes in Iraq and another American soldier dies, every time another wedding party is mistakenly bombed and children die, George W. Bush and Dick Cheney commit murder. Are we not willing accomplices if we continue to allow these crimes to continue?

Those whom we empower by our vote to either serve us in Congress or to lead our nation as president have a duty to use the power we give them to ensure accountability for its abuse. They have a duty to focus and to maintain attention on the most egregious and deadly violations of our laws and to not allow murder to go unpunished. They have a duty to do whatever it takes to make such crimes the headline of every newspaper and the lead of every radio, television and cable news program during every news cycle until such time as the murderers who occupy our nation’s highest offices are held fully accountable.

¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤

William John Cox is a retired supervising prosecutor for the State Bar of California. Acting as a public interest, pro bono, attorney, he filed a class action lawsuit in 1979 on behalf of every citizen of the United States petitioning the Supreme Court to order the other two branches of the federal government to conduct a National Policy Referendum; he investigated and successfully sued a group of radical right-wing organizations in 1981 that denied the Holocaust; and he arranged in 1991 for the publication of the suppressed Dead Sea Scrolls. His 2004 book, You’re Not Stupid! Get the Truth: A Brief on the Bush Presidency is reviewed at yourenotstupid.com, and his political writings are collected at thevoters.org. He can be contacted at u2cox@msn.com.

© 2008 William John Cox

New Labour banging war drums – again

1

Socialist Worker | The new Labour government is leading the West’s war of words against Russia in its dispute with Georgia.

Foreign secretary David Miliband went to the Ukraine last month to drum up an “anti-Russian coalition” and enthuse about extending Nato eastwards.

But Western powers are too overstretched in Iraq and Afghanistan to intervene militarily against an opponent such as Russia.

They fear future Russian intervention into Ukraine or Azerbaijan, but also need Russian cooperation in the Middle East and Afghanistan.

They are also reliant on the energy resources that Russia provides.

The root of the dispute between Russia and the West is not about complex national questions, but about who controls the Caucasus region.

Underpinning that rivalry are US attempts to expand Nato to bring more countries under its military and political influence. The Caspian Sea, which Russia borders, is rich in oil and gas. It is a glittering prize for the big powers.

The demonstration on 20 September at Labour’s annual conference in Manchester will bring together opposition to David Miliband’s and Gordon Brown’s policies. The threat of war is spreading and the world is now more dangerous than at any time since the beginning of the “war on terror”.

The anti-war movement needs to grow to defeat that challenge.

Infiltrations, false arrest, preventive detention and suppression of dissident media

0

By Matthew Rothschild | Infiltrations, false arrest, preventive detention, suppression of dissident media–these are the hallmarks of authoritarian rule. Right here in America.

The repression going on up in St. Paul is outrageous.

Police raided a half dozen people’s homes over the weekend and detained people before they’d even done anything.

“Conducting mass arrests and raiding meeting places of innocent Americans exercising their constitutional right to express political dissent are antithetical to the fundamental values of our democracy,” says Anthony Romero, head of the ACLU.

Mike Whelan had invited independent observers from the group LegalWatch to stay in his duplex, as Lindsay Beyerstein reported for firedoglake.com.

At about 1:00 p.m. on Saturday, police surrounded his house with automatic weapons drawn. “One of my roommates said, ‘I want to see a warrant,’ and she was immediately detained,” Whelan told Beyerstein. He said the officers were wearing black uniforms and driving nondescript vans.

“You figure this would be going on in South Africa, or Russia, not in Saint Paul,” he said.

Here is an account from another house that was raided.

Police also swarmed a bus carrying members of the group Earth Justice.

The Minneapolis Star-Tribune reports that the Minneapolis Joint Terrorism Task Force actively recruited area residents to infiltrate local protest groups.

One of the groups affected by the raids was Food Not Bombs, and you can’t find a more nonviolent bunch than that.

Bruce Nestor of the Minnesota chapter of the National Lawyers Guild saw some of the police actions.

“I was personally present and saw officers with riot gear and assault rifles, pump action shotguns,” he told Amy Goodman of Democracy Now.

“The neighbor of one of the houses had a gun pointed in her face when she walked out on her back porch to see what was going on. There were children in all of these houses, and children were held at gunpoint.”

Later, of course, the police arrested two producers from Democracy Now and then arrested Goodman, who was trying to ask police about what happened to her employees.

Her producers Sharif Abdel Kouddous and Nicole Salazar, are charged with “suspicion of felony riot.”

Goodman, who was acting in her capacity as a journalist, as were her producers, has been charged with obstruction of a legal process and interference with a peace officer.

Glenn Greenwald of salon.com has been doing an excellent job covering these civil liberties infringement. He notes that the FBI has been involved with local law enforcement. He even provides a photo (see update, deep into his piece).

Infiltrations, false arrest, preventive detention, suppression of dissident media–these are the hallmarks of authoritarian rule.

Right here in America.

Leaked: US-Iraqi agreement

0

Translated by Raed Jarrar | I read about a leaked copy of the US-Iraqi agreement a few days ago when a radio station in Iraq mentioned some of its details, then it was mentioned in some Arab newspapers like Al-Qabas and Al-Sharq Al-Awsat. A couple of days ago, one Iraqi website (linked to an Iraqi armed resistance group) published the leaked draft on their web page for less than a couple of days before their website went offline. (Thankfully, I downloaded the 21 pages agreement and saved them before their server went down)

I spent this weekend translating it, and just finished now. you can read the 27 articles August 6th draft by clicking here or here or here. The title of this draft is “Agreement regarding the activities and presence of U.S. forces, and its withdrawal from Iraq”, but this is the same agreement that is referred to as a “status of forces agreement” or “SOFA” or framework or whatever. It’s the result of months of negotiations after Bush and Al-Maliki signed the “Declaration of Principles for a Long-Term Relationship of Cooperation and Friendship Between the Republic of Iraq and the United States of America” by the end of last year.

This leaked draft is a treasure of information. It’s the first time any document related to this topic is made public. It shows how weak the Iraqi negotiations team is (it is really pathetic to read their “suggestions” on how to fix the disaster of an agreement).

There are many outrageous articles in the agreement that violates Iraq’s sovereignty and independence, and gives the U.S. occupation authorities unprecedented rights and privileges, but what has draw my attention the most (so far) are three major points:

1- the agreement does not discuss anything about a complete US withdrawal from Iraq. Instead, it talks about withdrawing “combat troops” without defining what is the difference between combat troops and other troops. It is very clear that the US is planning to stay indefinitely in permanent bases in Iraq (or as the agreement calls them: “installations and areas agreed upon”) where the U.S. will continue training and supporting Iraqis armed forces for the foreseeable future.
2- the agreement goes into effect when the two executive branches exchange “memos”, instead of waiting for Iraqi parliament’s ratification. This is really dangerous, and it is shocking because both the Iraqi and U.S. executive branches have been assuring the Iraqi parliament that no agreement will go into effect without being ratified by Iraq’s MPs.
3- this agreement is the blueprint for keeping other occupation armies (aka Multi-national forces) in Iraq on the long run. This explains the silence regarding what will happed to other occupiers (like the U.K. forces) after the expiration of the UN mandate at the end of this year.

It is really disturbing to read how the U.S. government is still going down the same path of intervention and domination in Iraq.

This agreement will not be accepted by the Iraqi people and their elected representatives in the Iraqi parliament, and if the U.S. and Iraqi executive branches try to consider it valid anyway it will lead to more violence in Iraq.

Raed Jarrar

 

 

 

 

Agreement regarding the activities and presence of U.S. forces, and its withdrawal from Iraq

August, 6th, 2008 4:00pm

Foreword

Both sides affirm that this cooperation is based on mutual respect of both sides’ sovereignty in accordance with the United Nations’ goals and principles.
Both sides want to achieve mutual understanding to support their collaboration, without jeopardizing Iraq’s sovereignty over its land, water, and sky, and based on the mutual guarantees given as equal and independent sovereign partners.

Both sides have agreed on:
Article One
Scope and goal

This agreement specifies the rules and basic needs that regulate the temporary presence and activities of the U.S. troops and its withdrawal from Iraq.

Article Two
Definitions

1- “Installations and areas agreed upon” are the installations and areas agreed upon owned by the Iraqi government and used by the U.S. forces from the date this agreement goes into effect. Such installations and areas agreed upon will be decided in a list provided by the U.S. forces and reviewed by both sides. Such “installations and areas agreed upon” include those provided to the U.S. forces during the time of this agreement after the approval of both sides.
Iraqi suggestion: The Iraqi delegation has asked the U.S. delegation to submit a list of structures and areas requested to be discussed and agreed upon and add it to the agreement as an appendix.
2- “U.S. forces” is the entity that includes the members of the armed forces, civilian members, and all the equipments and materials owned by the U.S. forces in Iraq.
3- “Members of the armed forces” include any member of the U.S. army, navy, air force, marines or coast guard.
4- “Civilian members” include any civilian working for the U.S. Ministry of Defense, excluding those members who usually reside in Iraq.
5- “U.S. contractors” or “workers hired by U.S. contractors” include non Iraqi persons and entities and employees who are U.S. or third country citizens and who are in Iraq to supply goods, services or security to the U.S. forces or on behalf of it in accordance to a contract. This does not include Iraqi entities.
6- “Official vehicles”: commercial vehicles that may be modified for security reasons, and are designed originally to transport individuals on different terrains.
7- “Military vehicles”: include all vehicles used by the U.S. armed forces, that were originally designed for combat operations, and have special numbers and signs in accordance to the regulations and laws of U.S. armed forces.
8- “defense equipment” include systems, weapons, ammunition, equipment, and materials used in conventional wars only, that the U.S. forces need in accordance to this agreement, and that are not connected in any way to weapons of mass destruction (chemical weapons, nuclear weapons, radiological weapons, biological weapons, and waste related to such weapons).
9- “storage”: keeping defense equipment needed by the U.S. forces for activities agreed upon in this agreement.
10- “taxes and custom”: include all taxes, customs (including border customs), and any other tariffs enforced by the Iraqi government and its entities and provinces in accordance to Iraqi laws and regulations. This does not include money paid for the Iraqi government in exchange for services required or used by the U.S. forces.
Article Three
Rule of Law

All members of the U.S. armed forces and civilian members must follow Iraqi laws, customs, traditions, and agreements while conducting military operations in accordance to this agreement. They must also avoid any activities that do not agree with the text and spirit of this agreement. It is the responsibility of the U.S. to take all necessary measures to insure this.

Article Four
Responsibilities

For the purpose of deterring external and/or internal threats against the Republic of Iraq, and to continue the collaboration to defeat Al-Qaeda in Iraq and other outlaw groups, temporarily, both sides have agreed on:
1- The Iraqi government asks for the temporary help of the U.S. forces to support Iraq’s effort in maintaining security and stability of Iraq, including the collaboration in conducting operations against Al-Qaeda and other terrorist groups and outlaw groups, including the remains of the former regime.
2- Military operations that are conducted in accordance to this agreement with the approval of the Iraqi government and with full coordination with Iraqi authorities. Coordinating such military operations will be supervised by a joint mobile operations command centers (JMOCC) created in accordance with this agreement. Any military issues that are not resolved by these centers are submitted to a joint committee of ministries.
3- Operations must respect the Iraqi constitution and laws, and Iraqi sovereignty and national interests as defined by the Iraqi government. The U.S. forces must respect the Iraqi laws, traditions, and customs.
4- Both sides will continue their efforts in collaboration and improving Iraq’s security capacity, including training, supplying, supporting, founding, and upgrading administrative systems.
5- There is nothing in this agreement that limits either sides’ rights of self defense.

Article Five
Property Ownership

1- Iraq owns all non-mobile buildings and structures that are built on the ground in the installations and areas agreed upon, including those built, used, enhanced, or changed by the U.S. forces.
2- The U.S. is responsible for all expenses of construction, remodeling, modification in installations and areas agreed upon used exclusively by the U.S.. The U.S. forces will consult with the Iraqi authorities regarding the works of construction, remodeling, and modification. The U.S. will seek the Iraqi government’s approval for major construction or modification projects. In case of shared use of installations and areas agreed upon both sides are responsible for expenses. The U.S. forces will pay the fees of services used exclusively by the U.S.Both sides cover the expenses of shared installations and areas agreed upon.
3- In the case of a discovery of historic or cultural sites, or the discovery of a strategic natural resource, in the installations and areas agreed upon, all work of construction or modification or remodeling must stop immediately, and the Iraqi representatives in the joint committee must be informed.
4- The United States will return all installations and areas agreed upon and any non-mobile buildings that were constructed, remodeled, or modified under this agreement, according to mechanisms and priorities agreed upon by the joint committee. They will be returned to Iraq without charge, unless both sides agree otherwise.
5- The U.S. will return all installations and areas agreed upon that have special cultural or political importance and that were constructed, remodeled, or modified under this agreement, according to mechanisms and priorities agreed upon by the joint committee. When this agreement goes into effect, the U.S. will immediately return the properties listed in the attached appendix and mentioned in the letter sent by the U.S. embassy to the Iraqi minister of foreign affairs dated (…)
6- What remains of installations and areas agreed upon will be returned to the Iraqi authorities after this agreement expires or if the U.S. forces no longer needs them.
7- The U.S. forces and U.S. contractors maintain their ownership of all equipment, materials, supplements, mobile structures, and other mobile properties imported to Iraq or obtained in Iraq in accordance to the agreement.

Article Six
Usage of Installations and areas agreed upon

1- Iraq guarantees the accessibility of the U.S. forces and U.S. contractors to installations and areas agreed upon according to what both sides agree on, while insuring that Iraq’s sovereignty is not undermined. Installations and areas agreed upon will be returned to Iraq without charge, unless both sides agree otherwise.
2- Iraq authorizes the U.S. forces to practice all the authorities and have all the rights to manage construct, use, maintain, and secure installations and areas agreed upon. Both sides coordinate and collaborate regarding shared installations and areas agreed upon.
3- The United States forces control the entrances of the installations and areas agreed upon. Both sides coordinate their work in shared installations and areas agreed upon based on mechanisms put by the joint military operations committee.

Article 7
Storage of defense equipments

1- The U.S. forces are authorized to store in the installations and areas agreed upon systems, weapons, ammunition, equipment, and materials used by the U.S. forces and related to the U.S. temporary mission in Iraq. Weapons that are used by the U.S. forces are not connected in any way to weapons of mass destruction (chemical weapons, nuclear weapons, radiological weapons, biological weapons, and waste related to such weapons). The U.S. forces control the use and transportation of such weapons. The U.S. forces guarantees than no weapons or ammunition will be stored near residential areas, and it will inform the Iraqi government with important information regarding their amount and types.

Article 8
Environmental Protection

Both sides agree to implement this agreement while protecting nature and human security and health. The U.S. complies with Iraqi environmental laws, and Iraq should comply with its laws and regulations to protect the health of the U.S. armed forces.

Article 9
Movement of vehicles, ships, and airplanes

1- U.S. forces’ vehicles and ships are permitted to enter and exit and move inside Iraqi territories for the purposes of this agreement. The joint committee puts the appropriate regulations to control this movement.
2- U.S. government airplanes and civilian airplanes contracted with the U.S. Department of Defense are authorized to fly in the Iraqi airspace, refueling in the air, landing and departing in Iraq. The Iraqi authorities will give a one year authorization to the mentioned airplanes to land and depart from Iraq for the purposes of this agreement. No parties are allowed aboard U.S. government airplanes and civilian airplanes contracted with the U.S. Department of Defense and related ships and vehicles without U.S. forces consent, and they cannot be searched. The joint committee puts the appropriate regulations to facilitate their movement.
3- Air traffic control and surveillance are handed over immediately to the Iraqi authorities as soon as this agreement goes into effect.
4- Iraq can ask for the U.S. forces to temporarily take responsibility of the control and surveillance of the Iraqi airspace, and these tasks will be handed over to the Iraqi government upon its request. The Iraqi authorities will participate in the control and surveillance of the Iraqi airspace during the temporary period.
5- U.S. government airplanes and civilian airplanes contracted with the U.S. Department of Defense are not subject to taxes or related fees, including any fees related to flying in Iraqi airspace, refueling in the air, landing and departing in Iraq. Also, U.S. ships and civilian ships contracted with the U.S. Department of Defense are not subject to taxes or related fees during using Iraqi ports. Airplanes and ships are not subject to any search, and all Iraqi requirements of registration are waived.
6- U.S. forces pay money for any services or materials obtained or received in Iraq.
7- Both sides exchange maps and other information on mines and other obstacles in the Iraqi lands and waters that might jeopardize either side’s movement in Iraq’s land and waters.
Article Ten
Contracting

U.S. forces are permitted to sign contracts in accordance to U.S. law to obtain materials and services in Iraq, including construction services. U.S. forces can obtain such materials and services from any source, and they must respect Iraq laws when signing contracts, and they will choose Iraqi contractors when possible as long as their bids have the best value. The U.S. forces will inform the Iraqi authorities of the Iraqi importers and Iraqi contractors names and the amount of relevant contracts.

Article Eleven
Services and telecommunications

1- U.S. forces are permitted to produce and generate water and electricity and other services for the installations and areas agreed upon in coordination with the Iraqi authorities through the joint committee.
2- The Iraqi government owns all frequencies. The Iraqi authorities allocate special waves for the U.S. forces based on what both sides decide through the joint committee (JMOCC). The U.S. forces will give these waves back after it is done with using them.
3- The U.S. forces are permitted to operate their own wired and wireless telecommunications (according to the definition of wired and wireless telecommunications in the Convention of the International Telecommunication Union of 1992), including all the special services needed to secure the full capacity of telecommunications operations. The U.S. operates its systems in accordance to the Convention of the International Telecommunication Union whenever it is possible to implement these regulations.
4- For the purposes of this agreement, all fees related to the U.S. usage of telecommunications frequencies are waived, including any administrative or other related fees.
5- U.S. forces will coordinate with the Iraqi authorities regarding any telecommunications infrastructure projects outside the installations and areas agreed upon.
Article Twelve
Legal Jurisdictions

1- The U.S. has exclusive legal jurisdiction over U.S. armed forces members and civilian members inside and outside installations and areas agreed upon.
Iraqi Suggestion:< the Iraqi delegation has suggested the following: The U.S. has the legal jurisdictions over the U.S. armed forces members and civilian members inside installations and areas agreed upon at all times, and outside the installations and areas agreed upon while conducting missions except for intentional crimes and major mistakes.
U.S. suggestion: The U.S. delegation suggested the following:As a temporary regulation, and until the withdrawal of the U.S. combat forces is complete as indicated in paragraph 1 of article 26, until the combat missions are over the U.S. has the exclusive legal jurisdiction over U.S. armed forces members and civilian members inside and outside installations and areas agreed upon.
2- The U.S. will give its full attention to any complaint submitted by Iraq over intentional crimes and major mistakes that break Iraqi laws committed by U.S. armed forces members and civilian members. All complaints submitted by the Iraqi legal authorities will be dealt with by the joint committee and settled by mutual agreement of both sides.
Iraqi Suggestion: the Iraqi delegation has suggested the following:
Iraq has legal jurisdiction over U.S. armed forces members and civilian members who commit intentional crimes or major mistakes that break the Iraqi laws. The related joint committee concerning jurisdictions takes the appropriate action to solve disputes based on mutual agreement.
3- Iraq has legal jurisdiction over U.S. contractors and their employees when they break Iraqi laws.
4- U.S. forces will inform the Iraqi authorities of any criminal investigations that relate to members of the U.S. armed forces or civilian members involved in a crime against a victim that usually lives in Iraq. Both sides put the appropriate regulations to contact people related to incidents, provide details of the case and court dates, and help persons involved contact lawyers in accordance to article 21 of this agreement. The U.S. will work on holding the court in Iraq when that is appropriate and when both sides agree on it. In case the court was based in the U.S., the United States will make its best effort to facilitate bringing victims into the court.
5- Both sides agree to help each other in incidents’ investigations and collecting evidences to support a fair judgment.
6- All members of U.S. armed forces or civilian members who get arrested by the Iraqi authorities must be surrendered immediately to the U.S. forces authorities.
Iraqi Suggestion: the Iraqi delegation has suggested the following:
All members of U.S. armed forces or civilian members who get arrested by the Iraqi authorities must be surrendered to the U.S. forces authorities within 24 hours.

Article Thirteen
Baring Guns and wearing uniforms

U.S. armed forces members and civilian members are authorized to carry U.S. government guns during their presence in Iraq based on the authorities and orders given to them. U.S. armed forces members are also permitted to wear their official uniforms during duty in Iraq.
Article Fourteen
Entering and Exiting

1- For the purposes of the agreement, U.S. armed forces members and civilian members can enter and exit Iraq from official borders using U.S.-issued ID cards. The joint committee puts a mechanism for the Iraqi verification process.
2- For purposes of verification the U.S. forces will submit to the Iraqi authorities a list with the names of U.S. armed forces members and civilian members entering and exiting Iraq or through the Installations and areas agreed upon.

3- The Iraqi entering and exiting laws can be implemented on others, but not on the U.S. armed forces members and civilian members.

Article Fifteen
Importing and Exporting

1- For the purposes of the agreement, including training and services, the U.S. forces and their contractors are permitted to import into Iraq and export from Iraq and re-export from Iraq and transport and use any equipments, supplements, materials, technology, training, or services except for those materials banned in Iraq at the time of signing this agreement. These materials are not subject to search or to license requirement or any other limitations. Exporting Iraqi goods by the U.S. forces is not subject to search or any other limitations either except the license discussed later in this agreement. The joint committee will coordinate with the Iraqi ministry of trade to facilitate getting the required export license in accordance to the Iraqi laws related to exporting goods by U.S. forces.
2- U.S. forces members and civilian members are permitted to import, re-export, and use their personal equipment and materials for consumption or personal use. Such materials are not subject to any licenses, limitations, taxes and customs or other fees defined in paragraph 10 of article 2, except for required or obtained services. The amount of imports must be reasonable and for personal use. The U.S. forces authorities will put the needed regulations to insure no materials or articles of cultural or historical value are exported.
3- Materials mentioned in paragraph 2 will be searched in a speedy fashion in a specific location agreed upon according to the joint committee.
4- If the tax exempt materials in accordance to this agreement were to be sold in Iraq to individuals or entities not included in tax exemption, taxes and customs as defined in paragraph 10 of article 2 are to be paid by the buyer.
5- It is not permissible to import any of the materials mentioned in this article for commercial reasons.

Article Sixteen
Taxes
1- Services and goods obtained by U.S. forces in Iraq for official use are not subject to taxes and fees as defined in paragraph 10 of article 2.
2- U.S. forces members and civilian members are not subject to any taxes or fees in Iraq except for services obtained or requested by them.

Article Seventeen
Licenses and Permits

1- Iraq agrees to accept valid U.S.-issued drivers’ licenses held by U.S. forces members, civilian members and U.S. contractors without subjecting them to any tests or operation fees for vehicles, ships, and airplanes owned by the U.S. forces in Iraq.
2- Iraq agrees to accept valid U.S.-issued drivers’ licenses held by U.S. forces members, civilian members and U.S. contractors to operate their personal cars in Iraq without subjecting them to any tests or fees.
Article Eighteen
Official and Military Vehicles

For the purposes of this article:
1- Officials vehicles are commercial vehicles that might be modified for security reasons, and they will carry Iraqi license plates to be agreed upon by both sides. Iraqi authorities will issue, based on a request by the U.S. forces authorities, license plates for U.S. forces official cars without fees, and U.S. forces will reimburse the Iraqi authorities for the cost of these plates.
2- Iraq agrees to accept the validity of U.S.-issued licenses and registrations for the U.S. forces official vehicles.
3- All U.S. military vehicles are exempt from registration and licenses requirements. These vehicles will be identified with distinguishable numbers and signs.
Article Nineteen
Support Services
1- U.S. forces, or others acting on its behalf, are permitted to create and manage activities and entities inside the installations and areas agreed upon. This includes providing services to U.S. forces members, civilian members, and their contractors. These activities and entities might include military post offices, financial services, stores selling food, medicine, goods and other services, and it includes other areas providing entertainment and telecommunications. All of the mentioned services do not require a permit.
2- Radio, media, and entertainment activities that reache beyond the installations and areas agreed upon must comply with Iraqi laws.
3- Support services are for the exclusive use of the U.S. forces members, civilian members, their contractors, and other entities to be agreed upon. U.S. forces will take the required measures to ensure none of the mentioned support services are misused, and to insure services and goods will not be re-sold to unauthorized individuals. The U.S. forces will limit radio and TV broadcasting to authorized receivers.
4- Entities and facilities offering services indicated this is article enjoy the same tax exemptions offered to the U.S. forces, including those exemptions mentioned in articles 15 and 16 of this agreement. These entities and facilities offering services are to be operated in accordance to U.S. regulations, and will not be obligated to collect or pay any taxes or fees on its operations.
5- Outgoing mail, sent through military postal services, is verified by the U.S. authorities and is exempt from being searched, examined, or confiscated by the Iraqi authorities.

Article Twenty
Currency and Foreign exchange
1- U.S. forces are permitted to use any amount of U.S. currency or bonds for the purposes of this agreement. Using Iraqi currency in U.S. military banks must be in compliance with Iraqi laws.
2- U.S. forces are permitted to distribute or exchange any amount of currency to the U.S. forces members, civilians’ members, and their contractors for purposes of travelling, including vacations.
3- U.S. forces will not take Iraqi currency out of Iraq, and will take all required measures to insure none of the U.S. forces members, civilian members, or their contractors take Iraqi currency out of Iraq.

Article Twenty One
Claims

1- Except for contract related claims, both sides waive their rights to request compensation because of any harm, loss, or destruction of property, or request compensation for injury or death of forces members or civilian members from both sides occurring during their official duties.
2- Us forces authorities will pay fair and reasonable compensation to settle third party claims arising due to a member of the armed forces or civilian members during their official duties, or due to non-combat accidents caused by U.S. armed forces. The U.S. forces’ authorities may settle claims caused by non-official duties actions. Claims must be dealt with urgently by the U.S. forces’ authorities in accordance to U.S. laws and regulations. When settling claims, the U.S. forces authorities will take in consideration any investigation reports, opinions regarding responsibility, or opinions regarding amount of damages issued by the Iraqi authorities.
3- The joint committee will study issues related to claims resulting from paragraph 1 and 2 of this article and find resolutions in accordance to U.S. and Iraqi laws.

Article Twenty Two
Detention

1- All detention operations in this agreement must be conducted in accordance to the Iraqi law, constitution, sovereignty and national interest as decided by the Iraqi government in accordance to the international law.
2- All individuals detained by U.S. forces must be prepared to be handed over to the Iraqi authorities within 24 hours.
3- No detention operations can take place without a warrant issued by the specialized Iraqi authorities in accordance to the Iraqi law.
4- When Iraqi authorities conduct detention operations, they may ask for the help of the U.S. forces.
5- Detainees are kept in locations prepared by the Iraqi authorities and under its exclusive supervision and control.
6- U.S. forces are not permitted to search houses and other properties without a judicial warrant, unless there was an active combat operation, and in coordinating with the specialized Iraqi authorities.
Article Twenty three
Extending this agreement to other countries

1- Iraq may reach an agreement with any other country participating in the Multi-National forces to ask for their help in achieving security and stability in Iraq.
2- Iraq is permitted to reach an agreement that includes any of the articles mentioned in this agreement with any country or international organization to ask for help in achieving security and stability in Iraq.

Article twenty four
Implementation

The following entities are responsible of the implementation of this agreement and the settlement of any disputes over its interpretation and application:
1- A joint committee of ministers from both sides that deal with the basic issues needed to interpret the implementation of this agreement.
2- A joint committee to coordinate military operations. This committee will be formed by the joint committee of ministers and includes representatives from both sides. The joint committee to coordinate military operations will be jointly led by both sides.
3- A joint committee formed by both sides that includes representatives chosen by both sides. This committee deals with all issues related to this agreement that do not fall under the mandate of the joint committee to coordinate military operations; this committee will jointly led by both sides.
4- Sub-committees in all different areas created by the joint committee. Subcommittees will discuss issues related to interpretation and implementation of this agreement each in accordance to its expertise.
Article twenty five
Implementation Arrangements

Both sides enter into implementation arrangements to execute this agreement.

Article Twenty Six
Targeted times to handover complete security responsibilities to the Iraqi security forces, and withdrawal of U.S. forces from Iraq

Iraqi Suggestion: the Iraqi delegation has suggested the following title to this article:
Transferring security responsibilities to Iraqi authorities, and the withdrawal of the U.S. forces from Iraq
U.S. Suggestion: the U.S. delegation has suggested combining paragraphs 1 and 2 as follows:
1- Both sides have agreed on the following time targets to handover complete security responsibilities to the Iraqi security forces and the withdrawal of the U.S. forces from Iraq:
A- U.S. combat troops will withdraw from Iraq completely at the latest on (…)
B- U.S. forces will withdraw from all cities, towns, and villages at latest by June 30, 2009 unless the Iraqi authorities request otherwise.
Note: the head of the U.S. delegation offered to accept the new title only if their combined paragraph is accepted, and he linked the two as one deal
3- All U.S. combat troops regroup in installations and areas agreed upon after the date mentioned in paragraph 2 of this article.
4- After the withdrawal of all combat troops as mentioned in paragraph 1 of this article, the rest of these forces will stay based on a request from the Iraqi government in accordance to this agreement. The joint committee for operations and coordination will determine the tasks and level of the troops that will focus on training and supporting Iraqi security forces.
5- Both sides review the progress towards achieving dates mentioned in this article and the conditions that might lead to one side asking the other to extend or reduce the time periods mentioned in paragraph 1 and paragraph 2 of this article. Any extension or reduction of the time period is subject to both side’s approval.
6- U.S. forces may withdraw from Iraq before the dates indicated in this article if either of the two sides should so request. Both sides recognize the Iraqi government’s sovereign right to request a withdrawal of U.S. forces at anytime.

Article Twenty Seven
Contract Validity

1- This agreement is valid for (…) years unless it is terminated earlier based on a request from either sides or extended with the approval of both sides.
2- This agreement can be modified with the written approval of both sides and in accordance to constitutional procedures in both countries.
3- Cancellation of this agreement requires a written notice provided on year in advance.
4- This agreement goes into effect on the day that diplomatic memos confirming all constitutional procedures have been met in both countries are exchanged.
5- These memos will be exchanged before the expiration of UN resolution number 1790 at latest by December 31st, 2008.

Representative of the Iraqi government

Representative of the U.S. government

UK airport tests facial-recognition technology

0

Manchester Airport is testing facial-recognition technology as part of the UK £1.2bn e-Borders scheme to tighten controls.

The facial-recognition system, provided by Fujitsu Services in partnership with Vision-Box, works by scanning passengers’ faces and uses automatic gates in an attempt to both tighten border security and speed up immigration processing times.

New facial recognition gates will use scanning equipment to compare the faces of UK and EU passengers to their biometric passports. The system enables passengers holding electronic passports and arriving through Terminal 1 at Manchester airport to fast-track through immigration with no prior registration.

If successful these gates could be rolled-out across the country.

The Government’s electronic border system – e-Borders – will mean every passenger will be counted in and out of Britain and checked against immigration and security watch-lists by 2014. Around 99 percent of foreign nationals from outside the European Economic Area (EEA) will be tracked in and out of Britain by 2010, the Home Office announced last week.

The e-Borders system has already screened 50 million passengers travelling to Britain, leading to more than 2,000 arrests, including murderers, drug dealers and sex offenders, the government has claimed.

Home secretary Jacqui Smith said: “Our high-tech electronic borders system will allow us to count all foreign nationals in and out of the UK, while checking them against watch-lists.”

“These checks make up just one part of Britain’s triple ring of security, alongside fingerprint visas for three-quarters of the world’s population, and the roll-out of ID cards for foreign nationals locking people to one identity.”

The government also announced that a new high-tech center for e-Border will be based in Manchester, where they intend to tackle drug, gun, immigration and sex crime with a force made up of 9,000 working staff and 3,000 police officers. By 2010, its staff will monitor almost every foreign passenger travelling in and out of Britain.

Source

ID cards for foreigners from 25 November

3

The UK Border Agency has given a start date to compulsory identity cards, for foreign nationals applying to stay in the country as students or through marriage

From 25 November, applicants from outside the European Economic Area in these two categories will have to travel to one of six centres to enrol in the National Identity Scheme, which will include having their fingerprints and a photograph taken.

However, employers checking whether they can give a card holder a job will not check fingerprints, and initially neither will border control staff.

Instead, employers will check cards visually. The UK Border Agency will provide organisations with a telephone Employers Verification Service, to use if they have concerns over a card’s validity. A holder’s ability to take up work, to study or to claim benefits will be marked on the card in its ‘remarks’ section.

Philippe Martin, a senior analyst at Kable, said that non-EEA nationals already need a visa to work or study, and the card will work in the same way. “It’s just a renaming,” he said of the move. “Now they have a visa, and in future they will have an identity card.”

The Home Office said that the process has been tested on 10,000 foreign nationals applying in either the student or marriage and civil partnership categories during a three month pilot.

Foreigners from outside the EEA countries who are not in the two chosen categories will continue to receive a vignette in their passport for the time being. A document released by the UK Border Agency in August said that by 2010, only 10% of non-European foreigners will have identity cards, although this will rise to 30% by 2010 and 90% by 2014-15.

Source: Kable’s Government Computing

Police, National Guard, fire tear gas into protest group

1

By Pioneer Press staff | Local police and Minnesota National Guard units are using a combination of pepper spray, concussion grenades and tear gas on a group of breakaway protesters gathered on Kellogg Boulevard in downtown St. Paul. The group of about 150 protesters, many thought to be with the group “Funk the War,” had been blocking traffic for much of the afternoon.

At least one person – a young man wearing a gas mask, no shirt and a backpack – was taken into custody. He lay down on the street as a group of officers surrounded him and took him away.

Police also escorted a group of 17 mostly black-clad youth across the Robert St. Bridge in an apparent effort to get them out of downtown.

Rubber bullets were fired into a crowd at Seventh and Robert Streets. At Seventh and Jackson, police have more than a dozen people in a parking lot as police handcuff them. Police continued to spray the crowd with pepper spray. More details are to come.

The confrontations continued after a main group of anti-war protesters marching from the state Capitol peacefully reached the Xcel Energy center in downtown St. Paul earlier today.

All day, breakaway groups of protesters roamed throughout downtown, blocking traffic and breaking windows. A group calling itself “Funk the War” temporarily blocked traffic across the Wabasha Street Bridge until mounted police moved them along. Three bus loads of reinforcements joined bicycle and mounted police, gathering at Kellogg and Wabasha, wearing gas masks.

Other reports of violent confrontations and damage to property that occurred before and during the march include:

The exit at Seventh Street off Interstate 94 was blocked by a group of about 10 protesters who chained themselves together with lockboxes. The protesters said they were part of the Pittsburgh branch of the Northeast Anarchist Network. “(The purpose) was to shut down the delegates from getting to the RNC,” one said. The police have officially shut down the exit.
There have been several reports of broken windows, including at 380 Jackson Street, where masked protesters smashed windows on the back side of Galtier Plaza; at Heimie’s Haberdashery, where a glass table was turned over and smashed at Sixth and St. Peter streets; at Macy’s at Seventh and Wabasha, and at the 1st National Bank Building at Fourth and Minnesota streets, where four large ground-floor windows were broken or smashed, apparently by rocks.
There was a Minneapolis police car at Sixth and Wabasha with the windshield bashed in and tires slashed.
Numerous people have been arrested, including: Eight at the corner of Sixth and Wall streets. One threw a paintball at a cop, and the windows of two police cars were broken. Twenty protesters are being arrested at 6th and Wall in Lowertown, St. Paul. The protesters, calling themselves nornc.org, are dressed all in black and wearing bandanas across their faces. They are chanting, “We love you,” and singing as 40 police officers, half in riot gear and half bicycle officers, stand guard as more officers search and handcuff group members.
There have been several reports of tires slashed, including on an SUV, on a coach bus near the Garden Hilton and on a FOX 9 TV truck. The driver of the FOX van chased the protesters on foot but didn’t catch them. Downtown resident Chrles Burmann, 53, watched the incident near Wabasha and Seventh street. “It brings back a lot of memories from the ’60s,” he said. “He just slashed these guys’ tires – it’s a little uncalled for.”
Before the march even began, police fired tear gas into a group of people wearing black clothing and bandanas over their faces. The group had blocked John Ireland by Kellogg and walked down the middle of the road to Twelfth Street, tipping a dumpster as they went. They pulled traffic signs down and threw them in front of police squad cars. Police in riot gear then fired the tear gas at St. Peter and Exchange at about 1:35 p.m.
One protester was asked: “Why are you doing this?”

“You’re writing about it, aren’t you?” he said.

As groups gathered in different areas of downtown St. Paul before the anti-war march began, there was a confrontation between police and a breakaway group of protesters at the intersection of Seventh and Minnesota streets in downtown St. Paul.

Police attempted to direct the crowd up Seventh Street, and protesters attempted to push through police barricades heading down Minnesota.

Shoving ensued, and police discharged a pepper-spray-like substance into the crowd, and held the intersection.

The crowd paused and played music and danced in front of cops, while those who were hit with pepper spray laid down on sidewalks and had their eyes flushed. At least one member of the press was also hit.

Police pushed the crowd up West Seventh armed in riot gear carrying sticks.

As a group of marchers passed the Dorothy Day Center near Seventh Street and Main, they formed a “pit” and began dancing in front of the Center.

When protesters arrived at the main protest area near the Dorothy Day Center, they were met with supporters of the war in Iraq, who carried “Victory Over Terrorism” signs.

The counter-protest was led by Joe Repya, a 62-year-old retired U.S. Army lieutenant colonel and RNC delegate who volunteered for active duty at age 58.

There were some verbal confrontations, but for the most part the mood of the crowd remained buoyant, dancing to music blasting from a portable speaker.

“They were throwing a lot of words at us,” Repya said. “Nothing I’d repeat in front of female company.”

Protesters wore a variety of garb, from colorful, almost clownish outfits to black bandanas over their faces. Cops wore gas masks and moved down Seventh Street on bikes and horses to push the crowd forward before the breakaway group separated into smaller groups and spread throughout downtown, often running.

Some protesters let out the air in government vehicles, and police seemed to allow them to roam.

Joe, a member of D.C. Students for a Democratic Society, was a part of the breakaway group, which seemed to be led by an impromptu dance and protest organization called “Funk the War.”

“They’ve disrupted the lives of so many people, Iraqis, New Orleaners, they didn’t help them. The least we could do is disrupt their day for a couple of hours,” said Joe, who declined to give his last name.

“The cops are being very aggressive,” he added. “Hopefully, they’ll let us keep practicing our free speech.”

Marcus Washington, a freelance videographer wearing a “Media” badge, said cops sprayed him with pepper spray twice at Seventh and Minnesota streets.

“I grabbed my press pass, a walked forward with my camera toward police just to film them and they maced me,” said Washington, shirtless and whose face was streaked with a liquid used to flush the pepper spray. “I got delerious and blind and fell over. … It’s still burning because I shaved my head and I have tattoos.”

On Seventh Street near Main, eleven local citizens, clad in bright yellow bibs, assembled themselves with a goal of preventing violence by inserting themselves between cops and protesters. They were mostly middle-aged adults and they talked with authorities to let them know their purpose. They wore armbands that say: “I will not hurt you.”

There was a report of tear gas being sprayed into the crowd at Seventh Street and Cedar.

At Eleventh Street and Minnesota, a group of 30 – 40 people, one of whom said they “are with a group of fellow citizens of America practicing Democracy,” wandered in front of cars driving on the street in what appeared to be an attempt to disrupt traffic. About 50 riot police followed the group as it continued to move toward the Capitol.

Reporters witnessed members of the group slash the tires of a FOX news van and let air out of the tires of government mini-vans.

The same group of about 100 people wearing black formed a blockade at Sixth and Cedar streets and overturned traffic routing signs and newspaper boxes and threw them across the road. Traffic is blocked on many downtown streets.

About 2,000 protesters waved peace sign flags and rallied at the state Capitol ahead of the march to the site of the Republican National Convention. Hundreds of police wearing bulletproof vests and carrying batons stood by.

The crowd was far short of the 50,000 that organizers had hoped to attract, but officers in riot gear were stationed along the route of the march to Xcel Energy Center. Police initially estimated the crowd at 10,000, but then revised it sharply downward an hour later.

An anarchist group known as the RNC Welcoming Committee had worked for months on strategies to disrupt the convention. Despite preemptive police searches over the weekend that resulted in six arrests, the group issued a statement Monday saying it was “moving forward with a national call to crash the convention.”

The group was not formally involved in Monday’s march, which was organized by a coalition of antiwar groups.

Police said they were prepared for anything.

“We will not tolerate lawlessness in the city of St. Paul,” St. Paul Police Chief John Harrington said. “If you come here to throw rocks, if you come here to throw Molotov cocktails … we will stop you.”

At the rally, speaker after speaker called for an immediate end to the war and more spending on domestic needs, such as providing health care and fixing crumbling bridges.

At the capitol, a group of 200 or so college-age people holding a banner that read “Students for a Democratic Society” began walking the route before the set time of the march. Many wore bandanas around their faces, bracing for the possibility that police would use tear gas.

They soon stopped in front of a couple dozen counter-protesters who were holding signs that read “Victory over terrorism.” The students played the song “Like a Virgin” and performed the “Electric Slide” dance in front of the counter-protesters.

Immigrants, labor groups, veterans, student groups and others gathered for the rally, which was to walk about a mile and a half from the Capitol to the site of the convention and back.

At the rally, a 25-foot-long ice sculpture rose 3 feet in the air and spelled “Democracy.” Some protesters flew kites, waved American and peace-sign flags and carried homemade anti-war signs.

Peace activist Steve Clemens, 47, from Minneapolis said he was disturbed by the number of police.

“But we can’t control that,” said Clemens, who had already been arrested once _ for crossing into a restricted area during a march Sunday.

Alan Rybak, a real estate agent from Lakeville, Minn., stood along the protest route carrying a sign that read “Support Our Troops.”

“I’m here to support our troops and to tell (protesters) to get a job and go home,” said Rybak, a Republican Party activist.

Monday’s larger rally went ahead even as the GOP curtailed the day’s official activities because of Hurricane Gustav.

Police executed a series of raids in the days leading up to the march. One of the six arrested over the weekend on probable cause of conspiracy to commit a riot was released Sunday, according to attorney Bruce Nestor. No charges were filed against the woman, 23-year-old Monica Bicking. The other five remained jailed, possibly until Wednesday, Nestor said.

In the raids, police seized materials including knives, axes, bomb-making materials, maps and anti-war literature.

One man was briefly detained by police Monday morning after a smaller march by about 100 veterans opposed to the Iraq war. Wes Davey, 59, a retired first sergeant from St. Paul, said he was willing to be arrested for his cause. Police first said Davey had been arrested, but spokesman Pete Crum later said he wasn’t.

McCain Suggests Bush Has Endorsed Torture

0

By Zachary A. Goldfarb | Sen. John McCain today issued some of his strongest criticism of President Bush over an aggressive interrogation technique, clearly suggesting that the president has endorsed torture.

During an assessment of the Bush presidency on “Fox News Sunday,” McCain discussed the administration’s use over “waterboarding,” a technique that has been used to interrogate terrorist detainees.

“Waterboarding to me is torture, okay? And waterboarding was advocated by the administration, and according to a published report, was used,” McCain said. “I obviously don’t want to torture any prisoners.”

McCain also said that he opposed the “spending spree” in the Bush years and wanted to take bigger steps to fight climate change. He gave the president credit for preventing another terrorist attack on U.S. soil since Sept. 11, 2001.

The issue of waterboarding has been a central one for McCain, a former prisoner of war who sponsored in 2005 the Detainee Treatment Act. That legislation forbade the U.S. military from using waterboarding and other harsh tactics on prisoners, but it exempted the CIA. Bush signed the legislation grudgingly, adding a signing statement that stated the president will decide when and how the bill’s limitations apply during wartime.

Earlier this year, McCain voted against making the CIA subject to the act. Bush later vetoed that bill. Democrats accused McCain of ignoring his principles to appeal to core Republican voters; aides rejected that, saying the vote was consistent with his long-expressed view on how best to prosecute the war.

McCain’s comments, made in a taped interview broadcast the day before the Republican National Convention opens in St. Paul, Minn., came as Hurricane Gustav threatened to wallop the Gulf Coast.

In comments that previously had been released, McCain said his team was studying “various options” about changing the convention’s schedule, “maybe devoting some of the activities to bringing [the] American people’s attention to trying to help [the hurricane’s] victims.”

“We don’t want to appear in any way festive when you have that kind of tragedy possibly revisiting itself on the city of New Orleans and areas around it,” he said.

McCain faced questions about his running mate, Alaska Gov. Sarah Palin, who was announced on Friday.

McCain called Palin “a partner and a soulmate … a person who will help me reform Washington and change the way they do business.”

On ABC’s “This Week,” the 2004 Democratic presidential nominee said the choice of Palin was evidence that McCain had gone from being a “maverick” to an “erratic” politician.

In his heart, Sen. John F. Kerry (Mass.) said, McCain wanted to pick former Pennsylvania governor Tom Ridge, a Republican, or Sen. Joseph Lieberman, an independent from Connecticut. Both are good friends of McCain, and both favor abortion rights.

“Rush Limbaugh and the right wing vetoed it,” Kerry said. “John McCain was forced to come back and pick a sort of Cheney-esque social conservative who’s going to satisfy the base.”

Kerry said the choice of Palin links McCain even more to the Bush legacy.

“We’ve been warning against the third term of George Bush. With the choice of Governor Palin, it’s now the third term of Bush-Cheney,” he said.

Some political analysts have speculated that, by choosing a woman for his ticket, McCain was trying to attract wayward supporters of Sen. Hillary Rodham Clinton.

Kerry said McCain shouldn’t count on it.

“The people who supported Hillary Clinton are not going to be seduced just because John McCain has picked a woman,” he said. “They’re going to look at what she supports.”

Kerry said Palin fails the “threshold test” of a vice president: “to prove to the American people that the person that you’ve chosen can fill in tomorrow” as president.

Asked if McCain had picked someone who could lead the country if something happened to him, Sen. Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.), a close friend of his, first sidestepped the question.

“I think what he was looking for is a partner to tell a story about what he wants to do in Washington,” Graham said on ABC.

Pressed, Graham said Palin has far more of the right kind of experience for the job than does Sen. Barack Obama, the Democratic nominee.

“What has he done? What has he done? What has Senator Obama done in terms of managing a war?” Graham said.

On Fox, McCain cited several reasons that Palin’s experience on foreign affairs surpasses Obama’s. First, he said, she agrees with him on issues such as Iran and the Iraq war. Plus, he said, Palin, as governor, has headed the Alaskan National Guard.

In an ABC interview, McCain’s wife, Cindy, noted that Palin is especially suited to confront foreign issues such as the resurgence of Russia because Alaska is in close proximity to it.

“Alaska is the closest part of our continent to Russia. So it’s not as if she doesn’t understand what’s at stake here,” Cindy McCain said.

Cindy McCain also addressed her just-completed trip to war-torn Georgia, calling it the kind of trip she said she’d like to take more often as a first lady.

“I don’t represent the government or anything, but, from the humanitarian aspect, it’s very important that we continue to get aid in,” she said.

Cindy McCain also addressed Obama’s acceptance speech at last week’s Democratic convention, saying she took umbrage at comments that McCain has lived a lavish life and can’t relate to ordinary Americans.

“I’m offended by Barack Obama saying that about my husband,” she said. “My husband was a Navy boy. His father and mother were in the Navy. I mean, there’s nothing elitist about that.”

Minnesota Gov. Tim Pawlenty, a Republican who was passed over by McCain for Palin, said his fellow governor would bring real-life economic experience to the ticket.

“One of the objectives is to be able to relate to … and meet and address the needs of average Americans,” Pawlenty said on “Meet the Press.”

And Lieberman also supported the pick, calling it “a bold choice” on CBS’s “Face the Nation.”

“If this is a change election, it’s about changing Washington so that it works again,” Lieberman said, “so that this alliance of partisan political power-brokers and special-interests peddlers is broken.”

McCain said ads of his that compare Obama to celebrities and attack his record were not, in fact, negative.

“It’s respectful. But first of all, I also at that time asked Senator Obama to go to town hall meetings with me. We could appear in front of the American people, the way Barry Goldwater and Jack Kennedy had pledged to do,” McCain said. “I’ll tell you, that changes the tenor of a campaign, I know because I’ve done them in the past.”

CIA memos reveal doubts over ‘key’ Lockerbie witness

0

By Guy Smith | A Libyan “double agent” who was central to the CIA’s investigation into the Lockerbie bombing exaggerated his importance in Tripoli’s intelligence apparatus and gave little information of value, yet is still living at the US taxpayers’ expense in a witness protection programme, according to previously unseen CIA cables.

 

Five months before the destruction of Pan Am flight 103 in December 1988, 27-year-old Majid Giaka turned up at the US embassy in Malta and “expressed a desire to relocate … in return for sensitive information on Libya”, in the words of a cable sent by a CIA case officer to his headquarters in Langley, Virginia, the same day. Mr Giaka claimed he was an agent of Libya’s feared Jamahiriya security organisation, but it later turned out that he worked in the agency’s garage.

More than 60 cables, uncovered in a BBC investigation, detail the relations between the Americans and a man later described in court as a real-life Walter Mitty. Mr Giaka, who said that he worked for Libyan Arab Airlines at Malta’s Luqa airport as a cover, told the CIA that he wanted to remain in Malta. He promised he would co-operate fully with the CIA — in return for money.

At the time Libya was public enemy number one. But the CIA had few sources of information on the country, and Mr Giaka was put on the payroll. In return for information about Libyan officials coming and going from Malta, he received $1,000 a month and gifts. His handlers even agreed to fund $6,000 of fake surgery on his arm, so that he could avoid military service back home.

In the summer of 1989, the Lockerbie investigation was uncovering evidence which pointed to a Libyan connection, and the FBI believed the suitcase which blew up Pan Am flight 103 had started its journey from Luqa airport. The CIA hoped its Libyan agent would have inside knowledge, but the case officers reported back: “Giaka does not believe explosives hidden in an unaccompanied suitcase could be inserted into the handling process at Luqa International Airport.”

The Libyan mole acknowledged that it could have been theoretically possible for officials in Tripoli to bring explosives on to the island via the diplomatic pouch, but “because Giaka believes he had the best contacts of LIA [Luqa International Airport], he does not think this type of operation could have been slipped by him”.

The case officers cabled: “It is clear that Giaka will never be the penetration of the ESO [Libyan External Security Organisation] that we had anticipated … unfortunately, it appears that our assisting him in scam surgery on his arm to avoid military service has had the reverse result that we had intended — it has also allowed him to avoid further service with the ESO, Giaka’s true intention from the beginning”.

But even after it turned out that he had only worked in the ESO garage, he was the only Libyan agent the CIA had in Malta, so it kept him on. By the autumn of 1989, a former Libyan Arab Airlines security official, Abdelbaset Al-Megrahi, was chief suspect for having planted the bomb on an Air Malta flight to Frankfurt (where it was transferred on to a Pan Am flight via London). But Mr Giaka “had no further information” on his one-time colleague.

Mr Giaka eventually returned to Tripoli in 1990 after the CIA money dried up. But the agency kept in touch with him and finally persuaded him in 1991 to come to America. Nine years later, Majid Giaka arrived at the Lockerbie bombing trial in the Netherlands. He described how he had seen Megrahi and his co-accused, Khalifa Fhimah, at Luqa airport before the bombing with a large brown suitcase. But the CIA cables confirm that nearly two years before, Mr Giaka didn’t remember anything.

At the Lockerbie trial, the four judges described some of his evidence as “at best grossly exaggerated and at worst simply untrue” and concluded he was “largely motivated by financial considerations”.

RNC Raids Have Been Targeting Video Activists

0

By Liliana Segura | In the run-up to the Republican convention, Minnesota police launched a series of preemptive raids to intimidate protesters and quash dissent.

“St. Paul is a free country!” cried a resident of Iglehart Avenue, a neighborhood street in St. Paul, Minn., as she watched her next-door neighbor’s house being overtaken by police officers on Saturday afternoon. Just one in a series of house raids over a 24-hour period the weekend before the Republican National Convention, St. Paul police surrounded the private home with weapons drawn, detaining people in the backyard, while journalists, activists and neighbors — including several children — looked on.

Their crime? None whatsoever. No one was trespassing or engaging in acts of civil disobedience. Instead, members of I-Witness Video, a New York-based media watchdog group that records police activity in order to protect civil liberties, were holding an organizing meeting at 949 Iglehart, the home of St. Paul resident Mike Whalen, when armed police officers arrived in the early afternoon and ordered their surrender.

Among them was Eileen Clancy, founder of I-Witness Video, as well as a producer with Democracy Now! DN! host Amy Goodman and her staff had just arrived at Minneapolis/St. Paul International Airport when they received word that producer Elizabeth Press was in the house and being threatened with arrest.

An urgent alert had been sent by Clancy:

 

This is Eileen Clancy. … The house where I-Witness Video is staying in St. Paul has been surrounded by police. We have locked all the doors. We have been told that if we leave we will be detained. One of our people who was caught outside is being detained in handcuffs in front of the house. The police say that they are waiting to get a search warrant. More than a dozen police are wielding firearms …

 

 

… We are asking the public to contact the office of St. Paul Mayor Chris Coleman at 651-266-8510 to stop this house arrest, this gross intimidation by police officers, and the detention of media activists and reporters.

 

By the time we arrived at the 900 block at Iglehart Ave a short while later, the people in the house had been handcuffed and taken out back. Police officers could be seen sitting in unmarked cars, blocking off the residential street, where a growing crowd of observers gathered in front and across the street from the blue house with green columns, straining to get a glimpse of what was happening.

With two officers flanking the entrance of the house, it was hard to see anything — but moments later, a woman emerged from the house next door. “You guys go in my backyard,” she called out. “They’re handcuffed back here!” With that, the crowd rushed around to the back, where over a short chain-link fence they spotted the handcuffed group, seated and surrounded by stoic police in sunglasses.

“These are nice people,” the neighbor admonished the cops. “These are good people.”

 

Sitting with her hands behind her back, Clancy spoke calmly and deliberately as she described what had happened and answered questions from people on the other side of the fence. Someone asked whether they had been read their Miranda rights. “Fuck no!” yelled one of the detainees.

 

As Press would later explain, a pair of police officers had actually shown up at the house earlier that day, at 11 in the morning, asking about the owner of the house. One of them identified himself as being with the FBI. “I think that was them just checking out the scene at the house,” said Press, who videotaped the officers coming to the door. They claimed to want to question a former resident about an action that had occurred a few months earlier. “We’re not here from the convention,” one officer said. Nervous I-Witness members didn’t know what to make of it — “We were like, this is f-d up let’s get out of here,” recalled Press — but they chose to finish their meeting anyway. It was only when they were getting ready to leave that the police showed up, some 20 officers this time, with guns drawn.

Sara Coffey of the National Lawyers Guild had just left the house and was immediately handcuffed. But, as described in Clancy’s alert, Press and the rest of the people in the duplex refused to let the police in because they did not have a warrant. However, at around 3:00 p.m., a warrant materialized for the adjacent space, apartment 951. “They entered through 951, detained everyone in that apartment, including the owner,” recalled Press, “… and then broke into 949 through the attic.” The police entered with their guns drawn, ordered everyone’s hands up and handcuffed them.

Their belongings were confiscated and searched, and the group was assembled in the backyard. But soon after the crowd gathered with video cameras and legal observers, including an attorney for Mike Whalen — and after Amy Goodman jumped the fence to interview people and ask the cops why they were holding nonviolent people who had done nothing wrong — they were released.

witnessvideo3

Preemptive Strikes

Unlike the preceding raids, including one targeting the convergence space of the RNC Welcoming Committee — an anarchist group dubiously described by Ramsey County Sheriff Bob Fletcher as “a criminal enterprise … intent on committing criminal acts” — the raid on the I-Witness house was specifically designed to target media activists whose mission is to hold police officers responsible for abusing their authority. I-Witness Video was instrumental in documenting police abuse during the 2004 Republican National Convention in New York, during which some 1,800 people were arrested. Working in cooperation with the National Lawyers Guild, I-Witness Video led to the dismissal of charges or the acquittal of some 400 protesters. This summer, New York City authorities subpoenaed I-Witness Video for tapes from the protests. In an interview with Democracy Now! on Aug. 1, Clancy discussed the group’s plans for the political conventions.

 

We’re going to bring a crew to both presidential conventions. It’s pretty exciting. I mean, one of the reasons we’re very interested in covering the conventions is (not) because we want … bad things to happen, but because the focus of the federal government, the law enforcement agencies and all that is very keenly directed at demonstrators. And when you cover these events completely, you’re able to see the patterns. The patterns emerge.

 

“I-Witness definitely does document things like police brutality and policing in general during situations of conflict,” I-Witness member Emily Foreman, one of three members who managed to leave the house only to be followed by police and pulled over on their bikes, told a reporter with The Uptake after the raid, noting that that could make the group a target, “not because of anything illegal but because of our interest in upholding the law.”

Nevertheless, the list of items police were looking for would suggest the activists were nothing short of terror suspects. “Packages and contents, firearms and ammunition, holsters, cleaning equipment for firearms, (and) weapons devices” were included in the warrant read by Whalen, who spoke to reporters shortly after his handcuffs were removed. Asked what connection he had to the I-Witness Video activists, he replied, “no connection,” adding, “People needed a place to stay, and I support the work they do.”

Series of Raids

All told, six raids took place in St. Paul in 24 hours, resulting in six arrests. (Read about the other raids here.) On Sunday, the Minnesota Chapter of the National Lawyers Guild sent out a press release announcing that it is “seeking prompt judicial review” of the “preventative detentions” of the six people arrested, all of whom remain on “probable cause holds” in the Ramsey County Jail. According to the press release: “In Minnesota, a probable cause hold can be ordered by a police officer without a prosecutor or a judge reviewing a criminal complaint. Due to the arrest occurring on a weekend holiday, all six citizens can be held until Wednesday, September 3, 2008, without the filing of a formal charge.”

The extent of the federal involvement in the raids is not entirely clear. Although they were reportedly spearheaded by the Ramsey County Sheriff’s office, St. Paul Police coordinated them with the FBI. Furthermore, according to the Star Tribune, the raids were “aided by informants planted in protest groups.” Indeed, as Glenn Greenwald reminded readers on Sunday, the Minneapolis Joint Terrorist Task Force spent months recruiting people to spy on activist groups planning to protest the RNC. On May 21, the Minneapolis City Pages ran a bizarre but chilling story titled “Moles Wanted,” about the recruitment efforts by the task force — specifically, attempts to enlist people to “attend ‘vegan potlucks’ throughout the Twin Cities and rub shoulders with RNC protesters” in a mission to “investigate terrorist acts carried out by groups or organizations which fall within the definition of terrorist groups as set forth in the current United States Attorney General Guidelines.”

“This is all part of a larger government effort to quell political dissent,” attorney Jordan Kushner, told the City Pages at the time. “The Joint Terrorism Task Force is another example of using the buzzword ‘terrorism’ as a basis to clamp down on people’s freedoms and push forward a more authoritarian government.”

With most of the subjects of the raids eventually released, the consensus among activists at the RNC in the wake of the raids is that the police actions are mainly meant to stop protests, lawful or not, before they start. “I think what they’re doing is trying to intimidate people,” said Press. But even as the GOP plans to scale back its convention activities in the face of Hurricane Gustav, with multiple protests scheduled for the week, the actions of the police do not seem to be doing much to dissuade people from going forward with their plans.

The next day, a group of peaceful marchers organized by Veterans for Peace headed downtown. With armed police officers far outnumbering protesters, several marchers were discussing the raids. “It’s intimidation, absolutely,” VFP member Leah Bolger said. “People are harassed to no end.” Although veterans groups were not among the targeted organizations, word of the raids had spread quickly among the demonstrators. “I started this work as part of the peace movement,” said Bolger, a 20-year veteran of the U.S. Navy. “But more and more it’s about civil rights. … When I hear about the raids, it’s just really upsetting and frightening,” she said. But not necessarily surprising. In this era of the supposed “war on terror,” she said, Americans have become used to trading civil rights for a perceived safety. “They’re willing to throw away their civil liberties.”

VIDEO: Democracy Now! Unlawfully Arrested

0

Democracy Now’s Amy Goodman, Sharif Abdel Kouddous and Nicole Salazar were arrested by the Minneapolis Police Department. Charged with conspiracy to riot. Footage from Rick Rowley and Brandon Jourdan.

ST. PAUL — Democracy Now! host Amy Goodman and producers Sharif Abdel Kouddous and Nicole Salazar have all been released from police custody in St. Paul following their illegal arrest by Minneapolis Police on Monday afternoon.

All three were violently manhandled by law enforcement officers. Abdel Kouddous was slammed against a wall and the ground, leaving his arms scraped and bloodied. He sustained other injuries to his chest and back. Salazar’s violent arrest by baton-wielding officers, during which she was slammed to the ground while yelling, “I’m Press! Press!,” resulted in her nose bleeding, as well as causing facial pain. Goodman’s arm was violently yanked by police as she was arrested.

On Tuesday, Democracy Now! will broadcast video of these arrests, as well as the broader police action. These will also be available on: www.democracynow.org.

Goodman was arrested while questioning police about the unlawful detention of Kouddous and Salazar who were arrested while they carried out their journalistic duties in covering street demonstrations at the Republican National Convention. Goodman’s crime appears to have been defending her colleagues and the freedom of the press.

Ramsey County Sheriff Bob Fletcher told Democracy Now! that Kouddous and Salazar were arrested on suspicion of rioting, a felony. While the three have been released, they all still face charges stemming from their unlawful arrest. Kouddous and Salazar face pending charges of suspicion of felony riot, while Goodman has been officially charged with obstruction of a legal process and interference with a “peace officer.”

Democracy Now! forcefully rejects all of these charges as false and an attempt at intimidation of these journalists. We demand that the charges be immediately and completely dropped.

Democracy Now! stands by Goodman, Kouddous and Salazar and condemns this action by Twin Cities’ law enforcement as a clear violation of the freedom of the press and the First Amendment rights of these journalists.

During the demonstration in which the Democracy Now! team was arrested, law enforcement officers used pepper spray, rubber bullets, concussion grenades and excessive force against protesters and journalists. Several dozen demonstrators were also arrested during this action, including a photographer for the Associated Press.

Amy Goodman is one of the most well-known and well-respected journalists in the United States. She has received journalism’s top honors for her reporting and has a distinguished reputation of bravery and courage. The arrest of Goodman, Kouddous and Salazar and the subsequent criminal charges and threat of charges are a transparent attempt to intimidate journalists.

Living in a Lying Nation

0

By Sean M. Madden | The following lead from Monday’s BBC Radio 4 Today program says it all, well, sort of:

Leaders of the European Union are meeting to decide what can be done about Russia in the wake of its invasion of Georgia. The leader of the opposition, David Cameron, went to Georgia in the aftermath of the conflict–and says that Russia must be shown what is unacceptable behaviour and that the UK must continue to stand by Georgia.

If one were to rely on the mainstream propaganda machine anywhere in the West, this statement would perhaps make sense. But when, instead, one actively seeks out news from beyond the mind-bending media machine, Cameron’s lie–like those told by the West’s other leading liars–is criminal in its assertion that Russia was the aggressor. A lie because despite it being known by all concerned, and by NATO leaders in particular, that Russia was responding to Georgia’s assault on South Ossetia, this fact is simply omitted by those who seem hell-bent on starting Cold War II, and who might spark, and even wish to spark, World War III. A criminal lie in that it is being exploited as yet one more in a long, perpetually growing list of casus belli to mask the West’s own “unacceptable behaviour,” its own criminal aggression.

But the Western media always reserves the right to choose its starting point in history. Those who retain a semblance of individual thought after seven years of being brainwashed by our brave truth-telling journalists may recall that all of history collapsed on the morning of September 11, 2001. The public was, therefore, denied a frank national discussion concerning U.S. foreign policy actions which may have led to the attacks. We were similarly denied a frank national discussion concerning the attacks themselves, who may have perpetrated them, what their motives may have been, who may have benefitted from the attacks, and what evidence existed which might point–beyond a shadow of a doubt–to the true culprits. Instead, what could have been a maturation moment for our adolescent republic, led, on the contrary, to a blatant attempt to keep “we the people” infantile in our response.

Living then in Massachusetts, I had been on the computer a couple hours before the terrorist strikes. I had noted with a certain sense of justice that a Reuters top headline had reported that the family of General René Schneider had filed a lawsuit on September 10 accusing Henry Kissinger of orchestrating a CIA operation which led to the 1970 assassination of Schneider, then commander-in-chief of the Chilean army. Immediately after learning of the terrorist attacks, I checked the Reuters headlines again–and searched the Reuters news database–to find that the story was no longer available.

History had gone down the memory hole, as it so often must do if monstrous lies are to be maintained.

Therefore, in the case of the Georgian conflict, Georgia’s aggressive assault on South Ossetia must be wiped out of existence by wiping the fact–if it ever reached us–from our individual and collective memory, through constant repetition of the lie, both explicit and implicit. We’ve all heard the explicit. What follows is an example of the implicit, and therefore perhaps even more insidious, lie.

John Humphrys, the supposedly hard-headed host of the Today program, set up Monday’s program with a false dichotomy, both sides of which assume the axiomatic lie of Russian aggression. Noticing when this false dichotomizing occurs is crucial, as one can thereby often see that even when a journalist appears to be critical he might very well be blindsiding us with propaganda:

To sceptical observers there is something vaguely absurd about the leaders of the European Union being summoned for an emergency summit meeting to decide what should be done about Russia in the wake of its invasion of Georgia. Because, they point out, there is nothing that can be done. If a military response is ruled out–and it is–what is left is sanctions, and how you enforce sanctions against a country with so much oil and gas that we need them rather more than they need us. Well, the sceptics may yet be confounded, and, indeed, we’re hearing pretty bellicose statements coming from the Russians themselves.

So, the question–as the BBC presents it, even by a journalist famous for his tenacity in interviewing politicians–is “to decide what should be done about Russia in the wake of its invasion of Georgia,” not reporting that this very statement is a lie, a lie told by the politicians and bellowed by their journalists.

The first article I wrote about the Georgia conflict was in response to the New York Times bellowing of August 14. It is perhaps right, then, that as an American living in Britain I point out that journalists on this side of the Atlantic are just as guilty as their American colleagues of hammering the lies into our noggins so as to form, or forge, public opinion–that is, to shape and mold our every thought, our every consideration, our every conviction–such that we blindly support our criminal leaders’ criminal actions.

The Today program, I should note, is BBC Radio 4’s most popular show, reported on its own website to reach over six million listeners each week. Radio 4 itself is a sort of British equivalent of National Public Radio in the U.S., and is similarly influential in its reach. Its programming in general, and the Today program in particular, often includes leading British politicians and other prominent opinion makers as guests, as in the case of opposition leader David Cameron being interviewed for today’s program.

In closing, I had hoped when I moved to Britain three years ago–for my wife to return to her native home after living in the U.S. with me for twelve years–that the world-renowned British press would prove to be more critical of, less beholden to, the criminal powers that be.

Worse, they are every bit as criminally complicit as their American counterparts.

And, so, whether I live in the United States or in the United Kingdom, I shall, regrettably, be living in a lying nation, a nation I call home.

Ron Paul Kicks Off Campaign for Liberty

0

By Barbara L. Minton | Remember Ron Paul, the candidate who annoyed reporters, the left and the right by trying to talk about the real issues facing Americans during the presidential contender’s debate? Although he gets very little media coverage aside from ridicule, he is still around and trying to get Americans to wake up to the threat to their liberty presented by the forces behind globalization. His latest initiative is the Campaign for Liberty, scheduled to kick off at the Rally for the Republic in Minneapolis from August 31 to September 2.

The Campaign will be the largest organization for peace, freedom, the Constitution, and sound money in American history. It will launch in grand fashion with lots of special guests, celebrities and media attention. Tickets to the three day Rally for the Republic event are already selling rapidly for a patriotic $17.76.

The mission of the Campaign for Liberty as stated is to promote and defend the great American principles of individual liberty, constitutional government, sound money, free markets, and noninterventionist foreign policy, by means of education and political activity.

The following is the statement of principles for the Campaign for Liberty. This statement eloquently reflects what Ron Paul tried to tell us during the debates but was not allowed to by the main stream media:

Americans inherit from their ancestors a glorious tradition of freedom and resistance to oppression. Our country has long been admired by the rest of the world for her great example of liberty and prosperity —- a light shining in the darkness of tyranny.

But many Americans today are frustrated. The political choices they are offered give them no real choice at all. For all their talk of “change”, neither major political party as presently constituted challenges the status quo in any serious way. Neither treats the Constitution with anything but contempt. Neither offers any kind of change in monetary policy. Neither wants to make the reductions in government that our crushing debt burden demands. Neither talks about bringing American troops home not just from Iraq but from around the world. Our country is going bankrupt, and none of these sensible proposals are even on the table.

The destructive bipartisan consensus has suffocated American political life for many years. Anyone who tries to ask fundamental questions instead of cosmetic ones is ridiculed or ignored.

The U.S. Constitution is at the heart of what the Campaign for Liberty stands for, since the very least we can demand of our government is fidelity to its own governing document. Claims that our Constitution was meant to be a “living document” that judges may interpret as they please are fraudulent, incompatible with republican government, and without foundation in the constitutional text or the thinking of the framers. Thomas Jefferson spoke of binding our rulers down from mischief by the chains of the Constitution, and we are proud to follow in his distinguished lineage.

With our Founding Fathers, we also believe in a noninterventionist foreign policy. Inspired by the old Robert Taft wing of the Republican Party, we are convinced that the American people cannot remain free and prosperous with 700 military bases around the world, troops in 130 countries, and a steady diet of war propaganda. Our military overstretch is undermining our national defense and bankrupting our country.

We believe that the free market, reviled by people who do not understand it, is the most just and human economic system and the greatest engine of prosperity the world has ever known.

We believe with Ludwig von Mises, Henry Hazlitt, and F.A. Hayek that central banking distorts economic decision making and misleads entrepreneurs into making unsound investments. Hayek won the Nobel Prize for showing how central banks’ interference with interest rates sets the stage for economic downturns. And the central bank’s ability to create money out of thin air transfers wealth from the most vulnerable to those with political pull, since it is the latter who receive the new money before the price increases it brings in its wake have yet occurred. For economic and moral reasons, therefore, we join the great twentieth-century economists in opposing the Federal Reserve System, which has reduced the value of the dollar by 95 percent since it began in 1913.

We oppose the dehumanizing assumption that all issues that divide us must be settled at the federal level and forced on every American community, whether by activist judges, a power-hungry executive, or a meddling Congress. We believe in the humane alternative of local self-government, as called for in our Constitution.

We oppose the transfer for American sovereignty to supranational organizations in which the American people possess no elected representatives. Such compromises of our country’s independence run counter to the principles of the American Revolution, which was fought on behalf of self-government and local control. Most of these organizations have a terrible track record even on their own terms: how much poverty have the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund actually alleviated, for example? The peoples of the world can interact with each other just fine in the absence of bureaucratic intermediaries that undermine their sovereignty.

We believe that freedom is an indivisible whole, and that it includes not only economic liberty but civil liberties and privacy rights as well, all of which are historic rights that our civilization has cherished from time immemorial.

Our stances on other issues can be deduced from these general principles.

Our country is ailing. This is the bad news. The good news is that the remedy is so simple and attractive: a return to the principles our Founders taught us. Respect for the Constitution, the rule of law, individual liberty, sound money, and a noninterventionist foreign policy constitute the foundation of the Campaign for Liberty.

Reference:

Mission and Policy Statements are from the Ron Paul’s Campaign for Liberty website. If you have been moved by what you have read, you can donate to the Campaign at this website:
(http://www.campaignforliberty.com/mission/)

Tickets to the Rally for the Republic kickoff event can be purchased at:
(http://www.rallyfortherepublic.com/)

Chomsky: Britain Failed To Stop US Shameful Acts

1

Britain has failed in its duty to stop the US from committing “shameful acts” in the treatment of suspects detained during the war on terror, one of America’s most respected intellectuals Noam Chomsky warns.
 
In an interview with The Independent, Professor Chomsky calls on the government to use its special relationship with Washington to secure the closure of Guantanamo Bay.
 
The emeritus professor of linguistics said that he has heard only “twitters of protest” in the UK asking British “thinkers” to be more conspicuous in their opposition to the erosion of civil rights since the 9.11 attacks on the US.
 
In the wake of the invasion of Iraq, Prof Chomsky, a leading opponent of the Vietnam conflict, has been the most prominent among US intellectuals critical of the war with the Iraq and the treatment of terror suspects sent to Guantanamo Bay and other prison camps around the world.
 
Chomsky’s comments call into question Britain’s political and intellectual will to stand up for the rule of law in the face of actions that have been repeatedly condemned by courts on both sides of the Atlantic.
 
“A country,” says Chomsky, “with any shred of self-respect will be vigilant to ensure that it does not take part in this criminal savagery. Because of the “special relationship,” Britain has a particularly strong responsibility to bar these shameful crimes in any way it can. In whatever respect the relationship is “special”, the UK can use it to bar these shameful crimes.”
 
Asked whether Britain should be doing more to seek the closure of the Guantanamo Bay, Chomsky answered: “Definitely. I’ve seen only twitters of protest.”
 
Professor Chomsky believes that the case against Guantanamo needs to be made more forcefully.
 
“We hardly needed evidence that Gitmo was going to be a torture chamber,” clarifies Chomsky. “Otherwise, why not place “enemy combatants” in a prison in New York? The security argument is not serious. Taking a step back, does the US have the right to hold these prisoners at all? Hardly obvious. In brief, there are plenty of grounds for protest (and action), at varying levels of depth.”
 
His comments have met with broad support from those who have been campaigning for the British government to take a more critical position in its relationship with the Bush administration.
 
Clive Stafford Smith, the lawyer representing British Guantanamo detainee, Binyam Mohamed, said: “Professor Chomsky is right. To borrow from President Clinton, the world is much more impressed by the power of America’s example than the example of American power…A true friend to American would not stand by while President Bush squanders America’s birthright.”
 
Andrew Tyrie MP, chairman of the all party parliamentary group on rendition, said: “The UK Government’s reaction to the US program of rendition: a policy of kidnapping people and taking them to places where they may be tortured, has been inadequate, to say the least. It is scarcely credible that now, despite all we know about rendition and the UK’s involvement in it, the British Government still refuses to condemn this illegal, immoral, and counterproductive policy.”
 
Professor Chomsky, professor emeritus of linguistics at the Massachusetts Institute of Technolog, says that the US must now hand Guantanamo Bay back to Cuba.
 
“The region was taken by a ‘treaty’ that Cuba was forced to sign under military occupation. The US has been violating the terms of this outrageous treaty for decades – e.g., using it for holding Haitians who were illegally captured when they were feeling terror in Haiti. Current use also radically violates the terms of the outrageous treaty. ”
 
Rise of the libertarian socialist
Noam Chomsky, 79, rose to prominence in the field of linguistics during the 1950s by positing new theories on the structures of language. His naturalistic approach to the study of linguistics deeply influenced thinking in both psychology and philosophy. But it was his strident opposition to the Vietnam War which brought him to the attention of a wider American public.
 
Through his adherence to libertarian socialism he became a cheerleader for the dissident left in opposition to many aspects of US foreign policy. Later he described his belief as “the proper and natural extension of classical liberalism into the era of advanced industrial society”.
 
Professor Chomsky, who lives in Lexington, Massachusetts, has been an outspoken critic of the war in Iraq and the “war on terror”. In 2005 he was voted the leading living public intellectual in the Global Intellectuals Poll run by the magazine Prospect. His characteristic reaction to the news of his achievement was: “I don’t pay a lot of attention to polls.”

Labour proposes huge increase in state surveillance

1
World Socialist Website | In a further escalation of the attack on democratic rights, the Labour government is proposing a huge increase in state surveillance. It is implementing new measures under the pretext of the “war on terror” to intrude ever deeper into the private lives of people who are viewed as potential criminals rather than citizens.

As things stand, the Regulation of Investigatory Powers Act (RIPA) introduced in 2004 allows hundreds of public bodies to monitor communications without a court warrant. The Commissioner for the Interception of Communications, Paul Kennedy, oversees 795 agencies and organisations permitted by RIPA to acquire communications data. These include 9 intelligence agencies, 52 police forces, 12 other law enforcement agencies, 139 prisons, 475 local authorities, and 108 other organisations such as the Post Office and the Food Standards Agency.

There were 519,000 requests for information in 2006/07, mainly from the police and security services–up from 440,000 the previous year. Official reports say law enforcement agencies were also authorised to “interfere with someone’s property” about 3,000 times in 2007/08, mount 355 “intrusive surveillance” operations (breaking in to someone’s property or planting a bug) and carry out 18,767 cases of “directed surveillance” (following someone and recording their activities).

Currently, telecommunications companies must store records of all phone calls for a year so that they can be examined. In 2005, Statewatch News Online revealed how T-mobile had “an automated e-mail system that allows law enforcement agencies to retrieve subscriber and billing details by consulting the system directly–all they need is a mobile phone number. This process requires no human intervention from T-mobile staff: the system automatically generates spreadsheets showing the subscriber and billing information and sends them to the law enforcement e-mail address.”

From next year, internet service providers will also be compelled to collect information about the web sites people visit and details of their emails. The Home Office said the new measures would force companies to store “a billion incidents of data exchange a day” and dismisses any concerns about these developments with the usual mantra, “we consider that these measures are a proportionate interference with individuals’ right to privacy to ensure protection of the public.”

There are plans to force all companies to hand over their data to one central “super” database so that government agencies will no longer need to submit requests to individual companies.

The government is also putting pressure on organisations besides the police and security services to make more use of spying powers. Kennedy complained, “I am concerned that so many authorities who applied for powers to be given to them, apparently do not use them and I do not know why this is … if this state of affairs continues unexplained, then consideration must be given to removing the powers from them.

“During the period covered by this report only 154 local authorities made use of their powers to acquire communications data. A total of 1,707 requests were made for communications data and the vast majority were for basic subscriber information. Very few local authorities have used their powers to acquire itemized call records in relation to the investigations, which they have conducted. Indeed our inspections have shown that generally the local authorities could make much more use of communications data as a powerful tool to investigate crime.”

UK Home Secretary, Jacqui Smith, agreed saying, “The commissioners’ reports offer valuable oversight and provide reassurance that these powers are being used appropriately.” She added: “We need to ensure Ripa powers are used appropriately and are not undermined.”

Smith’s last remark is a reference to the recent furore over local authorities using phone and email records and carrying out video surveillance of people applying for schools for their children, housing benefit and other social services. The papers were also full of headlines about spying operations to detect dogs fouling the footpaths and people using refuse bins improperly.

Sir Christopher Rose, the Chief Surveillance Commissioner, warned local authorities that they risked losing “the protection that RIPA affords.” He used the “lack of understanding of the legislation” shown by councils and their “serious misunderstanding of the concept of proportionality” to call on them to “invest in properly trained intelligence officers who could operate covertly.”

Rose added, “The government is reviewing those public authorities that have access to these powers to ensure that they have a continuing and justifiable requirement for them. On completion the government will list the authorities that can use each of the powers and the purposes for which they can use them, and set out revised codes of practice.”

Simon Milton, outgoing chairman of the Local Government Association (LGA), attempted to defend local authorities against these accusations saying, “Councils have been criticised for using the powers in relation to issues that can be portrayed as trivial or not considered a crime by the public. Yet councils are caught between the rock of public opinion and the hard place of being told they should actually be using some of these powers more widely.” He agreed, however, that, “… it is important that they use these powers carefully and appropriately and we will be working with [the Surveillance Commissioner] to help enable this.”

Last April, Milton was the driving force behind a proposal to use supermarkets to collect data on migrant workers. Communities Secretary, Hazel Blears, told MPs, “The LGA has recently suggested that we look at footfall in supermarkets. They reckon Tesco has pretty good accurate information about the people who use their stores. I welcome that kind of imaginative thinking if it can help us to get a better and more accurate view at the local level of what the impact [of migration] is.”

Earlier this year popular opposition to Labour’s anti-terror legislation and its erosion of civil liberties allowed former Conservative Shadow Home Secretary David Davis to adopt the mantle of “defender of liberty” when he won the Haltemprice and Howden by-election. A similar thing has happened with these new proposals. Ken Jones, president of the Association of Chief Police Officers has warned about “the ceding of intrusive powers to local government and other bodies and giving them access to once sacrosanct personal data” and Dominic Grieve, the current Conservative Shadow Home Secretary, said, “Yet again the Government has proved itself unable to resist the temptation to take a power, quite properly designed to combat terrorism, to snoop on the lives of ordinary people in everyday circumstances.”

The new powers are linked to the enactment in British law of a European Union directive on data retention, which the Labour government was largely responsible for steamrolling through the European Union in 2005.

It claimed they were vital to defeat terrorism after the September 11, 2001 bombings in New York but, in fact, the EU was considering police-state measures well before then. In 1998, attempts were made in the Enfopol proposals to allow law enforcement agencies access to all communications, which were only withdrawn after widespread condemnation by civil liberties groups. This, after all, was not long after the enactment of limited reforms expressed in Human Rights Acts and Data Protection procedures.

However, following George Bush’s October 2001 letter to the EU, which demanded that countries “revise draft privacy directives that call for mandatory destruction to permit the retention of critical data for a reasonable period” the Belgian government back by the UK introduced proposals for mandatory data retention.

In October 2005, after months of secret meetings, the European Council with its UK Presidency published a draft directive. The UK Home Secretary, Charles Clark, warned the European Parliament that if it did not vote for the proposals “he would make sure [it] would no longer have a say on any justice and home affairs matters.”

Civil rights organisations put their faith in the European Parliament to block the proposals. One NGO asked, “… the European Parliament faces a crucial decision. Is this the type of society we would like to live in? A society where all our actions are recorded, all of our interactions may be mapped, treating the use of communications infrastructures as criminal activity.”

In the event, the draft was fast-tracked through the parliament with little debate and few amendments and became law after the vast majority of socialist and conservative MEPs voted for it.

As many lawyers and experts pointed out, any EU member state was, in effect, now free to retain “any type of data for any type of security purpose for any period at all.” They expressed concern that there would inevitably be demands for more draconian measures such as ID cards required to use internet cafes, the banning of all international email services such as Hotmail, and blocking the use of all non-European Internet Service Providers.

The unprecedented infringements of civil liberties that the Labour government and its European counterparts have implemented and are proposing are not motivated by the “war on terror”. As the political representatives of big business and the super-rich, they are conscious that they cannot secure a popular mandate for policies based on militarism, colonial conquest and the systematic destruction of the living standards of millions of people and are preparing other means for their enforcement.

SchNEWS DRILLS FOR THE TRUTH IN PEAK OIL THEORY

5

SchNEWS | From Transition Town workshops to the city slickers at the Financial Times (to over-excited pieces in ill-researched journals like SchNEWS), there’s been more and more interest in ‘Peak Oil’. Perhaps it’s got something to do with the price of a barrel reaching $140+ (down to a mere $115ish at the mo), and more noticeably for most, petrol at the pumps is at record highs. Not to mention UK power companies pushing the burden on to punters with up to 35% price increases.

So, is the reality of scarce energy really beginning to hit home? Is the oil now running out?
The basic premise is what’s known as Hubbert’s Peak. Oil, a finite commodity with an ever expanding demand, will reach its halfway point somewhere in the early 2000s (now) and from then on will irreversibly decline. Hubbert developed his theory in the 1950s when he predicted that America’s domestic oil would peak by the mid 70s. In the mid-80s they realised he was right. Since then others have taken his predictions and expanded them to fit the whole globe, where the consensus has been for a peak in the first decade of the 21st century.

Scary stuff, and not just for gas guzzling SUV drivers but for all of us; it’s oil that fuels the equipment that sows and reaps our crops (and makes the pesticides to slowly kill us with blemish-free uniform produce) and oil that fuels the trucks that drive the food to our shops. Add to this plastics, fertilisers, and all the other by products it becomes easy to predict apocalypse if the pumps ever run dry (see SchNEWS 499).

Something like this actually happened not so long ago, back in the ‘90s, in that wacky dictatorship called North Korea. The industrialised and oil dependent nation found itself without petroleum after its sole provider – the Soviet Union – collapsed. The result was that, far from western eyes, over a million people died as the infrastructure collapsed. And, so warns the Peak Oil doomsayers, this could happen on a global scale.

WELL WELL WELL

All of this has some anarcho-primitivists jumping with glee at the prospect of the imminent collapse of earth-raping industrial capitalist society. But, before you stock up on tinned goods, shotgun cartridges and bottled water, here’s a few things to consider:

Firstly, there’s no oil shortage. This may come as a bit of a surprise to all those who’ve been watching the prices rise and rise. As the Saudis recently pointed out to outgoing President Bush – pumping more oil won’t lower the price. Actually, there’s a glut of oil in the supply markets. The Iranians (one of the oil nations pumping under their maximum capacity) have tankers full of the stuff that they just can’t shift because no one wants it. What’s lacking is refining capacity.

While oil use in the US has increased 35% in the last 30 years, no new refineries have been built to keep up with demand. The ability to turn oil into petrol, diesel, aviation fuel etc is massively underdeveloped by the oil corporations, who generally like to keep refining to ‘safe’ (i.e. Western and friendly) countries. By artificially creating a bottleneck in the amount of usable oil, the price just goes up and up, leading to massive profits for the oil business as this nice little scam can keep functioning. Exxon Mobil made profits of $11.8 bn in the last quarter alone, and the other big five oil companies are making similarly obscene dosh. The scam has worked pretty well so far.

The predictions of world oil reserves are based on proven, reachable oil. This is a tricky concept because, as it turns out, there’s a whole lot of ‘unproven’ marginal oil that’s already making its way on to world markets. The most known about of these are the tar sands of Alberta, Canada. Until very recently (when the technology became economical on a large scale) these were considered ‘unproven,’ yet a lot of these are now making their way to the US (and world) oil markets.

The tars sands, also known as bitumen, are a very dirty form of oil, one that’s very expensive, polluting and energy hungry to exploit and process. It takes the equivalent of one barrel of oil to extract six barrels of oil from the tar sands. They also happen to be located in an area of unspoilt natural wilderness, but hey, what profitable minerals aren’t these days? Canada’s tar sands contain an amount of oil in excess of that under Saudi Arabia’s sands. And exploiting them is fast becoming its most profitable activity.

Venezuela has similar deposits of bitumen in Orinoco, and significantly larger than Canada’s. They’re estimated at around 260 million barrels (i.e. another Saudi Arabia) on top of the 80 million or so of ordinary oil. They’re easier to exploit than Canada’s and are barely touched. It’s no wonder that the US has got such a keen interest in the actions of Venezuelan President, Hugo the Chavmeister. Industry experts had been saying that these areas will become among the world’s future energy heartlands, but that until oil was worth over $40 per barrel it was too expensive to develop. Oil’s now worth over $100 and will be so for some time to come, so go figure.

CRUDE THOUGHTS

A real danger of Peak Oil, or rather, the fear of peak oil, is that it risks handing states and corporations even more planet-wrecking power. If people believe the oil is running out, then pressure from consumers and businesses alike is to find more at any cost. This is already being written into the US election strategy of the republicans, where John McCain is promoting drilling in the Arctic Circle as a way out of the energy ‘crisis’.

This could lead to a seriously deadly irony: The warnings of Peak Oil by environmentalists could lead to the erosion of the public’s psychological barriers protecting the few remaining areas of wilderness left. There’s oil in unknown (but quite possibly huge) quantities in Greenland, as well as plenty in Alaska, where the Bush junta has already green-lighted the destructive process of exploring and exploiting. The Russians have laid their claim to their chunk of the Arctic Circle too, with an eye to expansion for more oil.

And, in a genuinely insane piece of economic logic, as global warming melts the Arctic’s frozen seas, the previously unreachable oil reserves that lay under the ice become more exploitable, and, as they are burned, yet more undersea oil becomes available. Or if that runs out there’s always the Antarctic…

And if these reserves still don’t prove to be quite enough to satisfy demand, there’s always ole king coal. China, main producers of the world’s plastic consumer tat, is rich in coal but virtually empty of large oil deposits.

To keep their economy expanding at its current pace they are building two coal fired power stations a week. However, they need oil as well for their cars and trucks (and tanks). As oil’s expensive and foreign suppliers can be notoriously unreliable (they haven’t as yet turned to Amercian-style invasion of oil producers) what they really crave is a domestic source of oil, which they don’t have.

Or at least didn’t, until they turned to the combined wisdom of the Nazis and the apartheid-era South Africans. Both the Nazis during the war and the South Africans during sanctions found it hard to import oil. Luckily for them a German scientist found a way to turn coal into synthetic oil, known as the Fischer-Tropsch Synthesis. It’s a very energy hungry process (of course) and needless to say massively polluting (obviously) but it does mean that, even if oil is tricky to get hold of, you can just magic some out of coal – kind of like a very dirty alchemy that’s bad for the planet.

China has already constructed its first huge synthetic oil refinery in Chinese Mongolia.

PRICE OF SUCCESS?

The current cost of oil, often mistaken as a indicator of its scarcity, is actually driven by far more complex forces.

As a commodity like any other, it’s traded on the international markets via brokers. In recent years the power of the cartel that set the price of oil, OPEC, has been significantly reduced, and now it’s the speculators that call the shots on its price (more or less – OPEC still caries a lot of weight, but it’s a player now rather than the whole game). That means that, as long as the price of oil is rising, speculators will push the price even higher.

It’s estimated that as much as 60% of the price of today’s oil is pure speculation. To give an example of the logic of nonsense capitalism: Today oil is worth, say $125 a barrel. As the price is going up, you, a speculator, figure that if you buy some at that price today, you can sell it in a week or two for $135. Because you’re buying oil, other speculators have more confidence the price will continue upwards, so they’re happy to pay $130 after you.

This continues until no one who actually needs to use oil for their cars, homes or businesses etc. can even afford to refill their zippo lighters, at which point the entire economy crashes, taking the price of oil with it.

In fact, herein lies one of the central flaws in the theory of peak oil – supply and demand: that fundamental essential of capitalism. If the price of oil goes up as its demand goes up (and its availability goes down) then at some point it will be too expensive for oil based industrial capitalism to afford. At that point we enter a new depression/recession. Businesses collapse, people can’t afford to run their cars, factories grind to a halt and so on. The effect of a depression means that, with the entire economy in free fall, the demand for oil drops. As the demand drops so does its price, until at some point people can afford to buy it again, and, hurrah, capitalism reasserts itself (albeit in a leaner, less carbon-heavy form).

DRILLER KILLER

The truth is that the oil has already peaked for Western multinationals. In the 70s, major Western oil giants controlled over half the world’s oil, they now only own 13%. As Arjun Murti, an energy analyst at Goldman Sachs puts it: “What we have now is geopolitical peak oil.”

There’s plenty of oil left, but it’s all in either politically unstable / US-unfriendly states (Iraq, Iran, Russia) or difficult and expensive to get at (the Arctic, Canadian tar sands). These alternative sources of fossil fuels could keep us going well into the future, past our lifetimes and maybe even that of our grandchildren. The problem is: exactly that. The effect of burning a trillion tons of coal and perhaps a trillion barrels of oil is that the planet will burn up faster than a petrol-soaked moth near a candle. The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (the world’s leading authority) predict a global temperature rise of at least 3°C by 2050, with further predictions that CO² and climate temperatures will rise and rise.

Mother nature has been steadily locking away excess carbon under the ground for the last three billion years in order to maintain a steady, liveable temperature for all of us life-forms. Suddenly, us wayward children have begun reversing the process, sticking it back in the air. In the process we’re experimenting with the atmosphere on an unprecedented scale, causing massive changes to the climate and biosphere, driving many species to extinction on a par with the extinction of the dinosaurs.

The real problem isn’t that we’re going to run out of fossil fuels. The problem is what happens when we don’t…

Bush Seeks to Affirm a Continuing War on Terror

0

By ERIC LICHTBLAU | WASHINGTON – Tucked deep into a recent proposal from the Bush administration is a provision that has received almost no public attention, yet in many ways captures one of President Bush’s defining legacies: an affirmation that the United States is still at war with Al Qaeda.

Seven years after the Sept. 11 attacks, Mr. Bush’s advisers assert that many Americans may have forgotten that. So they want Congress to say so and “acknowledge again and explicitly that this nation remains engaged in an armed conflict with Al Qaeda, the Taliban, and associated organizations, who have already proclaimed themselves at war with us and who are dedicated to the slaughter of Americans.”

The language, part of a proposal for hearing legal appeals from detainees at the United States naval base at Guantánamo Bay, Cuba, goes beyond political symbolism. Echoing a measure that Congress passed just days after the Sept. 11 attacks, it carries significant legal and public policy implications for Mr. Bush, and potentially his successor, to claim the imprimatur of Congress to use the tools of war, including detention, interrogation and surveillance, against the enemy, legal and political analysts say.

Some lawmakers are concerned that the administration’s effort to declare anew a war footing is an 11th-hour maneuver to re-establish its broad interpretation of the president’s wartime powers, even in the face of challenges from the Supreme Court and Congress.

The proposal is also the latest step that the administration, in its waning months, has taken to make permanent important aspects of its “long war” against terrorism. From a new wiretapping law approved by Congress to a rewriting of intelligence procedures and F.B.I. investigative techniques, the administration is moving to institutionalize by law, regulation or order a wide variety of antiterrorism tactics.

“This seems like a final push by the administration before they go out the door,” said Suzanne Spaulding, a former lawyer for the Central Intelligence Agency and an expert on national security law. The cumulative effect of the actions, Ms. Spaulding said, is to “put the onus on the next administration” – particularly a Barack Obama administration – to justify undoing what Mr. Bush has done.

It is uncertain whether Congress will take the administration up on its request. Some Republicans have already embraced the idea, with Representative Lamar Smith of Texas, the ranking Republican on the Judiciary Committee, introducing a measure almost identical to the administration’s proposal. “Since 9/11,” Mr. Smith said, “we have been at war with an unconventional enemy whose primary goal is to kill innocent Americans.”

In the midst of an election season, the language represents a political challenge of sorts to the administration’s critics. While many Democrats say they are wary of Mr. Bush’s claims to presidential power, they may be even more nervous about casting a vote against a measure that affirms the country’s war against terrorism. They see the administration’s effort to force the issue as little more than a political ploy.

Mr. Bush “is trying to stir up again the politics of fear by reminding people of something they haven’t really forgotten: that we are engaged in serious armed conflict with Al Qaeda,” said Laurence H. Tribe, a constitutional scholar at Harvard and legal adviser to Mr. Obama. “But the question is, Where is that conflict to be waged, and by what means.”

With violence rising in Afghanistan and Osama bin Laden still at large, there are ample signs of the United States’ continued battles with terrorism. But Mr. Bush and his advisers say that seven years without an attack has lulled many Americans.

“As Sept. 11, 2001, recedes into the past, there are some people who have come to think of it as kind of a singular event and of there being nothing else out there,” Attorney General Michael B. Mukasey told House lawmakers in July. “In a way, we are the victims of our own success, our own success being that another attack has been prevented.”

Mr. Mukasey laid out the administration’s thinking in a July 21 speech to a conservative Washington policy institute in response to yet another rebuke on presidential powers by the Supreme Court: its ruling that prisoners at Guantánamo Bay , were entitled to habeas corpus rights to contest their detentions in court.

The administration wants Congress to set out a narrow framework for those prisoner appeals. But the administration’s six-point proposal goes further. It includes not only the broad proclamation of a continued “armed conflict with Al Qaeda,” but also the desire for Congress to “reaffirm that for the duration of the conflict the United States may detain as enemy combatants those who have engaged in hostilities or purposefully supported Al Qaeda, the Taliban and associated organizations.”

That broad language hints at why Democrats, and some Republicans, worry about the consequences. It could, they say, provide the legal framework for Mr. Bush and his successor to assert once again the president’s broad interpretation of the commander in chief’s wartime powers, powers that Justice Department lawyers secretly used to justify the indefinite detention of terrorist suspects and the National Security Agency’s wiretapping of Americans without court orders.

The language recalls a resolution, known as the Authorization for Use of Military Force, passed by Congress on Sept. 14, 2001. It authorized the president to “use all necessary and appropriate force” against those responsible for the Sept. 11 attacks to prevent future strikes. That authorization, still in effect, was initially viewed by many members of Congress who voted for it as the go-ahead for the administration to invade Afghanistan and overthrow the Taliban, which had given sanctuary to Mr. bin Laden.

But the military authorization became the secret legal basis for some of the administration’s most controversial legal tactics, including the wiretapping program, and that still gnaws at some members of Congress.

Senator Arlen Specter of Pennsylvania, the ranking Republican on the Judiciary Committee, said he wanted to make sure the Bush administration – or a future president – did not use that declaration as “another far-fetched interpretation” to evade the law, the way he believes Mr. Bush and aides like Alberto R. Gonzales, the former attorney general, did in using the wiretapping program to avoid the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act.

“I don’t want to face another situation where we had the Sept. 14 resolution and then Attorney General Gonzales claimed that that was authorization to violate FISA,” Mr. Specter said.

For Bush critics like Bruce Fein, a Justice Department official in the Reagan administration, the answer is simple: do not give the administration the wartime language it seeks.

“I do not believe that we are in a state of war whatsoever,” Mr. Fein said. “We have an odious opponent that the criminal justice system is able to identify and indict and convict. They’re not a goliath. Don’t treat them that way.”

Protesters denied access to attorneys, forced to march in leg shackles, ACLU charges

0

By John Byrne | The ACLU issued a stinging rebuke to the Denver Police Department Wednesday, alleging that the department may have violated laws and constitutional rights of protesters arrested outside the Democratic National Convention.

In the letter, obtained by RAW STORY, the ACLU revealed that the police refused those arrested access to attorneys. Police did not let detainees use phones unless they posted their own bonds, and even failed to provide shoes, in one case marching a protester into court in bare feet and leg shackles, according the ACLU.

What’s more, police are said to have tricked protesters into pleading guilty, by giving them the impression they had to plead guilty in order to post bond. This meant that no one was allowed to make a phone call unless they plead guilty, thus making it impossible for arrestees to even call a lawyer until admitting guilt.

Most ominously, the ACLU letter claims that protesters were told they would be “facing ‘years’ in jail for a conviction of a single particular charge.”

“In fact, all the charges were municipal court violations that do not carry such penalties,” the ACLU added in a footnote.

Charges for arrestees were issued on pre-printed forms, where police were told to “cross out” charges that they were not facing. In many cases, police failed to cross out inappropriate charges, and so the detainee would be charged with “begging, loitering and throwing stones and missiles,” the ACLU said.

Nor were protesters even given the chance to back down before they were arrested.

“It is not clear whether any order to disperse was given. No Legal Observer [sic], witness or arrestee on the scene we’ve debriefed heard any order to disperse,” wrote Taylor Pendergrass, a staff attorney for the ACLU of Colorado. “Numerous persons, including Legal Observers, asked to be able to leave the blockaded area and were refused.”

“After the arrests, attorneys from the People’s Law Project and the ACLU arrived at the [Temporary Arrestee Processing Site to conduct confidential attorney-client consultations,” Pendergrass continued. “The City refused to provide any access to allow these persons to meet with attorneys.”

Perhaps the most outrageous charge, however, is that one protester was forced to march barefoot into court in leg shackles.

“Arrestees were kept barefoot at [the detention center],” Pendergrass wrote. “I personally saw one such arrestee later at the City and County Building. I saw her marched from the elevator to the courtroom in bare feet and leg shackles. I saw her appear in bare feet and leg shackles.”

“Some arrestees who could not make their own bond spent 6, 7, 8, or more hours waiting at TAPS before being transferred to court,” he added.

Pendergrass also elaborates on the detainees being kept from being able to talk to a lawyer. The only opportunity lawyers had to speak with those arrested was in front of the jury gallery or in open court in front of the judge.

“The only access we were given to those clients was to whisper,” he wrote.

Among the seemingly more minor complaints, Pendergrass also notes that many detainees weren’t able to eat because they were vegetarian or vegan and the city mostly provided meat-based food.

In addition, he said that the city was well aware that the ACLU and other groups had arranged for attorneys to be present. “Attorneys were at the court from 11 pm on the night of Aug. 25, 2008 and were staying until each and every arrestee came to the City and County Building.”

In conclusion, the ACLU demands the City permit attorney access at the detention facility; provide blankets, shoes and slippers; allow phone calls immediately upon entering the facility; permit detainees to use restrooms individually and privately; and permit confidential attorney-client consultations in the City and County Building.

Last week, New York City agreed to pay $2 million to settle a lawsuit claiming 52 Iraq war activists were unjustly arrested.

The activists were arrested in April 2003 outside the Manhattan offices of a military contractor, the Carlyle Group.

Lawyers for the activists charged that the tactics used by police at the demonstration were similar to those used a year later when hundreds of activists were arrested during the 2004 Republican National Convention at Madison Square Garden.

The city of New York and police department faced backlash after the convention, with critics claiming the aggressive response showed a blatant disregard for the demonstrators’ civil rights.

PDF OF FULL ACLU LETTER CAN BE READ AT THIS LINK

POLITICS DRIVEN BY FICTION: MADE FOR TV

By Sam Smith | The confluence of Barack Obama’s stadium acceptance extravaganza and John McCain’s pick for vice president offers superfluous but final proof that Americans have been consigned to spend their lives as part of a crowd scene in an HBO special. Both Obama and Palin have come out of nowhere, rising to preeminence not on the basis of achievements, politics or service but by having all the qualities an ad executive looks for when trying to market a new product. What the Mad Men of the 1960s sought in cigarettes and cars, their 21st century equivalents now apply to candidates.

Of course, at some point reality enters and we find that the cigarettes bringing us springtime on one puff and the cars taking us to heaven weren’t what they seemed. Or, as ad executive Jerry Della Famina once put it, “There is a great deal of advertising that is much better than the product. When that happens, all that the good advertising will do is put you out of business faster.” Which is one reason why, as our marketing skills have improved, both our economy and politics have declined.

If you step way from the politics and reality, the marketing of Obama has been remarkable if not necessarily all productive. Dana Milbank gave the feel:

|||| Obama’s everyman efforts are unlikely to be aided by accepting the nomination in front of Greek-style columns in the middle of a football stadium. Privately, Democrats cringed. . . Luckily, Democrats had the foresight to remove the Air Force One model, the presidential limousine, the full-size replica of the Oval Office and the inauguration gowns that had been on exhibit earlier in the week. . .

Instead of savoring the history-making, Obama aides found themselves answering questions about the columns and the stadium from anxious Democrats and from journalists . . .

After nightfall, the nominee emerged between the columns, walked out to the wedding cake and waved skyward. He delivered a speech that soared to the heights of Mount Olympus. . .

The speech ended, the nominee gazed heavenward, and red, white and blue fireworks poured from the tops of the columns. Streamers hung over the Doric frieze. Triumphant orchestral music played, and Obama, his running mate, and his family departed through the still-smoking Pillars of Hercules. ||||

It may seem stunning that an otoh botoh (on-the-one-hand-but-on-the-other-hand) unaccomplished centrist whose vaunted eloquence is so elusive that his only words regularly quoted are marketing slogans like “change we can believe in” and “yes we can” has made it so far so quickly. Yet if you study the other work of some of his major backers in Hollywood such as David Geffin it becomes less surprising. For example, as I watched the stadium oration, the trailer for Genghis Khan drifted into my head.

The marketing effort for Obama has been aided immensely by a media that no longer offers the relief of facts but functions as movie critics, applauding the skill or failure of fictions rather than comparing them to reality. Proof of this shift is that candidates have submerged positions or policies in favor of narratives, once the skill of novelists and playwrights rather than those engaged in the real. In the past month alone, the term narrative has been used along with the word campaign over 2200 times in new stories. And the Democratic convention speeches were as stuffed with appealing personal sagas as they were lacking in ideas or arguments.

The media commentary has also been hyperbolic in the extreme. Howard Fineman claimed that “If you know American history, you know that Obama’s nomination is the social equivalent of landing a man on the moon.” And Radar reported that ” Keith Olbermann and Chris Matthews kicked things off right with some unabashed rejoicing (replete with comparisons to Alexander the Great and Aaron Sorkin). . . Political analyst Michelle Bernard later tried to keep things in perspective by admitting that she watched the speech alone in the green room so she could weep and declaring that it was ‘the greatest day in our nation’s history.'”

In fact, the nomination of a bi-ethnic candidate for president was only a matter of time rather than of effort and it insults an entire civil rights era to give it such an overblown status. Obama has been trained, financed and comforted by the white establishment and while this is not his fault, neither does it compare with the pain and suffering of those who paved his way.

Further, in its groupie-like enthusiasm, the media has ignored major matters such as another speech Obama gave in Colorado some weeks before the convention. In it he made the extraordinarily frightening promise that “We cannot continue to rely on our military in order to achieve the national security objectives we’ve set. We’ve got to have a civilian national security force that’s just as powerful, just as strong, just as well-funded.”

With Google’s news search, one comes up with only two media citations of this comment, both by conservative journals.

Besides, before one assigns too much credit to Obama’s purported intrinsic qualities, consider that Hillary Clinton came within inches of being successfully recreated as a sturdy defender of the working class as well as having all her past sins, lies and near indictment totally exorcised from public discussion. It’s amazing what the Mad Men can do with enough money floating around.

And now, less than 24 hours after Obama departed the Albert Spearian stage in Denver a new product has been introduced: Sarah Palin.

Palin is where Obama was four years ago: overwhelmingly unknown and suddenly selected by powers that be for a leading role in another made for TV special. While Obama was young, bi-ethnic, smart and unthreatening, Palin also has plenty of meat for the Mad Men, witness this from Wikipedia:

|||| Palin was born as Sarah Louise Heath in Sandpoint, Idaho, the daughter of Charles and Sally (Sheeran) Heath. Her family moved to Alaska when she was an infant. Charles Heath was a popular science teacher and coached track. The Heaths were avid outdoors enthusiasts; Sarah and her father would sometimes wake at 3 a.m. to hunt moose before school, and the family would regularly run 5k and 10k races.

Palin was the point guard and captain for the Wasilla High School Warriors, in Wasilla, Alaska, when they won the Alaska small-school basketball championship in 1982; she earned the nickname “Sarah Barracuda” because of her intense play. She played the championship game despite a stress fracture in her ankle, hitting a critical free throw in the last seconds. Palin, who was also the head of the school Fellowship of Christian Athletes, would lead the team in prayer before games.

In 1984, Palin was second-place in the Miss Alaska beauty pageant after winning the Miss Wasilla contest earlier that year, winning a scholarship to help pay her way through college. In the Wasilla pageant, she played the flute and also won Miss Congeniality.

Palin holds a bachelor’s degree in journalism from the University of Idaho where she also minored in politics.

Her husband, Todd, is a Native Yup’ik Eskimo. Outside the fishing season, Todd works for BP at an oil field on the North Slope and is a champion snowmobiler, winning the 2000-mile “Iron Dog” race four times. The two eloped shortly after Palin graduated college; when they learned they needed witnesses for the civil ceremony, they recruited two residents from the old-age home down the street.

She briefly worked as a sports reporter for local Anchorage television stations while also working as a commercial fisherman with her husband, Todd, her high school sweetheart. One summer when she was working on Todd’s fishing boat, the boat collided with a tender while she was holding onto the railing; Palin broke several fingers.

On September 11, 2007, the Palins’ son Track joined the Army. Eighteen years old at the time, he is the eldest of Palin’s five children. Track now serves in an infantry brigade and will be deployed to Iraq in September. She also has three daughters: Bristol, 17, Willow, 13, and Piper, 7. On April 18, 2008, Palin gave birth to her second son, Trig Paxson Van Palin, who has Down syndrome. She returned to the office three days after giving birth. Palin refused to let the results of prenatal genetic testing change her decision to have the baby. “I’m looking at him right now, and I see perfection,” Palin said. “Yeah, he has an extra chromosome. I keep thinking, in our world, what is normal and what is perfect?”

Details of Palin’s personal life have contributed to her political image. She hunts, eats moose hamburger, ice fishes, rides snowmobiles, and owns a float plane. Palin holds a lifetime membership with the National Rifle Association. She admits that she used marijuana when it was legal in Alaska, but says that she did not like it. ||||

If you were looking for something to replace the Obama special on HBO, this wouldn’t be a bad narrative. And just as irrelevant to what we should be talking and thinking about.

Some years ago the Green Party in Germany was divided into two groups known as the fundis and the realos. While the definitions aren’t applicable – the fundis held to core Green priniciples while the realos wheeled and dealed with the other parties – the names seem to fit well what has happened to Democratic politics. The liberal fundis – like Christian fundamentalists – are content with an icon with whom to deposit not only their hope but any critical thought about what such a course might produce. Fundi liberals are not new; they first appeared in large numbers with the campaign of Bill Clinton, the most right wing Democratic presidential candidate in over 60 years. These liberals essentially gave up thinking about anything other that which the Clinton regime wanted and Clinton took full advantage of them. The same is going on with Obama, a jettisoning of any serious interest in policies and programs in favor of blind faith in a particular leader. History tells us that little good comes of this.

In fact, you need only check the lack of significant liberal activity in anti-war, anti-torture and efforts to preserve the constitution to see how incapable the fundi libs are of anything beyond adoration.

Realos are those who still believe in working on issues and understand that politicians play a complicated and often contradictory role in achieving their goals. They know Obama will be good about some things and awful about others. They know that his post-partisanship so far only appears to include outreach to conservatives. And while they know that he would be better than Bush or McCain, blind complicity in a phony political “narrative” that relieves him of all pressure to do right is a disaster waiting just a few months to happen.

It is truly scary to be a realo these days, to be told repeatedly that it is enough to have hope and faith and that , implicitly, everything politics is meant to be about really doesn’t matter. It is sad to find how little liberal participation there has been in efforts to save the Constitution or to press for sanity in numerous other areas. It is painful to find those whose job description is the description of reality – that is to say, the media – enthralled by endless fictional manipulations.

But it is where we are and those who prefer reality to fiction are badly outnumbered on both the left and the right. In the end, as it always does, reality decides to speak for itself and, when it does, we then wonder why we hadn’t thought about it sooner.

Diebold Finally Admits its Voting Machines Drop Votes

By Bruce Schneier | Premier Election Solutions, formerly called Diebold Election Systems, has finally admitted that a ten-year-old error has caused votes to be dropped.

It’s unclear if this error is random or systematic. If it’s random — a small percentage of all votes are dropped — then it is highly unlikely that this affected the outcome of any election. If it’s systematic — a small percentage of votes for a particular candidate are dropped — then it is much more problematic.

Ohio is trying to sue:

Ohio Secretary of State Jennifer Brunner is seeking to recover millions of dollars her state spent on the touch-screen machines and is urging the state legislature to require optical scanners statewide instead.In a lawsuit, Brunner charged on Aug. 6 that touch-screen machines made by the former Diebold Election Systems and bought by 11 Ohio counties “produce computer stoppages” or delays and are vulnerable to “hacking, tampering and other attacks.” In all, 44 Ohio counties spent $83 million in 2006 on Diebold’s touch screens.

 

In other news, election officials sometimes take voting machines home for the night.

My 2004 essay: “Why Election Technology is Hard.”

Blair has no right to lecture on the rule of law

3

By Inayat Bunglawala | Britain’s foreign secretary, David Miliband, has been lecturing Russia on the need to respect Ukrainian and Georgian sovereignty. He doesn’t seem to realise how incongruous this sounds to much of the world, given Britain’s own disregard of international law.

In a similar vein, our former prime minister, Tony Blair, also caused wry smiles earlier this month when he visited Malaysia to give the Universiti Malaya’s 22nd Sultan Azlan Shah lecture on Upholding the Rule of Law: A Reflection.

Blair argued that this means “rules and procedures that are transparent, and rules of evidence that make sense and are fair. These basic principles apply universally and without them, the rule of law means little or nothing.”

As you can imagine, the topic Blair sought to address was a source of both amusement and disbelief among the Malaysians.

This is what the vice-chancellor of Universiti Sains Malaysia, Dzulkifli Abdul Razak, had to say: “It is quite obvious from casual observation that someone who has been known to have misled others, including the country’s parliament, has lost the moral authority to preach about the rule of law and good governance … One wonders then what ‘basic principles’ Blair had in mind when he gave an almost unconditional support for the unilateral decision to invade Iraq against the wishes of the international community and without the approval of the UN … Indeed, as late as April 2006, when an eminent British former law lord attacked Guantanamo Bay as ‘a stain on American justice’, Blair reportedly refused to follow suit. According to Lord Steyn, who just retired from Britain’s highest court: ‘While our government condones Guantanamo Bay, the world is perplexed about our approach to the rule of law. You may ask: how will it help in regard to the continuing outrage at Guantanamo Bay for our government now to condemn it. The answer is that it would at last be a powerful signal to the world that Britain supports the international rule of law.’”

The former Malaysian prime minister, Mahathir Mohamad, was characteristically blunt: “It is disgusting to see this criminal of the highest order being welcomed in Malaysia and worse still to talk on the rule of law when he broke all international laws and the laws of his own country by deliberately lying and sending young British soldiers to die in a war of aggression.”

Mahathir added that: “Saddam has been hanged, Karadzic was recently arrested, but this man goes around the world, lecturing on the rule of law.”

Roger Tan, a member of the Malaysian Bar Council, asked if, “by supporting and participating in the 2003 United States-led invasion and occupation of Iraq, I wonder whether Britain, being the world’s oldest democracy, still possesses moral authority in a comity of nations to lecture on the principle of rule of law.”

I visited the official Tony Blair website to read his own account of what had transpired in Malaysia. Unfortunately, I could find no mention made of the trip.

3,000 Vets, War Protesters Hand-Deliver Their Message

0

By Patti Thorn | DNEVER – “Follow Us. Welcome to Denver,” read the electronic sign on the police vehicle.

And with that conciliatory gesture, an unpermitted march for peace was allowed to proceed Wednesday afternoon through downtown Denver streets – peacefully.

It was easily the largest demonstration in a week filled with them.

See video of the march here and here.

At least 3,000 Iraq war veterans and war protesters marched from the Denver Coliseum to the Pepsi Center perimeter. The veterans’ ultimate goal was to deliver a statement to presidential candidate Barack Obama, urging him to promote the immediate withdrawal of “all occupying forces” from Iraq, among other points.

After about an hourlong standoff with police at the end of the march, contact was made with an Obama aide. Mission accomplished.

Co-sponsored by the anti-war group Tent State University and the Iraq Veterans Against the War, the march began around 3:15 p.m. outside the coliseum after 9,800 people attended a free concert featuring the heavy metal/rap band Rage Against the Machine and three other acts.

During the four-hour show, audience members were urged to join the demonstration. Band members and others stressed the need for the march to remain peaceful.

At one point, rapper Jonny 5 of Denver’s Flobots referred to conservative radio commentator Rush Limbaugh, who has been widely quoted as saying it would be his “dream” for riots to break out in Denver during the convention. The musician told the crowd the worst thing they could do was make that dream come true.

While some feared police would attempt to stop the march, officers surprised the group by escorting the protesters through city streets, redirecting traffic and pedestrians along the way.

“Under the totality of all the circumstances, it was handled in a manner that best addressed the public safety at the time,” said Lynn Kimbrough, spokeswoman for the Joint Information Center, a clearinghouse for convention security information.

The group of mostly young people walked behind a banner that said: “Support GI Resistance.”

Wearing T-shirts and stickers with slogans such as “Arrest Bush” and “Make Out Not War,” they sang rolling chants, Marine- style. “Tell Me What We’re Marching For,” sang one group. “Stop the torture, stop the war,” answered another.

People lined the streets to watch, most approvingly.

As the marchers wound their way through the neighborhoods west of the coliseum, they found solidarity with a group of Latinos holding up an anti-war sign and cheering them on. “Si, se puede!” shouted some young marchers. “Yes, we can!”

But not all were supportive. From the balcony of an apartment complex, a man yelled at the throngs to move on. “Don’t come back here,” he said.

As the march wore on under a hot sun, some dropped out. Others found ways to take shortcuts. Two teens on the 16th Street Mall shuttle wearing Rage Against the Machine T-shirts admitted they had skipped part of the march and planned to join it as it neared the end.

One foot clad in a black shoe, the other barefoot, James Koller, 17, explained: “Someone clocked me in the face and took my shoe in the mosh pit. This is a quicker route to the Pepsi Center.”

Koller’s friend, Joey Minicucci, 18, of Littleton, noted that his brother was in the military and would soon be sent to Iraq. That was one of the reasons he was going to the march.

Anne Hill, of Montrose, had other reasons. “I’m marching because it seems to be the last vestiges of our free speech and because people have demands and our government’s not listening,” she said.

The march came to a standstill at the perimeter of the Pepsi Center around 6:30 p.m., at which time the veterans attempted to have their statement delivered to Obama. Tension with police seemed to escalate, until several veterans stepped forward and saluted police.

“We are your brothers and sisters in arms,” said one. “We don’t want to hurt you. We don’t want you to hurt us.”

With that, the standoff melted away and soon an appropriate aide was contacted.

“I figured as long as we kept things peaceful, they would hear us, and they did,” said Army veteran Jeffrey Wood.

Staff writers Allison Bruce, Daniel J. Chacon, Abigail Curtis, Jeff Kass, Dan Kelley, Sue Lindsay, Steve Myers and Judi Villa contributed to this report.

© 2008 Rocky Mountain News

VIDEO: Climate Camp 2008

2

Undercurrents in association with VisionOnTV reported the people who are making a differenece by working together collectively. When large numbers of determined and well-organised people get together they can turn things around, making a historic difference.The climate camp aimed to do just that. Whether it’s participating in the collective organisation of the camp, taking part in workshops or taking direct action to tackle dangerous developments like new coal-fired power stations; being at the camp was about people getting together to respond positively to the climate crisis.

Climate camp TV studio was hosted by http://visionOn.TV over the week of the gathering in August 2008.

WATCH THE VIDEO HERE

In their own words – this is what the Climate Camp organisers say
‘The Camp is a place for anyone who wants to take action on climate change; for anyone who’s fed up with empty government rhetoric and corporate spin; for anyone who’s worried that the small steps they’re taking aren’t enough to match the scale of the problem; and for anyone who’s worried about our future and wants to do something about it.The people putting on the Camp for Climate Action are all volunteers, lots of us learning how to do it as we go along. We’re a pretty diverse bunch — teachers, nurses, students, couriers, plumbers, graphic designers, doctors, youth workers, lawyers, carpenters, campaigners, artists, carers and many, many more.

We started in August 2006, when 600 people gathered at the UK’s biggest single source of carbon dioxide, Drax coal-fired power station in West Yorkshire for ten days of learning and sustainable living, which culminated in a day of mass action against the power station. Our aim was to kick-start a social movement to tackle climate change.Next, with over double the numbers organising the Camp, we hit the big time in summer 2007; media hysteria greeted our decision to camp a few hundred metres from Heathrow airport. Over 2,000 people came to the weeklong camp. We chose Heathrow as we wanted to help local residents stop Heathrow’s owner BAA from building a third runway.

This year, we’ll be at Kingsnorth, and be joined in our resistance to the expansion of the fossil fuel economy by eight other climate camps taking place around the world.Every Camp for Climate Action event weaves four key themes: education, direct action, sustainable living, and building a movement to effectively tackle climate change both resisting climate crimes and developing sustainable solutions.Everybody is welcome, so hopefully see you there’

Read Press Articles about the Climate Camp http://www.climatecamp.org.uk/node/30

Conspiracy Files: Lockerbie

6

By Paul Stott | Few terrorist attacks have had such contrary explanations as the 1988 bombing of Pan Am Flight 103 over Lockerbie.

Sunday evening at 9pm the BBC2’s Conspiracy Files enters the fray, examining some of the claims and counter claims.

One interesting question is whether the programme will feature either of Britain’s two best known 9/11 ‘truthers’ (and former MI5 officers) David Shayler and Annie Machon.

Shayler worked on the Lockerbie case (indeed MI5 are praised for their liaison work with the FBI over Lockerbie at pages 110-111 of the 9/11 Commission Report) whilst both he and Machon have since been indefatigable in defending the Anglo-American government position – that the Libyans did it, and any suggestion to the contrary is plain wrong.

So – will we hear Annie or David whistling the same old tune on Sunday?

A UK Window into CIA Abuses

0
Human Rights Watch | This Wednesday, unless the UK foreign secretary takes rapid action, Britain’s High Court will hold a hearing to assess whether the UK government should be ordered to hand over secret documents to lawyers for a Guantanamo detainee. The detainee in question, Binyam Mohamed, faces possible charges of conspiracy and material support for terrorism before a military commission at Guantanamo.

Mohamed, an Ethiopian national and former UK resident, was arrested in Pakistan in April 2002. Transferred to US custody, he was reportedly rendered by the CIA to Morocco, detained there secretly for over a year, and then moved for several months to a secret CIA detention site in Afghanistan. He then spent a few months in military detention at Bagram air base in Afghanistan, and was ultimately brought to Guantanamo Bay in September 2004.

Mohamed claims that he was brutally tortured during his time in secret detention, and that the evidence that will likely be used to prosecute him is a result of that torture. He also claims that the UK government has information that supports his claims of abuse.

Last week, in an important judgment, the UK High Court ruled in Mohamed’s favor. It found that the British government was under a legal obligation to disclose to Mohamed’s counsel the information it possesses relating to Mohamed’s whereabouts, treatment, and interrogation between April 2002 and May 2004. The court emphasized that this information is “not merely necessary but essential” to Mohamed’s defense against military commission charges.

While the court stopped short of ordering the foreign secretary to hand over the information — allowing additional time for the national security implications of disclosure to be considered — it will reach the mandatory disclosure question at its hearing this week.

From Britain to Pakistan to the Prison of Darkness

Binyam Mohamed came to Britain in 1994, when he was a student, after having spend a short period in the United States. He converted to Islam while in the UK, and in mid-2001 he left the UK for Pakistan and Afghanistan. He claims that he traveled to the region because he wanted to kick a drug habit.

The military commission charges that have been sworn against Mohamed allege that he attended an Al Qaeda training camp in Afghanistan, and later received training in building remote-controlled explosive detention devices in Pakistan. While living at an Al Qaeda safe house in Lahore, Pakistan, the charges say, Mohamed allegedly agreed to be sent to the United States to conduct terror operations.

Mohamed was arrested at the Karachi airport on April 10, 2002, as he attempted to leave Pakistan to fly to London. Although he was initially detained in Karachi, he claims that he was interrogated there by US agents. The UK High Court has also confirmed that a British agent visited Mohamed in Pakistani custody on May 17, 2002.

Mohamed claims that he was rendered by the CIA to Morocco in July 2002. There, he claims, he was beaten, repeatedly cut on his genitals, and threatened with rape, electrocution and death. Interrogators reportedly asked him detailed questions about his seven years in London, based on information that his lawyers believe came from British sources.

In late January 2004, Mohamed says, he was sent to Afghanistan, where he was held in a secret CIA prison — called the “Prison of Darkness” — until May 2004. At that point, he was transferred to military detention, first at Bagram air base in Afghanistan, then at Guantanamo, where he remains.

According to the UK High Court, the military commissions case against Mohamed is based on confessions Mohamed made while in military custody — after May 2004 — not on anything he said while being interrogated by the CIA. Mohamed claims, however, that it was the abuse in CIA custody that induced him to confess while in military custody, and so proof of those CIA abuses are crucial to his defense.

Refusal to Disclose

As part of a continuing effort to cover up the CIA’s misdeeds, US officials have refused to provide Mohamed or his lawyers any information whatsoever about his treatment or whereabouts from the time of arrest in April 2002 until he was transferred to Bagram in May 2004. To date, the UK government has similarly refused to provide Mohamed’s lawyers any such information, although it has acknowledged that some documents in its possession might be exculpatory.

In last week’s ruling, the High Court noted that the UK foreign secretary had acknowledged that Mr. Mohamed had established an arguable case that he had been subject to illegal rendition and torture. The court also found that the British security forces had facilitated Mohamed’s interrogations by supplying information and questions to US officials, even while they knew that Mohamed was being held incommunicado in a non-military detention facility overseas.

The court found, in short, that the relationship of the UK government to the US authorities with regard to Mohamed “was far beyond that of a bystander or witness to the alleged wrongdoing.” Because the UK was in some way a participant, not simply an observer, the court held that the UK is legally obligated to provide Mohamed with information relating to his abuse.

Not only did the court deem this information to be “essential” to Mohamed’s ability to adequately defend himself, it emphasized the need for the government to provide the necessary information as soon as is practically possible. The reason for the hurried timing lies in the military commissions’ timetable. At present, military commission charges against Mohamed have been prepared, but the commission’s convening authority has not yet signed off on them. In order to potentially affect the charging decision, Mohamed has an important interest in getting exculpatory information to the convening authority before that decision is made.

The Prospect of Mandatory Disclosure

The UK court decried the fact that the US authorities have failed to provide this potentially exculpatory information to Mohamed’s counsel, particularly since both his counsel are security-cleared. But it recognized, as well, that the United States’ failure is no excuse for Britain’s inaction.

Unless the UK foreign secretary voluntarily provides the relevant documents to Mohamed’s counsel before Wednesday, the High Court will consider ordering disclosure. Such an order, which the court seems presently inclined to grant, would open an important crack in the wall of secrecy that surrounds the CIA’s rendition, detention, and interrogation abuses.

More People are Catching on to Corporate Media Lies

0

By Michael Cambray | It seems that most people are finally awakening to the fact that it is not a good idea to blindly accept the manipulating lies with which we are daily brainwashed, particularly by the communications media. It is totally acceptable and sensible nowadays to be cynical and critical of any source of information, particularly when associated with politics, big business and the media.

The ‘information’ age has literally turned upon itself.

George Orwell in his prophetic book ‘1984’ said, “Political language… is designed to make lies sound truthful… and give an appearance of solidarity to pure wind.”

Hitler’s propaganda henchman Dr. Goebells said, “If you tell people a big enough lie, often enough, they will believe it.”

There are many definitions of lies and the Thesaurus has a great source of words to describe the distorting and twisting of any facts. Among the word variations that cover the outrageous manipulations we experience daily are fabrication, inference misstatement, falsification, evasion, deceit and deception. A lie is the deliberate withholding of any part of the truth from someone who has a right to know.

People are becoming accustomed to receiving deceit and deception. We are being constantly lied to by governments, government officials, drug companies, the medical profession, multinational industry, food companies and politicians. Lied to by media, by ‘reality’ programs, doctored photographs in magazines, by employers and by unions.

Lied to in financial transactions, stockholders reports and false corporate statements. Lied to by advertising, salesmen and anyone trying to make money to our disadvantage. Falsification has been piled onto fabrication, until lying — through omission, distortion, bias or clever wording — has become a way of life! The list is truly endless.

Life has become like a jigsaw puzzle, but without the picture on the front of the box so that you don’t know what it’s really supposed to be like. Governments, multinationals and media are clever enough to make sure you don’t always have all the pieces!

Try to look at the motives behind everything you hear and see, there is always a motive. What are they ‘selling’? Keep an open mind and treat all information with a reasonable amount of suspicion. Look for seemingly reliable sources, as I do. We need to be constantly be alert and aware! Even question me.

We all know there is plenty of truth in our universe; it’s just a bit hard to find. Try a little old fashioned commonsense.

Excerpt from Michael’s book ‘Solutions With Pearls of Wisdom’ utilizing thirty years of Naturopathic experience. More at email mdecambray@jaywey.com .

Bisphenol A Chemical in Plastic Bottles Harms Children, Feds Conclude

0

By David Gutierrez | For the first time, a branch of the U.S. government has admitted that the common industrial chemical bisphenol A (BPA) may pose a health risk.

BPA is a crucial ingredient in the hard, clear polycarbonate plastic found in water and baby bottles. It is also used to make liners for food and infant formula cans. BPA has been shown to seep out of these containers and into food or liquids, and 90 percent of U.S. residents carry it in their bodies.

The National Toxicology Program of the National Institutes of Health concluded in April that there is “some concern” that BPA may cause problems in fetuses, babies and children, including breast or prostate cancer, early onset of female puberty, attention deficit disorder and other problems of the reproductive and neurological systems.

“Some concern” is the middle of five rankings available to the National Toxicology Program, with none at one end and extreme at the other.

The National Toxicology Program’s findings “[reflect] a significant body of science showing that BPA may play a larger role than previously thought in a host of common health problems, including prostate cancer, breast cancer and early puberty,” said Anila Jacob, senior scientist at Environmental Working Group.

“More research is needed to better understand [BPA’s] implications for human health,” the report reads. “However, because these effects in animals occur at bisphenol A exposure levels similar to those experienced by humans, the possibility that bisphenol A may alter human development cannot be dismissed.”

In spite of the report’s cautious wording, BPA expert Frederick vom Saal said that it is “very, very much in line” with a statement signed by 38 scientists in 2007, warning that BPA could be harming infant development.

“This is going to ripple around the world,” vom Saal said. “The bottom line is there really is a convergence of opinion that is occurring.”

Sources for this story include: www.latimes.com.

US out of Iraq by … “2011”

0

By PATRICK COCKBURN | The United States is moving towards ending its military control of Iraq by agreeing to withdraw combat troops from Iraqi cities and towns by June next year and from the rest of Iraq by 2011, according Iraqi and American negotiators.

The withdrawal of US troops to bases outside the cities, towns and villages would make the Iraqi government, whose security forces number half a million men, the predominant military power in Iraq for the first time since the US-led invasion of 2003.

“By June 2009, if security progress continues, there would be no need for US troops in city centers,” the Iraqi Foreign Minister, Hoshyar Zebari, tells me.

Mr Zebari was eager Thursday not to describe the US military pullback as a withdrawal and it might still be rejected by senior Iraqi political leaders. But in reality the US is accepting a timetable for a withdrawal, something that it resolutely refused to do in the past. Mr Maliki originally wanted the removal of US combat troops by the end of 2010, but has compromised on 2011.

The accord is likely to have a significant impact on the outcome of the US presidential election in November since Iraq is the main issue dividing the two candidates. It should benefit the Democratic candidate Barack Obama since the timetable for a withdrawal is not so different from his plan to remove one combat brigade a month over 16 months. It also makes it difficult for the Republican contender John McCain to say that US troops should stay until victory or to denounce Mr Obama as an unpatriotic defeatist. At the same time Mr McCain may benefit from the security agreement defusing the Iraq war as a political issue in the US and making it more difficult for the Democrats to portray him as a dangerous hawk.

The agreement now likely to be signed is “a sea-change from what the Americans originally proposed in March” according to an Iraqi political leader who saw a recent version. He said Mr Maliki would like to see US forces pull back into about 20 bases and they would not have an automatic right to patrol within Iraqi cities and towns. This means that the US will not be able to support its local allies, such as the Sunni 103,000-strong al-Sahwa Awakening Movement which is paid by the US but hostile to the Shia-Kurdish government.

The original US draft for a security agreement to replace the UN mandate which runs out at the end of the year appeared to continue the American occupation. When its terms were leaked in June there was a nationalist backlash against its terms in Iraq. This coincided with the Iraqi army regaining control of Basra, Sadr City and the province of Amara, which had previously been under the control of Shia militias, notably the Mehdi Army of Muqtada al-Sadr. The growing confidence of the Iraqi army that it can act without US military back up has made it possible for Mr Maliki to demand more limitations on US authority.

Iraqi negotiators have been eager to end the legal immunity of US forces. Washington has conceded that private security contractors, of whom 35,000 out of 154,000 are armed security personnel, should no longer have immunity on or off US bases. This is an important change because the private contractors outnumber US troops and play a crucial support role. They are also widely detested by Iraqis because of their ill-discipline and involvement in incidents when innocent Iraqi civilians have been killed.

The US has been determined to preserve the legal immunity of its regular armed forces. According to one Iraqi negotiator, US soldiers will have immunity in their bases and when engaged in official missions, but if they engage in premeditated crimes outside their official role and off-base then a US-Iraqi committee will decide how they should be dealt with.

The Iraqi government has gone out of its way to reassure Iran that the US will not be able to use Iraq as base for any attack on Iran. Iran reacted furiously to the first draft of the accord, claiming it would turn Iraq into a US puppet state and, so far as the Iranians were concerned, it would be ‘an insecurity agreement and not a security agreement.’ Standing beside the US Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice at a press conference, Mr Zebari said: “There are clear articles [in the agreement that] say that Iraq will not be used as a launching pad for any aggressive acts against neighboring countries.”

Patrick Cockburn is the Ihe author of “Muqtada: Muqtada Al-Sadr, the Shia Revival, and the Struggle for Iraq.

‘MI6 & Weapons of Mass Destruction’

0

By Larry O’Hara | Fascinating fall-out recently following the publication of Ron Suskind’s new book ‘The Way of the World’ (Simon & Schuster 2008) in which he argues two things of interest. Firstly, the the US regime leant on Iraqi informer (Tahir Habbush) to help manufacture evidence there were ‘Weapons of Mass Destruction’ in Iraq, when there weren’t. No surprise there. Second in the course of writing the book Suskind interviewed (see pages 188-95) both Richard Dearlove (head of MI6 when war broke out with Iraq) and his then-deputy Nigel Inkster, who now works for the ruling-class think-tank the Institute for Strategic Studies. While Dearlove was slightly cagy, Suskind quotes Inkster (who liaised with the Iraqi defector Tahir Habbush, head of intelligence no less) as saying, quite clearly, that both the Bush and Blair regimes knew, before the invasion, that Iraq had no WMDs. Again, no surprise here, and backs up a point we at 9/11 Cultwatch have long made, that the fabrication of WMD evidence leading to a spurious war is in itself a sufficient reason, if you are so inclined, for both Blair & Bush to be arraigned as ‘war criminals’–you don’t need imaginary fairytales about 9/11, the War in Iraq is sufficient to make them (metaphorically) swing from the yard arm.

Like an Alice in Wonderland update, the man who met Habbush is named in the book as ‘Shipster’, but from the context (and lack of credible detail on him) it seems reasonable to surmise Habbush in fact met Inkster! If you are still with us…the whole tale gets even more interesting with the intervention of Guardian journalist Richard Norton-Taylor, a man whom, to put it politely, I have long regarded as MI6’s ‘representative on earth’, regaling the naive fools who read the Guardian with ‘hot poop’ that is often disinformation of the most insidious kind. On the 6th August he wrote a piece pouring gentle scorn on Suskind’s claims and reminding readers Suskind has (indeed) got it wrong once before (over one of the 7/7 bombers). In a breathless addition to the original story, Norton-Taylor quoted Inkster as denying he said what Suskind quotes him as saying, describing it as ‘fiction’.

While spooks/ex-spooks may now be closing ranks on this one, there is a fascinating undercurrent to the story. For Inkster was, it is widely believed, Dearlove’s chosen successor as MI6 chief, and was elbowed out of the way by none other than Blair lickspittle John Scarlett, infamous both for being complicit in the production of the ‘dodgy dossier’ justifying war with Iraq, and for being a man who knows rather a lot (to put it mildly) about the suspicious death of WMD expert Dr David Kelly. Hence, what a useful way to settle a score with Captain Scarlett than berating him to Suskind, a man whose work is influential on both sides of the Atlantic. This one will run and run, although it will, I am sure, little trouble the cultists as it doesn’t involve Jews, beam-weapons, holograms, Controlled Demolitions & the like. Ah well….

RIPA Surveillance Law Misused On Merseyside

By Andrew Brown | HUNDREDS of people across Merseyside have been under surveillance by local authorities using powers under so-called “terror laws”, according to details released under the Freedom of Information Act.

An investigation has revealed that organisations ranging from local councils, including Sefton, to Merseytravel have used the powers created by the Government under the Regulation of Investigatory Powers Act (Ripa).

The use of the laws by local councils and organisations has been described as a “snoopers’ charter” by the campaign group, Liberty, which said it was “self-authorisation by over-zealous bureaucrats”, and called for the law to be changed.

The authorities have used the laws to probe telecommunications records (phone/internet), and investigate alleged offences from abusing disabled parking badges to employees ‘failing to undertake duties’. The law, which was originally set up to combat terrorism and serious crime, allows the authorities to carry out surveillance on the public or their own employees — and many have made widespread use of it.

According to the Home Office, Ripa “legislates for using methods of surveillance and information gathering to help the prevention of crime, including terrorism”.

All local authorities in and around Merseyside were asked to provide details about their use of Ripa.

Sefton Council said it would be too time-consuming to provide data any older than a year ago, but said that over the past 12 months there had been 11 cases where surveillance was authorised under Ripa.

Three were for alleged benefit fraud, two regarding fly-tipping, two related to ‘statutory noise nuisance’ with others for anti-social behaviour, taxi licences and trading standards.

The council revealed that ‘in the case of the taxi matters, on-street CCTV cameras were used and in the noise nuisance cases, recording equipment was used’.

Sefton Council said ‘a number of the surveillance operations have resulted in prosecutions’ but has not been able to provide any details of these.

Among the councils in Merseyside, Liverpool City Council appears to have used the powers most extensively, with more than 300 cases of surveillance using the Ripa legislation since 2000.

A spokesperson for Liberty said: “You don’t use a sledgehammer to crack a nut, nor targeted surveillance to stop a litter bug.

“You can care about serious crime and terrorism without throwing away our personal privacy with a snoopers’ charter.

“The law must be reformed to require sign-off by judges, not self-authorisation by over-zealous bureaucrats.”

Britain: Security Service “facilitated” torture of Guantánamo detainee

0

By Richard Tyler | A London court has ruled that the British government must disclose information that could support the claim that torture was used to extract confessions from Binyam Mohamed, a former British resident who has been held in Guantánamo Bay since September 2004.

The ruling by the Judicial Review–a special court that considers the lawfulness of a decision or action made by a public body–is a rebuff to Foreign Secretary David Miliband, who had initially argued that he was under no obligation to provide Mohamed’s lawyers with the information.

Binyam Mohamed has now been incarcerated for nearly six and half years. He was first detained in Pakistan, and then subjected to “extraordinary rendition”–Washington’s euphemism for its programme of organised kidnapping and torture–to Morocco. Here he was held for 18 months while his captors used torture–including slicing his genitals with a razor–to wring a “confession” out of him.

He currently faces trial by a US Military Tribunal, charged with conspiring to commit terrorism and providing material support for terrorism in an alleged “dirty-bomb” plot. He could face the death penalty if found guilty. The judges ruled that the information is “not only necessary but essential for his defence”.

Human rights lawyer Clive Stafford Smith, Director of Reprieve, who has represented Mohamed since 2005, told the press, “This is a momentous decision. Compelling the British government to release information that can prove Mr. Mohamed’s innocence is one obvious step towards making up for the years of torture that he has suffered. The next step is for the British government to demand an end to the charade against him in Guantánamo Bay, and return him home to Britain.”

In their ruling, the judges state, “It is a long standing principle of the common law that confessions obtained by torture or cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment cannot be used as evidence in any trial.”

The Judicial Review was held at the end of July over five days in both open and closed sessions, also hearing testimony in camera from British Security Service and Secret Service officers who had been involved in the questioning of Mohamed while he was detained in Pakistan and elsewhere. The court’s 75-page open judgement was finally published last week, while a secret “closed” judgement has also been made.

Lord Justice Thomas and Mr Justice Lloyd Jones found there were compelling grounds that the “exculpatory” information should be released in confidence to Mohamed’s legal representatives. No order for the provision of such information has been made until a further hearing considers the issues of “national security” raised by the Foreign Secretary as grounds for its non-disclosure.

At the Judicial Review, Dinah Rose QC, representing Mohamed, told the court that by cooperating with the US in its unlawful treatment of her client, the security and intelligence agencies were “mixed up in wrongdoing”. It was also alleged that the US “provided the UK with the fruits of his interrogation”.

Rose said that a British agent–identified only as “Witness B”–had made a “veiled threat” to Mohamed while he was being held in Pakistan, to encourage his “cooperation”, with the implication that “we won’t help you unless you confess”. She also asserted that MI5 had “repeatedly” provided the US authorities with detailed information about Mohamed’s life in the UK, information that was then used by his captors during interrogation.

In his summing up, Ben Jaffey, another of Mohamed’s legal team, highlighted the contradictions in MI5’s accounts; one MI5 officer had said that British security and intelligence agencies “did not know” Binyam Mohamed’s whereabouts after he was flown out of Pakistan in 2002, whereas an MI5 representative had explicitly told the House of Commons Intelligence and Security Committee that it believed he was in US custody.

Seeking to justify its refusal to hand over information that could uphold Mohamed’s claim that he was tortured, the government told the court that the UK was “hugely dependent in a number of areas on US intelligence”.

Moreover, it was a “fundamental principle” that information passed between the countries not be disclosed to a third party without the consent of the country which had provided it. “Any disclosure, however limited, would seriously undermine this principle to the point that future cooperation between the UK and its most valuable intelligence partner, the US, would be severely jeopardised”, posing a “very serious risk to UK national security”.

 

Judicial Review findings 

Binyam Mohamed’s case makes a mockery of the Labour government’s pretensions to oppose the use of torture and uphold human rights.

While claiming to uphold the Geneva Conventions and international treaties outlawing the use of torture, British military personnel, as well as officers from the various intelligence agencies have been implicated in the mistreatment of detainees in Afghanistan and Iraq. In the case of Binyam Mohamed, they have been caught red-handed.

The judgement records that “it was accepted on behalf of the Foreign Secretary… that BM [Binyam Mohamed] had established an arguable case (i) that over the period April 2002 to May 2004 he was first held by the United States incommunicado and without access to a lawyer or a court or tribunal in Pakistan, and then detained there or elsewhere by the United States until his arrival in Guantánamo Bay in September 2004 (ii) that he was subject to cruel, inhuman and degrading treatment by or on behalf of the United States during such detention and (iii) that he was subject to torture during such detention by or on behalf of the United States.”

Moreover, the legal hearing and court ruling establish conclusively that not only did the British government know about the mistreatment of Mohamed, British agents also facilitated this “wrongdoing”. The judges found that “The relationship between the United Kingdom Government and the United States authorities was far beyond that of a bystander or witness to the alleged wrongdoing”.

Even more damning, the court found “that on the basis that what was done was arguably wrongdoing, the SyS [Security Service] facilitated it in the manner and to the extent described.”

The court concluded that the “conduct of the Security Service facilitated interviews by or on behalf of the United States when BM was being detained by the United States incommunicado and without access to a lawyer in Pakistan in the period April 2002 until at least May 2002… The Court also concluded that the Security Service continued to facilitate the interviewing of BM by providing information and questions after 17 May 2002, in the knowledge of what was reported to them as to the circumstances of his detention and treatment in Pakistan.”

The Security Services then continued to provide further information and questions to their American counterparts, even when they knew that Mohamed had been moved from Afghanistan to a third country, where he faced serious mistreatment.

Mohamed’s lawyers have been pressing the government to release information and documents they held that might sustain his claim that the “evidence” against him had been extracted under torture. After an initial request for information was lodged by his legal representatives in April, government lawyers responded by saying the “UK is under no obligation under international law to assist foreign courts and tribunals in assuring that torture evidence is not admitted”.

Binyam Mohamed’s case was finally accepted for Judicial Review at the beginning of June. Recognising the urgency of his plight, Mr Justice Saunders agreed to an “expedited” hearing, saying, “If it is correct that in the course of an interrogation, in which material supplied by the Defendant [the British government] was employed, the Claimant [Binyam Mohamed] was tortured, then it is arguable that there is an obligation to disclose material which may assist Claimant in establishing before the American Military Court that he was tortured. Whether the Court should exercise its discretion not to order disclosure can only be determined at a full hearing.”

It was not until this application for a Judicial Review was accepted that the Foreign Secretary then grudgingly acknowledged government documents “could be considered exculpatory or might otherwise be relevant in the context of proceedings before the Military Commissions”.

 

Geneva Conventions 

In its deliberations, the court considered whether the British government or its agents had contravened the Genva Conventions.

“The United Kingdom Armed Forces are trained in the laws of armed conflict set out in the Geneva Conventions. The Joint Services Intelligence Organisations’ training documentation states that the following techniques are expressly and explicitly forbidden: (a) physical punishment of any sort; (b) the use of stress positions; (c) intentional sleep deprivations; (d) withdrawal of food, water or medical treatment and three other specified techniques.”

Citing a 2007 report by the Intelligence and Security Committee (ISC), established by the Intelligence Services Act 1994 to examine the policy, administration and expenditure of the Security Service (SyS), Secret Intelligence Service (SIS), and the Government Communications Headquarters (GCHQ), the court found that the SyS and SIS “must have appreciated that it [rendition] was contrary to the rule of law.”

The ruling also documents the fact that the government knew of the ongoing and persistent mistreatment of detainees being held by the American authorities, or those acting on their behalf.

From December 2001, British intelligence operatives were able to interview detainees in Afghanistan, if permission was given by the US authorities holding them. The first SyS officers arrived at Bagram airbase on January 9, 2002 to begin this interrogation.

A report from one such officer dated January 10, 2002 contained certain “observations” about the conditions under which the detainees were being held. As a consequence, on January 11, 2002, instructions were sent to all SIS and SyS officers in Afghanistan that all prisoners, “however they are described, are entitled to the same levels of protection.”

Despite claims that this merely represented an “isolated case”, the judgement records that there were reports of a “further isolated case” in March 2002, and in April 2002 an SIS officer was present at an interrogation of a detainee by the US military, who complained of being kept “in isolation”.

In June 2002, according to an ISC report cited by the court, the SyS had discussed with Foreign and Commonwealth officials a US report that referred to the “hooding, withholding of blankets and sleep deprivation of a detainee in Afghanistan”.

Again, in July 2002, a SyS officer reported to his senior management that whilst in Afghanistan, “a United States official had referred to ‘getting a detainee ready’, which appeared to involve sleep deprivation, hooding and the use of stress positions.”

The court ruling cited an official document that was sent to all Security Service and Secret Service officers in Afghanistan in January 2002: “With regard to the status of the prisoners, under the various Geneva Conventions and protocols, all prisoners, however they are described, are entitled to the same levels of protection. You have commented on their treatment. It appears from your description that they may not be being treated in accordance with the appropriate standards. Given that they are not within our custody or control, the law does not require you to intervene to prevent this. That said, HMG’s [Her Majesty’s Government] stated commitment to human rights makes it important that the Americans understand that we cannot be party to such ill treatment nor can we be seen to condone it.”

Such is the Labour government’s venal double-talk: not only has the British government tacitly accepted the use of torture by the US authorities from the beginning of the illegal wars in Afghanistan and Iraq (and benefited from the “intelligence” it produces), British agents have actively facilitated it. All that counts is that HMG must not be “seen” to condone it!

Blackwater-linked firm to train Canadian troops

1

| OTTAWA—Canadian soldiers could get training from a U.S. company closely linked to Blackwater USA, a private security firm implicated in the killings of hundreds of Iraqi civilians, if the Department of National Defence has its way.

The military gave notice this week of its intention to award an $850,000 contract for advanced counterinsurgency training to the Terrorism Research Center, a Virginia-based firm that specializes in terrorism training for military and law enforcement officials. The contract is for one year with the option for a two-year extension.

The counterinsurgency school, which boasts close links to the U.S. government, is listed as a branch of Total Intelligence Solutions, a company that is run by former director of CIA counterterrorism Cofer Black and Erik Prince, a former U.S. Navy Seal.

Both are top executives with the Prince Group, the chief holding company for Total Intelligence Solutions and Blackwater.

“It will shock many Canadians to think of our soldiers, who are amongst the best trained in the world, to be sent down to the U.S. to work with a private war-making company that has been indicted in some of its operations in Iraq in the past,” said NDP defence critic Dawn Black. “It raises a terrible spectre.”

A spokesperson for Defence Minister Peter MacKay did not respond to requests for comment.

The defence department’s training requirements include insurgent tactics, surveillance and intelligence gathering, weapons, financing and propaganda.

The Canadian Forces first identified the need for more robust counterinsurgency training last September, around the same time that Blackwater security forces in Baghdad were implicated in the killing of 17 Iraqis while carrying out a contract with the U.S. State Department to protect government officials.

Pledge: Refuse To Comply With ID Scheme

3

From the Blog of Kev:

I will refuse to comply with any compulsary ID card scheme. but only if 1,000 other UK people will do the same. Deadline to pledge 31st December 2008, pledge creator Ken Hall

NO2ID - Stop ID cards and the database state
In light of the government’s proven incapability to guarantee the security of personal data and the risk to individual liberty, prosperity and freedom and the potential for massive ID Fraud, We should ALL send a strong message to parliament that we are free individuals born into liberty and we are NOT the property of the state. Our personal information belongs firmly to US and not THEM. We shall only volunteer information to them IF and when they can be trusted to look after it, and only that information that WE want to allow them to have. WE OWN OURSELVES AND OUR DATA. Any information we wish to keep private, is NONE OF THEIR DAMN BUSINESS!

Why can’t energy firms pick up the bill?

4

Demands grow for windfall tax as fuel companies rake in record profits

Socialist Worker | “British economy grinds to a halt” cried the headlines last weekend. Charles Bean, the deputy governor of the Bank of England, said the current economic downturn could “drag on for some considerable time” — especially since there always seemed to be “another grenade” waiting to explode in the financial markets.

“We’ve got our fingers crossed that things will improve,” Bean added. Most people might expect a little more reassurance than that. In the good times the bankers told us that the free market ruled. Now they admit that its workings are down to chance.

A recession will bring higher unemployment and further attempts by bosses to cut wages in order to maintain their profits. Meanwhile they are going full steam ahead with their own prices rises on everything from water to food to public transport.

Gas prices have doubled since 2000. Electricity has gone up by nearly two thirds over the same period. Every week new figures show price rises that will hit working people and the poor the hardest.

Around 80 Labour MPs have now signed a call for Gordon Brown to impose a windfall tax on the big energy and fuel companies. That is the very least he should do. These firms have been forcing up prices while still raking in huge profits.

A recent poll showed that 70 percent of people believed their household economic wellbeing had got worse over the past year. Only 5 percent said things had got better. Higher taxes on the corporations — including a windfall tax — would begin to redress this.

But there is little sign that Brown will take notice of the plea from his own party’s MPs. Nor is he likely to listen to campaigners, trade union leaders, local councillors and academics who have backed the call for a windfall tax.

The fact is that Brown is too frightened of upsetting big business and their friends in the media. In every policy area he has stuck closely to the path mapped out by Tony Blair — even though this has led to a collapse in Labour’s support.

Brown may pay the price for his refusal to help those who elected him. But we need to make sure it’s the big companies that pick up the bill — not the poorest and working people who are being expected to pay for this crisis.

£3 billion

the profits of energy suppliers, up from £557 million in 2003

100 percent

the level of gas price rises since 2000

6.8 million

households are in debt to their energy suppliers

Running for War President at Any Cost

0

By Robert Scheer | Just great! Nuclear-armed Pakistan is falling apart, Iran’s nuclear program is unchecked and congressional legislation on cooperation with the Russians on controlling nuclear proliferation is now dead in the water. Horrid news except for Sen. John McCain, who thrills to a repeat of the danger lines of the Cold War, and now stands a good chance of being our next president.

A very good chance, if the Russian recognition of the independence of two breakaway Georgia provinces can be elevated to the status of a major challenge to the security of the United States. It is an absurd claim: How can one justify uncritical support for the independence of Kosovo from Serbia earlier this year while denouncing a similar claim by a Georgian ethnic minority? It is also difficult to ignore that it was Georgia’s president and close McCain friend, Mikheil Saakashvili, who upset the status quo by invading first.

Saakashvili’s attempt to compare the Russian response with that of the “Stalinist Soviet Union” is a nutty reference to a Georgian-born tyrant who ruled Russia and who is still revered in much of his native Georgia. But when you need a new Stalin to get a Cold War going, President Dmitry Medvedev and the elected members of a unanimous Russian parliament will have to do. And McCain is very happy to have this card to play.

McCain can win only as a war president. He neither knows nor cares much about the economic meltdown, which is the consequence of the deregulation mania that he has supported at every turn during his career in the Senate. If McCain had to run on his economic policy record in the Senate, he might be a loser even in his home state of Arizona, whose residents are suffering mightily from economic disarray presided over by the Republicans. Better to dwell on the dubious success of the surge in Iraq than on the surge in home mortgage foreclosures and the price of gasoline that has crippled Arizona’s and the nation’s economy. Still better to change the subject to the Russians and Georgia rather than dwell overly long on the disaster of Iraq, which has cost our nation trillions of dollars and where the prime minister now is far more zealous than Barack Obama in calling for an early withdrawal of U.S. troops. But whatever McCain’s problems from cheerleading for Bush’s war, they pale in comparison to his vulnerability on the most pressing domestic issues.

Instead of learning the hard lessons of the need for stern government oversight of the financial sector from his own compromised involvement as a member of the Keating Five in the 1980s savings-and-loan scandal, he voted to have more of the same. McCain became a booster for all of the banking deregulation legislation advanced by the Senate Banking Committee’s then-chairman, Phil Gramm, who, more than any other legislator in the past decade, should be held responsible for the current mess.

Instead of recognizing that Gramm had pursued a disastrous course as the subprime mortgage scandal was exposed, McCain appointed the former-senator-turned-banker to be his campaign chair. McCain fired Gramm over a verbal gaffe but has not retracted any of his key votes liberating the financial community to fleece those desperate to become homeowners, and, were that the subject of the presidential campaign, he would lag way behind in the polls. This is not the season for laissez-faire corporate capitalism.

That’s why he needs a new Cold War, but it’s a bad fit for the world we face. The danger from Russia is not that it has imperial ambitions driven by the remnants of an expansionist communist ideology. Even China, which is still a communist-run state, knows that old-fashioned imperialism doesn’t pay. What drives nations to madness these days is not ideology–communist, Muslim or any other flavor of the month–but rather an assortment of nationalist and religion-fueled grievances. In the case of Russia, the evolution of Prime Minister Vladimir Putin from the man Bush so admired to the one McCain despises was driven by hostile U.S. policies–from NATO expansion to placing anti-missile rockets near Russia’s borders.

The first step in adjusting U.S. foreign policy to a multipolar world is to recognize that other nations, as well as the United States, have causes and concerns that may be legitimate, even when they differ from our view. The hope of the Obama campaign was that a less U.S.-centric view might be in the offing, but that might be too great an expectation in the midst of a presidential campaign.

Robert Scheer is author of a new book, “The Pornography of Power: How Defense Hawks Hijacked 9/11 and Weakened America.”

Joe Biden and the political establishment’s overriding goal

0

By Glenn Greenwald | Writing in a New York Times blog yesterday, Clinton pollster Mark Penn hails the selection of Joe Biden as “a smart and successful choice” and says this:

From Al Gore on, the role of the vice president seems to have fundamentally changed. It used to be where the winner parked the loser or some other figure that he wanted to neutralize. Now, with the centralization of government power in the White House, the vice president has become essentially a Cabinet head. Indeed, the last two vice presidents have had real portfolios and responsibilities, second only to the president.

That we live in a country characterized by “the centralization of government power in the White House” — exactly what the Constitution was designed to prevent — is now so self-evident that it’s not even debated or contested any longer. A virtually omnipotent President is just an assumed fact of American political life, and the reason that there is such a fixation on the personality and “character” traits of the presidential candidates is because Our President is now, in essence, our Emperor, empowered unilaterally to do everything from attacking other countries to acting outside of and above the law. As Penn’s analysis illustrates, our political establishment isn’t bothered by that at all, but instead, just tacitly accepts it as the natural and desired state of things.

 

That, among many other things, is what makes David Ignatius’ column in The Washington Post this morning so unbelievably absurd that it’s hard to believe it’s not satire. Ignatius believes that one of the principal problems in American politics is that Democratic Congressional leaders are too partisan and belligerent and uncooperative, and have been so intent on waging war against George Bush and the GOP that they have prevented the country from getting anything done. Seriously, that’s what he — and much of the political establishment — actually thinks: that Congress has been too assertive and bellicose in flexing its power:

As the Democrats assemble in Denver, there’s an odd dissonance to the party. The star of the show is “Mr. Cool,” Barack Obama, the ultra-charismatic senator who landed on the national stage as if from outer space — seemingly untouched by the usual racial and political scars — promising a new era of bipartisanship and national healing. 

But the supporting cast is a collection of red-hot politicians I’ve come to think of as the Get-Even Gang — led by the party’s congressional leaders, House Speaker Nancy Pelosi and Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid. They made their names clawing and battling against Karl Rove’s Republicans, and they are partisan politicians to the bone.

The partisanship of the congressional leadership has been a virtue for Democrats, up to a point. By being as tough and unyielding as their GOP rivals, they won back control of Congress. But they haven’t done much with their majorities these past two years, beyond bashing President Bush. . . .

As an extra-credit assignment before this week’s convention, I’ve been reading the books recently published by congressional leaders. And I must say, these are not works that rank with the political novels of Anthony Trollope. The titles — Pelosi’s “Know Your Power” and Reid’s “The Good Fight” — sound almost pugilistic. They reveal the mind-set that has made these leaders such effective partisan brawlers. . . .

These old-fashioned Democrats don’t just oppose Republicans; they actively dislike them . . . . Pelosi and Reid rose to leadership positions during the hyper-partisan years of Republican control of Congress, and it shows. They are the people who refused to be Swift-boated, DeLay-ed or otherwise crushed by the Republican attack machine. They attacked back and were as vengeful as the Republicans. . . .It’s a virtue for Obama that he seems to be above the fray — so long as he shows the toughness and hands-on leadership to steer his party and the country out of what has been a dark, partisan period into something better and brighter.

Since Pelosi and Reid took over Congress, the Congress has funded the Iraq war without even a symbolic condition. It has rejected every proposal to limit war spending. It has enacted one right-wing proposal after the next, from warrantless surveillance and telecom immunity to declaring parts of the Iranian Government a “terrorist organization.” It passed a housing bill and “stimulus” package approved by the administration. It has done nothing to reverse the radical executive power theories and has done much to institutionalize them. If there is one predominant trait of the Congress over the past several years, it has been a willingness to grant every item on the the President’s wish list regardless of whether Democrats or Republicans are in control.

 

It’s literally hard to imagine how Congress could possibly be weaker and more pliant than they’ve been. If Congress became any more cooperative, Capitol Hill might just vanish altogether. Yet David Ignatius, the ultimate establishment pundit, thinks that Nancy Pelosi and Harry Reid are vicious partisan fighters who are so intent on waging vindictive war on poor George Bush that the country has been unable to “get anything done” — such as saving the country from “the reality that Social Security is facing bankruptcy,” which, frets Ignatius, “seems not to interest either Pelosi or Reid” (the reality that the U.S. itself faces bankruptcy from the State of Permanent War which Ignatius and his establishment comrades envision for the U.S. seems not to interest Ignatius).

The most entrenched establishment spokespeople are cheering the selection of Joe Biden because, in their minds, that selection confirms the most important fact for them: that in this election, the prevailing orthodoxies of our political system won’t be meaningfully challenged. Chief Establishment Defender Fred Hiatt cheerfully announced today, also on the Editorial page of The Washington Post, that the Ways of Washington have been vindicated:

Mr. Biden may share Mr. Obama’s outlook, but with an idealism tempered by years in the trenches. Which points to Mr. Biden’s second advantage: experience. Mr. Obama’s willingness to reach out to the kind of seasoned insider that he has, at times, derided suggests a heartening recognition that time in Washington can be useful.

David Brooks wrote earlier in the week that he hoped Obama chose Biden because it would advance what Brooks conceives of as “the good of the country.” The political establishment’s overriding preoccupation is that nothing meaningful should change how the political system works, that both parties should continue to embrace the central orthodoxies. The primary concern of Brooks, in particular, is that American “not hav[e] a strategic debate about retracting American power and influence. . . This is not a country looking to avoid entangling alliances. This is not a country renouncing the threat of force. This is not a country looking to come home again.”

 

Whether rightly or wrongly, Biden is approved of and deemed to have Seriousness credentials by the political establishment because they perceive that he affirms those central precepts and they see his selection as a sign that Obama will, too. And there is much to suggest that that perception — at least as it applies to Biden — is correct. In an October, 2001 New Republic article, Michael Crowley recounted that Biden was continuously boasting that the terrorism bill sent to Congress by John Ashcroft (soon to be called The Patriot Act) was a replica of legislation that Biden had long advocated — ever since the Oklahoma City courthouse bombing:

Unexpectedly, a call comes in from Attorney General John Ashcroft. Biden picks up the phone and greets Ashcroft like an old Elks lodge buddy. “Hey John, Joe. Howyadoin’ pal? What’s the sticking points, and tell me if I can be helpful.” All day, reporters had been buzzing that Ashcroft wanted to cut a deal with a Democrat, perhaps Biden, to circumvent the stubborn Judiciary Committee chairman, Pat Leahy. . . . 

Rather than build up the credentials of a party deeply mistrusted by the public on foreign affairs, Biden often seems more interested in advertising his own accomplishments. In the wake of the 1995 Oklahoma City bombing, Biden did, in fact, champion an anti-terrorism bill similar to the one now before Congress (though it was, as he complains, badly watered down by anti-government conservatives and leftist civil libertarians). And Biden doesn’t let you forget it. “I introduced the terrorism bill in ’94 that had a lot of these things in it,” he bragged to NBC’s Tim Russert on September 30. When I spent the day with him later that week, Biden mentioned the legislation to me, and to several other reporters he encountered, no fewer than seven times. “When I was chairman in ’94 I introduced a major antiterrorism bill–back then,” he says in the morning, flashing a knowing grin and pausing for effect. (Never mind that he’s gotten the year wrong.) Back in his office later that afternoon, he brings it up yet again. “I drafted a terrorism bill after the Oklahoma City bombing. And the bill John Ashcroft sent up was my bill.”

Numerous articles are hailing Biden’s steadfast “pro-Israel” record and praising him as a great liberal “internationalist” — someone who believes in the wisdom and justifiability of U.S. military interventions in a wide array of situations. Last night, I spoke with Denver criminal defense attorney and Talk Left blogger Jeralyn Merritt, who said that Biden has long been the leading advocate of the harshest and most aggressive drug criminalization laws and general “anti-crime” measures (see this 2002 Glenn Reynolds article on Biden’s “anti-RAVE” legislation as an example).

 

Ever since it became clear that Obama would be the likely nominee, the political establishment has been demanding of him more and more proof that his “change” rhetoric is just that — rhetoric, and not anything meant as a genuine threat to the prevailing order of things. Obama, arguably out of political necessity, has repeatedly obliged, eagerly trying to offer proof that he is no threat to them, and the Biden selection is but the latest step in that campaign of reassurance. In sum, Biden is a reliable supporter of virtually every prevailing bit of conventional wisdom within the American elite political consensus, which is why his selection has been widely praised by the establishment, whose principal concern is that their fiefdom not be disrupted and that their consensus not be challenged.

None of this is to say that Biden is a bad pick. Given the other likely choices that had been bandied about, there were far worse possibilities, and few better ones. It’s much more difficult to predict the political effect of these sorts of things than the always-omniscient political pundits like to pretend, but there are certainly many good reasons for thinking that the choice of Biden is politically shrewd. It’s anyone’s guess if that will turn out to be true. And on the merits, Biden’s opposition to the First Gulf War suggests he’s far from the extreme in foreign policy; as Reason‘s Dave Weigel points out, Biden, even with the numerous times he has supported deploying the U.S. military, doesn’t come close to the McCain/Lieberman/Kristol bloodlust for Endless War. Biden’s opposition to the series of horrible FISA bills, including the last one supported by Obama in July, demonstrates much the same thing.

What is most significant here is that for all the talk about how radical and horrible the Bush presidency has been, for all the hand-wringing over how deeply dissatisfied the citizenry is with our political institutions and direction of the country, what establishment figures like David Ignatius, Fred Hiatt and David Brooks crave most is to ensure that nothing really change. To them, what is most vital is that everything continue more or less as is, and that in particular, we continue to be a country ruled by “the centralization of government power in the White House,” in which even the meekest and most ineffectual of Congressional leaders — Harry Reid and Nancy Pelosi — are attacked for being too “partisan,” disruptive and belligerent.

Congress was, in theory, the instrument for the citizenry to exert influence over the Government — to enable citizens to decide when and if we went to war, how we conducted ourselves in the world, what power political leaders would have over citizens, what limits would constrain them. That’s why the political establishment wants to reduce and neuter Congressional power as much as possible.

What the David Ignatiuses and Fred Hiatts of the world fear most is any meaningful influence on the part of the citizenry over the levers of Government (as the Post‘s Shailagh Murray said in explaining why the Government should ignore public opposition to the Iraq War: “Would you want a department store manager or orthodontist running the Pentagon? I don’t think so”). Preserving “the centralization of government power in the White House” is the best and most effective means devised thus far for allowing the political elite to run the country without interference from the dirty, stupid masses, and though the establishment generally believes (accurately) that Republicans serve those ends more effectively, what they care about most is obtaining a bipartisan commitment to continuing that state of affairs. They’re fine with rhetoric bashing the Bush administration — now that it’s almost over. What they oppose most vociferously is any effort to change the framework that enabled it.

UPDATE: Andrew Bacevich in The Los Angeles Times today:

Will the next president actually bring about Big Change? Don’t get your hopes up. . . .The very structure of American politics imposes its own constraints. For all the clout that presidents have accrued since World War II, their prerogatives remain limited. A President McCain will almost certainly face a Congress controlled by a Democratic and therefore obstreperous majority. A President Obama, even if his own party runs the Senate and House, won’t enjoy all that much more latitude, especially when it comes to three areas in which the dead hand of the past weighs most heavily: defense policy, energy policy and the Arab-Israeli peace process. The military-industrial complex will inhibit efforts to curb the Pentagon’s penchant for waste. Detroit and Big Oil will conspire to prolong the age of gas guzzling. And the Israel lobby will oppose attempts to chart a new course in the Middle East. If the past provides any indication, advocates of the status quo will mount a tenacious defense.

 

People like Fred Hiatt, David Ignatius and David Brooks are merely the spokespeople for these “advocates of the status quo” — those whose principal objective is to keep everything essentially the way it is, no matter which party wins, even as Americans become more and more deeply dissatisfied with their political institutions.

UPDATE II: Fox News tries to create some trite, inane, melodramatic storyline to feed their mindless viewers — “The Angry Radical Far Left is in Denver!” — and the “reporter” they sent, Griff Jenkins, receives a less than respectful welcome:

The Future of Death at the Pentagon

0

The Pentagon: Some-Things-Never-Change Department

Tomgram | What a difference four and a half years makes. When I first penned “The Wild Weapons of DARPA,” in March 2004, I was a new TomDispatch writer; the war in Iraq was not yet a year old; the war in Afghanistan had been bubbling for less than two and a half years, and I suggested that “what’s left of the USSR is a collapsed group of half-failed states, while the U.S. stands alone as the globe’s sole hyperpower.” Today, I’m the long-time associate editor of TomDispatch.com; the United States, now far from a “hyperpower,” continues to be bogged down in Iraq and Afghanistan with no end in sight in either occupation; and a resurgent Russia, now an energy superpower, has only recently invaded the hardly-failed state of Georgia.

Similarly, at that time, the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA), the Pentagon’s blue-skies research outfit, still looked young and vigorous. Today, DARPA is beginning to show the stresses of age. The agency turned 50 this year and, as Sharon Weinberger reported at Wired Magazine’s Danger Room last month, “its birthday present appears to be another $100 million in budget cuts, according to a Defense Department document… ” — and this was on top of a $32 million loss the month before.

Still, much remains the same. Despite current budget cuts, the agency is still “both intellectually and financially, a fabulous and alluring gravy train,” and its funding for the life sciences still offers “a fertile area to further the science of death and destruction.” For example, back in 2004, I wrote that “DARPA has been creating insect databases while increasing efforts to ‘understand how to use endemic insects as collectors of environmental information,'” and I asked: “How long until they start thinking about weaponizing insects as well?” Earlier this year, I answered my own question. Not long was the reply. I reported that DARPA was now working to create cyborg insects for surveillance purposes, and — an even more frightening prospect — “that such creatures could be weaponized, and the possibility, according to one scientist intimately familiar with the project, that these cyborg insects might be armed with ‘bio weapons.'”

I wish I could claim some special prescience, but that prediction was a total no-brainer. After all, this is just the way the Pentagon operates, whatever changes or budget cuts come down the pike. Four years later, plenty of people have written about various DARPA projects, but most still fail to ask the most salient question: Why does the U.S. government foster unfettered, blue-skies creativity only in the context of lethal technologies (or those that, indirectly, enhance lethality by aiding the functioning of the armed forces)? Some things never change. Nick Turse, August, 2008

The Wild Weapons of DARPA
By Nick Turse

When, in October 1957, the USSR launched the first man-made earth satellite, the basketball-sized Sputnik, it caught the United States off guard and sent the government into fits. Not only had the Soviets exploded an atomic bomb years before the Americans predicted they would, but now they were leading the “space race.” In response, the Defense Department approved funding for a new U.S. satellite project, headed by former Nazi SS officer Wernher von Braun, and created, in 1958, the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) to make certain that the United States forever after maintained “a lead in applying state-of-the-art technology for military capabilities and to prevent technological surprise from her adversaries.”

Almost half a century later, what’s left of the USSR is a collapsed group of half-failed states, while the U.S. stands alone as the globe’s sole hyperpower. Yet DARPA, the agency for an arms-race world, seems only to be warming up to the chase. There may be no country left to take the lead from us, the nearest military competitor being China which reportedly had $65 billion in military expenditures in 2002 (compared to our $466 billion according to GlobalSecurity.org) and which, only in 2003, put its first “Taikonaut” into outer space. Undaunted, DARPA continues to develop high-tech weapons systems for 2025-2050 and beyond — some of them standard fare like your run-of-the-mill hypersonic bombers, others more exotic.

In an August 2003 article, Los Angeles Times reporter Charles Piller noted that DARPA has put forth some of the “most boneheaded ideas ever to spring from the government” — including a “mechanical elephant” that never made it into the jungles of Vietnam and telepathy research that never quite afforded the U.S. the ability to engage in psychic spying.

As former DARPA Director Charles Herzfeld noted in 1975, “When we fail, we fail big.” Little has changed. According to DARPA’s current chief, some 85%-90% of its projects fail to meet their full objectives. Still, Piller points out, DARPA “has been behind some of the world’s most revolutionary inventions” — “the Internet, the global positioning system, stealth technology and the computer mouse.”

DARPA’s spectacular failure rate and noteworthy successes stem from its high-risk ventures. For years DARPA has funded extremely unconventional, sometimes beyond-the-pale, avant-garde research in all realms of science and technology. It is, perhaps, the most creative place in our vast government for a scientist who wants to stretch his or her mind in adventurous directions and be well paid to do so. If you have a wild idea, DARPA’s the place to try it out. Said Harvard University pathologist Donald Ingber in a 2001 Los Angeles Times article, “DARPA [has] funded things that a lot of people thought were ridiculous, and some that people thought were impossible. They make things happen.”

There’s only one caveat — in one way or another most every project, however mind-stretching, invariably must end, directly or indirectly, in the incapacitation or death of future American enemies.

The projects are often some of the most lethal ever conceived. Over the years, DARPA research has led to a plethora of products designed to maim and kill, among them the M-16 rifle, Hellfire-missile-equipped Predator drones, stealth fighters and bombers, surface-to-surface artillery rocket systems, Tomahawk cruise missiles, B-52 bomber upgrades, Titan missiles, Javelin portable “fire and forget” guided missiles, and cannon-launched Copperhead guided projectiles, to name but a few.

A question seldom asked is why pie-in-the-sky creativity exists unfettered and fostered only in the context of lethal technologies? As the U.S. continues its mad dash into a post-Cold War, one-nation arms race, fears of a missile gap or the menace of a technologically advanced foreign foe drop away as explanations; nor can it just be a generalized fear of falling behind the rest of the world. Look at the state of education in America — in 2002 the U.S. ranked 18th in UNICEF’s list of teenagers in 24 industrialized countries falling below international academic benchmarks. Despite the poor showing, no one is rushing to set up an Advanced Education Research Agency.

According to the CIA’s annually-published World Factbook, “the US is the largest single emitter of carbon dioxide from the burning of fossil fuels,” yet the Environmental Protection Agency’s “National Center for Environmental Innovation” is a far cry from a DARPA-like entity. It doled out a mere $737,500 in seven state-innovation grants in 2003. DARPA, by comparison, spent about $3 billion on some 200 projects that ranged from space weapons to unmanned aerial vehicles. But just because the government isn’t pouring money into the projects of scientists eager to attack environmental problems doesn’t mean environmental research is of no interest to it. Quite the opposite. DARPA has taken up the torch and is funding a rigorous research program aimed at finding novel ways to weaponize the natural world.

As evidenced by their Vietnam-era mechanical elephant project and a recent grant to researchers developing a robotic canine called “Big Dog” for the Army, DARPA might be said to have something of an animal fetish, reflected perhaps in various projects whose very names evoke the ethos of the wild kingdom. Among them:

WolfPack, a group (pack) of miniaturized, unattended ground sensors that are meant to work together in detecting, identifying and jamming enemy communications;

Piranha, a project to “enable submarines to engage elusive maneuvering land and sea targets”; and

Hummingbird Warrior, a program to produce a helicopter-like vertical take-off and landing unmanned air vehicle (UAV).

The agency also embraces the imagery of the natural environment in its “Organic Air Vehicles in the Trees” project, which sounds downright “green,” though it’s actually a tiny UAV that will fly in the forests, over hills and through cities searching for enemies.

Allusions to the natural world, however, are the least of it. While the military is well-versed in employing all sorts of creatures to do its bidding, from Army guard dogs to Navy dolphins used for locating sea mines, DARPA is keen on branching out from class Mammalia. One way is through its “Bio-Revolution” program which seeks to “harness the insights and power of biology to make U.S. warfighters and their equipment… more effective.”

Willard and His Wild Pals

Killer Bees
After all those years of warnings about sinister African killer bees inexorably heading toward the U.S., DARPA decided to draft bees into military service. In 2002, projects examining the performance of honeybees trained to detect explosives and locate other “odors of interest” were launched. Since then, DARPA has been creating insect databases while increasing efforts to “understand how to use endemic insects as collectors of environmental information.” DARPA says it has already tested “this endemic insect system in key operational demonstrations here and abroad.” How long until they start thinking about weaponizing insects as well? Instead of your plain old, garden variety Stinger missiles, you could have a swarm of missile stingers.

Fly Boys
At the University of Florida, DARPA-sponsored researchers are working on biologically-inspired “eyes” patterned after those of flies. “We think we can use this concept to make smart weapons smarter,” says professor of materials science and engineering Paul Holloway, the project’s lead researcher. It’s a safe bet that a new set of eyes would help, since the current crop of smart weapons couldn’t get much dumber! Despite the pronouncements of U.S. Navy Vice Admiral Timothy Keating who, on the eve of the invasion of Iraq, bragged of a military “plan that… reduces to an absolute minimum, if not eliminates, noncombatant casualties,” nothing proved further from the case. While 68% of munitions used in Operation Iraqi Freedom were precision-guided, as opposed to only 6.5% in the 1991 Gulf War, the ratio of civilian to military deaths turned out to be almost twice as high this time around, according to Carl Conetta of the Massachusetts-based think-tank, Project on Defense Alternatives. Are fly eyes the answer? Perhaps… at least until some rogue state develops a fly-paper missile defense shield.

Little Shop of Horrors
In July 2003, DARPA held a workshop to “help researchers in various disciplines self-assemble into teams capable of developing plant inspired actuation systems that will ultimately have application in military adaptive or morphing structures.” What’s on the horizon then? Giant Venus flytrap-inspired fighting vehicles? A brigade of Swamp-Thing warriors?

(Octo)Pie in the sky camouflage
According to the agency’s 2003 strategic plan, “DARPA-supported researchers are studying how geckos climb walls and how an octopus hides to find new approaches to locomotion and highly adaptive camouflage. The idea is to let nature be a guide toward better engineering.” Imagine the ink-squirting, suction-cup-covered frogman of the future!

Remote-Control Robo-Rats
In 2002, DARPA researchers demonstrated that they could remotely control the movements of a rat with electrodes implanted into its brain using a laptop computer. In 2003 and 2004, DARPA’s “Robolife” program researchers will turn their attention to the “performance of rats, birds and insects in performing missions of interest to DoD, such as exploration of caves or covert deposition of sensors.” Militarizing the animal world, however, carries its own risks. Take World War II’s Project X-Ray in which bats with incendiary explosives strapped to their bodies turned on their military masters and set fire to a U.S. Army airfield. Just imagine what an army of Army rats might do! Anybody remember Willard?

The Wildest of Apes

When Captain America throws his mighty shield…
Perhaps the most frightening of DARPA’s weaponized science projects are those that deal with militarily enhancing that most violent of apes — man. In its 2003 strategic plan, DARPA touted the “Enhanced Human Performance” component of its “Bio-Revolution” program whose aim is to prevent humans from “becoming the weakest link in the U.S. military.” Lest rats, bees, and trees become the dominant warriors, Enhanced Human Performance will “exploit the life sciences to make the individual warfighter stronger, more alert, more endurant, and better able to heal.” Yes, what now captivates DARPA researchers once captivated comic-book readers — the dream of creating a real-life Captain America, that weakling-turned-Axis-smashing-super-patriot by way of “super soldier serum.”

Just Say “No” to No Doze, but “Yes” to Endless Combat
The U.S. military has long plied its fighting men with uppers. In Vietnam, medics sated soldiers’ need for speed by doling out government-issue amphetamines. In 2002, U.S. pilots under the influence of Air Force “go-pills” (which Air Force spokeswoman Lt. Jennifer Ferrau calls a “fatigue management tool”) killed four Canadian soldiers and injured eight others when they dropped a laser-guided bomb on a Canadian military training exercise in Afghanistan. Today, DARPA’s Continuous Assisted Performance (CAP) program is aimed at creating a 24/7 trooper by “investigating ways to prevent fatigue and enable soldiers to stay awake, alert, and effective for up to seven days straight without suffering any deleterious mental or physical effects and without using any of the current generation of stimulants.”

This is your brain on DARPA…any questions?
DARPA researchers are also at work on the “Brain Machine Interface” (“neuromics”) project, designed as a mind/machine interface, allowing mechanical devices to be controlled via thought-power. Thus far, researchers have taught a monkey to move a computer mouse and a telerobotic arm simply by thinking about it. With arrays of up to 96 electrodes implanted in their brains, the animals are able to reach for food with a robotic arm. Researchers even transmitted the signals over the internet, allowing remote control of a robotic arm 600 miles away. In the future they hope to develop a “non-invasive interface” for human use. Says DARPA, “The long-term Defense implications of finding ways to turn thoughts into acts, if it can be developed, are enormous: imagine U.S. warfighters that only need use the power of their thoughts to do things at great distances.” For years, the U.S. military has been improving its ability to reach out and kill someone. What’s the mantra of the future? Maybe, if you think it, they will die.

Life (and Death) Sciences

Leonard J. Buckley, a program manager in materials chemistry at DARPA’s Defense Science Office, has said, in regard to insect-inspired optics research, “Inspiration from nature…will allow more life-like qualities in the system.” And, says DARPA spokeswoman Jan Walker, “We’re interested in investigating biological organisms because they have evolved over many, many years to be particularly good at surviving in the environment… and we hope to learn from some of those strategies that Mother Nature has developed.”

Poor Mother Nature! What hope has she when faced with an over $400 billion dollar defense budget? What can she do when the most powerful impetus for free-thinking scientists to consider her lies in the urge to weaponize her offspring? Under DARPA, the life sciences have become a fertile area to further the science of death and destruction in an effort, in the words of the DARPA Defense Sciences Office, to overcome the “Frailties of Life” to achieve “Super Physiological Performance.” How wonderfully Nietzschean!

Such is the state of government-sponsored innovation in our land. If you’re a researcher in crucial fields and want the time, funding, and latitude to be creative, your work must benefit the Pentagon in its race to make sure that the next Saddam can be, in the words of Maj. Gen. Raymond Odierno, “caught like a rat” by Capt. Ben Willard of the Army’s rat patrol.

Other than finding new ways of circumventing international law (e.g. bypassing violations of national airspace with space-launched weapons), which the U.S. already does quite well with current technology, or the mountain climber’s mantra “because it’s there,” it’s hard to fathom why the government is still locked in a Cold War-style arms race in a single hyperpower world. The only explanation available lies in the driving will of the ever-expanding military-industrial complex, first named by President Eisenhower back in 1961. This would certainly help explain why we have no educational or environmental DARPAs. For today’s researchers, DARPA is, both intellectually and financially, a fabulous and alluring gravy train, the only agency that puts real money into and rewards creative and maverick thinking. The freedom to dream and create, DARPA’s mandate, is seductive and exceptional and, as such, so dangerous that we have to ask ourselves whether war-making isn’t now America’s most advanced product.

Nick Turse is the associate editor and research director of Tomdispatch.com. He has written for the Los Angeles Times, the San Francisco Chronicle, Adbusters, the Nation, and regularly for Tomdispatch.com. His first book, The Complex: How the Military Invades Our Everyday Lives, an exploration of the new military-corporate complex in America, was recently published by Metropolitan Books. His website is Nick Turse.com.

Manufactured Famine

1

By George Monbiot | In his book Late Victorian Holocausts, Mike Davis tells the story of the famines that sucked the guts out of India in the 1870s. The hunger began when a drought, caused by El Nino, killed the crops on the Deccan plateau. As starvation bit, the viceroy, Lord Lytton, oversaw the export to England of a record 6.4 million hundredweight of wheat. While Lytton lived in imperial splendour and commissioned, among other extravangances, “the most colossal and expensive meal in world history”, between 12 and 29 million people died(1). Only Stalin manufactured a comparable hunger.

Now a new Lord Lytton is seeking to engineer another brutal food grab. As Tony Blair’s favoured courtier, Peter Mandelson often created the impression that he would do anything to please his master. Today he is the European trade commissioner. From his sumptuous offices in Brussels and Strasbourg, he hopes to impose a treaty which will permit Europe to snatch food from the mouths of some of the world’s poorest people.

Seventy per cent of the protein eaten by the people of Senegal comes from fish(2). Traditionally cheaper than other animal products, it sustains a population which ranks close to the bottom of the human development index. One in six of the working population is employed in the fishing industry; some two-thirds of these workers are women(3). Over the past three decades, their means of subsistence has started to collapse as other nations have plundered Senegal’s stocks.

The European Union has two big fish problems. One is that, partly as a result of its failure to manage them properly, its own fisheries can no longer meet European demand. The other is that its governments won’t confront their fishing lobbies and decommission all the surplus boats. The EU has tried to solve both problems by sending its fishermen to West Africa. Since 1979 it has struck agreements with the government of Senegal, granting our fleets access to its waters. As a result, Senegal’s marine ecosystem has started to go the same way as ours. Between 1994 and 2005, the weight of fish taken from the country’s waters fell from 95,000 tons to 45,000 tons. Muscled out by European trawlers, the indigenous fishery is crumpling: the number of boats run by local people has fallen by 48% since 1997(4).

In a recent report on this pillage, ActionAid shows that fishing families which once ate three times a day are now eating only once or twice. As the price of fish rises, their customers also go hungry. The same thing has happened in all the west African countries with which the EU has maintained fisheries agreements(5,6). In return for wretched amounts of foreign exchange, their primary source of protein has been looted.

The government of Senegal knows this, and in 2006 it refused to renew its fishing agreement with the EU. But European fishermen — mostly from Spain and France — have found ways round the ban. They have been registering their boats as Senegalese, buying up quotas from local fishermen and transferring catches at sea from local boats. These practices mean that they can continue to take the country’s fish, and have no obligation to land them in Senegal. Their profits are kept on ice until the catch arrives in Europe.

Mandelson’s office is trying to negotiate economic partnership agreements with African countries. They were supposed to have been concluded by the end of last year, but many countries, including Senegal, have refused to sign. The agreements insist that European companies have the right both to establish themselves freely on African soil, and to receive national treatment. This means that the host country is not allowed to discriminate between its own businesses and European companies. Senegal would be forbidden to ensure that its fish are used to sustain its own industry and to feed its own people. The dodges used by European trawlers would be legalised.

The UN’s Economic Commission for Africa has described the EU’s negotiations as “not sufficiently inclusive”. They suffer from a “lack of transparency” and from the African countries’ lack of capacity to handle the legal complexities(7). ActionAid shows that Mandelson’s office has ignored these problems, raised the pressure on reluctant countries and “moved ahead in the negotiations at a pace much faster than the [African nations] could handle.” If these agreements are forced on West Africa, Lord Mandelson will be responsible for another imperial famine.

This is one instance of the food colonialism which is again coming to govern the relations between rich counties and poor. As global food supplies tighten, rich consumers are pushed into competition with the hungry. Last week the environmental group WWF published a report on the UK’s indirect consumption of water, purchased in the form of food(8). We buy much of our rice and cotton, for example, from the Indus Valley, which contains most of Pakistan’s best farmland. To meet the demand for exports, the valley’s aquifers are being pumped out faster than they can be recharged. At the same time, rain and snow in the Himalayan headwaters have decreased, probably as a result of climate change. In some places, salt and other crop poisons are being drawn through the diminishing water table, knocking out farmland for good. The crops we buy are, for the most part, freely traded, but the unaccounted costs all accrue to Pakistan.

Now we learn that Middle Eastern countries, led by Saudi Arabia, are securing their future food supplies by trying to buy land in poorer nations. The Financial Times reports that Saudi Arabia wants to set up a series of farms abroad, each of which could exceed 100,000 hectares. Their produce would not be traded: it would be shipped directly to the owners. The FT, which usually agitates for the sale of everything, frets over “the nightmare scenario of crops being transported out of fortified farms as hungry locals look on.” Through “secretive bilateral agreements,” the paper reports, “the investors hope to be able to bypass any potential trade restriction that the host country might impose during a crisis.” (9)

Both Ethiopia and Sudan have offered the oil states hundreds of thousands of hectares(10,11). This is easy for the corrupt governments of these countries: in Ethiopia the state claims to own most of the land; in Sudan an envelope passed across the right desk magically transforms other people’s property into foreign exchange(12,13). But 5.6 million Sudanese and 10 million Ethiopians are currently in need of food aid. The deals their governments propose can only exacerbate such famines.

None of this is to suggest that the poor nations should not sell food to the rich. To escape from famine, countries must enhance their purchasing power. This often means selling farm products, and increasing their value by processing them locally. But there is nothing fair about the deals I have described. Where once they used gunboats and sepoys, the rich nations now use chequebooks and lawyers to seize food from the hungry. The scramble for resources has begun, but — in the short term at any rate — we will hardly notice. The rich world’s governments will protect themselves from the political cost of shortages, even if it means that other people must starve.

References:

1. Mike Davis, 2001. Late Victorian Holocausts: El Nino Famines and the Making of the Third World. Verso, London.

2. ActionAid, 11th August 2008. SelFISH Europe. http://www.illegal-fishing.info/uploads/ActionAidSelFISHEurope.pdf

3. ibid.

4. ibid.

5. Vlad M. Kaczynski and David L. Fluharty, March 2002. European policies in West Africa: who benefits from fisheries agreements? Marine Policy, Volume 26, Issue 2, pp75-93.
doi:10.1016/S0308-597X(01)00039-2

6. Tim Judah, 1st August 2001. The battle for West Africa’s fish. http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/africa/1464966.stm

7. UNECA, EPA Negotiations: African Countries Continental Review, African Trade Policy Centre, February 2007. Quoted by ActionAid, ibid.

8. Ashok Chapagain and Stuart Orr, August 2008. UK Water Footprint: the impact of the UK’s food
and fibre consumption on global water resources. Volume one. http://assets.panda.org/downloads/wwf_uk_footprint.pdf

9. Javier Blas and Andrew England, 19th August 2008. Foreign fields: Rich states look beyond their borders for fertile soil. Financial Times.

10. ibid.

11. Barney Jopson and Andrew England, 11th August 2008. Sudan woos investors to put $1bn in farming. Financial Times.

12. For discussions of how landrights in Africa are overruled, see:

Lorenzo Cotula, September 2007. Legal empowerment for local resource control. International Institute for Environment and Development. http://www.iied.org/pubs/pdfs/12542IIED.pdf

and:

13. Camilla Toulmin, 2006. Securing Land and Property Rights in Africa: Improving the
Investment Climate. Chapter 2.3 of the Global Competitiveness Report, World Economic Forum, Switzerland.

Could Iris Scans Stop a New Iraq Insurgency?

1

By Noah Shachtman | Iraq’s government and Sunni militias appear to be headed for a showdown. One of the things that just might keep a full-blown insurgency from erupting again, a leading expert in the region says, is a set of databases of fingerprints and irises, built by the U.S. military — and fed with data from Saddam.

The extra troops get all the credit, in the dumbed-down political debate. But one of the biggest reasons for Iraq’s turnaround was the decision by Sunnis — many of them former insurgents — to begin backing the U.S., instead. They were organized into local militias, called “Sons of Iraq,” and promised government jobs, in return for the service. And just to convince the Sunnis that American forces had their best interests at heart, we they fed ’em a steady diet of anti-Shi’a propaganda.

But the jobs never completely materialized. And Iraq’s largely Shi’ite national government is slamming down on the Sons of Iraq, with apparently American backing. “Our goal is that by June 2009, the Sons of Iraq are out of business,” Lt. Col. Jeffrey Kulmayer said over the weekend.

“It is obvious where this road might end,” Shawn Brimley and Colin Kahl write in today’s Los Angeles Times. “The last time tens of thousands of armed Sunni men were humiliated in Iraq — by disbanding the Baath Party and Iraqi army in May 2003 — an insurgency began, costing thousands of U.S. lives and throwing Iraq into chaos. Yet Maliki and his advisors risk provoking Iraq’s Sunni community into another round of violence.”

So what’s to stop another Sunni insurgency from boiling over? After all, “it doesn’t take 100,000 of these guys to revert to insurgents to cause big trouble. Remember, at the height of the insurgency, the U.S. estimated that there were 8,000-20,000 fighters,” Kahl — a Georgetown professor and a Center for a New American Security senior fellow — tells DANGER ROOM.

Well, The Government of Iraq can make good on its promises to hire these militiamen. Prime Minister Nouri Al-Maliki can hold provincial elections that give Sunnis a bigger stake in the political process. And Maliki can hope that the “high degree of ‘conflict exhaustion’ among Sunnis” stays high.

The Iraqi government has one other card to play, says Kahl, just back from the Middle East. Over the years, the American military in Iraq has assembled a series of biometric databases; hundreds of thousands of Iraqis’ fingerprints and irises are stored inside. In Fallujah and other Sunni-dominated cities, the only way to get in or out is within a U.S.-issued badge, complete with this biometric info; that restricts potential insurgents’ freedom of movement. The Sons of Iraq have also been iris- and fingerprint-scanned; that makes them easier to identify, if they’re caught rejoining the insurgent team. Finally, the databases — partially built on the backs on Saddam’s crminal records — “provides a useful enemies list to the Government of Iraq, if they chose to use it,” Kahl says. That echoes what U.S. Army Lieutenant Colonel John Velliquette told DANGER ROOM last year, when he said that the biometric info becomes “a hit list if it gets in the wrong hands.” Or the right ones.

U.S. Soldiers Executed Iraqis, Statements Say

1

By PAUL VON ZIELBAUER | In March or April 2007, three noncommissioned United States Army officers, including a first sergeant, a platoon sergeant and a senior medic, killed four Iraqi prisoners with pistol shots to the head as the men stood handcuffed and blindfolded beside a Baghdad canal, two of the soldiers said in sworn statements.

After the killings, the first sergeant – the senior noncommissioned officer of his Army company – told the other two to remove the men’s bloody blindfolds and plastic handcuffs, according to the statements made to Army investigators, which were obtained by The New York Times.

The statements and other court documents were provided by a person close to one of the soldiers in the unit who insisted on anonymity and who has an interest in the outcome of the legal proceedings.

After removing the blindfolds and handcuffs, the three soldiers shoved the four bodies into the canal, rejoined other members of their unit waiting in nearby vehicles and drove back to their combat outpost in southwest Baghdad, the statements said.

The soldiers, all from Company D, First Battalion, Second Infantry, 172nd Infantry Brigade, have not been charged with a crime. However, lawyers representing other members of the platoon who said they witnessed or heard the shootings, which were said to have occurred on a combat patrol west of Baghdad, said all three would probably be charged with murder.

The accounts of and confessions to the killings, by Sgt. First Class Joseph P. Mayo, the platoon sergeant, and Sgt. Michael P. Leahy Jr., Company D’s senior medic and an acting squad leader, were made in January in signed statements to Army investigators in Schweinfurt, Germany.

In their statements, Sergeants Mayo and Leahy each described killing at least one of the Iraqi detainees on instructions from First Sgt. John E. Hatley, who the soldiers said killed two of the detainees with pistol shots to the back of their heads. Sergeant Hatley’s civilian lawyer in Germany, David Court, did not respond to phone calls and e-mail messages Tuesday.

Last month, four other soldiers from Sergeant Hatley’s unit were charged with murder conspiracy for agreeing to go along with the plan to kill the four prisoners, in violation of military laws that forbid harming enemy combatants once they are disarmed and in custody.

In an Army evidentiary hearing on Tuesday in Vilseck, Germany, two of those soldiers – Specialists Steven A. Ribordy and Belmor G. Ramos – invoked their right against self-incrimination. Reached by telephone, James D. Culp, a civilian lawyer for one of the other two soldiers charged, Staff Sgt. Jess C. Cunningham, declined to comment. A lawyer for the fourth soldier, Sgt. Charles P. Quigley, could not be reached.

In their sworn statements, Sergeants Mayo and Leahy described the events that preceded the shooting of the Iraqi men, who apparently were Shiite fighters linked to the Mahdi Army militia, which controlled the West Rashid area of southwest Baghdad.

After taking small-arms fire, the patrol chased some men into a building, arresting them and finding several automatic weapons, grenades and a sniper rifle, they said. On the way to their combat outpost, Sergeant Hatley’s convoy was informed by Army superiors that the evidence to detain the Iraqis was insufficient, Sergeant Leahy said in his statement. The unit was told to release the men, according to the statement.

“First Sergeant Hatley then made the call to take the detainees to a canal and kill them,” Sergeant Leahy said, as retribution for the deaths of two soldiers from the unit: Staff Sgt. Karl O. Soto-Pinedo, who died from a sniper’s bullet, and Specialist Marieo Guerrero, killed by a roadside bomb.

“So the patrol went to the canal, and First Sergeant, Sgt. First Class Mayo and I took the detainees out of the back of the Bradley, lined them up and shot them,” Sergeant Leahy said, referring to a Bradley fighting vehicle. “We then pushed the bodies into the canal and left.”

Sergeant Mayo, in his statement, attributed his decision to kill the men to “anger,” apparently at the recent deaths of his two comrades.

Sergeant Leahy, in his statement, said, “I’m ashamed of what I’ve done,” later adding: “When I did it, I thought I was doing it for my family. Now I realize that I’m hurting my family more now than if I wouldn’t have done it.”

Fascism Anyone?

0

Fascism’s principles are wafting in the air today, surreptitiously masquerading as something else, challenging everything we stand for.

By Laurence W. Britt | The cliché that people and nations learn from history is not only overused, but also overestimated; often we fail to learn from history, or draw the wrong conclusions. Sadly, historical amnesia is the norm.

 We are two-and-a-half generations removed from the horrors of Nazi Germany, although constant reminders jog the consciousness. German and Italian fascism form the historical models that define this twisted political worldview. Although they no longer exist, this worldview and the characteristics of these models have been imitated by protofascist1 regimes at various times in the twentieth century. Both the original German and Italian models and the later protofascist regimes show remarkably similar characteristics. Although many scholars question any direct connection among these regimes, few can dispute their visual similarities.

 Beyond the visual, even a cursory study of these fascist and protofascist regimes reveals the absolutely striking convergence of their modus operandi. This, of course, is not a revelation to the informed political observer, but it is sometimes useful in the interests of perspective to restate obvious facts and in so doing shed needed light on current circumstances.

 For the purpose of this perspective, I will consider the following regimes: Nazi Germany, Fascist Italy, Franco’s Spain, Salazar’s Portugal, Papadopoulos’s Greece, Pinochet’s Chile, and Suharto’s Indonesia. To be sure, they constitute a mixed bag of national identities, cultures, developmental levels, and history. But they all followed the fascist or protofascist model in obtaining, expanding, and maintaining power. Further, all these regimes have been overthrown, so a more or less complete picture of their basic characteristics and abuses is possible.

 Analysis of these seven regimes reveals fourteen common threads that link them in recognizable patterns of national behavior and abuse of power. These basic characteristics are more prevalent and intense in some regimes than in others, but they all share at least some level of similarity.

   1. Powerful and continuing expressions of nationalism. From the prominent displays of flags and bunting to the ubiquitous lapel pins, the fervor to show patriotic nationalism, both on the part of the regime itself and of citizens caught up in its frenzy, was always obvious. Catchy slogans, pride in the military, and demands for unity were common themes in expressing this nationalism. It was usually coupled with a suspicion of things foreign that often bordered on xenophobia.

   2. Disdain for the importance of human rights. The regimes themselves viewed human rights as of little value and a hindrance to realizing the objectives of the ruling elite. Through clever use of propaganda, the population was brought to accept these human rights abuses by marginalizing, even demonizing, those being targeted. When abuse was egregious, the tactic was to use secrecy, denial, and disinformation.

    3. Identification of enemies/scapegoats as a unifying cause. The most significant common thread among these regimes was the use of scapegoating as a means to divert the people’s attention from other problems, to shift blame forfailures, and to channel frustration in controlled directions. The methods of choice–relentless propaganda and disinformation–were usually effective. Often the regimes would incite “spontaneous” acts against the target scapegoats, usually communists, socialists, liberals, Jews, ethnic and racial minorities, traditional national enemies, members of other religions, secularists, homosexuals, and“terrorists.” Active opponents of these regimes were inevitably labeled as terrorists and dealt with accordingly.

   4. The supremacy of the military/avid militarism. Ruling elites always identified closely with the military and the industrial infrastructure that supported it. A disproportionate share of national resources was allocated to the military, even when domestic needs were acute. The military was seen as an expression of nationalism, and was used whenever possible to assert national goals, intimidate other nations, and increase the power and prestige of the ruling elite.

   5. Rampant sexism. Beyond the simple fact that the political elite and the national culture were male-dominated, these regimes inevitably viewed women as second-class citizens. They were adamantly anti-abortion and also homophobic. These attitudes were usually codified in Draconian laws that enjoyed strong support by the orthodox religion of the country, thus lending the regime cover for its abuses.

    6. A controlled mass media. Under some of the regimes, the mass media were under strict direct control and could be relied upon never to stray from the party line. Other regimes exercised more subtle power to ensure media orthodoxy. Methods included the control of licensing and access to resources, economic pressure, appeals to patriotism, and implied threats. The leaders of the mass media were often politically compatible with the power elite. The result was usually success in keeping the general public unaware of the regimes’ excesses.

    7. Obsession with national security. Inevitably, a national security apparatus was under direct control of the ruling elite. It was usually an instrument of oppression, operating in secret and beyond any constraints. Its actions were justified under the rubric of protecting “national security,” and questioning its activities was portrayed as unpatriotic or even treasonous.

   8. Religion and ruling elite tied together. Unlike communist regimes, the fascist and protofascist regimes were never proclaimed as godless by their opponents. In fact, most of the regimes attached themselves to the predominant religion of the country and chose to portray themselves as militant defenders of that religion. The fact that the ruling elite’s behavior was incompatible with the precepts of the religion was generally swept under the rug. Propaganda kept up the illusion that the ruling elites were defenders of the faith and opponents of the “godless.” A perception was manufactured that opposing the power elite was tantamount to an attack on religion.

    9. Power of corporations protected. Although the personal life of ordinary citizens was under strict control, the ability of large corporations to operate in relative freedom was not compromised. The ruling elite saw the corporate structure as a way to not only ensure military production (in developed states), but also as an additional means of social control. Members of the economic elite were often pampered by the political elite to ensure a continued mutuality of interests, especially in the repression of “have-not” citizens.

   10. Power of labor suppressed or eliminated. Since organized labor was seen as the one power center that could challenge the political hegemony of the ruling elite and its corporate allies, it was inevitably crushed or made powerless. The poor formed an underclass, viewed with suspicion or outright contempt. Under some regimes, being poor was considered akin to a vice.

   11. Disdain and suppression of intellectuals and the arts. Intellectuals and the inherent freedom of ideas and expression associated with them were anathema to these regimes. Intellectual and academic freedom were considered subversive to national security and the patriotic ideal. Universities were tightly controlled; politically unreliable faculty harassed or eliminated. Unorthodox ideas or expressions of dissent were strongly attacked, silenced, or crushed. To these regimes, art and literature should serve the national interest or they had no right to exist.

   12. Obsession with crime and punishment. Most of these regimes maintained Draconian systems of criminal justice with huge prison populations. The police were often glorified and had almost unchecked power, leading to rampant abuse. “Normal” and political crime were often merged into trumped-up criminal charges and sometimes used against political opponents of the regime. Fear, and hatred, of criminals or “traitors” was often promoted among the population as an excuse for more police power.

   13. Rampant cronyism and corruption. Those in business circles and close to the power elite often used their position to enrich themselves. This corruption worked both ways; the power elite would receive financial gifts and property from the economic elite, who in turn would gain the benefit of government favoritism. Members of the power elite were in a position to obtain vast wealth from other sources as well: for example, by stealing national resources. With the national security apparatus under control and the media muzzled, this corruption was largely unconstrained and not well understood by the general population.

   14. Fraudulent elections. Elections in the form of plebiscites or public opinion polls were usually bogus. When actual elections with candidates were held, they would usually be perverted by the power elite to get the desired result. Common methods included maintaining control of the election machinery, intimidating an disenfranchising opposition voters, destroying or disallowing legal votes, and, as a last resort, turning to a judiciary beholden to the power elite.

 Does any of this ring alarm bells? Of course not. After all, this is America, officially a democracy with the rule of law, a constitution, a free press, honest elections, and a well-informed public constantly being put on guard against evils. Historical comparisons like these are just exercises in verbal gymnastics. Maybe, maybe not.
 

“When facism comes to America, it will be wrapped in the American flag.” – Huey Long

                                Notes:

 1. Defined as a “political movement or regime tending toward or imitating Fascism”–Webster’s Unabridged Dictionary.

                                References

                                Andrews, Kevin. Greece in the Dark. Amsterdam: Hakkert, 1980.
                                Chabod, Frederico. A History of Italian Fascism. London: Weidenfeld, 1963.
                                Cooper, Marc. Pinochet and Me. New York: Verso, 2001.
                                Cornwell, John. Hitler as Pope. New York: Viking, 1999.
                                de Figuerio, Antonio. Portugal–Fifty Years of Dictatorship.
                                    New York:Holmes& Meier, 1976.
                                Eatwell, Roger. Fascism, A History. New York: Penguin, 1995.
                                Fest, Joachim C. The Face of the Third Reich. New York: Pantheon, 1970.
                                Gallo, Max. Mussolini’s Italy. New York: MacMillan, 1973.
                                Kershaw, Ian. Hitler (two volumes). New York: Norton, 1999.
                                Laqueur, Walter. Fascism, Past, Present, and Future. New York: Oxford, 1996.
                                Papandreau, Andreas. Democracy at Gunpoint. New York: Penguin Books, 1971.
                                Phillips, Peter. Censored 2001: 25 Years of Censored News. New York: Seven
                                Stories. 2001.
                                Sharp, M.E. Indonesia Beyond Suharto. Armonk, 1999.
                                Verdugo, Patricia. Chile, Pinochet, and the Caravan of Death. Coral Gables,
                                Florida: North-South Center Press, 2001.
                              Yglesias, Jose. The Franco Years. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1977.

Copyright: Free Inquiry Magazine

Reinventing the Evil Empire

2

By Stephen Lendman – RINF | For the West, everything changed but stayed the same, hard-wired and in place. Things just lay dormant in the shadows during the Yeltsin years, certain to reemerge once a more resolute Russian leader took over. If not Vladimir Putin, someone else little different.

Russia is back, proud and reassertive, and not about to roll over for America. Especially in Eurasia. For Washington, it’s back to the future, the new Cold War, and reinventing the Evil Empire, but this time for greater stakes and with much larger threats to world peace. Conservatives lost their influence. Neocons are weakened but still dominant. The Israeli Lobby and Christian Right drive them. Conflict is preferred over diplomacy, and most Democrats go along to look tough on “terrorism.” Notably their standard-bearer, vying with McCain to be toughest.

Ten former Warsaw Pact and Soviet Republics are part of NATO: the Czech Republic, Slovakia, Hungary,
Poland, Romania, Albania, Bulgaria, Estonia, Latvia, and Lithuania. In addition, Georgia and Ukraine seek
membership. Russia is strongly opposed. And now for greater reason after Poland (on August 20) formally
agreed to allow offensive US “interceptor missiles” on its soil. A reported 96 short-range Patriot ones also
plus a permanent garrison of US troops – 110 transfered from Germany, according to some accounts.
Likely more to follow. In addition, Washington agreed to defend Poland whether or not it joins NATO, so that heightens tensions further.

The Warsaw signing followed the Czech Republic’s April
willingness to install “advanced tracking missile
defense radar” by 2012. In both instances, Russia
strongly objected, and on August 20 said it will
“react (and) not only through diplomatic protests.”
Both former Warsaw Pact countries are now targets. The
threat of nuclear war is heightened. The Bulletin of
the Atomic Scientists Doomsday Clock heads closer to
midnight – meaning “catastrophic destruction.” It’s no
joking matter.

The US media downplays the threat and hails a pact
Zbigniew Brzezinski (a Polish national, former Carter
National Security Advisor, and key Obama foreign
policy strategist) calls a watershed in the two
countries’ relationship – “This changes the strategic
relationship between the US and Poland. There is a
clear and explicit understanding that if there are
negative consequences of stationing the missile
shield, the US will come to Poland’s defense.”

On the one hand, a surprising statement from a man
critical of Bush administration policies, its failure
in Iraq, and the dangers of a widened Middle East war.
He fully understands the heightened potential for
world conflict but sounds dismissive of the threat.
On the other hand, he has bigger fish to fry and
apparently willing to wage big stakes on winning. The
Iraq war and Iran are distractions by his calculus.
The real Great Game embraces all Eurasia and assuring
America comes out dominant – not Russia, not China,
nor any rival US alliance.

The major media also downplay the dangers and explain
nothing about the high stakes. Instead they beat up on
Russia and highlight comments from Secretary Rice that
missiles aren’t “aimed in any way at Russia,” or White
House spokesperson Dana Perino saying: “In no way is
the president’s plan for missile defense aimed at
Russia. (It’s to) protect our European allies from any
rogue threats” that suggests Iran, but, clearly means
Russia, according to Hauke Ritz’s recent analysis in
Germany’s influential Leaves for German and
International Politics journal.

He explained that Iran’s missiles can’t reach Europe,
and that Washington rejected Russia’s proposed
Azerbaijan-based joint US-Russian anti-missile system
– to intercept and destroy Iranian missiles on launch.
He thus concluded that Washington’s scheme is for
offense, not defense. That it targets Russia, not
Iran, with Alaskan and other installations close to
Russia as further proof. He wrote: “The strategic
significance of the system consists of intercepting
those few dozen missiles Moscow (can launch) following
a first strike. (It’s) a crucial element….to develop
a nuclear first strike capacity against Russia. The
original plan is for….ten interceptor missiles in
Poland. But once….established, their number could be
easily increased.”

According to Ritz, Washington wants a missile system
that “guarantee(s a) US (edge) to carry out nuclear
war without (risking a) counter-strike.” It can then
be used for geopolitical advantage “to implement
national interests,” but it highlights the dangers of
possible nuclear confrontation and the catastrophic
fallout if it happens.

In an August 20 Veterans of Foreign Wars convention
address, Bush was essentially on this theme in
focusing on “terrorism” and saying: “We’re at war
against determined enemies, and we must not rest until
that war is won.” Georgia “stands for freedom around
the world, now the world must stand for freedom in
Georgia” – clearly linking Russia’s response with
“terrorism” and suggesting from his September 2001
address to a joint session of Congress and the America
people that: “Every nation, in every region, now has a
decision to make. Either you are with us, or you are
with the terrorists.” Any that are “will be
regarded….as a hostile state.” Clearly, Russia is on
his mind just as Moscow is carefully evaluating his
threat.

The BBC echoed the US media, covers all the bases,
mentioned the Iranian threat, singles out Russia,
obfuscates facts about the conflict, sides with
Washington and Poland on the new missile deal, and
quoted Polish President Lech Kaczynski saying: “no one
(with) good intentions towards us and (the West)
should” fear the missiles. It also cited a miraculous
turnaround in sentiment saying two-thirds of Poles now
favor them. Astonishing since overwhelming opposition
was recently evident, so it’s hard imagining it
shifted so fast.

High-Octane Russia Bashing – The Dominant US Media

The Wall Street Journal asserted that Poles “see the
US as their strongest ally” given “two centuries of
invasions and partitioning by Russia” and other
European powers. It also highlighted Russia’s “nuclear
threat” (not Iran’s) in a Gabriel Schoenfeld article
painting Russia as an aggressor and America aiding its
European allies.

Schoenfeld (a senior editor of the hawkish,
pro-Israeli Commentary magazine) cites “Moscow’s
willingness to crush Georgia with overwhelming force
(and claims) the Kremlin has 10 times as many tactical
(short-range) warheads as the US.” The “shift in the
nuclear imbalance….helped embolden the bear.” He
ignores America’s overall nuclear superiority, but it
hardly matters as both countries combined have around
97% of these weapons (an estimated 27,000 world total)
according to experts like Helen Caldicott – more than
enough to destroy the planet many times over.

Nonetheless, Schoenfeld supports the Polish agreement
in the face of a “pugnacious Russia (determined to
acquire) economic and military power (and) not afraid
to use threats and force to get (its) way (with)
nuclear weapons central to the Russian geopolitical
calculus.” It’s reminiscent of “the dark days of
communist yore (and captures the threat of what) we
and Russia’s neighbors are up against.”

For the moment, anti-Iranian rhetoric has subsided
with Russia the new dominant villian. En route to the
NATO Brussels August 18 meeting, Secretary Rice called
Russia’s action against Georgia a “very dangerous game
and perhaps one the Russians want to reconsider.”
Russian “aggression” is the buzzword, and the media
dutifully trumpet it.

So do the presidential candidates. John McCain was
especially belligerent in denouncing “Russian
aggression” and calling on Moscow to “immediately and
unconditionally cease its military operations and
withdraw all forces from sovereign Georgian
territory.” He called for emergency Security Council
and NATO meetings in hopes condemnation would follow
and “NATO (can act) to stabiliz(e) this very dangerous
situation.” He also wants Russia expelled from the G-8
nations and an end to 10 years of partnership and
cooperation.

Barak Obama first said that Russia’s “aggression” must
not stand and denounced “Russian atrocities.” He then
softened his tone somewhat with: “Now is the time for
action – not just words….Russia must halt its
violation of Georgian airspace and withdraw its ground
forces from Georgia, with international monitors to
verify that these obligations are met.” But expect
those comments to harden as Democrats meet in Denver,
and the party’s nominee will likely match his
opponent’s tough stance. Or at least try under a
slogan of “Securing America’s Future” to advance the
nation’s interests in the world. Beating up on Russia
is now fair game and made easier with lockstep media
support.

The Wall Street Journal is more hostile than most, and
practically frothed in its August 16 – 17 weekend
edition. It called for “Making Putin Pay (and) Turning
Russia’s Georgian rout into a political defeat.” It
cited Russian aggression “to remove President
Saakasvili from the office to which he was elected in
2004 (and to) overthrow a democratic government.”

It called on “western authorities (to) explore the
vulnerability of Russian assets abroad (or) at least
make life difficult for the holders of those assets.”
The Journal might remember the billions of US fixed
income and other investments Russia holds – although
the country’s Central Bank reported late July that it
pared its $100 billion in US “mortgage bonds” to $50
billion early in the year. The US Treasury reports
that Russia holds around $36 billion of Treasury
securities with considerably more in private hands.

The Journal then compared Russia to China and managed
a slap at both. It said: “In the world of global
commerce….China calculated that….staging an
Olympic extravaganza (could enhance its) ambivalent
reputation….By contrast, the Putin
government….seems to believe its power grows in sync
with its reputation as an international pariah, an
outsider state,” and George Bush added that “Russia
has damaged its credibility and its relations with the
nations of the free world” – with the Journal writer
hardly blinking at such brazen hypocrisy.

Nor did Journal editorial board member Matthew
Kaminski in his headlined piece: “Russia Is Still a
Hungry Empire” without a hint about the Soviet Union’s
bloodless 1991 dissolution now down the memory hole in
light of today’s inflammatory headlines.

Kaminski highlights “Russian tanks rolling through
Georgia (with) images of Chechnya in 1994 and ’99,
Vilnius ’91, Afghanistan ’79, Prague ’68, Hungary ’56”
and before that Poland, the Baltics and other Eastern
European states. “The war in Georgia marks an easy
return to territorial expansion and attempted regional
dominance.”

Boris Yeltsin “tried to give Russians an alternative
narrative. (He) put forward democracy as a unifying
and legitimizing idea for the new Russian state.” But
that was swept away when “Putin took over.” He’s
unresponsive to the idea of “partnership with the West
and freedom at home.” He aims to force “young
democracies around Russia….back into Moscow’s sphere
of influence….The worldview of a Russian nationalist
is hard for outsiders to comprehend,” and for Kaminski
one that mustn’t be allowed to stand.

Nor for other Journal contributors daily (in op-eds
and editorials) with some of the most outlandish
attack journalism heard since before Gorbachev. Claims
that “Kremlin capitalism is a threat to the West….by
using its market strength in oil and gas resources to
strong-arm its neighbors and outmaneuver the US and
EU.” And that Russia’s real aim “is to replace a
pro-western government with a new Russian
satellite….reminiscent of the Brezhnev doctrine.
(It’s) part of a broader campaign (to annex new
territory, expand the Russian empire, conduct) cyber
attacks against the Baltic states, (assassinate
enemies, and use) economic intimidation (through)
cutoffs of Russian oil and gas shipments to Ukraine
and the Czech Republic….It is important that Moscow
pays a concrete and tangible price for its latest
aggression, at least comparable to (what) it paid for
the 1979 invasion of Afghanistan.”

The New York Times is more measured but, on August 19,
highlighted “Survivors in Georgia Tell of Ethnic
Killings” with suggestions of “ethnic cleansing” – a
practice that “haunted the borderlands of the old
Soviet bloc.” Villages were “burned and houses broken;
unburied bodies lay rotting; fresh graves were dug in
gardens and basements….most victims interviewed
(were) ethnic Georgians….(In central Georgian)
villages, some killings were carried out for
revenge….some (involved) theft (and still others)
seemed to be that the power balance was shifting, away
from ethnic Georgians to the Ossetian separatists and
their Russian backers.”

Independent reporters on the ground contradicted The
Times and similar US media accounts. One wrote:
“Georgians living in several of the villages said the
Russians occupying their land had treated them well,
done nothing to encourage them to leave and offered
the only protection available from the South Ossestian
militias they feared most” and perhaps their own army
in an effort to inflict harm and blame it on Russia.

On August 21, The Times headlined: “US Sees Much to
Fear in a Hostile Russia (by) usher(ing) in a
sustained period of renewed animosity with the
West….problems extend(ing) far beyond (arms deals
with) Syria and the mountains of Georgia.” Others with
“anti-American states like Iran and Venezuela.”
Pressuring US “military bases in Central
Asia….counterterrorism, Hamas” and numerous other
issues. Obama’s chief Russia advisor, Stanford
University professor Michael McFaul, was quoted saying
Russia appears intent on “disrupt(ing) the
international order” and can do it. They’re “the
hegemon in that region and we are not and that’s a
fact.”

“Russia has all the leverage,” according to Carnegie
Moscow Center’s Masha Lipman (with) potential for
causing headaches” if it chooses – in the region, the
UN, on Iran, Zimbabwe, and to halt “any kind of
coercive actions, like economic sanctions or anything
else,” according to former National Security Council
advisor Peter Feaver. An old post-Cold War concern is
now arisen. Russia is now “a spoiler.”

An August 21 AP report cites an example in its
headlined piece” “Russia blocks Georgia’s main (oil)
port city” of Poti and continues to hold positions
around Gori and Igoeti….30 miles west
of….Tbilisi.”

Reports from Other Sources

On August 21, Russia Today reported that “Abkhazia
rallie(d) for independence (and) the Abkhazian
Parliament has approved an official appeal to Russia
to recognize its independence.” Tens of thousands
rallied in support, and on August 23, Reuters reported
that South Ossetia did as well and its president,
Eduard Kokoity, plans to ask Russia and the
international community for recognition. Russia’s
Deputy Federation Council Speaker, Svetlana Orlova,
told the rally that “Russia is always with you and
will never leave you in the lurch.”

On August 23, The New York Times reported that “the
Kremlin is nearing formal recognition of South Ossetia
and Abkhazia, possibly as early as next week.”
Apparently likely according to Russian Regional
Development Minister, Dmitry Kozak, who told Itar-Tass
“support is likely (and) that after all the events
that have occurred, one should not expect otherwise.”

On August 21, Abkhazian President Sergey Bagapsh
“appealed to Russia and to governments of other
countries to recognize Abkhazia’s independence,” for
both his province and South Ossetia. On August 20,
Interfax reported that the Russian Federation Council
(Russia’s upper House of parliament) is prepared to
recognize both provinces’ independence if their people
“express such a will….and if the Russian president
makes a relevant decision on this score,” according to
Federation Council Chairman Sergei Mironov.

On August 25, Russia Today reported that (in
emergency session) the Federation Council unanimously
voted to ask President Medvedev to recognize Abkhazian
and South Ossetian independence. Both province
presidents addressed the chamber and “again said they
will never agree to remain within Georgia” and are
more entitled to independence than Kosovo. Konstantin
Zatulin, deputy head of the Duma Committee for
International Affairs in Russia’s State Duma, its
lower chamber, stated that his body “most probably”
will go along.

At the same time, tensions remain high. Both sides
continue hostile accusations. Russia maintains it’s
conducting an orderly withdrawal “in accordance with
the international agreements (to their) previous
(places) of deployment,” according to Col. Gen.
Anatoly Nogovitsyn, deputy chief of Russia’s General
Staff. US military officials at first said they saw no
significant pullback. On August 22 with a clear
withdrawal underway, the International Herald Tribune
reported that the “US and France say Russia is not
complying” with the cease fire.

Russia is observing a 1999 joint Russian-S.
Ossetian-N. Ossetian-Georgian agreement prepared by
the Joint Control Commission, an international South
Ossetian monitoring body. It lets Russian troops
secure a corridor five miles beyond either side of
South Ossetia’s border that extends into Georgia. It
also allows Russian peacekeepers to operate under the
auspices of the Commonwealth of Independent States.

On August 23, RIA Novosti reported that Nogovitsyn
said Russian forces will patrol Georgia’s Black Sea
Poti port as “envisaged in the international
agreement. Poti is outside of the security zone,” he
said, “but that does not mean we will sit behind a
fence watching them riding around in Hummers.” Nor
allow Georgia to rearm for more aggression as Russia
suspects, and that Georgia’s deputy defense minister,
Batu Kutelia, admitted doing initially. On August 22,
he told the Financial Times that his government
attacked the S. Ossetian capital, Tskhinvali, and
attempted to seize it.

On August 22, Nogovitsyn heightened tensions by
claiming Georgia is now preparing for new military
action against Abkhazia and South Ossetia. “We have
registered an increase in (Georgian) reconnaissance
activities and preparations for armed actions in the
Georgian-South Ossetian conflict zone.” As a result,
he said that Russia reserves the right to maintain
peacekeepers in both provinces. For its part, RIA
Novosti reports that America now refuses to
participate with Russia in “NATO’s Operation Active
Endeavour naval antiterrorism exercise,” according to
a Russian Black Sea Fleet source. The announcement
came after Russia’s NATO envoy, Dmitry Rogozin, said
his country was “temporarily suspending military
cooperation with NATO until a political decision on
relations” between the two nations had been resolved.

Also on August 22, the Israeli Ynetnews.com published
a Russian daily Kommersant interview with Washington’s
new Moscow ambassador, John Beyrle, sure to embarrass
his superiors. He called Russia’s response justified
after its troops came under attack. “Now we see
Russian forces which responded to attacks on Russian
peacekeepers in South Ossetia, legitimately….” He
went on to criticize Russia’s over-reaction and warned
about its impact on US – Russia relations as well as
investor confidence. Nonetheless, his first comment is
telling and quite contrary to everything from
Washington and biting anti-Russian media responses.

Finally on August 23, Russia Today reported that the
“local (S. Ossetian and Abkhazian) population (said)
they fear Georgia might repeat its regional
aggression. They also (want) Russian troops to stay in
the area to shield them from any possible attacks.”
Russia has set up 18 S. Ossetia peacekeeping posts and
plans a similar number in Abkhazia “to deter looters
and the transportation of arms and ammunition.”

All the News Not Fit to Print

Not a major media hint that Georgia is a US vassal
state. That its military is an extension of the
Pentagon. That its aggression was manufactured in
Washington. That it’s well-supplied and trained by
America and Israel. That pipeline geopolitics is
central. Beating up on Russia as well. Diverting
Moscow from any planned intervention against Iran.
Even enlisting Russia’s cooperation – not to sell Iran
sophisticated S-300 air defense missile systems and
agreeing to tougher sanctions in return for perhaps
Washington deferring on Georgian and Ukrainian NATO
admission and recognizing S. Ossetian and Abkhazian
independence. Perhaps more as well to put off greater
confrontation for later under a new administration.

Clearly, however, the fuse is lit. It has been for
some time. It relates to everything strategic about
this vital area with its immense energy and other
resources as well neutralizing Russia’s power as
America’s top rival and key Eurasian competitor.

Controlling the region’s oil and gas is crucial and
what Michel Chossudovsky explains in his August 22
article titled: “The Eurasian Corridor: Pipeline
Geopolitics and the New Cold War.” He calls the
Caucasus crisis “intimately related to the control
over energy pipeline and transportation corridors (and
cites) evidence that the Georgian (August 7)
attack….was carefully planned (in) High level
consultations (between) US and NATO officials” months
in advance. On August 23, RIA Novosti said a Russian
security source accused Georgia of involvement a year
ago in “coordinat(ion) with NATO’s plans to strengthen
its (Black Sea) naval presence.”

Chossudovsky discusses America’s (1999) “Silk Road
Strategy: The Trans-Eurasian Security System (as) an
essential building block of (post-Cold War) US foreign
policy.” Proposed in House legislation but never
enacted, it was for “an energy and transport corridor
network linking Western Europe to Central Asia and
eventually to the Far East.” It aims to integrate
South Caucasus and Central Asian nations “into the US
sphere of influence.” It involves “militariz(ing) the
Eurasian corridor,” much like Security and Prosperity
Partnership plans are for North America.

Efforts are largely directed against Russia, China and
Iran as well as other Eastern-allied states. It’s to
turn all Eurasia into a “free market” paradise, secure
it for capital, assure US dominance, control its
resources, exploit its people, transform all its
nations into American vassals, and likely aim to
dismantle Russia’s huge landmass if that idea ever
comes to fruition.

Russia, however, isn’t standing idle and is partnered
in two strategic alliances:

— the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) since
June 2001 along with China, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan,
Tajikistan, Uzbekistan with Iran in observer status.
It defines its goals as: “good neighborly relations;”
promoting “effective cooperation in politics, trade
and economy, science and technology” and more as well
as “ensur(ing) peace, security and stability in the
region.” Given NATO’s potential threat, its main
purpose is military; and

— the Collective Security Treaty Organization (CSTO)
since 2003 “in close liaison with the SCO” with a
heavy emphasis on security against NATO Eurasian
expansionism; its members include: Russia, Armenia,
Belarus, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, and
Uzbekistan.

The stakes are huge as both sides prepare to confront
them. All part of the new Cold War and Great Game.
Reinventing the Evil Empire and beating up on Russia
as part of it. Risking a potential nuclear
confrontation as well and what a new US president will
inherit with no assurance a Democrat will be any more
able than a Republican. And with a global economic
crisis unresolved, either one may resort to the age
old strategy of stoking fear, going to war, hoping it
will stimulate the economy, and be able to divert
public concerns away from lost jobs, home
foreclosures, and a whole array of other unaddressed
issues.

In early 2003, it worked. Will 2009 be a repeat? Will
it deepen what author Kevin Phillips calls “the global
crisis of American capitalism?” Will the Doomsday
Clock strike midnight? It moved two minutes closer on
January 17, 2007 to five minutes to the hour. It cited
27,000 nuclear weapons, 2000 ready to launch in
minutes. It said: “We stand at the brink of a second
nuclear age. Not since….Hiroshima and Nagasaki has
the world faced such perilous choices.” It said the
situation is “dire.” It called for immediate
preventive action. Its message went unheeded, and
conditions today have worsened. The high Eurasian
stakes up things further, and neither side so far is
blinking.

The Contradiction of Choice from the Government

0
London Progressive Journal | Buzzwords abound in the rhetoric of politicians and never more so than when the talk is of public sector reform. Of the current phrases spewing forth ‘choice’ and ‘empowerment’ are two of the favourites but whose choice and whose empowerment? And while MP’s try to frame these words as synonyms of ‘public benefit’, is choice always a good thing?

Health and education are the main areas where politicians see choice as the best way of improving services. Choosing where and what treatment to have and which school to send your children to are policies which both the Labour and Conservative parties are pursuing. This year’s Darzi review made patients’ rights the focus of change, proposing that patients’ views on the quality of care should have an impact on future funding, with bonuses for those GPs and hospitals providing the best services. Furthermore, the results of patient satisfaction should be published creating a form of NHS league table allowing patients to choose at which GP or hospital they wish to receive their treatment.

Parents are continually told that by being able to choose which school to send their children to they are getting a better deal from state education. Government ministers eulogise choice as the best way to match a child’s educational needs to the school that is best placed to cater for them.

Choice as prescribed by this government, however, leads to centralisation, destruction of communities, privatisation and the marginalisation of the poorest from the process. Their legacy of choice will be less choice.

Polyclinics are a perfect example of this. Patients are told that these super-surgeries will lead to more choice but one key choice will be removed: the choice to go to your community hospital or GP. Elderly patients, who frequently need to seek medical advice, will see their relationships with their doctor destroyed and will be forced to travel impractical distances.

NHS league tables, while appearing to increase patient choice, are in reality just another way of imposing more targets. Moreover, if patients do utilize them to make decisions about which hospital to go to they will find that choice is removed. A hospital which scores poorly in the table will receive less funding, therefore their results will get worse and fewer patients will choose them. As this spiral continues services will have to be closed down as they will no longer be efficient and then you no longer have a choice.

Choices can also be confusing, stressful and in the end you can always make the wrong one. When it comes to medicine my knowledge is possibly not as comprehensive as that of a qualified and experienced practitioner. I would, therefore, rather know that all hospitals and surgeries are clean and friendly and then allow my GP to refer me to the nearest one where I could receive the required treatment.

The government’s promise to give every parent a choice of secondary school for their child was proved a myth again this year with figures showing the number of pupils getting their first choice of school has dropped. As parents understandably clamour to get their children in to schools high up the league tables the idea of going to your local school is becoming a nostalgic notion, with over half of children not going to their nearest school. Commuting to school is detrimental to community development and the environment.

Worse still any benefits of the current policy are going to the wealthiest. A report by Bristol University found that disadvantaged families miss out in the current system and even in the same postcodes poorer families end up at the lower-performing schools. Expanding the better performing schools may not be possible as “giving popular schools the freedom to expand does not mean they will do so. To the extent that a school’s position in the league tables depends on the attainment of its intake, schools may be unwilling to increase and potentially to dilute the quality of their student body,” said Professor Burgess.

Whilst ‘good’ schools cream off the best pupils the rest are left with lower league table results and less people ‘choosing’ to go there. Some of the best teachers may leave and in worse case scenarios the school maybe closed. As with hospitals the choice is then removed. Furthermore, expanding the best schools and shrinking or closing the rest as suggested will result in huge institutions where education suffers. American researchers are leading the way in analysing the impacts of school size.

Craig Howley, of Ohio University, and Robert Bickel, of Marshall University, looked at whether smaller schools could reduce the negative effects of poverty on student achievement. They found that the correlation between poverty and low achievement was ten times stronger in larger schools than in smaller ones. “Everyone knows that there is a strong association between social class and achievement and that this association works very much to the disadvantage of economically disadvantaged students,” Bickel told Education World. “The California research, however, had the virtue of demonstrating that this disadvantage was exaggerated as school size increased.”

One in seven pupils in England are now in a secondary school with over 1,500 students and the number of pupils in schools of over 2,000 has doubled since 1997. Promoting choice is driving these figures ever higher. If you thought a change of government would bring about a change of direction then, like in most areas, the differences between Labour and the Conservatives are negligible. In a letter this week to local residents, Philip Dunne, Conservative MP for South Shropshire wrote: ‘We believe that the best way to enhance the power of patients is through choice.

We will allow patients to choose, in consultation with their GP, where they get their secondary care. And we will ensure that money follows the patient so that hospitals and clinics and other care providers are paid according to the results they deliver for that patient.’ Once again, it seems, Labour equals Conservative and the public is left without an alternative.

When ministers speak of choice what they really mean is installing the practice of privatised competition in the public sector. Not even the most ardent free-market Tory would openly pursue a fully privatised health or education service; it would be electoral suicide. All politicians know this so instead they are doing it under the radar masked by the promise of choice.

Genuine, useful choice and universal empowerment are great things which should be strived for but do not confuse them with current government policy. Next time you get excited by the prospect of politicians offering you a choice think again as it’s not always a good thing.

Security services colluded in unlawful detention

1
Open Democracy | In a key intervention in the 42 days debate last month, the former head of MI5, Baroness Manningham-Buller stated: “arguments can be made to justify any time of detention, just as in other countries, although mercifully not here, they can be made to justify any method of interrogation.”

That remark elided key questions about how far the security services are complicit in interrogation practices overseas, questions which were raised anew in a High Court judgement on Thursday.

Lord Justice Thomas and Mr Justice Lloyd Jones ruled that British security services colluded in the unlawful detention and interrogation of Binyam Mohamed, a UK resident detained in Pakistan six years ago.

The judges stated:

By seeking to interview BM in the circumstances described and supplying information and questions for his interviews, the relationship between the United Kingdom government and the United States authorities was far beyond that of bystander or witness to the alleged wrongdoing.

The details of Mohamed’s treatment, as reported to the security services in 2002, are set out in a separate closed judgement. The court ruled that the Foreign Secretary has a duty to provide information that could support Mohamed’s case that he was tortured in Pakistan and Morocco before being sent to Guantanamo Bay.

The court stopped short of ordering the Foreign Secretary to hand over the information to Mohamed’s lawyers, in order to allow time for the national security implications of the ruling to be considered. A decision on this point is due at another hearing next week.

Clive Stafford Smith, director of Reprieve, who has represented Mohamed since 2005, said of the ruling:

This is a momentous decision. The Bush Administration committed crimes against Binyam Mohamed. The British government may have been Bush’s poodle, but the British courts remain bulldogs when it comes to human rights. Compelling the British government to release information that can prove Mr. Mohamed’s innocence is one obvious step towards making up for the years of torture that he has suffered. The next step is for the British government to demand an end to the charade against him in Guantánamo Bay, and return him home to Britain.

Two arrested in DNC protests

0

By Sue Lindsay | The first session of DNC Court was convened at 4:15 today in Denver County Court.

Four people appeared, but only two had been arrested in relation to convention protests.

The court was filled with more than a dozen deputies, prompting County Judge Brian Campbell to ask, “How come we got more law enforcement than we got prisoners?”

A number of deputies who normally aren’t assigned to court duty, as well as judges and other court staff, sat in on the first session to see how things were to be handled.

Four men were led into court in handcuffs and leg shackles.

Among them were two “John Does” who refused to give police their names and were arrested near 7th and Lawrence Streets for giving false information to an officer.

Denver County Judge John Marcucci advised the men that he couldn’t force them to give their names, but if they didn’t, he couldn’t set bond and they would remain in jail. Both men coughed up their identities.

Austin Hunter, 23, wearing a black T-shirt that read, “Spreading the Hardcore Reality.”

He pleaded not guilty, telling the judge, “I didn’t give them any information at all. So I guess not guilty.”

His bond was set at $100 on a charge of giving false information to an officer.

According to police, during a peaceful protest, they were dressed with their faces covered with cloths and bandannas. As police passed by, they ducked down and appeared to hide items behind a row of portable toilets. When approached by police, they refused to give their names or produce identification.

Frank Anello, Jr., 34, also pleaded guilty to the false information charge and to interference. His bail was set at $200.

Matthew Waldron also appeared on charges of disturbing the peace and trespass, but his beef took place at a restaurant on the 16th Street Mall and wasn’t related to the DNC. His bond was set at $100 on a charge of giving false information to an officer.

Another arrest also was not related to the DNC.

Shawn Jones, a transient, appeared on charges trespassing and panhandling at a gas station near 34th Avenue and Colorado Boulevard.

Dictatorial Power on War and Treaties

0

By Jacob G. Hornberger | If anyone still has any doubts about whether President Bush is exercising powers that any self-respecting dictator would relish, all he has to do is consider the military pact that Bush is entering into with Iraq. The pact involves the continued U.S. military occupation of Iraq as well as a date on which U.S. military forces will be expected to exit the country.

Let’s first place things in the context of the U.S. Constitution, the higher law that the American people have enacted that controls the conduct of federal officials, including the president.

One provision of the Constitution requires the president to secure a declaration of war from Congress prior to waging war against another nation. With respect to Iraq, everyone knows that Bush refused to do that. After unsuccessfully exploring the possibility of securing UN approval for his war (which is not in the Constitution), Bush unilaterally decided to wage war on Iraq without first securing the constitutionally required congressional declaration of war.

The Constitution also provides that the president shall have the “Power and with the Advice and Consent of the Senate, to make Treaties, provided two thirds of the Senators present concur.”

So, is President Bush complying with that provision of the Constitution with respect to his military pact with Iraq?

Why should he? If the Congress and the American people don’t care that he violates one important provision of the Constitution, why should the president care whether he violates other important provisions?

The president’s spokesman, Gordon Johndroe, set forth the president’s position at a recent press conference: “So it’s not a treaty, so it would not require Senate ratification or anything like that. It’s a bilateral agreement that would provide the authorities for our troops to operate in Iraq.”

So, there you have it. We now live in a country in which the ruler has the power to send the entire nation into war on his own initiative and then unilaterally bind the entire nation with a long-term military agreement with the conquered nation without any legislative approval.

If that’s not dictatorial power, what is?

Oh, by the way the Iraqi president is submitting the proposed military agreement with Bush to the Iraqi Parliament, as required by Iraqi law.

Mr. Hornberger is founder and president of The Future of Freedom Foundation.

Dem Convention Begins: Time To Suspend Disbelief

1

By Ruth Conniff | If the all-too-familiar sight of a slightly paunchy Joe Biden jogging to the podium, his white comb-over waving gently in the breeze (think “energy!”) to accept the job as Barack Obama’s Vice Presidential pick wasn’t enough to give you pause, there was the Bidenesque speech that followed. The “change” campaign is now co-chaired by one of the longest serving members of the Senate, who voted for the Iraq war (though he later repented), and who has a hesitant, ponderous style that doesn’t exactly accentuate the new-generation excitement of the Obama campaign.

Obama picked Biden for obvious reasons. Chief among them is the fear of looking weak on foreign policy. He now has an older white guy straight out of the Washington establishment–chair of the Foreign Relations Committee, three decades in the Senate–to back him up. He is also making an obvious play for the ever-elusive white, working class voters who started going Republican in the Reagan era. The Democrats have been trying to recapture them every since. Hence Biden’s heavy use of the words “Scranton” “Irish Catholic” and “kitchen table.” Maybe Biden will reassure these skittish voters. Stranger things have happened. (See Hillary Clinton’s transformation into a working class hero during the everlasting primary season).

But there are dangers in the Biden selection, too. It is, first of all, a defensive choice. Instead of leaning forward with a Tim Kaine, who redoubles Obama’s youth appeal, or a Wes Clark, who is willing to attack McCain by aiming, point blank, at the heart of his campaign–questioning whether his POW experience means he is entitled to sit in the White House–Obama chose someone he can throw in front critics who suggest that he is unready to deal with a foreign policy or national security crisis. Being on the defensive keep the “unready” charge alive. And the contrast between Biden and Obama does not favor Obama. When, in his speech, Biden talked about how amazing it was to see Obama arrive in the Senate and do “historic” work, “reaching across the aisle” to pass ethics reform, it mainly served to remind the audience what a short time Obama has spent there. To say he has accomplished a lot , legislatively, is a pretty big stretch.

Today, as the Democratic Convention begins, the party is making its traditional pitch to voters to suspend their disbelief. It began with an appeal emailed to supporters asking for small donations. There is a snazzy video clip of the nominee and his running mate talking about the small-donor revolution. The campaign, Biden says in the video, “is accountable only to the people.” Pay no attention to those corporate sky boxes.

The candidates look good together standing in front of matching American flags in their dark suits–Obama in a red tie and Biden in a blue one. As they talk in turns, nodding, arms folded, reinforcing each other on the importance of “change” and fighting the Republicans’ “Rove playbook” they seem to have their message together. “Change” is still the theme song. But the tone, as the convention pageant begins, is a little more somber.

Documents reveal PR push for Iraq war preceded intel findings

0

By Nick Juliano | New documents from within the Bush administration and US intelligence community during the run-up to the invasion of Iraq reveal that the White House began assembling a case for war before it had compiled the intel that ostensibly formed the basis of that case.

A new report on the documents from George Washington University’s National Security Archive also presents compelling evidence that the Bush administration pressured the CIA and other intelligence agencies to tailor their reports to back-up Bush’s desire to invade. The report suggests the bulk of this effort was run out of Vice President Dick Cheney’s office, backing up numerous other post-war examinations of the path to invasion that saw Cheney as the mastermind of the plan to oust Saddam Hussein.

The Archive published a July 2002 draft of a CIA “White Paper” on Iraq’s Weapons of Mass Destruction. The draft was prepared months before a National Intelligence Estimate on Saddam’s regime, which Congress did not demand until September, although the final “White Paper” released in October purportedly summarized that very NIE.

In addition to the Archive’s newly obtained documents, Dr. John Prados, who compiled the report, examined previous investigations of pre-war intelligence manipulation such as the recently completed Senate Intelligence Committee “Phase II” report on administration officials’ pre-war rhetoric and books on the subject such as former White House spokesman Scott McClellan’s memoir.

He concluded, in essence, that the Bush administration cherry picked intelligence to justify an invasion, that Tony Blair’s British government was complicit in producing shaky intelligence on Saddam’s WMDs, that administration figures — especially Cheney — pressured the CIA to give them what they wanted, and that intelligence undercutting the case for war was ignored in favor of less reliable sources who backed administration beliefs.

– The Phase II report on Bush administration public statements, in conjunction with the SSCI’s original July 2004 report on Iraq’s alleged Weapons of Mass Destruction, indicates that political manipulation extended beyond the intelligence itself to affect investigation of the intelligence failures on Iraq as well as the Bush administration’s use of that information.
– In conjunction with other recently declassified materials, the Phase II report shows that the Bush administration solicited intelligence then used to “substantiate” its public claims.
– A recently declassified draft of the CIA’s October 2002 white paper on Iraqi WMD programs demonstrates that that paper long pre-dated the compilation of the National Intelligence Estimate on Iraqi capabilities.
– The timing of the CIA’s draft white paper coincides with a previously available draft of the British Government’s white paper on Iraqi WMD, demonstrating that the Bush administration and the Tony Blair government began acting in concert to build support for an invasion of Iraq two to three months earlier than previously understood.
– A comparison of the CIA draft white paper with its publicly released edition shows that all the changes made were in the nature of strengthening its charges against Iraq by inserting additional alarming claims, in the manner of an advocacy, or public relations document. The draft and final papers show no evidence of intelligence analysis applied to the information contained. Similar comparison of the British white paper shows the same phenomenon at work.
– Declassified Pentagon documents demonstrate that the CIA white paper was modified in ways that conformed to the desires of the Undersecretary of Defense for Policy and his office, in much the same way that British documents indicate that country’s white paper was changed to conform to the desires of the Blair government.

The CIA was under enormous pressure, which resulted in its production of a White Paper that did not conform to the facts, according to the report.

“Under the circumstances, it is difficult to avoid the impression that the CIA and other intelligence agencies defended themselves against the dangers of attack from the Bush administration through a process of self-censorship,” Prados writes. “That is the very essence of politicization in intelligence.”

He goes on to report that CIA reports had “the character of rhetoric” and did not reflect “the kind of approach characteristic of intelligence analysis.”
The Archive’s report backs up similar contentions that first came to light with release of the Downing Street memo in 2005 and have been reinforced in scores of books and investigative articles. Most recently, investigative journalist Ron Suskind reported in his new book The Way of the World that the British government was secretly in contact before the invasion with the chief of Iraq’s intelligence services who told them unequivocally that Saddam Hussein did not have weapons stockpiles. That revelation — received in plenty of time to delay the invasion — was ignored, Suskind wrote.

Prados reports on other sources the CIA had developed among scientists in Iraq and within Saddam’s foreign minister. Information they provided was ignored in favor of what was later revealed to be untrue exaggerations passed along by Iraqi exiles.

The White Paper went through several drafts, Prados writes, and it is clear to see the administration’s influence in its preparation.

“The net impression is that the CIA white paper was rewritten to conform to administration preferences. If so, U.S. intelligence a priori made itself a tool of a political effort, vitiating the intelligence function and confirming the presence of a politicized process,” he writes. “The specific analytic failures on Iraq intelligence become much less significant in such a climate, especially in that they all yielded intelligence predictions of exactly the kind the Bush administration wanted to hear.”

FULL ANALYSIS AT THIS LINK

A New Rush to Spy

0

NY Times | There is apparently no limit to the Bush administration’s desire to invade Americans’ privacy in the name of national security. According to members of Congress, Attorney General Michael Mukasey is preparing to give the F.B.I. broad new authority to investigate Americans – without any clear basis for suspicion that they are committing a crime.

Opening the door to sweeping investigations of this kind would be an invitation to the government to spy on people based on their race, religion or political activities. Before Mr. Mukasey goes any further, Congress should insist that the guidelines be fully vetted, and it should make certain that they do not pose a further threat to Americans’ civil liberties.

Mr. Mukasey has not revealed the new guidelines. But according to senators whose staff have been given limited briefings, the rules may also authorize the F.B.I. to use an array of problematic investigative techniques. Among these are pretext interviews, in which agents do not honestly represent themselves while questioning a subject’s neighbors and work colleagues.

Four Democratic Senators – Russ Feingold of Wisconsin, Sheldon Whitehouse of Rhode Island, Richard Durbin of Illinois and Edward Kennedy of Massachusetts – have written to Mr. Mukasey and urged him not to sign the guidelines until they are publicly announced and national security and civil liberties experts have had a chance to analyze them.

We concur, and we would add that there should be full Congressional hearings so Americans can learn what new powers the government intends to take on.

The F.B.I. has a long history of abusing its authority to spy on domestic groups, including civil rights and anti-war activists, and there is a real danger that the new rules would revive those dark days.

Clearly, the Bush administration cannot be trusted to get the balance between law enforcement and civil liberties right. It has repeatedly engaged in improper and illegal domestic spying – notably in the National Security Agency’s warrantless eavesdropping program.

The F.B.I. and the White House no doubt want to push the changes through before a new president is elected. There is no reason to rush to adopt rules that have such important civil liberties implications.

 

Ron Paul: How Foreign Policy Affects Gas Prices

0

By Rep. Ron Paul | We’ve heard how the value of the dollar affects gas prices — and indeed the price of everything. I was pleased that my request for a hearing on such was granted by the Financial Services committee and we were able to hear some very informative testimony. Certainly domestic policies, regarding off-shore oil drilling bans, ethanol mandates, refining capacity, and CAFE standards are interventionist and harmful enough in the energy market.

 

But how does foreign policy affect gas prices? One important factor is that oil on the world market has been priced in dollars exclusively since 1973. Only two leaders have gone against this arrangement — Saddam Hussein in 2000 and more recently Mahmoud Ahmadinejad with the recently opened Iranian Oil Bourse which trades in non-dollar currencies. But since oil is otherwise exclusively traded in dollars, this means that oil producers have vast amounts of assets held in dollars. Especially since the War on Terror and the PATRIOT Act, many oil-producing nations and banks are concerned the US government may freeze assets based on flimsy pretexts. This fear contributes to dollar weakness, and therefore also high oil prices.

 

Recently I and other members of Congress spoke out against H Con Res 362 and exposed this seemingly innocuous bill for what it really is — a call for a blockade and a build up to war with Iran. Thankfully it has not come to the floor for a vote as I had fully expected it would. But to even propose legislation like this, and get an alarming 261 cosponsors, makes the oil markets jittery and encourages more capital flight from the dollar. We only isolate ourselves on the world stage with actions and attitudes like this. After all, how can it be wise for the rest of the world to bank on America, when we tend to freeze assets and blockade entire countries for no good reason?

 

Another major factor is our intervention in international military conflicts. These conflicts are often much more complicated, and have more to do with oil than our own leaders are willing to acknowledge. Too often the side we support points our weapons right back at us down the road. The best policy is always free trade with all and entangling alliances with none, but instead we isolate ourselves by picking sides and making enemies out of our friends or potential friends. In the recent conflict with Russia and Georgia, it appears that once again the administration is going to pick sides and send taxpayer money, when we are in a deep recession here at home. There is no good reason for us to put a dog in every fight around the world.

 

The contributing factors in the price of oil are complicated and legion. The fact is, it is an immensely valuable resource, and, as our demand for this resource is great, our relationships with world leaders who control it should be handled with reason and intelligence. However, our interventionist mindset when it comes to foreign policy never ceases to get us into sticky situations, for which we pay a premium at the gas pump.

US attacks China’s human rights record

1

ABC | The United States has launched a strongly-worded attack on China’s human rights record just hours before the Closing Ceremony of the Olympics.

In a written statement from its ambassador to China, the United States has attacked China’s human rights performance during the Olympic Games.

The statement also called for the immediate release of eight American pro-Tibet demonstrators who have been sentenced to ten to fourteen days detention for protesting in Beijing.

Ambassador Clark Randt said: “We are disappointed that China has not used the occasion of the Olympics to demonstrate greater tolerance and openness”.

The detainees have reportedly not claimed any mistreatment.

The British Government says one of its citizens has also received a 10 day sentence for protesting about Tibet.

Doctors say ex-Bangladesh PM’s son crippled by torture

0

The eldest son and heir apparent of two times former Bangladeshi premier Khaleda Zia was partially paralysed when tortured in custody, doctors said Sunday.

Tareque Rahman was strung up blindfolded in a dark room, then dropped down and struck against a wall, fracturing two bones in his back, a doctor who treated him quoted from his medical report.

Rahman was partially paralysed by the impact of the fall, which has resulted in “gradual wasting of his right lower limbs,” Kazi Mazharul Islam Dolon said.

“He cannot stand for more than three to four minutes because of the acute pain due to the compression fracture. He has been on pain killers ever since he was admitted in the hospital in January”.

Rahman, who is joint secretary of the Bangladesh Nationalist Party (BNP), has been detained since March last year on graft charges after the government launched an anti-corruption crackdown.

Although he did not have a ministerial role in his mother’s government, the 42-year-old was frequently referred to as the most powerful man in Bangladesh during Zia’s second tenure as prime minister between 2001 and 2005.

In June his lawyer told a court that Rahman had been energetic and fit before he was arrested, but was now physically unable to appear in court.

Serajuddin Ahmed, the doctor who headed three medical teams that treated Rahman, said Zia’s eldest son was injured 10 to 11 months ago when he was in police custody.

The army-backed government, which came to power in January 2007 after emergency rule was imposed and elections cancelled, has not made any comment on the torture claims.

It has hinted that it would release Rahman and his mother from custody, as it wants to secure participation of Zia’s party in general elections to be held in December.

Source

Calls to drop ID card plans after prisoner data blunder

1

The Government was under pressure today to abandon its ID card plans after one of the main firms involved in the project lost thousands of criminals’ personal details.

The names, addresses and expected release dates of all 84,000 prisoners in England and Wales were on a computer memory stick lost by Home Office external contractor PA Consulting.

Home Secretary Jacqui Smith said the loss was “completely unsatisfactory”, adding that the information should not have been downloaded on to a memory stick.

The lost computer files also contain the names, addresses and dates of birth of 30,000 people with six or more convictions in the last year, as well as the names and dates of birth of 10,000 offenders regarded as prolific and the initials of people on drug treatment programmes.

“This was data that was being held in a secure form, but was downloaded on to a memory stick by an external contractor,” Ms Smith told the BBC.

“It runs against the rules set down both for the holding of government data and set down by the external contractor and certainly set down in the contract that we had with the external contractor.”

PA Consulting had the information as part of research it was carrying out for the Home Office on tracking offenders through the criminal justice system.

But the firm is also heavily involved in the ID card project, having been appointed to work on the design, feasibility testing, business case and procurement elements of the programme.

Shadow home secretary Dominic Grieve said: “The public will be alarmed that the Government is happy to entrust their £20 billion ID card project to the firm involved in this fiasco, at a cost of millions of pounds to the UK taxpayer.

“This will destroy any grain of confidence the public still have in this white elephant and reinforce why it could endanger – rather than strengthen – our security.”

Liberal Democrat leader Nick Clegg said: “I’m just gobsmacked like everyone else is that the Government can be so systematically incompetent in failing to keep our data safe.

“Frankly the Keystone Cops would do a better job running the Home Office and keeping our data safe than this government, and if this government cannot keep the data of thousands of guilty people safe, why on earth should we give them the data of millions of innocent people in an ID card database?”

Shami Chakrabarti, director of civil rights group Liberty, said: “With every new government data bungle, another ounce of public trust ebbs away.

“Ministers continue to make overblown claims for the preposterous ID card scheme – when will they ever learn?

“This is no ordinary scandal, heads need to roll.”

Source

MI5 report challenges views on terrorism in Britain

2

The Guardian | MI5 has concluded that there is no easy way to identify those who become involved in terrorism in Britain, according to a classified internal research document on radicalisation seen by the Guardian.

The sophisticated analysis, based on hundreds of case studies by the security service, says there is no single pathway to violent extremism.

It concludes that it is not possible to draw up a typical profile of the “British terrorist” as most are “demographically unremarkable” and simply reflect the communities in which they live.

The “restricted” MI5 report takes apart many of the common stereotypes about those involved in British terrorism.

They are mostly British nationals, not illegal immigrants and, far from being Islamist fundamentalists, most are religious novices. Nor, the analysis says, are they “mad and bad”.

Those over 30 are just as likely to have a wife and children as to be loners with no ties, the research shows.

The security service also plays down the importance of radical extremist clerics, saying their influence in radicalising British terrorists has moved into the background in recent years.

The research, carried out by MI5’s behavioural science unit, is based on in-depth case studies on “several hundred individuals known to be involved in, or closely associated with, violent extremist activity” ranging from fundraising to planning suicide bombings in Britain.

The main findings include:

– The majority are British nationals and the remainder, with a few exceptions, are here legally. Around half were born in the UK, with others migrating here later in life. Some of these fled traumatic experiences and oppressive regimes and claimed UK asylum, but more came to Britain to study or for family or economic reasons and became radicalised many years after arriving.

– Far from being religious zealots, a large number of those involved in terrorism do not practise their faith regularly. Many lack religious literacy and could actually be regarded as religious novices. Very few have been brought up in strongly religious households, and there is a higher than average proportion of converts. Some are involved in drug-taking, drinking alcohol and visiting prostitutes. MI5 says there is evidence that a well-established religious identity actually protects against violent radicalisation.

– The “mad and bad” theory to explain why people turn to terrorism does not stand up, with no more evidence of mental illness or pathological personality traits found among British terrorists than is found in the general population.

– British-based terrorists are as ethnically diverse as the UK Muslim population, with individuals from Pakistani, Middle Eastern and Caucasian backgrounds. MI5 says assumptions cannot be made about suspects based on skin colour, ethnic heritage or nationality.

– Most UK terrorists are male, but women also play an important role. Sometimes they are aware of their husbands’, brothers’ or sons’ activities, but do not object or try to stop them.

– While the majority are in their early to mid-20s when they become radicalised, a small but not insignificant minority first become involved in violent extremism at over the age of 30.

– Far from being lone individuals with no ties, the majority of those over 30 have steady relationships, and most have children. MI5 says this challenges the idea that terrorists are young men driven by sexual frustration and lured to “martyrdom” by the promise of beautiful virgins waiting for them in paradise. It is wrong to assume that someone with a wife and children is less likely to commit acts of terrorism.

– Those involved in British terrorism are not unintelligent or gullible, and nor are they more likely to be well-educated; their educational achievement ranges from total lack of qualifications to degree-level education. However, they are almost all employed in low-grade jobs.

The researchers conclude that the results of their work “challenge many of the stereotypes that are held about who becomes a terrorist and why”.

Crucially, the research has revealed that those who become terrorists “are a diverse collection of individuals, fitting no single demographic profile, nor do they all follow a typical pathway to violent extremism”.

The security service believes the terrorist groups operating in Britain today are different in many important respects both from Islamist extremist activity in other parts of the world and from historical terrorist movements such as the IRA or the Red Army Faction.

The “UK restricted” MI5 “operational briefing note”, circulated within the security services in June, warns that, unless they understand the varied backgrounds of those drawn to terrorism in Britain, the security services will fail to counter their activities in the short term and fail to prevent violent radicalisation continuing in the long term.

It also concludes that the research results have important lessons for the government’s programme to tackle the spread of violent extremism, underlining the need for “attractive alternatives” to terrorist involvement but also warning that traditional law enforcement tactics could backfire if handled badly or used against people who are not seen as legitimate targets.

The MI5 authors stress that the most pressing current threat is from Islamist extremist groups who justify the use of violence “in defence of Islam”, but that there are also violent extremists involved in non-Islamist movements.

They say that they are concerned with those who use violence or actively support the use of violence and not those who simply hold politically extreme views.

Obama – Biden ’08

Barack Obama has chosen Joe Biden as his running mate. It’s an interesting choice, given that Obama is running a change campaign and Biden has been a Washington fixture for decades. Also because the two ran against each other in the primary, during which Biden famously had to apologize for unfortunate comments about his rival.

The Obama campaign is likely to exploit Biden’s experience, particularly in the area of foreign affairs. The elder senator has already been an effective advocate for the Democratic nominee, and his plain-spoken (if gaffe-prone) style will surely be useful against John McCain.

Update: Obama’s campaign confirmed his pick early Saturday morning with an image of Biden and Obama on the campaign Web site’s splash page and a request for support and donations.

AP via Google:

Sen. Joe Biden of Delaware is Barack Obama’s pick as vice presidential running mate, The Associated Press has learned.

Biden, 65, is a veteran of more than three decades in the Senate, and one of his party’s leading experts on foreign policy, an area in which polls indicate Obama needs help in his race against Republican rival John McCain.

Read more

Madrid plane crash: Pilot’s union warned months before that cut-backs placing passengers at risk

0

By Marcus Morgan | After the worst Spanish air tragedy in 25 years on Wednesday, accident investigators have begun examining the wreckage of the plane that crashed at Madrid’s Barajas airport, killing 153 passengers. Just 19 passengers have survived the crash, 5 of whom are said to be in a critical condition, with horrific injuries. The captain and co-pilot are confirmed among the dead.

Flight JK5022 was bound for Las Palmas in the Canary Islands, off the West African coast, and was carrying mostly Spanish and German tourists, as well as nationals from another 10 countries.

Witnesses said the left engine burst into flames seconds after the plane left the ground. It got a short distance into the air before veering suddenly to one side and splitting in half at the end of the runway. The survivors were flung into the air and landed in a nearby stream, which saved them from being burned alive in the huge fireball that erupted.

Dozens of emergency vehicles were prevented from immediately accessing the site because the whole area was in flames. The situation was made worse by the field of dry grass that caught fire.

One emergency services worker said, “It’s the closest thing to Hell I’ve seen. The corpses were boiling, everything was burning. There was nothing left that resembled a plane, it was in pieces. It’s a miracle anyone survived.”

A woman said, “I saw it take off and it climbed to about 200 metres when flames appeared in the engine. It then crashed to the ground and disappeared from view in a hollow past the end of the runway.”

Ligia Palomino, 41, a doctor with Madrid’s ambulance service, was rescued by her own colleagues who wept as they treated her, surrounded by lifeless bodies.

She reported, “The plane left the gate for take-off at 1.20 pm but then the pilot apologised and said he would have to return because of a technical problem.”

“An hour later, we went to take off. I heard a horrible noise and the next thing I remember was being flung from the aircraft. I must have passed out but woke when there was a loud explosion.

“I could hardly move but lifted my head and saw other bodies around me. There was incredible heat and I heard people and children crying for help. I lifted my head and all I saw were scattered bodies.”

Distraught families of the victims have begun the ordeal of identifying burned body parts, which have been taken to a Madrid congress centre. Only 39 of the 153 bodies have been formally identified.

The crash is the deadliest in Spain since 1983, when a Boeing 747 crashed in Madrid, killing 181 people.

The flight operator Spanair said that the plane had been taxiing for take-off when the pilot Antonio Luna reported an air-valve, which regulates pressure in the engine, had overheated. The plane was then diverted to a maintenance shed for about an hour.

Passengers were warned they could have to disembark and change planes, but they were kept onboard, despite reports that some passengers asked to leave the aircraft.

One woman said her husband had been forced to stay on the flight. The unidentified woman told Spanish media that her husband had texted her almost two hours before the incident saying, “My love, there’s a problem with the plane.”

When she suggested he get off, he replied, “They won’t let me off.”

Company technicians turned off the gauge, and the plane was then cleared for take-off. Spanair said this was done in compliance with standard procedure. According to one report, the plane was seen coming out of the maintenance shed just moments before its second attempt.

At this early stage, it is unclear whether the reported defect was a factor in the tragedy. Javier Mendoza, Spanair’s deputy director, declined to comment on whether the problems that led to the initial take-off being aborted could have played a role in the crash.

Javier Fernandez Garcia, the flight coordinator at Barajas airport, told a Spanish newspaper that unspecified problems had kept the aircraft grounded on two previous occasions.

It was also disclosed that a sister plane of the one that crashed in Madrid had to make an emergency landing only a week ago after suffering suspected engine problems. That plane diverted to an airport in Gran Canaria after losing power in mid-air.

Public concern is mounting amid suggestions Spanair opted to fly despite detecting problems. “I’d kill the bastard who did this” was a typical reaction from a driver outside a makeshift morgue.

Amid this growing controversy the official investigation by Spanish authorities has begun. The two black box flight recorders have been recovered, though one is partially damaged. These contain the crucial dialogue between the pilots and air traffic control as well as all the telemetry data of the aircraft instruments. Footage taken by the Spanish civil air authority AENEAS is also being examined.

Chris Yates, aviation analyst for Jane’s Information Group, says it could be some time before definitive answers can be found.

Speaking on the BBC website, he said, “Such engine fires are extremely rare, but when they do occur they are, invariably, the result of some form of mechanical failure.”

Analysing the data and wreckage from the site is a long process, typically taking months to reach a conclusion.

Kieran Daly, the editor of Flight International, said it would be premature to speculate on the cause of the accident, but in the absence of dangerous weather conditions, a likely source of the problem could be inferred.

“Accidents on takeoff are relatively rare,” he said. “The obvious suspicion is some kind of engine problem. The suspicion is that for whatever reason the aircraft had insufficient power to pull away.”

The McDonnell Douglas MD-82, generally considered by industry experts to be a reliable though ageing workhorse, has a very low rate of accidents and incidents. Since coming into service in 1981, the MD-80 series has been involved in 11 serious crashes in a history of 20 million flights, making the plane one of the safest in the sky. It is commonly used on short trips around Europe.

Majorca-based Spanair, which has operated since 1988, is Spain’s second biggest airline. Spanair is owned by parent company Scandinavian Airlines Systems (SAS).

Like many airlines operating on increasingly thin profit margins, Spanair has been struggling with high fuel prices and tough competition during the economic slowdown.

It recently announced it was laying off up to 1,200 staff, more than a quarter of its workforce, and cutting routes after losing US$80 million in the first half of this year.

After a year of failing to attract any acceptable bids, SAS announced it would be forced to keep the subsidiary, which flies 371 daily departures between 36 airports, sending its share price tumbling.

SAS and Spanair executives appeared on national television to deny that safety had been sacrificed in its quest to cut costs, but the evidence produced so far is grounds for serious concern.

Just hours before the crash, Spanair’s pilots threatened to strike over plans by SAS to cut costs. Representatives of the pilots’ union, Sepla, said, “The organised chaos in which the company exists can’t continue.”

The pilots alleged that company bosses were forcing cockpit and maintenance staff to work abusively long hours, in order to compensate for “endemic problems” of organisation and structure.

These claims were backed up by a series of e-mails published by the Spanish newspaper El Mundo and republished in the Times of London on Friday. These revealed how, in the months before the fatal crash, airline workers had repeatedly warned management that passenger safety was being put at risk, and described the airline’s daily operations as a “disaster.”

It quoted from an April 2007 e-mail to Lars Nygaard, then Spanair chief executive, by a union representative. It had warned, “The lack of resources and their quality on the ground, the repeated AOGs [grounded planes] in the fleet, the scarcity of crews and the system of movement of crew members mean that the general feeling is one of operational chaos that places the passengers at risk.”

This was followed one month later by another letter from the union stating, “The operation continues to be a disaster and is getting worse by the day.”

The union also complained that the older planes were not being replaced fast enough. In January, the union wrote, “The MD fleet has not been renewed in favour of A320s in the agreed timeframe.”

It is not known how management responded to the concerns.

McCain’s Plan to Privatise Veterans’ Health Care

3

(IPS) | If John McCain is elected the next U.S. president, wounded veterans could be in for a world of hurt.

On the campaign trail, the Republican’s presumptive nominee has talked of a new mission for the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA) and argued that veterans with non-combat medical problems should be given vouchers to receive care at private, for-profit hospitals — in other words, an end to the kind of universal health care the government has guaranteed veterans for generations.

“We need to relieve the burden on the VA from routine health care,” McCain told the National Forum on Disability Issues last month. “If you have a routine health care need, take it wherever you want, whatever doctor or health care provider and get the treatment you need, while we at the VA focus our attention, our care, our love, on these grievous wounds of war.”

The Republican senator argues that giving veterans a VA card that they can use at private doctors would shorten the long wait times many veterans face in seeing government doctors, who are nearly universally viewed as among the best in the world.

A recent study by the RAND Corporation found that “VA patients were more likely to receive recommended care” and “received consistently better care across the board, including screening, diagnosis, treatment and follow up” than that delivered by other U.S. health care providers.

Virtually all veterans groups oppose McCain’s plan. The Veterans of Foreign Wars’ national legislative director has said the VA card would “undermine the entire system”.

According to the Centre for Responsive Politics, Democrat Barack Obama has received nearly six times as much money from troops deployed overseas at the time of their contribution than has Republican John McCain.

This may seem odd to some since McCain is a former naval officer, prisoner of war, and Vietnam War veteran.

However, Paul Sullivan, a Gulf War veteran and executive director of the non-partisan Veterans for Common Sense, says that for McCain, free market ideology is more important than providing care for former soldiers.

“Ideologues like John McCain and George Bush hate the fact that the VA exists,” Sullivan told IPS, noting that the Republican candidate also wants to partially privatise social security and offer private school vouchers to students currently enrolled in public schools.

“They hate the fact that there’s a functional example out there of the government providing better care at a lower cost than the private sector,” Sullivan said. “The problem that the VA faces now is that the Bush administration failed to hire enough doctors and disability claims adjusters when they chose to go to war with Iraq. If these doctors had been hired, the VA would be an example of the government doing good work. Bush and McCain don’t want the public to see that.”

McCain has also never spelled out what he means by a “combat injury”, leading many veterans worried they could be left out in the cold.

“If I’m driving a Humvee in Iraq and a roadside bomb explodes and I veer off the road and crush my arm and end up losing it and needing a prosthetic, is that a combat wound according to Sen. McCain?” asked retired Air Force Colonel Richard Klass, the president of the Council for a Livable World’s VETPAC, which has endorsed Obama.

Official Pentagon policy calls such an incident a non-combat injury. Technically speaking, the only soldiers “wounded” in combat are those hit by direct enemy fire. As of Aug. 5, Department of Defence statistics showed 32,799 U.S. soldiers had been “wounded” in Iraq and Afghanistan. Another 10,685 had sustained “non-hostile” injuries which required a medical evacuation, while 29,881 were classified as “ill” enough to be airlifted out of the war-zone.

Veterans are also sceptical of McCain’s plans because as a senator, he has repeatedly voted against fully funding veterans’ health care. In 2005 and 2006, McCain voted against expanding mental health care and readjustment counseling for service members returning from Iraq and Afghanistan, efforts to expand inpatient and outpatient treatment for injured veterans, and proposals to lower co-payments and enrollment fees veterans must pay to obtain prescription drugs.

McCain’s vote also helped defeat a proposal by Democratic Sen. Debbie Stabenow that would have made veterans’ health care an entitlement programme like social security, so that medical care would not become a political football to be argued over in Congress each budget cycle.

Iraq and Afghanistan Veterans of America (IAVA) gave him a D+ when they scored his voting record (whereas Obama got a B+). He’s voted with the interests of Disabled American Veterans only 20 percent of the time.

“If McCain would work to properly fund VA care, there would be no issue about a VA card,” said Larry Scott, who edits the website VAWatchdog.org. “McCain, by wanting to give vets private care, is walking away from the VA and ignoring the problem. He is admitting that he will not properly fund the VA to the level where it can care for all qualified vets. ”

Scott is sharply critical of the VA’s often cumbersome and ineffective bureaucracy, but like most veterans’ advocates, believes the VA system needs to be strengthened. He sees McCain’s plan as a way to phase out the government’s commitment to those who’ve served.

“For every vet who would get a VA card, that would be one less vet using the VA,” he wrote in an e-mail to IPS. That “would mean, in a short period of time, a smaller budget, fewer locations…and the eventual dismantling of the best health care system in the country.”

*IPS Correspondent Aaron Glantz is author of the upcoming book “The War Comes Home: Washington’s Battle Against America’s Veterans”.

Identity Politics in Climate Change Hell

1

By George Monbiot |

If you want a glimpse of how the movement against climate change could crumble faster than a summer snowflake, read Ewa Jasiewicz’s article, published yesterday on the Guardian’s Comment is Free site(1). It is a fine example of the identity politics that plagued direct action movements during the 1990s, and from which the new generation of activists has so far been mercifully free.

Ewa rightly celebrates the leaderless, autonomous model of organising that has made this movement so effective. The two climate camps I have attended — this year and last — were among the most inspiring events I’ve ever witnessed. I am awed by the people who organised them, who managed to create, under extraordinary pressure, safe, functioning, delightful spaces in which we could debate the issues and plan the actions which thrust Heathrow and Kingsnorth into the public eye. Climate camp is a tribute to the anarchist politics that Jasiewicz supports.

But in seeking to extrapolate from this experience to a wider social plan, she makes two grave errors. The first is to confuse ends and means. She claims to want to stop global warming, but she makes that task 100 times harder by rejecting all state and corporate solutions. It seems to me that what she really wants to do is to create an anarchist utopia, and use climate change as an excuse to engineer it.

Stopping runaway climate change must take precedence over every other aim. Everyone in this movement knows that there is very little time: the window of opportunity in which we can prevent two degrees of warming is closing fast. We have to use all the resources we can lay hands on, and these must include both governments and corporations. Or perhaps she intends to build the installations required to turn the energy economy around — wind farms, wave machines, solar thermal plants in the Sahara, new grid connections and public transport systems — herself?

Her article is a terryifying example of the ability some people have to put politics first and facts second when confronting the greatest challenge humanity now faces. The facts are as follows. Runaway climate change is bearing down on us fast. We require a massive political and economic response to prevent it. Governments and corporations, whether we like it or not, currently control both money and power. Unless we manage to mobilise them, we stand a snowball’s chance in climate hell of stopping the collapse of the biosphere. Jasiewicz would ignore all these inconvenient truths because they conflict with her politics.

“Changing our sources of energy without changing our sources of economic and political power”, she asserts, “will not make a difference. Neither coal nor nuclear are the “solution”, we need a revolution.” So before we are allowed to begin cutting greenhouse gas emissions, we must first overthrow all political structures and replace them with autonomous communities of happy campers. All this must take place within a couple of months, as there is so little time in which we could prevent two degrees of warming. This is magical thinking of the most desperate kind. If I were an executive of E.On or Exxon, I would be delighted by this political posturing, as it provides a marvellous distraction from our real aims.

To support her argument, Jasiewicz misrepresents what I said at climate camp. She claims that I “confessed not knowing where to turn next to solve the issues of how to generate the changes necessary to shift our sources of energy, production and consumption”. I confessed nothing of the kind. In my book Heat I spell out what is required to bring about a 90% cut in emissions by 2030. Instead I confessed that I don’t know how to solve the problem of capitalism without resorting to totalitarianism.

The issue is that capitalism involves lending money at interest. If you lend at 5%, then one of two things must happen. Either the money supply must increase by 5% or the velocity of circulation must increase by 5%. In either case, if this growth is not met by a concomitant increase in the supply of goods and services, it becomes inflationary and the system collapses. But a perpetual increase in the supply of goods and services will eventually destroy the biosphere. So how do we stall this process? Even when usurers were put to death and condemned to perpetual damnation, the practice couldn’t be stamped out. Only the communist states managed it, through the extreme use of the state control Ewa professes to hate. I don’t yet have an answer to this conundrum. Does she?

Yes, let us fight both corporate power and the undemocratic tendencies of the state. Yes, let us try to crack the problem of capitalism and then fight for a different system. But let us not confuse this task with the immediate need to stop two degrees of warming, or allow it to interfere with the carbon cuts that have to begin now.

Ewa’s second grave error is to imagine that society could be turned into a giant climate camp. Anarchism is a great means of organising a self-elected community of like-minded people. It is a disastrous means of organising a planet. Most anarchists envisage their system as the means by which the oppressed can free themselves from persecution. But if everyone is to be free from the coercive power of the state, this must apply to the oppressors as well as the oppressed. The richest and most powerful communities on earth — be they geographical communities or communities of interest — will be as unrestrained by external forces as the poorest and weakest. As a friend of mine put it, “when the anarchist utopia arrives, the first thing that will happen is that every Daily Mail reader in the country will pick up a gun and go and kill the nearest hippy.”

This is why, though both sides furiously deny it, the outcome of both market fundamentalism and anarchism, if applied universally, is identical. The anarchists associate with the oppressed, the market fundamentalists with the oppressors. But by eliminating the state, both remove such restraints as prevent the strong from crushing the weak. Ours is not a choice between government and no government. It is a choice between government and the mafia.

Over the past year I have been working with groups of climate protesters who have changed my view of what could be achieved. Most of them are under 30, and they bring to this issue a clear-headedness and pragmatism that I have never encountered in direct action movements before. They are prepared to take extraordinary risks to try to defend the biosphere from the corporations, governments and social trends which threaten to make it uninhabitable. They do so for one reason only: that they love the world and fear for its future. It would be a tragedy if, through the efforts of people like Ewa, they were to be diverted from this urgent task into the identity politics that have wrecked so many movements.

Pentagon’s intelligence arm steps up lie detecting

0

The Pentagon’s intelligence arm is adding more polygraph studios and relying on outside contractors for the first time to conduct lie detection tests in an attempt to screen its 5,700 prospective and current employees every year.

The stepped-up effort by the Defense Intelligence Agency is part of a growing emphasis on counterintelligence, detecting and thwarting would-be spies and keeping sensitive information away from America’s enemies.

A polygraph is not foolproof as a screening tool. The test gives a high rate of false positives on innocent people, and guilty subjects can be trained to beat the system, according to expert Charles Honts, a psychology professor at Boise State University.

The National Research Council noted these deficiencies in a 2003 report. The council, an arm of the National Academy of Sciences, found that lie detectors can be useful for ferreting out the truth in specific incidents, but are unreliable for screening prospective national security employees for trustworthiness.

“Its accuracy in distinguishing actual or potential security violators from innocent test takers is insufficient to justify reliance on its use in employee security screening in federal agencies,” the council concluded. “Polygraph testing as currently used has extremely serious limitations in such screening applications, if the intent is both to identify security risks and protect valued employees.”

John Sullivan, a polygrapher with the CIA for 31 years, noted that turncoat Aldrich Ames, a CIA mole for the Soviets, beat a polygraph test twice.

But the prospect of facing a polygraph can deter future security violations, according to the council’s report. That prospect also increases the frequency of admission of violations – taking home classified documents, for example – and discourages people who may be security risks from applying.

“Right now the polygraph is the best tool they have at their hands but it’s not a tool that’s without problems,” Honts said.

The increase in lie detection at the DIA is three years in the making. In 2005 the agency’s director announced plans to test every prospective new DIA hire, whether a permanent federal worker or contract employee.

The DIA would not say how many prospective, current and past employees are screened annually, but a 2002 report to Congress said the agency conducted 1,345 counterintelligence polygraphs. It also said the Defense Department had an average of about 160 government polygraphers on its payroll annually for the last decade. The Pentagon’s polygraphing institute trains all polygraphers for the government. It produced 84 new examiners in 2002, according to the latest publicly available statistics.

Until 2004, Congress severely limited the Pentagon’s authority to conduct polygraphs for counterintelligence purposes. From 1988 to 1990, it could conduct 10,000 a year. From 1990 to 2004, that number was cut to 5,000. Congress lifted that cap in 2004 at the request of the Defense Department.

Polygraph sessions are typically three- to four-hour interrogations. A person is hooked up to a machine that measures physiological responses. The subject is asked a series of “yes” and “no” questions. The machine records changes in blood pressure, respiration and heart rate and electrical activity in the skin. The polygrapher interprets that data to determine whether the answers show inconsistencies or indicate deception, based on established parameters

An unclassified DIA document describing the new effort says the contractor hired to perform the exams will conduct a minimum of 4,550 a year in 13 new polygraph studios. The polygraphers would have to work at a brisk pace to meet the target: Each studio would need to complete 350 sessions a year to meet contract specifications. Those 13 new studios would be added to the eight now manned by DIA polygraphers. All would be overseen by DIA personnel.

The document says that the agency will, for the first time, hire contractors to administer the tests rather than relying on government polygraphers.

Mark Zaid is a lawyer who represents federal employees in lawsuits against the government, many involving disputed polygraphs. He said the government’s reliance on lie detection tools is an easy way around the more reliable, but more time-consuming, security background investigations. There is a massive backlog for these.

“It’s a cheap fix to a broken system,” Zaid said.

The problem, Zaid said, is that there is no process for government employees to challenge a polygrapher’s interpretation of a test. “They get labeled a liar, and that’s it,” Zaid said.

AP

McCain Office Mailed Threat, White Powder

4

(CBS/ AP) A threatening letter containing an unidentified white powder was received at John McCain’s campaign offices in Denver, Colorado, CBS News has learned.

A second letter sent to a McCain campaign office in New Hampshire initially was reported to contain a white substance. Authorities said that was a false alarm and there was no powder in that envelope.

At least 19 people were examined at hospitals or were quarantined outside the Colorado office while authorities tried to determine whether the powder was hazardous.

Andy Lyon of Parker South Metro Fire Rescue Authority said the return address on the envelope listed the Arapahoe Detention Center and the name of an inmate. He didn’t release the name.

Lyon said the first line of the letter used threatening language, but he refused to give any details.

McCain’s campaign had said the letter sent to the Manchester, N.H., office also contained a threatening language and white powder.

But Malcolm Wiley, a Secret Service spokesman in Colorado, said there was no powder in the New Hampshire envelope. He said he did not know about the content of the letter.

Wiley said the letter had a Denver return address, which alarmed staffers in Manchester because they had heard about the Colorado incident.

Jim Barnett, McCain’s New England campaign manager, said it’s unusual for the New Hampshire office to get a letter from Denver.

“That was really the only suspicious thing about the letter, and our national headquarters advised, out of an abundance of caution for our staff and volunteers, that we have the authorities check it out,” he said. “We did and it was deemed safe.”

A government official familiar with the investigation said the New Hampshire letter was a false alarm. The official said authorities believe the Denver letter was a hoax because it appeared to have been sent from a jail.

Both the New Hampshire and Colorado offices were evacuated.

Lyon said about 40 people were evacuated from the Colorado building, but it contains several offices and businesses, and he did not know how many people had been in the McCain office.

Seven people drove themselves to Sky Ridge Medical Center, but none showed any symptoms of exposure to a toxic substance, hospital spokeswoman Linda Watson said.

Twelve people were quarantined outside the Colorado office, including three police officers, two firefighters and seven civilians, Lyon said.

He said Park South Metro firefighters found very little powder when they arrived.

“There were maybe a couple of grains of something inside an envelope and they had to kind of work to get a sample,” he said.

Bruce Williamson of the Arapahoe County Sheriff’s Department said a hazmat team was searching the building. He said authorities believe the substance was confined within the structure.

Williamson said authorities took the incident “very seriously” because the Democratic National Convention begins Monday in Denver and McCain is the presumed GOP candidate.

Postal Inspector Jo Jan Henderson said agents from her office were at the scene. FBI officials did not immediately return calls.

Wasted Food Is Also Wasted Water

0

The world’s growing food crisis — which triggered riots and demonstrations in over 30 developing nations early this year — is being aggravated primarily by wastage and overconsumption.

IPS | “Obesity is a much bigger problem than undernourishment,” said Professor Jan Lundqvist of the Stockholm International Water Institute (SIWI).

He pointed out that there are 850 million people worldwide who suffer from hunger and starvation daily compared with over 1.2 billion people who are overweight and obese, which can lead to a vast range of health problems like diabetes and heart disease.

Speaking on the sidelines of the Stockholm International Water Conference, Lundqvist told reporters Thursday that “improving water productivity and reducing the quantity of food wasted can enable us to provide a better diet for the poor and enough food for growing populations.”

A study titled “Saving Water” released here argues that while the risk of under-nourishment is reduced with an increasing supply of food — provided access is ensured — the risk of over-eating and wastage is also likely to increase when food becomes more abundant in some societies.

In the United States, as much as 30 percent of food products, worth some 48.3 billion dollars, is thrown away annually just by households alone.

“That’s like leaving the tap running and pouring 40 trillion litres of water into the garbage can — enough water to meet the household needs of 500 million people,” says the report co-authored by SIWI, along with the Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO) in Rome and the International Water Management Institute (IWMI) in Sri Lanka.

The study also says that wasted food is wasted water because of the large quantum of water that goes into the cultivation and processing of food.

Professor John Anthony Allan of King’s College, London, the winner of the 2008 Stockholm Water Prize, is the author of a concept called “virtual water” where he argues that people consume water not only when they drink it or take a shower but also when they consume food products.

The virtual water concept measures water embedded in the production and trade of food and consumer products– from the field and the factory to the dinner table.

A cup of coffee, for example, accounts for about 140 litres of water that is used in growing, producing, packaging and shipping the beans.

One single hamburger accounts for an estimated 2,400 litres of water; one kilogramme of beef consumes 15,000 litres of water; a slice of white bread takes in 40 litres of water; and one kilogramme of cheese absorbs 5,000 litres of water.

“I was very surprised with the high numbers. But it catches everybody’s attention,” Allan told IPS. The figures, he said, were worked out scientifically by researchers in the Netherlands.

Asked whether there was a direct link between water and food scarcities, he said while there is a shortage of food in some parts of the world, there is also a need for twice as much food in other parts of the world.

“So, there is a distribution problem. But this also reflects the maldistribution of water,” he said.

Charlotte de Fraiture, a researcher at IWMI, says that as much as half of the water used to grow food globally may be lost or wasted.

“Curbing these losses and improving water productivity provides win-win opportunities for farmers, business, ecosystems, and the global hungry,” she said.

And an effective water-saving strategy requires that minimising food wastage is firmly placed on the political agenda, she added.

SIWI says a 50 percent reduction of losses and wastage in the production and consumption chain is a necessary and achievable goal.

Meanwhile, a report released by the World Wide Fund for Nature (WWF) says that while each person in Britain drinks, hoses, flushes and washes their way through around 150 litres of water a day, they consume about 30 times as much in “virtual water” embedded in food, clothes and other items — the equivalent of about 58 bathtubs full of water every day.

Titled “UK Water Footprint: The impact of the UK’s food and fibre consumption on global water resources”, the study released here points out that Britain is the world’s sixth largest importer of water.

“Only 38 percent of UK’s total water use comes from its own rivers, lakes and groundwater reserves,” Stuart Orr, WWF-UK’s water footprint expert said.

The rest, he said, is taken from water bodies in many countries across the world to irrigate and process food and fibre crops that people in Britain subsequently consume.

He said that WWF is encouraging some of the largest companies in Britain to evaluate their water footprints, which assesses the amount of water a business uses both directly and indirectly through its supply chain.

According to WWF, a single tomato from Morocco takes 13 litres of water to grow, while a shirt made from cotton grown in Pakistan or Uzbekistan soaks up 2,700 litres of water.

Orr said most consumers aren’t even aware that it takes massive amounts of water to grow the food and fibres consumed — on top of what is used for drinking, washing and watering the lawn.

“Therefore, it is essential that business and government identify the areas that could potentially suffer water crises and develop solutions so the environment is not over-exploited to the point that people and wildlife lose out,” Orr added.

Man Selling Anti-War Shirts Wins Ruling

0

PHOENIX – A federal judge on Wednesday permanently barred Arizona from using a state law to prosecute an online merchant who sells shirts that list names of thousands of troops killed in Iraq.

U.S. District Judge Neil Wake did not strike down the 2007 law against selling products that use of military casualties’ names without families’ permission. But he ruled that using the law to prosecute Dan Frazier would violate the man’s First Amendment rights because his “Bush Lied – They Died” shirts are “core political speech.”

“It is impossible to separate the political from the commercial aspects of that display,” Wake wrote. “For example, the state argues that Frazier can sell his shirts without displaying the soldiers’ names. But Frazier’s product is his message, and his customers’ message.”

Arizona’s law was enacted with little debate by the Legislature, and Louisiana, Oklahoma and Texas have enacted similar laws.

A spokeswoman for Arizona Attorney General Terry Goddard said Goddard’s office was reviewing the ruling and did not immediately know whether it would appeal.

“I always knew the Constitution was on my side,” Frazier said in a statement released by the American Civil Liberties Union.

Lee Phillips, a Flagstaff lawyer who represented Phillips on behalf of the ACLU, said it still could be possible to use the law to prosecute a person in a case without political circumstance or motivations.

Citing First Amendment concerns, Wake last September had issued a preliminary injunction against enforcement of the law against Frazier while the lawsuit was pending.

The ACLU is also defending Frazier in a pending lawsuit filed against him in federal court in Tennessee by a couple whose soldier son was killed in Iraq. Robin and Michael Read of Greeneville, Tennessee, have asked that their case be expanded to cover more than 4,000 casualties and seek more than $40 billion in damages.

UK court rules against gov’t in key Guantanamo case

1

Reuters – A British court ruled on Thursday that the government must disclose evidence to a defendant being held at Guantanamo Bay, a decision that carried with it implicit criticism of U.S. government detention policies.

In its ruling, the High Court said Britain’s Foreign Office must provide Binyam Mohamed, a British resident detained in Pakistan in 2002 and now held at Guantanamo, with information relating to his time in detention.

His lawyers say the material supports his claim to have been “extraordinarily rendered”, tortured and forced into a confession on terrorism charges.

Lord Justice Thomas and Lord Justice Lloyd Jones said the Foreign Office had a duty to “disclose in confidence” the information Mohamed was seeking in order for his lawyers to mount a proper defence of the charges against him.

Mohamed’s legal team was buoyant after the ruling, calling it a “momentous decision” that showed the British legal system’s determination to stand up for human rights while condemning the U.S. government’s detention procedures at Guantanamo.

“Today’s judgment reflects the abhorrence of decent society at the methods employed by the United States’ government in the supposed ‘war on terror’,” said Richard Stein, a lawyer with Leigh Day & Co, the solicitors who brought the case.

“We can only hope that the foreign secretary will now reflect on this judgment and provide direct assistance to Binyam’s defence team.”

 

NATIONAL SECURITY

In a statement, the Foreign Office said it was considering the implications of the court’s rulings “very carefully” and said it had only not divulged the information so far because of national security reasons.

“We have never contested that Mr Mohamed’s defence lawyers should have access to information which would assist him in his defence in any trial at Guantanamo Bay,” the statement said.

“For strong reasons of national security, to which the court accepted we were entitled to give the highest weight, we could not agree to disclose this information voluntarily.”

Lawyers for Mohamed, an Ethiopian national, say the information relates to interrogations he was subjected to by Britain’s secret services while being held in Pakistan in 2002.

Following those interrogations, lawyers say Mohamed was flown by the CIA to Morocco in July 2002, where he was tortured, including having his penis cut with a razor. He was held there for 18 months, they say, and quizzed about information they argue could only have come from British questioning.

In January 2004 Mohamed was flown to Kabul and then transferred to Bagram air base. U.S. authorities deny that Mohamed was extraordinarily rendered or tortured and have only provided details of his detention in Afghanistan.

He is being tried before a U.S. military commission on terrorism charges and faces the death penalty if found guilty.

In its ruling, the High Court levelled implicit criticism at the U.S. government’s judicial procedures and suggested that basic rights that the British have held essential since the 13th century were being overlooked or set aside.

“It is a basic and long established value in any democracy that the location of those in custody is made known to the detainee’s family and those representing him,” the court said.

“To deny him this at this time would be to deny him the opportunity of timely justice in respect of the charges against him, a principle dating back to at least the time of the Magna Carta and which is so basic a part of our common law and of democratic values.” (Editing by Jon Boyle)

Planning to E-Vote? Read This First

0

With less than three months before the presidential election, the hotly contested state, Ohio, along with others, continue to have problems with E-voting technology

By Larry Greenemeier 

In their rush to avoid a repeat of the controversy that plagued the 2000 presidential election, and to meet the requirements of Congress’s hastily mandated 2002 Help America Vote Act (HAVA), states and counties flocked to electronic voting systems they hoped would eliminate hanging chads and other flaws inherent in paper-based systems. Six years later, with another presidential election less than three months away, many e-voting systems are fraught with security glitches, and the technology has yet to prove itself as the solution voters were looking for.

Such systems could allow voters and poll workers to place multiple votes, crash the systems by loading viruses, and fake vote tallies, according to studies commissioned by the states of California and Ohio within the past year. Makers of these systems have countered that the test settings were unrealistic. But that is not helping election officials sleep better at night.

One of the reasons e-voting systems turned out to be such a failure is that the only people involved in checking these systems were the vendors, who wanted to sell their technology, and the local election officials, who were ill-equipped to understand the security issues, says David Dill, a Stanford University computer science professor and founder of the Verified Voting Foundation, a nonprofit organization pushing for the implementation of voting processes that can more easily be verified and audited. “There was a certification process in place,” Dill says, “but it had very little to do with security.”

Dill is the author of Attackdog, threat modeling software that can examine more than 9,000 potential ways a voting system can be attacked, including computer hacking, ballot tampering and voter impersonation. Attackdog is part of a larger effort called A Center for Correct, Usable, Reliable, Auditable and Transparent Elections (ACCURATE) , which was launched in 2005 by the National Science Foundation with $7.5 million in funding. “Nothing we do now will affect the November election,” Dill says. “We don’t know how to make secure paperless voting.”

This sentiment is echoed in many places throughout the U.S., most prominently in the hotly contested state of Ohio, where Secretary of State Jennifer Brunner has commissioned a series of tests over the past year to determine whether e-voting systems are secure enough to be trusted. Based on these tests Brunner has concluded that they are not secure, a decision that Premier Election Solutions, Inc., in Allen, Tex., took exception to. Premier sued Brunner and one Ohio county board of elections in May in a move to get the courts to rule that the company had fulfilled its contractual obligations to the state.

Brunner struck back August 6 by countersuing Premier, formerly Diebold Election Systems, Inc., and maker of the touch-screen voting systems into which Ohio has invested more than $62 million since 2005. Brunner’s suit accuses Premier of, among other things, breach of contract and breach of warranty, and seeks court acknowledgement that Premier did not honor its contract. The countersuit also asks for damages of at least $25,000 against Premier for voting system malfunctions that have caused problems in at least 11 of the 44 counties using Premier’s technology during elections since 2005. “We believe that Premier’s equipment has failed to perform as required by its contracts and according to state law,” Brunner says. “We have taken this action to recover taxpayer funds spent for voting systems used in half of the state’s 88 counties.”

Brunner and Premier have locked horns several times since she took office in January 2007 over whether the company’s DRE (direct recorded election) touch-screen electronic voting technology works properly and is secure. The problem came to a head in April, when election officials in Ohio’s Butler County detected a vote count discrepancy during the primary election. The county board of elections staff determined that the Premier DRE system had malfunctioned and failed to count votes from memory cards uploaded to the system’s vote tabulation computer server, Brunner says, adding, “This is not what we bargained for.”

Suspecting problems with all of the e-voting technology that had so far cost Ohio $112 million, Brunner last year commissioned Project EVEREST, a comprehensive security review of the electronic voting technology used throughout Ohio, to identify any problems that might make elections vulnerable to tampering. During the 10-week project, teams of academic researchers from Pennsylvania State University, the University of Pennsylvania and WebWise Security (a security firm formed in 2005 by faculty and students from the University of California, Santa Barbara’s security research group) examined DRE touch-screen and optical-scan voting systems from Premier, Election Systems and Software (ES&S) in Omaha, Neb., and Austin, Tex.—based Hart InterCivic as well as the software that manages these systems.

EVEREST researchers found exploitable security weaknesses in all three vendors’ systems, Brunner said in a statement when the project concluded in December. “Many of these vulnerabilities represent practical threats to the integrity of elections as they are conducted in Ohio,” she said. “We found vulnerabilities in different vendor systems that would, for example, allow voters and poll workers to place multiple votes, to infect the precinct with virus software or to corrupt previously cast votes–sometimes irrevocably.”

“None of the systems out there are even remotely adequate given the importance of the data they handle,” says Patrick McDaniel, a Penn State professor of information security who led the EVEREST testing. A lot of the attacks that McDaniel and his team tested could be carried out at a polling place or county elections office in a matter of seconds. An example: when researchers placed a piece of white tape over part of an e-voting system’s scanner, they were able to effectively block it from reading the entire ballot. In other words, a person could put the tape in a place that kept the system from counting votes for a particular candidate. The team also found that the keys to unlock Hart’s ballot box could also be used to open the ballot boxes on the Premier systems.

In a more serious attack, McDaniel found that his researchers could replace the memory card in some of the e-voting systems. “Any software you put on your card would uploaded into the system’s computer,” he says.

Premier had already responded to EVEREST’s findings as well as a similar project commissioned by California Secretary of State Debra Bowen called Top-to-Bottom Review in March by issuing a report that emphasized that the EVEREST researchers did their work with “no physical or operational security controls” and did not simulate realistic election day conditions. Premier could not be reached for comment.

The EVEREST researchers don’t dispute that. Sandy Clark, an EVEREST researcher and the computing systems manager of Princeton University’s Atmospheric and Oceanic Sciences Program, said at the Last HOPE hacker’s conference held last month in New York City that she and her EVEREST colleagues “treated the project as a hack.”

At the Last HOPE conference, University of Pennsylvania researchers who led EVEREST’s analysis of ES&S e-voting technology described exploitable security vulnerabilities in almost every hardware and software component of ES&S’s touch-screen and optical-scan systems. Some of these flaws, Clark said, could allow a single voter or poll worker with bad intentions to alter countywide election results, possibly without election officials ever knowing that the results had been tampered with. “There wasn’t an attack that we tried that we weren’t able to carry out,” she added. “We learned that every current e-voting system has serious exploitable vulnerabilities.”

In addition to investing in Premier systems, Ohio has spent more than $41 million on ES&S e-voting technology and is one of 43 states that are ES&S customers.

When contacted for this story ES&S pointed to statements made earlier this year regarding EVEREST. Like Premier, ES&S’s conclusion is that anyone attempting to replicate many of EVEREST tests would need “unfettered access to the DRE unit” as well as detailed knowledge of how the system works (to wit, its communications protocol with its audit log).

Despite their differences, Ohio and Premier are stuck with each other for the 2008 presidential election. “With the election being less than three months away, the counties will be using the technology they have,” Brunner says. To head off any potential problems, Ohio counties using touch-screen voting systems are being required to print a hard copy of at least a portion of electronically cast votes, which will provide an audit trail. Voters will also be offered the option of filling out paper ballots that can be read by optical scanners and registered in a database.

E-voting systems have to be completely redesigned with security in mind, McDaniel says. In the short term, this means adding more thorough vote-auditing capabilities so that discrepancies can be investigated. “The elections systems should have the same quality, the same reliability, the same testing and the same certification requirements as financial systems,” he says. “If the systems used by banks, which have to report to the SEC [Securities and Exchange Commission], had this level of quality, no one would put their money in the bank.”

Looking beyond November, Brunner says that she wants Ohio to rely more on optical-scan technology. “Later on,” she adds, “there may be a place for touch-screen (systems).”

At JFK Airport, Denying Basic Rights Is Just Another Day at the Office

0

I was recently stopped by Homeland Security as I was returning from a trip to Syria. What I saw in the hours that followed shocked and disturbed me.

AlterNet | I arrived at JFK Airport two weeks ago after a short vacation to Syria and presented my American passport for re-entry to the United States. After 28 hours of traveling, I had settled into a hazy awareness that this was the last, most familiar leg of a long journey. I exchanged friendly words with the Homeland Security official who was recording my name in his computer. He scrolled through my passport, and when his thumb rested on my Syrian visa, he paused. Jerking toward the door of his glass-enclosed booth, he slid my passport into a dingy green plastic folder and walked down the hallway, motioning for me to follow with a flick of his wrist. Where was he taking me, I asked him. “You’ll find out,” he said.

We got to an enclosed holding area in the arrivals section of the airport. He shoved the folder into my hand and gestured toward four sets of Homeland Security guards sitting at large desks. Attached to each desk were metal poles capped with red, white and blue siren lights. I approached two guards carrying weapons and wearing uniforms similar to New York City police officers, but they shook their heads, laughed and said, “Over there,” pointing in the direction of four overflowing holding pens. I approached different desks until I found an official who nodded and shoved my green folder in a crowded metal file holder. When I asked him why I was there, he glared at me, took a sip from his water bottle, bit into a sandwich, and began to dig between his molars with his forefinger. I found a seat next to a man who looked about my age — in his late 20s — and waited.

Omar (not his real name) finished his fifth year in biomedical engineering at City College in June. He had just arrived from Beirut, where he visited his family and was waiting to go home to the apartment he shared with his brother in Harlem. Despite his near-perfect English and designer jeans, Omar looked scared. He rubbed his hands and rocked softly in his seat. He had been waiting for hours already, and, as he pointed out, a number of people — some sick, elderly, pregnant or holding sobbing babies — had too. There were approximately 70 people detained in our cordoned-off section: All were Arab (with the exception of me and the friend I traveled with), and almost all had arrived from Dubai, Amman or Damascus. Many were U.S. citizens.

We were in the front row, sitting a few feet from two guards’ desks. They sneered at each bewildered arrival, told jokes in whispers, swiveled in their office chairs and greeted passing guards who stopped to talk — guards who had a habit of looping their fingers into their holsters. One asked his friend how many nationalities were represented in the room. “About 20. Some of everything today.”

No one who had been detained knew precisely why they were there. A few people were led into private rooms; others were questioned out in the open at desks a few feet from the crowd and then allowed to pass through customs. Some were sent to another section of the holding area with large computer screens and cameras, and then brought back. The uninformed consensus among the detainees was that some people would be fingerprinted, have their irises scanned and be sent back to the countries from which they had disembarked, regardless of citizenship status; others would be fingerprinted and allowed to stay; and the unlucky ones would be detained indefinitely and moved to a more permanent facility.

There was one British tourist in the group. Paul (also not his real name) was traveling with three friends who had passed through customs soon after their plane landed and were waiting for him on the other side of the metal barrier; he suspected he had been detained because of his dark skin. When he asked if he could go to the bathroom, one of the guards said, “I wouldn’t.” “What if someone has to?” I asked. “They will just have to hold it,” the guard responded with a smile. Paul began to cry. I watched as he, over the course of four hours, went from feeling exuberant about his trip to New York to despising the entire country. “I speak the Queen’s English,” he said to me. “I’m third-generation British. I came to America because I’ve always wanted to come here, and now they’ve got me so scared that all I want to do is go home. We’re paying for your stupid war anyway.”

To be powerless and mocked at the same time makes one feel ashamed, which leads quickly to rage. Within a few hours of my arrival, I saw at least 10 people denied the right to use the bathroom or buy food and water. I watched my traveling companion duck under a barrier, run to the bathroom and slip back into the holding section — which, of course, someone of another ethnicity in a state of panic would be very reluctant to do. The United States is good at naming enemies, but apparently we are even better at making them, especially of individuals. I don’t know if it’s worse for national security — and more embarrassing for Americans — that this is the first experience tourists have of our country, or that some U.S. citizens get treated this way upon entering their own country.

The guard who had been picking his molars for hours quietly mispronounced the names of people whose turn it was to be questioned, muttering each surname three times and then moving on. When he called Omar from City College to his desk, I moved closer to hear the interview. “Where did you go?” the officer asked. “What is your address in the United States? Is your brother here illegally? Do you support Hezbollah? What do you think of Hezbollah in general? How do you pay for your life here? How many people live with you? Are you sure it’s just you and your brother? Who are your friends?” Omar answered respectfully and emphatically; he was then asked to wait by the side of the desk, from which he was ushered toward one of the rooms.

After four hours, I finally demanded to speak to the guards’ supervisor, and he was called down. I asked if the detainees could file a formal complaint. He said there were complaint forms (which, in English and Spanish, direct one to the Department of Homeland Security’s Web site, where one must enter extensive personal information in order to file a “Trip Summary”) but initially refused to hand them out or to give me his telephone number. “The Department of Homeland Security is understaffed, underfunded, and I have men here who are doing 14-hour days.” He tried to intimidate me when I wrote down his name — “So, you’re writing down our names. Well, we have more on you” — and asked me questions about my address and my profession in front of the rest of the people detained. I pointed out a few of the families who had missed their flights and had been waiting seven hours. His voice barely controlled, his lip curled into a smirk, he explained slowly, condescendingly, that they need only go to the ticket counter at Jet Blue and reschedule so they could fly out in an hour. One mother responded with what he must have already known: Jet Blue goes to most destinations only once or twice a day and her whole family would have to sleep in the airport.

A large crowd began to gather. Everyone wanted to voice complaints. I explained to the supervisor that his guards had been making people afraid. He flipped through the green files, tossing the American passports to the front of the pile. “You should have gone first, before these people. American citizens first — that’s how it should be.” In the face of dozens of requests and questions, he turned and left.

The guards processed me then, ignoring the order of arrivals, if there ever had been one. They refused to distribute more complaint forms or call the supervisor back down at the request of Arab families. One officer threatened, “I’m talking politely to you now. If you don’t sit down, I won’t be talking politely to you anymore.” One announced that because “the American girl” had gotten angry, the families would have to wait a few more hours. “The supervisor is not coming back.”

I reassured my Homeland Security interrogator that I did not make any connections with Hezbollah or with anyone I knew to be associated with such an organization. I am not a member of any terrorist group. In fact, my visit to Syria had been so apolitical and touristy that I felt an embarrassing affinity with the pastel-shirted families waiting by the Air France baggage carousels in the distance, whom I knew I would eventually join.

As I walked out of the enclosure, some people thanked me, squeezing my arm and putting their hands on my shoulders. It was shocking that briefly standing up to someone overseeing an abuse of civil rights — in JFK airport, in the United States, where we supposedly have laws and a democratic judicial system — could be perceived as heroic. I had nothing to lose, but the other people being detained had everything to lose.

In the past five years I have worked for human rights and refugee advocacy organizations in Serbia, Russia and Croatia, including the International Rescue Committee and USAID. I have traveled to many different places, some supposedly repressive, and have never seen people treated with the kind of animosity that Homeland Security showed that night. In Syria, border control officers were stern but polite. At other borders there have been bureaucracies to contend with — excruciating for both Americans and other foreign nationals. I’ve met Russian officials with dead, suspicious looks in their eyes and arms tired from stamping so many visas, but in America, the Homeland Security officials I encountered were very much alive — like vultures waiting to eat.

L.A. City Council Decides to Outlaw New Fast Food Restaurants

0

By Joanne Waldron | The City Council of Los Angeles, in an effort to combat the problem of the rapidly increasing number of obese citizens, has voted to put a moratorium on building new fast food restaurants in the area for a period of one year, according to an Associated Press report. For purposes of the moratorium, fast food restaurants are defined as those that fail to offer table service and provide quickly prepared or ready-made foods served in disposable wrappers. The moratorium could possibly be extended for one year and still needs to be signed into law by the mayor.

30% of South Los Angeles Adults are Obese

The article reports that a whopping thirty percent of adults in the South Los Angeles area are obese, compared to 19.1% of the adults in the metropolitan area and 14.1% in the wealthier Westside area. Many people feel that people with less money eat fast food primarily because it is cheaper than healthier alternatives. However, representatives from the various fast food restaurants argue that they already offer some healthy items but maintain that it’s up to the consumers to select those items.

Is it the Government’s Place to Ban Fast Food?

Though most natural health advocates won’t shed too many tears concerning the moratorium, many people question whether the government has the right to take such measures. Other people wonder if the measures will have any effect on the way that people are eating. Consumers seem to already have plenty of access to unhealthy foods, given the fact that three quarters of the restaurants in South Los Angeles are fast food establishments. Even in the highly unlikely event that the City Council would someday decide to shut all the fast food restaurants in the area down, junk food addicts with a hankering for fast food could always drive to get it somewhere else.

Other people might argue that fast food restaurants are being unfairly targeted. After all, there are plenty of sit-down restaurants that offer loads of unhealthy food choices. Eating habits aren’t something that can be easily legislated.

No Simple Solutions

While there are no simple solutions, maybe it would make more sense to put greater emphasis on public education programs concerning healthy eating and regular exercise. Perhaps fast food restaurants could be given tax incentives to provide greater percentages of healthy, affordable food choices. While what methods would be best to get the people in South Los Angeles to lose weight are a matter of debate, few people would argue that something needs to be done fast to get the obesity epidemic under control.

US oil pipeline politics and the Russia-Georgia conflict

1

By Alex Lantier | US media claims about Georgian democracy notwithstanding, a key factor in US backing for Georgian President Mikheil Saakashvili in his conflict with Russia has been the emergence of Georgia as a key transit country for oil and gas exports from the Caucasus and the Caspian Sea basin.

The August 7 outbreak of hostilities between Georgia and Russia, as Georgia bombarded Russian peacekeepers in the breakaway Georgian region of South Ossetia, is the predictable result of the US’s aggressive use of pipeline politics and proxy states to assert its commercial and military influence in Central Asia.

The broad outlines of this policy have governed US relations with the former Soviet republics ever since the 1991 collapse of the USSR. At the time, US investors rushed in to acquire large portions of the former USSR’s economy, notably the oil and gas industries of the Caspian Basin. In the early 1990s, Western energy companies acquired stakes in developing numerous projects, such the Tengiz oil field in Kazakhstan, the Azeri-Chirag-Guneshli (ACG) fields in Azerbaijan, and the Dauletabad natural gas field in Turkmenistan.

From the outset, US firms and advisors pressed the ex-Soviet states to agree to pipeline routes bypassing countries the US viewed as inimical to its interests, notably Russia and Iran. Such pipelines not only deprived US rivals of transit fees and political leverage arising from their ability to cut off pipeline flows, but also gave Washington the opportunity to weld together pro-US regional alliances.

In the mid-1990s, the administration of US President Bill Clinton settled on two main pipeline projects to export Caspian oil and gas while bypassing the territories of Russia, Iran and China. The first was a plan to export Turkmen gas through Afghanistan and Pakistan to ports on the Indian Ocean–a plan that led Washington to support the Taliban in 1995-6 in an attempt to unify and pacify Afghanistan so that the Turkmenistan-Afghanistan-Pakistan (TAP) pipeline could be built. The plan ultimately foundered on the Taliban’s inability to conquer northern Afghanistan.

The other plan was to build a pipeline westward through small, pro-US states in the Caucasus–Georgia and Azerbaijan. Together with an undersea trans-Caspian pipeline connecting Kazakhstan and Turkmenistan on the Caspian’s eastern shore with Azerbaijan on the western shore, the Baku (Azerbaijan)-Tbilisi (Georgia)-Ceyhan (Turkey) pipeline would send a substantial fraction of Caspian energy exports to the Mediterranean. This pipeline was conceived of as a major blow, in particular, to Russia’s longstanding domination of energy routes from the Caspian to the West.

The politically-driven character of the project was undeniable. As the Christian Science Monitor recently noted, “The $4 billion BTC pipeline, managed by and 30 percent owned by British Petroleum, was routed through Georgia to avoid sending Caspian oil through Iran, Afghanistan and Pakistan, or Russia. A 10-mile pipeline could have connected Caspian oil to the well-developed Iranian pipeline system.”

Clinton administration officials relentlessly lobbied for the Baku-Tbilisi-Ceyhan (BTC) pipeline, which would pipe oil from the ACG fields near the Azeri capital of Baku through the Georgian capital of Tbilisi to the Mediterranean port of Ceyhan. After Azerbaijan, Georgia and Turkey signed an intergovernmental agreement in favor of the BTC pipeline, Clinton said in 2000 that the pipeline represented “the most important achievement at the end of the twentieth century.”

As it took office in 2001, the Bush administration planned on even more aggressive use of US military power and strategic influence to carry out the same fundamental policy. Many of its top officials had been intimately involved in US energy companies’ initial penetration of the USSR: National Security Advisor and later Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice served on the board of US oil major Chevron from 1991 to 2001 as an expert on the USSR, when Chevron was acquiring a major stake in the Tengiz oil field.

Vice President Dick Cheney had served as CEO of oil infrastructure company Halliburton and as a member of Kazakhstan’s Oil Advisory Board, a group set up by the Kazakh government after the fall of the USSR that included the CEOs of oil majors Chevron and Texaco. In the 1990s, Cheney had also used his political pull, as former US secretary of defense in the administration of the senior George Bush, to arrange interviews between Halliburton executives and the Azeri government.

The Bush administration faced a significantly different government in Russia: President Boris Yeltsin had transferred power in 2000 to his chosen successor, Vladimir Putin. Thanks to its oil revenues, the Russian economy had bottomed out from the devastating collapse that followed the fall of the USSR, and Putin planned to carry out a more independent and assertive Russian foreign policy. The recovery picked up steam after Putin’s arrival in power, as world oil prices began to rise.

In the aftermath of the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, however, Putin acquiesced to US deployments to military bases in the Caspian region, ostensibly as logistics bases for US military action against the Taliban in Afghanistan. However, these deployments also allowed the US to assert its pipeline interests–most notably leading to the temporary demise of Chinese plans to build a “Pan Asian Global Energy Bridge,” a competing network of Chinese-run pipelines linking the Middle East, Central Asia and Russia to China’s Pacific Coast.

Georgia soon emerged as a major transit country for Western pipeline plans. In 2002 in London, an international consortium was founded to begin construction of the BTC oil pipeline, as well as a natural gas pipeline (BTE) running from Azerbaijan’s Shah Deniz gas fields through Baku and Tbilisi to the eastern Turkish city of Erzurum. Plans were also made to connect the BTE pipeline to the European market via a pipeline extending from Erzurum to Vienna, the so-called “Nabucco” pipeline.

Georgia subsequently became the site of the first major open confrontation between Russia and the US in the region, the December 2003 “Rose Revolution” that displaced Georgian President Eduard Shevardnadze. In the aftermath of parliamentary elections whose results were disputed by the US-backed opposition, the opposition staged a series of demonstrations and ultimately took over Parliament. The Georgian military, which had received extensive US training, stood aside, while top US officials, including then-Secretary of State Colin Powell, personally intervened to order Shevardnadze to step down.

This made-in-the-USA coup brought to power a series of former Shevardnadze associates who were more closely associated with the US, most notably Columbia University-educated lawyer Mikheil Saakashvili. Saakashvili formally assumed the Georgian presidency in January 2004.

One of the main disagreements between Shevardnadze and Saakashvili in the 2003 parliamentary campaign had been the question of how to deal with ethnic-minority regions of Georgia. Shevardnadze allied himself with Adjarian politician Aslan Abashidze, while Saakashvili stridently advocated that Tbilisi exercise total control over all of its territory. This represented a definite concession by Shevardnadze to Moscow, which had considerable influence in breakaway or autonomous regions of Georgia, such as Adjaria, Abkhazia, and South Ossetia.

In 2004, Saakashvili successfully forced Abashidze to flee by threatening Adjaria with invasion by the Georgian army. Throughout his presidency, he issued threats against South Ossetia and Abkhazia, despite the presence of Russian peacekeepers there.

From the point of view of US oil interests, the Rose Revolution was perfectly timed. It came one year before the 2005 opening of the BTC pipeline, a project whose value to US foreign policy depended on the Georgian government being independent from Russian pressure. The Rose Revolution succeeded in pushing the Georgian government in this direction, replacing Shevardnadze with a president firmly committed to Georgian nationalism and to eradicating Russia’s influence in Georgia. Under Saakashvili, Russian influence was limited to a few enclaves living under constant threat of Georgian attack.

The broader developments in Central Asian pipeline politics since the Rose Revolution have not favored the US–a fact that no doubt played a role in US calculations to back Saakashvili in an increasingly reckless confrontation with Moscow. The growth of resistance to the US occupation of Afghanistan has precluded all plans for constructing a TAP pipeline south from Central Asia to the Indian Ocean. As a result, the Caucasian pipelines through Georgia represent the only viable path for Central Asian oil and gas exports that is acceptable to Washington.

In December 2007, Russia signed an agreement with Kazakhstan and Turkmenistan to build a new natural gas pipeline along the eastern Caspian Sea coast towards Russia. The construction of the pipeline, which would have an initial export capacity of 20 billion cubic meters per year, was seen as a major blow to US hopes that Central Asian governments would commit substantial oil and gas resources to a potential trans-Caspian pipeline linked to the existing, US-backed pipelines in the Caucasus.

China, whose attempts at securing energy supplies through pipelines from Central Asia into neighboring western China came to an abrupt halt after the US’s 2001 deployments to Central Asia, has since concluded a number of pipeline deals. A Kazakhstan-China oil pipeline, linking Kazakh fields in the northern Caspian region to the Chinese pipeline network in northwestern China’s Xinjiang Autonomous Region, is currently under construction and will become operational in October 2009. A parallel natural gas pipeline, with a branch downwards towards fields in Uzbekistan and Turkmenistan, is also under construction.

Pentagon can’t find $2.3 trillion, wasting trillions on ‘national defense’

1

Yes, America’s economy is a war economy. Not a “manufacturing” economy. Not an “agricultural” economy. Nor a “service” economy. Not even a “consumer” economy.

By Paul B. Farrell | Seriously, I looked into your eyes, America, saw deep into your soul. So let’s get honest and officially call it “America’s Outrageous War Economy.” Admit it: we secretly love our war economy. And that’s the answer to Jim Grant’s thought-provoking question last month in the Wall Street Journal — “Why No Outrage?”
There really is only one answer: Deep inside we love war. We want war. Need it. Relish it. Thrive on war. War is in our genes, deep in our DNA. War excites our economic brain. War drives our entrepreneurial spirit. War thrills the American soul. Oh just admit it, we have a love affair with war. We love “America’s Outrageous War Economy.”
Americans passively zone out playing video war games. We nod at 90-second news clips of Afghan war casualties and collateral damage in Georgia. We laugh at Jon Stewart’s dark comedic news and Ben Stiller’s new war spoof “Tropic Thunder” … all the while silently, by default, we’re cheering on our leaders as they aggressively expand “America’s Outrageous War Economy,” a relentless machine that needs a steady diet of war after war, feeding on itself, consuming our values, always on the edge of self-destruction.
  • Why else are Americans so eager and willing to surrender 54% of their tax dollars to a war machine, which consumes 47% of the world’s total military budgets?
  • Why are there more civilian mercenaries working for no-bid private war contractors than the total number of enlisted military in Iraq (180,000 to 160,000), at an added cost to taxpayers in excess of $200 billion and climbing daily?
  • Why do we shake our collective heads “yes” when our commander-in-chief proudly tells us he is a “war president;” and his party’s presidential candidate chants “bomb, bomb, bomb Iran,” as if “war” is a celebrity hit song?
  • Why do our spineless Democrats let an incompetent, blundering executive branch hide hundreds of billions of war costs in sneaky “supplemental appropriations” that are more crooked than Enron’s off-balance-sheet deals?
  • Why have Washington’s 537 elected leaders turned the governance of the American economy over to 42,000 greedy self-interest lobbyists?
  • And why earlier this year did our “support-our-troops” “war president” resist a new GI Bill because, as he said, his military might quit and go to college rather than re-enlist in his war; now we continue paying the Pentagon’s warriors huge $100,000-plus bonuses to re-up so they can keep expanding “America’s Outrageous War Economy?” Why? Because we secretly love war!
We’ve lost our moral compass: The contrast between today’s leaders and the 56 signers of the Declaration of Independence in 1776 shocks our conscience. Today war greed trumps morals. During the Revolutionary War our leaders risked their lives and fortunes; many lost both.
Today it’s the opposite: Too often our leaders’ main goal is not public service but a ticket to building a personal fortune in the new “America’s Outrageous War Economy,” often by simply becoming a high-priced lobbyist.
Ultimately, the price of our greed may be the fulfillment of Kevin Phillips’ warning in “Wealth and Democracy:” “Most great nations, at the peak of their economic power, become arrogant and wage great world wars at great cost, wasting vast resources, taking on huge debt, and ultimately burning themselves out.”
‘National defense’ a propaganda slogan selling a war economy?
But wait, you ask: Isn’t our $1.4 trillion war budget essential for “national defense” and “homeland security?” Don’t we have to protect ourselves?
Sorry folks, but our leaders have degraded those honored principles to advertising slogans. They’re little more than flag-waving excuses used by neocon war hawks to disguise the buildup of private fortunes in “America’s Outrageous War Economy.”
America may be a ticking time bomb, but we are threatened more by enemies within than external terrorists, by ideological fanatics on the left and the right. Most of all, we are under attack by our elected leaders who are motivated more by pure greed than ideology. They terrorize us, brainwashing us into passively letting them steal our money to finance “America’s Outrageous War Economy,” the ultimate “black hole” of corruption and trickle-up economics.
You think I’m kidding? I’m maybe too harsh? Sorry but others are far more brutal. Listen to the ideologies and realities eating at America’s soul.
1. Our toxic ‘war within’ is threatening America’s soul
How powerful is the Pentagon’s war machine? Trillions in dollars. But worse yet: Their mindset is now locked deep in our DNA, in our collective conscience, in America’s soul. Our love of war is enshrined in the writings of neocon war hawks like Norman Podoretz, who warns the Iraq War was the launching of “World War IV: The Long Struggle Against Islamofascism,” a reminder that we could be occupying Iraq for a hundred years. His WW IV also reminded us of the coming apocalyptic end-of-days “war of civilizations” predicted by religious leaders in both Christian and Islamic worlds two years ago.
In contrast, this ideology has been challenged in works like Craig Unger’s “American Armageddon: How the Delusions of the Neoconservatives and the Christian Right Triggered the Descent of America — and Still Imperil Our Future.”
Unfortunately, neither threat can be dismissed as “all in our minds” nor as merely ideological rhetoric. Trillions of tax dollars are in fact being spent to keep the Pentagon war machine aggressively planning and expanding wars decades in advance, including spending billions on propaganda brainwashing naïve Americans into co-signing “America’s Outrageous War Economy.” Yes, they really love war, but that “love” is toxic for America’s soul.
2. America’s war economy financed on blank checks to greedy
Read Nobel Economist Joseph Stiglitz and Harvard professor Linda Bilmes’ “$3 Trillion War.” They show how our government’s deceitful leaders are secretly hiding the real long-term costs of the Iraq War, which was originally sold to the American taxpayer with a $50 billion price tag and funded out of oil revenues.
But add in all the lifetime veterans’ health benefits, equipment placement costs, increased homeland security and interest on new federal debt, and suddenly taxpayers got a $3 trillion war tab!
3. America’s war economy has no idea where its money goes
Read Portfolio magazine’s special report “The Pentagon’s $1 Trillion Problem.” The Pentagon’s 2007 budget of $440 billion included $16 billion to operate and upgrade its financial system. Unfortunately “the defense department has spent billions to fix its antiquated financial systems [but] still has no idea where its money goes.”
And it gets worse: Back “in 2000, Defense’s inspector general told Congress that his auditors stopped counting after finding $2.3 trillion in unsupported entries.” Yikes, our war machine has no records for $2.3 trillion! How can we trust anything they say?
4. America’s war economy is totally ‘unmanageable’
For decades Washington has been waving that “national defense” flag, to force the public into supporting “America’s Outrageous War Economy.” Read John Alic’s “Trillions for Military Technology: How the Pentagon Innovates and Why It Costs So Much.”
A former Congressional Office of Technology Assessment staffer, he explains why weapon systems cost the Pentagon so much, “why it takes decades to get them into production even as innovation in the civilian economy becomes ever more frenetic and why some of those weapons don’t work very well despite expenditures of many billions of dollars,” and how “the internal politics of the armed services make weapons acquisition almost unmanageable.” Yes, the Pentagon wastes trillions planning its wars well in advance.
Comments? Tell us: What will it take to wake up America, get citizens, investors, anybody mad at “America’s Outrageous War Economy?”
Why don’t you rebel? Will the outrage come too late … after this massive war bubble explodes in our faces?

New Guidelines Would Give F.B.I. Broader Powers

2

By ERIC LICHTBLAU | A Justice Department plan would loosen restrictions on the Federal Bureau of Investigation to allow agents to open a national security or criminal investigation against someone without any clear basis for suspicion, Democratic lawmakers briefed on the details said Wednesday.

The plan, which could be made public next month, has already generated intense interest and speculation. Little is known about its precise language, but civil liberties advocates say they fear it could give the government even broader license to open terrorism investigations.

Congressional staff members got a glimpse of some of the details in closed briefings this month, and four Democratic senators told Attorney General Michael B. Mukasey in a letter on Wednesday that they were troubled by what they heard.

The senators said the new guidelines would allow the F.B.I. to open an investigation of an American, conduct surveillance, pry into private records and take other investigative steps “without any basis for suspicion.” The plan “might permit an innocent American to be subjected to such intrusive surveillance based in part on race, ethnicity, national origin, religion, or on protected First Amendment activities,” the letter said. It was signed by Russ Feingold of Wisconsin, Richard J. Durbin of Illinois, Edward M. Kennedy of Massachusetts and Sheldon Whitehouse of Rhode Island.

As the end of the Bush administration nears, the White House has been seeking to formalize in law and regulation some of the aggressive counterterrorism steps it has already taken in practice since the Sept. 11 attacks.

Congress overhauled the federal wiretapping law in July, for instance, and President Bush issued an executive order this month ratifying new roles for intelligence agencies. Other pending changes would also authorize greater sharing of intelligence information with the local police, a major push in the last seven years.

The Justice Department is already expecting criticism over the F.B.I. guidelines. In an effort to pre-empt critics, Mr. Mukasey gave a speech last week in Portland, Ore., describing the unfinished plan as an effort to “integrate more completely and harmonize the standards that apply to the F.B.I.’s activities.” Differing standards, he said, have caused confusion for field agents.

Mr. Mukasey emphasized that the F.B.I. would still need a “valid purpose” for an investigation, and that it could not be “simply based on somebody’s race, religion, or exercise of First Amendment rights.”

Rather than expanding government power, he said, “this document clarifies the rules by which the F.B.I. conducts its intelligence mission.”

In 2002, John Ashcroft, then the attorney general, allowed F.B.I. agents to visit public sites like mosques or monitor Web sites in the course of national security investigations. The next year, Mr. Bush issued guidelines allowing officials to use ethnicity or race in “narrow” circumstances to detect a terrorist threat.

The Democratic senators said the draft plan appeared to allow the F.B.I. to go even further in collecting information on Americans connected to “foreign intelligence” without any factual predicate. They also said there appeared to be few constraints on how the information would be shared with other agencies.

Michael German, a lawyer with the American Civil Liberties Union and a former F.B.I. agent, said the plan appeared to open the door still further to the use of data-mining profiles in tracking terrorism.

“This seems to be based on the idea that the government can take a bunch of data and create a profile that can be used to identify future bad guys,” he said. “But that has not been demonstrated to be true anywhere else.”

The Justice Department said Wednesday that in light of requests from members of Congress for more information, Mr. Mukasey would agree not to sign the new guidelines before a Sept. 17 Congressional hearing.

Scientists to study synthetic telepathy

1

UCi | A team of UC Irvine scientists has been awarded a $4 million grant from the U.S. Army Research Office to study the neuroscientific and signal-processing foundations of synthetic telepathy.

The research could lead to a communication system that would benefit soldiers on the battlefield and paralysis and stroke patients, according to lead researcher Michael D’Zmura, chair of the UCI Department of Cognitive Sciences.

“Thanks to this generous grant we can work with experts in automatic speech recognition and in brain imaging at other universities to research a brain-computer interface with applications in military, medical and commercial settings,” D’Zmura says.

The brain-computer interface would use a noninvasive brain imaging technology like electroencephalography to let people communicate thoughts to each other. For example, a soldier would “think” a message to be transmitted and a computer-based speech recognition system would decode the EEG signals. The decoded thoughts, in essence translated brain waves, are transmitted using a system that points in the direction of the intended target.

“Such a system would require extensive training for anyone using it to send and receive messages,” D’Zmura says. Initially, communication would be based on a limited set of words or phrases that are recognized by the system; it would involve more complex language and speech as the technology is developed further.”

D’Zmura will collaborate with UCI cognitive science professors Ramesh Srinivasan, Gregory Hickok and Kourosh Saberi. Joining the team are researchers Richard Stern and Vijayakumar Bhagavatula from Carnegie Mellon University and David Poeppel from the University of Maryland.

The grant comes from the U.S. Department of Defense’s Multidisciplinary University Research Initiative program, which supports research involving more than one science and engineering discipline. Its goal is to develop applications for military and commercial uses.

London tube workers hit back at profiteers

0

Socialist Worker | The threat to strike by 1,000 workers at the Tube Lines consortium on the London Underground over pay and conditions this week has won a new offer from bosses as Socialist Worker went to press.

Theirs is a battle between those who provide a vital public service and the bosses who make a profit from it. A 72-hour strike is planned from 12 noon on Wednesday of this week by maintenance workers in the RMT union. It will have a major effect on the Piccadilly, Jubilee and Northern lines. It may also hit other lines as drivers refuse to compromise safety by taking trains out.

Terry Morgan, Tube Lines’ chief executive, attacked the strike for being “about politics” because the union wants to return the tube to the public sector. But Tube Lines has benefited from Gordon Brown’s political decision to privatise maintenance work on the London Underground. It made £73 million in pre-tax profits last year.

Privatisation has been a disaster. Millions of people will agree with the RMT’s argument to fully renationalise the tube.

Workers who keep Britain’s public services running safely and smoothly deserve decent pay and conditions. The public deserves a service that is run by someone who puts their safety over profit.

Britain’s terror laws have left me and my family shattered

1

Stop the War Coalition | The UN’s committee on human rights has just published a report criticising Britain’s anti-terror laws and the resulting curbs on civil liberties. For many commentators the issues raised are mostly a matter of academic abstractions and speculative meanderings. For me, it is anything but. These laws have destroyed my life.

On May 14 I was arrested under section 41 of the Terrorism Act – on suspicion of the “instigation, preparation and commission of acts of terrorism”: an absurdly nebulous formulation that told me nothing about the sin I had apparently committed. Once in custody, almost 48 hours passed before it was confirmed that the entire operation (involving dozens of officers, police cars, vans, and scientific support agents) was triggered by the presence on my University of Nottingham office computer of an equally absurd document called the “al-Qaida Training Manual”, a declassified open-source document that I had never read and had completely forgotten about since it had been sent to me months before.

Rizwaan Sabir, a politics student friend of mine (who was also arrested), had downloaded the file from the US justice department website while conducting research on terrorism for his upcoming PhD. An extended version of the same document (which figures on the politics department’s official reading list) was also available on Amazon. I edit a political magazine; Rizwaan regularly sent me copies of research materials he was using, and this document was one.

Within hours of my incarceration I had lost track of time. I often awoke thinking I had been asleep for days only to discover it wasn’t midnight yet. My confidence in the competence (and motives) of the police ebbed away. I found myself shifting my energies from remaining cheerful to remaining sane. In the early hours, I was often startled by the metallic toilet seat, crouched in the corner like some sinister beast.

For days on end, I drew cartoons and wrote diary entries in the margins of Mills and Boon novellas. I spent hours reciting things to myself: names of Saul Bellow characters, physics Nobel prize winners, John Coltrane albums, anything to keep the numbness away.

I’m constantly coming across efforts being made to give detention without charge the Walt Disney treatment: the crushing weight of solitary confinement is painted as a non-issue; the soul-sapping nothingness of the claustrophobic, cold cell is portrayed as a mild inconvenience. Make no mistake: the feeling that one’s fate is in the hands of the very people who are apparently trying to convict you is, without doubt, one of the most devastating horrors a human being can ever be subjected to. It is (to misquote Carl von Clausewitz) the continuation of torture by other means.

“Those who have nothing to hide, have nothing to fear,” goes the tautological reasoning of the paranoia merchants calling for harsher, ever more draconian “security” measures – as we saw throughout the 42-days debate. They should read Kafka: nothing is more terrifying than being arrested for something you know you haven’t done. Indeed, it is the innocent who suffers the most because it is the innocent who is tormented the most. The guilty calculates, triangulates, anticipates. The innocent doesn’t know where to start. The answers and the questions are absolute, unbreachable, towering conundrums.

I underwent 20 hours of vigorous interrogation while entire days were being completely wasted by the police micro-examining every detail of my life: my political activism, my writings, my work in theatre and dance, my love life, my photography, my cartooning, my magazine subscriptions, my bus tickets.

Aspects of my life that would have been seen as commendable in others were suddenly viewed as suspect in my case for no apparent reason other than my religious and ethnic background. I was guilty of being that strangest of creatures: a Muslim who reads; who studied engineering yet writes about Bob Dylan; was a vocal opponent of the Iraq war yet owns all of Christopher Hitchens’ writings; admires Terry Eagleton yet defends Martin Amis; interviews Kazuo Ishiguro, listens to Leonard Cohen, goes to Radiohead concerts, all of which became the subject of rather bizarre questioning.

This is not all: outside, lives are shattered, jobs are lost, marriages are destroyed, minds are damaged, friends and families are traumatised – often irrevocably so. My parents, whom I wasn’t allowed to call, could barely get any sleep throughout the ordeal. Many of my Muslim university friends were, and still are, worried about being targeted themselves. For most of my loved ones, despite my innocence, nothing will ever be the same again. I’m now jobless, facing destitution and threatened with deportation from the country I’ve called home for nearly half my life.

Immense pressure is exerted on law enforcement agencies by their political mandarins to produce “results”: pressure to produce a higher number of arrests but also the corollary, more dangerous, impulse to justify them at any cost. Naturally, through a perverted but pervasive circularity in the logic, lack of evidence becomes the very justification for requesting “more time”. The government claims that checks and balances will ensure extensions to detention periods are based on verifiable and compelling arguments. I beg to differ: in my case, the judge was simply bullied by streams of technospeak until she had no option but to grant extra time.

Fighting terrorism is a serious matter and needs to be tackled in a serious way – not through empty gimmicks sustained by fear-mongering and alarmist rhetoric. The real danger is that we are witnessing a slide from the essential purity of habeas corpus into a Britain where the innocent are detained until proven guilty.

Hicham Yezza, an activist and writer, was released without charge after six days in custody, immediately rearrested on immigration charges and issued with a removal order to Algeria, after which he was held for a further 27 days; he is still awaiting a conclusion to his deportation case
www.freehicham.co.uk

Police to get £40m mobile fingerprinting kit

1

By Mike Simons | The Home Office is preparing to spend up to £40m on the roll out of a mobile biometric identification service.

The police are seeking the ability to provide real or near-real time identification of people at the scenes of incidents, through accessing fingerprint and other biometric information held by law and order agencies.

The government is calling for bidders for a framework agreement involving a maximum of 10 suppliers that will run for four years, with a possible two year extension to allow it to synchronise the contract with its Ident1, fingerprint recognition contract.

The project, dubbed “MIDAS,” follows on from the successful implementation of the Project Lantern mobile identification pilot schemes.

Project Lantern was mobile hand-held fingerprinting trial that enabled police officers to check a person’s identity in an operational environment and check them against the Ident1 national database.

The successful trial saw results returned, usually within a few minutes, and provided information to aid identification. The devices speeded up the process of establishing identity, and also allowed officers to make informed decisions by knowing whether an individual was wanted or dangerous.

A pilot began in November 2006, deploying 100 Lantern devices in ten police forces, mainly in support of work involving automatic number plate recognition technology.

In March 2008 an additional 100 devices were deployed in a further 10 forces to explore the device’s use in broader police work. This included officers in local stations, roads policing units and support groups.

The pilot has now been extended to March 2010 while a national solution is procured.

According to the National Police Improvement Agency, the pilot studies have shown significant time savings. Forces using Lantern together with Automatic Number Plate Recognition showed an average time saving of more than an hour per stop. In a survey of officers, involved in the trials, 90 per cent estimated that Lantern was saving at least 30 minutes per case.

Defence contractor and supplier Northrop Grumman was responsible for the design, deployment and support of the pilot project. Its sub-contractor Sagem supplied the Lantern devices and searching capability on Ident1. Cable&Wireless provide the encryption and secure connectivity.

Libby questioned on forged letter linking Saddam to 9/11

1

House Judiciary Chairman John Conyers (D-MI) issued letters of inquiry Wednesday to Vice President Cheney’s former chief of staff, I. Lewis Libby, regarding a forged letter linking Saddam Hussein to the 9/11 attacks.

The Michigan Democrat also sent letters to senior former Bush intelligence officials, including Robert Richer, former CIA Deputy Director of Clandestine Operations, who claimed that Cheney’s office pushed the CIA to develop a phony letter to aid their argument for a preemptive strike on Iraq. The letters were copied to RAW STORY.

“I have become very concerned with the possibility that this Administration may have violated federal law by using the resources of our intelligence agencies to influence domestic policy processes or opinion,” Conyers wrote Libby, who was convicted of obstruction of justice in the outing of CIA agent Valerie Plame. “The law specifically provides that “[n]o covert action may be conducted which is intended to influence United States political processes, public opinion, policies, or media.”

Conyers’ letters come in the wake of claims by author Ron Suskind, who quotes Richer in his most recent book as saying a forged letter linking Saddam Hussein to the Sept. 11, 2001 attacks was ordered on White House stationery.

“What I remember is George [Tenet] saying, ‘we got this from’–basically, from what George said was ‘downtown,'” Richer says in a transcript Suskind released. “He may have hinted–just by the way he said it, it would have–cause almost all that stuff came from one place only: Scooter Libby and the shop around the vice president.”

Richer contests the account. In an unusual move, the White House issued a denial in Richer’s name when the details of the book were released earlier this month.

In it, Richer declared, “I never received direction from George Tenet or anyone else in my chain of command to fabricate a document … as outlined in Mr. Suskind’s book.”

Suskind, however, says he has a tape of their conversation, which took place earlier this year. His prior accounts of internal Administration machinations have stood up under scrutiny. Conyers asked that Richer “set up a time” to discuss allegations surrounding the false letter.

“According to recent allegations in your capacity as the former CIA Deputy Director of Clandestine Operations and Chief of the Near East Division, you were tasked by former CIA Director George Tenet to create the false letter and may even have seen the White House stationery on which the false letter assignment was reportedly written,” Conyers wrote Richer Wednesday. “Given your reported direct knowledge of these events, I am requesting that you contact Judiciary Committee staff as soon as possible to set up a time to discuss your involvement and knowledge of the allegedly false letter.”

Full transcripts of the letters follow. Conyers also wrote John Hannah, Assistant to the Vice President for National Security Affairs.

Book asserts White House ordered forged letter

Suskind’s book, The Way of The World, asserts that senior Bush officials ordered the CIA to forge a document “proving” that Saddam Hussein had been trying to manufacture nuclear weapons and was collaborating with al Qaeda. The alleged result was a faked memorandum from then chief of Saddam’s intelligence service Tahir Jalil Habbush dated July 1, 2001, and written to Hussein.

The bogus memo claimed that 9/11 hijacker Mohammed Atta had received training in Baghdad but also discussed the arrival of a “shipment” from Niger, which the Administration claimed had supplied Iraq with yellowcake uranium — based on yet another forged document whose source remains uncertain.

The memo subsequently was treated as fact by the British Sunday Telegraph, and cited by William Safire in his New York Times column, providing fodder for Bush’s efforts to take the US to war.

It is likely the Vice President’s Office will refer to Richer’s denial on the matter and claim that discussions between the Vice President’s staff and the Vice President are protected. Libby, who was convicted of four counts of obstruction of justice and perjury, was sentenced to 30 months in prison but had his sentence commuted by President Bush in July 2007.

Letter to Rob Richer, former CIA Deputy Director of Clandestine Operations

Mr. Rob Richer
c/o Cofer Black
Total Intelligence Solutions
1650 Tysons Boulevard, Suite 800
McLean, Virginia 22102

Dear Mr. Richer:

I am writing to follow up on recent serious allegations regarding the creation of a false letter from Tahir Jalil Habbush, Saddam Hussein’s former Chief of Intelligence, to Saddam Hussein. The letter, which was allegedly backdated to July 1, 2001, attempted to establish an operational link between al Qaeda and Saddam Hussein in the period before the 9/11 attacks by specifically stating that 9/11 ringleader Mohammed Atta had received training in Iraq. At the time of the alleged decision in 2003 to concoct the false letter, the Vice President’s Office had been reportedly pressuring the CIA to prove this connection as a justification to invade Iraq. The letter also falsely noted that Iraq had received a “shipment” (presumably uranium) from Niger with the assistance of al Qaeda.

Upon careful review of the allegations concerning this matter, I have become very concerned with the possibility that this Administration may have violated federal law by using the resources of our intelligence agencies to influence domestic policy processes or opinion. The law specifically provides that “[n]o covert action may be conducted which is intended to influence United States political processes, public opinion, policies, or media.”

According to recent allegations, in your capacity as the former CIA Deputy Director of Clandestine Operations and Chief of the Near East Division, you were tasked by former CIA Director George Tenet to create the false letter and may even have seen the White House stationery on which the false letter assignment was reportedly written. Given your reported direct knowledge of these events, I am requesting that you contact Judiciary Committee staff as soon as possible to set up a time to discuss your involvement and knowledge of the allegedly false letter. Please direct your response and any questions to the Judiciary Committee office, 2138 Rayburn House Office Building, Washington, DC 20515 (tel: XXXXXXXXXX, fax: XXXXXXXXXX). Thank you very much for your cooperation in this matter.

Sincerely,

John Conyers, Jr.
Chairman

Letter to I. Lewis Libby, former chief of staff to Vice President Dick Cheney

ONE HUNDRED TENTH CONGRESS
Congress of the United States
House of Representatives
COMMITTEE ON THE JUDICIARY
2138 Rayburn House Office Building
Washington, DC 20515-6216
(202) XXXXXXXX
http://www.house.gov/judiciary
August 20, 2008

Mr. Lewis I. Libby
The Hudson Institute
Sixth Floor
1015 15th Street, NW
Washington, D.C. 20005

Dear Mr. Libby:

I am writing to follow up on recent serious allegations regarding the creation of a false letter from Tahir Jalil Habbush, Saddam Hussein’s former Chief of Intelligence, to Saddam Hussein. The letter, which was allegedly backdated to July 1, 2001, attempted to establish an operational link between al Qaeda and Saddam Hussein in the period before the 9/11 attacks by specifically stating that 9/11 ringleader Mohammed Atta had received training in Iraq. At the time of the alleged decision in 2003 to concoct the false letter, the Vice President’s Office had been reportedly pressuring the CIA to prove this connection as a justification to invade Iraq. The letter also falsely noted that Iraq had received a “shipment” (presumably uranium) from Niger with the assistance of al Qaeda.

Upon careful review of the allegations concerning this matter, I have become very concerned with the possibility that this Administration may have violated federal law by using the resources of our intelligence agencies to influence domestic policy processes or opinion. The law specifically provides that “[n]o covert action may be conducted which is intended to influence United States political processes, public opinion, policies, or media.”

According to recent allegations, the Vice President’s Office was involved in directing CIA officials to draft the false letter. As the former Chief of Staff to the Vice President, you may have direct knowledge of these events. I am requesting that you contact Judiciary Committee staff as soon as possible to set up a time to discuss your involvement and knowledge of the allegedly false letter. Please direct your response and any questions to the Judiciary Committee office, 2138 Rayburn House Office Building, Washington, DC 20515 (tel: XXXXXXXXXX, fax: XXXXXXXXXX). Thank you very much for your cooperation in this matter.

Sincerely,

John Conyers, Jr.
Chairman

Letter to John Hannah, Assistant to the Vice President for National Security Affairs

ONE HUNDRED TENTH CONGRESS
Congress of the United States
House of Representatives
COMMITTEE ON THE JUDICIARY
2138 Rayburn House Office Building
Washington, DC 20515-6216
(202)XXXXXXXX
http://www.house.gov/judiciary
August 20, 2008

Mr. John Hannah
Assistant to the Vice President for National Security Affairs
Eisenhower Executive Complex
The White House
1600 Pennsylvania Avenue
Washington, D.C. 20500

Dear Mr. Hannah:

I am writing to follow up on recent serious allegations regarding the creation of a false letter from Tahir Jalil Habbush, Saddam Hussein’s former Chief of Intelligence, to Saddam Hussein. The letter, which was allegedly backdated to July 1, 2001, attempted to establish an operational link between al Qaeda and Saddam Hussein in the period before the 9/11 attacks by specifically stating that 9/11 ringleader Mohammed Atta had received training in Iraq. At the time of the alleged decision in 2003 to concoct the false letter, the Vice President’s Office had been reportedly pressuring the CIA to prove this connection as a justification to invade Iraq. The letter also falsely noted that Iraq had received a “shipment” (presumably uranium) from Niger with the assistance of al Qaeda.

Upon careful review of the allegations concerning this matter, I have become very concerned with the possibility that this Administration may have violated federal law by using the resources of our intelligence agencies to influence domestic policy processes or opinion. The law specifically provides that “[n]o covert action may be conducted which is intended to influence United States political processes, public opinion, policies, or media.”

According to recent allegations, the Vice President’s Office was involved in directing CIA officials to draft the false letter. As Assistant to the Vice President for National Security Affairs, you may have direct knowledge of these events. I am requesting that you contact Judiciary Committee staff as soon as possible to set up a time to discuss your involvement and knowledge of the allegedly false letter. Please direct your response and any questions to the Judiciary Committee office, 2138 Rayburn House Office Building, Washington, DC 20515 (tel: 202-XXXXXXX fax: 202-XXXXXXXX). Thank you very much for your cooperation in this matter.

Sincerely,

John Conyers, Jr.
Chairman

###

PDF copies of the letters are also available at the links below:

To Rob Richer

To former CIA Director George Tenet

To John Maguire, Director of Congressional Affairs

To A. B. Krongard

To I. Lewis Libby

To John Hannah, Assistant to the Vice President for National Security Affairs

Antiwar Activists Win $2 Million Settlement From New York City

1

A group of 52 local activists today announced a $2 million settlement in their lawsuit against the City of New York. The activists were illegally arrested on April 7, 2003 while protesting against the Iraq war in front of a military contractor’s offices in midtown. The settlement in Kunstler et al v. New York City follows the dismissal in 2003 of all criminal charges brought against these individuals and four costly years of delays by the City in negotiating an end to the civil lawsuit.

“The New York Police Department violated core constitutional rights when it arrested a group of peaceful demonstrators who were lawfully protesting against the commencement of the Iraq war and those who stood to profit from it,” notes Sarah Netburn, attorney with Emery Celli Brinkerhoff Abady LLP, which handled the civil rights case along with the Center for Constitutional Rights. “We are gratified by the City’s decision to compensate these individuals whose targeted arrests were without probable cause and intended to quell future protest in New York City. This lawsuit, and this settlement, vindicates our clients’ rights to assemble and speak their mind free from the fear that they will be punished for their views.”

Attorneys and plaintiffs noted, however, that the City’s decision to drag the case out is part of a long and disturbing pattern by which it attempts to “wear down” plaintiffs to avoid political damage, even at huge expense of tax dollars and City resources. “My question is, why did the NYPD send over 100 police in riot gear, along with vehicles to block the street and disrupt the flow of morning rush hour traffic, all to stop a legal, peaceful protest, when there are far more important matters they could be pursuing? And, why did they fight us in court so doggedly when they knew the evidence proved that we were arrested without any police orders to leave?” asked Ahmad Shirazi, a film editor and grandfather and one of the plaintiffs in the case.

An NYPD videotape of the demonstration depicts a group of demonstrators lined along the sidewalk of West 56th Street between 5th and 6th Avenues — with ample space for pedestrians — who were arrested without any police warning or opportunity to leave. The police arrested 94 people that day.

The arrests took place outside the offices of the Carlyle Group, an investment firm with ties to the Bush family and an extensive portfolio of holdings in the military-defense sector. The police tactics used that day became the model used by the NYPD during the 2004 Republican National Convention held in New York.

At that event, thousands of activists were illegally arrested, jailed and mistreated. Lawsuits related to the police conduct at the RNC are still winding their way through the courts. NYPD officials are now consulting with police departments in Denver and Minneapolis on their plans for the 2008 Democratic and Republican Conventions.

“We hope our victory helps convince the City to stop violating people’s rights as a matter of policy and stop wasting taxpayers’ money doing so,” said Sarah Kunstler, an attorney and filmmaker who is the daughter of the late William Kunstler, noted attorney and civil rights champion. Ms. Kunstler was acquitted after a trial of all criminal charges brought against her. “It should also serve as a reminder that Washington’s illegal war in Afghanistan and Iraq is also being fought at home — against its own citizens and in the name of war profiteers like Carlyle and Halliburton. We intend to continue our resistance until this stops.”

The Center for Constitutional Rights is dedicated to advancing and protecting the rights guaranteed by the United States Constitution and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights. Founded in 1966 by attorneys who represented civil rights movements in the South, CCR is a non-profit legal and educational organization committed to the creative use of law as a positive force for social change. For more information on CCR’s work visit our website at www.ccrjustice.org.

Elderly women sent to labour camp over homes protest

1

Two elderly Chinese women who applied during the Olympic Games to protest over the loss of their homes have been ordered to spend a year in a labour camp, a relative said, while police squelched a pro-Tibet demonstration early Thursday.

The women were still at home three days after being officially notified they would have to serve a one year term of re-education through labour, but were under surveillance by a neighbourhood watch group, said Li Xuehui, the son of one of the women.

A rights group said the threat of prison appeared to be an intimidation tactic.

Li said no cause was given for the order to imprison his 79-year-old mother, Wu Dianyuan, and her neighbor Wang Xiuying, 77.

“Wang Xiuy ing is almost blind and disabled. What sort of re-education through labour can she serve?” Li said in a telephone interview. “But they can also be taken away at any time.”

A spokeswoman for the Beijing re-education through labour bureau said, “We have no records of these two names in our system.”

Swarms of plainclothes police took away four foreign activists protesting against Chinese rule over Tibet – the latest in a series of such demonstrations during the Olympics. The four unfurled a Tibetan flag and shouted “Free Tibet” south of the National Stadium, the New York-based Students for a Free Tibet said. It put the number of police at 50; a spokeswoman for the Beijing Public Security Bureau declined comment.

Hua Guofeng, handpicked by a dying Mao Zedong to succeed him as Communist Party chairman but toppled by reformist leader Deng Xiaoping in the cut-throat world of elite Chinese politics, died yesterday. He was 87.

His death marked the passing of one of the last of an old guard of Communist leaders who had lived through the Mao era.

Newsquest

US Colony Iraq Subsidizes Military-Industrial Fraud

0

Corporate-government fraud has gotten a major boost ever since Iraq became the latest colony of the failing American Empire.

“Iraq is fast becoming one of the United States’ top customers for military sales,” reports USA Today in an article called “Iraqis buy billions in U.S. arms.”
http://www.usatoday.com/news/military/
2008-08-18-iraqtanks_N.htm?loc=interstitialskip

“Since January 2007, Iraq has spent $3.1 billion on U.S. weapons. That number looks likely to grow exponentially as Iraq uses its vast unspent reserves of petrodollars to develop its army into a force capable of defending its borders against hostile neighbors.

“In the past two months alone, the Pentagon has alerted Congress of a possible $8.7 billion worth of additional military sales to Iraq, for everything from lightweight attack helicopters to armored ambulances to binoculars.”

This is a choice fraud in that so-called “defense” contractors can sell their over-priced and pointless weapons to Iraq which has since become literally a “captive market”.

USA Today also reports that Iraq’s Ministry of Defense “is considering buying 140 of the United States’ most advanced tanks, at approximately $4 million to $5 million per tank, plus hundreds of millions of dollars’ worth of support equipment to go along with the tanks.”

Can Pentagon fraud get any sweeter than that?

Submitted by: Source

Anti-Union Groups Run Orwellian Ads

0

PR Watch | The Center for Union Facts, one of lobbyist Rick Berman‘s front groups, is railing against the Employee Free Choice Act, legislation that would “allow employees at a work place to unionize as soon as a majority signs cards expressing support to join a union.” Labor rights advocates say the bill is needed, because of employer intimidation and union-busting tactics. Berman’s Center, as the “Employee Freedom Action Committee,” says the bill would allow “union bosses” to “stand over workers’ shoulders and use coercion.”

It’s launched a $30 million campaign, including radio, television, print and online ads and “a substantial grassroots organizing effort.” The “Coalition for a Democratic Workplace,” which is comprised of “virtually hundreds of businesses, chambers of commerce and trade associations,” is also spending millions to defeat the bill. Both groups are targeting Senators “in what they see as key states,” including Maine and New Hampshire. The bill has passed the House and is before the Senate. “The folks behind the ad campaign fear that if Sen. Barack Obama, an Employee Free Choice Act sponsor, is elected president and power shifts to the Democrats in the Senate, the bill will become law.”

Sweatshops on Trial in North Carolina

0

By Phil Mattera | In April, I wrote about the efforts of my son Thomas and other students at the University of North Carolina to get UNC’s administration to endorse the Designated Suppliers Program (DSP), an initiative that seeks to improve the abysmal working conditions of employees at companies that produce university logo apparel–a big business for schools such as Carolina.

After pressing the matter for many months without getting a response, UNC student activists launched a sit-in this spring at the building containing the office of Chancellor James Moeser. The hope was that Moeser, who was planning to leave UNC, would resolve the DSP issue before departing. The administration tolerated the occupation (with certain ground rules) but dragged its feet on the supplier issue. Finally, on May 2, after the sit-in had continued for 16 days, Moeser announced he would not act on the DSP. This prompted students to occupy his personal office. After police arrived and arrested one activist, most of the protesters left. Those who remained, including Thomas, were eventually arrested and charged with “failure to disperse.” Salma Mirza, the only one who went limp when taken into custody, was also charged with resisting arrest.

Yesterday, the five anti-sweatshop activists had their day in court in Chapel Hill. The charges, all misdemeanors, were heard in Orange County District Court right across from campus on Franklin Street, the main student shopping strip and the place where UNC fans celebrate major basketball victories. District Court normally deals with mundane matters such as traffic violations, so it caused a stir when the five defendants, all wearing blue t-shirts emblazoned with the slogan “Justice for All Workers,” showed up with their pro bono legal team–led by veteran civil rights lawyer Al McSurely–and supporters who filled the gallery.

The defendants’ plea of not guilty was followed by a three-hour trial presided over by Judge Pat Devine without a jury. The prosecution’s case consisted of the testimony of four police officers and a video of the arrests. As his first defense witness, McSurely called on Mirza, who started to give a detailed description of the sweatshop problem and the campaign to get universities to sign on to the DSP (around 45 have done so). When the prosecution objected, Judge Devine refused to rule the background testimony irrelevant but said that no more than five minutes could be devoted to it. In doing so, the judge made it clear she was taking it for granted that the students were justified in arguing that supplier factories were abusive and that the UNC administration was complicit. The administration, though not a party to the case and not represented at the trial, was in effect being found guilty of enabling worker exploitation.

McSurely’s other objective was to have the charges against the five students dismissed. He sought to do this in several ways: he argued that the exact charge of “failure to disperse” was inappropriate in the circumstances; he elicited testimony from the students that they had never heard a final warning that they would be subject to arrest if they did not leave the chancellor’s office; he had Linda Gomaa, the first to be arrested, testify that she was taken into custody before any kind of warning was given; and he argued that Mirza’s behavior did not constitute resisting arrest.

McSurely also presented a necessity defense, arguing that even if the students technically broke the law, they should be found not guilty because their actions were in pursuit of a higher good. This was buttressed, for example, by the testimony of defendant Tim Stallmann that the university had previously improved the working conditions of the campus housekeeping staff after students staged protests and engaged in civil disobedience.

Judge Devine did not accept any of those arguments. She concluded that the defendants knew they were crossing a line when they moved the sit-in to the the chancellor’s office; that the police adequately warned the students they would be arrested if they didn’t leave the premises; and that Mirza’s behavior constituted resisting arrest. She also rejected the necessity defense, agreeing with the prosecutor that there was insufficient “nexus” between the actions of the students and the ending of worker exploitation.

The judge, however, made it clear she had enormous respect for the five students, each of whom had been called by McSurely to testify about their commitment to social and economic justice. Sarah Hirsch, for example, described her work with Witness for Peace, and Thomas mentioned that he had just completed a ten-week program with a non-profit called Bike and Build, during which he and others cycled across the country and worked on Habit for Humanity-type housing projects along the way.

After the prosecutor indicated the state was not seeking harsh penalties, Judge Devine in effect imposed no sentences at all. Instead, she entered a “prayer for judgment continued,” a procedure–unique to North and South Carolina, it seems–in which there is a finding of guilt but no formal conviction is entered on the defendant’s record.

All parties got what they wanted. The prosecutor got a finding of guilt, the police were vindicated in their actions, and the students got an opportunity to highlight the sweatshop issue in court and ended up with the mildest possible adverse ruling. The only real loser was the UNC administration, whose intransigence on the DSP issue emerged from the trial looking even more unreasonable.

Mobile Phones and the Orwellian Society

0

By Daniel Soar | For a moment in the late 1990s, it looked as though mobile phones might make us free. You could work in the park, be available when you wanted to be, choose who you answered to. You could be anywhere while you did anything. If location was mentioned it was gratuitous chatter (‘I’m on the train!’) or a handy lie (‘I’m in the office’). Back then, a phone in your pocket was an expensive novelty. Ten years later, there are 3.3 billion active mobile phones, meaning that — if you ignore the show-offs who have several — half the planet has one; 85 per cent of the million new subscriptions taken up each day come from the developing world. Three billion people are just a few button presses away, and where they are doesn’t matter. But if you’re the retiring type, the trouble is that the phone companies and interested others do know exactly where you are, at any given second, so long as you have your handbag with you and your phone switched on: even the most basic technology, phone mast triangulation, locates you to within a couple of hundred metres; newer phones, with GPS built in, will tell any system that asks whether you’re in the kitchen or the loo.

You might assume that this information is either of interest to no one or, at the very least, protected by privacy laws and accessible only by the agencies that hunt suicide bombers and paedophiles. But you’d be wrong. Anyone can, for instance, sign up — at £29.99 a year — to mapAmobile.com (‘you’ll always know where your loved ones are’), which allows you to follow the movements of your ‘family and friends’ on a computer screen. The safeguard, from your friend’s point of view, is that he has to consent to being tracked, a process which involves his replying to a text message alerting him to the request; this shouldn’t be much of a hindrance to you as would-be stalker if he happens to leave his phone lying around. That this sort of enterprising solution is possible is the result of the major networks — in the UK, Vodafone, Orange, O2 and T-Mobile — having decided, in around 2002, to sell their location data to any company willing to pay for it.

Such services are obscure, and barely legal, but it’s about to be brought home to the majority of mobile users that what they’re up to isn’t private information. Owners of the latest version of Apple’s iPhone — avidly queued for at stores around the world last month — can now download an application that displays a friend’s location as a bright green dot on a map. In 2009, phones running Google’s Android operating system will be able to show you in pictures how to reach that green dot while avoiding traffic snarl-ups and stray hurricanes; they’ll also tell you how much a drink will cost when you get there. Along the way you might have to dodge a virtual attack from a passing stranger who, like you, has signed up to an urban espionage ‘immersive game’ and has pegged you in the street as a target. If all this sounds like unnecessary gimmickry, and you’re perfectly happy with your phone the way it is, or would be if only you knew how to make it ring like a phone rather than a wheezing horse or a three-dimensional aural representation of the rings of Saturn, then you’re out of luck: the information your phone provides is out there anyway. It doesn’t belong to you, and anyone with the required resources can do with it what they will.

At a very rough estimate half a trillion calls are made each day on the world’s mobile networks: their origin and destination, their time and duration and all identifying codes are logged on telecom provider hard-drives and generally retained, under emerging legislation, for up to two years. It’s impossible to exaggerate the value of these data. In most countries no one can listen in to your conversation — though it’s technically trivial to do — without a warrant, but given what most of us talk about most of the time what we actually say when we’re on the phone may be the least interesting thing about the call. Certainly this is the view of the growing Intelligence Support Systems industry (ISS), which sells analysis tools to government agencies, police forces and — increasingly — the phone companies themselves. Take the case of ThorpeGlen, a company headquartered in a business park outside Ipswich that also hosts research divisions of BT and Nokia Siemens Networks. At the frequent ISS conferences — Dubai, Qatar, Washington, Prague — one of the key topics of discussion tends to be how to identify targets for LI (that’s ‘lawful intercept’) in the first place: it’s a cinch to bug someone, but how do you help a law enforcement agency decide who to bug?

To help answer that question, companies like ThorpeGlen (and VASTech and Kommlabs and Aqsacom) sell systems that carry out ‘passive probing’, analysing vast quantities of communications data to detect subjects of potential interest to security services, thereby doing their expensive legwork for them. ThorpeGlen’s VP of sales and marketing showed off one of these tools in a ‘Webinar’ broadcast to the ISS community on 13 May. He used as an example the data from ‘a mobile network we have access to’ — since he chose not to obscure the numbers we know it’s Indonesia-based — and explained that calls from the entire network of 50 million subscribers had been processed, over a period of two weeks, to produce a database of eight billion or so ‘events’. Everyone on a network, he said, is part of a group; most groups talk to other groups, creating a spider’s web of interactions. Of the 50 million subscribers ThorpeGlen processed, 48 million effectively belonged to ‘one large group’: they called one another, or their friends called friends of their friends; this set of people was dismissed. A further 400,000 subscriptions could be attributed to a few large ‘nodes’, with numbers belonging to call centres, shops and information services. The remaining groups ranged in size from two to 142 subscribers. Members of these groups only ever called each other — clear evidence of antisocial behaviour — and, in one extreme case, a group was identified in which all the subscribers only ever called a single number at the centre of the web. This section of the ThorpeGlen presentation ended with one word: ‘WHY??’

Once you’ve found your terrorist, how do you know that he won’t, say, pass on his phone, or get a new number or use a throwaway pay-as-you-go handset (as British Olympic officals were advised to do by MI6 in an attempt to evade Chinese spies)? ThorpeGlen has a solution for that too. It also sells ‘profiling’ systems, which measure the behaviour pattern of an individual subscriber and, using statistical analysis, determine whether that same pattern is now appearing from another source. In other words, if your terrorist gets a new phone you’ll still know it’s him. If he keeps the same phone and starts changing his pattern, then he’s about to blow up Jakarta International Airport. This is important stuff. If you want to see how ThorpeGlen’s systems work for yourself, just log on to https://81.143.55.50:58443; all you need to do is figure out a username and password. Who isn’t a spy now?

McCain’s Mostly Ignored Gambling Problem

0

By Stephen C. Rose | Today the Internet is rife with speculation about whether John McCain heard the questions Rick Warren asked Barack Obama. McCain seems to have done predictably well answering the questions, whether he knew them or not. In fact anyone would think the man had a permanent pass. All he does is say how imperfect he is, engage in a Chaplinsque facial self-denigration, and all is well.

Even the polls seem to be with him. Three days tied in Gallup and a boost in Ohio.

This despite evidence that the man is a raving neocon, the admission that he will do what he can to wrest choice from the province of women and his fatuous notion that we can run a government on fumes.

But what most sticks in my craw is the plain proof that the man is close to being a compulsive gambler, certified as such by at least some of our mainstream media, and no one to my knowledge has directly confronted him on the subject.

McCain is a documented craps player. He has been known to play craps on impulse for 14 hours at a stretch.

Of the game of craps, Anthony Holden comments, “We poker players don’t call poker gambling. It is a game of skill. Craps is an absurd game of luck. You may have thrilling short term wins but only madmen play craps.”

Matthew Yglesias notes, “The McCains own eleven houses and spent over $200,000 on ‘household staff’ in 2007 so I suppose he can afford tens of thousands of dollars in gambling losses every year. At the same time, you wouldn’t want someone to enjoy ‘playing against the odds’ with the country’s public policy. The fact that McCain seems to think there’s some kind of ‘betting strategy’ that can turn craps into a winning game also raises some questions about his math.”

How serious is the gambling urge for McCain? What does the love of craps say about his “realism” regarding actual battles and conflicts? Would McCain be willing to gamble with human lives?

Connie Bruck puts it like this:

The moment the car stopped at McCain’s hotel in downtown New Orleans, he set out at his usual fast clip for Harrah’s, across the street. McCain is an avid gambler. Wes Gullett, a close friend who worked for McCain for years, told me that they used to play craps in Las Vegas in fourteen-hour stints, standing at the tables from 10 a.m. to midnight. ‘Craps is addictive,’ McCain remarked, and he headed for the fifteen-dollar-minimum-bet tables.

Image of McCain at The Tables

Michael Scherer and Michael Weisskopf says:

 

“Over time he (McCain) gave up the drinking bouts, but he never quite kicked the periodic yen for dice. In the past decade, he has played on Mississippi riverboats, on Indian land, in Caribbean craps pits and along the length of the Las Vegas Strip. Back in 2005 he joined a group of journalists at a magazine-industry conference in Puerto Rico, offering betting strategy on request. ‘Enjoying craps opens up a window on a central thread constant in John’s life,’ says John Weaver, McCain’s former chief strategist, who followed him to many a casino. ‘Taking a chance, playing against the odds.’ Aides say McCain tends to play for a few thousand dollars at a time and avoids taking markers, or loans, from the casinos, which he has helped regulate in Congress. ‘He never, ever plays on the house,’ says Mark Salter, a McCain adviser. The goal, say several people familiar with his habit, is never financial. He loves the thrill of winning and the camaraderie at the table. 
“Only recently have McCain’s aides urged him to pull back from the pastime. In the heat of the G.O.P. primary fight last spring, he announced on a visit to the Vegas Strip that he was going to the casino floor. When his aides stopped him, fearing a public relations disaster, McCain suggested that they ask the casino to take a craps table to a private room, a high-roller privilege McCain had indulged in before. His aides, with alarm bells ringing, refused again, according to two accounts of the discussion.

“He clearly knows that this is on the borderline of what is acceptable for him to be doing,” says a Republican who has watched McCain play. ‘And he just sort of revels in it.'”

 

Another Image of McCain Playing Craps — In Las Vegas.

A survey of McCain’s gambling with many links.

Does McCain have a record of wins and losses? If so, should these be shared with the public? McCain has said craps is addictive. Is he craps addict? Has his gambling led to any questionable conflicts of interest?

I have found that mention of McCain’s gambling habit is a persuasive argument to people who are on the fence and wondering who to vote for. The association of gambling with the term neocon and observation of McCain’s growing synchronicity with Bush positions is generally enough to convince an inquirer. But these days the teflon mantel seems to be moving to McCain. And to my knowledge no one has raised these questions directly.

Yet.

Marijuana gave cancer sufferer her life back

2

Legalise Cannabis Alliance | A BREAST cancer victim made medical history recently, as the first person in Scotland to be prescribed cannabis as a treatment for chronic pain.

Former National Health Service nurse Jeanie Rae, 57, has been taking a purified extract of the controversial drug to treat the agonising nerve damage in her right arm caused by an operation and radiotherapy to beat her cancer.

The pain left her virtually imprisoned in her home in Balfron, Stirlingshire, for nearly four years because she could not bare even the lightest touch.

Standard medications given to her to help deal with the suffering had little effect. But but in 2007 she was offered the cannabis-based drug Sativex by doctors at the pain management clinic in Gartnaval Hospital, Glasgow, as part of a clinical trial.

Rae became one of the first people in the UK to be given the drug on prescription after doctors allowed her to continue taking it after the trial, given the improvements to her condition.

A few sprays of the drug under her tongue each day has enabled Rae to lead a normal life.

“Before, the pain was totally restricting my life and what I could do,” said the mother of two. “It was so bad that I could not bare to have someone touch me or even brush against my arm in the street.

“When the doctors suggested that cannabis might be of benefit I wasn’t sure, but I knew I did not want to keep living like that. Within a week of taking it I started noticing a big difference – I felt infinitely better.”

Canada recently became the first country in the world to approve a cannabis-based painkiller when health bosses gave Sativex the green light for use.

It was given approval for the symptomatic relief of pain in MS sufferers, and the UK’s medicine authorities are currently considering a similar application. Doctors hope the drug will then be approved for prescription for other types of chronic pain.

But Rae has been allowed to use the drug on prescription as part of an extended ‘open label’ trial since the initial three-month clinical trial finished last year.

As the wife of a doctor in a quiet rural village, she said she was wary about taking the drug, and its hardly surprising as the newspapers are filled daily with tales of woe regarding cannabis, which is enough to put some people off seeking relief from their conditions.

She said: “As someone who had never smoked or taken cannabis before, I did not want to become addicted to it.

“There is a lot of controversy surrounding cannabis because it is an illegal drug, but in comparison to other drugs it is quite tame.”

Rae was diagnosed with breast cancer five yeas ago, forcing her to give up her job as a nurse at the Western General Hospital in Glasgow.

Her husband Allan, a retired doctor, and their sons Fraser, 36, and Neil, 32, have supported her after she had a lumpectomy to remove cancerous cells from her breast.

The surgeons also removed lymph glands from under her right arm, but together with radiotherapy it caused her nerve endings to become inflamed and damaged. Each day Rae must take about 10 sprays of Sativex to ease her pain – less than a quarter of the maximum daily dose. But she admits it does have some side-effects.

She said: “It does make me sleepy and hungry – it gives me the munchies.”

Multiple sclerosis sufferers have been campaigning for years to be allowed to use cannabis to ease their symptoms.

One sufferer, Biz Ivol (now deceased), from Herston, South Ronaldsay in Orkney, sparked a furious debate when she admitted making cannabis-laced chocolates for other patients with the same condition.

She later stood trial for the possession and supply of cannabis in 1997 but was admonished by the court after admitting growing cannabis plants to relieve her pain.

At the time, the British Medical Association appealed for leniency for MS sufferers facing drug charges for using cannabis. Another case against Ivol was abandoned last year after her health began to fail and she died in September last year.

Paul Cruikshank, a friend of Ivol and a member of the Legalise Cannabis Alliance, said: “Patients should be able to get hold of a medicine without fear of being prosecuted. Putting people in jail for using a medicine that alleviates their pain and symptoms is totally wrong and against their human rights.”

Former Home Secretary Charles Clarke ordered a rethink on the government’s decision to downgrade cannabis to a class C drug.

Fears that the psychotic effects of the drug could lead to long-term mental illnesses such as schizophrenia caused anti-drug campaigners to call for a reversal of the legislation.

They also fear use of the drug can lead to abuse of other harder drugs. A point which has since been disproven many times.

But Alistair Ramsay, director of Scotland Against Drugs, said distinctions had to be made between abusing drugs for recreation and using them for medical need.

He said: “It is hardly surprising that cannabis is having a proper medical effect on people who suffer pain.

“Other drugs derived from opium like morphine have been used for similar purposes. It is only when they are used improperly that the problems can occur. Like many drugs currently available on prescription, doctors will need to use caution to ensure it is not being misused.”

A recent study by researchers at the University of Lausanne in Switzerland found even cannabis-based medicines used for pain relief can cause symptoms such as paranoid delusions and severe anxiety.

But Dr Mick Serpell, the consultant who led the Sativex clinical trial at Gartnaval, believes the drug could help patients with few other choices.

He said: “We had some good results in our patients – it helped about one in three.

“These are patients who have tried everything else, so to get that kind of response can help a lot of people who have no other choices. The type of people who use it to treat pain are totally different from those who use it for recreation.”

Bush Covered up Musharraf Ties with Qaeda, Khan

0

(IPS) – Pakistani President Pervez Musharraf’s resignation Monday brings to an end an extraordinarily close relationship between Musharraf and the George W. Bush administration, in which Musharraf was lavished with political and economic benefits from the United States despite policies that were in sharp conflict with U.S. security interests.

It is well known that Bush repeatedly praised Musharraf as the most loyal ally of the United States against terrorism, even though the Pakistani military was deeply compromised by its relationship with the Taliban and Pakistani Islamic militants.

What has not been reported is that the Bush administration covered up the Musharraf regime’s involvement in the activities of the A. Q. Khan nuclear technology export programme and its deals with al Qaeda’s Pakistani tribal allies.

The problem faced by the Bush administration when it came into office was that the Pakistani military, over which Musharraf presided, was the real terrorist nexus with the Taliban and al Qaeda. As Bruce Riedel, National Security Council (NSC) senior director for South Asia in the Bill Clinton administration, who stayed on the NSC staff under the Bush administration, observed in an interview with this writer last September, al Qaeda “was a creation of the jihadist culture of the Pakistani army”.

If there was a state sponsor of al Qaeda, Riedel said, it was the Pakistani military, acting through its Inter-Services Intelligence (ISI) Directorate.

Vice President Dick Cheney and the neoconservative-dominated Bush Pentagon were aware of the intimate relationship between Musharraf’s regime and both the Taliban and al Qaeda. But al Qaeda was not a high priority for the Bush administration.

After 9/11, the White House created the political myth that Musharraf, faced with a clear choice, had “joined the free world in fighting the terrorists”. But as Asia expert Selig S. Harrison has pointed out, on Sep. 19, 2001, just six days after he had supposedly agreed to U.S. demands for cooperation against the Taliban regime and al Qaeda, Musharraf gave a televised speech in Urdu in which he declared, “We are trying our best to come out of this critical situation without any damage to Afghanistan and the Taliban.”

In his memoirs, published in 2006, Musharraf revealed the seven specific demands he had been given and claimed that he had refused both “blanket overflight and landing rights” and the use of Pakistan’s naval ports and air bases to conduct anti-terrorism operations.

Musharraf also famously wrote that, immediately after 9/11, Undersecretary of State Richard Armitage had threatened to bomb Pakistan “back to the stone age” if Musharraf didn’t side with the United States against bin Laden and his Afghan hosts. But Armitage categorically denied to this writer, through his assistant, Kara Bue, that he had made any threat whatsoever, let alone a threat to retaliate militarily against Pakistan.

For the next few years, Musharraf played a complicated game. The CIA was allowed to operate in Pakistan’s border provinces to pursue al Qaeda operatives, but only as long as they had ISI units accompanying them. That restricted their ability to gather intelligence in the northwest frontier. At the same time, ISI was allowing Taliban and al Qaeda leaders to operate freely in the tribal areas and even in Karachi.

The Bush administration also gave Musharraf and the military regime a free ride on the A. Q. Khan network’s selling of nuclear technology to Libya and Iran, even though there was plenty of evidence that the generals had been fully aware of and supported Khan’s activities.

Journalists Douglas Frantz and Catherine Collins wrote in their book “The Nuclear Jihadist” that one retired general who had worked with Khan told them there was no question that Khan had acted with the full knowledge of the military leadership. “Of course the military knew,” the general said. “They helped him.”

But the Bush administration chose to help Musharraf cover up that inconvenient fact. According to CIA Director George Tenet’s memoirs, in September 2003, he confronted Musharraf with the evidence the CIA had gathered on Khan’s operation and made it clear he was expected to end its operations and arrest Khan.

The following January and early February, Khan’s house arrest, public confession of guilt and pardon by Musharraf was accompanied by an extraordinary series of statements by high-ranking Bush administration officials exonerating Musharraf and the military of any involvement in Khan’s activities.

That whole scenario had been “carefully orchestrated with Musharraf”, Larry Wilkerson, then a State Department official but later Colin Powell’s chief of staff, told IPS in an interview last year. The deal that had been made did not require Musharraf to allow U.S. officials to interrogate Khan.

But the Bush administration apparently conveyed to the Pakistani military after that episode that it now expected the Musharraf regime to deliver high-ranking al Qaeda officials — and to do so at a particularly advantageous moment for the administration. The New Republic magazine reported Jul. 15, 2004 that a White House aide had told the visiting head of ISI, Ehsan ul-Haq, that “it would be best if the arrest or killing of any HVT [high value target] were announced on 26, 27 or 28 July.” Those were the last three days of the Democratic National Convention.

The military source added, “If we don’t find these guys by the election, they are going to stick the whole nuclear mess up our a**hole.”

Just hours before Democratic candidate John Kerry’s acceptance speech, Pakistan announced the capture of an alleged al Qaeda leader.

Meanwhile, Musharraf was making a political pact with a five-party Islamic alliance in 2004 to ensure victory in state elections in the two border provinces where Islamic extremist influence was strongest. This explicit political accommodation, followed by a military withdrawal from South Waziristan, gave the pro-Taliban forces allied with al Qaeda in the region a free hand to recruit and train militants for war in Afghanistan.

Yet another deal with the Islamic extremists in 2006 strengthened the pro-Taliban forces even further.

But Bush chose to reward Musharraf by designating Pakistan a “Major Non-NATO Ally” in 2004 and by agreeing to sell the Pakistani Air Force 36 advanced F-16 fighter planes. Prior to that, Pakistan had been denied U.S. military technology for a decade.

In July 2007, a National Intelligence Estimate concluded that al Qaeda’s new “safe haven” was in Pakistan’s tribal areas and that the terrorist organisation had reconstituted its “homeland attack capability” there. That estimate ended the fiction that the Musharraf regime was firmly committed to combating al Qaeda in Pakistan.

Had the Bush administration accurately portrayed Musharraf’s policies rather than hiding them, it would not have avoided the al Qaeda safe haven there. But it would have facilitated a more realistic debate about the real options available for U.S. policy.

*Gareth Porter is an investigative historian and journalist specialising in U.S. national security policy. The paperback edition of his latest book, “Perils of Dominance: Imbalance of Power and the Road to War in Vietnam”, was published in 2006.

The US Missile Defence System

4

The Guardian | It’s a novel way to take your own life. Just as Russia demonstrates what happens to former minions that annoy it, Poland agrees to host a US missile defence base. The Russians, as Poland expected, respond to this proposal by offering to turn the country into a parking lot. This proves that the missile defence system is necessary after all: it will stop the missiles Russia will now aim at Poland, the Czech Republic and the UK in response to, er, their involvement in the missile defence system.

The American government insists that the interceptors, which will be stationed on the Baltic coast, have nothing to do with Russia: their purpose is to defend Europe and the US against the intercontinental ballistic missiles Iran and North Korea don’t possess. This is why they are being placed in Poland, which, as every geography student in Texas knows, shares a border with both rogue states.

They permit us to look forward to a glowing future, in which missile defence, according to the Pentagon, will “protect our homeland … and our friends and allies from ballistic missile attack”; as long as the Russians wait until it’s working before they nuke us. The good news is that, at the present rate of progress, reliable missile defence is only 50 years away. The bad news is that it has been 50 years away for the past six decades.

The system has been in development since 1946, and so far it has achieved a grand total of nothing. You wouldn’t know it if you read the press releases published by the Pentagon’s missile defence agency: the word “success” features more often than any other noun. It is true that the programme has managed to hit two out of the five missiles fired over the past five years during tests of its main component, the ground-based midcourse missile defence (GMD) system. But, sadly, these tests bear no relation to anything resembling a real nuclear strike.

All the trials run so far – successful or otherwise – have been rigged. The target, its type, trajectory and destination, are known before the test begins. Only one enemy missile is used, as the system doesn’t have a hope in hell of knocking down two or more. If decoy missiles are deployed, they bear no resemblance to the target and they are identified as decoys in advance. In order to try to enhance the appearance of success, recent flight tests have become even less realistic: the agency has now stopped using decoys altogether when testing its GMD system.

This points to one of the intractable weaknesses of missile defence: it is hard to see how the interceptors could ever outwit enemy attempts to confuse them. As Philip Coyle – formerly a senior official at the Pentagon with responsibility for missile defence – points out, there are endless means by which another state could fool the system. For every real missile it launched, it could dispatch a host of dummies with the same radar and infra-red signatures. Even balloons or bits of metal foil would render anything resembling the current system inoperable. You can reduce a missile’s susceptibility to laser penetration by 90% by painting it white. This sophisticated avoidance technology, available from your local hardware shop, makes another multibillion component of the programme obsolete. Or you could simply forget about ballistic missiles and attack using cruise missiles, against which the system is useless.

Missile defence is so expensive and the measures required to evade it so cheap that if the US government were serious about making the system work it would bankrupt the country, just as the arms race helped to bring the Soviet Union down. By spending a couple of billion dollars on decoy technologies, Russia would commit the US to trillions of dollars of countermeasures. The cost ratios are such that even Iran could outspend the US.

The US has spent between $120bn and $150bn on the programme since Ronald Reagan relaunched it in 1983. Under George Bush, the costs have accelerated. The Pentagon has requested $62bn for the next five-year tranche, which means that the total cost between 2003 and 2013 will be $110bn. Yet there are no clear criteria for success. As a recent paper in the journal Defense and Security Analysis shows, the Pentagon invented a new funding system in order to allow the missile defence programme to evade the government’s usual accounting standards. It’s called spiral development, which is quite appropriate, because it ensures that the costs spiral out of control.

Spiral development means, in the words of a Pentagon directive, that “the end-state requirements are not known at programme initiation”. Instead, the system is allowed to develop in whatever way officials think fit. The result is that no one has the faintest idea what the programme is supposed to achieve, or whether it has achieved it. There are no fixed dates, no fixed costs for any component of the programme, no penalties for slippage or failure, no standards of any kind against which the system can be judged. And this monstrous scheme is still incapable of achieving what a few hundred dollars’ worth of diplomacy could do in an afternoon.

So why commit endless billions to a programme that is bound to fail? I’ll give you a clue: the answer is in the question. It persists because it doesn’t work.

US politics, because of the failure by both Republicans and Democrats to deal with the problems of campaign finance, is rotten from head to toe. But under Bush, the corruption has acquired Nigerian qualities. Federal government is a vast corporate welfare programme, rewarding the industries that give millions of dollars in political donations with contracts worth billions. Missile defence is the biggest pork barrel of all, the magic pudding that won’t run out, however much you eat. The funds channelled to defence, aerospace and other manufacturing and service companies will never run dry because the system will never work.

To keep the pudding flowing, the administration must exaggerate the threats from nations that have no means of nuking it – and ignore the likely responses of those that do. Russia is not without its own corrupting influences. You could see the grim delight of the Russian generals and defence officials last week, who have found in this new deployment an excuse to enhance their power and demand bigger budgets. Poor old Poland, like the Czech Republic and the UK, gets strongarmed into becoming America’s groundbait.

If we seek to understand American foreign policy in terms of a rational engagement with international problems, or even as an effective means of projecting power, we are looking in the wrong place. The government’s interests have always been provincial. It seeks to appease lobbyists, shift public opinion at crucial stages of the political cycle, accommodate crazy Christian fantasies and pander to television companies run by eccentric billionaires. The US does not really have a foreign policy. It has a series of domestic policies which it projects beyond its borders. That they threaten the world with 57 varieties of destruction is of no concern to the current administration. The only question of interest is who gets paid and what the political kickbacks will be.

US Accused of War Crimes Over Torture Methods

0

The use of torture by the US Government in the aftermath of the terrorist attacks in New York on September 11, 2001 has come under increasing criticism.

In 1863 at the height of the US civil war, president Abraham Lincoln set the principles for interrogation of prisoners with a famous instruction “military necessity does not admit of cruelty”.

It took the September 11 attacks to change those principles and Vice-President Dick Cheney said the US would now have to work through the dark side.

In response, government lawyers drew up the so-called torture memos that would ultimately unleash the abuses at Guantanamo Bay and Abu Ghraib and at a host of secret CIA “black sites”.

In his new book, lawyer Philippe Sands argues that the responsible officials, and the lawyers who advised them, should be charged with war crimes.

Popular TV drama ’24’ regularly show terror suspects being tortured so the hero can save the day but does this reflect a new tolerance of torture tactics in the United States?

At the US-run Abu Ghraib prison in Iraq there was little heroism on display among those who humiliated and tortured Iraqi prisoners.

The US Government blamed rogue soldiers but its own top officials had made it plain that US standards dramatically changed following the September 11 terror attacks.

“We also have to work the the dark side if you will. We’ve got to spend time in the shadows of the intelligence world,” said Mr Cheney shortly after the New York attacks in 2001.

“A lot of what needs to be done here will have to be done quietly, without any discussion, using sources and methods that are available to our intelligence agencies if we’re going to be successful.”

The former director of the CIA Counterterrorist Centre, Cofer Black, echoed Mr Cheney’s words.

“All you need to know is that there was a before 9/11 and there was an after 9/11. After 9/11 the gloves come off,” he said.

As a result, terror suspects held by the US endured what US officials termed “aggressive coercion”.

Former US Navy General Counsel Alberto Mora describes some some of the interrogation techniques.

“[Guantanamo Bay detainee] Al-Qahtani was interrogated for and I’m illustrating now, not the exact, something like 48 out of 52 days, often for stretches exceeding 12 to 14 or even 16 hours a day,” he said.

“He was kept in cold rooms such that he was shivering uncontrollably, his heart rate would drop; he was provided fluids intravenously without the opportunity to go to the bathroom. He was sexually humiliated by female US guards and other treatments of this sort.”

In December 2002 then US defence secretary Donald Rumsfeld signed a now infamous memo which justified these new methods.

The memo detailed a variety of enhanced interrogation techniques such as leaving people standing for up to four hours.

Mr Rumsfeld wrote at the bottom “I stand for 8-10 hours a day. Why is standing limited to four hours?”.

The US Justice Department declared treatment only amounted to torture if it intentionally resulted in pain equivalent to serious injury, organ failure or death.

Some are now questioning whether the officials who authorised these techniques may be open to being charged with war crimes.

ABC

Data From Checkpoints To Be Kept for 15 Years

0

By Ellen Nakashima | The federal government has been using its system of border checkpoints to greatly expand a database on travelers entering the country by collecting information on all U.S. citizens crossing by land, compiling data that will be stored for 15 years and may be used in criminal and intelligence investigations.

Officials say the Border Crossing Information system, disclosed last month by the Department of Homeland Security in a Federal Register notice, is part of a broader effort to guard against terrorist threats. It also reflects the growing number of government systems containing personal information on Americans that can be shared for a broad range of law enforcement and intelligence purposes, some of which are exempt from some Privacy Act protections.

While international air passenger data has long been captured this way, Customs and Border Protection agents only this year began to log the arrivals of all U.S. citizens across land borders, through which about three-quarters of border entries occur.

The volume of people entering the country by land prevented compiling such a database until recently. But the advent of machine-readable identification documents, which the government mandates eventually for everyone crossing the border, has made gathering the information more feasible. By June, all travelers crossing land borders will need to present a machine-readable document, such as a passport or a driver’s license with a radio frequency identification chip.

In January, border agents began manually entering into the database the personal information of travelers who did not have such documents.

The disclosure of the database is among a series of notices, officials say, to make DHS’s data gathering more transparent. Critics say the moves exemplify efforts by the Bush administration in its final months to cement an unprecedented expansion of data gathering for national security and intelligence purposes.

The data could be used beyond determining whether a person may enter the United States. For instance, information may be shared with foreign agencies when relevant to their hiring or contracting decisions.

Public comments are being taken until Monday, when the “new system of records will be effective,” the notice states.

“People expect to be checked when they enter the country and for the government to determine if they’re admissible or not,” said Greg Nojeim, senior counsel at the Center for Democracy &amp; Technology. “What they don’t expect is for the government to keep a record for 15 years of their comings into the country.”

But DHS spokesman Russ Knocke said the retention period is justified.

“History has shown, whether you are talking about criminal or terrorist activity, that plotting, planning or even relationships among conspirators can go on for years,” he said. “Basic travel records can, quite literally, help frontline officers to connect the dots.”

The government states in its notice that the system was authorized by post-Sept. 11 laws, including the Enhanced Border Security and Visa Reform Act of 2002, the Aviation and Transportation Security Act of 2001, and the Intelligence Reform and Terrorism Prevention Act of 2004.

Nojeim said that though the statutes authorize the government to issue travel documents and check immigration status, he does not believe they explicitly authorize creation of the database.

“This database is, in a sense, worse than a watch list,” he said. “At least in the watch-list scenario, there’s some reason why the name got on the list. Here, the only thing a person does to come to the attention of DHS is to lawfully cross the border. The theory of this data collection is: Track everyone — just in case.”

Under the system, officials record name, birth date, gender, date and time of crossing, and a photo, where available, for U.S. travelers returning to the country by land, sea or air. The same information is gathered about foreign travelers, but it is held for 75 years.

DHS and other agencies are amassing more and more data that they subject to sophisticated analysis. A customs document issued last month stated that the agency does not perform data mining on border crossings to glean relationships and patterns that could signify a terrorist or law enforcement threat. But the Federal Register notice states that information may be shared with federal, state and local governments to test “new technology and systems designed to enhance border security or identify other violations of law.” And the Homeland Security Act establishing the department calls for the development of data-mining tools to further the department’s objectives.

That raises concerns, privacy advocates say, that analyses can be undertaken that could implicate innocent people if appropriate safeguards are not used.

The border information system will link to a new database, the Non-Federal Entity Data System, which is being set up to hold personal information about all drivers in a state’s database. States that do not agree to allow customs to have such large amounts of information may allow the agency to query their databases in real time for information on a traveler.

Because of privacy concerns, Washington state earlier this year opted for the queries-only approach. The Canadian government made the same decision. “There was absolutely no way they should have the entire database,” said Ann Cavoukian, Ontario’s privacy commissioner, who learned about the Canadian government’s decision in April.

“Once you have data in a database you don’t need, it lends itself to unauthorized use,” she said. “You have no idea of the data creep.”

Vermont opted to allow access to its driver’s licenses because the state could not guarantee the “nanoseconds” response time DHS required, said Bonnie L. Rutledge, the state’s commissioner of motor vehicles. She said drivers are informed up front of the data sharing.

“A person opts to go over the border, their information is going to be collected and held anyway,” she said. “If you don’t want to go over the border, you don’t have to.”

The notice states that the government may share border records with federal, state, local, tribal or foreign government agencies in cases where customs believes the information would assist enforcement of civil or criminal laws or regulations, or if the information is relevant to a hiring decision.

They may be shared with a court or attorney in civil litigation, which could include divorce cases; with federal contractors or consultants “to accomplish an agency function related to this system of records”; with federal and foreign intelligence or counterterrorism agencies if there is a threat to national or international security or to assist in anti-terrorism efforts; or with the news media and the public “when there exists a legitimate public interest in the disclosure of the information.”

Homeland Security is proposing to exempt the database from some provisions of the 1974 Privacy Act, including the right of a citizen to know whether a law enforcement or intelligence agency has requested his or her records and the right to sue for access and correction in those disclosures.

A traveler may, however, request access to records based on documents he or she presented at the border.

The notice is posted at the Government Printing Office’s Web site.

US pledges to support new government

0

By Erika Niedowski | WASHINGTON // Condoleezza Rice, the US secretary of state, effectively bade farewell yesterday to a critical ally in the US war on terrorism, Pervez Musharraf, and pledged US support to the new government in Pakistan and to bolstering the country’s democratic reforms.

Ms Rice called Mr Musharraf, who resigned rather than fight impeachment proceedings even though he denied the charges against him, “one of the world’s most committed partners in the war against terrorism and extremism” and said he had made the “critical choice” to join the US fight against al Qa’eda and the Taliban.

“We will continue to work with the Pakistani government and political leaders and urge them to redouble their focus on Pakistan’s future and its most urgent needs, including stemming the growth of extremism, addressing food and energy shortages and improving economic stability,” Ms Rice said in a statement. “The United States will help with these efforts to see Pakistan reach its goal of becoming a stable, prosperous, democratic, modern, Muslim nation.”

Some experts said Mr Musharraf’s resignation, even while ushering in a period of uncertainty both in Pakistan and in Washington, provides the United States a new opening to forge stronger and more constructive ties with a strategic partner that despite Ms Rice’s rhetoric has not always been the most reliable.

“It needs to be seen as an opportunity,” said Karin von Hippel, co-director of the Post-Conflict Reconstruction Project at the Washington-based Center for Strategic and International Studies.

“We’ve played a very fundamental role in the transition away from Musharraf to the coalition government,” she said, calling it a “quiet, behind the scenes” role. “This is a job we should be doing, and we should have done it the whole time. It’s getting back to Diplomacy 101 — or it should be.”

Gone will be the personal bond between George W Bush and Mr Musharraf. But gone too will be the way that bond seemed at times to serve as a kind of shield against some of Mr Musharraf’s shortcomings.

Pakistan, which severed relations with the Taliban government in Afghanistan after September 11, arrested hundreds of members of the Taliban and al Qa’eda since then. It deployed troops to the mountainous tribal areas near the Afghan border and provided critical support for US and Nato forces. The United States, in return, delivered billions of dollars of military aid.

But critics here have long said Pakistan has not done nearly enough to quash the groups and prevent suicide attacks, and they have questioned Mr Musharraf’s allegiance to the US cause. In seeking to keep Mr Musharraf, who seized power in a 1999 coup, as an ally, they say, the United States has been too willing to overlook his deficiencies.

Last month, things reached a breaking point of sorts when the United States alleged that Pakistan’s Inter-Services Intelligence agency had aided in the planning of an attack against the Indian Embassy in Kabul. By late last week, the Bush administration seemed to be distancing itself from Mr Musharraf, saying Pakistan’s leadership was an internal matter.

Naeem Salik, a visiting scholar in South Asia studies at the Johns Hopkins’ School for Advanced International Studies and a retired brigadier general in the Pakistani army, said there has been some “unease” in Washington in losing the seasoned Mr Musharraf as an ally — if a not altogether reliable one.

But the two countries are on the path towards a continued strong alliance, Mr Salik said, even if under new leadership both in Pakistan and in the United States, which will also have a new president come January.

Mr Bush and the Pakistani prime minister, Yousaf Raza Gilani, appeared together at the White House to say as much last month. The same day, a Senate panel approved a massive aid package worth US$7 billion (Dh26bn) over the next five years for non-military assistance, receipt of which will be linked to progress in internal reforms. John Kerry, a Massachusetts senator who was the Democratic Party’s 2004 nominee for president, called the funding a “down payment” in the fight against radical extremism in Pakistan.

Ms Von Hippel, of the Center for Strategic and International Studies, does expect one change in the countries’ relationship. She expects that the new government will try to avoid the criticism that was ultimately one of Mr Musharraf’s downfalls: that he was too closely aligned with the United States.

“I think the new leaders are trying to demonstrate their independence from America,” she said, “because they really don’t want to be seen as being controlled by America.”

Recent language from Mr Gilani bears that out. Writing in The Washington Post in April, he pledged that while the elimination of terrorism will be his government’s top priority. “Pakistan must fight terrorism for Pakistan’s sake.” In other words: the war on terrorism must be Islamabad’s, not Washington’s.

Some of that might just be rhetoric. Pakistan knows it needs US assistance, Ms von Hippel said, not just to fight extremism within its borders but also to build its economy and democratic institutions.

“They know they need our help to make a lot of that happen,” she said. “They’ll still work very closely with us.”

Iraq wants to put torturers on trial

0

Iraq’s human rights ministry says wants torturers not to be included on amnesty lists.

BAGHDAD – Iraq’s human rights ministry says it wants to put on trial torturers who benefit from complete immunity despite proven cases of abuse in Iraqi prisons.”We call on the government and judicial authorities to ensure the protection of prisoners, to punish torturers and not to include them on amnesty lists,” said Saad Sultan, head of the ministry’s prisons supervision service.

Iraq, which on Sunday announced it has ratified the UN convention against torture, has no law against the practice.

“It’s true that there is no specific law but they (torturers) could be charged for voluntary blows and injuries,” the senior official said late Monday.

He said 121 “proven cases” of detainees — including three women — being tortured had been unearthed in 2007. Two-thirds of them were in interior ministry facilities and the rest in centres run by the defence ministry.

“The culprits are being investigated but this type of case takes time,” said Sultan, without reporting any arrests.

“We don’t have statistics for previous years but there were definitely hundreds of cases of torture in 2004 and 2005, before the number started to decline in 2006,” he said.

Sultan’s supervision team was set up in 2006 with a team of 82 investigators. Funded by the European Union, they were trained in Germany and by the International Committee of the Red Cross.

It started work in earnest in 2007.

 

 

Passengers test new face scanners

1

Facial recognition scanners are being trialled at an airport as part of government efforts to improve security and reduce passenger congestion.

The system has been introduced at Manchester Airport. It can be used by adult biometric passport holders from the UK and European Economic Area.

It works by scanning passengers’ faces and comparing it to the photograph digitally stored on their passports.

The Lib Dems said the government must ensure the technology is “foolproof”.

Facial recognition technology is part of the Home Office’s e-Borders programme, which is aimed at transforming the UK’s border control to ensure greater security and efficiency.

Ministers believe the facial recognition technology will help identify criminals and terrorists trying to enter the UK illegally.

About 13 million people in the UK have been issued with a biometric passport, which contains a microchip holding biographical information and images.

And a further 30 million people living in the European Economic Area, which incorporates the EU countries plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland, have biometric passports.

Adults only

At Manchester Airport, passengers with biometric passports will avoid queues and pass through unmanned gates.

A scanner checks their passport has not been tampered with and that they are not on any security lists.

They are then allowed through to the next gate, where a facial recognition scanner reads their face.

Rejected passengers are redirected to immigration officers for further checks.

Liberal Democrat home affairs spokesman Tom Brake voiced concerns over the reliability of the technology.

“Ministers must ensure that this technology is foolproof. If this goes wrong, thousands of passengers could be left stranded at Manchester Airport,” he said.

“Following the Heathrow Terminal 5 embarrassment, the last thing this country needs is another major transport hub grinding to a halt.”

The system will be introduced at Stansted in September, and if the trials are successful it will be extended to all major UK airports.

All new UK passports have been biometric for the past two years and the Home Office estimates about seven million people will receive one every year.

BBC

The Secret Deal For Iraq’s Oil

1

The Public Record | Four months before the United States invaded Iraq, the Department of Defense was secretly working with Vice President Dick Cheney’s old company, Halliburton Corp., on a secret deal that would give the world’s second largest oil services company total control over Iraq’s oil fields, according to interviews with Halliburton’s most senior executives.

Previously undisclosed Halliburton documents obtained by The Public Record confirm that controlling the world’s second largest oil reserves was a top priority for the Bush administration. Additionally, the deal between the Department of Defense and Halliburton unit Kellogg, Brown & Root to operate Iraq’s oil industry saved Halliburton from imminent bankruptcy.

In October of 2002, Halliburton was saddled with a multibillion-dollar asbestos liability as well as a serious slowdown in domestic oil production. The company’s stock plummeted on the news falling to a low of $12.62 in October 2002 from a high of $22 the year before.

A month later, in November 2002, Halliburton’s financial troubles seemingly disappeared. At the urging of unnamed officials in the Office of the Vice President, according to the documents, the Department of Defense recommended The Army Corps of Engineers award a contract to Kellogg, Brown & Root to extinguish Iraqi oil well fires in addition to “assessing the condition of oil-related infrastructure; cleaning up oil spills or other environmental damage at oil facilities; engineering design and repair or reconstruction of damaged infrastructure; assisting in making facilities operational; distribution of petroleum products; and assisting the Iraqis in resuming Iraqi oil company operations.”

That was a deal hatched five months before the start of the Iraq war, when the Bush administration said publicly that it had not been working on war plans.

“The fact that the Department was planning for the possibility that it would need to repair and provide for continuity of operations of the Iraqi oil infrastructure was classified until March 2003,” the Army Corps of Engineers said on its web site. “This prevented earlier acknowledgement or announcement of potential requirements to the business community.”

A March 6, 2003 internal Pentagon e-mail sent by an Army Corps of Engineers official says “action” on a multibillion-dollar Halliburton contract was “coordinated” within Cheney’s office.

The e-mail says Douglas Feith, the former Undersecretary of Defense for Policy, received authorization from then Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul Wolfowitz to “execute” the Restore Iraqi Oil contract to Halliburton in 2002.

Feith was one of the architects of the Iraq war who operated the Pentagon’s Office of Special Plans that exaggerated the Iraqi threat and provided the White House with bogus information about links between Iraq and al Qaeda.

The email said Feith approved elements in the contract “contingent on informing WH [White House] tomorrow. We anticipate no issues since action has been coordinated w VP’s [Vice President’s] office.”

Cheney, who claims he has severed all ties with Halliburton, receives deferred compensation from the company annually.

Two days after the email was sent, the Army Corps of Engineers formally awarded Halliburton the contract, without reviewing bids from other companies.

Bunnatine Greenhouse, the Army Corps’ top civilian contracting expert, has said the Halliburton deal represented “the most blatant and improper contract abuse I have witnessed during the course of my professional career.” Greenhouse, who testified before Congress in June 2005, was demoted for speaking out about contract fraud.

Halliburton spun off KBR into a separate company last year. The Army Corps of Engineers has declassified portions of some documents related to its deal with Kellogg, Brown & Root.

“The U.S. considered such contingency planning necessary because of Saddam Hussein’s actions in Kuwait in 1991, when Iraqi forces damaged 750 wells,” states documents released by the Army Corps of Engineers. “That destruction resulted in an environmental disaster as well as a tremendous blow to Kuwait’s oil production capability. The U.S. had grounds to believe Saddam was planning to destroy Iraq’s own oil infrastructure in the event of hostilities. Such destruction, especially if it extended beyond oil wells to pipelines, pumping stations, or other elements of the infrastructure, could have drastically reduced the Iraqi oil industry’s capability to produce income on which the Iraqi people depend. Destruction of the oil fields would result in potential loss of $20 to $30 billion a year in oil revenues for Iraq, as well as an estimated cost of between $30 and $40 billion to recreate the infrastructure.

When news of the deal surfaced five years ago, the Army Corps of Engineers was criticized by Washington lawmakers for awarding the no-bid contract to Brown & Root because of the company’s strong ties to Cheney. The Army Corps of Engineers told lawmakers that Kellogg, Brown & Root would do nothing more than extinguish oil well fires. Brown & Root was chosen, according to the Army Corps of Engineers, because the company could be “deployed” on short notice.

However, according to a report in the magazine Fortune, Halliburton employees were working out of a hotel room in Kuwait City as far back as November 2002 assessing Iraq’s oil infrastructure and mapping out plans for operating Iraq’s oil industry.

“From behind the obsidian mirrors of his wraparound sunglasses, Ray Rodon surveys the vast desert landscape of southern Iraq’s Rumailah oilfield. A project manager with Halliburton’s engineering and construction division, Kellogg Brown & Root, Rodon has spent months preparing for the daunting task of repairing Iraq’s oil industry. Working first at headquarters in Houston and then out of a hotel room in Kuwait City, he has studied the intricacies of the Iraqi national oil company, even reviewing the firm’s organizational charts so that Halliburton and the Army can ascertain which Iraqis are reliable technocrats and which are Saddam loyalists,” states the April 2003 report published in Fortune.

“Rodon represents the vanguard of what is expected to be a growing army of Halliburton employees in Iraq, where the U.S. is preparing to embark on the grandest exercise in nation building since its occupation of Japan after World War II. At the center of that undertaking will be U.S. companies, with Halliburton probably chief among them,” Fortune reported. “Indeed, Texans wearing KBR baseball caps are arriving by the planeload at Kuwait’s airport. Some will support the military directly–KBR employees already handle the meal service, laundry, and garbage pickup for several military camps in Kuwait and will do the same as U.S. units establish bases in Iraq. But after the war most hope to be involved in the multibillion-dollar task of rebuilding Iraq: its roads, electrical grid, water supply, ports, airports, and, most important, oil facilities.

“The liberation of Iraq couldn’t come at a better time for Halliburton, whose business has been dogged by a host of troubles–from a slowdown in domestic oil production to nightmare asbestos litigation. Last year revenues declined 6%, to $12.6 billion, and the company reported a net loss of $984 million. But CEO Dave Lesar, who took over when his predecessor Dick Cheney went to Washington, is starting to put Halliburton’s problems behind it. He has cut costs, sold unproductive assets, curtailed money-losing overseas operations, and devised a bold plan to settle asbestos-related lawsuits.”

In a March 2003 news release, Halliburton said it first began working on a plan to repair Iraq’s oil infrastructure at the request of the Defense Department.

“The DoD, through its US Army Logistics Civil Augmentation Program (LOGCAP) III contract with KBR, tapped the company in November 2002 to develop the contingency plan. Implementation of the plan is being executed through a separate contract [Kellogg, Brown & Root] now holds with the US Army Corps of Engineers,” the news release says.

Perhaps what has been troubling about the lucrative contracts Halliburton has been awarded is the company’s history of overcharging the federal government by millions of dollars. On at least one occasion, overbilling took place while Cheney was chief executive of the company.

In 2002, KBR agreed to pay the U.S. government $2 million to settle allegations it defrauded the military during Cheney’s tenure. KBR was accused of inflating contract prices for maintenance and repairs at Fort Ord, a now-shuttered military installation near Monterey, Calif. The lawsuit, filed in Sacramento, alleged KBR submitted false claims and made false statements in connection with 224 delivery orders between April 1994 and September 1998. KBR and Halliburton has also paid out settlements to end investigations and lawsuits on half-a-dozen other occasions.

So how does the company continue to win such lucrative contracts with the federal government in spite of its shady record?

“KBR was selected for the [Iraq contract] based on the fact that KBR is the only contractor that could commence implementing the complex contingency plan on extremely short notice,” Halliburton said in a March news release.

Army Corps of Engineers spokeswoman Carol Sanders said Iraqi people urgently needed cooking oil and gasoline as they began rebuilding their country. Given the need to boil water to prevent disease, it was not feasible to competitively bid the work. She rejected claims that Cheney’s role as Halliburton’s former chief executive in the 1990s had an impact on the contract.

“We made the contract broad enough so we could handle issues just like this,” she said.

Children as Big Pharma Guinea Pigs

2

98 Percent of Drug Trials on Children Have no Safety Checks

By David Gutierrez | Fewer than 2 percent of drug trials conducted on children have independent safety advisory boards, a review published in the journal Acta Paediatrica has found.

Researchers from Nottingham University reviewed reports on 739 international drug trials that had been published between 1996 and 2002. They found that although 74 percent of studies described their safety monitoring procedures, less than 2 percent included an independent safety review committee.

Such committees are composed of independent health experts who can review the study data as it comes out and warn if the drug appears to be placing study participants at risk.

“It is invaluable to have an independent monitor who can swiftly question any adverse drug reactions or differences in illness and death rates between groups taking part in the clinical trials,” said lead researcher Helen Sammons. “Parents also need to be made aware of the risks of adverse drug reactions when a child takes any medicine so that they can make informed decisions that balance those risks against the possible benefits the drug may provide their child.”

The Nottingham University review also suggests that independent committees lead to more rigorous safety standards. Of the 13 studies with independent review committees, six were halted early due to highly toxic drug effects.

None of the studies without independent committees were stopped early.

Although the researchers looked only at studies conducted on children, they said the statistics for adult trials are probably similar.

“There is general agreement by pediatric health professionals, regulatory authorities and the pharmaceutical industry, as well as politicians and parents, that drug trials are essential in order to improve drug therapies,” Sammons said. “We are calling for all pediatric drug trials to include independent safety monitoring committees to ensure that this vital work is carried out in a way that minimizes risks and maximizes benefits for the children taking part.”

Adverse health effects were reported in the majority of drug trials, although not all of them were thought to be related to the drugs. A total of 70 percent of drug trials reviewed reported adverse effects, and 20 percent reported serious adverse effects. Almost 37 percent of drug trials reported side effects attributed to the drugs; 11 percent of trials reported moderate, severe or life-threatening side effects.

Adverse effects reported included bleeding, high blood pressure, seizures, psychosis, acute renal failure and suicide.

Deaths were reported in 11 percent of drug trials, particularly in those involving premature babies. A total of 56 percent of studies involving newborns involved deaths. Deaths were also reported in trials for drugs meant to treat infectious diseases and problems with the nervous system, respiratory system and kidneys.

Most cases of death were not thought to be caused by the drugs.

According to Sammons, the practice of conducting clinical drug trials on children is fairly new. In the past, drug companies only conducted safety tests on adults and doctors were left to guess at what drugs would work for children, and in what doses.

Five years ago, the United States began providing longer exclusive drug licenses to pharmaceutical companies that carry out drug trials on children as well as adults. In reaction to this incentive, the number of trials including children has increased. A similar incentive system is about to go into effect in the European Union.

It is important to conduct these trials, Sammons said, to decide if the benefits of drugs outweigh the risks.

“We need to test drugs on children, as the only other options are to use unlicensed drugs or prescribe drugs that have been licensed for adults,” Sammons said. “But we feel that the small number of studies that reported having safety monitoring committees was unacceptable.”

Blackwater guards face prosecution over killing of 17 Iraqi civilians

2

Six Blackwater Worldwide security guards have been notified that they could face prosecution in America for shooting dead 17 civilians in Baghdad’s Nisoor Square in an infamous incident that provoked fury in Iraq.

The Blackwater employees have reportedly been sent “target letters” by US prosecutors telling them that they could face charges for opening fire at the crowded intersection on September 16 last year.

The move was welcomed by human rights activists, who have long complained about US private security in Iraq.

“It’s incredibly important that these incidents are not beyond the law. It certainly would be a step in the right direction if the US would go ahead and bring charges,” said Jennifer Daskal, of Human Rights Watch, who has interviewed the traffic policeman on duty in Nisoor Square at the time of the shooting. “This is definitely the most high-profile case of contractor abuse in Iraq, but it’s certainly not the only one.”

The shootings sparked a crisis in relations between the US and the Iraqi Government, which threatened to expel Blackwater. In negotiations on a new bilateral security agreement, the Iraqis have pressed for all foreign personnel to be subject to Iraqi law.

Washington has agreed to place contractors under Iraqi jurisdiction, but is still refusing to allow Iraq to put US troops or officials on trial. Blackwater, based in North Carolina, has announced that it is moving out of private security and will concentrate on training, aviation and logistics.

The Blackwater guards, all former US servicemen on contract to protect US State Department personnel, opened fire after their motorcade entered Nisoor Square. US officials initially said that the motorcade was travelling to the heavily guarded Green Zone when a car bomb exploded, followed by volleys of small-arms fire that disabled one of the vehicles.

In remarks prepared for a congressional hearing but never delivered because of the investigation, Erik Prince, the chairman of Blackwater, claimed that the guards had “returned fire at threatening targets”, including “men with AK47s firing on the convoy” and “approaching vehicles that appeared to be suicide car bombers”.

Witnesses said that the four-car convoy, protected by two helicopters, did a U-turn and started going the wrong way round the square before stopping in the middle and opening fire without provocation.

Earlier reports suggested that the FBI was focusing on three Blackwater guards. The Washington Post reported that six had been sent “target letters” – a prelude to possible prosecution.

The US employs 190,000 contractors in Iraq, including 25,000 to 30,000 private security guards. Although heavily armed, the private security contractors enjoy immunity from Iraqi law under a decree issued by Paul Bremer the day before he stepped down as head of the Coalition Provisional Authority in June 2004.

Contractors hired by the US Defence Department can be prosecuted in US courts for crimes committed overseas under the Military Extraterritorial Jurisdiction Act of 2000. That law was expanded in 2004 to include contractors working “in support” of the Pentagon.

A federal grand jury has heard testimony from three dozen people, but a decision about whether to indict the Blackwater guards may not be made until October, the newspaper said. Experts compare the case to a police shooting where an officer is accused of using excessive force, but say it will be even harder to prove in a US court.

The victims’ families have been offered $10,000 (about £5,400) compensation for each person killed, but most have refused what one called “blood money”. The families are suing Blackwater in the US courts.

Anne Tyrell, a Blackwater spokeswoman, said: “If it is determined that an individual acted improperly, Blackwater would support holding that person accountable. But at this stage, without being able to review evidence collected in an ongoing investigation, we will not prejudge the actions of any individual.”

Controversial company

1997 Blackwater founded by former US Navy Seal Erik Prince

March 2004: Four employees killed and mutilated in Fallujah

June 2004: Security firms granted immunity from prosecution under Iraqi law

September 2007: Blackwater guards open fire in Nisoor Square in Baghdad, killing 17 Iraqis and wounding two dozen

October 2007: US House passes Bill to make contractors in Iraq subject to prosecution in US courts. Iraq demands that the US end its association with Blackwater and approves draft law revoking their immunity

November 2007: FBI investigation concludes that at least 14 of the September shootings were unjustified

April 2008: Iraqi Government upset by news that the US State Department is renewing Blackwater’s contract to protect its embassy staff

August 2008: US prosecutors send letters to six Blackwater security guards in a move that could lead to groundbreaking criminal indictments. The Iraqi Government emphasises its own right to prosecute the company



Greg Palast: Chewing the Buddha Bush at the Olympics

0

Lhasa, Tibet – China’s secret police are just terrible at keeping themselves secret.

The detective, dressed in her business suit and pumps appropriate to urban Lhasa, did not expect to be trailing my wife and me up the steep hillside to a monastery 15,000 feet up an ice-crusted ridge. Even at 200 yards behind us, I could see her shivering in the thin, frozen air, trying, absurdly, to look like just another hiker on the barren slope.

But then, she really wasn’t trying to hide. Her presence was meant to send a message of fear and intimidation. I got the point earlier when a photographer we’d helped sneak into Tibet was arrested, her film of protesting Tibetans seized and her camera smashed as she was hustled onto the first plane leaving the country.

When my police shadow looked away, I snapped a photo of the long boxes below me, roofs of the prison complex. It housed more Buddhist monks than any monastery.

At a hermitage carved into the summit rock I found my host sitting cross-legged under an ancient tapestry depicting a monster ready to devour quiet souls.

The holy man had questions for us:

Does Christianity have a god? (Answer: “Sometimes.”)

What is a ‘President’?

It was 1993. I told the monk the new President, Bill Clinton, had met the Dalai Lama

This Clinton must be a very holy and very good man, yes? (“Sometimes.”)

It’s not that the priest avoided worldly newspapers, but he’d just gotten out of prison after 27 years and he didn’t get much news there. Not that you could get any real news in Tibet. No journalists are allowed there. (Not to be impolite to their Chinese minders – or lose their lucrative Olympics deals – The New York Times and NBC cover Tibet from Beijing and Delhi. Just check the by-lines.)

I assured him that Clinton, though not quite holy, would, at the least, help Tibetans.

That seemed easy enough as they didn’t want very much, these mountain folk. They didn’t demand independence from China but, ironically, just the opposite: an opportunity to become Chinese, that is, have full access to schooling, university positions afforded their ethnic Han comrades; and to have a share of the jobs and wealth created by the uranium and other resources of their plateau nation.

And maybe something a little un-Chinese: freedom of expression, of movement, of culture, of religion. I assured the monk that this new President would help them obtain just a bit of autonomy in the “Tibetan Autonomous Region,” as China calls it.

The lama smiled. It was not cynicism but a friendly disbelief in change happening in this coming year. He measured change in lifetimes.

He asked a student monk to pull down a small painted statue of the Buddha – which the elder man then chopped apart with a knife. He then gestured to his acolyte to give us each a piece of the icon – to eat.

Swallowing the body of his Lord was not meant to make us holy but to solve a more immediate problem – lunch. The painted god, I discovered with relief, was made out of barley, beer, rancid butter and honey.

I could see that my Tibetan translator was chomping at the bit to show the old man messages we’d brought from the Dalai Lama’s Secretariat in India. But that would have been suicide. The young translator’s brother (I certainly won’t use their names), a cook at a nearby temple, joined a demonstration of monks against Chinese rule and was shot dead. I admonished our translator that his mother couldn’t afford to lose her last remaining child.

Instead, we gave the lama a postcard printed with the image of the multi-armed god Chenrezig. The priest would know, but the Chinese wouldn’t, that Tenzin Gyatso, the current Dalai Lama, is a reincarnation of this god.

“Ta la’i bla ma tshur log pa,” I said in my ridiculous Tibetan. The Dalai Lama will return.

We all return, he indicated, though not necessarily in this body.

The shivering “tourist” policewoman waited for us to leave before she entered the sanctuary. I can only imagine the questions she’d asked.

Ta la’i bla ma tshur log pa. The point of our heading deep into Tibet’s wastelands was to spread the word that the Dalai Lama hadn’t abandoned his people as the Chinese propagandists told them on radio, on loudspeakers, and through their local quislings. (My favorite notice was a warning by Chinese authorities that they must “approve all re-incarnations.” That was meant to avoid the Dalai Lama locating the new child containing the soul of the Panchen Lama, the Dalai Lama’s missing, and obviously murdered, number two man.)

On to another monastery with the postcard and the message. The old nuns would put the postcard over their eyes and forehead and turn to bow into the sun’s rays, the symbol of Free Tibet.

One monastery was quiet. In a land where you see the clouds below you, not above, sunlight is brutally harsh. Every image stands out in painful, unforgettable clarity. This emptied place had been smashed into ruins by the Red Guards. They’d arrested all the monks they hadn’t gunned down, some of the 200,000 Tibetans killed by the Chinese in their ethnic “re-education” campaign.

But the troops had left standing a wall of painted Buddhas, dozens and dozens of them. The Chinese cadres were certain the magic powers of these religious images were bunkum. Nevertheless, just in case, they’d put a bullet hole in each Buddha’s forehead.

Back down in the city, another plainclothesman, a grinning Chinese man, greeted me in the parking lot of the Lhasa Sheraton – in English, “Glad to see you again!”

Again?

“Oh, don’t you remember me? I was standing outside the Dalai Lama’s in Delhi.”

“Um, I was there to, you know, get some maps and, uh, some postcards.”

O.K. This is my warning. Say something, Palast. I tried this:

“That’s nice!” He stepped closer and grinned harder. “I have some books for you about Tibet” – some propaganda about Tibetans as cannibals (really). He paused, grinned even harder, then added, “I left them in your room.”

In my room? Another warning.

I wasn’t worried about the bed search. The envelope the Dalai Lama’s Secretariat had given us had already been delivered to persons whose identities we made certain not to know.

*

In his fleeting moment as President, Bill Clinton didn’t have time to remember Tibet. More pressing to him was free trade – with Mexico via NAFTA – and free trade with China, to which he granted Most Favored Nation status.

*

That May, we left just as the streets were filling with Tibetans demonstrating for freedom. They would never be seen on US TV. Not then, not now. NBC will interrupt the Beijing Summer Olympics only to broadcast its millionth ad for McDonald’s.

George Bush is there; says he was thrilled that the Chinese dictator, Hu Jintao, invited him and Laura and the kids to lunch. I doubt if they dined on a barley Buddha.

In the 1936 Olympics in Nazi Berlin, Americans knew that the competition was as much over our national souls as our physical prowess. When Jesse Owens, a Black man, left Hitler’s Aryan runners eating his dust, America jumped to its feet and cheered – not just for what he did, but for who we are: for liberty and justice for all.

Now, our Olympic Committee cravenly demands our athletes remain silent about Tibet. But they shouldn’t bother: Bush has already won the gold medal in the Cowardly Silence competition.

*

On the way to the Lhasa airport, leaving those occupied territories, I thought I could see, looking into the harsh glare, the Buddhist hermitage just below the Himalayan crest. I asked my guide if he’d heard from the old monk. I was told that, days after our visit, he raised the Tibetan sun-flag and was arrested.

The foolish Chinese undoubtedly would have sentenced him to only one life in prison.

He would return.

Teachers concerned over CCTV in schools

2
A quarter of teachers are said to be worried about hidden surveillance cameras in their schools.

According to members of the Association of Teachers and Lecturers (ATL) in a survey, cameras in the school environment are a worrying prospect and one teacher said the “regular use of cameras in class would be intimidating”.

One teacher from Northamptonshire said she objected to the “general monitoring of staff”. Other respondents said they would like the option of disabling the CCTV in places like the classroom. They said they would always feel they were “being watched and judged”.

Nearly all of the teachers said CCTV is used for monitoring security and vandalism around the school building. Just under half of teachers admitted the surveillance technology was also present within the school to monitor pupil behaviour. 53 per cent of teachers said the use of CCTV in schools made them feel safer.

In regards to the students, 50 per cent of teachers said they did not think it would make any difference to how they behaved in class.

“No one really knows enough about the use of CCTV in schools — it’s a very new issue,” said Dr Mary Bousted, general secretary of ATL. “Certainly we would want staff to be involved in decisions about the use of CCTV in schools, and strict safeguards for its use. Although surveillance in schools can have some positive outcomes, such as discouraging vandalism and violence, we think there are some instances where it should be strictly controlled.”

Bousted added that they had set up a working group to look into the use of CCTV to produce guidelines and best practice for schools using the technology.

ID card ‘propaganda’ backfires as students revolt

6

By Trust Britain’s youth to be characteristically ungrateful. The Government goes to all the effort of making a website for 16 to 25- year-olds to express their views on identity cards, and all they get in return is a solid mixture of scorn, sneering and scepticism smattered across their fancy new forums.

In a bid to get the country’s youngsters on board the controversial scheme, the Home Office has launched MyLifeMyId.org, where 16 to 25 year olds “can have their say about identity issues in the UK.”

But anyone browsing the discussions on the site would be hard pushed to find a single positive comment, with contributors branding the controversial scheme as “creepy,” “dirty” and “illegal” and the website itself as an “online propaganda machine”.

One contributor writes: “I think it’s pretty disingenuous of the government to come out and say “hey, yo, cool dudes! If you sign up for our hip hoppin’ ID card scheme you’ll never have to carry a heavy s*** passport to prove your age to some wack bartender again” or however it is they think we talk.” Meanwhile, amcs1983 had this to say: “So far the stats look like 100% say no to ID cards. Time to lose these results in a train station…..”

Another is equally censorious: “A Note to Jacqui Smith”, which contained the advice: “George Orwell never intended 1984 to be a manual for society. You’re a smart woman, I’m sure you knew that but I thought you ought to be reminded.”

Complementing the MyLifeMyId website is a YouTube video featuring Jacqui Smith, the Home Secretary. But rather curiously for a scheme that sets out to spark debate, the page indicates that “adding comments has been disabled for this video.”

Consequently, one intrepid YouTuber has re-uploaded the video to offer this facility. WillHowlett says: “Thought I’d reupload this piece of propaganda on behalf of Jacqui Smith but with the option to post comments and rate ON. You know, seeing as the video’s meant to be promoting discussion and everything.”

At the beginning of the year, when leaked documents revealed the Government’s proposals for the first stages of the rolling out of the contentious scheme, there was a ripple of discontent from a certain sector of the population. It was announced that the first ‘guinea-pigs’ for the project were to be students.

The National Union of Students (NUS) described the proposals as “extremely disappointing” and “morally reprehensible”. Ama Uzowuru, the NUS Vice President for welfare, said: “We would also be concerned for the safety of students’ personal information if they were forced to enter the ID card system.”

In March, the NUS expressed concerns that students would be in effect compelled to join the ID card scheme because they might not be able to gain access to key services — like the student loan system — without one.

The Government however is adamant that this will not be the case: “We will issue identity cards on a voluntary basis to young people from 2010, and there are no plans to make it necessary to hold an identity card to access any services,” a Home Office spokesman said.

“Young people who do not have an ID card will still be able to get student loans, and indeed no other public services will be denied just on the basis of whether they have an ID card.”

Nevertheless, the NUS say the Government may make it harder for students to claim loans and enrol at college without ID cards.

Although it is now evident that the overwhelming majority of comments on the website have lambasted the scheme, it is unclear what effect these views will have on its rollout in the run-up to 2010.

The Home Office’s spokesman was noticeably ambiguous on this question. “We want to know what people in this age group think of the National Identity Scheme, and their reactions to what services could be included with it,” he said. “The website will run for 12 weeks (until mid-October), and the feedback we get will be assessed, and the findings will help us shape how we roll-out the voluntary enrolment system for ID cards.”

However, one of the site’s users was less equivocal: “If they get a large negative reply [the Government will say that] ‘online figures do not necessarily represent the greater population’s opinion.’ If they get a large positive reply [the conclusion will be:] ‘We have received positive feedback from the population.’ Thats politics for ya!” he wrote.

Journalist says U.S. target was Al-Jazeera

5

By Bob Egelko  | After more than six years as a prisoner of the United States, former TV cameraman Sami al-Hajj is back at work with Al-Jazeera, the largest broadcaster in the Arab world, a thorn in the side of most Arab governments – and, by most indications, a target of deep hostility from the Bush administration.

Al-Hajj, 39, was the longest-held journalist in U.S. custody at the time of his release in May, and the only one ever held at the U.S. naval base at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba. Military authorities repeatedly accused him of being a terrorist in league with al Qaeda, then released him without charges.

His case is emblematic of the poisoned relationship between the U.S. government and a television network with 40 million viewers in the Middle East.

Since 2001, Bush administration officials have regularly denounced Al-Jazeera as an anti-American propaganda organ and a mouthpiece for terrorists, and have periodically urged its chief patron, the emir of Qatar, to rein it in.

The United States even founded a rival Arab-language network, Al Hurra, in 2004, but commentators on the region generally agree it hasn’t made a dent in Al-Jazeera’s popularity.

Al-Jazeera has also been hit twice by U.S. artillery fire. One shelling destroyed its Kabul bureau in November 2001. The second struck a Baghdad office in April 2003, killing correspondent Tareq Ayoub. The U.S. military concluded both shellings were accidents.

According to the Defense Department, al-Hajj was just another suspected terrorist among the 780 who have been held as enemy combatants since January 2002 at Guantanamo. But his lawyer, Clive Stafford Smith, says al-Hajj’s imprisonment was all about Al-Jazeera.

“We calculated about 135 times he’d been interrogated, and about the first 120 the only interest they had was Al-Jazeera,” Smith said. “They told him that they thought Al-Jazeera was an al Qaeda front.

“They were trying to get him to finger a number of well-known Al-Jazeera journalists as being in the Muslim Brotherhood,” an Islamist organization based in Egypt. “They offered to let him go if he’d spy.”

Al-Hajj’s response, Smith said, was that “he’d rather stay in Guantanamo for another 10 years.”

Al-Hajj gave a similar account to a gathering of supporters in his native Sudan in late May.

“They wanted me to betray the principles of my job and to turn me into a spy,” he said, according to an Al-Jazeera account.

Smith, who heads a London-based legal organization called Reprieve, which has represented about 80 inmates at Guantanamo, took on al-Hajj’s case in 2005 after the prisoner’s brother contacted him.

His information about the case, he said, comes from speaking with his client and from investigating the government’s varying allegations against him – all of which, Smith said, proved baseless.

The Defense Department declined to provide anyone to speak for attribution about the case, but denied pressuring al-Hajj to denounce Al-Jazeera or offering to free him if he agreed to spy on the network.

No deals

“We don’t make deals with detainees,” said a department official, speaking anonymously.

The official said the U.S. military doesn’t target journalists in general or Al-Jazeera in particular.

“If we were going to try to silence Al-Jazeera, it would be at a higher level of personnel than some cameraman trainee,” the official said of al-Hajj, who – according to the network – was a full-fledged cameraman when he was arrested.

An exception to state-run broadcasting in much of the Arab region, Al-Jazeera was founded in 1996 and quickly became the most-watched channel in Arab nations while angering many of their governments with its coverage, which included appearances by political dissidents.

The U.S. government has criticized Al-Jazeera for its coverage of the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, which has included footage of dead and wounded civilians as well as U.S. military casualties that is seldom shown in the United States.

Since the terrorist attacks of Sept. 11, 2001, the network has carried videotaped messages from Osama bin Laden and other al Qaeda leaders.

Smith said one of the reasons U.S. military authorities first gave for imprisoning al-Hajj was a suspicion – which proved unfounded – that he had taken part in Al-Jazeera’s interview of bin Laden in October 2001.

Born in Sudan

Al-Hajj, born and raised in Sudan, studied English at a college in India, then worked at a beverage company in the United Arab Emirates in the early 1990s before turning to journalism, according to biographical information from Al-Jazeera.

He got his first news media job with Al-Jazeera in 2001 and was assigned to Afghanistan to cover the war in October of that year. He entered Pakistan after U.S.-led forces ousted the Taliban government in Afghanistan, and was arrested by Pakistani authorities when he tried to re-enter Afghanistan in December 2001.

Al-Hajj was turned over to U.S. authorities at the military base in Bagram in January 2002, was transferred to the base at Kandahar a month later and was flown to Guantanamo in June 2002.

In describing al-Hajj as an enemy combatant and suspected terrorist, military authorities offered a variety of allegations that mostly had a common theme, Smith said: that he was using his journalistic credentials to promote terrorism.

They accused him at different times of filming bin Laden and other al Qaeda figures for Al-Jazeera and of maintaining a Web site to contact the terrorist group, Smith said.

Military officials also alleged for a time that al-Hajj had smuggled Stinger missiles to Chechen rebels.

Trained in use of cameras

A final assessment by a military panel at Guantanamo in October 2007, accusing al-Hajj of working to facilitate “terrorist acts,” cited as evidence the fact that he “was trained by Al-Jazeera in the use of cameras,” Smith said, quoting the report.

Smith said al-Hajj was subjected to physical and psychological abuse throughout his captivity. The Pentagon disputes his description, and it can’t be verified independently. But it is consistent with human-rights groups’ assessments of conditions at the U.S. detention facilities.

Al-Hajj still bears the scars of some of his treatment, his lawyer said – a broken kneecap that was stomped on by guards at Bagram, and marks on his knees from being forced to kneel on cold concrete for long periods at Kandahar. U.S. military police at Kandahar also beat him regularly and pulled out the hairs of his beard one by one, Smith said.

At Guantanamo, Smith said, the worst injuries were psychological – the isolation and hopelessness that led al-Hajj to begin a hunger strike in January 2007.

After three weeks, Smith said, al-Hajj, like other hunger-strikers at the base, was force-fed twice a day for the rest of his imprisonment, strapped to a restraint chair while a 43-inch-long tube was inserted in one nostril to carry high-protein liquid to his stomach.

Pressure from reporters

Throughout his captivity, Al-Jazeera and Reporters Without Borders, a free-press organization that monitors governments’ treatment of journalists, pressed for al-Hajj’s release.

They were eventually joined by the government of Sudan and by the BBC, whose correspondent Alan Johnston was kidnapped and held for nearly four months in Gaza last year.

But Smith said U.S. authorities insisted to the end that al-Hajj denounce Al-Jazeera and also tried, unsuccessfully, to get the Sudanese government to restrict his travel and prevent him from working for the network.

His release was as abrupt and unexplained as his imprisonment, Smith said.

Al-Hajj was blindfolded, shackled and chained to the floor of the plane that took him back to Sudan, Smith said. He said al-Hajj collapsed when he landed, was hospitalized for a few days and then returned to his wife and their son, now 7.

Two months after his release, the former cameraman was given a new job, as news producer for human rights at Al-Jazeera’s headquarters in Doha, the capital of Qatar. In a statement released by the network, al-Hajj said he hopes to use his position “as a vehicle to show the world that human rights abuses still occur all over the globe.”

PAKISTAN: Musharraf Quits, Avoids Impeachment

0

ISLAMABAD (IPS) | Pakistan President Pervez Musharraf resigned from office on Monday ending weeks of speculation over whether he would quit or face impeachment on charges of illegally seizing power by a parliament elected in February and dominated by political parties opposed to him.

Musharraf, who grabbed power in a bloodless military coup in October 1999, was compelled to resign after the ruling Pakistan People’s Party (PPP) of assassinated former prime minister Benazir Bhutto and the Pakistan Muslim League-Nawaz (PML-N), led by another former prime minister, Nawaz Sharif, buried differences over the impeachment issue.

Musharraf had kept both Sharif and Bhutto in exile for years. Both returned to fight the general elections but Bhutto was assassinated on Dec. 27 while on campaign. There was no immediate word on whether Musharraf himself would now leave the country.

In his last days in office Musharraf found himself isolated. Pakistan’s powerful army — of which he was chief until November — decided to stay neutral. And the party he nurtured, the Pakistan Muslim League – Qaid (PML-Q), began to distance itself as soon as he handed over command of the army to Gen. Ashfaq Parvez Kayani.

Musharraf was also under increasing criticism by Washington for failing to keep the promises he made to fight elements of the Taliban and the al-Qaeda that had dug in along the rugged the Pakistan- Afghanistan border and were offering resistance to U.S. and NATO troops in Afghanistan.

But officials said Musharraf’s friends in the United States, Britain and Saudi Arabia stepped in to ensure a safe exit for him.

In his hour-long address over the state-run Pakistan TV, Musharraf, a former commando, showed strong nerves. “No charge sheet can stand against me. Not even a single charge can be proven against me as I have full trust in Allah Almighty and I did everything with the belief of Pakistan First.”

”This is not time for individual bravado. [Whether] I lose or win in impeachment proceedings, the Pakistani nation will be the loser,” Musharraf said in his address. He was convinced that the ‘’honor and dignity of the country will be affected [by the resignation] and in my view, the honor of the office of president will also be affected’’.

His opponents thought different. “It’s a victory for all democratic forces and it’s victory for Benazir Bhutto and all those who sacrificed their lives for democracy,” said PPP spokeswoman Farzana Raja.

Musharraf, who had been adamant for the last two weeks not to resign and instead face impeachment proceedings, announced that after consultations with his legal advisers and close political supporters, he has decided to resign in the larger national interest.

‘’I hope the nation and the people of Pakistan will forgive my mistakes as I believe that whatever I have done in the past was in good faith; for the betterment of the people, and for the country”.

‘’Even if the impeachment fails, Musharraf said, ‘’relations between the presidency and the parliament will never be the same again. As ‘Pakistan first’ has been my philosophy, I eventually decided to quit without creating a fuss in the supreme national interest”.

‘’He [Musharraf] tried to justify pretty much what he had done, but I think at the end of the day this was the only option, because the space for him to remain president had shrunk so much that it had become impossible to carry on,’’ said information minister and PPP member Sherry Rehman, reacting to the address.

As army general Musharraf was responsible for masterminding the 1999 armed incursions into the Indian part of the divided territory of Kashmir at Kargil, that triggered off a military standoff between the South Asian countries. A full-scale war was averted between the nuclear-armed neighbours only because of Western intervention led by Washington.

In the October of 1999 Musharraf seized power by ousting a government led by Sharif. He succeeded in fending off international calls for the restoration of democracy mostly by reinventing himself as a key ally of the U.S. in the ‘war on terror’ in neighbouring Afghanistan.

A grateful Washington pumped in more than ten billion dollars worth of aid meant for the war effort, that indirectly helped Musharraf stave off challenges to his rule. Questions are now being asked as to how and where that money was actually spent.

Musharraf’s luck began to run out in March last year when he tried to oust the chief justice of the Supreme Court Iftikhar Chaudhry, triggering an open confrontation with the country’s influential legal fraternity.

In November he forced his own re-election for another five-year term and sacked 60 members of country’s higher judiciary, when they refused to endorse a state of emergency he ordered. But his political allies were defeated by the PPP and the PML-N in the February elections, sealing his fate.

Record Number of US Contractors in Iraq

0

The American military has depended on private contractors since sutlers sold paper, bacon, sugar, and other small luxuries to Continental Army troops during the Revolutionary War.

But the scale of the use of contractors in Iraq is unprecedented in US history, according to a new congressional report that may be the most thorough official account yet of the practice.

As of early 2008, at least 190,000 private personnel were working on US-funded projects in the Iraq theater, the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) survey found. That means that for each uniformed member of the US military in the region, there was also a contract employee — a ratio of 1 to 1.

“It is … exceptional the degree to which the military’s currently relying on such contractors,” said CBO director Peter Orszag at an Aug. 12 press conference.

In the Korean conflict, the ratio was 2.5 uniformed personnel for each contractor. In Vietnam, the comparable figure was 5 to 1.

The Balkans conflict of the 1990s provided a glimpse of the future, as it also featured a 1-to-1 military-to-civilian worker ratio.

But in the Balkans, the overall deployment numbers “were of a much smaller scale than what we are seeing in Iraq,” Mr. Orszag said.

A number of factors are behind the Pentagon’s growing dependence on contractors, says the CBO report. Reductions in the size of the post-cold war military mean that private firms now provide more and more of the logistical support needed to keep the armed services running, such as food supply and housekeeping services on bases. In general, all US agencies in recent decades have outsourced more and more functions judged not inherently governmental.

In Iraq in particular, the ranks of contractors have been bolstered by the US decision to try to rebuild the country while hostilities were still under way.

The CBO estimates the total cost of these military contractor operations from 2003 through 2008 to be $100 billion. That’s about 20 percent of all US funding for operations in Iraq.

Most of this money went for logistics support — food-service operation, fuel distribution, equipment maintenance, and procurement and property management.

Roughly $12 billion of the $100 billion total paid for private security contractors — the gun-toting guards of Blackwater and other paramilitary personnel providers.

The CBO looked at the cost of hiring private guards versus the cost of providing similar security with US military units. Among the factors analysts took into consideration was that the Pentagon must pay and outfit multiple brigades to keep one in Iraq, due to deployment rotations.

The result was a tie, according to the CBO.

“The cost of having an Army contingent provide the same services as Blackwater appears to be roughly the same as the cost of the contract itself,” Orszag said.

The same holds true for more mundane logistical operations, says the CBO. Hiring a private oil-truck driver for Iraq costs about as much as recruiting, training, and providing a uniformed equivalent.

However, critics of military outsourcing say the real problem is flexibility and command-and-control over private workers.

For instance, private guards have been loose cannons in Iraq, critics say. A federal grand jury is investigating whether Blackwater guards acted illegally when they opened fire in a busy Baghdad intersection last September. Among the most contentious issues in the status-of-forces agreement now being negotiated by the US and Iraqi governments is whether private guards will be subject to arrest and trial by Iraqi authorities.

“One of the key questions surrounding the government’s escalating use of military contractors is actually not whether they save the government client money or not…. Rather, the crucial question that should be asked at the onset of any potential outsourcing is simple: Should the task be done by a private company in the first place?” wrote Peter Singer, director of the 21st Century Defense Initiative at the Brookings Institution, in an analysis earlier this year.

US, allies contemplating action against Russia

1

CRAWFORD, Texas – The United States on Sunday accused Russia of stalling its military pullback in Georgia, but the Bush administration is not rushing to repudiate Moscow for its actions.

The White House is struggling to figure out the best way to penalize Russia. It doesn’t want to deeply damage existing cooperation on many fronts or discourage Moscow from further integrating itself into global economic and political institutions. At the same time, U.S. officials say Russia can’t be allowed to get away with invading its neighbor.

Fighting broke out after Georgia launched a massive barrage Aug. 7 to try to take control of the separatist province of South Ossetia, which is heavily influenced by Russia. The Russian army quickly overwhelmed Georgia’s forces, then drove deep into the country, bombed Georgian ports and military installations and tied up an east-west highway through the nation.

“There’s no doubt there will be further consequences,” said Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice, who briefed President Bush on the fast-changing crisis over the weekend at his Texas ranch.

She returned to Washington on Sunday and is flying to Brussels, Belgium, on Monday to talk with NATO allies about what message the West should send to Russia.

Rice is then flying to Warsaw, Poland, where she will sign a formal agreement with Poland for the establishment of a missile interceptor site there. Moscow has protested the U.S. plans for such a base so close to its borders.

Russia can’t use “disproportionate force” against Georgia and still be welcomed into the halls of international institutions, Rice said.

“It’s not going to happen that way,” she said. “Russia will pay a price.”

But neither Rice nor Defense Secretary Robert Gates would be specific about what punitive actions the U.S. or the international community might take.

“We’re going to take our time and assess what further consequences there should be to the relationship,” Rice said.

The United States wants to take a tough stance against Russia, but there is much at stake.

“The facts are that the United States has to work with Russia on Iran, on nuclear problems of proliferation, on a whole raft of trade issues at a time in which the United States has a huge domestic deficit,” said Sen. Richard Lugar, the senior Republican on the Senate Foreign Relations Committee.

And holding open the prospect of taking steps against Russia gives the United States some leverage in pushing Russia to withdraw from Georgia. But nothing is expected to happen in a hurry, and the United States doesn’t want to turn the conflict into a fight between the former Cold War rivals.

“There is no need to rush into everything,” Gates said. “We don’t want to do it unilaterally.

“I think there needs to be a strong, unified response to Russia to send the message that this kind of behavior, characteristic of the Soviet period, has no place in the 21st century,” he said.

Asked whether Russia should be kicked out of the Group of Eight major industrialized states, or whether it should be kept from joining the World Trade Organization, Gates replied vaguely, saying the U.S. and its allies can choose from a broad menu of possible punitive steps. Russia already is feeling repercussions, he said.

“The whole world is looking at Russia through a different set of lenses than just a week and a half or two weeks ago, so there are already consequences,” Gates said. “I think they may not appreciate the magnitude of those consequences yet. The longer they take to get out and to observe the cease-fire that’s been declared and the arrangements that have been worked out, I think the greater those consequences will be.”

Russian President Dmitry Medvedev said Russian troops will begin leaving Monday, but made no mention of leaving the separatist province at the heart of the conflict between the countries. The Bush administration is hopeful yet skeptical that Russia will honor its pledge to withdraw troops quickly from Georgia under terms of a cease-fire it signed Saturday.

“My own view is that the Russians will probably stall and perhaps take more time than anybody would like,” Gates said. “I think we just need to keep the pressure and ensure that they abide by the agreement that they’ve signed and do so in a timely way.”

The Russians say they’re going to take their time in leaving the South Carolina-sized democracy that declared its independence in 1991.

Konstantin Kosachev, chairman of the Russian parliament’s foreign affairs committee, said Russian forces will be out of Georgia “sooner or later,” but how much time it takes depends on how Georgia behaves.

Echoing Bush’s call to withdraw U.S. troops from Iraq depending on conditions on the ground, Kosachev said: “If I would ask you … `How fast the American forces can leave Iraq?’ … the answer would be, as soon as we have guarantees for peace and security there.

“The same answer would be toward this situation: as soon as we are assured that Georgians will not continue to use military force against South Ossetians and against Abkhazians” – residents of two separatist areas of Georgia now overrun with Russian troops and abandoned by Georgian soldiers.

Rice and Gates pressed the administration’s case during appearances on five Sunday talks shows – Rice on “Fox News Sunday,” CBS’ “Face the Nation” and NBC’s “Meet the Press,” and Gates on ABC’s “This Week” and “Late Edition” on CNN. Kosachev and Lugar also appeared on CNN.

AP

Victims of the Drug War Are Forced to Resort to Bizarre Legal Defenses

0

By Kevin Carey | On November 16, 2005, Willie “Bo” Mitchell and three co-defendants — Shelton “Little Rock” Harris, Shelly “Wayne” Martin, and Shawn Earl Gardner — appeared for a hearing in the modern federal courthouse in downtown Baltimore, Maryland. The four African American men were facing federal charges of racketeering, weapons possession, drug dealing, and five counts of first-degree murder. For nearly two years the prosecutors had been methodically building their case, with the aim of putting the defendants to death. In Baltimore, which has a murder rate eight times higher than that of New York City, such cases are depressingly commonplace.

A few minutes after 10 a.m., United States District Court Judge Andre M. Davis took his seat and began his introductory remarks. Suddenly, the leader of the defendants, Willie Mitchell, a short, unremarkable looking twenty-eight-yearold with close-cropped hair, leapt from his chair, grabbed a microphone, and launched into a bizarre soliloquy.

“I am not a defendant,” Mitchell declared. “I do not have attorneys.” The court “lacks territorial jurisdiction over me,” he argued, to the amazement of his lawyers. To support these contentions, he cited decades-old acts of Congress involving the abandonment of the gold standard and the creation of the Federal Reserve. Judge Davis, a Baltimore-born African American in his late fifties, tried to interrupt. “I object,” Mitchell repeated robotically. Shelly Martin and Shelton Harris followed Mitchell to the microphone, giving the same speech verbatim. Their attorneys tried to intervene, but when Harris’s lawyer leaned over to speak to him, Harris shoved him away.

Judge Davis ordered the three defendants to be removed from the court, and turned to Gardner, who had, until then, remained quiet. But Gardner, too, intoned the same strange speech. “I am Shawn Earl Gardner, live man, flesh and blood,” he proclaimed. Every time the judge referred to him as “the defendant” or “Mr. Gardner,” Gardner automatically interrupted: “My name is Shawn Earl Gardner, sir.” Davis tried to explain to Gardner that his behavior was putting his chances of acquittal or leniency at risk. “Don’t throw your life away,” Davis pleaded. But Gardner wouldn’t stop. Judge Davis concluded the hearing, determined to find out what was going on.

As it turned out, he wasn’t alone. In the previous year, nearly twenty defendants in other Baltimore cases had begun adopting what lawyers in the federal courthouse came to call “the flesh-and-blood defense.” The defense, such as it is, boils down to this: As officers of the court, all defense lawyers are really on the government’s side, having sworn an oath to uphold a vast, century-old conspiracy to conceal the fact that most aspects of the federal government are illegitimate, including the courts, which have no constitutional authority to bring people to trial. The defendants also believed that a legal distinction could be drawn between their name as written on their indictment and their true identity as a “flesh and blood man.”

Judge Davis and his law clerk pored over the case files, which led them to a series of strange Web sites. The fleshand- blood defense, they discovered, came from a place far from Baltimore, from people as different from Willie Mitchell as people could possibly be. Its antecedents stretched back decades, involving religious zealots, gun nuts, tax protestors, and violent separatists driven by theories that had fueled delusions of Aryan supremacy and race war in gun-loaded compounds in the wilds of Montana and Idaho. Although Mitchell and his peers didn’t know it, they were inheriting the intellectual legacy of white supremacists who believe that America was irrevocably broken when the 14th Amendment provided equal rights to former slaves. It was the ideology that inspired the Oklahoma City bombing, the biggest act of domestic terrorism in the nation’s history, and now, a decade later, it had somehow sprouted in the crime-ridden ghettos of Baltimore.

The series of events that led to the prosecution of Willie Mitchell et al are as convoluted, tragic and intermittently absurd as an episode of HBO’s acclaimed Baltimore crime drama, The Wire. Mitchell and company came of age on the streets of West Baltimore, a few miles and a world away from the rejuvenated inner harbor and the tourist attractions near the federal courthouse. According to prosecutors, the group began selling drugs together as teenagers in the mid-1990s, driving up I-95 to New York City, buying half kilos of cocaine in upper Manhattan and cooking it into crack to sell back home. They added heroin to their repertoire a few years later, as well as robbing and killing other drug dealers. By 2002, they were firmly established in what passes as normal enterprise in a hollowed-out economy like Baltimore, where the drug trade often provides more opportunity than legitimate work and the bedrock institutions of family and school have crumbled. They had children out of wedlock with multiple women. They were occasionally arrested, although they never served much time. It was an insular culture where a ruthless prohibition against “snitching” to the police was often more powerful than any law. Even as cities like New York saw the murder rate decline dramatically, drug killings in Baltimore continued at a steady clip.

According to the indictment, the end began on February 18, 2002, in a downtown Baltimore nightclub called Hammerjacks, where Mitchell got into a dispute and stabbed a fellow drug dealer in the back, seriously wounding him. If Mitchell had hoped to get away with this attempted murder, he was swiftly and brutally set straight by the drug dealer’s associates. When police on patrol found Mitchell later that evening, he was on a sidewalk with several men jumping on his head. Mitchell survived the assault, but he remained in serious trouble. The police had issued a warrant for his arrest; more ominously, his enemies had placed a $10,000 contract on his head.

Mitchell probably didn’t know exactly what his enemies had in mind, but he was seasoned enough to realize that they wanted him killed. Ten days after the club incident, prosecutors allege, he made a phone call to an associate of the men who had beaten him up. The associate was a drug dealer named Oliver “Woody” McCaffity. Mitchell proposed that the two men meet that evening for a drug deal.

Neither man came to the meeting alone. Mitchell brought a friend, Shelton Harris. McCaffity brought his sometime girlfriend, Lisa Brown. Brown was a pastor’s daughter, a computer systems analyst and mother of three. Her parents told reporters that she had broken up with McCaffity after learning of his involvement with drugs. But when he called and invited her to the movies, she decided to go along.

The two parties drove to the Park Heights section of Northwest Baltimore. It was a quick meeting. Mitchell and Harris climbed into the backseat of McCaffity’s Infiniti Q-45. Then they shot McCaffity through the head and fired through Brown’s raised right hand into her left temple, where police later found a .357 caliber bullet. The bodies of McCaffity and Brown were left in the car, which rolled downhill and rammed into a nearby tree at the dead-end of the street. Police found it two hours later. A palm print on the car window was later matched to Harris, and McCaffity’s cell phone records revealed calls that night to Mitchell’s phone. Mitchell, suspecting that McCaffity’s associates were going to try to kill him, had apparently decided to kill first. The murder would probably not have attracted much attention, except for the fact that McCaffity’s Infiniti was owned by Hasim Rahman, the recently dethroned heavyweight boxing champion of the world. McCaffity was a friend and business associate of Rahman, causing the ex-champ to quickly call a press conference denying any involvement in the crimes. (Police have never alleged otherwise.)

If the killing of McCaffity and Brown had been a successful preemptive strike, Mitchell was also prepared to kill for more mundane reasons. On March 24, a few weeks after the Mc- Caffity murder, Mitchell allegedly called a former high school classmate named Darryl Wyche and offered to buy some heroin and cocaine from him. Darryl, excited by the prospect of a big sale, agreed. The two made plans to meet in a nearby industrial park around midnight.

Again, neither party came alone. Wyche brought his younger brother Tony, who had reluctantly agreed to drive. Mitchell brought Harris again, as well as two more friends: Shelly Martin and Shawn Gardner.

The Wyche brothers opened the back door of their Honda to let Mitchell and his men into the back seat. Then each received a bullet in the side of the head. The next morning the police found the bodies, seat belts still on. (Mitchell appears to have seen Wyche as an easy source of drugs and cash.)

But Mitchell’s luck was about to end. When Baltimore homicide detectives found the bodies of the Wyche brothers, they assumed they had come across another hard-to-solve drug killing. Then they received an unexpected phone call. It was from Darryl Wyche’s mother-in-law, who reported finding a strange message on her phone. Recorded at 12:43 a.m., the message was four and a half minutes of a group of men with names like “Wayne” and “Shorty” saying things like “Bup-bup-bup-bup-bup, yo, they both fucked.” The call had come from the cellphone of Darryl Wyche.

Wyche’s family and the police soon figured out what had happened: One of the murderers had stolen Darryl Wyche’s phone and forgotten to turn it off. While the killers were driving away, one of them had accidentally pressed the phone’s speed dial button, calling Darryl’s mother-in-law and producing a most unusual piece of evidence: a voicemail confession. With considerable understatement, a lieutenant in the city homicide unit reflected on his good fortune to the Baltimore Sun. “We got lucky,” he said. Willie Mitchell and Shelly Martin were soon rounded up and put in jail.

What would become the fifth and final murder charge in the case of Willie Mitchell and his cohorts took place two months later. This time, only Mitchell’s friend Shawn Gardner was directly involved. It began with a man named Darius Spence, who had found out that his wife, Tanya, was cheating on him with a local drug dealer everyone called “Momma.”

Spence decided to have Momma beaten up severely. To accomplish this, he negotiated with another drug dealer named Willie Montgomery. Would Montgomery be willing to beat up Momma in exchange for money? But Montgomery had another proposition altogether. Beating Momma up didn’t make sense, Montgomery argued, because then Momma would undoubtedly try to kill Montgomery. It was better just to kill Momma outright, and for five thousand dollars, Montgomery would be glad to do the job. Spence said he’d think it over.

Unfortunately for Darius Spence, Montgomery wasn’t interested in waiting around for an answer. Instead, sensing opportunity, Montgomery decided to tell Momma about the hit. If I turn down the deal, Montgomery explained, then Spence will probably just hire someone else to kill you. Therefore, Montgomery reasoned, you should hire me to kill Spence first. Momma was persuaded. (As Montgomery later explained to the prosecutors, “I guess he like that idea better than Darius Spence’s idea.”)

To execute the hit on Spence, Montgomery recruited two associates, one of whom was Shawn Gardner. For the next two months, the three men staked out Spence’s apartment. The plan was for Shawn Gardner and his associate to invade from the basement and carry out the killing, and then run to a nearby getaway car, which was to be driven by Montgomery. Special care was to be taken not to harm Tanya, and they would cover her eyes with duct tape to prevent her from identifying them. Still, Montgomery warned Momma that he couldn’t guarantee Tanya’s safety. “If it’s up to me, she won’t be hurt,” Montgomery told Momma, “but some things could go wrong.” Momma’s reply was to the point: “Do what you do.”

On June 7, 2002, the three men drove to the Spence apartment, a worn red brick building at the end of a cul-de-sac a few miles from Baltimore city. But the hit didn’t go as planned. Darius Spence wasn’t in the apartment, and they didn’t manage to blindfold Tanya. As children played outside the Spence apartment, Tanya burst through the kitchen door on the third floor, screaming, “No! No!” Lifting one leg over the balcony, she tried to climb down to the floor below but lost her grip and fell fifteen feet to the ground, landing a few feet from the children. Gasping for breath, she motioned for them to run away before crawling under the first floor balcony. Moments later, the two killers emerged from the Spence apartment, ran down the steps and stopped a few feet from Tanya, now lying in the fetal position in the dirt and begging for her life. One pulled out a large caliber revolver and fired two shots into Tanya’s chest as the children watched. Then both men ran away.

Unfortunately for the killers, Montgomery wasn’t where they thought he’d be. Somehow the meeting place had gotten confused, and the getaway failed. Police quickly apprehended Shawn Gardner and his associate. Eventually, the law caught up to Montgomery, too.

Gardner was tried, convicted, and sentenced in state court to life in prison without the possibility of parole for the murder of Tanya Spence. Meanwhile, Willie Mitchell and Shelly Martin were charged by the state with the Wyche brothers’ killings and sat in prison for the next year and a half as police and prosecutors assembled their case.

Then, on January 22, 2004 — nearly two years after the first four murders — the word came down from the office of U.S. Attorney Thomas DiBiagio: the Willie Mitchell case was going federal, and the government was seeking the death penalty. The Justice Department, DiBiagio explained, was going after “individuals responsible for making life hell in Baltimore.”

For Mitchell and company, this was bad news. Instead of jurors selected from the city pool, Mitchell would likely be judged by an all-white panel of citizens from places like Maryland’s westernmost rural counties or the far reaches of the Eastern Shore. He would face better-funded prosecutors, and was far more likely to get the death penalty. Maryland has only executed five people in the last thirty years, but in 2005, then-Attorney General John Ashcroft was aggressively seeking death sentences. In fact, the Justice Department was even retrying cases in order to win death penalties for crimes like the Spence murder, for which Shawn Gardner was already serving life without parole.

DiBiagio’s office also added a raft of conspiracy charges to the indictment, filed under the federal Racketeering Influenced and Corrupt Organizations (RICO) Act. By alleging that the defendants were part of an organized conspiracy — the so-called “Willie Mitchell organization” — prosecutors could hold all four defendants responsible for any of the crimes the others had committed. That’s why Shelton Harris, who wasn’t originally arrested for the Wyche or the McCaffity and Brown murders, was pulled off the street and charged with the full slate of crimes. It’s also why Mitchell and Harris were charged with the Spence murder, although they were already in jail when Shawn Gardner committed it. RICO is normally applied to members of the mafia and organized crime, and its use sent a clear message: the government was coming at Mitchell and company with everything it had.

The prosecutors bolstered the conspiracy argument by noting that, unlike most Baltimore drug dealers, Mitchell and company had incorporated a legal entity for which they all worked and allegedly funneled proceeds of their drug business into: “Shake Down Entertainment, Ltd.” The group promoted rap CDs and concerts through the company, which even had its own record label, “Shystyville.” Soon, Shystyville CDs with titles like “Pure Shit” became evidence of not just the conspiracy but the crimes themselves, with prosecutors entering into the record lyrics like these:

 

I watch ya brains fly all over on the bitch next to you
Homeboy it’s up to you I could put this pup to you
Then to pumpin’ you up like a innertube
Send shots that’ll pump up the end of you
Leave you all fat and bloated you know I keep
the Mac loaded then I like ta clack rollin’
That’s why Bo and Weez on lock now and every day on lock down
Niggas getting shot down for runnin’ they mouth clown
Tell me how it feels with a gun in ya mouth now

 

 

Prosecutors alleged that the “bitch next to you” was Lisa Brown, who was sitting beside Oliver McCaffity when he was shot through the head, that a “pup” is slang for the largecaliber revolver used in the killing, that the “Bo” on “lock now” was the imprisoned Willie “Bo” Mitchell, and that the reference to “Niggas getting shot for runnin’ they mouth” amounted to witness intimidation. Faced with the prospect of an all-white jury hearing this music in the courtroom, the defense lawyers objected on the grounds that lots of songs have lyrics that “proudly refer to violent retaliation,” offering by way of example country star Toby Keith’s “Courtesy of the Red, White and Blue (The Angry American).”

Nearly two years passed. The wheels of justice were turning, slowly but surely. Then came the memorable hearing in which the defendants debuted the flesh-and-blood defense. After that, everything changed.

A month after the hearing, Judge Davis took the unusual step of issuing a written opinion denying all of the defendant’s “unusual — if not bizarre” arguments. “Perhaps they would even be humorous,” Davis wrote, “were the stakes not so high It is truly ironic that four African- American defendants here apparently rely on an ideology derived from a famously discredited notion: the illegitimacy of the Fourteenth Amendment.” One can understand his incredulity that four Baltimore drug dealers might invoke a racist argument that dates back to the nineteenth century. But as it turns out, that’s when the seeds of the flesh-and-blood defense were sown.

In 1878, southern Democrats pushed legislation through Congress limiting the ability of the federal government to marshal troops on U.S. soil. Known as Posse Comitatus, (Latin for “power of the county”) the law’s authors hoped to constrain the government’s ability to protect black southerners from violence and discrimination. The act symbolically marked the end of Reconstruction and the beginning of Jim Crow.

For the next eight decades, black Americans lived under the yoke of institutional racism. But by the late 1950s, the civil rights movement was growing in strength. In 1957, President Eisenhower sent 1,200 troops from the 101st Airborne Division to Little Rock, Arkansas, so that nine black students could safely enter a previously all-white high school. The landmark Civil Rights Act followed in 1964.

These developments horrified one William Gale, a World War II veteran, insurance salesman, self-styled minister of racist Christian Identity theology, and raving anti-Semite. In 1971, he launched a movement whose impact would reverberate through the radical fringes of American society for decades to come. He called it Posse Comitatus, named for the 1878 law he believed Eisenhower had violated by sending the troops to Little Rock. In a series of tapes and self-published pamphlets, Gale explained that county sheriffs were the supreme legal law enforcement officers in the land, and that county residents had the right to form a posse to enforce the Constitution — however they, as “sovereign citizens,” chose to interpret it. Public officials who interfered, instructed Gale, should be “hung by the neck” at high noon.

Gale’s racist beliefs were hardly unique. His singular innovation was to devise a “legal” philosophy that was enormously appealing to disaffected, alienated citizens. It was a promise of power, a means of asserting that they were the true inheritors of the founding fathers’ ideal, a dream they believed had been corrupted by a vast conspiracy that only they could see. Gale’s ideas gave people on the paranoid edge of society a collective identity. It told them what they desperately wanted to hear: that the federal government was illegitimate, and that the legal weapons the state used to oppress them could be turned against the state.

Soon, Posses were sprouting across the country, attracting veterans of the 1960s-era tax protest movement, Second Amendment absolutists, Christian Identity adherents, and ardent anti-communists who had abandoned the John Birch Society because they felt the organization wasn’t extreme enough. Local groups would meet to share literature, listen to tapes of Gale’s sermons, and discuss preparations for the approaching End Times. This extremist stew produced exotic amalgamations of paranoia, such as when Posse members would explain the need for local militias to stockpile weapons in order to defend white Christians from blacks in the coming race war sparked by the inevitable economic collapse caused by the income tax and a cabal of international Jewish bankers bent on global dominance through one world government, for Satan.

While local Posses would periodically confront law enforcement officials in the 1970s, (usually in property disputes), they were often incompetent, and few people were hurt. But things took a serious turn in 1978, when thousands of farmers rallied in Washington D.C. seeking relief from low commodity prices, high interest rates, and farm debt. When Congressional relief attempts failed, some farmers became susceptible to peddlers of the Posse ideology, which preached that the farm crisis had been brought on by the international Jewish banking conspiracy, abandonment of the gold standard and a malevolent Federal Reserve.

By 1982, Bill Gale had flown to Kansas to conduct paramilitary training and indoctrination for splinter groups of disaffected farmers. At night, a country music station in Dodge City broadcast tapes of Gale’s sermons. “You’re either going to get back to the Constitution of the United States in your government,” he intoned, “or officials are gonna hang by the neck until they’re dead Arise and fight! If a Jew comes near you, run a sword through him.” As Posse ideology rippled across the distressed farm belt, violence followed. Several deadly confrontations between Posse adherents and law enforcement made national headlines; Geraldo Rivera descended on Nebraska to document the “Seeds of Hate” in America’s heartland. By 1987, Gale’s rhetoric had escalated further. He told his followers that “You’ve got an enemy government running around its source and its location is Washington, D.C., and the federal buildings they’ve built with your tax money all over the cities in this land.”

Hucksters and charlatans prowled the Midwest as the farm crisis deepened, selling desperate farmers expensive seminars and prepackaged legal defenses “guaranteed” to cancel debts and forestall foreclosure. Since the gold standard had been abandoned in 1933, they argued, money had no inherent value, and so neither did their debts. All they had to do, farmers were told, was opt out of the system by sending a letter to the appropriate authorities renouncing their driver’s license, birth certificate, and social security number. That number was allegedly tied to a secret government account held in a secure subterranean facility in lower Manhattan, where citizens are used as collateral against international debts issued by the Fed and everyone’s name is on a master list, spelled in capital letters — the very same capital letters used in the official court documents detailing foreclosure and other actions against them. The capital letter name was nothing but an artificial construct, they were told, a legal “straw man.” It wasn’t them — natural, live, flesh and blood men.

Bill Gale died on April 28, 1988, three months after being sentenced in federal court for conspiracy, tax crimes, and mailing death threats to the Internal Revenue Service. By that time, the farm crisis had begun to recede. Posse ideology simmered for the next few years, morphing into the “Christian Patriot” movement, which sanded down some of the roughest racist and anti-Semitic edges while retaining the core beliefs of Constitutional fundamentalism. The patriots saw themselves as “sovereign citizens,” unlike the “federal citizens” who had been created by the 14th Amendment’s guarantee of equal protection under the law.

The deadly confrontations between federal agents and extremists at Ruby Ridge in 1992 and Waco, Texas in 1993 brought latent anger with the federal government back to a boil. The militia movement of the 1990s built on Posse tenets of county- based, self-organized paramilitary groups led by citizens expressing their basic Constitutional rights. Most groups stuck with conducting survivalist training camps and filing bogus liens against houses owned by local judges. But a few did much more.

In 1993, a Michigan farmer and survivalist named James Nichols was pulled over for speeding. Instead of simply paying the fine, he argued in court that his “sovereign citizen” status made him immune to prosecution. That same year, James’ brother Terry tried to pay off a $17,000 debt with a fake check issued by a radical “family farm preservation” group run by Posse adherents. Two years later, Terry Nichols helped to bring the Posse’s anti-government hatred to its ultimate fruition. On April 18, 1995, he and a friend named Timothy McVeigh loaded 108 fifty-pound bags of ammonium nitrate fertilizer into a Ryder truck. The next day, McVeigh bombed the Murrah federal building in Oklahoma City, killing 168 people on the second anniversary of Waco.

After the attack, the Feds began cracking down on white supremacist groups, including one called the “Montana Freemen,” who were, in the words of hate-group expert Daniel Levitas, “the direct ideological descendants of the Posse Comitatus.” (Levitas’ book, The Terrorist Next Door, contains the definitive account of Bill Gale and the Posse.) The Freemen were arrested in their isolated compound after a threemonth standoff with the FBI. At trial, they filed an array of bizarre documents citing the Fed, the gold standard, the 14th Amendment, and the Uniform Commercial Code, but to no avail. They were sent to the maximum security “Supermax” federal prison in Florence, Colorado, where they remain today.

But the appeal of their anti-government dogma didn’t disappear. The Freemen continued to attract sympathizers outside Supermax walls. Some collected the documents the Freemen filed during their trial and began offering them for sale via adver tisements in “America’s Bulletin,” a newsletter espousing Posse- style anti-government theories that is widely distributed throughout the prison system by white supremacists.

In October 2004, a prisoner named Michael Burpee arrived at the Maryland Correctional Adjustment Center in downtown Baltimore. Burpee had recently been convicted in Florida of trafficking PCP to Maryland. Hoping for leniency, he pled guilty, only to receive a twenty seven-year prison sentence dictated by harsh federal sentencing guidelines. Desperate for a way out, he began listening to someone — presumably a fellow prisoner — who explained how the charges were all part of a secret government conspiracy against him. Then Burpee was brought up on new federal drug charges in Maryland, and shipped north. He carried with him a pile of documents that were remarkably similar to those that had been filed by the Montana Freemen.

In Baltimore, Burpee found a group of inmates at the margins of society, people like Willie Mitchell and company who were staring at the full force of the federal government. As one defense attorney representing a flesh-and-blood defendant put it, they “saw a freight train coming and felt three feet tall.” Soon the unorthodox legal filings and courtroom outbursts began to multiply. It was, one public defender later explained, “like an infection that was invading our client population of pre-trial detainees.” Burpee appears to have been patient zero in the epidemic. For over a year, he harangued his lawyers and judge about the conspiracy and spread the word in the Baltimore lockup. Then, in a stroke of bad luck for the public defender’s office, the U.S. Attorney’s office decided to drop the charges against Burpee — perhaps reasoning that he wasn’t worth the hassle considering that he had already been sentenced to twenty-seven years. For Burpee’s peers, the decision imbued the flesh-and-blood defense with legitimacy and the hope of freedom.

Before long, the relatives of the defendants were scanning Web sites like www.redemptionservice.com, which offers maps showing how Satanic runes were secretly incorporated into the street plan of Washington, D.C., and a deluxe package of instructions for renouncing one’s social security number for only $3,900, payable by check or money order.

Like the Midwestern farmers before them, the Baltimore inmates were susceptible to the notion that the federal government was engaged in a massive, historic plot to deprive them of life, liberty, and property. Such suspicions are prevalent in certain pockets of the black community — that year, a study from the Rand Corporation found that over 25 percent of African Americans surveyed believed the AIDS virus was developed by the government, and 12 percent thought it was released into the population by the CIA. And black separatist groups like the Nation of Islam — also fond of conspiracy theories — have long cultivated members through the prison system; some of these groups have explicitly adopted the language of constitutional fundamentalists. Given these developments, Levitas told me, “I’m surprised this didn’t happen sooner.”

This, then, was how Willie Mitchell came to draw on the accumulated layers of three decades of right-wing paranoia and demand that his case be dismissed “in accord with House Joint Resolution 192, and Public Law 73-10” — laws that involved the abandonment of the gold standard and the Federal Reserve. And it explained why Shawn Gardner kept insisting that he be addressed as “Shawn-Earl: Gardner,” rather than the capital-letter SHAWN GARDNER printed on the indictment: he thought that if he could convince the court to call him by his “natural” name, it would be tantamount to admitting that the charges had been filed against someone else.

On the morning of January 10, 2006, two months after the first flesh-and-blood hearing, Gardner returned to Judge Davis’s courtroom. Moments after Davis arrived, Gardner stood up. “I object,” he said, over and over, until Judge Davis had finally had enough. “Do you know what you’re doing?” he asked Gardner. “You are committing suicide in broad daylight. There are public suicides in this country far too often. People jump off the Golden Gate Bridge, the Brooklyn Bridge. People walk into their workplaces with a gun and put the gun up to their head and pull the trigger. People slash their wrists. I don’t want you to join that community, but that’s what you’re doing, sir.”

Gardner tried to argue that the court had no power over him under “common law.” “At common law,” Judge Davis replied, “you were property. You were bought and sold just like those Timberlands on your feet today can be bought and sold. That’s what your ancestors were, some of them, and that is what my ancestors were, some of them.”

“You have invoked ideas formulated and advanced by people who think less of you than they think of dirt,” Davis continued. “The extremists who have concocted these ideas that you are now advancing in this courtroom are laughing their heads off. You are giving them everything they ever wished for. They should be paying you to do what you are doing. They are going to make you the poster child for their movement. When you complete this suicide, they will honor you because you are doing their work, better and more effectively than any of them ever dreamed they could do. Some of them — ” “I object,” said Gardner, interrupting. “The government wants to do the same thing anyway. So what’s the difference?”

Gardner, unrepentant, was escorted from the courtroom. And so the tenets of Posse Comitatus continued their long, strange journey, from the racist, hate-filled mind of William Gale to four black defendants on trial for their life in Baltimore federal court.

A little more than a year after the November 2005 hearing, the flesh-and-blood phenomenon took another twist. A key part of the conspiracy indictment against Mitchell et al was the allegation that the defendants acted together in pursuit of criminal goals. The seemingly choreographed speeches and the identical filings, all submitted on the same day and mailed by the same person, suggested that the four defendants were going to great lengths to coordinate their actions, despite being housed in separate prison facilities and having no obvious means of communication. Ergo, evidence that the conspiracy was continuing in jail. The U.S. Attorney’s office also added new charges of felony obstruction of justice, citing the disruptive nature of the fleshand- blood defense. The prosecutors weren’t just rejecting the defense as an argument for innocence. They were saying that it was, itself, a crime.

Undaunted, Mitchell and company continued making courtroom speeches and filing more nonsensical motions. One, for instance, claimed that Judge Davis’ court only had jurisdiction over crimes committed in federally owned “forts, magazines, arsenals, dockyards, and enclaves.”

None of these arguments had a prayer of overturning the charges. But they had an impact nonetheless. They made a long, complex trial longer and more complex still. Seeking the death penalty is rightfully arduous — it requires legal justifications for the penalty itself, enhanced scrutiny over jury selection, an additional penalty phase after a conviction, and so on. Conspiracy charges create further legal burdens. And the way Mitchell et al chose to deal with their attorneys — not dismissing them outright, but asking them to sign a peculiar “contract” that would essentially prohibit them from mounting a defense — created more problems. If the defendants weren’t dealt with carefully, they might be able to appeal by claiming that they had been inadequately represented. The last thing Judge Davis wanted was for an appellate court to throw out a verdict and send the case back to Baltimore to start all over again. According to a source close to the court, dealing with the flesh and blood defense has been “one of the greatest challenges Davis has faced in twenty years as a judge, by far.”

By mid-2007, the federal prosecutors were starting to run low on a vital resource: time. As years go by, memories fade, police officers retire or transfer, informants change their mind, and juries wonder, why, if the case is so straightforward, it took so long to make. On September 6, 2007, prosecutors withdrew the death penalty for all four defendants.

Nobody in the Baltimore federal courthouse is willing to state, or even speculate on the record, that Mitchell and his cohorts may have averted death with the flesh-and-blood defense. There are other possibilities involving evidence, witnesses, and Justice Department policy. But the elaborate processes of federal capital cases weren’t built to accommodate farcical pro se filings and challenges. Traffic offenses, tax cases — even farm foreclosures — are one thing. When the end goal is execution, even the most ludicrous defenses are taken seriously.

On January 8, 2008, the case of United States of America v. Willie Mitchell et al convened once again in the main courtroom of the federal courthouse. The lawyers arrived first, chatting in the manner of people who had spent nearly four years and counting on the odyssey of this case. The defendants came next. While Shawn Gardner wore the blue work shirt of a lifer in state prison, Willie Mitchell sported comfortable baggy jeans and a stylish black shirt. Mitchell sauntered to his table, and spied the lone spectator in the courtroom’s auditorium-style gallery of one hundred- plus seats, a slender black woman who looked to be in her late twenties. His eyes lit up as he smiled and mouthed “How are you?” “I’m good, I’m good” she murmured. “Your new lawyer — get his card!”

Judge Davis arrived last, emerging from a wooden door behind the bench, beneath oil portraits of judges from days gone by. The hearing will be short, he said; the purpose is to establish a schedule for future motions, and ultimately the trial. Davis and the lawyers spent the next twenty minutes trying find eight weeks of available courtroom time for ten busy lawyers plus the judge. Then, apropos of nothing, Shelton Harris stood up. “Good morning your honor,” he began. Davis saw where this was going and cut him off. “I haven’t recognized you yet, Mr. Harris. You’ll have time to talk later,” he said. “I accept your offer,” Harris replied softly, and sat down.

The scheduling discussion continued; Mitchell rested his head in his arms as though bored. Finally, Judge Davis allowed Harris to speak. Harris launched into the now familiar oration — “I request you, the judge, close the accounts” He spoke rapidly in a low, gravelly voice, as if he’d worked hard to memorize the speech and didn’t want to leave anything out.

Harris finished, sat, and Judge Davis turned to the defendants. The speech you just gave has no legal meaning whatsoever, he said sternly. They were words in the English language, but they have no meaning as a matter of law. If, in future proceedings, you persist — even politely — in making these speeches, you face a severe risk of being expelled from the courtroom. The court also may conclude that you are waiving your right to appointed counsel, in which case you would have to represent yourself. That would be a sad day. “We are in recess,” Davis said. He turned back toward the door to leave.

Then several things happened at once. Shawn Gardner, handcuffed, slumped in the arms of the federal marshals, who seized him beneath his armpits and dragged him across the courtroom toward the door. Willie Mitchell raised his right hand to speak, intent on giving his version of Harris’ speech, but the marshals grabbed his arm and forced it down behind his back toward his left wrist, which was already cuffed. Mitchell struggled and yelled at his lawyer, “They got my arm in a chicken wing!” The marshals forcibly moved Martin and Harris toward the door. Judge Davis watched with consternation as they were dragged from his court.

Willie Mitchell and company won’t go on trial until September, if then, and they won’t face the death penalty, even though they probably deserve it if anyone does. But they will probably be convicted and spend the rest of their lives in federal prison, never to be heard from again, because in the end, the flesh-and-blood defense is no defense at all. The 14th Amendment didn’t revoke Shawn Gardner’s natural citizenship — it gave him protection under the law, and paved the way for another black man to judge his case. There’s no international cabal of Jewish bankers conspiring against him — one of his lawyers, a professor at Howard University Law School, is Jewish. The secret histories and grand conspiracies that have fueled decades of right-wing paranoia, morphing to accommodate one doomed cause after another until finding an unlikely temporary home in a Baltimore lockup, are lies and nothing more.

As the marshals shoved the four men toward the courtroom door, back to the prison they’ll never leave, they shook their heads and looked at each other smiling, as if to say right, right, isn’t it always just like this? One of them let out a chuckle that rose above the din. Judge Davis turned to the court reporter. “Let the record show,” he said, “that Mr. Harris is laughing.”

Memo Instructed CIA To Document Both Torture Techniques And Agents Participating In Interrogations

0

The American Civil Liberties Union obtained three redacted documents related to the Bush administration’s brutal interrogation policies, including a previously withheld Justice Department memo authorizing the CIA’s use of torture. The government was ordered to turn over the documents in response to an ongoing Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) lawsuit brought in 2004 by the ACLU and other organizations seeking records on the treatment of prisoners in U.S. custody overseas.

“These documents supply further evidence, if any were needed, that the Justice Department authorized the CIA to torture prisoners in its custody,” said Jameel Jaffer, Director of the ACLU National Security Project. “The Justice Department twisted the law, and in some cases ignored it altogether, in order to permit interrogators to use barbaric methods that the U.S. once prosecuted as war crimes.”

One of the documents obtained by the ACLU today is a redacted version of a previously undisclosed Justice Department Office of Legal Counsel (OLC) opinion from August 2002 that authorizes the CIA to use specific interrogation methods, including waterboarding. The memo states that interrogation methods that cause severe mental pain do not amount to torture under U.S. law unless they cause “harm lasting months or even years after the acts were inflicted upon the prisoners.” Initially, the CIA took the position that it could not confirm or deny the existence of this memo; it dropped that position after President Bush disclosed in September 2006 that the CIA had been operating detention centers overseas.

The other two documents, from 2003 and 2004, are memos from the CIA related to requests for legal advice from the Justice Department. The 2003 memo shows that CIA interrogators were authorized by OLC to use torture practices known as “enhanced interrogation techniques.” The memo also indicates that, for each session in which these techniques were used, the CIA documented, among other things, “the nature and duration of each such technique employed” and “the identities of those present.” The documentation relating to the CIA’s torture sessions, including the names of agents who participated, is still being withheld.

The 2004 memo shows that CIA interrogators were told that the Justice Department had concluded that certain interrogation techniques, including “the waterboard,” did not constitute torture. The document also indicates that, after the Supreme Court ruled in June 2004 that courts can decide whether foreign nationals held in Guantánamo Bay were rightfully imprisoned, CIA interrogators were told to take into account the possibility their actions would ultimately be subject to judicial review.

“While the documents released today do provide more information about the development and implementation of the Bush administration’s torture policies, even a cursory glance at the documents shows that the administration continues to use ‘national security’ as a shield to protect government officials from embarrassment, criticism and possible criminal prosecution,” said Jaffer. “Far too much information is still being withheld.”

In May, Judge Alvin K. Hellerstein of the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of New York overruled some of the CIA’s claims that the documents released today were exempt from disclosure under the ACLU’s FOIA lawsuit. The judge is still considering the ACLU’s motion to hold the CIA in contempt of court for destroying hundreds of hours of videotape depicting the abusive interrogations of two detainees in its custody.

The documents released today are available online at: www.aclu.org/safefree/torture/36104res20080724.html

To date, more than 100,000 pages of government documents have been released in response to the ACLU’s FOIA lawsuit. They are available online at: www.aclu.org/torturefoia

McCain Betrays Himself By Defining Rich at $5 million

By Matthew Rothschild | I don’t know why a pastor was allowed to hold the first forum with the Presidential candidates–in a church, no less–but there was a revealing exchange between Rick Warren and John McCain Saturday night.

Warren said, “Everybody talks about, you know, taxing the rich, but not the poor, the middle class. At what point, give me a number, give me a specific number. Where do you move from middle class to rich?”

As far as income goes, McCain said, “How about $5 million?”

And then he tired to fob it off, saying, “no, seriously.”

But it’s really not a laughing matter.

This is either how out of it John McCain is, or how much he wants to obscure the class cleavages in this country.

The top 1% of Americans, which by any definition, should be viewed as the rich or the upper class, make $450,000 or above.

Only 0.3 percent of Americans make more than $1 million a year.

Only a tiny fraction of that tiny fraction makes $5 million.

Maybe McCain wants to camouflage this because his own tax proposals, like Bush’s, favor the richest of the rich.

Under McCain’s plan, those making more than $1 million would get an extra $195,000 next year, according to the Tax Policy Center. And the top 0.1 percent of Americans would get an extra $290,000.

Obama, to his credit, said, “If you are making more than $250,000, then you are in the top 3, 4 percent in the county.”

And Obama’s tax policies would raise the rates on McCain’s cherished 0.1 percent by $700,000 in 2009. Also by contrast, Obama would give more of a tax break to everyone in the lower 80 percent of income brackets than would McCain.

But McCain, as most Republicans do, likes to pretend we don’t live in a class society.

Or maybe he’s just been hanging around his wife too long.

War On Terror board game seized by police

1

Cambridge News | A War On Terror board game designed in Cambridge has been seized by police who claim the balaclava in the set could be used in a criminal act.

The satirical board game was confiscated along with knives, chisels and bolt cutters, from climate protesters during a series of raids near Kingsnorth power station, in Kent, last week.

The game’s creators, Andrew Sheerin and Andy Tompkins, web designers from Cambridge, have expressed total shock at the inclusion of their toy among “criminal” items.

Andrew, 32, said: “I saw pictures of the board game in papers and was absolutely baffled.

“Surely no member of the public is going to believe that a board game could be used as a weapon?”

War on Terror, similar to games like Risk, revolves around creating empires that compete and wage war.

But there is a twist – players can poke fun at the rhetoric of world leaders like George Bush and Tony Blair.

The game was born from the frustration of its creators as they sat watching the news in the run up to the invasion of Iraq in 2003.

Each player starts as an empire filled with good intentions and a determination to liberate the world from terrorists and from each other.

Then the reality of world politics kicks and terrorist states emerge.

Andrew said: “The terrorists can win and quite often do and it’s global anarchy. It sums up the randomness of geo-politics pretty well.”

In their cardboard version of realpolitik George Bush’s “Axis of Evil” is reduced to a spinner in the middle of the board, which determines which player is designated a terrorist state.

That person then has to wear a balaclava (included in the box set) with the word “Evil” stitched on to it.

Kent police said they had confiscated the game because the balaclava “could be used to conceal someone’s identity or could be used in the course of a criminal act”.

Andrew fumed: “It’s absurd. A beard can conceal someone’s identity. Are the police going to start banning beards?”

All High Street retailers declined to stock the controversial game. But more than 12,000 copies have been sold online or through independent stockists.

Distribution deals have been set up to sell the game in Europe and the United States. The creators hope to capitalise on war fatigue.

Rules of the game:

The game is for two to six players.

All players begin with fledgling empires on a world map which they expand through the acquisition of land, oil and cities.

At any time players can abandon the “pursuit of liberty and oil” in favour of becoming a terror state – or they are designated a terror state by a random “Axis of Evil” spinner.

Empires can also train their own terrorists to target rival empires, although these groups often turn on you later in the game.

Terrorists can use special cards such as “suicide bomber”, “plane hijack” and “WMDs” to advance themselves.

Double Standards in the Global War on Terror

0

TomDispatch | Oh, the spectacle of it all – and don’t think I’m referring to those opening ceremonies in Beijing, where North Korean-style synchronization seemed to fuse with smiley-faced Walt Disney, or Michael Phelp’s thrilling hunt for eight gold medals and Speedo’s one million dollar “bonus,” a modernized tribute to the ancient Greek tradition of amateurism in action. No, I’m thinking of the blitz of media coverage after Dr. Bruce Ivins, who worked at the U.S. Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases at Fort Detrick, Maryland, committed suicide by Tylenol on July 29th and the FBI promptly accused him of the anthrax attacks of September and October 2001.

You remember them: the powder that, innocuously enough, arrived by envelope – giving going postal a new meaning – accompanied by hair-raising letters ominously dated “09-11-01″ that said, “Death to America. Death to Israel. Allah is great.” Five Americans would die from anthrax inhalation and 17 would be injured. The Hart Senate Office Building, along with various postal facilities, would be shut down for months of clean-up, while media companies that received the envelopes were thrown into chaos.

For a nation already terrified by the attacks of September 11, 2001, the thought that a brutal dictator with weapons of mass destruction (who might even have turned the anthrax over to the terrorists) was ready to do us greater harm undoubtedly helped pave the way for an invasion of Iraq. The President would even claim that Saddam Hussein had the ability to send unmanned aerial vehicles to spray biological or chemical weapons over the east coast of the United States (drones that, like Saddam’s nuclear program, would turn out not to exist).

Today, it’s hard even to recall just how terrifying those anthrax attacks were. According to a LexisNexis search, between Oct. 4 and Dec. 4, 2001, 389 stories appeared in the New York Times with “anthrax” in the headline. In that same period, 238 such stories appeared in the Washington Post. That’s the news equivalent of an unending, high-pitched scream of horror – and from those attacks would emerge an American world of hysteria involving orange alerts and duct tape, smallpox vaccinations, and finally a war, lest any of this stuff, or anything faintly like it, fall into the hands of terrorists.

And yet, by the end of 2001, it had become clear that, despite the accompanying letters, the anthrax in those envelopes was from a domestically produced strain. It was neither from the backlands of Afghanistan nor from Baghdad, but – almost certainly – from our own military bio-weapons labs. At that point, the anthrax killings essentially vanished… Poof!… while 9/11 only gained traction as the singular event of our times.

Those deaths-by-anthrax ceased to be part of the administration’s developing Global War on Terror narrative, which was, of course, aimed at Islamist fanatics (and scads of countries that were said to provide them with “safe haven”), but certainly not military scientists here at home. No less quickly did those attacks drop from the front pages – in fact, simply from the pages – of the nation’s newspapers and off TV screens.

Unlike with 9/11, there would be no ritualistic reminders of the anniversaries of those attacks in years to come. No victims, or survivors, or relatives of victims would step to podiums and ring bells, or read names, or offer encomiums. There would be no billion-dollar (or even million-dollar) memorial to the anthrax dead for the survivors to argue over. There would be little but silence, while the FBI fumbled its misbegotten way through an investigative process largely focused on one U.S. bio-weapons scientist, Steven J. Hatfill, who also worked at Fort Detrick and just happened to be the wrong man. (Bruce Ivins, eerily enough, would work closely with, and aid, the FBI’s investigation for years until the spotlight of suspicion came to be directed at him.)

This essentially remained the state of the case until, as July ended, Ivins committed suicide. Then, what a field day! The details, the questions, the doubts, the disputed scientific evidence, the lists of kinds of drugs he was prescribed, the lurid quotes, the “rat’s nest” of an anthrax-contaminated lab he worked in, the strange emails and letters! (”I wish I could control the thoughts in my mind… I get incredible paranoid, delusional thoughts at times, and there’s nothing I can do until they go away, either by themselves or with drugs.”) Case solved! Or not… The “mad scientist” from the Army’s Fort Detrick bio-wars labs finally nabbed! Or not…

It was a dream of a story. And the mainstream media ran with it, knowledgeably, authoritatively, as if they had never let it go. Now, as the coverage fades and the story once again threatens to head for obscurity (despite doubts about Ivins’s role in the attacks), I thought it might be worth mentioning a few questions that came to my mind as I read through recent coverage – not on Ivins’s guilt or innocence, but on matters that are so much a part of our American landscape that normally no one even thinks to ask about them.

Here are my top six questions about the case:

1. Why wasn’t the Bush administration’s War on Terror modus operandi applied to the anthrax case?

On August 10th, William J. Broad and Scott Shane reported on some of the human costs of the FBI anthrax investigation in a front-page New York Times piece headlined, “For Suspects, Anthrax Case Had Big Costs, Scores of the Innocent in a Wide F.B.I. Net.” They did a fine job of establishing that those who serially came under suspicion had a tough time of it: “lost jobs, canceled visas, broken marriages, frayed friendships.” According to the Times (and others), under the pressure of FBI surveillance, several had their careers wrecked; most were interviewed and re-interviewed numerous times in a “heavy-handed” manner, as well as polygraphed; some were tailed and trailed, their homes searched, and their workplaces ransacked.

Under the pressure of FBI “interest,” anthrax specialist and “biodefense insider” Perry Mikesell evidently turned into an alcoholic and drank himself to death. Steven Hatfill, while his life was being turned inside out, had an agent trailing him in a car run over his foot, for which, Broad and Shane add, he, not the agent, was issued a ticket. And finally, of course, Dr. Ivins, growing ever more distressed and evidently ever less balanced, committed suicide on the day his lawyer was meeting with the FBI about a possible plea bargain that could have left him in jail for life, but would have taken the death penalty off the table.

Still, tough as life was for Mikesell, Hatfill, Ivins, and scores of others, here’s an observation that you’ll see nowhere else in a media that’s had a two-week romp through the case: In search of a confession, none of the suspects of these last years, including Ivins, ever had a lighted cigarette inserted in his ear; none of them were hit, spit on, kicked, and paraded naked; none were beaten to death while imprisoned but uncharged with a crime; none were doused with cold water and left naked in a cell on a freezing night; none were given electric shocks, hooded, shackled in painful “stress positions,” or sodomized; none were subjected to loud music, flashing lights, and denied sleep for days on end; none were smothered to death, or made to crawl naked across a jail floor in a dog collar, or menaced by guard dogs. None were ever waterboarded.

Whatever the pressure on Ivins or Hatfill, neither was kidnapped off a street near his house, stripped of his clothes, diapered, blindfolded, shackled, drugged, and “rendered” to the prisons of another country, possibly to be subjected to electric shocks or cut by scalpel by the torturers of a foreign regime. Even though each of the suspects in the anthrax murders was, at some point, believed to have been a terrorist who had committed a heinous crime with a weapon of mass destruction, none were ever declared “enemy combatants.” None were ever imprisoned without charges, or much hope of trial or release, in off-shore, secret, CIA-run “black sites.”

Why not?

2. Why wasn’t the U.S. military sent in?

Part of the reigning paradigm of the Bush years was this: police work was not enough when the homeland was threatened. The tracking down of terrorists who had killed or might someday kill Americans was a matter of “war.” Those who had attacked the American homeland and murdered U.S. citizens would, as our President put it, be “hunted down” by special ops forces and CIA agents who had been granted the right to assassinate and brought in “dead or alive.”

Why then, when acts of murderous bio-terror had been committed on American soil, was the military not called in? Why were no CIA “death squads” – the tellingly descriptive phrase used by Jane Mayer in her remarkable new book, The Dark Side – dispatched to assassinate likely suspects? Why were no Predator unmanned drones, armed with Hellfire missiles, launched to cruise the skies of Maryland and take out Ivins or other suspects “precisely” and “surgically” in their homes (whatever the “collateral damage”)? Why, in fact, weren’t their homes simply obliterated in the manner regularly employed in Afghanistan, Pakistan, Somalia, and elsewhere? (In fact, it seems to have taken the FBI two years after their first suspicions of Ivins simply to search his house and even longer finally to take away his high-level security clearance.)

Once U.S. weapons labs were identified as the sources of the anthrax, why were no special ops teams sent in to occupy the facilities, shut them down, and fly those found there, shackled and blindfolded, to Guantanamo or other more secret sites?

Why, when the administration went to great lengths to squeeze off funding for terrorists elsewhere, was funding for those labs significantly increased?

Why, when those swept up or simply kidnapped by the Bush administration and then discovered to be innocent, were – after secret imprisonment, abuse, and torture – regularly released without apology or reimbursement (if released at all), did the U.S. government pay Hatfill $4.6 million to settle a lawsuit he filed in response to his ordeal?

Why when, according to the Vice President’s “one percent doctrine,” no response was too extreme if even a minuscule chance of a catastrophic attack against the U.S. “homeland” existed, were no extreme acts taken with a WMD killer (or killers) on the loose, possibly in Maryland’s suburbs?

3. Once the anthrax threat was identified as coming from U.S. military labs, why did the administration, the FBI, and the media assume that only a single individual was responsible?

Read as much of the coverage of the anthrax killings as you want and you’ll discover that the FBI has long taken for blanket fact that a single “mad scientist” was the culprit – and, no less important, that that theory has been accepted as bedrock fact by the media as well. No alternative possibilities have been seriously considered for years.

For instance, it is known that a set of the anthrax letters was sent from a mailbox in Princeton, New Jersey, some hours from Ivins’s home and the Fort Detrick lab in Frederick, Maryland. The question the FBI puzzled over – and the media took up vigorously – was whether, on the day in question, Ivins had time to make it to Princeton and back, given what’s known of his schedule. The FBI suggests that he did; critics suggest otherwise. No one, however, seems to consider the possibility that the lone terrorist of the anthrax killings might have had one or more accomplices, which would have made the “problem” of mailing those letters into a piece of cake.

Is it that Americans, as opposed to foreigners bent on terrorism, are assumed to be unstoppable individualists, loners canny enough to carry out plots by themselves? Does no one recall that the last great act of American terrorism in the United States, the bombing of the Alfred P. Murrah Federal Building in Oklahoma City in 1995, was a crime committed by at least two American “loners”? (The earliest reports in that case, too, blamed Arab terrorists – plural.)

There seem to have been no serious al-Qaeda “sleeper cells” in this country, but how do we know that there isn’t a “sleeper cell” of American bio-killers lurking somewhere in the U.S. military lab community?

4. What of those military labs? Why does their history continue to play little or no part in the story of the anthrax attacks?

In reading through reams of coverage of Ivins’s suicide and the FBI case against him, I found only a single reference to the work his lab at Fort Detrick had been dedicated to throughout most of the Cold War era. Here is that sentence from the Washington Post: “As home to the Army Biological Warfare Laboratories, the facility ran a top-secret program producing offensive biological weapons from 1943 until 1969.” And yet, if you don’t grasp this fact, the real significance of the anthrax case remains in the shadows.

As with the continuing story of nuclear dangers on our planet, the terrors of our age are almost invariably portrayed as emerging from bands of fanatics, or lands like Iran said to be ruled by the same, in the backlands of our planet (some of which also just happen to be in the energy heartlands of the same planet). And yet, if we are terrified enough of loose or proliferating weapons of mass destruction to threaten or start wars over them, it’s important to understand that, from 1945 on, these dangers – and they are grim dangers – emerged from the heartland of the military-industrial machines of the two Cold War superpowers, the U.S. and the USSR.

Put another way, the most conceptually frightening attacks of 2001 came directly from the Cold War urge to develop offensive biological weapons. Until 1969, the Army’s biological-warfare laboratories at Fort Detrick were focused, in part, on that task. Plain and simple. After President Richard Nixon shut down the offensive bio-war program in 1969, the Army’s scientists switched to work on “defenses” against the same. As with defenses against nuclear attack, however, such work, by its nature, is often hard to separate from offensive work on such weaponry. In other words, looked at a certain way, one focus of the Fort Detrick lab, which fell under suspicion in the anthrax attacks by the winter of 2001, has long been putting bio-war on the global menu. In that, it was evidently successful in the end.

There is irony here, of course. In the post-Cold War era, our worries focused almost solely on the deteriorating, sometimes ill-guarded Russian Cold War labs and storehouses for biological, chemical, and nuclear war. It was long feared that, from them, such nightmares would drop into our world. But in this we were, it seems, wrong. The labs with the holes were ours and – what’s more terrifying – the possibilities for leakage and misuse are still expanding exponentially.

5. Were the anthrax attacks the less important ones of 2001?

If you compare the two sets of 2001 attacks in terms of death and destruction, 9/11 obviously leaves the anthrax attacks in the dust. Thought about a certain way, however, the attacks of 9/11, while bold, murderous, televisually spectacular, and apocalyptic looking, were conceptually old hat. It was the anthrax attacks that pointed the way to a new and frightening future.

After all, the World Trade Center had already been attacked, and one of its towers nearly toppled, by a rental-van bomb driven into an underground garage by Islamists back in 1993. The planes in the 2001 assaults were, as Mike Davis has written, simply car bombs with wings, and car bombs have a painfully long history. Even though in their targeting – the symbolic mega-buildings of an imperial power whose citizens previously preferred to believe themselves invulnerable – the 9/11 hijackers offered a new psychological reality to Americans, their most striking and unsettling feature was perhaps themselves. Those 19 men had pledged to commit suicide not for their country, as had thousands of Japanese kamikaze pilots at the end of World War II, or even for a potential country like hundreds of Tamil suicide bombers in Sri Lanka, but for a religious fantasy (behind which lay non-religious grievances). On the other hand, the 9/11 attacks were but a larger, more ambitious version of, for instance, the suicide-by-boat attack on the U.S.S. Cole in a Yemeni port in 2000.

On the other hand, the anthrax mailings represented something new. (The Japanese Aum Shinrikyo cult had attempted to make and use bio-weapons, including anthrax, back in 1990s, but failed.) If the al-Qaeda strike on 9/11 had only simulated a weapon-of-mass-destruction attack, with the anthrax killer, no imagination was necessary. An actual weapon of mass destruction – highly refined anthrax – had been used successfully, then used again, and the killer(s) remained at large, not in the Afghan backlands but somewhere in our midst, with no evidence that the supply of anthrax had been used up.

And yet, even as the Bush administration, the two presidential candidates, all of Washington, and the media remain focused on terrorism in the Afghan-Pakistani border regions, few give serious thought – except when it comes to individual culpability – to the terror that emerged from the depths of the military-industrial complex, from our own Cold War weapons labs. To that, no aspect of the Global War on Terror seems to apply.

6. Who is winning the Global War on Terror?

The answer, obviously, is the terrorists. Just last week, Mike McConnell, the director of national intelligence, made this crystal clear when it came to al-Qaeda. He testified before Congress that the organization “is gaining in strength from its refuge in Pakistan and is steadily improving its ability to recruit, train and position operatives capable of carrying out attacks inside the United States.” In fact, it’s been clear enough for quite a while that the Bush administration’s Global War on Terror has mainly succeeded in creating ever more terrorists in ever more places. And yet, arguably, the anthrax killer or killers have, to date, gained far more than al-Qaeda. Looked at a certain way, whatever the role of Bruce Ivins, the anthrax killings proved to be a full-scale triumph of terrorism.

One theory has long been that whoever committed the anthrax outrages was intent on drawing attention (and probably funding) to further research and development of U.S. bio-war “defenses.” If so, then, what a remarkable success! In the years since the attacks occurred, funding has flooded into such labs, whose numbers have grown strikingly. On September 11, 2001, reports the Washington Post, “there were only five ‘biosafety level 4′ labs – places equipped to study highly lethal agents such as Ebola that have no human vaccine or treatment – a Government Accountability Office report stated last fall. Fifteen are in operation or under construction now, according to the report. There are hundreds more biosafety level 3 labs, which handle agents such as Bacillus anthracis, which does have a human vaccine.”

The few hundred people at work in the U.S. bio-defense program before 9/11 have swelled to perhaps 14,000 scientists who have “clearances to work with ‘select biological agents’ such as Bacillus anthracis – many of them civilians working at private universities” where, according to experts, “security regulations are remarkably lax.” And don’t forget the Army’s own billion-dollar plan to “build a larger laboratory complex as part of a proposed interagency biodefense campus at Fort Detrick.” We’re talking about the place where, as Ivins’s crew was evidently nicknamed, “Team Anthrax” worked and whose labs are reputedly “renowned for losing anthrax.” In these same years, according to the New York Times, “almost $50 billion in federal money has been spent to build new laboratories, develop vaccines and stockpile drugs.” Some of this money was pulled out of basic public health funds which once ensured that large numbers of people wouldn’t die of treatable diseases like tuberculosis and redirected into work on the Ebola virus, anthrax, and other exotic pathogens.

In these years, not to put too fine a point on it, the Bush administration has exponentially expanded our bio-war labs, increasing significantly the likelihood that a new “mad scientist” will have far more opportunity and far more deadly material available to work with. It has, in other words, increased the likelihood not just that terror will come to “the homeland,” but that it will come from the homeland. Thanks to this administration, the terrorists won this round and future terrorists can reap the fruits of that victory.

Bruce Ivins, whatever you did, or whatever was done to you, R.I.P. Your lab is in good hands. And the likelihood is that, almost seven years after the first anthrax envelope arrived, the world is more of a terror machine than ever.

Tom Engelhardt, co-founder of the American Empire Project, runs the Nation Institute’s TomDispatch.com. He is the author of The End of Victory Culture, a history of the American Age of Denial. The World According to TomDispatch: America in the New Age of Empire (Verso, 2008), a collection of some of the best pieces from his site, has just been published. Focusing on what the mainstream media hasn’t covered, it is an alternative history of the mad Bush years.

[Note on readings: Oddly enough, back in December 2002, as this site was going public, the very first TomDispatch guest writer, public health expert David Rosner, took up the issue of smallpox hysteria, pointing out that the disease was saved from total eradication on the planet by a U.S./USSR agreement “to make sure that the virus that causes smallpox would remain in storage awaiting a new opportunity to terrorize the world. For decades, both countries stored it, distributed it to various research labs and otherwise ensured that this public health victory would be turned into a potential human tragedy.” He added: “Fear of smallpox has played nicely into the overall strategy of the Bush administration to militarize public health.” It’s a piece worth revisiting, as perhaps is “It Should Have Been Unforgettable,” a post I wrote back in 2005 when the anthrax case had long fallen off the American radar screen.

More recently, Glenn Greenwald of Salon.com has done superb work on the anthrax story. In 2007, he wrote a striking column, “The unresolved story of ABC News’ false Saddam-anthrax reports,” on some crucially bad reporting by Brian Ross and ABC, and he followed up after Ivins’s suicide with a piece, (“Journalists, their lying sources, and the anthrax investigation,”) that has more unsettling questions about the anthrax case than any other 16 pieces I’ve seen. It’s a must read. Jay Rosen, at his always interesting PressThink blog, took up Greenwald’s challenge to Brian Ross and ABC on its reporting and pressed the point home in two recent posts, here and here.

Finally, Elisa D. Harris, a senior research scholar at the Center for International and Security Studies at the University of Maryland, had a fine, thoughtful op-ed last week in the New York Times, “The Killers in the Lab” (”Our efforts to fight biological weapons are making us less safe”), which laid out in an impressive way the expansion of U.S. bio-weapons research since 2001.]

Copyright 2008 Tom Engelhardt

40,000 innocent children on police DNA files

1
Yorkshire Post | The national DNA database contains the profiles of almost 40,000 innocent children, the Home Office has admitted.
Junior Minister Meg Hillier said the profiles of an estimated 39,095 10 to 17-year-olds who “had not been convicted, cautioned, received a final warning/reprimand and had no charge pending against them” were on the database.

Opposition parties said it was evidence the Government was building a national DNA database by stealth and called for a parliamentary debate.

Ms Hillier was responding to a parliamentary question from Tory Grant Shapps (Welwyn Hatfield).

She said figures obtained from the National DNA Database and Police National Computer in April showed there were 349,934 DNA profiles relating to under-18s, equivalent to around 303,393 individuals because of replication rates.

“Of those estimated 303,393 persons, 264,297 (87.1 per cent) had a conviction, caution, reprimand or had received a final warning,” she said.

“And 39,095 (12.8 per cent) had not been convicted, cautioned, received a final warning/reprimand and had no charge pending against them.”

Liberal Democrat home affairs spokesman Chris Huhne said it was wrong to store the DNA of innocent people.

“These startling figures show that the Government is building a national DNA database by stealth,” he said.

“There can be no excuse for storing the DNA of innocent adults, let alone children, who are entirely blameless.”

Shadow Home Secretary Dominic Grieve echoed the concerns. “This is yet more evidence that the DNA database is totally arbitrary, with tens of thousands of innocent kids on it but not every offender in our prisons,” he said.

Last month a Government-appointed advisory body said there should be a more straightforward system for innocent people to have their samples removed from the database.

The Ethics Group said samples obtained during police investigations should be destroyed at the end of an inquiry.

At present, people who agree to have their samples put on the database cannot have their details removed.

Older generation could scupper £4.4bn National Identity Scheme

2

By Ian Grant | The cost of the government’s controversial £4.4bn national identity card scheme, could rise significantly because of the difficulties reading fingerprints of older people, a government watchdog says.Chief Scientist John Beddington, chairman of the Biometrics Assurance Group, an independent government advisor, said in his 2007 annual report that elderly people often had hard-to-read fingerprints. This might produce a large number of exceptions that would strain the ability of the Identity and Passport Service to handle them.

“Exception handling has a large impact not only on the technical elements of the scheme, but on business processes, schedules and costs,” Beddington said.

There were more than four million people in the UK aged over 75, the report said.

The Identity and Passport Service said it had paid for research into how to enrol people with hard-to-record biometric characteristics. It had asked the usability and performance working group to align its research programme with the scheme’s procurement schedule and to use more people in their tests.

The House of Lords Science & Technology select committee warned two years ago that more than one in 1,000 fingers are missing or have no fingerprint due to scar tissue. People who work a lot with their hands or who have very fine-grained skin may also produce poor quality fingerprints.

U.S. May Ease Police Spy Rules

0

By Spencer S. Hsu and Carrie Johnson | The Justice Department has proposed a new domestic spying measure that would make it easier for state and local police to collect intelligence about Americans, share the sensitive data with federal agencies and retain it for at least 10 years.

The proposed changes would revise the federal government’s rules for police intelligence-gathering for the first time since 1993 and would apply to any of the nation’s 18,000 state and local police agencies that receive roughly $1.6 billion each year in federal grants.

Quietly unveiled late last month, the proposal is part of a flurry of domestic intelligence changes issued and planned by the Bush administration in its waning months. They include a recent executive order that guides the reorganization of federal spy agencies and a pending Justice Department overhaul of FBI procedures for gathering intelligence and investigating terrorism cases within U.S. borders.

Taken together, critics in Congress and elsewhere say, the moves are intended to lock in policies for Bush’s successor and to enshrine controversial post-Sept. 11 approaches that some say have fed the greatest expansion of executive authority since the Watergate era.

Supporters say the measures simply codify existing counterterrorism practices and policies that are endorsed by lawmakers and independent experts such as the 9/11 Commission. They say the measures preserve civil liberties and are subject to internal oversight.

White House spokesman Tony Fratto said the administration agrees that it needs to do everything possible to prevent unwarranted encroachments on civil liberties, adding that it succeeds the overwhelming majority of the time.

Bush homeland security adviser Kenneth L. Wainstein said, “This is a continuum that started back on 9/11 to reform law enforcement and the intelligence community to focus on the terrorism threat.”

Under the Justice Department proposal for state and local police, published for public comment July 31, law enforcement agencies would be allowed to target groups as well as individuals, and to launch a criminal intelligence investigation based on the suspicion that a target is engaged in terrorism or providing material support to terrorists. They also could share results with a constellation of federal law enforcement and intelligence agencies, and others in many cases.

Criminal intelligence data starts with sources as basic as public records and the Internet, but also includes law enforcement databases, confidential and undercover sources, and active surveillance.

Jim McMahon, deputy executive director of the International Association of Chiefs of Police, said the proposed changes “catch up with reality” in that those who investigate crimes such as money laundering, drug trafficking and document fraud are best positioned to detect terrorists. He said the rule maintains the key requirement that police demonstrate a “reasonable suspicion” that a target is involved in a crime before collecting intelligence.

“It moves what the rules were from 1993 to the new world we live in, but it maintains civil liberties,” McMahon said.

However, Michael German, policy counsel for the American Civil Liberties Union, said the proposed rule may be misunderstood as permitting police to collect intelligence even when no underlying crime is suspected, such as when a person gives money to a charity that independently gives money to a group later designated a terrorist organization.

The rule also would allow criminal intelligence assessments to be shared outside designated channels whenever doing so may avoid danger to life or property — not only when such danger is “imminent,” as is now required, German said.

On the day the police proposal was put forward, the White House announced it had updated Reagan-era operating guidelines for the U.S. intelligence community. The revised Executive Order 12333 established guidelines for overseas spying and called for better sharing of information with local law enforcement. It directed the CIA and other spy agencies to “provide specialized equipment, technical knowledge or assistance of expert personnel” to support state and local authorities.

And last week, Attorney General Michael B. Mukasey said that the Justice Department will release new guidelines within weeks to streamline and unify FBI investigations of criminal law enforcement matters and national security threats. The changes will clarify what tools agents can employ and whose approval they must obtain.

The recent moves continue a steady expansion of the intelligence role of U.S. law enforcement, breaking down a wall erected after congressional hearings in 1976 to rein in such activity.

The push to transform FBI and local police intelligence operations has triggered wider debate over who will be targeted, what will be done with the information collected and who will oversee such activities.

Many security analysts faulted U.S. authorities after the 2001 terrorist attacks, saying the FBI was not combating terrorist plots before they were carried out and needed to proactively use intelligence. In the years since, civil liberties groups and some members of Congress have criticized the administration for unilaterally expanding surveillance and moving too fast to share sensitive information without safeguards.

Critics say preemptive law enforcement in the absence of a crime can violate the Constitution and due process. They cite the administration’s long-running warrantless-surveillance program, which was set up outside the courts, and the FBI’s acknowledgment that it abused its intelligence-gathering privileges in hundreds of cases by using inadequately documented administrative orders to obtain telephone, e-mail, financial and other personal records of U.S. citizens without warrants.

Former Justice Department official Jamie S. Gorelick said the new FBI guidelines on their own do not raise alarms. But she cited the recent disclosure that undercover Maryland State Police agents spied on death penalty opponents and antiwar groups in 2005 and 2006 to emphasize that the policies would require close oversight.

“If properly implemented, this should assure the public that people are not being investigated by agencies who are not trained in how to protect constitutional rights,” said the former deputy attorney general. “The FBI will need to be vigilant — both in its policies and its practices — to live up to that promise.”

German, an FBI agent for 16 years, said easing established limits on intelligence-gathering would lead to abuses against peaceful political dissenters. In addition to the Maryland case, he pointed to reports in the past six years that undercover New York police officers infiltrated protest groups before the 2004 Republican National Convention; that California state agents eavesdropped on peace, animal rights and labor activists; and that Denver police spied on Amnesty International and others before being discovered.

“If police officers no longer see themselves as engaged in protecting their communities from criminals and instead as domestic intelligence agents working on behalf of the CIA, they will be encouraged to collect more information,” German said. “It turns police officers into spies on behalf of the federal government.”

Civil liberties groups also have warned that forthcoming Justice Department rules for the FBI may permit the use of terrorist profiles that could single out religious or ethnic groups such as Muslims or Arabs for investigation.

Mukasey said the changes will give the next president “some of the tools necessary to keep us safe” and will not alter Justice rules that prohibit investigations based on a person’s race, religion or speech. He said the new guidelines will make it easier for the FBI to use informants, conduct physical and photographic surveillance, and share data in intelligence cases, on the grounds that doing so should be no harder than in investigations of ordinary crimes.

Rep. Bennie Thompson (D-Miss.), chairman of the House Homeland Security Committee, said that updating police intelligence rules is a move “in the right direction. However, the vagueness of the provisions giving broad access to criminal intelligence to undefined agencies . . . is very troubling.”

Staff writers Joby Warrick and Ellen Nakashima contributed to this report.

VIDEO: The “Magic” of Disappearing Votes

0

In segment 3, Stephen Spoonamore explains how election fraud can happen even if the voting machines are registering votes correctly. One way is through the haphazard custody of memory cards after voting. But it gets worse. No one has ever inspected the code inside the vote tabulators, so alarming issues like tabulators that decrease votes remain unanswered. They produce negative numbers, which should never happen in a vote tabulator. Why would there be a need to decrease – subtract – votes? To steal votes, plain and simple. How does he know? Under the guise of “proprietary software” Diebold refuses to allow its code for voting machines to be inspected. The real irony is that Diebold allows their code for cash machines to be inspected. Since statistical analysis is the method by which all computer fraud is discovered, Diebold’s rejection of their code inspection is an ominous indicator of election fraud.

CIVILIANS PAY THE PRICE FOR IMPERIAL RIVALRIES IN GEORGIA

2

SchNews | Despite the Olympics, you had probably noticed there’s another war on, this time in the mountainous region of the Caucuses, in a previously little mentioned place called South Ossetia.

Whether or not Georgia’s president Mikheil Saakashvili went it alone, or if he was given a nod and a wink from the crazies in the White House, we won’t know until Dubya writes his memoirs (but don’t hold your breath – he’ll have to learn to write first).

The question many people are asking is, of course, “what the fack was the Georgian president doing taking on Russia in the first place?” Did he hope that no-one would notice ‘cos everyone’s watching Bejing? Or, more likely, was it a calculated move based on a naive view of US / NATO support?

Saakashvili has been promised NATO membership for some time now, ever since he hosted Dubya in ’05. As a potential member (other former USSR states, Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania have already joined), he probably thought he was invincible. It’s kind of like Don Corleone saying he wants to be the godfather of your next son. And with that and a string of corruption allegations dogging him, he decided to play the nationalist card. The plan: whip up a bit of righteous fury against the pro-Russian separatists and then send in the boys to take back South Ossetia with NATO blessing.

Unfortunately for the Georgian president, it was a calculation that was way, way out.

You see, the Russia of today is not the Russia of the ‘90s. Partly due to some old-fashioned state intervention, but mostly due to its control of so much of the world’s precious oil and gas, Russia is once again a very big and powerful player in the new great game of world power.

Russia’s military has been growing and growing under the leadership of Vladimir Putin, but it’s not really this that the West is afraid of. It’s the Russian energy weapon that strikes fear into the hearts of US / EU capitalists. When Ukraine started kissing western backsides a few years ago, all Russia had to do was turn off the gas (in the wintertime-brrr!) and wait for an apology. And Russia could easily do the same to Europe.

As US political economist F William Enghadhl put it, “Saakashvili made a colossal miscalculation in that he would have the immediate backup of NATO – but all he has are a few harsh words from a lame duck president in Washington.”

This is why of course the West has been trying so hard to build an alternative route for Asian gas to reach European consumers. They even recently built a pipeline – the second largest in the world – to bypass Russia via, er… Georgia (called the Baku-Tbilisi-Ceyhan Pipeline — see SchNEWS 555). That pipelines is now about a 20-minute tank drive from the Russian army. BP, seeing which way the wind blows, have pre-emptively shut down their bit of the pipeline. And that’s not been the only problem for the BTC Pipeline. Only last week the Kurdish separatists, the PKK, bombed it, and there are reports that the Rooskies have had a go since then. So its back to the drawing board, and it’s back to Russia if you want to boil your spuds.

So one in the eye for NATO and the US of A then. Hurrah. Only the problem with Caucasus politics is that whichever Empire gains, the people lose – Russia’s brutality in Chechnya is at least as bad as the US’s in Iraq, only colder.

Another way of looking at the carnage in the Caucuses is that it’s the chickens of Kosovo rapidly coming home to roost. In February this year, Kosovo declared independence, supported by 90% of the population, following a referendum on the region’s future. Bush, in his guise as hero of democracy, said that the world must respect the will of the people and recognise Kosovo as the 193rd member of the UN, effectively partitioning Serbia and further dividing the Balkan states that used to be known as Yugoslavia. Cool! – the rights of nations, independence, freedom fries and all that.

Russia, meanwhile, points out that South Ossetia also had a referendum, in which 90% of South Ossetia voted for union with North Ossetia (and Russia). If, so the Russian logic goes, Kosovo can leave Serbia, then South Ossetia (as well as Abzhazia) can leave Georgia.

But this rank hypocrisy of the USA is also equaled by Russia, who didn’t exactly respect the people’s wishes when it came to that other Caucasian republic of Chechnya. After declaring their independence straight after the breakup of the Soviet Union, Russia has fought two bloody wars, flattened the capital, Grozny, and exterminated perhaps one tenth of Chechnya’s population, all in a bid to keep it part of Russia.

In Central Asia at least, the new shape of the world is now clear. From post-Cold War / New World Order, it’s back to the 19th century and the era of the Great Game between rival empires – with the inhabitants stuck between a Russian rock and an American (OK, it used to be British) hard place.

Currently about 2,000 civilians have been murdered for the crime of living in a geopolitical fault line, and around 100,000 people have been displaced. The Russians bombed – then occupied – the Georgian town of Gori, outside of Ossetia and deep in Georgia proper, barely 20 miles from the Georgian capital, Tbilisi. As it so happens, Gori is the birthplace of a certain Joseph Stalin. He would be proud of what they’ve done to his town – bombed the shit out of it for defying Russia.

What’s been most illuminating about this war is just how quickly and how far the US / West / NATO have distanced themselves from the Georgian president following his disastrous military ‘reintegration’ of South Ossetia.

Both America and their every willing allies, Israel, have been deeply involved in Georgian affairs for many years now. In fact, President Saakashvili owes his job to the USA, courtesy of the National Endowment for Democracy.

The NED, part of the US State Department, is the first choice for pro-American regime change around the world. All of the various ‘colour revolutions’ that have brought pro-US regimes to power (Rose Revolution in Georgia – see SchNEWS 433, Orange in Ukraine, Cedar in Lebanon, and Saffron in Burma) have the NED’s fingerprints all over them. They sent some thousand US special forces to train the Georgian military. In fact, the ‘Georgia-US Immediate Response Military Exercise 2008′ had ended just one week before the Ossetia invasion. Since the rout of the Georgian army, those advisors and any hint of US military involvement have been nowhere to be seen. As the separatist leader of Abzkhazia put it, Georgian forces had received “American training in running away.’’

The Israelis’ response has been just as telling. As soon as events turned sour, they froze all high tech arms sales to Georgia – fearful of Russians wrath if they’re seen as supporting Georgia. But supporting Georgia is exactly what they’ve been doing for years. Not only have the Israelis provided weapons and training, but over a thousand advisors – mostly ex-officers freshly retired out of the Israeli Defense Force – found employment in Georgia’s military. The Georgians should have looked a bit closer. A lot of these officers left the IDF in disgrace after Israel’s own lost war of ‘06 against Hezbollah. Fresh from one defeat, they appear to have taught the Georgians how to lose another war.

This conflict (well, war really) is possibly the most dangerous on the planet at the moment. If Georgia ever gets to join NATO, the North Atlantic Treaty states that an attack on one country is an attack on all NATO members. Were round three of this conflict to kick off with Georgia as a full NATO member, NATO could be forced by its own logic into full scale war with Russia – with South Ossetia occupying the place in history that Sarajevo held in 1914 just before the start of World War One, only this time round both sides are nuclear armed…

Britain: Policing of climate camp a major attack on democratic rights

0

By Paul Bond | A week-long climate protest camp in north Kent has ended, amidst widespread claims of disproportionate and aggressive policing. Around 100 people were arrested over the course of the protest, 46 of whom have been charged, mostly with obstruction offences. The multimillion-pound policing of the camp marked a significant attack on democratic rights and civil liberties.

The camp was held to protest the building of a new coal-fired power station at Kingsnorth, on the Medway estuary. Energy company E.ON UK is proposing replacing the existing coal power station with a new one. This would be the first new coal power station built in Britain in more than 30 years. The proposal has yet to be agreed by John Hutton, whose portfolio as secretary of state for business, enterprise and regulatory reform includes energy security issues. The proposal has been passed to Hutton’s office following its agreement by the local authority, Medway Council.

Kingsnorth is the first of several new coal-fired power stations proposed for sites across the UK. The government has made these stations a key factor in ensuring energy supplies. Protestors argue that coal power stations, with their high CO2 emissions, are the most polluting means of producing electricity. Between 1,000 and 2,000 protestors came to the camp over the course of the week to protest at the development of Kingsnorth. Aside from their direct protest activities, the camp also staged workshop and discussion events.

Assistant Chief Constable Gary Beautridge of Kent Police acknowledged in a press conference that the police had been planning their response to the camp since April of this year. That response saw 1,400 officers, from 26 different forces across Britain, being brought into the area. They were supported by constant air surveillance. The Medway Ports Authority also authorised the police to “enforce” sections of their bylaws to prevent protestors approaching the power station from the river.

The final cost of the policing operation is not yet known, but has been estimated variously between £1 million and £8 million. It is understood the Kent Police are considering applying to the Home Office for financial support in footing the bill.

There has been a noticeable trend in recent years for the police to underreport numbers of demonstrators and protestors. In the case of Kingsnorth, the police set the attendance at 1,000. According to their own figures, therefore, they had provided a level of policing intended to overwhelm the protestors. The organisers’ own estimate of attendance was 1,500, giving a 1:1 ratio of police to protestors. Even the highest estimate only put attendance at 2,000.

That the police levels were aimed at discouraging protest was reinforced when Beautridge said he regarded “the majority of the protestors” as “law-abiding people there for a legitimate reason.” He justified the policing levels as a response to “a small hard core of people…prepared to use criminal tactics and criminal activity.” According to one report, this “small hard core” was set at just 150 people. As the camp’s legal spokesman Kevin Smith noted, “Every year police use the supposed existence of a hardcore minority as justification for the heavy-handedness and every year this hardcore minority fails to materialise.”

It is quite evident that the policing was aimed at deterring any form of protest. Protestors at the camp have described the constant attention of police helicopters, which served to disrupt meetings and speeches. There are also reports of police impounding vehicles being used by protestors to bring supplies into the camp.

In particular, protestors drew attention to the aggressive tactics of the riot police, who used batons and shields in making arrests. Several protestors were injured when police baton-charged them as they tried to enter a cornfield. Beautridge maintained that such a response was “proportionate…. Because of the level of resistance, officers were authorised to carry batons during two days of the protest. There are strict legal standards for their use and we gave clear warnings when any specialist team was deployed.”

Green MEP Caroline Lucas, who visited the camp, said she was “horrified that [the] police…have used pepper spray, riot gear, [and] physical intimidation.” The police controlled demonstrators with horses, dogs and trail bikes, as well as with constant helicopter coverage.

To sustain this level of intimidation and intrusion, the police sought extraordinary powers to stop and search protestors. Section 60 of the Criminal Justice and Public Order Act was implemented to authorise this. Initially, the Section 60 provisions were applied only to the immediate area of the camp. They were subsequently extended to cover the whole of the Hoo peninsula. The provision allows police to stop and search a suspect if an officer of superintendent rank or above believes there may be incidents of serious violence.

At Kingsnorth, Section 60 was used to monitor all visitors to the camp. One eyewitness describes joining a queue to be searched. The searching officer did not know who had authorised the searches. Having been frisked and had his bag searched, the witness was then issued with a pink slip. He had to show this to another three officers before he actually reached the camp. He was searched again when he tried to leave the camp. There were also reports of protestors being threatened with strip searches. Elsewhere there were reports of police attempting to use Section 60 to justify destruction of homemade rafts.

Lucas, along with Liberal Democrat MP Norman Baker and Labour MP Colin Challen, wrote to Kent Police to express concern about such use of discretionary powers. Lucas warned that this was “undermining our civil liberties.”

Lucas, amongst others, has also drawn attention to a booklet apparently dropped by an officer policing the camp. The booklet, “Policing Protest,” is produced by the National Extremism Tactical Coordination Unit and offers “tactical advice and guidance on policing single-issue domestic extremism.”

Police mounted a systematic programme of confiscation from the protestors during the searches. The police told press that they had confiscated many knives, although demonstrators described this as a smear tactic. Police also showed journalists a satirical board game (“War on Terror”) they had confiscated. There seems to have been a policy of making life as uncomfortable and awkward as possible for protestors. Other items confiscated included glue, soap, a clown costume, bits of carpet, toilet paper, disabled ramps, marker pens, blackboard paint, nuts and bolts for toilet cubicles, and banners.

They also confiscated demonstrators’ emergency radios and lifejackets. One demonstrator involved in the river-borne protest described a meeting with a local coast guard crew. The coast guards were complimentary about the demonstrators’ attention to safety, but criticised the police confiscations of lifejackets, saying, “It was irresponsible and could have put lives at risk.”

Such tactics were clearly designed to stifle any form of dissent and deter any future protests. Of particular concern in this regard is the complaint by the National Union of Journalists (NUJ) that its members were also subject to the same searches, manhandling, and observation. The NUJ is looking at legal challenges against “this unwarranted conduct by the police.” According to the NUJ, journalists were searched as they entered and left the camp. Searches continued after police were shown press cards. Journalists were also “pushed and shoved” by police, and filmed whilst using WiFi facilities at a local McDonalds.

Such developments indicate a determination to clamp down on any form of legitimate protest, and should be taken as a very serious attack on democratic rights.

DENVER PLANS ITS OWN GITMO FOR PROTESTERS

0

DENVER (CBS4) ― CBS4 News has learned if mass arrests happen at the Democratic Convention, those taken into custody will be jailed in a warehouse owned by the City of Denver. Investigator Rick Sallinger discovered the location and managed to get inside for a look.

The newly created lockup is on the northeast side of Denver. Protesters have already given this place a name: “Gitmo on the Platte.” 

Inside are dozens are metal cages. They are made out of chain link fence material and topped by rolls of barbed wire.

“This is a secured environment,” Capt. Frank Gale of the Denver Sheriff’s Department told CBS4. “We’re concerned about how that’s going to be utilized by people who will be potentially disruptive.”

In past conventions, mass arrests have taken place.

With Denver’s jails already overflowing, new space had to be created and officers trained.

Each of the fenced areas is about 5 yards by 5 yards and there is a lock on the door. A sign on the wall reads “Warning! Electric stun devices used in this facility.”

CBS4 showed its video to leaders of groups that plan to demonstrate during the convention.

“Very bare bones and very reminiscent of a political prisoner camp or a concentration camp,” said Zoe Williams of Code Pink.

Williams was one of those arrested at the Republican Convention in New York in 2004.

“That’s how you treat cattle,” said Adam Jung of the group Tent State University. “You showed the sign where it said stun gun in use and you just change the word gun for bolt and it’s a meat processing plant.”

Gale would not discuss the facility at this time.

“We want to make sure we got our game plan set,” he said, “We want to make sure the entire procedure is laid out all the personnel know what they are supposed to do.”

The plans were to keep this lockup a secret, at least for now. The sheriff’s department said late Tuesday the mayor’s office would be releasing a statement about it early next week.

The American Civil Liberties Union is asking the City of Denver how prisoners will get access to food and water, bathrooms, telephones, plus medical care, and if there will be a place to meet with attorneys.

Mayor’s Office News Release

On Wednesday afternoon Mayor John Hickenlooper’s office sent a news release to CBS4 and other media explaining the purpose of the holding facility. It says there will be a community outreach program this week to explain the facility’s function.

Russia signs Georgia ceasefire deal

0

guardian.co.uk | The Russian president, Dmitry Medvedev, has signed a ceasefire pact to end hostilities in Georgia.

The deal calls for Russian troops to pull back from Georgia but also grants them limited patrols inside the country.

The Georgian president, Mikheil Saakashvili, reluctantly signed the plan yesterday while accusing the Russians of being “evil” and “21st century barbarians”.

Russia had been refusing to pull back their forces until Saakashvili signed the six-point ceasefire plan which was brokered by the French president, Nicolas Sarkozy, earlier this week.

Kremlin sources today confirmed that Russia had signed the pact.

“The president informed participants of the security council meeting that he had just now signed the six-point plan,” said the Kremlin’s chief spokeswoman, Natalia Timakova.

Under the plan, some emotive issues remain open to interpretation — including whether Georgia is able to send troops back into areas of South Ossetia.

The ceasefire agreement should prompt international talks to define the status of South Ossetia and Abkhazia.

Meanwhile, the risk of a new era of east-west confrontation triggered by Russia’s invasion of Georgia heightened yesterday when Moscow reserved the right to launch a nuclear attack on Poland because it agreed to host US rockets as part of the Pentagon’s missile shield.

As Washington accused Russia of “bullying and intimidation” in Georgia, Russia’s deputy chief of staff turned on Warsaw and said it was vulnerable to a Russian rocket attack because of Thursday’s pact with the US on the missile defence project.

“By deploying, Poland is exposing itself to a strike – 100%,” warned Colonel General Anatoly Nogovitsyn. He added that Russia’s security doctrine allowed it to use nuclear weapons against an active ally of a nuclear power such as America.

The warning worsened the already dismal mood in relations between Moscow and the west caused by the shock of post-Soviet Russia’s first invasion of a foreign country.

There were scant signs of military activity on the ground in Georgia, but nor were there any signs of the Russian withdrawal pledged on Tuesday under ceasefire terms mediated by the European Union.

Instead, the focus was on a flurry of diplomatic activity that exposed acute differences on how Washington and Berlin see the crisis in the Caucasus.

Condoleezza Rice, the US secretary of state, went to Tbilisi to bolster Georgia against the Russians as President George Bush denounced Russian “bullying and intimidation” as “unacceptable”.

Angela Merkel, the German chancellor, met Russia’s President Dmitry Medvedev on the Black Sea close to Georgia’s borders and sent quite a different message, offering a mild rebuke of Moscow.

“Some of Russia’s actions were not proportionate,” she said.

Unlike the Americans and some European states who are saying the Russians should face “consequences” for their invasion, Merkel said negotiations with Moscow on a whole range of issues would continue as before and spread the blame for the conflict. “It is rare that all the blame is on one side. In fact, both sides are probably to blame. That is very important to understand,” she said.

In Tbilisi, Rice was much more forthright, saying that the invasion had “profound implications for Russia … This calls into question what role Russia really plans to play in international politics.

“You can’t be a responsible member of institutions which are democratic and underscore democratic values and on the other hand act in this way against one of your neighbours.”

Saakashvili said: “Russia has every time been testing the reaction of the west. It’s going to replicate what happened in Georgia elsewhere,” said Saakashvili. “We are looking evil directly in the eye. Today this evil is very strong, and very dangerous for everybody, not just for us.”

Rice’s show of solidarity with Georgia’s beleaguered president was theatrically undermined when Russia dispatched a column of armoured personnel carriers towards the Georgian capital.

As the talks were taking place, 10 armoured personnel carriers laden with Russian troops set off from Gori, penetrating to within 20 miles of Tbilisi.

“Georgia has been attacked. Russian forces need to leave Georgia at once,” said Rice. The withdrawal “must take place, and take place now … This is no longer 1968,” she added in reference to the Soviet invasion of Czechoslovakia 40 years ago next week.

The ceasefire terms favour the Russians who routed the Georgians. But the secretary of state argued the plan would not affect negotiations over the central territorial dispute between Georgia and the two breakaway pro-Russian provinces of Abkhazia and South Ossetia. The deal allows Russian troops to remain in the two provinces and to mount patrols and “take additional security measures” on Georgian territory beyond the two enclaves.

Senior Russians continued to insist yesterday that Russian troops had not stepped outside South Ossetia and Abkhazia despite the fact they have been deep inside Georgian territory in several places all week.

“Our ground forces never crossed the border of the conflict zone,” said Sergei Ivanov, the deputy prime minister.

Moscow also indicated it would resist possible European attempts to deploy international peacekeepers in the contested territories.

“We are not against international peacekeepers,” the Russian president said. “But the problem is that the Abkhazians and the Ossetians do not trust anyone except Russian peacekeepers.” He also attacked the agreement between Washington and Warsaw on the missile shield and said claims that the shield was aimed at Iran were “fairy tales”

“This clearly demonstrates the deployment of new anti-missile forces in Europe has as its aim the Russian Federation,” said Medvedev. “The moment has been well chosen.”

The timing of Thursday’s agreement on missile defence means that tensions are soaring on Russia’s southern and western borders.

Polish armed forces yesterday paraded in Warsaw to mark a rare defeat of the Russians 888 years ago and President Lech Kaczynski hailed the accord on the Pentagon project as a boost for Poland’s security.

In return for hosting 10 interceptor rockets said to be intended to destroy any eventual ballistic missile attacks from Iran, Poland is to receive a battery of US Patriot missiles for its air defences and has won a mutual security pact with Washington.

Funding the White House campaign

0

The road to the seat of power in the White House is not easy, and certainly not cheap.

This year’s US presidential race is on track to be the most expensive in history. Al Jazeera’s senior Washington correspondent Rob Reynolds discovers there are some unconventional methods being used to finance the campaigns.

Channel 4 journalist grills Olympics organisers over human rights

0

guardian.co.uk | Channel 4 News correspondent Alex Thomson used a press conference in Beijing today to repeatedly challenge Olympics organisers over China’s record on human rights.

Thomson asked a representative of the International Olympics Committee (IOC) at the press conference whether she was “in any way embarrassed” by the Chinese government “lying through its teeth” about keeping its promises to improve human rights and press freedom.

The Channel 4 News chief correspondent had to resist efforts from two volunteers to force the microphone from him as he continued to question the IOC’s communications director, Giselle Davies, at today’s Beijing Olympics media briefing.

Thomson’s testy exchanges with Davies came in what was the most fractious IOC-Bocog press conference yet, with journalists repeatedly demanding to know whether a single Chinese citizen had been granted permission to use the three Protest Parks set up for the Games.

In response, a senior Chinese official for the Beijing Olympics criticised parts of the international media for coming to China “to peek, to be critical, to dig into the small details and find fault” in the country’s human rights record.

Responding to Thomson’s initial question, Davies said: “We have to note that there have been enormous steps forward in a number of areas.”

Thomson kept pressing, asking how the IOC felt about the “manifest failure of the Chinese government to keep their promises”.

Davies again refused to directly answer the question. Instead she said that the IOC was “very proud about how these Games are progressing” before praising the “spectacular venues”.

“I’m not asking about how well the Games are being run, or how wonderful the Games are,” replied Thomson. “Are you embarrassed by China? I don’t think anyone thinks you have answered the question.”

Davies smiled, before again talking operational details. “The Olympic Games is largely about the athletes and they have given us extremely strong feedback about how things are going,” she said.

Thomson, by now resisting efforts from two volunteers to force the microphone from him, kept up the pressure.

He said: “We’re not getting anywhere are we? Are the IOC embarrassed about the Chinese government’s record on human rights? One more chance?”

Davies responded: “We have to note the enormous steps in the wider area. The world is watching and the IOC is appraising.”

Wei Wang, the secretary general of the Beijing organising committee, claimed he had not been given figures from the Office of Public Security before, after a series of questions on human rights, finally allowing his frustrations to show.

“After 30 years of reform China has developed greatly,” he said. “People enjoy more freedom. People are living a good life. Everyone is happy. That’s a fact.

“Of course there are exceptions, like in any other country. But they need to take the legal process and procedures to resolve any issues. We cannot allow this country to be in chaos.

“But there are a few people who have come here to peek, to be critical, to dig into the small details and find fault,” he added. “This does not mean that we are not fulfilling our promises [over human rights to the IOC]. The whole country can see how can China has developed; how China has genuinely welcomed the world to enjoy everything with us.”

Shortly after awarding the Olympics to Beijing in 2001, the IOC president Jacques Rogge claimed he hoped that hosting the Olympics would improve China’s human rights record – but Wei today denied that his country had made any such promises.

“I did not promise that China would promise to do whatever with the Games in China, I did not say that,” he said. “I think the Games will open up the horizon about China. People will see better what China is about.”

India to examine protest deaths

0

By Ram Dutt Tripathi | The government of the Indian state of Uttar Pradesh has ordered an inquiry into the deaths of four farmers during clashes with the police on Wednesday.

The clashes – which injured 50 people including policemen – took place in Noida, a suburb of the capital Delhi.

The farmers were demanding compensation for land recently acquired by the Greater Noida industrial authority.

A state government official said that the judicial inquiry would examine all aspects of the disturbances.

The government has already announced financial compensation to dependents of the victims.

It has also transferred officials allegedly responsible for mishandling the issue and appointed a new chairman of the Greater Noida Industrial Development Authority.

But the state government has rejected farmers’ demands for more compensation, arguing that it has already been paid them at a mutually agreed rate.

Critics argue that that the announcement of the inquiry was done in part to silence opposition criticism of the killings.

They have condemned the deaths as “unprovoked firing on innocent and unarmed farmers”.

Opposition Samajwadi Party leader Mulayam Singh Yadav termed the killings as “murders” and demanded the guilty men be punished.

Two of India’s main political parties – the Congress party and the Bharatiya Janata Party – have also condemned the killings.

In India, the acquisition of land for expansion of cities and industrialisation has become a very emotive issue.

Farmers have often opposed “forceful acquisitions” and have demanded increased rates of compensation for loss of livelihood and land.

Some experts say the agricultural land is shrinking due to urbanisation and industrialisation and this may endanger food security in a country with a population of more than one billion.

Rwanda: Obscuring the Truth About the Genocide

2

By Barrie Collins – Spiked | Last week, the Rwandan government published the findings of its commission of inquiry into the role France played in the Rwandan genocide of 1994. It found French diplomats, military leaders and politicians — including former president François Mitterand — complicit in the genocide.

Considering that the current Rwandan leadership has vilified France ever since it launched its bid to seize power in Rwanda in October 1990, eventually winning power in July 1994, it is not surprising that it should now up the stakes against its long-time enemy. The new strongman of Rwanda, President Paul Kagame, is fortunate that he has unswerving support from the United States, Britain and Belgium, and a cheerleading media in these countries which can be counted upon to give his report into France’s role in the genocide maximum impact.

But the truth is that France’s major mistake was to find itself on the wrong side of the moral parable that has been imposed by Western observers on Rwanda’s recent tragic history. A war that was complicated by considerable international intervention has become over-simplified into a morality tale of good versus evil, in which France has been branded as part of the ‘evil side’. Such a simplification further obscures the truth about what happened in Rwanda in 1994, and whitewashes the role of Western intervention more broadly.

According to the moral parable of Rwanda, the good guys were the Rwandan Patriotic Front (RPF), which invaded Rwanda in 1990 because it had no other means of protecting the persecuted minority of ethnic Tutsis inside Rwanda and of making the then Hutu-led government accept the right of return of Rwandan Tutsis living abroad as refugees. The bad guys were in the Rwandan government and armed forces. When the international community had helped Rwandans achieve a negotiated settlement, the worst elements among the bad guys drew up a plan to secure Hutu domination once and for all by planning and then implementing genocide against Rwandan Tutsis.

By the time the good guys — the RPF — had fought them off, their evil mission had been largely completed. Hundreds of thousands of Rwandan Tutsis were dead. Genocide had occurred, and the Western world had simply looked on passively. The United States refused to label the war that took place as a genocide in order to resist the clamour for international intervention to save lives. France was the only force on the United Nations Security Council to respond by sending in French forces under Operation Turquoise. But France’s real motivation was not to save lives, but to shore up its erstwhile allies: the bad guys. The French helped them escape Rwanda so that they would not have to answer for their crimes.

A moral analysis like this is compelling because it provides a clear pathway through a maze of complicating factors. For journalists, this moral signposting of the Rwandan genocide leads the way to great copy about the bravery of the heroes and the moral turpitude of the villains. For governments, it provides the crucial element of legitimacy that is the essential underpinning of their right to rule. The Rwandan regime under Paul Kagame depends on this version of events for its support and survival. And so do its principal sponsors, the United States and Great Britain.

As the force that relieved Rwanda from genocide, the RPF – whose leadership currently runs Rwanda – has exploited this version of events to remind Western governments that they failed to live up to the ‘Never Again’ principle that was the driving force behind the passing of the Genocide Convention at the United Nations in 1948. While they battled the genocidaires in 1994, the Western world simply looked on. Except France, that is. But as a supporter of the former, pre-RPF regime, France’s motives for intervening were highly questionable.

It may be the most widely told story of Rwanda, but this version of events is deeply flawed. While the US may have been embarrassed by this account, appearing less than heroic during the months of Rwanda’s greatest torment, it is far easier for it to live with this embarrassment than to be confronted with the facts of how it did intervene in this region of Africa in the early 1990s and since Kagame came to power.

The ‘plane crash’ debate

In fact, the three most influential Western players in Rwanda at this time — the US, France and Belgium — all intervened in ways that created the conditions that made mass slaughter inevitable. Contrary to the prevailing version of events, after its initial deployment of troops defending Rwandan leaders against the RPF’s October War in 1990, by means of Operation Noroît, France recognised that the US and Uganda were behind the RPF and had no desire to become isolated as the sole defender of the Rwandan government. So it increasingly made its military support conditional upon the government’s commitment to serious negotiations with the RPF. According to an informant from the French Ministry of Cooperation, France’s decision to disengage was already evident in 1990: ‘We did not want to remain alone…there were great powers behind the RPF. Uganda could send 30,000 to 40,000 soldiers.’ (1)

The Kagame government’s latest salvo against France, in the shape of its commission report fingering the French for their support for the genocide, is in fact part of an increasingly desperate search for political legitimacy. The weakest point of the Rwandan moral parable is the question of what caused the re-eruption of the war in 1994 and the subsequent descent into mass slaughter. The start of the bloodiest stage of the war is far more complicated than the moral storytellers — who blame it on the then evil government’s determination to secure Hutu domination — would have us believe.

It was an act of international terrorism that triggered the return to war. In early April 1994, an aeroplane carrying Hutu President Juvénal Habyarimana was blown out of the sky by a missile attack that had been planned for several months. Apologists for the RPF have tried hard to blame the attack upon hardline Hutu conspirators, but they have produced nothing of substance to back up this claim. Rather, there is an accumulating amount of evidence that the RPF was responsible for the missile attack — and it is this evidence that has put the current RPF government, led by Kagame, on the back foot. It is the government’s defensiveness on this issue that lies at the heart of the current France-bashing.

The UN’s own investigator, Michael Hourigan, first came across compelling evidence of the RPF’s responsibility for assassinating President Habyarimana and the other unfortunate occupants of his plane. However, it appears that under pressure from Washington, the UN agreed to shut down its investigation into the missile attack. Another UN investigator, Robert Gersony, came across evidence of RPF atrocities and was also silenced; the UN even stated that his report ‘did not exist’.

These inconvenient truths threatened to muddy the clear waters of moral certainty that the Rwandan parable provides. The Rwandan regime has lived behind the shield of international powers which have worked hard to keep the matter of the plane shooting off the agenda. For all of its 13 years of operation, the International Criminal Tribunal for Rwanda (ICTR), whose brief is to establish the truth of what happened in 1994, has ruled that the matter of the President Habyarimana’s assassination (which it chooses to refer to simply as a plane ‘crash’) is not within its remit. When one of the ICTR’s chief prosecutors, Carla Del Ponte, expressed her desire to dust off the investigation into the allegations against the RPF, stating that ‘if it is the RPF that shot down the plane, the history of genocide must be rewritten’ (2), she was abruptly relieved of her position and moved to The Hague.

Del Ponte’s successor at the ICTR, the Gambian Hassan Bubacar Jallow, subsequently confirmed that the shooting down of the aircraft is ‘not a case that falls within our jurisdiction’ (3). It is ironic that the ICTR’s first chief prosecutor, Richard Goldstone, has expressed his view that the plane attack does fall within the remit of the court and ought to be investigated. ‘It is clearly related to the genocide, by all accounts [it was] the trigger that started the genocide and it would have been very, very important from a justice point of view, from victims’ point of view, to find out.’ (4)

However, the ICTR’s deputy prosecutor, Bernard Muna, felt cavalier enough about the issue to tell the ICTR’s legal adviser, Kingsley Moghalu, that ‘after all, there was a state of war, and Habyarimana could be considered a legitimate target’ (5). This is an extraordinary statement from such a senior figure. The missile attack was, among other things, a deliberate violation of Article 1 of the Arusha Accords of 4 August 1993, which stated: ‘The war between the Government of Rwanda and the Rwandan Patriotic Front is over.’

Boutros Boutros-Ghali, the secretary-general of the UN at the time of the Rwanda tragedy, is also emphatic about the cover-up of the investigation into the plane shooting: ‘It is a very mysterious scandal. Four reports have been made on Rwanda: the French Parliament Report, the Belgian Senate Report, Kofi Annan’s UN report, and the Organization of African Unity report. All four say absolutely nothing about the shooting down of the Rwandan president’s plane. That just goes to show the power of the intelligence services that can force people to be quiet.’ (6)

Building upon the evidence received by the UN investigator Michael Hourigan, the French judge Jean-Louis Bruguière conducted his own enquiry on behalf of the family of the French pilot who died in the missile attack, along with the presidents of both Rwandan and Burundi and senior government and military figures. Bruguière’s report is thoroughgoing and detailed. I have interviewed one of the several RPF dissidents who briefed the judge: Aloys Ruyenzi. A former member of Kagame’s guard, Ruyenzi states categorically that he was in the room when Kagame gave the order to shoot down the president’s plane, and names all those who were present. The meeting was between 2pm and 3pm on 31 March 1994 (7). The Kagame government reacted in its customary fashion to these revelations about the shooting down of the plane: it launched a character assassination of all the Rwandan contributors to Bruguière’s report, and condemned Bruguière for being, well, French.

Western complicity: what about the US?

Yet there is more than the legitimacy of the Rwandan government at stake in this latest retelling of the moral parable on Rwanda. The RPF would not have sustained its war without diplomatic support from Washington. The US intervened to legitimise the RPF’s war, even though the justifications for it had by that time proven to be baseless. The first invasion in 1990 was timed, not to force a reluctant Rwandan government to allow refugees to return, but to disrupt arrangements already in place to accommodate returning refugees.

Rather than being a desertion from the Ugandan military (the RPF leadership were in top positions in the Ugandan state), the invasion of Rwanda in 1990 was a joint Ugandan-RPF venture. President Yoweri Museveni of Uganda was keen to have an ally in power south of the border. More importantly, he wanted to be rid of his Rwandan refugee ‘problem’. The issues of land occupation by Rwandans, and suspicions about the leverage that Rwandans in top official positions enjoyed in the Ugandan government, had generated Museveni’s first political crisis since he took power in 1986.

Behind Uganda was its closest international ally and sponsor, Washington. It was US intervention, in the person of secretary of state for African affairs Herman Cohen, which chose not to condemn the RPF’s invasion and Uganda’s support for it, but rather to support the military recovery of the RPF upon its initial defeat. Cohen coerced President Habyarimana not only to negotiate a ceasefire with the RPF, but to enter negotiations with it in order that a stake for the RPF in a new government be agreed.

By July 1992, Rwanda no longer had a single-party regime but a coalition government and a new democratic constitution. The constitution guaranteed freedom of political organisation and prohibited discrimination on any grounds, ethnic or otherwise.

Of course, it takes more than a constitution to bring about democracy, but it was a promising start and presented another opportunity for the US to tell its Ugandan ally Museveni to pull the plug on the RPF or face the end of the privileged ‘New African Leader’ status that it had bestowed upon him. There was nothing to prevent the RPF from campaigning for support inside Rwanda alongside the other opposition parties. Nothing except the fact that the RPF was feared and loathed by the majority of Rwanda’s population. And yet, Washington was happy for the RPF to intensify its war. In February 1993, the RPF violated the Arusha ‘peace process’ with its heaviest offensive to date. It is arguably the case that if there had not been French forces around the capital Kigali, the RPF may have succeeded in seizing power at that time. The offensive resulted in thousands of deaths and the displacement of nearly a million people, living in miserable conditions in makeshift camps. This offensive did more than anything else to generate hatred for the RPF and, tragically, for the local Tutsi population who were assumed to be in league with the overwhelmingly Tutsi RPF.

How human rights lobbyists boosted the RPF

The RPF had violated the negotiations process with another round of death and destruction. But thanks to coordinated human rights lobbying, the RPF returned to the negotiating table unapologetic about its own conduct and full of moral indignation at the evils of the Rwandan government. A suspiciously well-timed human rights report was published in 1993, accusing the Rwandan government of gross violations of human rights. Some of its authors even accused it of genocide. The government had been responsible for atrocities against civilians in response to the RPF’s initial invasion, and had admitted to them. It objected to the report’s bias: the investigators had made only a token effort to investigate allegations of atrocities committed by the RPF, spending only a few hours interviewing people in the presence of RPF soldiers.

Thanks in large measure to the impact of this report, the RPF was able to take the moral high ground and use the negotiations as a vehicle for translating its military gains into political gains. RPF intransigence and military strategy was facilitated in no small measure by the human rights crusade that was launched against the Habyarimana-led coalition government.

But France, too, played a vital role in prodding the Rwandan government to reach a political settlement with the RPF. According to the French writer Agnes Callamard, it was not just pressure from the US that was applied to get Habyarimana to sign the Arusha Accords in 1993 — ‘it is doubtful if Habyarimana would have signed the peace accords, which gave heavy concessions to the RPF, without pressure and guarantees from the Elysée through François Mitterand’s personal emissaries, and possibly from representatives of the Military Mission of Cooperation, specifically Général Huchon, Colonel Cussac — the French military attaché and head of the French military Assistance Mission in Rwanda, and his assistant, Lieutenant Colonel Maurin.’ (8)

Having secured a virtual coup in the 1993 negotiations — the RPF had won 50 per cent command of the envisaged unified army and enough seats in the proposed transitional government to block anything that was against its interests — the RPF had emerged as the strongest party. The problem it now faced was the scheduled elections where its unpopularity would have been exposed. Local elections in the demilitarised zone that was created in the wake of the February 1993 offensive pointed the way — the RPF was massively defeated at the hands of the former ruling party.

Faced with the prospect of being downsized to a small party by the Rwandan electorate, and with clear support from the US and Belgium, it would appear that the RPF’s interests could only be further advanced with a return to the battlefield. With the promised departure of French forces from Kigali in December 1993, the military path to the capital was clear. What was needed by the RPF was a justification for resuming the war.

The Rwandan war re-erupts

The assassination of President Habyarimana by means of the missile attack upon his plane set off a round of killings of opposition political figures by elements of Habyarimana’s Presidential Guard on one hand, and killings of members of the former ruling party by the RPF on the other. Massacres of Tutsi civilians by Hutu militia soon followed in Kigali, and then spread across the country. But, contrary to the conventional story, RPF forces were on the march long before any massacres occurred.

Peter Erlinder, the lead defence council for the ICTR, stated categorically in a letter to the Canadian prime minister in 2006 that the final offensive of the RPF was ordered by Kagame within minutes of learning of the successful missile attack, ‘long before any retaliatory, civilian killings had occurred anywhere in Rwanda’ (9).

Three years of mounting fear, insecurity and material deprivation (much of Rwanda was by this time in the grip of famine) came to a head. Rwanda’s hastily (but constitutionally) appointed government of surviving ministers fled the capital. The army was pinned down in one losing encounter with the RPF after another. In these anarchic conditions, Rwanda’s defenceless Tutsi population bore the brunt of murderous hatred generated by an ethnically polarising war.

The RPF won the war and took power in July 1994. Africa then witnessed the largest mass exodus in its history. Over two million Rwandans voted with their feet and moved to former Zaïre and Tanzania. The United States, Britain and Belgium in particular rushed to recognise the new regime in Kigali.

Even greater numbers were still to die. The new Rwandan regime’s invasion of various refugee camps and its forced repatriation of refugees, the massacre of internally displaced people in Kibeho in April 1995, and two invasions of what became the Democratic Republic of Congo by the ruling RPF — all of this has brought the death toll of civilians to a level that is the highest of any conflict since the Second World War. The number of ministers leaving the new government and later dying in mysterious circumstances continues to rise. Accountability on the part of the Rwandan regime for these violations is waived by its sponsors in Washington, London and Brussels. Whenever challenged on these matters, officials from these capitals will reply that this was the force that liberated Rwanda from genocide, and continued Western backing for it is necessary to ensure that the genocidaires never return to power.

The truth behind the moral parable

But facts are stubborn things. Bruguière’s charges will not go away. The matter of the assassination of two heads of state is the Achilles heel of the Rwandan government. If the RPF’s responsibility for the plane shooting as a planned move towards reigniting the war in Rwanda is proven, what can be said about the diplomatic protection given to the RPF by the US and other Western powers? How can the leader of the ‘war against terror’ — America — explain its suppression of the facts about the assassination of two heads of state? What do we make of the International Criminal Tribunal for Rwanda’s brief to foster reconciliation by establishing the truth and ending a culture of impunity?

In The Times last week, Linda Melvern wrote about ‘a large room in the French Embassy in Kigali filled floor to ceiling with shredded documents. This was probably the paper trail that might have revealed the depth of involvement between the Elysée Palace and the Hutu faction responsible for massacring hundreds of thousands of Tutsi and opposition Hutu’ (10). Holding on to the moral parable of Rwanda and endorsing Kigali’s invective against France may work for now. But facts — about the start of the war, the actions of the RPF, and the role of Western intervention more broadly in pushing Rwanda to the brink — are stubborn things…

(1) ‘French Policy in Rwanda’, A Callamard included in The Path of a Genocide: The Rwanda Crisis from Uganda to Zaïre, H Adelman and A Suhurke, Nordiska Afrikainstitutet, 1999, p. 178, note 19

(2) Interview with Carla Del Ponte, Aktuelt, 17 April 2000. Cited in Le drama rwandais : Les aveaux accablants des chefs de la Mission des Nations Unies pour l’Assistance au Rwanda, E Karemera, Editions Sources du Nil, 2006

(3) Bush and Other War Criminals Meet in Rwanda: The Great “Rwanda Genocide” Coverup, P Erlinder, Global Research, 20 February 2008

(4) April 6th 1994 Attack Fits ICTR Mandate — Goldstone, Hirondelle News Agency, accessed 12 December 2006

(5) Rwanda’s Genocide: The Politics of International Justice, K Moghalu, Palgrave Macmillan, 2005 p.52

(6) Second Thoughts on the Hotel Rwanda, Philpot, R, Race and History, 26 February 2005

(7) ‘Major General Paul Kagame behind the shooting down of late Habyarimana’s plane: an eye witness testimony, 2nd Lt. Aloys Ruyenzi Press release, 18 January 2005 (Ruyenzi re-affirmed his statement to the author in an interview in Paris)

(8) ‘French Policy in Rwanda’, A Callamard included in The Path of a Genocide: The Rwanda Crisis from Uganda to Zaïre, H Adelman and A Suhurke, Nordiska Afrikainstitutet, 1999, p.163

(9) Open letter to Prime Minister Harper: Regarding state visit of current President of Rwanda, P Erlinder, 6 April 2006 (Copy passed on to author by Erlinder. Emphasis in the original)

(10) The murky truth about France and genocide, L Melvern, The Times, 8 August 2008

British libel laws violate human rights, says UN

0

guardian.co.uk | Britain’s libel laws have come under attack from the United Nations committee on human rights for discouraging coverage of matters of major public interest. The use of the Official Secrets Act to deter government employees from raising important issues has also been criticised.

The intervention by the UN comes in the wake of international disquiet over the use of British courts for “libel tourism”, whereby wealthy plaintiffs can sue in the high court in London over articles that would not warrant an action in their own country.

The criticisms are made as part of the committee’s concluding observations on the report submitted by the UK on civil and political rights. UN member states are required to submit reports on human rights in their jurisdictions every three years.

The committee warns that the British libel laws have “served to discourage critical media reporting on matters of serious public interest, adversely affecting the ability of scholars and journalists to publish their work, including through the phenomenon known as libel tourism”.

The case that has provoked the most concern is that of an American researcher, Dr Rachel Ehrenfeld, who was sued in London by a Saudi businessman and his two sons over a book that sold 23 copies over the internet into the UK, where it was never officially published. One chapter of the book was available online.

The action led to the New York state legislature passing legislation to protect writers and publishers working there from defamation judgements in any country that does not give the same same freedom of speech rights as New York and US federal law.

The committee’s report highlights the grey area created by the internet whereby alleged libel can be read in different countries. There is a risk, warns the committee, that restrictive libel laws could affect legitimate international discussion, contrary to article 19 of the covenant on civil and political rights, which guarantees the right to freedom of speech “regardless of borders”.

The UK government has been urged to consider “a so-called ‘public figure’ exception” that would require a would-be claimant to prove actual malice by a publisher or author.

This would apply in cases involving public officials and prominent public figures, as currently exists in the US, where a public figure can only sue for libel if he or she can demonstrate malice, recklessness or indifference to the truth and that the statement is false.

On the Official Secrets Act, the committee “remains concerned” that powers under the act have been “exercised to frustrate former employees of the crown from bringing into the public domain issues of genuine public interest, and can be exercised to prevent the media from publishing such matters”. The committee found the act is used even when issues of national security are not involved.

The 2006 Terrorism Act’s “broad and vague” definition of the offence of “encouragement of terrorism” was also criticised by the committee.

Media law specialist Mark Stephens, of legal firm Finers Stephens Innocent, said: “I think it is quite remarkable that the UK government has drawn these deficiencies in our libel laws to the attention of the United Nations, while at the same time libel lawyers in this country have remained insouciant to the deficiencies highlighted by the UN.”

What’s on Tap and What You Need to Know About Drinking Water

0

By Leigh Erin Connealy, M.D. | The National Resources Defense Council (NRDC), an environmental action organization, recently conducted an in-depth study into the quality of drinking water across the United States. Reviewing the tap water quality data for 19 major U.S. cities, including Los Angeles, they compiled their findings and made them available to the public in June of 2003. 11 contaminants were labeled to be of “high concern” or “some concern” for the LA area’s water supply. Since much of Los Angeles and Orange County drinking water comes from the same two sources, the Colorado River and Northern California, this information should be of note to those living in the Orange County area.

Five contaminants fell under the “high concern” category, including Lead, Perchlorate, Radon, Haloacetic Acids (HAAs) and Total Trihalomethanes (TTHMs).

Lead

Lead is a heavy metal that generally enters the drinking supplies due to the corrosion of pipes, plumbing or faucets. Often, the lead levels of the water at your home are much higher than the levels from the water’s source. This is usually the result of contamination that may be occurring at your home, due to old or corroded pipes. The national standard (NS) for lead, as determined by the EPA, is 15 ppb.

Health Effects: Infants, young children and pregnant women are particularly susceptible to the adverse effects of lead. In serious cases, poisoning can cause permanent brain damage and, in less severe cases, can cause children to suffer from decreased intelligence and problems with growth, development and behavior. In adults, lead can increase blood pressure, harm kidney function, adversely affect the nervous system and damage red blood cells.

Perchlorate

Perchlorate in the water usually comes from rocket fuel spills or leaks at military facilities. Additionally, perchlorate is used in a variety of products and applications, including electronic tubes, vehicle airbags, leather tanning and fireworks. The NS is 4 ppb, however no level has been determined to be safe.

Health Effects: Perchlorate disrupts the thyroid function and is a suspected carcinogen. Changes in thyroid hormone levels can result in thyroid gland tumors. In children, thyroid disruption can adversely affect proper development and in adults it can interfere with metabolism regulation. Disruption of the thyroid in pregnant women may impact the fetus and result in delayed development and decreased learning ability.

Radon

Radon is a radioactive gas that results from the natural breakdown of uranium in the ground. The NS is an average of 300 pCi/L.

Health Effects: Radon is known to cause lung cancer. No level is considered to be safe and a single particle of radon can cause cancer. The EPA estimates that radon in drinking water causes approximately 168 deaths from lung and stomach cancer each year (89% from lung cancer caused by breathing radon released to the indoor air from water, 11% from stomach cancer caused by consuming water that contains radon). Radon is the second leading cause of lung cancer in the U.S., after smoking.

Haloacetic Acids (HAAs)/Total Trihalomethanes (TTHMs)

HAAs and TTHMs are volatile organic contaminates often referred to as disinfection by-products or organochlorines and result when chlorine used to disinfect drinking water interacts with organic matter in the water. The EPA has classified some TTHMs as probable human carcinogens. The NS for HAAs is an average of 60 ppb and for TTHMs, an average of 80 ppb.

Health Effects: Disinfection by-products have been linked to cancers of the bladder, pancreas, colon, rectum, brain, and childhood leukemia.

The following six contaminants fall under the category of “some concern”:

Cryptosporidium

Cryptosporidium is a waterborne parasite that lives and reproduces by the millions in both animal and human intestines until it is shed in the feces. The NS is 0.

Health Effects: Cryptosporidium can cause severe diarrhea, nausea, abdominal cramping and fever for up to 2 weeks. Currently there is no antibiotic that can kill the parasite. It poses a significant health risk to children and those with weakened immune systems.

Total Coliform Bacteria (TCM)

TCM is a broad class of bacteria, many of which live in the intestines of humans and animals. Most coliform bacteria are harmless, however their presence indicates that the water may contain harmful bacteria such as E. coli. The NS for TCM is 0.

Arsenic

Arsenic found in drinking supplies comes from mining, industrial processes, past use of arsenic containing pesticides, and natural leaching erosion from rock. Currently the NS for arsenic is 50 ppb but will be lowered to 10 ppb in 2006.

Health Effects: Arsenic is toxic to humans and a known carcinogen. The National Academy of Sciences (NAS) has determined that arsenic in drinking water is known to cause cancer of the bladder, skin and lungs. An NAS report published in 2001 stated that a person who drinks 2 liters of water a day (containing 10 ppb arsenic) has a lifetime total fatal cancer risk greater than 1 in 333.

Chromium

Chromium is a naturally occurring metal used in industrial processes, including metal plating for chrome bumpers and making stainless steel, paint, rubber and wood preservatives. The NS for chromium is 100 ppb.

Health Effects: Chromium ingestion can cause a host of health problems, ranging form skin irritation to damage to kidney, liver and nerve tissue.

Gross Alpha Radiation (GAR)/Gross Beta Radiation (GBR)

GAR and GBR generally result from the decay of radioactive minerals in underground rocks and are sometimes by-products of the mining and nuclear industries. The NS for GAR is an average of 15 pCi/L and for GBR, an average of 50 pCi/L.

Health Effects: No level of exposure to GAR or GBR is considered safe as they are both radioactive and can cause cancer.

Uranium

Uranium is released from minerals in the ground, often as the result of mining or as a by-product of the nuclear industry. The NS for uranium is 30 micrograms/L.

Health Effects: Uranium is radioactive and known to cause cancer when ingested. The EPA has determined that it causes serious kidney damage at levels above 300 mcg/L.

While Orange County has strict regulations on the quality of drinking water, you should still be aware of what is coming out of your tap. The EPA established national standards are determined to be the highest level of contaminants allowed in the water. The NRDC however, maintains that no level of any of these contaminants is safe.

So what can you do? First, contact the EPA for a list of state-certified labs that can test the water at your home. Finding out what is in your tap water can help you to determine what kind of filtration system is right for you. Your water standards should be higher than the EPA’s to ensure the safety of your family.

When choosing a water filtration system, I recommend a unit that also regulates the pH level of your water like Jupiter Melody by Ion Life available through perfectlyhealthy at (www.perfectlyhealthy.net) . Proper pH levels can further protect you from any contaminants that you might come in contact with and also ward off disease and infection. You want to drink water that reaches a pH level of approximately 9.0 while trying to maintain a blood pH level of 7.43.

For a list of state-certified labs, call the EPA’s hotline at 800-426-4791 or go online at (www.epa.gov/safewater/privatewells/labs.html) . To review the entire report by the NRDC, visit their website at (www.nrdc.org) . I recommend the Jupiter Melody Ionizer available through perfectlyhealthy, it excludes contaminants from your drinking water as well as providing a pH level of approximately 9.0. Visit (www.perfectlyhealthy.net) for more information.

BAE case in the Lords

0

CAAT News | The five senior Judges are technically a committee of the Lords so the hearing took place in a Lords’ Committee room, dominated by a huge painting of the burial of King Harold. Only the tops of the heads of the Judges (without wigs) were visible from most of the public seats as the banks of case documents formed a wall across the room. Between the Judges and the rest of us sat eleven bewigged barristers — CAAT and The Corner House had four (David Pannick QC, Philippe Sands QC, Dinah Rose QC and Ben Jaffey) and the Government five, whilst ‘interested party’ BAE, and ‘intervener’ Justice, a human rights and law reform organisation, had one apiece. All these barristers were backed by teams of solicitors. Even though the Lords’ authorities had added an extra bench, this retinue left little space in the room.

We all crammed in — CAAT and Corner House people; the Guardian‘s Rob Evans, who had done so much to expose the BAE corruption allegations, was there along with journalists from other papers, the BBC and specialist legal magazines; representatives from the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development, concerned that its 1997 Anti-Bribery Convention will be rendered meaningless if the Government is allowed to stop corruption inquiries as in this case, took copious notes; Peter Gardiner, the former BAE travel agent who gave evidence to the SFO looked on; and many others were present.

The arguments

The Government’s lead barrister, Jonathan Sumption QC, went first. He argued that the Director of the SFO, as an independent prosecutor, had a wide discretion as to which cases he investigated or prosecuted, he just had to act ‘reasonably’ in making his decisions. He also produced a witness statement from the Foreign Office in an attempt to show that, in contrast to what Lord Justice Moses had said in the High Court, the attention of Saudi Arabian officials had been drawn to the separation of powers between the Government and the legal authorities in the UK.

David Pannick challenged this. He said the rule of law had to prevail and that this demanded that the SFO did not give into threats by Saudi Arabia to withdraw cooperation on anti-terrorism until all other options had been exhausted and, even then, only if it was strictly necessary. The Government, he said, did not meet this test, as all bar one of the approaches to Saudi Arabia listed in the Foreign Office statement had been made before the threats were issued and all were fairly casual mentions in the course of other meetings. Additionally, the UK did not seem to have reminded Saudi Arabia of its anti-terrorism commitments.

With regards to the OECD Convention, Dinah Rose argued that this was a relevant consideration because the SFO Director said his decision was made in accordance with it — the question was whether ‘national security’ was an implied exemption or not and she said not — whilst the Government said it was up to the OECD to decide on this issue.

No decision as yet

There was very little intervention by the Judges as the barristers made their submissions. This, we were told, is unusual. Each of five Judges now considers the submissions, looks up the precedents and writes his or her own speech — the verdict is the majority view. The result will be announced, most likely in October, when the Judges’ committee reports to the full House of Lords. Justice?

Campaign update

The House of Lords has overturned the High Court’s ruling that the Government broke the law by stopping the corruption investigation into BAE Systems’ Saudi arms deals. The case had been brought by CAAT and The Corner House with widespread support.

The Serious Fraud Office’s appeal was heard by the House of Lords on the 7th and 8th of July and judgment was given on 30th July.

One of the judges, Baroness Hale, said that she would have liked to have been able to say that it was wrong to stop the investigation as it was “extremely distasteful that an independent public official should feel himself obliged to give way to threats of any sort.” However, she had to agree with her colleagues that the decision taken by the SFO Director was lawful.

The judgment means that those with powerful friends prepared to make threats can effectively evade justice, particularly if the threats are couched in terms of national security. The ruling also confirms that the UK government has driven a coach and horses through a key international anti-bribery convention to protect its friends in BAE.

CAAT and The Corner House are not dejected by the result as it has brought the whole issue into the public realm and clarified the law.

Guantanamo general calls 2nd general ‘bullying’

0

By Carol Rosenberg | GUANTANAMO BAY NAY BASE, Cuba – One general testified about another general at the war court Wednesday, describing a Pentagon official fast-tracking trials here as “abusive, bullying, unprofessional.”

Moreover, in testimony, Army Brig. Gen. Gregory Zanetti, deputy prison camps commander, described the approach employed earlier this year by his counterpart, Air Force Brig. Gen. Thomas Hartmann, this way:

“Spray and pray. Charge everybody. Let’s go. Speed, speed, speed.”

The colorful testimony – using battlefield language – was in pretrial hearings in the case of Afghan detainee Mohammed Jawad, an Afghan accused of wounding two U.S. troops by throwing a grenade in a bazaar in Kabul.

Hartmann is the legal advisor overseeing the first U.S. war crimes tribunals since World War II. Jawad’s attorney, Air Force Reserve Maj. David Frakt, wants his client’s charges dismissed on grounds that Hartmann exerted ”unlawful influence” on the Guantánamo trials from his perch at the Pentagon.

Frakt alleges in his motion that Hartmann usurped the role of a prosecutor – rather than act as an impartial supervisor – by pressuring military attorneys to charge Jawad because the case involved battlefield bloodshed.

In June, Hartmann defended his ”intense and direct” management style in testimony, saying he had pressured for speed in the interest of kick-starting sluggish military commissions, not for political reasons.

What was unusual about Wednesday’s testimony was that, while subordinates have described Hartmann’s style as abusive ”nano-management,” this was the first time an officer of equal rank testified about Hartmann’s management style.

In telephone calls and teleconferences from the Pentagon, Zanetti said, Hartmann’s demeanor ”as an attorney from a thousand miles away,” was “abusive, bullying and unprofessional . . . pretty much across the board.”

The Pentagon’s chief war crimes prosecutor at the time, now retired Air Force Col. Morris Davis, resigned the post and has testified that he believed Hartmann usurped his role.

A Navy judge, Capt. Keith Allred, agreed that it appeared that way, at least, and in May banished Hartmann from any role in the just-completed trial of Osama bin Laden’s driver, Salim Hamdan. Hamdan was convicted of providing material support for terror last week.

The current chief prosecutor, Army Col. Lawrence Morris, dismissed criticism of Hartmann’s leadership style as the product of a “superficial personality conflict. Gen. Hartmann came in, kicked over some furniture, wasn’t so gentle as some subordinates wish.”

Frakt got a court order from the trial judge, Col. Stephen Henley, to compel the testimony of Zanetti, a former air defense artillery officer with the New Mexico National Guard. At Guantanamo, his title is deputy joint task force commander.

Zanetti described struggling with Hartmann over who would command U.S. forces in Guantanamo assigned to do the logistics of the trials.

To try to work with Hartmann, who like Zanetti has one star on his uniform, the Army brigadier said he tried to engage the Air Force brigadier in a discussion on the concept of “command unity.”

”As a principle, it’s really been around since Alexander the Great. Most military people understand this one,” Zanetti said with a laugh. “Gen. Hartmann really wanted to run things.”

In a curious twist, the topic of Hartmann’s leadership style was also being scrutinized Wednesday in a different war court.

Pretrial hearings in the Jawad case took place in Courtroom No. 1, the original tribunal chamber, while a hearing in Courtroom No. 2 was held concurrently in a second case accusing Canadian Omar Khadr of the grenade killing of a U.S. Army sergeant in Afghanistan in July 2002.

Both detainees were captured as teens.

It was during Hartmann’s fast-paced tenure as legal advisor that the second war court chamber was brought on-line.

In his testimony, Zanetti credited an independent ”sense of urgency” by military staff on the ground at Guantanamo for the emerging infrastructure at Camp Justice, where the trials are held, likening it to “putting a small base together.”

Antiwar activists seek expanded police probe

0

| Antiwar activists who were targeted by an undercover state police operation from 2005 to 2006 will ask state investigators Tuesday to expand their probe to learn whether other law enforcement agencies took part in the spying.

Members of Pledge of Resistance Baltimore plan to rally in front of the Maryland State Police headquarters in Baltimore County Tuesday afternoon. The agency’s surveillance of the group for 14 months in 2005 and 2006 is being investigated by the state. The group also was tracked by the Baltimore City Police Department in 2003, according to an e-mail obtained by The Washington Times.

“We just want to know: Who ordered it? Who was involved? Who paid for it? Has it stopped? What are you going to do to make sure it never happens again?” said group member Maria Allwine.

A state police spokeswoman declined to comment Monday, citing the pending results of the state probe. A Baltimore police spokesman said any expansion of the probe “would be a huge waste of money.”

Baltimore police and Gov. Martin O’Malley, who served as mayor at the time, have denied city officers were involved in tracking protest groups, though the 2003 e-mail is the second document that shows Baltimore police have tracked protesters since the start of the war in Iraq.

Protesters who were targets of the surveillance by state and Baltimore police say the city is withholding information.

“We believe other agencies [than the state police] have documents and we’d like to see all of the documents,” said Max Obus-zewski, an antiwar activist whose name was entered into a federal terrorist-tracking database.

In responding to a 2006 public records request filed by the ACLU on behalf of Mr. Obuszewski and other protestors, the Baltimore police department said it had no relevant documents.

Mr. Obuszewski protests regularly in front of the National Security Agency headquarters,at Fort Meade, and said Baltimore police, under Mr. O’Malley, cooperated with the NSA in tracking his antiwar group.

“Balto City Intell is working from her end … [redacted] advised they will have someone working this weekend who will scope out their departure from the American Friends Service Committee,” an unknown sender wrote in an e-mail to NSA Police Maj. Michael Talbert, dated September 29, 2003. “The Baltimore City PD counterpart will give [redacted] a heads up as to the numbers departing from the Govans location.”

Mrs. Allwine said she suspects a Baltimore police officer infiltrated her group around the start of the Iraq war in 2003. “We may be peaceful, but we’re not stupid,” she said last week.

Mr. O’Malley appointed former Attorney General Stephen H. Sachs to lead the state investigation of the spying by state police, which occurred under former Gov. Robert L. Ehrlich Jr.

The Maryland ACLU uncovered the spying by state police last month after filing a lawsuit against the state in June. The state police released 44 pages of documents detailing its surveillance of antiwar and anti-death-penalty groups.

Mr. O’Malley, a Democrat, has attacked Mr. Ehrlich, a Republican, since the spying became public last month. Mr. Ehrlich has said he was previously unaware of the spying.

Mr. O’Malley has denied any involvement by the city police, though the ACLU documents show two undercover Baltimore police officers supported undercover state officers at a December 2005 rally.

Is Perpetual War Our Future? Learning the Wrong Lessons from the Bush Era

0

TomDispatch | To the problem of an overstretched, over-toured military, there is but one answer in Washington. Both presidential candidates (along with just about every other politician in our nation’s capital) are on record wanting to significantly expand the Army and the Marines. In part two of his series at TomDispatch, adapted from his remarkable new book, The Limits of Power, The End of American Exceptionalism, historian and retired colonel Andrew Bacevich suggests a solution to the American military crisis that might seem obvious enough, if only both parties weren’t so blinded by the idea of our “global reach,” by a belief, however wrapped in euphemisms, in our imperial role on this planet, and by the imperial Pentagon and presidency that go with it: reduce the mission.

That is the heart of his latest piece. As he writes: “America doesn’t need a bigger army. It needs a smaller — that is, more modest — foreign policy, one that assigns soldiers missions that are consistent with their capabilities. Modesty implies giving up on the illusions of grandeur to which the end of the Cold War and then 9/11 gave rise. It also means reining in the imperial presidents who expect the army to make good on those illusions. When it comes to supporting the troops, here lies the essence of a citizen’s obligation.”

In this striking post, Bacevich also lays out the wrong lessons that our leaders have drawn from Bush’s wars and they all spell trouble: first, that the challenges posed by Iraq and Afghanistan define not only the military’s present but also its future, the “next war”; second, that the corrective to civilian arrogance and misjudgment is obvious — that the civil-military balance should be tilted back in favor of the generals, untying the hands of senior commanders; and third, that the All-Volunteer Force needs to be junked altogether.

Bacevich’s latest piece represents an incisive analysis of the way lessons drawn will determine our future. This post is a warning against “lessons” of the Bush era that will lead to perpetual war — from a man who knows his business.

Note: Andrew Bacevich will discuss his new book — and the limits of American power in the Bush era — for a full hour on “Bill Moyers Journal,” Friday, August 15th. Don’t miss it. Go here to check broadcasts and times in your area. If you’re watching the Olympics, TIVO it or look for a repeat.

Is Perpetual War Our Future?
Learning the Wrong Lessons from the Bush Era
By Andrew Bacevich

To appreciate the full extent of the military crisis into which the United States has been plunged requires understanding what the Iraq War and, to a lesser extent, the Afghan War have to teach. These two conflicts, along with the attacks of September 11, 2001, will form the centerpiece of George W. Bush’s legacy. Their lessons ought to constitute the basis of a new, more realistic military policy.

In some respects, the effort to divine those lessons is well under way, spurred by critics of President Bush’s policies on the left and the right as well as by reform-minded members of the officer corps. Broadly speaking, this effort has thus far yielded three distinct conclusions. Whether taken singly or together, they invert the post-Cold War military illusions that provided the foundation for the president’s Global War on Terror. In exchange for these received illusions, they propound new ones, which are equally misguided. Thus far, that is, the lessons drawn from America’s post-9/11 military experience are the wrong ones.

According to the first lesson, the armed services — and above all the Army — need to recognize that the challenges posed by Iraq and Afghanistan define not only the military’s present but also its future, the “next war,” as enthusiasts like to say. Rooting out insurgents, nation-building, training and advising “host nation” forces, population security and control, winning hearts and minds — these promise to be ongoing priorities, preoccupying U.S. troops for decades to come, all across the Islamic world.

Rather than brief interventions ending in decisive victory, sustained presence will be the norm. Large-scale conventional conflict like 1991’s Operation Desert Storm becomes the least likely contingency. The future will be one of small wars, expected to be frequent, protracted, perhaps perpetual.

Although advanced technology will retain an important place in such conflicts, it will not be decisive. Wherever possible, the warrior will rely on “nonkinetic” methods, functioning as diplomat, mediator, and relief worker. No doubt American soldiers will engage in combat, but, drawing on the latest findings of social science, they will also demonstrate cultural sensitivity, not to speak of mastering local languages and customs. As Secretary of Defense Robert Gates put it in October 2007, “Reviving public services, rebuilding infrastructure and promoting good governance” had now become soldiers’ business. “All these so-called nontraditional capabilities have moved into the mainstream of military thinking, planning, and strategy — where they must stay.”

This prospect implies a rigorous integration of military action with political purpose. Hard power and soft power will merge. The soldier on the ground will serve as both cop and social worker. This prospect also implies shedding the sort of utopian expectations that produced so much confident talk of “transformation,” “shock-and-awe,” and “networkcentric warfare” — all of which had tended to segregate war and politics into separate compartments.

Local conditions will dictate technique, dooming the Pentagon’s effort to devise a single preconceived, technologically determined template applicable across the entire spectrum of conflict. When it comes to low-intensity wars, the armed services will embrace a style owing less to the traditions of the Civil War, World War II, or even Gulf War I than to the nearly forgotten American experiences in the Philippines after 1898 and in Central America during the 1920s. Instead of looking for inspiration at the campaigns of U. S. Grant, George Patton, or H. Norman Schwarzkopf, officers will study postwar British and French involvement in places like Palestine and Malaya, Indochina and Algeria.

In sum, an officer corps bloodied in Iraq and Afghanistan has seen the future and it points to many more Iraqs and Afghanistans. Whereas the architects of full spectrum dominance had expected the unprecedented lethality, range, accuracy, and responsiveness of high-tech striking power to perpetuate military dominion, the veterans of Iraq and Afghanistan know better. They remain committed to global dominance while believing that its pursuit will require not only advanced weaponry but also the ability to put boots on the ground and keep them there. This, in turn, implies a plentiful supply of soldiers and loads of patience on the home front.

Were the Civilians of the Defense Department Responsible?

Viewed from another perspective, however, the post-9/11 wars teach an altogether different lesson. According to this alternative view, echoing a similar complaint during the Vietnam era, the shortcomings of U.S. policy in Iraq and Afghanistan have little to do with the actual performance of American forces in the field and everything to do with the meddling of bumbling civilians back in Washington. In its simplest form, fault lies not with the troops themselves, nor with their commanders, but with the likes of Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul Wolfowitz, and Undersecretary of Defense Douglas Feith, who prevented the troops from doing their jobs.

The charges leveled by Major General John Batiste, who served in Rumsfeld’s Pentagon but subsequently retired in disgust and became one of the defense secretary’s loudest military critics, are representative of this view. “Rumsfeld’s dismal strategic decisions resulted in the unnecessary deaths of American servicemen and women,” Batiste declared in September 2006. The former general held Rumsfeld personally “responsible for America and her allies going to war with the wrong plan.” But that was just for starters. Rumsfeld also “violated fundamental principles of war, dismissed deliberate military planning, ignored the hard work to build the peace after the fall of Saddam Hussein, set the conditions for Abu Ghraib and other atrocities that further ignited the insurgency, disbanded Iraqi security force institutions when we needed them most, [and] constrained our commanders with an overly restrictive de-Ba’athification policy.”

Nor was the problem limited to Rumsfeld himself. It included his chief lieutenants. According to Batiste, Rumsfeld surrounded himself “with like-minded and compliant subordinates who [did] not grasp the importance of the principles of war, the complexities of Iraq, or the human dimension of warfare.” The overall effect was tantamount to murder: Rumsfeld “tied the hands of commanders while our troops were in contact with the enemy.”

Here lies the second preliminary lesson drawn from Iraq and Afghanistan, one that appeals to disgruntled military officers like Batiste, but also to Democrats eager to blame the Bush administration for any and all sins and to neoconservatives looking to absolve themselves of responsibility for botched wars that they had once cavalierly promoted. The corrective to civilian arrogance and misjudgment is obvious: It requires tilting the civil-military balance back in favor of the generals, untying the hands of senior commanders.

From this perspective, the most important lesson to take away from Iraq and Afghanistan is the imperative to empower military professionals. The Petraeus moment of 2007, when all of official Washington from President Bush to the lowest-ranking congressional staffer waited with bated breath for General David Petraeus to formulate basic policy for Iraq, offers a preview of how this lesson might play itself out.

Is a Draft the Answer?

There is also a third perspective, which blames the failures of Iraq and Afghanistan on a problematic relationship between soldiers and society. According to this view, the All-Volunteer Force itself is the problem. As the military historian Adrian Lewis observed, “The most significant transformation in the American conduct of war since World War II and the invention of the atomic bomb was not technological, but cultural, social, and political — the removal of the American people from the conduct of war.” Only after 9/11, with the Bush administration waging war on multiple fronts, have the implications of this transformation become fully evident.

A reliance on volunteer-professionals places a de facto cap on the army’s overall size. The pool of willing recruits is necessarily limited. Given a choice, most young Americans will opt for opportunities other than military service, with protracted war diminishing rather than enhancing any collective propensity to volunteer. It is virtually inconceivable that any presidential call to the colors, however impassioned, any PR campaign, however cleverly designed, or any package of pay and bonuses, however generous, could reverse this disinclination.

Furthermore, to the extent that an army composed of regulars is no longer a people’s army, the people have little say in its use. In effect, the professional military has become an extension of the imperial presidency. The troops fight when and where the commander in chief determines.

Finally, a reliance on professional soldiers eviscerates the concept of civic duty, relieving citizens at large of any obligation to contribute to the nation’s defense. Ending the draft during the waning days of the Vietnam War did nothing to heal the divisions created by that conflict; instead, it ratified the separation of army from society. Like mowing lawns and bussing tables, fighting and perhaps dying to sustain the American way of life became something that Americans pay others to do.

So the third lesson of the Iraq War focuses on the need to repair the relationship between army and society. One way to do this is to junk the All-Volunteer Force altogether. Rather than rely on professionals, perhaps it makes sense to revive the tradition of the citizen-soldier.

Proposals to restore this hallowed tradition invariably conjure up images of reinstituting some form of conscription. In place of a system based on the principle of individual choice, those unhappy with the AVF advocate a system based on the principle of state compulsion.

The advantages offered by such a system are hardly trivial. To the extent that Iraq and Afghanistan have exposed the operational, political, and moral problems produced by relying on a small professional force, a draft seems to offer one obvious way to alleviate those problems.

For those who worry that the existing army is overextended, conscription provides a mechanism for expansion. Triple the size of the army — in essence restoring the structure that existed during much of the Cold War — and the personnel shortages that constrain the prosecution of ground campaigns will disappear. Sustaining the military commitment to Iraq for ten or twenty years, or even a century as Senator John McCain and many neoconservatives are willing to contemplate, then becomes a viable proposition.

War planners will no longer find themselves obliged to give short shrift to Contingency A (Afghanistan) in order to support Contingency B (Iraq). The concept of “surge” will take on a whole new meaning with the Pentagon able to dispatch not a measly 30,000 reinforcements to Iraq or another few thousand to Afghanistan, but 100,000 or more additional troops wherever they might be needed. Was the problem with Operation Iraqi Freedom too few “boots on the ground” for occupation and reconstruction? Reconstitute the draft, and that problem goes away.

Creating a mass army might even permit the United States to resuscitate the Weinberger-Powell Doctrine with its emphasis on “overwhelming force.”

For those distressed by the absence of a politically meaningful antiwar movement despite the Iraq War’s manifest unpopularity, the appeal of conscription differs somewhat. Some political activists look to an Iraq-era draft to do what the Vietnam-era draft did: animate large-scale protest, alter the political dynamic, and eventually shut down any conflict that lacks widespread popular support. The prospect of involuntary service will pry the kids out of the shopping malls and send them into the streets. It will prod the parents of draft-eligible offspring to see politics as something other than a mechanism for doling out entitlements. As a consequence, members of Congress keen to retain their seats will define their wartime responsibilities as something more than simply rubber-stamping spending bills proposed by the White House. In this way, a draft could reinvigorate American democracy, restore the governmental system of checks and balances, and constrain the warmongers inhabiting the executive branch.

For those moved by moral considerations, a draft promises to ensure a more equitable distribution of sacrifice in war time. No longer will rural Americans, people of color, recent immigrants, and members of the working class fill the ranks of the armed forces in disproportionate numbers. With conscription, the children of the political elite and of the well-to-do will once again bear their fair share of the load. Those reaping the benefits of the American way of life will contribute to its defense, helping to garrison the more distant precincts of empire. Perhaps even the editorial staffs of the Weekly Standard, National Review, and the New Republic might have the opportunity to serve, a salutary prospect given the propensity of those magazines to argue on behalf of military intervention.

Reconfigure the armed services to fight “small wars”; empower the generals; reconnect soldiering to citizenship — on the surface each of these has a certain appeal. But upon closer examination, each also has large defects. They are the wrong lessons to take from Iraq and Afghanistan.

Drawing the Right Lessons from the Bush Era

If gearing up to fight “small wars,” deferring to the brass, and scrapping the All-Volunteer Force are the wrong lessons to be drawn from our recent military experience, then what are the right ones?

The events of the recent past offer several lessons that illuminate these questions. The first concerns the nature of war. Iraq and Afghanistan remind us that war is not subject to reinvention, whatever George W. Bush and Pentagon proponents of the so-called Revolution in Military Affairs may contend.

War’s essential nature is fixed, permanent, intractable, and irrepressible. War’s constant companions are uncertainty and risk. “War is the realm of chance,” wrote the military theorist Carl von Clausewitz nearly two centuries ago. “No other human activity gives it greater scope: no other has such incessant and varied dealings with this intruder…” — a judgment that the invention of the computer, the Internet, and precision-guided munitions has done nothing to overturn.

So the first lesson to be taken away from the Bush administration’s two military adventures is simply this: War remains today what it has always been — elusive, untamed, costly, difficult to control, fraught with surprise, and sure to give rise to unexpected consequences. Only the truly demented will imagine otherwise.

The second lesson of Iraq and Afghanistan derives from the first. As has been the case throughout history, the utility of armed force remains finite. Even in the information age, to the extent that force “works,” it does so with respect to a limited range of contingencies.

Although die-hard supporters of the Global War on Terror will insist otherwise, events in Iraq and Afghanistan have demonstrated definitively that further reliance on coercive methods will not enable the United States to achieve its objectives. Whether the actual aim is to democratize the Islamic world or subdue it, the military “option” is not the answer.

The Bush Doctrine itself provides the basis for a third lesson. For centuries, the Western moral tradition has categorically rejected the concept of preventive war. The events of 9/11 convinced some that this tradition no longer applied: old constraints had to give way. Yet our actual experience with preventive war suggests that, even setting moral considerations aside, to launch a war today to eliminate a danger that might pose a threat at some future date is just plain stupid. It doesn’t work.

History has repeatedly demonstrated the irrationality of preventive war. If the world needed a further demonstration, President Bush provided it. Iraq shows us why the Bush Doctrine was a bad idea in the first place and why its abrogation has become essential. For principled guidance in determining when the use of force is appropriate, the country should conform to the Just War tradition — not only because that tradition is consistent with our professed moral values, but also because its provisions provide an eminently useful guide for sound statecraft.

Finally, there is a fourth lesson, relating to the formulation of strategy. The results of U.S. policy in Iraq and Afghanistan suggest that in the upper echelons of the government and among the senior ranks of the officer corps, this has become a lost art.

Since the end of the Cold War, the tendency among civilians — with President Bush a prime example — has been to confuse strategy with ideology. The president’s freedom agenda, which supposedly provided a blueprint for how to prosecute the Global War on Terror, expressed grandiose aspirations without serious effort to assess the means required to achieve them. Meanwhile, ever since the Vietnam War ended, the tendency among military officers has been to confuse strategy with operations.

Here we come face-to-face with the essential dilemma with which the United States has unsuccessfully wrestled since the Soviets deprived us of a stabilizing adversary. The political elite that ought to bear the chief responsibility for crafting grand strategy instead nurses fantasies of either achieving permanent global hegemony or remaking the world in America’s image. Meanwhile, the military elite that could puncture those fantasies and help restore a modicum of realism to U.S. policy fixates on campaigns and battles, with generalship largely a business of organizing and coordinating matériel.

The four lessons of Iraq and Afghanistan boil down to this: Events have exposed as illusory American pretensions to having mastered war. Even today, war is hardly more subject to human control than the tides or the weather. Simply trying harder — investing ever larger sums in even more advanced technology, devising novel techniques, or even improving the quality of American generalship — will not enable the United States to evade that reality.

As measured by results achieved, the performance of the military since the end of the Cold War and especially since 9/11 has been unimpressive. This indifferent record of success leads some observers to argue that we need a bigger army or a different army.

But the problem lies less with the army that we have — a very fine one, which every citizen should wish to preserve — than with the requirements that we have imposed on our soldiers. Rather than expanding or reconfiguring that army, we need to treat it with the respect that it deserves. That means protecting it from further abuse of the sort that it has endured since 2001.

America doesn’t need a bigger army. It needs a smaller — that is, more modest — foreign policy, one that assigns soldiers missions that are consistent with their capabilities. Modesty implies giving up on the illusions of grandeur to which the end of the Cold War and then 9/11 gave rise. It also means reining in the imperial presidents who expect the army to make good on those illusions. When it comes to supporting the troops, here lies the essence of a citizen’s obligation.

###

Andrew Bacevich, professor of history and international relations at Boston University, retired from the U.S. Army with the rank of colonel. This piece is adapted from his new book, The Limits of Power: The End of American Exceptionalism (Metropolitan Books, 2008). He is also the author of The New American Militarism, among other books. His writing has appeared in Foreign Affairs, the Atlantic Monthly, the Nation, the New York Times, the Los Angeles Times, and the Wall Street Journal. A TomDispatch interview with him can be read by clicking here, and then here. For part one of Bacevich’s two-part series for TomDispatch, “Illusions of Victory,” click here

From the book The Limits of Power: The End of American Exceptionalism by Andrew Bacevich, Copyright © 2008 by Andrew Bacevich. Reprinted by arrangement with Metropolitan Books, an Imprint of Henry Holt and Company, LLC. All Rights Reserved.

BP shuts down Georgia pipelines

0

Energy giant BP says it has shut two of three pipelines that run through Georgia as a precautionary measure.

A spokeswoman for the firm said the oil and gas pipelines, which run from the Caspian Sea into Georgia, had not been damaged by the recent fighting.

The oil pipeline, which BP owns as part of a consortium, can carry up to 90,000 barrels of oil per day.

Another key oil pipeline, which runs from Azerbaijan through southern Georgia into Turkey, is already shut.

The closure comes as the International Energy Agency (IEA) warned that the conflict posed a threat to key oil and gas pipelines that pass through Georgia.

The IEA said that Georgia was of strategic importance to energy markets but that so far oil prices “had not been materially affected”.

BP said it had closed the Western Route Export Pipeline (WREP), which runs from Baku on the Caspian Sea in Azerbaijan to the Georgian Black Sea port of Supsa, this morning.

It has also stopped pumping gas into the South Caucasus pipeline, which runs from the Caspian Sea, through Georgia, into Turkey, although BP said gas will continue to run through the line for another seven days.

Precarious

The larger Baku-Tbilisi-Ceyhan (BTC) oil pipeline has been closed since early August following an explosion on the eastern Turkish section of the line. The current conflict could also delay its reopening, scheduled for September.

It is the world’s second-largest pipeline and runs from Azerbaijan through southern Georgia into Turkey. It can transport up to 1.2 million barrels of oil a day.

“Renewed flows through Georgia could be further delayed if the line is damaged during the Russia-Georgia conflict,” the IEA said in its monthly report.

It added that the outage and the eruption of hostilities highlighted the potentially precarious nature of pipeline energy supplies in the region.

BP has a 30% stake in the BTC pipeline.

It had been hoped that transporting oil through the region would make the West less dependent on supplies from Russia.

Figures released by the IEA later in the day showed the sharpest drop in demand for US crude oil in 26 years, sending the price of oil down to $113 a barrel.

http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/business/7556215.stm

Bush Is the Worst Commander in Chief Ever

2

By Matthew Rothschild | Here’s the news flash from Wednesday’s New York Times: “Al Qaeda is more capable of attacking inside the United States than it was last year.”

That’s not my conclusion.

Or the conclusion of a Bush critic like Richard Clarke.

No, that’s the conclusion of the Bush Administration’s senior terrorism analyst, Ted Gistaro.

What a damning indictment!

Not only has Bush failed, for seven years now, to get Osama bin Laden.

He’s actually enabled bin Laden to regroup and become an increasing threat.

This alone makes Bush the worst commander in chief ever.

Let’s review.

He was warned that bin Laden was going to attack in the United States, and he did nothing.

He had bin Laden surrounded at Tora Bora, and then he outsourced the operation.

He diverted intelligence resources over to Iraq to go fulfill a fantasy there, thus enabling bin Laden to keep hiding.

And Bush warmly embraced Musharraf, who went easy on the Pakistani militants who are in league with bin Laden.

Some of those militants actually work with the ISI, Pakistan’s intelligence agency, and Bush is giving billions to Pakistan’s government.

This is the very definition of “criminal incompetence.”

South Africa Hearing Claims Elite Unit Controlled by CIA, MI5

0

iol | British intelligence organisation MI5 and the United States’ Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) are the masters of South Africa’s elite crime fighting unit, the Scorpions, a public hearing into their dissolution heard in Durban on Tuesday.

Sam Kikine, the head of the International Traditional and Medicine Research Council, accused these two organisations of controlling the Scorpions.

“Why have the Scorpions not investigated [chemical warfare expert] Wouter Basson and the CIA who have created this Aids? The Scorpions are working for MI5 and the CIA and not for South Africa,” he told the hearing at the Umlazi Indoor Sports Complex.

Kikine claimed that the Scorpions were loaded with apartheid era “special branch” operatives, who had also been responsible for the death of activist and lawyer Griffiths Mxenge, who was assassinated in 1981.

Kikine said the council was supporting the proposed legislation to replace the Directorate of Special Operations, known as the Scorpions, with a new division within the South African Police Service, known as the Directorate for Priority Crime Investigation.

The hearings earlier kicked off amid singing and toyi-toying amid a heavy police presence.

A crowd of about 80 Congress of South African Trade Unions (Cosatu) supporters had gathered outside the building before entering the complex singing.

Many in the crowd wore shirts bearing logos of Cosatu’s various member unions, while some wore shirts in support of African National Congress president Jacob Zuma.

At one stage the crowd broke into Zuma’s trademark “awulethu’ mshini wami” song, taunting local Democratic Alliance supporters who had also turned up for the hearing.

South African Communist Party (SACP) provincial secretary Themba Mthembu called for the inclusion of the Scorpions into the South African Police, because “integration would streamline and strengthen capacity in the fight against crime”.

He said the SACP agreed with most of the findings of the Khampepe Commission, with the exception of keeping the unit separate from the police.

The Democratic Alliance’s KwaZulu-Natal safety and security spokesperson Radley Keyes called for the retention of the unit, saying that it had achieved much.

He said that one hearing in the province was insufficient and questioned whether the parliamentarians would take heed of the representations.

Keyes pointed to “the futility” of public representations of Matatiele where, despite residents’ overwhelming support to remain in the province, the government had nevertheless supported the municipality’s inclusion in the Eastern Cape.

African Christian Democratic Party representative Cyril George described the Scorpions as “the sunlight that exposed crime”.

The South African Democratic Teachers Union secretary general Sipho “KK” Nkosi claimed that the Scorpions had been created by a political decision.

“Disbanding it requires a political decision. The Scorpions chose some prime cases because they were serving the interests of their own political masters,” he said.

He criticised the Scorpions for highlighting their successes in the media.

“Where they have not succeeded they have been mum to the media,” he said.

Parliament’s portfolio committees on justice and constitutional development, and safety and security were holding the hearings, which started on Monday and were expected to finish on Friday.

Members of the public have until August 20 to hand in their written submissions against the disbanding. – Sapa

Busting the Anthrax Myth

By Fred Burton and Scott Stewart of Stratfor.com | Dr. Jeffrey W. Runge, chief medical officer at the U.S. Department of Homeland Security, told a congressional subcommittee on July 22 that the risk of a large-scale biological attack on the nation is significant and that the U.S. government knows its terrorist enemies have sought to use biological agents as instruments of warfare. Runge also said that the United States believes that capability is within the terrorists’ reach.

Runge gave his testimony before a subcommittee on Emerging Threats, Cybersecurity, and Science and Technology that was holding a field hearing in Providence, R.I., to discuss the topic of “Emerging Biological Threats and Public Health Preparedness.”

During his testimony, Runge specifically pointed to al Qaeda as the most significant threat and testified that the United States had determined that the terrorist organization is seeking to develop and use a biological weapon to cause mass casualties in an attack. According to Runge, U.S. analysis indicates that anthrax is the most likely choice, and a successful single-city attack on an unprepared population could kill hundreds of thousands of citizens.

Later in his testimony, Runge remarked that many do not perceive the threat of bioterrorism to be as significant as that of a nuclear or conventional strike, even though such an attack could kill as many people as a nuclear detonation and have its own long-term environmental effects.

We must admit to being among those who do not perceive the threat of bioterrorism to be as significant as that posed by a nuclear strike. To be fair, it must be noted that we also do not see strikes using chemical or radiological weapons rising to the threshold of a true weapon of mass destruction either. The successful detonation of a nuclear weapon in an American city would be far more devastating than any of these other forms of attack.

In fact, based on the past history of nonstate actors conducting attacks using biological weapons, we remain skeptical that a nonstate actor could conduct a biological weapons strike capable of creating as many casualties as a large strike using conventional explosives – such as the October 2002 Bali bombings that resulted in 202 deaths or the March 2004 train bombings in Madrid that killed 191.

We do not disagree with Runge’s statements that actors such as al Qaeda have demonstrated an interest in biological weapons. There is ample evidence that al Qaeda has a rudimentary biological weapons capability. However, there is a huge chasm of capability that separates intent and a rudimentary biological weapons program from a biological weapons program that is capable of killing hundreds of thousands of people.

Misconceptions About Biological Weapons

There are many misconceptions involving biological weapons. The three most common are that they are easy to obtain, that they are easy to deploy effectively, and that, when used, they always cause massive casualties.

While it is certainly true that there are many different types of actors who can easily gain access to rudimentary biological agents, there are far fewer actors who can actually isolate virulent strains of the agents, weaponize them and then effectively employ these agents in a manner that will realistically pose a significant threat of causing mass casualties. While organisms such as anthrax are present in the environment and are not difficult to obtain, more highly virulent strains of these tend to be far more difficult to locate, isolate and replicate. Such efforts require highly skilled individuals and sophisticated laboratory equipment.

Even incredibly deadly biological substances such as ricin and botulinum toxin are difficult to use in mass attacks. This difficulty arises when one attempts to take a rudimentary biological substance and then convert it into a weaponized form – a form that is potent enough to be deadly and yet readily dispersed. Even if this weaponization hurdle can be overcome, once developed, the weaponized agent must then be integrated with a weapons system that can effectively take large quantities of the agent and evenly distribute it in lethal doses to the intended targets.

During the past several decades in the era of modern terrorism, biological weapons have been used very infrequently and with very little success. This fact alone serves to highlight the gap between the biological warfare misconceptions and reality. Militant groups desperately want to kill people and are constantly seeking new innovations that will allow them to kill larger numbers of people. Certainly if biological weapons were as easily obtained, as easily weaponized and as effective at producing mass casualties as commonly portrayed, militant groups would have used them far more frequently than they have.

Militant groups are generally adaptive and responsive to failure. If something works, they will use it. If it does not, they will seek more effective means of achieving their deadly goals. A good example of this was the rise and fall of the use of chlorine in militant attacks in Iraq.

Anthrax

As noted by Runge, the spore-forming bacterium Bacillus anthracis is readily available in nature and can be deadly if inhaled, if ingested or if it comes into contact with a person’s skin. What constitutes a deadly dose of inhalation anthrax has not been precisely quantified, but is estimated to be somewhere between 8,000 and 50,000 spores. One gram of weaponized anthrax, such as that contained in the letters mailed to U.S. Sens. Tom Daschle and Patrick Leahy in October 2001, can contain up to one trillion spores – enough to cause somewhere between 20 and 100 million deaths. The letters mailed to Daschle and Leahy reportedly contained about one gram each for a total estimated quantity of two grams of anthrax spores: enough to have theoretically killed between 40 and 200 million people. The U.S. Census Bureau estimates that the current population of the United States is 304.7 million. In a worst-case scenario, the letters mailed to Daschle and Leahy theoretically contained enough anthrax spores to kill nearly two-thirds of the U.S. population.

Yet, in spite of their incredibly deadly potential, those letters (along with an estimated five other anthrax letters mailed in a prior wave to media outlets such as the New York Post and the major television networks) killed only five people; another 22 victims were infected by the spores but recovered after receiving medical treatment. This difference between the theoretical number of fatal victims – hundreds of millions – and the actual number of victims – five – highlights the challenges in effectively distributing even a highly virulent and weaponized strain of an organism to a large number of potential victims.

To summarize: obtaining a biological agent is fairly simple. Isolating a virulent strain and then weaponizing that strain is somewhat more difficult. But the key to biological warfare – effectively distributing a weaponized agent to the intended target – is the really difficult part of the process. Anyone planning a biological attack against a large target such as a city needs to be concerned about a host of factors such as dilution, wind velocity and direction, particle size and weight, the susceptibility of the disease to ultraviolet light, heat, dryness or even rain. Small-scale localized attacks such as the 2001 anthrax letters or the 1984 salmonella attack undertaken by the Bhagwan Shri Rajneesh cult are far easier to commit.

It is also important to remember that anthrax is not some sort of untreatable super disease. While anthrax does form hardy spores that can remain inert for a period of time, the disease is not easily transmitted from person to person, and therefore is unlikely to create an epidemic outside of the area targeted by the attack. Anthrax infections can be treated by the use of readily available antibiotics. The spores’ incubation period also permits time for early treatment if the attack is noticed.

The deadliest known anthrax incident in recent years occurred in 1979 when an accidental release of aerosolized spores from a Soviet biological weapons facility in Sverdlovsk affected some 94 people – reportedly killing 68 of them. This facility was one of dozens of laboratories that were part of the Soviet Union’s massive and well-funded biological weapons program, one that employed thousands of the country’s brightest scientists. In fact, it was the largest biological weapons program in history.

Perhaps the largest attempt by a nonstate actor to cause mass casualties using anthrax was the series of attacks conducted in 1993 by the Japanese cult group Aum Shinrikyo in Tokyo.

In the late 1980s, Aum’s team of trained scientists spent millions of dollars to develop a series of state-of-the-art biological weapons research and production laboratories. The group experimented with botulinum toxin, anthrax, cholera and Q fever and even tried to acquire the Ebola virus. The group hoped to produce enough biological agent to trigger a global Armageddon. Its first attempts at unleashing mega-death on the world involved the use of botulinum toxin. In April 1990, the group used a fleet of three trucks equipped with aerosol sprayers to release liquid botulinum toxin on targets that included the Imperial Palace, the National Diet of Japan, the U.S. Embassy in Tokyo, two U.S. naval bases and the airport in Narita. In spite of the massive quantities of toxin released, there were no mass casualties, and, in fact, nobody outside of the cult was even aware the attacks had taken place.

When the botulinum operations failed to produce results, Aum’s scientists went back to the drawing board and retooled their biological weapons facilities to produce anthrax. By mid-1993, they were ready to launch attacks involving anthrax; between June and August of 1993, the group sprayed thousands of gallons of aerosolized liquid anthrax in Tokyo. This time, Aum not only employed its fleet of sprayer trucks but also used aerosol sprayers mounted on the roof of their headquarters to disperse a cloud of aerosolized anthrax over the city. Again, the attacks produced no results and were not even noticed. It was only after the group’s successful 1995 subway attacks using sarin nerve agent that a Japanese government investigation discovered that the 1990 and 1993 biological attacks had occurred.

Biological Weapons Production

Aum Shinrikyo’s team of highly trained scientists worked under ideal conditions in a first-world country with a virtually unlimited budget. They were able to travel the world in search of deadly organisms and even received technical advice from former Soviet scientists. The team worked in large, modern laboratory facilities to produce substantial quantities of biological weapons. They were able to operate these facilities inside industrial parks and openly order the large quantities of laboratory equipment they required. Yet, in spite of the millions of dollars the group spent on its biological weapons program – and the lack of any meaningful interference from the Japanese government – Aum still experienced problems in creating virulent biological agents and also found it difficult to dispense those agents effectively.

Today, al Qaeda finds itself operating in a very different environment than that experienced by Aum Shinrikyo in 1993. At that time, nobody was looking for Aum or its biological and chemical weapons program. By contrast, since the Sept. 11 attacks, the United States and its allies have actively pursued al Qaeda leaders and sought to dismantle and defang the organization. The United States and its allies have focused a considerable amount of resources in tracking and disassembling al Qaeda’s chemical and biological warfare efforts. The al Qaeda network has had millions of dollars of its assets seized in a number of countries, and it no longer has the safe haven of Afghanistan from which to operate. The chemical and biological facilities the group established in the 1990s in Afghanistan – such as the Deronta training camp, where cyanide and other toxins were used to kill dogs, and a crude anthrax production facility in Kandahar – have been found and destroyed by U.S. troops.

Operating in the badlands along the Pakistani-Afghan border, al Qaeda cannot easily build large modern factories capable of producing large quantities of agents or toxins. Such fixed facilities are expensive and consume a lot of resources. Even if al Qaeda had the spare capacity to invest in such facilities, the fixed nature of them means that they could be compromised and quickly destroyed by the United States.

If al Qaeda could somehow create and hide a fixed biological weapons facility in Pakistan’s Federally Administered Tribal Areas or North-West Frontier Province, it would still face the daunting task of transporting large quantities of biological agents from the Pakistani badlands to targets in the United States or Europe. Al Qaeda operatives certainly can create and transport small quantities of these compounds, but not enough to wreak the kind of massive damage it desires.

Al Qaeda’s lead chemical and biological weapons expert, Midhat Mursi al-Sayid Umar, also known as Abu Khabab al-Masri, was reportedly killed on July 28, 2008, by a U.S. missile strike on his home in Pakistan. Al-Sayid, who had a $5 million dollar bounty on his head, was initially reported to have been one of those killed in the January 2006 strike in Damadola. If he was indeed killed, his death should be another significant blow to the group’s biological warfare efforts.

Of course, we must recognize that the jihadist threat goes just beyond the al Qaeda core. As we have been writing for several years now, al Qaeda has undergone a metamorphosis from a smaller core group of professional operatives into an operational model that encourages independent grassroots jihadists to conduct attacks. The core al Qaeda group, through men like al-Sayid, has published manuals in hard copy and on the Internet that provide instructions on how to manufacture rudimentary biological weapons.

It is our belief that independent jihadist cells and lone-wolf jihadists will almost certainly attempt to brew up some of the recipes from the al Qaeda cookbook. There also exists a very real threat that a jihadist sympathizer could obtain a small quantity of deadly biological organisms by infiltrating a research facility.

This means that we likely will see some limited attempts at employing biological weapons. That does not mean, however, that such attacks will be large-scale or create mass casualties.

The Bottom Line

While there has been much consternation and alarm-raising over the potential for widespread proliferation of biological weapons and the possible use of such weapons on a massive scale, there are significant constraints on such designs. The current dearth of substantial biological weapons programs and arsenals by governments worldwide, and the even smaller number of cases in which systems were actually used, seems to belie – or at least bring into question – the intense concern about such programs.

While we would like to believe that countries such as the United States, the United Kingdom and Russia have halted their biological warfare programs for some noble ideological or humanitarian reason, we simply can’t. If biological weapons were in practice as effective as some would lead us to believe, these states would surely maintain stockpiles of them, just as they have maintained their nuclear weapons programs. Biological weapons programs were abandoned because they proved to be not as effective as advertised and because conventional munitions proved to provide more bang for the buck.

In some ways, the psychological fear of a “super weapon” – undetectable, microscopic, easily delivered and extremely deadly – shapes assessment of the threat, more so than an objective understanding of actual capability and intent (not to mention the extreme difficulties of ever creating some sort of a super bug). Conventional weapons systems, and unconventional tactics, continue to be the most cost-effective and proven methods of warfare, whether between state actors or between state and nonstate actors. Nuclear weapons have also been shown to have true weapons of mass destruction power.

To help keep the cost-benefit calculation of a biological warfare program in perspective, consider that Seung-Hui Cho, the man who committed the shooting at Virginia Tech, killed 32 people – more than six times as many as were killed by the 2001 anthrax letters. John Mohammed, the so-called “D.C. Sniper,” was able to cause a considerable amount of panic and kill twice as many people (10) by simply purchasing and using one assault rifle. Compare Mohammed’s effort and expenses to that of the Aum Shinrikyo anthrax program that took years of work by a huge team and millions of dollars to develop but infected no one.

Now, just because biological weapons are not all they are cracked up to be does not mean that efforts to undermine the biological warfare plans and efforts of militant groups such as al Qaeda should not continue or that programs to detect such agents or develop more effective treatments and vaccines should be halted. Even though an anthrax attack probably will not kill huge numbers of people, as we saw in the case of the anthrax letters, such an attack can be quite disruptive. Cleaning up after such an attack is expensive and takes considerable time and effort. Like a dirty bomb, an anthrax attack will more likely serve as a weapon of mass disruption and not a weapon of mass destruction.

Due to the disruption and the potential for some deaths as a result of an anthrax attack, the threat against the United States does remain a significant concern. However, the threat it represents is not as great as that of conventional attacks using firearms and explosives against soft targets, and it certainly does not rise anywhere near the level of a threat posed by a terrorist attack using a nuclear weapon.

Homeland security resources are very limited and have been shrinking as we move further from 9/11 and as other items begin to take precedence in the federal budget. This means that an array of different programs is being forced to scramble for an ever-shrinking piece of the funding pie. In such an environment, it is often a temptation to overstate the threat. Such overstatements are harmful because they can sometimes prevent a rational distribution of resources and prevent resources from being allocated to where they are needed most.

Credit Card Debt: 5 Ways to Dig Yourself Out

1

The Street |

How do you stop digging yourself deeper into debt? 

Americans carry a lot of debt, and it is easy for mounting debt to grow. Sometimes, it grows faster than you can pay it off, and that can be very stressful.

Here are five surefire strategies to help you help yourself:

1. Give yourself a ‘time out.’

Parents know the “time out” routine. You can do the same with your credit card. Vow to wait 48 hours before you buy anything. If you still must have it in 48 hours, then buy it — with cash. Don’t have the cash? Don’t buy it.

2. Stop using your credit cards.

Yes, this is the obvious one. If you’re in the habit of leaning into your credit cards, this can be tough.

Some ways that people have gone cold turkey:

  • Give your cards to a trusted friend to keep.
  • Start carrying cash when you go out, and do not take your cards with you.
  • Get professional help if you can’t stop using them…3. The $100 key rule.

    Actually, this can be the $50 or $25 rule, as well. Commit yourself to never spending more than X amount when you go to the store for something else.

    Say you go to the store to buy a new shirt for work. You estimate a new shirt will cost you $40. Do NOT leave the store with any additional purchases that add up to an additional $100 (or $50, or $25). Set your spending target amount BEFORE you go shopping. Do not change this magic number.

    Here’s the key: that’s $100 (or $50, or $25) you’re not spending in CASH. We’re assuming you’ve decided to listen to Rule 2. This rule helps keep your cash flow flowing — so you’ve got an extra $25, $50, or $100 to put toward your credit card payment.

  • 4. Delete your cookies!

    Those who prefer the twice-gratification of online shopping (once when you buy, another buzz when you get the item) … delete your browser cookies! These “helpful” cookies remember your credit card numbers. Delete them so you must dig out your credit card in order to purchase something (after your 48-hour time-out rule is observed, of course).

    To delete cookies using the Firefox browser, go to Tools > Clear Private Data… > check “cookies” and hit the “clear personal data” button. Browsers such as Internet Explorer and Mac Safari offer similar solutions.

    5. Count to five.

    If you can’t seem to wait 48 hours (and that should tell you something!), at least count to five. Tick off five good reasons why you must purchase this item. Hint: the reason “because I don’t have cash” is not acceptable. Count to five with all your cash purchases, too.

    Ask yourself whether you can get the item used, for free, or cheaper elsewhere. Also try asking yourself whether you’ll still want and use the item five weeks, five months or five years from now.

    Simply put: Look carefully at every purchase. You cannot dig yourself out of debt without curbing your spending habits.

    As many U.S. contractors as troops in Iraq

    0

    Army Times | The U.S. has about the same number of private contractors in Iraq as uniformed service members, a new congressional report says – a history-making ratio that presents problems in keeping track of all the workers and highlights the difficulties of supporting extended military operations without a larger force.

    The Congressional Budget Office, a nonpartisan analytical arm of Congress, issued a report Monday that provides the first detailed accounting of the number of civilian contractors working in the Iraq theater, often doing jobs that historically have been military responsibilities, such as administration and logistics.

    “The extent of DoD’s contracting is particularly evident during prolonged, large-scale operations – like those in Iraq – where there may not be enough military personnel available to provide logistics support,” says the report, “Contractors’ Support of U.S. Operations In Iraq.”

    Most of the attention and controversy has centered on the estimated 30,000 people hired by the State Department to provide private security – a mission traditionally the responsibility of U.S. military forces in combat zones.

    “Providing security for all personnel, including contractors, is an inescapable aspect of U.S. operations in Iraq because of the instability and violence in that country,” the report says.

    Under current policy, the military provides security for contractors deploying with a combat force or directly supporting the military’s mission, but nonmilitary agencies of the U.S. government and other contractors, like those involved in reconstruction, use private security.

    The presence of private security companies has caused some consternation in military circles because some private guards are earning up to $1,222 a day, compared to $160 to $190 earned in pay and benefits by a midgrade military member with similar skills.

    However, the report says private security is not necessarily more expensive because the guards don’t have to be paid when they are not being used, which would not be case if 30,000 more service members were to replace the security contractors in the Iraq theater.

    The military also would be expected to have enough troops so that they could rotate personnel in and out of the war zone. Private security companies often do pay employees between deployments, the report says.

    Using contractors to support military operations is not new, the report says, although the current one-to-one ratio that has 190,000 private contractors in the Iraq theater “is at least 2.5 times higher than … any other major U.S. conflict.”

    However, the ratio is similar to the heavy use of contractors during U.S. military operations in the Balkans in the 1990s, the report says.

    Auditors Question Blackwater Contracts: But Is It Really $107 Million?

    1

    By Elizabeth Olson | Blackwater Worldwide, the contractor whose provision of private security in Iraq has been under scrutiny, and its affiliated companies may have improperly obtained more than $100 million in contracts meant for small businesses, according to federal auditors.

    A report by the Small Business Administration’s inspector general, issued in July, found that Blackwater and its affiliates, including Presidential Airways, won 39 contracts in the fiscal years 2005, 2006 and 2007 despite indications that the companies employed more than the number specified by the U.S. government. In some cases, the report said, the companies also had higher revenues than allowed for a small business.

    Blackwater is a major provider of security for American diplomats in Iraq and was the subject of a congressional hearing after a Blackwater shooting in Baghdad last September left 17 Iraqis dead.

    Blackwater and Presidential Airways, both based in Moyock, North Carolina, and owned by EP Investments, of McLean, Virginia, won 31 contracts set aside for companies with revenues of $6.5 million or less, and one additional contract for a company with no more than $750,000 in annual revenues. Those contracts, in all, were valued at $2.1 million.

    In addition, Presidential Airways, which carries both passengers and cargo, won some $107 million in contracts reserved for companies whose revenues were no more than $25.5 million or had fewer than 1,500 employees.

    Although most of the challenged contracts were awarded by the Defense Department, the initial determinations of whether the companies qualified as small businesses were made by the Small Business Administration.

    The companies could have skirted small business size criteria because they counted many workers as independent contractors, not employees, which allowed them to exceed the 1,500-employee ceiling set in some contracts, according to the auditors.

    The inspector general’s office found that Blackwater and the other companies’ sizes and revenues may have “involved misrepresentations,” and suggested that the agency may want to “determine whether it is appropriate for Blackwater affiliates to continue receiving small business set-aside contracts.”

    When rival firms had challenged the 2006 contract for helicopter services to Presidential Airways on grounds that the company was too large, the airline provided data that 28 Blackwater-affiliated entities had a total of only 715 employees.

    But the inspector general found that Blackwater had hired more than a thousand independent contractors and treated them as if they were regular employees, with scheduled shifts, for example, which called the size determination into question. The report also said the Small Business Administration should have “attempted to reconcile discrepancies” in the data Blackwater provided.

    Anne Tyrrell, Blackwater’s spokeswoman, called the report “unnecessarily speculative,” and said the “classification of security personnel as independent contractors is reasonable, correct and legally protected.” She said that “all contracted personnel serving on government contracts in Iraq for Blackwater work under the direct operational control of the United States government.”

    The report, which was requested last March by Representative Henry A. Waxman, Democrat of California who heads the House Oversight and Government Reform Committee, asked the inspectors general of the Defense Department and other contracting agencies to “review these contracts to determine whether misrepresentations were made” to obtain them.

    In a letter to Waxman, the SBA said it had relied on the figures provided by Blackwater and Presidential Airways.

    ###

    ~Chip’s note: The SBA IG report states that these small business contracts “could have involved potential misrepresentations by Blackwater.” The SBA IG report states that Blackwater “obtained a total of33 contracts during Fiscal Years 2005 through 2007, totaling $2,188,620, which may have involved misrepresentations to obtain the contract.” The report also finds that “it is possible that misrepresentations took place” on the remaining six contracts, totaling $107,311,356.

    Most Corporations Don’t Pay Income Taxes

    0

    By Richard Rubin | Most corporations, including the vast majority of foreign companies doing business in the United States, pay no income taxes, according to a Government Accountability Office report released Tuesday.

    During the eight-year period covered by the report, 72 percent of foreign-owned corporations went at least one year without owing taxes, and the same was true for 55 percent of domestic corporations.

    Small companies were much more likely to pay no taxes than larger companies. Still, more than 3,500 large domestic corporations – with more than $250 million in assets or $50 million in gross receipts – did not pay taxes in 2005.

    The report said about 80 percent of the companies studied paid no taxes because they didn’t generate any profit after expenses. Money-losing companies can legitimately owe no tax, and others can use provisions of the tax code to lower or eliminate their liability.

    But the lawmakers who sought the data seized on the report as proof of corporate gamesmanship.

    “It’s shameful that so many corporations make big profits and pay nothing to support our country,” said Byron L. Dorgan , D-N.D., who requested the report along with Carl Levin , D-Mich. “The tax system that allows this wholesale tax avoidance is an embarrassment and unfair to hardworking Americans who pay their fair share of taxes. We need to plug these tax loopholes and put these corporations back on the tax rolls.”

    The report covered the period from 1998 through 2005. During that time, corporate income taxes as a share of gross domestic product dipped, from 2.2 percent in 1998 to 1.2 percent in 2003, the lowest share since 1983. But receipts jumped after that, hitting 2.7 percent in 2006 and 2007, according to the Office of Management and Budget. That was the highest share since the late 1970s.

    The GAO report also found that foreign-owned corporations were somewhat more likely to report no income than domestic corporations. There are several possible reasons for that. Foreign corporations may be younger, and startups are more likely to have no net income after expenses. They may also be in industries with lower profit margins.

    Another possibility could be the use of transfer pricing, which companies use to account for transactions between subsidiaries in different countries. Creative, rule-stretching use of transfer pricing can allow companies to push their profits into lower-taxed jurisdictions. The report does not attempt to examine whether illegal transfer-pricing caused the difference between foreign and domestic companies.

    But companies looking for lower-taxed jurisdictions often take profits out of the United States. The country’s 35 percent top rate on corporate income is among the highest in the industrialized world.

    Many tax experts and lawmakers from both parties, including Ways and Means Chairman Charles B. Rangel , D-N.Y., and presidential candidate Sen. John McCain , R-Ariz., have called for lowering the corporate tax rate. Lawmakers are likely to differ on what revenue-raising measures, if any, should be paired with a corporate rate cut.

    In addition, Levin, Finance Chairman Max Baucus , D-Mont., and other senators have been trying to close the “tax gap,” the difference between taxes owed and taxes collected.

    In a statement, Baucus said, “I’m committed to finding ways to improve compliance and reduce taxpayer burden so that we begin to bridge the tax gap, which accounts for $345 billion in legally owed but uncollected federal revenues each year.”

    He said the GAO report “shows yet again the need for full-fledged [tax] reform next year….”

    “We are constantly reviewing the tax code to find ways to crack down on those who are trying to avoid paying their fair share, without placing undue compliance or reporting burdens on honest taxpayers. As part of this on-going effort, we are reviewing the GAO report to see what it might suggest about where to target tax gap efforts,” Baucus said.

    Bush administration proposes major cut to endangered species protections

    0

    By Naomi Spencer | With an eye to the approaching elections, the Bush administration has drafted proposed changes to the enforcement of the Endangered Species Act (ESA) that would take effect within 30 days and would not require the approval of Congress.

    Once enacted, the new rules would essentially cut out the role of government scientists at the Fish and Wildlife Service and the National Marine Fisheries Service in reviewing the threats to endangered wildlife by dam, highway, mining, drilling and other projects. Instead, political appointees in various federal agencies responsible for overseeing such construction and extraction projects would be empowered to gauge environmental impacts.

    The proposal is yet another effort by the Bush administration to dismantle environmental protections that remain as impediments to big business. It is also an undisguised attempt to negate the most modest acknowledgment of the problem of global warming.

    Under the proposed rules, federal agencies would not be required to produce any estimate of the consequences of projects’ contributions to greenhouse gas emissions.

    More significantly, the new rules would nullify the recent classification of the polar bear as a threatened species because of the melting of the polar ice cap–attributed with virtual unanimity to global warming, caused by greenhouse gas emissions. Among the largest emitters of greenhouse gases are power plants and other large-scale industrial operations.

    US government data suggests that two-thirds of the polar bear population will be lost by 2050 due to ice loss. By classifying the polar bear as endangered, the federal government was obligated to take formal, if minimal, steps to prevent the destruction of the animal’s habitat.

    In a call with reporters Monday, Interior Secretary Dirk Kempthorne sought to portray the new proposal as a “narrow regulatory change” that “will provide clarity and certainty to the consultation process under the Endangered Species Act.”

    It is clear, however, that the express purpose of the rule is to weaken ESA protections. According to a report Tuesday by the Washington Post, “In a statement yesterday, the Interior Department declared that even if a federal action such as the permitting of a power plant would lead to increased greenhouse gas emissions, the decision would not trigger a federal review ‘because it is not possible to link the emissions to impacts on specific listed species such as polar bears.’”

    There is little doubt that the ESA proposal originates from the highest levels of the Bush administration. According to the Associated Press, which obtained a copy of the draft, the proposal is expected to be formally announced in the next few days by the Commerce Department and the Department of the Interior–the decisions of which vice-president Dick Cheney is intimately involved.

    Last year, Cheney came under Congressional investigation for interference with ESA enforcement in California and Oregon after promoting a water plan favorable to the ranching industry. The business-tailored plan resulted in the deaths of tens of thousands of threatened salmon in the Klamath River.

    The Department of Homeland Security has also violated the ESA in its ongoing border wall construction along the US-Mexico border. DHS secretary Michael Chertoff recently invoked his official powers to waive environmental regulations over the department’s activities.

    The Bush administration’s continual attacks on environmental protections flow from its role as the representative of the US ruling elite in a period of capitalist decline. Whatever gets in the way of the interests of big business must be pushed aside, be that obstacle scientific integrity, the federal regulatory framework, public health–or ultimately environmental viability and human life.

    Where Are the Weapons of Mass Destruction?

    0

    Truthdig | In the past two decades I have had the opportunity to participate in certain experiences pertaining to my work that fall into the category of “no one will ever believe this.” I usually file these away, calling on them only when events transpire that breathe new life into these extraordinary memories. Ron Suskind, a noted and accomplished journalist, has written a new book, “The Way of the World: A Story of Truth and Hope in an Age of Extremism,” in which he claims that the “White House had concocted a fake letter from Habbush [Tahir Jalil Habbush, the director of the Mukhabarat], to Saddam [Hussein], backdated to July 1, 2001.” According to Suskind, the letter said that “9/11 ringleader Mohammad Atta had actually trained for his mission in Iraq–thus showing, finally, that there was an operational link between Saddam and al Qaeda, something the Vice President’s Office had been pressing CIA to prove since 9/11 as a justification to invade Iraq.”

    This is an extraordinary charge, which both the White House and the CIA vehemently deny. Suskind outlines a scenario which dates to the summer and fall of 2003, troubled times for the Bush administration as its case for invading Iraq was unraveling. I cannot independently confirm Suskind’s findings, but I, too, heard a similar story, from a source I trust implicitly. In my former line of work, intelligence, it was understood that establishing patterns of behavior was important. Past patterns of behavior tend to repeat themselves, and are thus of interest when assessing a set of seemingly separate circumstances around the same source. Of course, given the nature of the story line, it is better if I introduce this information within its proper context.

    In the summer of 2003 I was approached by Harper’s Magazine to do a story on the work of the Iraq Survey Group (ISG), a CIA-sponsored operation investigating Saddam’s weapons-of-mass-destruction programs in the aftermath of the invasion and occupation of Iraq. David Kay, a former International Atomic Energy Agency inspector who served briefly in Iraq in 1991 and 1992, was at that time the head of the ISG. By October 2003 the group had prepared a so-called interim report, which claimed to have eyewitness evidence of Iraqi WMD-related activities prior to the invasion in March. The key to the ISG’s interim report was the testimony of “cooperative sources,” Iraqis of unstated pedigree purportedly providing the ISG with unverifiable information. With one exception–an Iraqi nuclear scientist who had been killed by coalition forces–David Kay failed to provide the name or WMD association of any of the sources he used for his report, making any effort to verify their assertions impossible. Many of the senior Iraqis who had openly contradicted Kay’s report were, and still are to this day, muzzled behind the walls of an American prison in Baghdad. But there was another group of Iraqis, the former scientists and technicians involved in Iraq’s WMD programs who were known to have been interviewed by the ISG, and who were released back into Iraqi society. These scientists held the key to deciphering the vague pronouncements of the ISG interim report, and could help to distinguish between fact and fiction.

    Many of these scientists remained intimidated by their ISG experience, which often involved lengthy imprisonment and harsh interrogation. Loath to run afoul of their American occupiers, and tethered financially to a monthly stipend designed to keep them from exporting their WMD know-how out of Iraq (and, it has been suggested, from talking too freely with the media), these Iraqi scientists possessed a wealth of data which was difficult to tap into. In my own effort to research the veracity of David Kay’s assertions, I made use of my connections within the community of former Iraqi WMD scientists to try to gain access to what they knew. One in particular, who, because of ongoing security concerns, will be identified only as Mohammed, worked to facilitate my visit, arranging for meetings with Iraqis who possessed firsthand knowledge about not only the past WMD programs but also the ongoing efforts of the ISG.

    “You are welcome to Baghdad,” Mohammed wrote me in mid-October 2003, after I had informed him of my intent to travel there and what my purpose was. “You can have my full support.” After a back-and-forth exchange of e-mails with Mohammed on the subject of my visit, I finalized my agenda and reconfirmed the interviews I wanted arranged. I followed my e-mail to Mohammed on Nov. 5 with a detailed communication to the Coalition Provisional Authority, outlining both my proposed schedule in Iraq and requests for interviews with CPA and ISG officials and tours of related facilities.

    My schedule had me departing the United States two days later. That morning, I did one final check of my e-mail and found a disturbing communication from Mohammed. In it, he reiterated how dangerous the situation had become in Baghdad. But he said more: “I understand that there are some people who wish to bury any new facts concerning the subject of WMD in Iraq. They are ready to liquidate any person or group who ventures into this subject.” Iraqi officials who had been involved with WMD, Mohammed said, “ … are not ready to give interviews because that endangers their life. It would endanger your life as well. I am serious in my warning,” he wrote. “Nobody can guarantee your life. Nor the fate of the material you will be collecting in Baghdad.”

    “I request that you adjourn your scheduled trip to Baghdad,” Mohammed pleaded. “If you decide to continue with your intention, then I am very sorry to tell you that taking the overall environment in my country I am not able to support your mission. The main reason would be to preserve my life during or after it is concluded.”

    One does not view such a communication lightly. I immediately contacted Lewis Lapham at Harper’s Magazine, as well as some trusted colleagues with experience in journalism and intelligence affairs. All agreed that in this case, discretion was the better part of valor. My trip to Baghdad was called off, but not the pursuit of the fate of Iraq’s WMD. The journey of discovery had simply been re-routed, and instead of going to Mohammed, I brought Mohammed to me. Mohammed made his way to Amman, Jordan, where we met over a period of five days in December 2003 to discuss Iraq’s past proscribed weapons programs. Before we could move forward on that complex topic, however, I needed to clear up the canceled Baghdad trip and, in particular, Mohammed’s e-mail regarding a threat to his, and my, life.

    “This was very real,” Mohammed said. “I had made several important contacts in regards to your trip.” I asked him to elaborate. “As you know, the situation inside Iraq is very dangerous and confused, and many people were hesitant to meet with you.” Who were they afraid of? “The Americans,” he said. “They were afraid of what the Americans might do if it was found out that they had met with you.”

    One of the contacts Mohammed had arranged for me to meet with while in Baghdad was a former official in the Iraqi Mukhabarat, the intelligence arm of Saddam Hussein’s regime, who was intimately familiar with that organization’s surveillance of U.N. weapons inspectors, both in Iraq and in New York. “The Mukhabarat never went away,” Mohammed said. “They just disappeared into the shadows. They are still very much a presence in Baghdad and Iraq.”

    Mohammed had passed on my proposed schedule to the Mukhabarat official, who told Mohammed he “would check with his sources” to see if my visit was feasible or not. On the evening of Dec. 5, 2003, the Mukhabarat agent appeared at Mohammed’s home. “You must cancel the visit,” he told Mohammed. “Mr. Ritter’s life is at risk if he comes here, as well as the life of any Iraqi he meets with.”

    The Mukhabarat had been preparing for the American occupation of Iraq for months before the initiation of hostilities in March 2003. By January 2003, orders had been issued to the various Mukhabarat departments to begin preparations for an American occupation. Mukhabarat personnel were instructed that in the case of the occupation of Iraq by the United States, they were to return to their homes and await further instructions. Those agents who were able to do so were encouraged to join the ranks of the various opposition parties that were expected to follow the Americans into Iraq, and to actively cooperate with the American occupiers. In this manner, the Mukhabarat was able to establish a network of informers inside the very ranks of the organizations that were seeking its demise. According to Mohammed, the Mukhabarat had been very successful in this regard. And it was this success, he said, that led to the warning from the Mukhabarat about the threat to my life, and the lives of those who cooperated with me, if I were to go to Baghdad.

    According to Mohammed, Baghdad in late 2003 crawled with assassination squads. In addition to simple criminal gangs interested in extortion and murder, there were squads of killers who worked on behalf of the various political forces vying for power inside occupied Baghdad, settling old scores and eliminating potential competitors. One of the major themes among those positioning themselves for a leading role in post-Saddam Iraq was de-Baathification, a policy of identifying and neutralizing the members of the former ruling party, which was associated with the most horrific abuses of the regime of Saddam Hussein. De-Baathification was a primary objective of the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA), and major policy initiatives were passed to remove the Baathists from positions of power and influence. Opponents of the regime of Saddam Hussein were only too willing to aid and assist the CPA in its crusade against the Baathists, using their own networks of informants to locate Baathist members and sympathizers for the American occupiers. Given the abuses of power that occurred in Iraq under the Baathists, however, oftentimes the members of the newly empowered opposition took matters into their own hands, meting out street justice in the form of targeted assassination.

    Among the more effective, and brutal, of these politically motivated assassination units were those run by SCIRI (the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq) and its armed militia, the Badr Brigade. Their efforts to exterminate Baath Party remnants still loyal to Saddam Hussein, or those who were accused of committing crimes against SCIRI or its sympathizers, attracted the attention of the “black” side of the CPA-run de-Baathification efforts –covert operations run by the CIA and elite Special Operations units of the United States military. An abortive effort to formally acknowledge the role played by the various anti-Saddam militias in confronting the Baath holdouts offered a glimpse into what is an unspoken element of the U.S. policy regarding de-Baathification –let the Iraqis do the dirty work. And the Badr militia stood out among those willing and able to take the fight to the Baathist holdouts. For that reason, the Badr militia not only attracted the attention of the CPA but also the Mukhabarat, which, according to Mohammed, had infiltrated the SCIRI-run militia.

    Mohammed’s Mukhabarat connection had disturbing news. According to the source, the CPA had passed to the Badr militia my name, the dates of my planned trip to Baghdad, my proposed agenda and a list of Iraqis I had planned to meet with, including Mohammed. This information was in turn passed on to the unit in the Badr militia which specialized in targeted assassination in Baghdad. “Mr. Ritter cannot come to Iraq,” the Mukhabarat agent told Mohammed. “If he does, his life is at risk, your life is at risk, and everyone associated with his visit’s life will be at risk.” And so Mohammed sent his e-mailed warning to me.

    On the surface, Mohammed’s story was too much to believe. I was willing to accept any account that held that specific Iraqi groups, such as Ahmed Chalabi’s Iraqi National Congress, were opposed to my visit to the extent that they might issue threats in an effort to intimidate me from coming. But the concept of the United States government being involved boggled the mind.

    The problem with disbelieving was there were too many pieces of this puzzle that seemed to fit together. The timing of the threat coincided too neatly with my communication with the CPA about my plans while in Baghdad. People in the CPA certainly had the information if they decided to pass it on–I had telephoned and sent faxes and e-mails providing my dates of travel, where I wanted to stay and how I wanted to interact with the CPA. The ability of the U.S. intelligence community to monitor my e-mail communications with Mohammed was a given. And then there was the disturbing fact that, since the time that I had notified the CPA of my intent to travel to Iraq to write this story for Harper’s Magazine, I had been red-flagged by the United States government. On both occasions that I left the United States on assignment for Harper’s Magazine (once to London and Prague, the other to Amman), I had been pulled aside by U.S. immigration and customs officials upon my return for special treatment.

    Apparently taking their cues from computer instructions, the customs officials involved were very interested in where I had traveled, whom I had met with, and any documents I might be carrying. When I asked a senior customs official in Washington’s Dulles Airport what the problem was, he simply shrugged. “I guess it’s just because you are who you are,” he said. A customs officer in New York’s JFK Airport, after looking at instructions sent to him on his computer, looked up to me. “You used to work for the U.S. government?” he asked. Prompted again by the computer, he called over a supervisor, who was very interested in documents I had in my possession concerning Iraq’s weapons-of-mass-destruction programs. In both cases, the only thing that seemed to save me from an even greater intrusion into my personal belongings was a letter from Lewis Lapham identifying me with Harper’s Magazine. The letter was carefully examined by customs officers and photocopied, and became the apparent subject of intense exchanges between the customs officers and whoever was on the other end of the computer. In both cases, my First Amendment rights prevailed over the concerns of the U.S. government, and I was allowed to proceed with my notes intact.

    Mohammed’s dire warning aside, it seemed clear that my new assignment for Harper’s Magazine had caught the attention of someone in the U.S. government. What about my probing into the weapons-of-mass-destruction issue could prompt such extreme measures? What would make the U.S. government so afraid as to justify its attempt to intimidate a journalist–even an activist journalist such as myself–from carrying out his work? As a former weapons inspector with the United Nations, I was intimately familiar with the fraudulent case made by the Bush administration before the 2003 invasion, and had quite publicly challenged the president’s allegations. I do not believe the Bush administration would undertake any activity, directly or indirectly, beyond simply harassing me, because of my stance on pre-war WMD claims. However, knowing that I was going to Baghdad to meet with Iraqis who had firsthand knowledge of what had transpired since the invasion was another matter. What could I have learned that troubled them so? I will relay the story as I received it from Mohammed.

    On a bright morning one day in late June 2003 Mohammed waited patiently on the side of a street in the Jadariyah district of Baghdad. As a former official in the ousted regime of Saddam Hussein, he had knowledge of programs and activities of interest to the Americans who now occupied the palaces of the former Iraqi president; these programs and activities included but were not limited to weapons of mass destruction. Mohammed had been summoned to a meeting with a special intelligence cell that reported not to David Kay’s Iraq Survey Group, but instead directly to the Office of the Secretary of Defense, Donald Rumsfeld. Shortly before 9 in the morning, a small convoy consisting of three unmarked Toyota Land Cruisers pulled up alongside Mohammed. Seated in the front passenger seat of the lead vehicle was a short, stocky blond woman named Stacey. One might not have guessed from her plain khaki cargo pants and simple white T-shirt that she was a lieutenant commander in the United States Navy. Stacey motioned for Mohammed to enter the vehicle, and the small convoy sped off.

    Crossing the 14th of July Bridge, the convoy turned right, into the grounds of the Republican Palace. Through gates once manned by the most elite forces of the regime of Saddam Hussein, the Special Republican Guard, the small convoy now negotiated checkpoints manned by the soldiers of Iraq’s new master, the United States. The Land Cruisers snaked past the main palace building itself, where four large bronze heads of Saddam sporting a Moghul helmet stared impassively above them (these statues were later removed under the orders of the then-head of the CPA, Paul Bremer). The SUVs moved north toward the far end of the former palace complex, now known as the Green Zone. In front of the former offices of the Iraqi National Security Committee, the convoy turned right, cutting through some administrative buildings before emerging on an embankment road running alongside the Tigris River. Heading south, the three vehicles came upon a villa complex surrounded by small decorative ponds, each pond connected with a small footbridge. On each island was an open barbecue pit, complete with accompanying stack of firewood, of the type favored by the former Iraqi president. Disembarking from the Land Cruiser, Stacey led Mohammed to the main villa, where they were ushered in by security personnel wearing similar nondescript clothing.

    Seated on a couch in the middle of the elaborately furnished villa was a small, thin woman in her late 30s with short blond hair who introduced herself as Carol. On the table before the couch were plates full of sweets and fruit slices, imported from Kuwait, which Carol invited Mohammed to taste. Stacey joined them, and soon she and Carol began questioning Mohammed. About five minutes into the session, the two women were joined by a third person, an Army lieutenant colonel who introduced himself as Dave. Dave was dressed in the same khaki trousers as Stacey and Carol, but sported a gray T-shirt emblazoned with the seal of the United States and the words “U.S. Embassy Kuwait.” A short, athletic-looking man with gray hair, Dave quickly took over the proceedings, with Carol and Stacey taking notes. For four hours Dave questioned Mohammed about various matters dealing with the Iraqi’s former work.

    The final line of questioning focused on weapons of mass destruction. Dave was on his feet, pacing before Mohammed, before turning to him and asking straight out, “Where are the weapons of mass destruction?” Mohammed, who had intimate knowledge of certain aspects of the Iraqi WMD effort, replied straight back: “There are no WMD in Iraq.”

    Dave continued pacing back and forth in front of Mohammed. “My president,” he said, “is in trouble. Can you help him?”

    Mohammed was taken aback by the question. “Excuse me?” he asked. “Could you repeat yourself?”

    Dave sat down next to the Iraqi. “George Bush is in trouble. Our people did not find any WMD in Iraq. Can you help us?”

    Mohammed looked back at Dave. “How?”

    “Can we prepare something for that? We could bring in some nuclear material from the former Soviet Union, and pretend they are Iraqi.”

    Mohammed, stunned by the unexpected nature of the request, indicated that such a ploy could be easily uncovered by forensic examination of the evidence by outside experts, such as UNSCOM (the United Nations Special Commission) or the IAEA, who would undoubtedly be called in to verify such a finding. Dave sat in silence for a few moments, before springing to his feet. “I have to leave for a meeting,” he said. “Stacey will show you out.”

    Mohammed was to meet again with Dave, Stacey and Carol in the weeks that followed. The subject of WMD, Iraqi or otherwise, was never again broached by Dave or anyone else in his team.

    In my extensive dealings with him, Mohammed has never lied to me or exaggerated about events he was personally involved in. His story establishes a pattern of behavior which shows how the Bush administration, especially when operating in the form of small, ideologically motivated teams functioning outside the norms and conventions of the mainstream, was able to consider (in Mohammed’s case) manufacturing data and circumstances to bolster its false case for invading Iraq, and (per author Ron Suskind) actually manufacture such data and circumstances. I trust Mohammed. And so I am willing to believe Suskind and his sources about similar cases of fraud, this time in the form of the CIA’s manufactured Mukhabarat document.

    The question is, what is Congress doing about this? At what point in time will it become clear that a crime against America has been committed, not by any foreign terrorist group, but rather the highest officials in the land, those entrusted with safeguarding the Constitution? If the rule of law is to have any meaning today, Congress has no choice but to institute proceedings mandated by the Constitution against those high officials who have committed high crimes and misdemeanors against the American people. Far from stating that impeachment is off the table, Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi rightfully has no option but to instruct the House of Representatives to initiate investigations into the crime of fraud and other related obstructions of government undertaken by the administration of President George W. Bush. And if these investigations confirm that such crimes have indeed occurred, she must, as a servant of the Constitution, undertake impeachment proceedings. That Bush is a lame-duck president, and his time in office is short, is no excuse for failure to defend the rule of law to its fullest.

    Scott Ritter is a former Marine Corps intelligence specialist and was a chief weapons inspector for the United Nations in Iraq. He is the author of many books, including “Iraq Confidential: The Untold Story of the Intelligence Conspiracy to Undermine the UN and Overthrow Saddam Hussein” and “Target Iran: The Truth About the White House’s Plans for Regime Change.”

    Copyright © 2008 Truthdig, L.L.C. All rights reserved.

    Georgia Tries out the Bush War Doctrine, Loses Badly

    9

    By Gary Brecher |

    There are two basic facts to keep in mind about the smokin’ little war in Ossetia:

    1. The Georgians started it.

    2. They lost.

    If you want to get all serious and actually study up on Ossetia, North and South, and Georgia and the whole eternal gang war that they call the Caucasus, you can check out a column I did on that school-hostage splatter in Beslan, North Ossetia, a few years back.

    South Ossetia is a little apple-shaped blob dangling from Russian territory down into Georgia, and most of it has been under control of South Ossetian irregulars backed by Russian “peacekeepers” for the last few years.

    The Georgians didn’t like that. You don’t give up territory in that part of the world, ever. The Georgians have always been fierce people, good fighters, not the forgiving type. In fact, I can’t resist a little bit of history here: remember when the Mongols wiped out Baghdad in 1258, the biggest slaughter in any of their conquests? Well, the most enthusiastic choppers and burners in the whole massacre were the Georgian Christian troops in Hulagu Khan’s army. They wore out their hacking arms on those Baghdadi civilians. Nobody knows how many people were killed, but it was at least 200,000 — a pretty big number in the days before antibiotics made life cheap.

    So: hard people on every side in that part of the world. No quarter asked or given. No good guys. Especially not the Georgians. They have a rep as good people, one on one, but you don’t want to mess with them, and you especially don’t want to try to take land from them.

    The Georgians bided their time, then went on the offensive, Caucasian style, by pretending to make peace and all the time planning a sneak attack on South Ossetia. They just signed a treaty granting autonomy to South Ossetia this week, and then they attacked. Georgian MLRS units barraged Tskhinvali, the capital city of South Ossetia; Georgian troops swarmed over Ossetian roadblocks; and all in all, it was a great, whiz-bang start, but like Petraeus asked about Iraq way back in 2003, what’s the ending to this story? As in: How do you invade territory that the Russians have staked out for protection without thinking about how they’ll react?

    Georgian President Mikheil Saakashvili just didn’t think it through. One reason he overplayed his hand is that he got lucky the last time he had to deal with a breakaway region: Ajara, a tiny little strip of Black Sea coast in southern Georgia. It declared itself an “autonomous” republic, preserving its sacred basket-weaving traditions or whatever. You just have to accept that people in the Caucasus are insane that way; they’d die to keep from saying hello to the people over the next hill, and they’re never going to change. The Ajarans aren’t even ethnically different from Georgians; they’re Georgian too. But they claim difference by being Muslims. And being different means they have to have their own Lego parliament and Tonka-Toy army and all the rest of that crap, and their leader, a wack job named Abashidze, volunteered them to fight to the death for their independence. Except he was such a nut, and so corrupt, and the Ajarans were so similar to the Georgians, and their little “country” was so tiny and ridiculous, that for once sanity prevailed and the Ajarans refused to fight, let themselves get reabsorbed by that Colossus to the North, mighty Georgia.

    Well, like I’ve said before, there’s nothing as dangerous as victory. Makes people crazy. Saakashvili started thinking he could gobble up any secessionist region — like, say, South Ossetia. But there are big differences he was forgetting — like the fact that South Ossetia isn’t Georgian, has a border with Russia, and is linked up with North Ossetia just across that border. The road from Russia to South Ossetia is pretty fragile as a line of supply; it goes through the Roki Tunnel, a mountain tunnel at an altitude of 10,000 feet. I have to wonder why the Georgian air force — and it’s a good one by all accounts — didn’t have as its first mission in the war the total zapping of the South Ossetian exit of that tunnel. Or if you don’t trust the flyboys, send in your special forces with a few backpacks full of explosives. There are a lot of ways to cripple a tunnel. Hell, do it low-tech: Drive a fuel truck in there, with a car following, jackknife the truck halfway through with a remote control or timing fuse — truck driver gets out and strolls to the car, one fast U-turn and you’re out and back in Georgia, just in time to see a ball of flame erupt from the tunnel exit. And rebuilding a tunnel way up in the mountains is not an easy or a fast job. Sure, the Russians could resupply by air, but that’s a much, much tougher job and would at least slow down the inevitable. Weird, then, that as far as I know the Georgians didn’t even try to blast that tunnel. I don’t go in for this kind of long-distance micromanaging of warfare, because there’s usually a good reason on the ground for tactical decisions; it’s the strategic decisions that are really crazy most of the time. But this one I just don’t get.

    Most likely the Georgians just thought the Russians wouldn’t react. They were doing something they learned from Bush and Cheney: sticking to best-case scenarios, positive thinking. The Georgian plan was classic shock and awe with no hard, grown-up thinking about the long term. Their shiny new army would go in, zap the South Ossetians while they were on a peace hangover (the worst kind), and then, uh, they’d be welcomed as liberators? Sure, just like we were in Iraq. Man, you pay a price for believing in Bush. The Georgians did. They thought he’d help. And I just saw the little creep on TV, sitting in the stands watching the U.S.-China basketball game. I didn’t even recognize Bush at first; I just wondered why they kept doing close-ups of this guy who looked like Hank Hill’s legless dad up in the stands. Then they said it was the prez. They talk about people “growing in office”; well, he shrunk.

    And the more he shrinks, the more you pay for believing in him. The Georgians were naive because they were so happy to get out from the Soviets, the Russians’ old enemy, the United States, must be paradise. So they did their apple-polishing best to be the perfect, obedient little ally. Then we’d let them into NATO and carpet-bomb them with SUVs and iPods.

    Their part of the deal was simple: They sent troops to Iraq. First a contingent of 850, then, surprisingly, 2,000 men. When you consider the population of Georgia is less than 5 million, that’s a lot of troops. In fact, Georgia is the third-biggest contributor to the “Coalition of the Willing,” after the United States and Britain.

    You might be thinking, Wow, not a good time to have so many of your best troops in Iraq, huh? Well, that’s true, and it goes for a lot of countries — like us, for instance — but at least we’re not facing a Russian invasion. The Georgians are so panicked they just announced they’re sending half their Iraqi force home, and could the USAF please give them a lift?

    We’ll probably give them a ride, but that’s about all we can do. We’ve already done plenty, not because we love Georgians but to counterbalance the Russian influence down where the new oil pipeline is staked out. The biggest American aid project was the GTEP, “Georgia Train and Equip” project ($64 million). It featured 200 Special Forces instructors teaching fine Georgia boys all the lessons the U.S. Army has learned recently. Now here’s the joke. We were stressing counterinsurgency skills: small-unit cohesion, marksmanship, intelligence. The idea was to keep Georgia safe from Chechens or other Muslim loonies infiltrating through the Pankisi Gorge in northeast Georgia. And we did a good job. The Georgian Army pacified the Pankisi in classic Green Beret style. The punch line is, the Georgians got so cocky from that success, and from their lovefest with the Bushies in D.C., that they thought they could take on anybody. What they’re in the process of finding out is that a light-infantry counterinsurgency force like the one we gave them isn’t much use when a gigantic Russian armored force has just rolled across your border.

    The American military’s response so far has been all talk, and pretty damn stupid talk at that. A Pentagon spokesperson called Russia’s response “disproportionate.” What the hell are they talking about? They’ve been watching too many cop shows. Cops have this doctrine of “minimum necessary force,” not that they actually operate that way unless there are video cameras around. Armies never, ever had that policy, because it’s a good way to get your troops killed needlessly. The whole idea in war is to fight as unfairly and disproportionately as possible. If you’ve got it, you use it.

    If you want a translation, luckily I speak fluent Pentagon. So what “disproportionate” means is — well, imagine that you’re watching some little hanger-on who tags along with you get his ass whipped by a bully, and you say, “That’s inappropriate!” I mean, instead of actually helping him. That’s what “disproportionate” means from the Pentagon: “We’re not going to lift a finger to help you, but hey, we’re with you in spirit, little buddy!”

    The quickest way to see who’s winning in any war is to see who asks first for a ceasefire. And this time it was the Georgians. Once it was clear the Russians were going to back the South Ossetians, the war was over. Even Georgians were saying, “To fight Russia by ourselves is insane.” Which means they thought Russia wouldn’t back its allies. Not a bad bet; Russia has a long, unpredictable history of screwing its allies — but not all the time. The Georgians should know better than anybody that once in a while, the Russians actually come through, because it was Russian troops who saved Georgia from a Persian invasion in 1805, at the battle of Zagam. Of course the Russians had let the Persians sack Tbilisi, Georgia’s capital, just 10 years earlier without helping. That’s the thing: The bastards are unpredictable. You can’t even count on them to betray their friends (though it’s the safer bet, most of the time, sort of like 6:5 odds).

    This time, the Russians came through. For lots of reasons, starting with the fact that Bush is weak and they know it; that the United States is all tied up in that crap Iraq War; and most of all, because Kosovo just declared independence from Serbia, an old Russian ally. It’s tit-for-tat time, with Kosovo as the tit and South Ossetia as the tat. The way Putin sees it, if we can mess with his allies and let little ethnic enclaves like Kosovo declare independence, then the Russians can do the same with our allies, especially naive, idiotic allies like Georgia. It’s a pawn exchange, if that. If it signals anything bigger, it’s the fact that the United States is weaker than it was 10 years ago and Russia is much, much stronger than it was in Yeltsin’s time. But anybody with sense knew all that already.

    Luckily, South Ossetia doesn’t matter that much. I’m just being honest here. In a year, nobody will care much who runs that little glob of territory. What’s more serious is that another, bigger and more strategic chunk of Georgia called Abkhazia, on the Black Sea, is taking the opportunity to boot out the last Georgian troops on its territory. Georgia may lose almost all its coastline, but then the Georgians were always an inland people anyway, living along river valleys, not great sailors.

    Even so, the great Russian-Ossetian land grab will make great material for another few centuries of gloating, ballads, blood oaths, revenge and counter-grabs. In this part of the world, there’s always something to avenge.

    This is an adapted version of an essay by Brecher that appeared on eXiled online.

    Indian police shoot dead Kashmir demonstrators

    0

    By Rahul Bedi in New Delhi | The violence followed a simmering row over the transfer of land to a Hindu organisation in the country’s sole Muslim-majority province.

    Police and military personnel enforced a curfew to prevent large-scale rioting, but opened fire in the face of large crowds of stone-throwing youths, officials in the northern state’s summer capital Srinagar said.

    The casualties came the day after a leading separatist Kashmiri politician and four other protesters were killed by army personnel for trying to cross the disputed frontier into Pakistan-administered Kashmir.

    The unrest, which has shattered several years of relative calm across the fractured province, was triggered by the provincial authorities transferring 99 acres of government land to a local Hindu pilgrimage trust, the Shri Amarnath Shrine Board, in June.

    The plot was to be used to erect temporary accommodation for the 450,000 pilgrims who annually trek to a shrine in a secluded mountain cave high in the Himalayas.

    But protests by Kashmiri Muslims who feared the land grant was a calculated move by India’s majority Hindu community to alter the area’s demographic balance led to the provincial administration cancelling its decison. This triggered a violent reaction by Kashmir’s Hindus that has seethed for over six weeks and seen them blockade the only road connecting the Kashmir Valley to the rest of the country. In turn, Kashmiri Muslims have retaliated and held large protests that have turned increasingly volatile.

    The crisis has also led to the resignation of the state’s chief minister, Ghulam Nabi Azad, on July 7 after a coalition ally withdrew support over the land transfer issue.

    The blockade of the main transport artery has caused severe shortages of essentials like medicine and food, but also prevented fruit grown in the lush Kashmir Valley from being transported elsewhere in India.

    Monday’s march to Pakistani territory by thousands of locals was an attempt by the Kashmir Fruit Growers Association to cross the disputed frontier known as the Line of Control in order to market their produce in Pakistan-administered Kashmir’s capital, Muzaffarabad.

    “India is holding our region by force,” said Abdul Hameed, a local businessman, after the crowds were turned back by security forces.

    Until the Kashmir dispute was resolved, he said, anti-India sentiments of most Kashmiris would remain.

    The Line of Control divides Kashmir between the neighbouring nuclear rivals both of whom claim it in its entirety. China also controls a small part of Kasmiri territory to the east.

    India and Pakistan had also fought two of their three wars and an 11-week-long border skirmish over Kashmir since independence from Britain 61 years ago.

    Meanwhile, Kashmir’s turbulence has further exacerbated the prevailing crisis in the region where several Muslim separatist groups have been waging war for independence or union with Pakistan, a struggle in which over 65,000 people had died since 1989.

    India accuses Pakistan of fuelling the ongoing Muslim insurgency, a claim that Islamabad denies.

    In politically charged Kashmir, however, the anti-blockade protests have escalated to become pro-independence rallies, providing sustenance to insurgent and separatist groups whose influence was declining and further imperilling the troubled region’s future.

    Bloody cost of the new world order

    1

    By Lindsey German, convenor of the Stop The War Coalition |

    The outbreak of war in the Caucasus over the past week has stunned the world. More fighting, more bombing, thousands dead and tens of thousands of refugees are the daily scenes on our television screens.

    This is not just a “little local difficulty” between Russia and Georgia. It is part of a drive to war across the globe that has characterised the eight years of George Bush’s US presidency.

    And it is intricately connected to the US-led “war on terror” which is raging in Afghanistan, Iraq and Somalia — and which now threatens Iran.

    The hypocrisy involved in statements from George Bush and Dick Cheney beggars belief. “Russia has invaded a sovereign neighbouring state and threatens a democratic government elected by its people,” says Bush. “Such an action is unacceptable in the 21st century.”

    Yet Bush and Cheney are the architects of a series of disastrous wars being waged around the world today. The US ignored the wishes of millions around the world in its drive to war across the Middle East.

    Russia has its own imperialist ambitions. And it is still effectively run by its prime minister, Vladimir Putin, the former KGB colonel and the butcher of Chechnya. But Putin can teach the US little when it comes to invasion and war.

    The US has waged its “war on terror”, not to bring peace and democracy, but to impose its power and control over increasing parts of the world.

    The break up of the former Soviet Union nearly 20 years ago led to an era of new imperialism. The US intervened against Iraq in 1991, then in the Balkans in the late 1990s, and since 2001 through the invasions and occupations of Afghanistan and Iraq.

    In the process, it has aimed to win new allies from among the former Eastern Bloc states as a means of putting pressure on its weaker rival Russia. It has used Nato to extend its influence. The Kosovo war of 1999 took place under a Nato umbrella, as does the imperialist occupation of Afghanistan today.

    This military alliance lost its original role at the end of the Cold War — but it has reinvented itself as an instrument of US policy in lands distant from its original remit of the North Atlantic.

    Georgia is ruled by one of the most pro-Western regimes among the former Soviet states. It has feverishly been trying to join Nato, which has already extended to a number of eastern European countries.

    Georgia has been encouraged in its ambitions by the US and its allies. It is likely to have been given the green light from the US for its attack on South Ossetia.

    This strategic realignment is underpinned by concern over the region’s resources. Oil and gas pipelines are routed through Georgia to Turkey, another key Western ally.

    So the war between Georgia and Russia — supposedly about the future of South Ossetia and Abkhazia — is the latest development in the rivalry between imperial powers.

    Gordon Brown has backed the US and its policies.

    The anti-war movement in Britain needs to campaign against this escalation of a war in which those who suffer are the peoples of the region.

    Hypocrite Bush: “Unacceptable in the 21st Century”

    0

    By Matthew Rothschild | Just back from mugging for the cameras with the bikini-clad U.S. Olympic volleyball team, Bush put his serious face on in Washington and denounced Russia’s incursion into Georgia.

    Bush called it “unacceptable in the 21st century.”

    He’s right, but who is he to talk?

    Let’s see.

    If invading a sovereign country that posed no threat to you is “unacceptable in the 21st century,” then Bush himself has acted in an unacceptable way, obviously, for invading Iraq.

    And what about kidnapping people?

    Or holding people in solitary confinement for years at a time, prior to any trial?

    Or imprisoning people for six years without ever letting them see a judge?

    What about parading them around naked?

    Or about putting hoods over their heads?

    Or making them hang by their arms?

    Or depriving them of sleep for days at a time?

    Or holding them in freezing or roasting temperatures?

    Or blasting music at them at ear-splitting volume?

    Or putting them in cramped little boxes?

    Or sexually humiliating them?

    Or intimidating them with dogs?

    Or waterboarding them?

    These are all actions that ought to be “unacceptable in the 21st century,” but Bush himself is responsible for them.

    He’s no one to throw stones.

    Memo to the President

    0

    It’s basically what you would expect: Appoint a national cyber security advisor, invest in math and science education, establish standards for critical infrastructure, spend money on enforcement, establish national standards for securing personal data and data-breach disclosure, and work with industry and academia to develop a bunch of needed technologies.

    I could comment on the plan, but with security the devil is always in the details — and, of course, at this point there are few details. But since he brought up the topic — McCain supposedly is “working on the issues” as well — I have three pieces of policy advice for the next president, whoever he is. They’re too detailed for campaign speeches or even position papers, but they’re essential for improving information security in our society. Actually, they apply to national security in general. And they’re things only government can do.

    One, use your immense buying power to improve the security of commercial products and services. One property of technological products is that most of the cost is in the development of the product rather than the production. Think software: The first copy costs millions, but the second copy is free.

     

    You have to secure your own government networks, military and civilian. You have to buy computers for all your government employees. Consolidate those contracts, and start putting explicit security requirements into the RFPs. You have the buying power to get your vendors to make serious security improvements in the products and services they sell to the government, and then we all benefit because they’ll include those improvements in the same products and services they sell to the rest of us. We’re all safer if information technology is more secure, even though the bad guys can use it, too.

    Two, legislate results and not methodologies. There are a lot of areas in security where you need to pass laws, where the security externalities are such that the market fails to provide adequate security. For example, software companies who sell insecure products are exploiting an externality just as much as chemical plants that dump waste into the river. But a bad law is worse than no law. A law requiring companies to secure personal data is good; a law specifying what technologies they should use to do so is not. Mandating software liabilities for software failures is good, detailing how is not. Legislate for the results you want and implement the appropriate penalties; let the market figure out how — that’s what markets are good at.

    Three, broadly invest in research. Basic research is risky; it doesn’t always pay off. That’s why companies have stopped funding it. Bell Labs is gone because nobody could afford it after the AT&T breakup, but the root cause was a desire for higher efficiency and short-term profitability — not unreasonable in an unregulated business. Government research can be used to balance that by funding long-term research.

    Spread those research dollars wide. Lately, most research money has been redirected through DARPA to near-term military-related projects; that’s not good. Keep the earmark-happy Congress from dictating how the money is spent. Let the NSF, NIH and other funding agencies decide how to spend the money and don’t try to micromanage. Give the national laboratories lots of freedom, too. Yes, some research will sound silly to a layman. But you can’t predict what will be useful for what, and if funding is really peer-reviewed, the average results will be much better. Compared to corporate tax breaks and other subsidies, this is chump change.

    If our research capability is to remain vibrant, we need more science and math students with decent elementary and high school preparation. The declining interest is partly from the perception that scientists don’t get rich like lawyers and dentists and stockbrokers, but also because science isn’t valued in a country full of creationists. One way the president can help is by trusting scientific advisers and not overruling them for political reasons.

    Oh, and get rid of those post-9/11 restrictions on student visas that are causing so many top students to do their graduate work in Canada, Europe and Asia instead of in the United States. Those restrictions will hurt us immensely in the long run.

    Those are the three big ones; the rest is in the details. And it’s the details that matter. There are lots of serious issues that you’re going to have to tackle: data privacy, data sharing, data mining, government eavesdropping, government databases, use of Social Security numbers as identifiers, and so on. It’s not enough to get the broad policy goals right. You can have good intentions and enact a good law, and have the whole thing completely gutted by two sentences sneaked in during rulemaking by some lobbyist.

    Security is both subtle and complex, and — unfortunately — doesn’t readily lend itself to normal legislative processes. You’re used to finding consensus, but security by consensus rarely works. On the internet, security standards are much worse when they’re developed by a consensus body, and much better when someone just does them. This doesn’t always work — a lot of crap security has come from companies that have “just done it” — but nothing but mediocre standards come from consensus bodies. The point is that you won’t get good security without pissing someone off: The information broker industry, the voting machine industry, the telcos. The normal legislative process makes it hard to get security right, which is why I don’t have much optimism about what you can get done.

    And if you’re going to appoint a cyber security czar, you have to give him actual budgetary authority. Otherwise he won’t be able to get anything done, either.

    This essay originally appeared on Wired.com.

    Boris Johnson pulls out of Mayors for Peace

    4

    By Kate Hudson | Last month, Boris Johnson announced the withdrawal of London’s membership of the global ‘Mayors for Peace’ initiative. This was founded by the mayors of Hiroshima and Nagasaki in 1982, in an effort to prevent any other city going through similar suffering.

    In 1945, atom bombs were dropped on the Japanese cities of Hiroshima and Nagasaki by the US air force, resulting in hundreds of thousands of deaths, and the devastating consequences of radiation poisoning affecting subsequent generations. Since that time, mayors of those cities have felt a responsibility to make sure people understand the consequences: ‘to prevent any repetition of the A-bomb tragedy, the cities of Hiroshima and Nagasaki have continually sought to tell the world about the inhumane cruelty of nuclear weapons and have consistently urged that nuclear weapons be abolished.’

    Mayors for Peace is hardly an extremist organisation. There are currently 2,277 member cities in 129 countries, including Paris, Berlin, Rome, Ottawa, Los Angeles and Sydney. Members are drawn from across the political spectrum. Tadatoshi Akiba, the Mayor of Hiroshima, believes that the role of city mayors in raising awareness of nuclear weapons is key, given that cities are the targets of nuclear weapons.

    We were aware when Boris Johnson was elected that he supported Britain’s nuclear weapons system Trident, as well as the war on Iraq, but there is no reason for him to reject participation in an international body committed to the global abolition of nuclear weapons.

    Every Conservative government has supported Britain’s participation in the nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty, the goal of which is global nuclear disarmament. This decision suggests that Boris Johnson is retreating from that common goal.

    This decision is insulting to the people of Hiroshima and Nagasaki and the work of their mayors for global peace, and goes against the views of the majority of the British people, who support global nuclear disarmament.

    So why has Boris Johnson pulled out? Does he have no concern for peace? Mayors for Peace was established so that cities and their residents need no longer fear nuclear annihilation – that cities should no longer be the targets of nuclear weapons. Is Boris Johnson giving up on that goal?

    Johnson’s approach is in marked contrast to that of the former mayor, Ken Livingstone. Ken is a strong supporter of the peace movement and was a staunch ally during his terms in office and his moral commitment to peace and disarmament helped to work towards a culture of peace in London. This was demonstrated in many ways, not only on the nuclear issue, but also on the anti-war issue and – drawing this more widely – on building constructive and harmonious relationships between London’s many communities. In all of these areas, I believe he was in line with the majority opinions of London’s residents and working in their best interests. As Tadatoshi Akiba says, it is the residents of cities that suffer most in war.

    In very stark contrast recently, was the different experiences of the two visits of President Bush, firstly in 2003, and secondly just a few weeks ago. In 2003, Mayor Livingstone supported our protests against Bush’s visit, and he welcomed the disabled US Vietnam veteran Ron Kovic to City Hall, to pay tribute to his work for peace. Our rally and demonstration proceeded peacefully and unimpeded. During Bush’s recent visit, the anti-war movement was prevented from demonstrating in Whitehall – signalling unnecessary restrictions on our right to protest – and a number of protestors were on the receiving end of police brutality. It is to be hoped that these incidents are not symptomatic of a new attitude in London, contemptuous of those who struggle for peace and disarmament, and cavalier with our right to peaceful protest.

    More than 115,000 detainees released under pardon law

    0

    Voices of Iraq | The number of detainees released under the general amnesty law, launched by the government in February, reached 115615, the official spokesman for the Higher Judicial Council said on Monday.

    “A total of 115615 prisoners from different Iraqi provinces have been freed since the pardon law came into effect,” Judge Abdul Sattar al-Berqadar told Aswat al-Iraq – Voices of Iraq – (VOI).

    “The number of detainees who are not included in the pardon law are 28041,” he added.

    The Iraqi presidential council had approved on February 22 the general pardon law no. 19 of 2008 in a bid to enhance reconciliation in Iraq.

    Chinese intelligence alerts travelers to cyber spies

    0

    By Kathryn Muratore | This past week, the head of the Chinese National Counterintelligence Executive (NCIX) held a press conference noting that “Somebody with a wireless device in the US should expect it to be compromised while he’s there.”

    Oh wait, no, that didn’t happen.

    In a case of the pot calling the kettle black, the US NCIX told Americans traveling abroad that their electronic devices (such as laptops and cell phones) could be compromised by foreign spies.

    Curiously, there was no mention of the domestic spying conducted every day by a plethora of US intelligence agencies.

    And while the PRC may indeed be tracking your movements and attempting to spy on your online activity, the current US administration has no moral high ground to stand on, as it has:

    – created a militarized cyber command to conduct covert espionage on digital properties, both foreign and potentially domestic
    – used the NSA and other intelligence agencies to intercept all electronic communication
    – enacted dozens of anti-privacy statutes including the PATRIOT Act and REAL ID
    – amended FISA to immunize companies that operate wiretapping stations and retroactively legalize any potential illegalities
    – compiled an ever increasing dragnet dubiously called the “No Fly List” which has more than a million suspects
    – continued to operate and upgrade ECHELON listening stations domestically and overseas

    Last year Judge Napolitano discussed these intrusions in length at the summer FFF convention, noting then that the NSA is also provided a backdoor to track and monitor all cellular devices.

    And not content with strip searching you in public a new Homeland Security policy allows the US government to confiscate (indefinitely) and search any electronic device at any port of entry.

    Thus, ignoring star chambers, detention camps, extraordinary rendition, and PLA torture techniques, no amount of foreign borrowing could prop up the insolvent nature of the US administrations moral bankruptcy and brazen disregard for individual privacy.

    Report: US using ‘money as a weapon’ in Iraq

    0

    US program has spent $2.8 billion using ‘money as a weapon’ in Iraq

    AP 

    A U.S. Army program in which soldiers pay cash to Iraqis to help with expenses, large and small, has spent $2.8 billion in five years, The Washington Post reported Monday.

    The Post reviewed records of the Commander’s Emergency Response Program, which was intended for short-term humanitarian relief and reconstruction. The field manual laying out the guidelines for the program is called “Money as a Weapon System,” pointing up the effectiveness of cold hard cash in winning over the hearts and minds of Iraqi civilians.

    The largest sum of CERP money, $596.8 million, was spent on water and sanitation projects, the Post reported. Three other categories each received more than $300 million: electricity, protective measures (such as fencing and guards), and transportation and roads.

    But the Army also spent lesser sums on smaller acts of largesse, including $48,000 for children’s shoes; $50,000 for 625 sheep; $100,000 for dolls; and $500,000 for action figures designed to look like Iraqi security forces, the Post reported.

    The Cover-up of the Impeachment Coverage

    1

    By Chris Stevenson | A 7/31/08 report by Fairness and Accuracy in Reporting (FAIR) shows even the most token coverage of the impeachment hearings as receiving no respect: “CNN’s Election Center program devoted a July 25 report to mocking a hearing of the House Judiciary Committee investigating White House abuses of power. ‘Believe it or not, there was a congressional hearing today about impeaching the president,’ scoffed host Campbell Brown, who added: ‘It was all stagecraft, though.’ Brown went on to introduce the report by CNN correspondent Erica Hill by saying, ‘Tell us about this piece of Kabuki theater, Erica.’’ According to FAIR Brown is married to Dan Senor; a former deputy. press secretary for Bush.

    The word Kabuki derives from the verb Kabuku; “to lean” or “to be out of the ordinary” as in avant-garde or bizarre theater. Attributing the word to the Kucinich hearings is a shot at his lack of coverage and political support. Hill explained: “The Democratic leadership made it clear impeachment is not on the table at this hearing today for two reasons. Not only is there not enough time left in President Bush’s term, but also they know any real impeachment hearings at this point could cause a major backlash.” This goes deeper than partisan issues, when any firm bombards their colleges and clients with corruption, there will be those who’ll find ways to defend it. What the Bush administration has done is inspire or give license to all the difficult personalities within various sectors of government and secular industry from civil rights divisions to law inforcement, to oil, real estate etc., to play fast and loose with the public’s rights, liberties and priviledges just by their watching him.

    Former Congresswoman Elizabeth Holzman who sat on the House Judiciary Committee during Richard Nixon’s impeachment proceedings, is the author of HR 23 which is the article to remove Bush for a similar crime as Nixon; wiretapping. I say forget the time issue and why let all that writing go to waste? Democrats.com said a couple years ago that Conyers took impeachment off the table because he was afraid “Fox News” would attack him permanently and at that time he needed 218 votes. I wondered then if he and Pelosi thought this was going to be easy.

    FAIR continued: “The report closed with Hill assuring voters that George W. Bush was not threatened by any of this: ‘As for the president today, clearly, not too worried about this hearing. He was in Peoria, Illinois. As you can see here, kissing babies, smiling, taking pictures.’” Sadly Bush can afford to relax, the efforts to remove him have obviously been sporadic.

    A recent interview by Katrina vanden Heuvel; the editor of “The Nation” with Nancy Pelosi on why she dropped the impeachment issue, instead of admitting she got cold feet, she hinted this would risk national unity. “When I interviewed House Speaker Nancy Pelosi about her new book, Know Your Power, I asked her the question all of us have been asking for two years: how could she take impeachment ‘off the table’? Her answer: she wants Democrats to control the House… and in order to stop the wealthiest 1% from “sucking the money out of the middle class” and creating a “caste system.”

    According to Democrats.com , “Many progressives disagree with Speaker Pelosi because they believe holding this administration accountable for its staggering abuse of power is essential for preserving our Constitution. They also believe the American people would reward those who defend the Constitution.” Since I take it personally when the right-wing is trying to push W as one of the all-time great presidents, this in itself should be enough incentive to oust the one whom even Reagan called “shiftless” looking. Bush needs impeachment on his permanent record; a record his Daddy can’t expunge. Like I said, the impeachment movement needs players, not acclimated zombies who went from disregard to indoctrination due to over-exposure to corruption.

    ###

    ~Chip’s note: Fact checking on Holtzman & HR 23 in process.

    This War Report Has Been Approved by Your Government

    0

    By Dave Lindorff  | We Americans got a graphic illustration of the demise of any independent American corporate news media these past few days as the coverage on TV and in print was saturated with reports about John Edwards’ infidelity and, equally important, Russia’s invasion of Georgia.

    In the first case, we had the completely pointless if prurient airing of Edwards’ sordid extra-marital affair. Pointless because Edwards at this time is a has-been politician. If there were any point to the coverage it should have been, as Alex Cockburn pointed out in his journal Counterpunch, the abject failure of those same reporters and “news” organizations to cover the story back last fall, when it might have mattered. Back then, when the only paper covering the story was the National Enquirer, Edwards was still a viable candidate for the presidency, or a possible contender for vice president again. It’s not that his personal sex-life has any news value in and of itself. The point is that had he won the nomination, or been picked as a vice presidential running mate, its inevitable exposure later during the general election would have destroyed any Democratic presidential chances. And the corporate media knew back then all about this story. They just weren’t pursuing it (and the current blitz of stories proves that they weren’t holding back out of principle!).

    We read that President Bush condemned the Russian invasion of another nation and called for an immediate ceasefire. Yet there was not one word of astonishment or challenge from reporters or commentators or editorial writers at this stunningly cynical statement coming from a leader who himself is responsible for the blatantly illegal and much more destructive invasion of another nation. And remember, while Georgia is on Russia’s border, and was at least possibly guilty of oppressing and attacking and perhaps even killing members of the Russian minority in two of its provinces (Georgia bombed the biggest town in the secessionist province of Ossetia, killing perhaps 1000 civilians, before Russia invaded), Iraq is half a world away from America and was minding its own business, not threatening Americans in any way. Russia, thus far, has at most killed a few thousand Georgians. America has, by most accounts killed hundreds of thousands and perhaps as many as 1.2 million Iraqis, very few of them combatants.

    We watch and read voluminous reports on this relatively small Russian war against its neighbor and former domestic province (Georgia was one of the SSRs in the old USSR), and meanwhile there is almost nothing being reported about the continuing five-year-old war launched by Bush and Cheney against Iraq. And certainly, over the course of five years we have gotten no visual depiction of that war even approaching the scenes that were on display from the front in Georgia.

    Apparently, in the view of our corporate news editors and managers, it is important for Americans to fully witness the bloody horrors of war when that war is being fought by Russia, but we are to be carefully protected from seeing such things when they are being perpetrated by our own centurions. We aren’t even allowed to see the grievous injuries and death being suffered by our own troops.

    And, of course, don’t feel to good about the quality of the coverage of the Russian/Georgia conflict either. This too is biased. Indeed one reason we are shown all the carnage is that the US government has been backing Georgia, and there is evidence that the US even encouraged the Georgian attacks on ethnic Russians which provoked the invasion. The US also has obligingly airlifted Georgian troops back from Iraq to Georgia.

    This is not news. This is propaganda, pure and simple.

    American corporate news media broadcasts and articles should include a disclaimer: “This report was approved by the media managers of the Bush/Cheney administration.”

    US planes make secret landings in Kenya

    2

    Press TV | US military planes have been making secretive landings in Kenya in what is feared to be an effort to move terror suspects.

    The night landings by US military planes at Nairobi’s Wilson Airport, carrying Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) operatives, have raised suspicion among both local security agents and aviation authorities.

    The planes belonging to the Prescott Support Group, which has been accused in other parts of the world of being involved in the rendition of terror suspects and having strong links with the CIA, were allowed to operate in Kenya two months ago, even after the country’s aviation authorities questioned the move.

    Kenya Civil Aviation Authority (KCAA) Director-General Chris Kuto said the planes were only involved in “aerial mapping operations”.

    “We did give them a license yes but only to carry out mapping activities in Northern Kenya. I am not aware of any other secret activities they are involved in,” Kuto told Press TV correspondent in Kenya on Sunday.

    The issue raises concerns especially at a time when Kenya security forces are in a frantic search for terror suspect, Fazul Abdullah Mohamed, accused of masterminding the August 1998 attack on the US Embassy in Nairobi which left more than 200 people dead and 5,000 others seriously injured.

    Leaked CIA reports cite suspects being arrested, shackled, blindfolded and sedated, after which they are transported, usually by private jet, to other countries like Ethiopia where torture is used to force them into submission.

    Human rights groups in Kenya have voiced concern over the mistreatment of terrorism suspects and the harassment of Muslims in the country under the guise of anti-terrorism efforts.

    Kenya has previously handed over more than 15 terror suspects to the US and Ethiopian authorities in an exercise that angered many Muslim leaders.

    Bush escalates confrontation with Russia over Georgia

    0

    By Barry Grey | In a provocative statement delivered from the White House Rose Garden on Monday, President George W. Bush escalated the confrontation between the United States and Russia over the current fighting in Georgia.

    Bush denounced what he called Russia’s “dramatic and brutal” military escalation and demanded that Moscow agree to an immediate cease-fire and the withdrawal of its troops from the Caucasian country on its border. He accused Russia of planning to bomb the Tbilisi airport and charged that Moscow was seeking to overthrow the pro-US government of Georgian President Mikheil Saakashvili.

    Bush reiterated US statements about the inviolability of Georgian sovereignty and territorial integrity–diplomatic language supporting the efforts of the government in Tbilisi to reestablish control over the breakaway pro-Russian republics of South Ossetia and Abkhazia.

    Bush’s remarks followed a statement Sunday by Vice President Dick Cheney, who said Russian “aggression” could not go unanswered. Cheney’s intervention suggested the existence of a faction within the Bush administration that is pushing for a more aggressive US response to the Russian intervention in Georgia.

    The statements from the White House express a staggering level of hypocrisy. The US government issued no protest when Georgian military forces attacked South Ossetia last Thursday night, indiscriminately targeting apartment blocs in the capital of Tskhinvali with tank cannon and mortars. It is estimated that the Georgian invaders killed 2,000 civilians, a bloodletting that accounts for the vast bulk of civilian deaths to date.

    It was only when the Russian military responded to the Georgian attack with a rapid and massive counteroffensive, crushing the much smaller Georgian force, that Washington became alarmed.

    There is nothing remotely progressive in the military actions taken by the Putin regime. The Russian ruling elite is pursuing its own predatory aims in the Caucasus, a region that was ruled for two centuries by Moscow before the breakup of the Soviet Union in 1991.

    Moreover, the eruption of war in the Caucasus underscores the tragic consequences of the dissolution of the USSR. It has exposed the masses of the former Soviet Union, including Russia and the other Soviet republics, to the dangers of war and the predations of the major imperialist powers. For the peoples of the former USSR, the answer is to be found not in the nationalist and militaristic policies of Putin, but rather in the internationalist program of socialist revolution.

    Notwithstanding the reactionary aims of the Russian regime, no objective observer can contest the fact that Washington’s provocative policy toward Russia–aimed at supplanting Russia in its long-time spheres of influence–is the primary factor behind the eruption of war between Russia and Georgia.

    The media has been virtually silent on the visit just one month ago of US Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice to Georgia. Rice held talks with Saakashvili and gave a press conference at which she denounced Russia, backed Saakashvili’s efforts to reassert Georgian control over South Ossetia and Abkhazia, and reiterated US support for Georgia’s incorporation into NATO.

    Russia has made clear that it considers the entry of former Soviet republics such as Georgia and Ukraine into NATO an intolerable threat to its security. Were Georgia already a part of NATO, as Moscow is well aware, the alliance’s member states would be legally bound to intervene military in Georgia’s support.

    It is inconceivable that Saakashvili did not review in detail with Rice his plans for a military assault on South Ossetia. Georgia–which is totally dependent on US military, diplomatic and financial support–could not take such a portentous action without informing Washington in advance and securing American sanction.

    Preparations for the attack would have been far advanced when Rice met with Saakashvili a month ago. The Georgian military, moreover, is dominated from top to bottom by US military advisers.

    The United States has been pouring military aid into Georgia ever since the US-led air war against Serbia in 1999, and the pace and scale of American military aid have accelerated since Washington engineered the so-called “Rose Revolution” that brought Harvard-educated Saakashvili to power in early 2004.

    An article in Monday’s New York Times describes “a Pentagon effort to overhaul Georgia’s forces from bottom to top.” The article states: “At senior levels, the United States helped rewrite Georgian military doctrine and train its commanders and staff officers. At the squad level, American marines and soldiers trained Georgian soldiers in the fundamentals of battle.

    “Georgia, meanwhile, began re-equipping its forces with Israeli and American firearms, reconnaissance drones, communications and battlefield management equipment, new convoys of vehicles and stockpiles of ammunition.”

    As for the principle of national sovereignty and territorial integrity, the US is highly selective when it comes to its application. No one in either political party or in the establishment media has sought to explain why Serbia’s military intervention against Kosovan separatists was a war crime, while Georgia’s attack on South Ossetia was legitimate.

    The Bush administration was the prime mover behind Kosovo’s declaration of independence from Serbia last February, on grounds indistinguishable from those claimed by anti-Georgian separatists in South Ossetia and Abkhazia.

    Moreover, the US encouraged and financed the forces that sought to effect the secession of Chechnya from Russia in the 1990s.

    Since the United States was clearly involved in the Georgian assault on South Ossetia, one must ask what were its intentions. It is difficult to believe that US policy makers believed Russia would take no action in response to such an immense provocation. Why then, would they support a move that would bring Russia into a direct conflict with one of Washington’s principal allies in the Caucasus–a region that constitutes a bridgehead between the resource-rich Caspian Basin and Western Europe and houses critical oil and gas pipelines?

    The only plausible answer is that the United States is deliberately seeking a major escalation of tensions between Russia and the West. Even if the current conflict does not spiral immediately into a wider conflagration, the fate of “little Georgia” will be invoked by the United States to justify a far more aggressive and confrontational stance toward Russia.

    The demands being raised by the Bush administration, the European Union, the United Nations and others for a return to the “status quo ante” in Georgia are drenched in hypocrisy. They all know very well that the US is not about to abandon what it has come to see as a critical prop to its position in the Caucasus and its long-term perspective of reducing Russia to a semi-colonial status.

    The resumption of something akin to the Cold War underscores the real motives that underlay the decades of confrontation between the US and the Soviet Union. American imperialism considered the Soviet Union–and continues to view Russia–as an obstacle to its geo-strategic aim of securing hegemony over Eurasia.

    There is undoubtedly a domestic political component to the US-backed provocation against Russia as well. The Bush administration and the Republican presidential candidate, John McCain, want the November elections to take place under conditions of immense international crisis. They calculate that an environment of fear and insecurity will strengthen McCain’s chances, since a major prop of his campaign is his supposed foreign policy experience and national security expertise.

    Obama, predictably and pathetically, is responding by seeking to assert his own militaristic credentials. Within minutes of Bush’s threatening statement against Russia on Monday, Obama issued his own denunciation of Russia in terms almost identical to those of Bush and McCain.

    The immensely dangerous implications of the eruption of war in the Caucasus leave no doubt about where the drive of imperialism to carve up the world is leading. US imperialism intends to let nothing stand in the way of its goal of establishing global hegemony. It is dragging the American working class and the world into a catastrophe.

    The only force that can stop it is the revolutionary mobilization of the American and international working class.

    Coincidence? Guantanamo term ends as Bush’s does

    0

    GUANTANAMO BAY U.S. NAVAL BASE, Cuba (Reuters) – It was no coincidence the U.S. military jurors at Guantanamo timed the prison sentence they gave Osama bin Laden’s driver to end just before President Bush’s term does, legal analysts say.

    The timing seems intended to give the next U.S. president who takes office on Jan. 20 a chance to override the Bush administration’s announcement that it will continue to hold convicted Yemeni captive Salim Hamdan as an “enemy combatant” in the war against terrorism after he finishes his sentence.

    “My inference is that they concluded that this administration would not release Hamdan at the end of his sentence, but the next one might,” said David Glazier, a national security expert who teaches at Loyola Law School.

    “I think Hamdan’s continued detention past the end of his sentence, although justifiable under the law of war, would be a political train wreck, and I think the panel made an effort to protect the U.S. from further international criticism.”

    Both major U.S. presidential candidates have said they would close the detention camp at the U.S. naval base in Cuba.

    The six-member jury of military officers convicted Hamdan Wednesday of providing material support for terrorism by driving and guarding bin Laden in Afghanistan.

    They rejected charges that he was part of a broad al Qaeda conspiracy to murder American civilians, one of the “worst of the worst.”

    The verdict in the first U.S. war crimes tribunal since World War Two endorsed military defense lawyers’ position that Hamdan was a bit player who made the terrible decision to keep working for bin Laden because he needed the $200 monthly salary to support his family.

    MILITARY PUSHING BACK

    When jurors began deliberating his sentence, the only question they asked the judge was how much credit Hamdan would get for the time he has been held at Guantanamo. The judge said he would get a little over 61 months’ credit, and the jurors sentenced Hamdan to a 66-month term that runs out at the end of December.

    The jurors did not publicly explain their reasons but given the nuance of their verdict, it seems unlikely that timing was a coincidence.

    “For seven years, uniformed military officers have pushed back against the administration’s most extreme and unlawful detention and interrogation policies, only to be overruled by White House lawyers with little respect for the Constitution or Geneva Conventions,” said Ben Wizner, a lawyer who monitored the trial for the American Civil Liberties Union.

    “We may never know what the commission members were thinking, but we saw what they did: they ensured that Mr. Hamdan’s fate will be determined by a future administration with more respect for the rule of law.”

    Only one other prisoner has been convicted at Guantanamo, Australian David Hicks. He avoided trial by pleading guilty to providing material support for terrorism — the same charge Hamdan was convicted of. Hicks plea-bargained for a nine-month sentence and was allowed to leave Guantanamo before it ended, finishing it out in Australia.

    “Holding Hamdan past the end of his (term) is only going to further inflame anti-American feelings in the Muslim world where the U.S. will clearly be perceived as continuing to discriminate on the basis of nationality or religion,” said Glazier, a former U.S. Navy officer.

    U.S. citizens are exempt from imprisonment and trial at Guantanamo. All the captives from Western nations were released long ago except for Canadian Omar Khadr, who faces trial in October on charges of killing a U.S. soldier with a grenade. (Editing by Xavier Briand)

    War in Georgia: The Israeli connection

    16

    For past seven years, Israeli companies have been helping Gerogian army to preparer for war against Russia through arms deals, training of infantry units and security advice

    By Arie Egozi | The fighting which broke out over the weekend between Russia and Georgia has brought Israel’s intensive involvement in the region into the limelight. This involvement includes the sale of advanced weapons to Georgia and the training of the Georgian army’s infantry forces.

    The Defense Ministry held a special meeting Sunday to discuss the various arms deals held by Israelis in Georgia, but no change in policy has been announced as of yet.

    “The subject is closely monitored,” said sources in the Defense Ministry. “We are not operating in any way which may counter Israeli interests. We have turned down many requests involving arms sales to Georgia; and the ones which have been approves have been duly scrutinized. So far, we have placed no limitations on the sale of protective measures.”  

    Israel began selling arms to Georgia about seven years ago following an initiative by Georgian citizens who immigrated to Israel and became businesspeople.

    “They contacted defense industry officials and arms dealers and told them that Georgia had relatively large budgets and could be interested in purchasing Israeli weapons,” says a source involved in arms exports.

    The military cooperation between the countries developed swiftly. The fact that Georgia’s defense minister, Davit Kezerashvili, is a former Israeli who is fluent in Hebrew contributed to this cooperation.

    “His door was always open to the Israelis who came and offered his country arms systems made in Israel,” the source said. “Compared to countries in Eastern Europe, the deals in this country were conducted fast, mainly due to the defense minister’s personal involvement.”

    Among the Israelis who took advantage of the opportunity and began doing business in Georgia were former Minister Roni Milo and his brother Shlomo, former director-general of the Military Industries, Brigadier-General (Res.) Gal Hirsch and Major-General (Res.) Yisrael Ziv.

    Roni Milo conducted business in Georgia for Elbit Systems and the Military Industries, and with his help Israel’s defense industries managed to sell to Georgia remote-piloted vehicles (RPVs), automatic turrets for armored vehicles, antiaircraft systems, communication systems, shells and rockets.

    According to Israeli sources, Gal Hirsch gave the Georgian army advice on the establishment of elite units such as Sayeret Matkal and on rearmament, and gave various courses in the fields of combat intelligence and fighting in built-up areas.

    ‘Don’t anger the Russians’

     

    The Israelis operating in Georgia attempted to convince the Israeli Aerospace Industries to sell various systems to the Georgian air force, but were turned down. The reason for the refusal was “special” relations created between the Aerospace Industries and Russia in terms of improving fighter jets produced in the former USSR and the fear that selling weapons to Georgia would anger the Russians and prompt them to cancel the deals.

    Israelis’ activity in Georgia and the deals they struck there were all authorized by the Defense Ministry. Israel viewed Georgia as a friendly state to which there is no reason not to sell arms systems similar to those Israel exports to other countries in the world.

    As the tension between Russia and Georgia grew, however, increasing voices were heard in Israel — particularly in the Foreign Ministry — calling on the Defense Ministry to be more selective in the approval of the deals with Georgia for fear that they would anger Russia.

    “It was clear that too many unmistakable Israeli systems in the possesion of the Georgian army would be like a red cloth in the face of a raging bull as far as Russia is concerned,” explained a source in the defense establishment.

    For inctance, the Russians viewed the operation of the Elbit System’s RPVs as a real provocation.

    “It was clear that the Russians were angry,” says a defense establishment source, “and that the interception of three of these RPVs in the past three months was an expression of this anger. Not everyone in Israel understood the sensitive nerve Israel touched when it supplied such an advanced arms system to a country whose relations with Russia are highly tense.”

    In May it was eventually decide to approve future deals with Georgia only for the sale of non-offensive weapon systems, such as intelligence, communications and computer systems, and not to approve deals for the sale of rifles, aircraft, sells, etc.

    A senior source in the Military Industry said Saturday that despite some reporters, the activity of Georgia’s military industry was extremely limited.

    “We conducted a small job for them several years ago,” he said. “The rest of the deals remained on paper.”

    Dov Pikulin, one of the owners of the Authentico company specializing in trips and journeys to the area, says however that “the Israeli is the main investor in the Georgian economy. Everyone is there, directly or indirectly.”

    Georgian minister: Israel should be proud

    “The Israelis should be proud of themselves for the Israeli training and education received by the Georgian soldiers,” Georgian Minister Temur Yakobashvili said Saturday.

    Yakobashvili is a Jew and is fluent in Hebrew. “We are now in a fight against the great Russia,” he said, “and our hope is to receive assistance from the White House, because Georgia cannot survive on its own.

    “It’s important that the entire world understands that what is happening in Georgia now will affect the entire world order. It’s not just Georgia’s business, but the entire world’s business.”

    One of the Georgian parliament members did not settle Saturday for the call for American aid, urging Israel to help stop the Russian offensive as well: “We need help from the UN and from our friends, headed by the United States and Israel. Today Georgia is in danger — tomorrow all the democratic countries in the region and in the entire world will be in danger too.”

    Zvi Zinger and Hanan Greenberg contributed to this report

    Climate activists vow to stay at camp

    0

    guardian.co.uk | Climate change campaigners pledged today to set up a permanent protest camp at Kingsnorth, near Rochester in Kent, if the government allows a large new coal-fired power station to be built there.

    Their defiant statement came as the police said they had arrested 100 protesters and charged 46 of them during the week-long protest that culminated on Saturday at the existing power station on the site, run by German energy company E.ON.

    Most of those charged were accused of obstruction offences. The cost of policing the protest is believed to have been over £1m.

    Four people were arrested after they managed to get inside the grounds of the power station on Saturday, and 19 others climbed over the outer perimeter fence. But a spokesman for E.ON said the protesters had not affected its power output.

    Assistant Chief Constable Gary Beautridge of Kent police denied claims from protesters of heavy-handedness by some of the 1,400 police officers from 26 forces who were deployed to the camp.

    “Our policy was that policing was proportionate to this threat,” he said. “Because of the level of resistance, officers were authorised to carry batons during two days of the protest. There are strict legal standards for their use and we gave clear warnings when any specialist team was deployed, which is our policy. Those intent on breaking the law had the choice and opportunity to stop.”

    A spokesman for the Climate Camp said that there had been “widespread condemnation” of tactics used by police during the event. These included indiscriminate use of stop and search powers, the use of helicopters to disrupt workshops and speeches, and the confiscation of many items.

    Kevin Smith said: “Our legal team are going to be exhausting every possible channel for holding the police accountable for the draconian use of stop and search measures, for the things they confiscated, and for their violent incursions on to the camp.

    “Every year police use the supposed existence of a hardcore minority as justification for their heavy-handedness and every year this hardcore minority fails to materialise.”

    The protesters claim that giving the go-ahead to a large new station would herald a new generation of highly polluting coal power stations giving the UK no chance of meeting its targets for the reduction of carbon dioxide emissions. The government argues that such stations are crucial to ensuring secure energy supply and that in future new technology will be able to capture and bury the exhaust gases.

    Action by Climate Camp activists continued today with nine people targeting the UK head office of international mining giant BHP Billiton, with two protesters supergluing themselves to the front doors.

    Drinking Caffeine During Pregnancy Doubles Risk of Miscarriage

    0

    NaturalNews | Drinking as little as 10 ounces of coffee per day may double a pregnant woman’s risk of miscarriage, according to a new study conducted by Kaiser Permanente researchers and published in the Journal of Obstetrics and Gynecology.

    Researchers interviewed 1,063 pregnant women, including 102 who had already suffered a miscarriage, about their caffeine intake. The median length of pregnancy for the women at the time of interview was 71 days. Another 70 women miscarried before the end of their pregnancies, bringing the total to 172, or about 16 percent – a fairly normal miscarriage rate.

    Women who said that they never drank caffeine had a 12.5 percent chance of miscarriage, while women who reported drinking 200 milligrams or more of caffeine per day had a 24.5 percent miscarriage rate. This represented nearly twice the miscarriage risk of the non-caffeine drinkers. The effects of caffeine on miscarriage remained even after researchers adjusted for other risk factors, including age and smoking habits.

    Previously, some researchers have suggested that a connection between caffeine intake and miscarriage rate is illusory, and is caused instead by the fact that women who experience morning sickness tend to have healthier pregnancies due to hormonal changes in the body. Because women with morning sickness are less likely to drink caffeine, it then appears that reducing caffeine intake reduces miscarriage risk.

    But the current study found that the association between caffeine and miscarriage remained strong even after adjusting for different rates of morning sickness.

    Lead author De-Kun Li recommended that pregnant women give up caffeine for at least the first three to four months of pregnancy. “If, for whatever reason, they really can’t do it, think of cutting to one cup or switching to decaf,” Li said. “Stopping caffeine really doesn’t have any downside.”

    Two hundred milligrams of caffeine is approximately the amount found in 10 ounces of coffee or 25 ounces of tea.

    Petraeus: US is flying Georgian troops into battle zone

    3

    The Times | ‘US aircraft have started to fly some of Georgia’s 2,000 troops in Iraq back home to join the fight in the breakaway province of South Ossetia, General David Petraeus, the top US commander in Iraq said toda

    “The flights are ongoing to redeploy the elements of the Georgian contingent so that they can deal with the security issues in their country,” General Petraeus told The Times in an interview at his office inside Baghdad’s Green Zone.

    He said measures were already in place to mitigate the impact on operations in Iraq of the sudden departure of the soldiers.

    “We can accommodate that. Obviously it was not expected but it is something, the effects of which we can certainly mitigate.”

    The Georgian contingent has been taking part in an operation with US and Iraqi forces to clear the south-eastern corner of Diyala province, north of Baghdad, a known al-Qaeda stronghold.

    Some 150 Georgian soldiers also guard the Iraqi Parliament building as well as other key structures inside Baghdad’s fortified Green Zone.

    In addition, one battalion is helping to support the Iraqi security forces in Wasit province, south of the capital, near the Iranian border.

    what happens if a US military plane carry troops into a combat zone is shot down (accidentally!) by Russians? US troops did joint exercises in Georgia last month, are they still there?

    jc, white plains ny, usa

    God Bless America!! Just another example of U.S. interference in another country’s affairs. One of these days it is all going to come back & bite them. I suppose this will become part of the Obama/McCain platform? We screwed up/lied in Iraq so we might as well move on to Georgia.

    IAN RAYBURN, Gloucester, Canada

    What? 1000 soldiers to face the Red Army? Who’s their leader? Leonidas?

    Eugene, heidelberg, germany

    The corporate takeover of ‘reason’ and ‘science’

    0

    By David Miller | Those who say that they favour science and rationality can end up supporting the opposite. Science and rationality retain a very significant force in public debate and is thus worth exploiting by vested interests. The strategic use of science is a well used part of the armoury of the public relations industry. Indeed it is true to say that the founding of the PR and lobbying industries were based on attempts to pervert rationality and science in the interests of vested interests. The very earliest PR practitioners such as Freud’s nephew Edward Bernays, were adept at this. Bernays use of psychology was famously put to use in promoting cigarette smoking among women by styling them ‘torches of freedom’ and associating them with women’s equality and liberation. 

    Bernays was amongst the first to make a profession out of what he called the ‘conscious’ and intelligent manipulation’ of the beliefs and behaviour of the public. Those who ‘manipulate this unseen mechanism’ of society were, he wrote, an ‘invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country.’ 1

    Today the PR industry is still based on the same philosophy. The promotion of ‘science-i-ness’ is an ever present talisman. It has two cardinal principles. The first – seen increasingly following the neoliberal turn of the late 1970s — is that where science or truth will undermine corporate interests, the science or truth must be changed. The second principle is to disguise the source of information where useful. When a message is likely to be disbelieved or treated with scepticism when said openly by a corporation or politician, the words must be put in the mouth of someone more believable and apparently disinterested. This is the famous third party technique and has led to a whole swathe of scientists taking corporate money to promote corporate friendly science.

    Because science is still such a resource it is imperative for powerful interests to try and co-opt, undermine, distort, influence or buy ‘science’. This is now so widespread that the issue is openly debated in the scientific journals and there is a small but growing number of studies examining the question of the potential bias introduced by corporate funding.2 From the 50 year battle to protect the tobacco industry to today’s strategic use of science in climate change denial, and to muddy the waters as obesity and binge drinking become crisis issues, scientists have been recruited as a resource. For example they receive research grants, are paid as consultants or have their names added to academic journal articles ghost written by PR operatives. Some scientists are even kept on retainers by corporations or lobby groups and can be wheeled out to order.

    The third party technique fits nicely into the co-option strategy. Scientists whose research budgets are nicely swelled by corporate money can often be surprisingly willing recruits to speak on behalf of industry. A study of toxic industrial contaminants in farmed Salmon published in Science in 2004, was greeted with a chorus of condemnation in the press. Many of the voices were described as academic scientists. In fact almost all had financial links to the industry undisclosed in the press. The study itself was well grounded.3 Nonetheless the industry campaign to remove the stain of poisoned Salmon from the public mind was largely successful.

    In the US and UK the creation of ‘front groups’ is common. These are organisations usually including a science-like term in their title such as ‘foundation’ ‘institute’ or ‘research’. In the UK the food industry has been able to sabotage healthy eating initiatives since the 1970s by — among other things – funding the apparently independent British Nutrition Foundation which is able to place representatives on a myriad of government committees.4 The International Life Science Institute sounds a bit scientific. In fact it is a food industry lobby group funded by hundreds of the biggest food, pharma and chemical companies and was for years more or less directed by the Coca Cola company. It was able to infiltrate the WHO process on dietary sugars by covertly funding some of the scientists involved.5 In January 2006 the WHO decided that ILSI ‘can no longer take part in WHO activities setting microbiological or chemical standards for food and water’, as a result of complaints about its lobbying tactics.6

    The PR industry is at the forefront of creating and managing front groups today. The Scientific Alliance turned out to be run from the offices of Foresight Communications a PR firm in central London and to be funded by Scottish quarry owner Robert Durward. The Social Issues Research Centre ‘fosters the image of an ultraconcerned public spirited group’ and of ‘a heavy-weight research body’.7 It is also run by a PR/marketing company from the same address. That company – MCM Research – used to announce on its website its approach to open and truthful communications: ‘Do your PR initiatives sometimes look too much like PR initiatives? MCM conducts social/psychological research on the positive aspects of your business… The results do not read like PR literature’.8 

    Of course the corporations can do little else than lie and attempt to co-opt science. They require to extract maximum surplus from both labour and natural resources to be part of the global market. Their problem is that these qualities of corporate operations are not very attractive to the overwhelming majority of the population of the globe. As a result corporations and their PR agents must try to undermine or co-opt science. The only defence is transparency, enhanced ethics standards and public funding of research.

    NOTES

    1. Edward Bernays, Propaganda, 1928, New York: Horace Liverwright.
    2. Kassirer, J.P. On the take: How medicine’s complicity with big business can endanger your health. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press: 2005.; Lesser et al. ‘Relationship between funding source and conclusion among nutrition-related scientific articles’. PLoS Medicine 2007.; Jorgensen AW, Hilden J, Gotzsche PC. Cochrane reviews compared with industry supported meta-analyses and other meta-analyses of the same drugs: systematic review. BMJ 2006;333:782-5.;Veronica Yank, Drummond Rennie, Lisa A Bero, Financial ties and concordance between results and conclusions in meta-analyses: retrospective cohort study BMJ 2007;335:1202-1205 (8 December), doi:10.1136/bmj.39376.447211.BE (published 16 November 2007); Jim Giles, Industry money skews drug overviews Nature 437, 458-459 (22 September 2005); DeAngelis, C. Comment on “Conflict of interest in medical research: facts and friction” in meeting proceedings, call to action: Managing financial relationships between academia and industry in biomedical research 2007; 15-16.;Peppercorn, J, Blood, E., Winer, E, Partridge, A. Association between pharmaceutical involvement and outcomes in breast cancer clinical trials. Presented at the Annual Meeting of the American Society of Clinical Oncology 2005.

    3. David Miller ‘Spinning Farmed Salmon (part 2 of 3)’, Spinwatch, 28 May 2008 http://www.spinwatch.org/content/view/4953/8/

    4. Geoffrey Cannon The Politics of Food Century Hutchinson, London, UK, 1987. John Yudkin, Pure, White and Deadly, Penguin, 1988.

    5. Sarah Boseley ‘WHO “infiltrated by food industry”‘ The Guardian Thursday January 9, 2003
    http://www.guardian.co.uk/uk/2003/jan/09/foodanddrink; Sarah Boseley ‘Sugar industry threatens to scupper WHO’ The Guardian Monday April 21, 2003 http://www.guardian.co.uk/society/2003/apr/21/usnews.food; Sarah Boseley ‘WHO ‘buried’ report to please food industry’ The Guardian Wednesday November 3, 2004
    http://www.guardian.co.uk/society/2004/nov/03/media.advertising

    6. John Heilperin, ‘WHO to Rely Less on U.S. Research’, Associated Press, January 27, 2006.
    http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?f=/n/a/2006/01/27/national/w150409S47.DTL

    7. Annabel Ferriman ‘An end to health scares?’ BMJ 1999;319:716- ( 11 September ) http://bmj.bmjjournals.com/cgi/content/full/319/7211/716

    8. Ibid.

    A shorter version of this article was published in the New Scientist (subscription required) on 23 July 2008.  

    Could Coca Cola Distribution Network Save Children’s Lives?

    0
    In 1988, Simon Berry, Chief Executive of ruralnet|uk was working as a development worker in remote north east of Zambia, conscious that while he could buy a bottle of Coke anywhere, 1 in every 5 children under the age of five die in these areas through simple causes such as dehydration through diarrhea. Twenty years later, through the power of social media technology, Berry has launched a simple campaign asking Coca Cola to use a small part of its incredible distribution capacity to get medicines, such as rehydration salts, to dying children.

    Coincidently, in June 2008 Annie Lennox also made the Coca-Cola/child mortality link; “We can distribute Coca Cola all around the World but we can’t seem to get medication to save a child from something as simple as diarrhea and I think that that is wrong.”

    Since the launch of the campaign and due to the power of a Facebook group, Simon was invited by Salvatore Gabola, Coca-Cola’s Global Head of Stakeholder Relations, to a meeting to discuss the idea further at Coca-Cola’s European HQ in Brussels. To date, the campaign’s Facebook group has reached over 3,670 members since its inception on 18 May 2008.

    Simon explains; “Before the Facebook group I was getting nowhere at all. The group has changed everything and is the reason we’ve made such rapid progress …Continuing support for the idea is vital if we are to turn this idea into a reality and actually save some lives.”

    Research and development of the campaign continues to evolve. The next objective is to get an international NGO to engage with the campaign. Meanwhile research is underway in East African into Coca-Cola’s distribution system and the feasibility of the idea is being investigated and reported in Simon’s blog.

    To find out more information and to follow the story, visit www.SimonBerry.net. To support the campaign, please join the Facebook group! To get more involved and discuss ideas, you can sign up to the campaign’s Google Group “ColaLife”.

    http://www.colalife.org

    Iraq demands ‘clear timeline’ for US withdrawal

    0

    Iraq’s foreign minister insisted Sunday that any security deal with the United States must contain a “very clear timeline” for the departure of U.S. troops. A suicide bomber struck north of Baghdad, killing at least five people including an American soldier.

    Foreign Minister Hoshyar Zebari told reporters that American and Iraqi negotiators were “very close” to reaching a long-term security agreement that will set the rules for U.S. troops in Iraq after the U.N. mandate expires at the end of the year.

    Zebari said the Iraqis were insisting that the agreement include a “very clear timeline” for the withdrawal of U.S.-led forces, but he refused to talk about specific dates.

    “We have said that this is a condition-driven process,” he added, suggesting that the departure schedule could be modified if the security situation changed.

    But Zebari made clear that the Iraqis would not accept a deal that lacks a timeline for the end of the U.S. military presence.

    “No, no definitely there has to be a very clear timeline,” Zebari replied when asked if the Iraqis would accept an agreement that did not mention dates.

    Differences over a withdrawal timetable have become one of the most contentious issues remaining in the talks, which began early this year. U.S. and Iraqi negotiators missed a July 31 target date for completing the deal, which must be approved by Iraq’s parliament.

    President Bush has steadfastly refused to accept any timetable for bringing U.S. troops home. Last month, however, Bush and Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki agreed to set a “general time horizon” for a U.S. departure.

    Last week, two senior Iraqi officials told The Associated Press that American negotiators had agreement to a formula which would remove U.S. forces from Iraqi cities by June 30, 2009 with all combat troops out of the country by October 2010.

    The last American support troops would leave about three years later, the Iraqis said.

    But U.S. officials insist there is no agreement on specific dates. Both the American and Iraqi officials spoke on condition of anonymity because the talks are ongoing. Iraq’s Shiite-led government believes a withdrawal schedule is essential to win parliamentary approval.

    American officials have been less optimistic because of major differences on key issues including who can authorize U.S. military operations and immunity for U.S. troops from prosecution under Iraqi law.

    The White House said discussions continued on a bilateral agreement and said any timeframe discussed was due to major improvements in security over the past year.

    “We are only now able to discuss conditions-based time horizons because security has improved so much. This would not have been possible 18 months ago,” White House spokesman Gordon Johndroe said Sunday. “We all look forward to the day when Iraqi security forces take the lead on more combat missions, allowing U.S. troops to serve in an overwatch role, and more importantly return home.”

    Iraq’s position in the U.S. talks hardened after a series of Iraqi military successes against Shiite and Sunni extremists in Basra, Baghdad, Mosul and other major cities.

    Violence in Iraq has declined sharply over the past year following a U.S. troop buildup, a Sunni revolt against al-Qaida in Iraq and a Shiite militia cease-fire.

    But attacks continue, raising concern that the militants are trying to regroup.

    The suicide bomber struck Sunday afternoon as U.S. and Iraqi troops were responding to a roadside bombing that wounded an Iraqi in Tarmiyah, 30 miles north of Baghdad, the U.S. military said.

    Four Iraqi civilians were killed along with the American soldier, military spokesman Lt. Col. Steve Stover said. Two American soldiers and an Iraqi interpreter were among 24 people wounded.

    No group claimed responsibility for the blast but suicide bombings are the signature attack of al-Qaida in Iraq.

    “This was a heinous attack by al-Qaida in Iraq against an Iraqi family, followed by a cowardly attack against innocent civilians, their security forces and U.S. soldiers,” Stover said.

    Elsewhere, a suicide car bomber attacked the Kurdish security department in Khanaqin, 90 miles northeast of Baghdad. At least two people were killed and 25 wounded, including the commander of local Kurdish forces, Lt. Col. Majid Ahmed, police said.

    Ethnic tensions have been rising in northern Iraq amid disputes between Kurds, Turkomen and mostly Sunni Arabs over Kurdish demands to annex the oil-rich city of Kirkuk into their self-ruled region.

    Sawarah Ghalib, 25, who was wounded in the blast, said he believed military operations under way south of the city in Diyala province had pushed insurgents into the Khanaqin area.

    “I did not expect that a terrorist attack to take place in our secure town,” Ghalib said from his bed in the Khanaqin hospital. “Al-Qaida is to blame for this attack. Operations in Diyala have pushed them here.”

    In Baghdad, six people were killed in a series of bombings on the first day of the Iraqi work week.

    The deadliest blast occurred about 8:15 a.m. in a crowded area where people wait for buses in the capital’s mainly Shiite southeastern district of Kamaliya. Four people were killed, including a woman and her brother, and 11 others wounded, according to police.

    A car bomb later exploded as an Iraqi army patrol transporting money to a state-run bank passed by in Baghdad’s central Khillani square, killing two people including an Iraqi soldier and wounding nine other people, a police officer said.

    Another Iraqi soldier was killed and five were wounded by a car bomb in Salman Pak, about 25 kilometers south of Baghdad, police said.

    ___

    Associated Press writers Hamza Hendawi, Kim Gamel and Sameer N. Yacoub in Baghdad and Yahya Barzanji in Sulaimaniyah contributed to this report.

    Why the Drug War is a Crime against Humanity Explained

    4

    Like the Iraq war and the “war on terror”, the so-called “drug war” is a government contrived “war” based on lies that generates massive profits for a few while causing massive suffering for many.

    The drug war is futile by design (and thus never-ending) because it doesn’t “fight” drugs–quite the contrary–it strongly encourages production and distribution of prohibited drugs by guaranteeing extremely high profits.

    But the most insidious and evil aspect of the drug war is it manufactures its own enemies by criminalizing the most basic of human rights–the right of sovereignty over your own body. The drug war could not exist without first inventing a bogus crime.

    Our government wastes billions of tax dollars each year harassing and jailing millions of decent, productive Americans for a government-invented “crime”. The use of drugs (even dangerous drugs like alcohol and nicotine) simply doesn’t meet any reasonable definition of “crime”.

    Real crime requires action that harms another. Real crime requires both a victim and a perpetrator. For example, robbery harms another and has both a victim and a perpetrator. Only a corrupt, depraved government could invent a crime you commit against yourself.

    If you use certain drugs, our government claims you’re both a criminal and a victim at the same time. Since the perpetrator can’t be separated from the victim, the victim is further punished for the “crime”. This pathetic perversion of justice is vigorously championed by our government for selfish political reasons.

    More than 50 government agencies share billions of your tax dollars each year “fighting” a government-created crime. Of the millions of illegal drug users, the vast majority use marijuana. If marijuana were legal like alcohol, these government agencies would suddenly lose billions of dollars because millions of former “criminals” would suddenly be granted sovereignty over their own bodies. The vast army amassed to fight the drug war would need to be dissolved at great cost.

    That’s why our government strongly opposes even honest debate about marijuana legalization because this massive money-making scam would soon end.

    Ingesting nicotine, alcohol, fatty foods, or certain drugs may be unwise. But why is it a crime? If a drug user or a non-drug user harms another they should be treated equally. But the bogus “crime” of drug use doesn’t require harming anyone. Nor does it require a victim and a perpetrator. It only requires a government-invented, bogus criminal/victim, a drug user.

    By using lies and deception our government convinces gullible Americans that simply putting something into your own body is a serious crime. But evidence clearly shows that nearly all the harm associated with drug use is caused by creating the bogus crime, not from the actual drug use. There are millions of drug users, but relatively few are harmed by their drug use. These few should be patients, not criminals.

    But it’s not just the millions arrested for drug use who suffer from this gross injustice. We gullible Americans have allowed our government to invent a bogus crime that causes massive misery worldwide while costing the taxpayers billions.

    Consider the following list of easily avoidable human tragedies that are the direct result of a government-invented, bogus crime: A tax-free, unregulated, multi-billion-dollar drug industry necessarily run by violent criminals; a giant law enforcement bureaucracy wasting billions in a futile attempt to curtail this drug industry, which, in fact, guarantees its extreme profitability; a deteriorating public education system robbed of billions to support this law enforcement bureaucracy; courts and prisons overflowing with non-violent “criminals” while murderers, rapists and real criminals go free; tens of thousands of children enduring the suffering and stigma of having one or both parents in jail for a bogus “crime”; the gradual erosion of our Constitution as more and more civil liberties are sacrificed to fight a crime “made in USA.”; rampant corruption of foreign governments (like Mexico and Columbia), so driven by US drug profits that life and human rights are secondary; thousands of adults and children infected and dying from HIV because distributing clean needles is a “crime”; violent street gangs with little incentive for education or legitimate jobs reaping huge drug profits made possible by a bogus crime; a growing death toll from police breaking down doors to catch people using substances less dangerous than tobacco, alcohol or fatty foods; a growing cynicism and disrespect for all laws and authority fueled by the knowledge our government can arbitrarily invent a bogus crime…

    This sordid list goes on and on.

    We’re appalled when Islamic regimes invent bogus crimes against reading certain books, or listening to certain music. Using certain drugs is our government’s version of the same thing. But the worldwide consequences of US drug prohibition are far more serious and severe. All of these “crimes” lack the moral basis of real crime. All are clear cases of a repressive government dictating the private personal behavior of its citizens.

    If real crime is knowingly causing harm to others, then the real crime here is not drug use, but making drug use a “crime”. And the real criminals are not drug users, but ordinary people like us, who sit back and condone a ruthless scam that has been exported and exploited around the world leaving massive human suffering in its wake.

    Carmen Yarrusso

    Tape: Top CIA official confesses order to forge Iraq-9/11 letter came on White House stationery

    1

    Raw Story | A forged letter linking Saddam Hussein to the Sept. 11, 2001 attacks was ordered on White House stationery and probably came from the office of Vice President Dick Cheney, according to a new transcript of a conversation with the Central Intelligence Agency’s former Deputy Chief of Clandestine Operations Robert Richer.

    The transcript was posted Friday by author Ron Suskind of an interview conducted in June. It comes on the heels of denials by both the White House and Richer of a claim Suskind made in his new book, The Way of The World. The book was leaked to Politico’s Mike Allen on Monday, and released Tuesday.

    On Tuesday, the White House released a statement on Richer’s behalf. In it, Richer declared, “I never received direction from George Tenet or anyone else in my chain of command to fabricate a document … as outlined in Mr. Suskind’s book.”

    The denial, however, directly contradicts Richer’s own remarks in the transcript.

    “Now this is from the Vice President’s Office is how you remembered it–not from the president?” Suskind asked.

    “No, no, no,” Richer replied, according to the transcript. “What I remember is George [Tenet] saying, ‘we got this from’–basically, from what George said was ‘downtown.'”

    “Which is the White House?” Suskind asked.

    “Yes,” Richer said. “But he did not–in my memory–never said president, vice president, or NSC. Okay? But now–he may have hinted–just by the way he said it, it would have–cause almost all that stuff came from one place only: Scooter Libby and the shop around the vice president.”

    “But he didn’t say that specifically,” Richer added. “I would naturally–I would probably stand on my, basically, my reputation and say it came from the vice president.”

    “But there wasn’t anything in the writing that you remember saying the vice president,” Suskind continued.

    “Nope,” Richer said.

    “It just had the White House stationery.”

    “Exactly right.”

    Later, Richer added, “You know, if you’ve ever seen the vice president’s stationery, it’s on the White House letterhead. It may have said OVP (Office of the Vice President). I don’t remember that, so I don’t want to mislead you.”

    Suskind says decision to post transcript unusual

    Suskind posted the transcript at his blog, saying, “This posting is contrary to my practice across 25 years as a journalist. But the issues, in this matter, are simply too important to stand as discredited in any way.” It was first picked up by ThinkProgress and Congressional Quarterly’s Jeff Stein.

    Suskind’s new book asserts that senior Bush officials ordered the CIA to forge a document “proving” that Saddam Hussein had been trying to manufacture nuclear weapons and was collaborating with al Qaeda. The alleged result was a faked memorandum from then chief of Saddam’s intelligence service Tahir Jalil Habbush dated July 1, 2001, and written to Hussein.

    The bogus memo claimed that 9/11 hijacker Mohammed Atta had received training in Baghdad but also discussed the arrival of a “shipment” from Niger, which the Administration claimed had supplied Iraq with yellowcake uranium — based on yet another forged document whose source remains uncertain.

    The memo subsequently was treated as fact by the British Sunday Telegraph, and cited by William Safire in his New York Times column, providing fodder for Bush’s efforts to take the US to war.

    The Sunday Telegraph cited the main source for its story on Iraq’s 9/11 involvement as Ayad Allawi, a former Baathist who rebelled against Saddam and was appointed a government position after the US occupation.

    Nothing in the story explains how an Iraqi politician was privy to the fake memo, but the New York Times column alluded to Allawi and described him as “an Iraqi leader long considered reliable by intelligence agencies.”

    “To characterize it right,” Richer also declares in the transcript, “I would say, right: it came to us, George had a raised eyebrow, and basically we passed it on–it was to–and passed this on into the organization. You know, it was: ‘Okay, we gotta do this, but make it go away.’ To be honest with you, I don’t want to make it sound–I for sure don’t want to portray this as George jumping: ‘Okay, this has gotta happen.’ As I remember it–and, again, it’s still vague, so I’ll be very straight with you on this–is it wasn’t that important. It was: ‘This is unbelievable. This is just like all the other garbage we get about . . . I mean Mohammad Atta and links to al Qaeda. ‘Rob,’ you know, ‘do something with this.’ I think it was more like that than: ‘Get this done.'”

    Magazine asserts Feith created bogus document

    Today, The American Conservative also published a report saying that the forgery was actually produced by then-Defense Undersecretary Douglas Feith’s Office of Special Plans, citing an unnamed intelligence source. The source reportedly added that Suskind’s overall claim “is correct.”

    “My source also notes that Dick Cheney, who was behind the forgery, hated and mistrusted the Agency and would not have used it for such a sensitive assignment,” the magazine wrote. “Instead, he went to Doug Feith’s Office of Special Plans and asked them to do the job. … It was Feith’s office that produced the letter and then surfaced it to the media in Iraq. Unlike the [Central Intelligence] Agency, the Pentagon had no restrictions on it regarding the production of false information to mislead the public. Indeed, one might argue that Doug Feith’s office specialized in such activity.”

    More of Suskind’s transcripts are available here

    State and Local Prosecutors Can Take Down Bush

    0

    By David Swanson | Former prosecutor Vincent Bugliosi’s new book “The Prosecution of George W. Bush for Murder” is not just a particularly good addition to the ten-foot high stack of rants against Bush’s crimes and abuses of power. It’s also an argument that state and local prosecutors have the necessary jurisdiction to try Bush for murder and for conspiracy to commit murder, at least once he’s out of office.

    This is not a scheme based on some harebrained theory that Bush faked the suicide of a former staffer. In fact, this scheme is based on nothing more than universally accepted facts. Bush chose to send US troops into Iraq. He did not do so in self-defense or as a last resort or under an international mandate, but rather went out of his way to concoct false motives for war and to rush its launching. By sending troops into war, Bush was knowingly and needlessly but certainly condemning some of them to death. The Iraqis who killed those soldiers in predictable and legally justifiable defense of their country fall into the legal category of “third-party innocent agent.” This does not mean they are innocent, but rather that their actions do nothing to lessen the guilt of George W. Bush as murderer of those soldiers. Bugliosi calls this the “vicarious liability rule of conspiracy.” Bugliosi explains:

    “In other words, if Bush personally killed an American soldier, he would be guilty of murder. Under the law, he cannot immunize himself from his criminal responsibility by causing a third party to do the killing. He’s still responsible. George Bush cannot sit safely in his Oval Office in Washington, D.C., while young American soldiers fighting his war are being blown to pieces by roadside bombs in Iraq, and wash his hands of all culpability. It’s not quite that easy. He could only do this if he did not take this nation into war under false pretenses. If he did, which the evidence overwhelmingly shows, he is criminally responsible for the thousands of American deaths in Iraq.” In addition, Bugliosi argues, Bush could be found guilty of murder under the rule of “aiding and abetting,” because he instigated the killing of American soldiers by ordering the invasion of Iraq.

    Did Bush have “malice aforethought”? Yes, according to Bugliosi. We convict people of murder for driving 100 mph through a school zone and hitting a child, or for blowing up a building while unaware that someone is inside. These are cases where the murderer does not know he is committing murder but where he is reckless enough to take an unreasonable risk of doing so. In Bush’s case, he absolutely knew that invading Iraq would involve US casualties, and yet he ordered the invasion, thereby acting with the intent that American soldiers be killed. Bugliosi strengthens this argument by pointing out that we often convict people of murder for accidental killings that occur in the act of committing other felonies:

    “A robber, for instance, was convicted of first degree murder under the felony-murder rule where, as he was leaving the store in which he had robbed the owner, he told the owner not to say a word or he’d be harmed, and fired into the ceiling to scare the owner. The shot, after two or three ricochets, pierced the head of the owner, killing him. In fact, the felony-murder rule applies even where the defendant is not the killer! There have been cases where the proprietor of the store fired at a robber, missed him and hit and killed a customer. And the robber was convicted of first degree murder of the customer.”

    Bugliosi missed an opportunity here to further strengthen his case by noting that in the act of ordering the invasion of Iraq, Bush was committing a number of felonies. When Bush submitted his March 18, 2003, letter and report to the United States Congress providing reasons for attacking Iraq, he violated the federal anti-conspiracy statute, 18 U.S.C. – 371, which makes it a felony “to commit any offense against the United States, or to defraud the United States, or any agency thereof in any manner or for any purpose…”; and The False Statements Accountability Act of 1996, 18 U.S.C. – 1001, which makes it a felony to issue knowingly and willfully false statements to the United States Congress. Bush also committed a felony by misappropriating funds to secretly begin the invasion prior to this date.

    Bugliosi notes that there is no statute of limitations for murder. Bush could be prosecuted by any future federal prosecutor who had the nerve to do so and could do so while keeping his or her job. But Bugliosi writes that a state attorney general or any district attorney in any city or county could bring a murder charge against Bush for any soldiers from that state or county who lost their lives in Iraq. And not just Bush, but Cheney, Rice, et alia. Bugliosi provides some truly talented proposals for questioning Bush in court and adds:

    “I would be more than happy, if requested, to consult with any prosecutor who decides to prosecute Bush in preparation of additional cross-examination questions for him to face on the witness stand. I believe the cross-examination would be such that they’d have to carry the arrogant son of privilege off the stand on a stretcher.”

    I know the same offer to assist stands from former federal prosecutor Elizabeth de la Vega, author of “United States versus George W. Bush et al.”

    Bugliosi argues that such trials could only take place once Bush is out of office, but is uncharacteristically weak in his explanation of why. Bugliosi thinks it was a mistake to allow the Paula Jones case to take time away from Clinton’s duties as president, but he clearly does not believe taking time away from Bush’s duties as president could possibly harm anyone or anything. And Bugliosi cites no decisive constitutional or legal basis for preventing a prosecution from beginning while Bush is still president.

    The question, in any case, is where we can find (or elect) one or two or a dozen prosecutors willing to stand up to the biggest murderer of our age. We need a project to identify the most likely combinations of prosecutors and gold star families, and work together with those families to urge prosecution. We are working on this at http://convictbushcheney.org

    Why do I call Bush the biggest murderer of our age for a mere 4,000 murders, not counting his neglect prior to Katrina and 9-11, his exacerbation of global warming, his opposition to workplace safety standards or medical research, etc.? I have in mind, of course, the over 1 million Iraqis who have died as a result of his invasion of Iraq. Bugliosi does not see any legal case to try Bush for the murders of Iraqis, but he also openly admits that he cares more about the deaths of Americans. In addition to that disgusting confession, Bugliosi repeatedly cites the figure 100,000 as the number of Iraqi deaths, but never indicates where he came up with that number or how he ignores the fact that every serious study has placed the count above a million. Bugliosi also repeatedly claims that Bush won the 2004 election, and expresses his belief that congress members who voted to invade Iraq actually believed the White House lies about weapons. Bugliosi’s is not a perfect book, but it is a brilliant one, and is as good a one as any to offer to anyone not yet devoted to putting Bush and Cheney behind bars.

    Bugliosi concludes his book with an excellent analysis of what happened on 9-11 and how the media and the public have responded. His account of how often Bush was warned prior to 9-11 and how little (nothing) he did in response is very well done, but includes at least one glaring error (at least glaring to those of us privileged to get our own briefings on these things from Ray McGovern). George Tenet did indeed, as Bugliosi recounts, tell the 9-11 Commission on April 14, 2004, that he did not speak with Bush for the whole month of August, 2001. But a CIA spokesperson called reporters that same evening to claim that Tenet had “misspoken” and that Tenet had briefed Bush on August 17th and 31st. In his book, At the Center of the Storm, (2007) Tenet refers to the August 17th meeting as a follow-up to the August 6th memo on Bin Laden. A White House press release suggests that Tenet was also in Crawford a week later, on August 24th. President Bush, addressing a group of visitors to Crawford on August 25, told them: “George Tenet and I, yesterday, we piled in the new nominees for the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs, the Vice Chairman and their wives and went right up the canyon.”

    Bugliosi notes in his book that more evidence will continue to pile up. His claim, like so many others’, is only that the evidence he has compiled is more than sufficient to put Bush away for life. On that point, if you read this book, I think you’ll agree there can be no doubt whatsoever.

    HOO U GONNA COAL?

    0

    SchNews | It’s another mediocre summer and we’re back at the Camp for Climate Action. First there was Drax, then Heathrow and now the sequel… Climate Camp III has been set on the east coast of Kent three miles or so from Kingsnorth – already home to a power station that pumps out as much carbon dioxide as the 30 least-polluting countries in the world combined — and proposed site of first new UK coal-fired power station for 30 years.

    So SchNEWS reporters have joined the great unwashed throng of around a thousand and a half others, made up of yer usual rabble-rousing regulars – including, according to cops, 150 extremists (only 150? Come on black bloc let’s be aving yer!), plus up-for-it students, ageing hippies and Guardian-carrying liberals (the paper did their own bijoux guide to the camp – getting the day of the mass action wrong. Oops).

    Having taken the site — a mile outside Hoo St Weburgh on Wednesday last week (July 30), initially there were not enough people to defend it and riot police carried out a number of heavy-handed raids, beating up campaigners and nicking important infrastructure gear like plumbing etc. Whilst some of this is still impounded, ever-resourceful campers have found ways round it and the actual organisation is once again clockwork. One hard-bitten, over-60 was heard to comment: “How come it’s always the anarchists who provide the best organised, most efficient kitchens”. Couldn’t agree more mate – the SchNEWS chef de resistance has given the vegan food a rating of 8/10 this year!

    Police tactics have been the main talking point at the camp so far. A rumoured wholly-proportionate 1,400 cops are involved at a cost of £5m, with forces from Wales, Kent itself and the trusty ‘boot ‘em first pay compensation later’ Met. Unlike the hotels which were laid on for cops last year, it looks like they’re slumming it in their very own super tent (a kind of close encounters white dome structure) up on the hill back down past Hoo. Clearly unhappy at being so completely out-manoeuvred once again by camp organisers – setting up camp under their noses – they are venting their frustrations in a number of ways.

    For starters everyone on the main route into the camp (on Dux Court Rd) gets searched, coming in as well as out (one to bear in mind for Saturday’s mass action when green/orange/blue/silver blocks will aim to shut Kingsnorth down for the day). Things which have been so far been confiscated include, er, some glue and a bar of soap. As well as wheeling out a War on Terror board game for Murdoch journo types to slaver over, police claim they found a stash of weapons in the woods nearby including a ‘replica’ ninja throwing star (a plastic toy maybe?) and an assortment of knives including a three bladed affair which could allegedley be used against a police horse (lots of vegan horse killers at the camp this year then?)

    Other bullshit to come protesters way include the constant buzzing of police helicopters during the day and night — including low flying for the purposes of thermal imaging or intimidation presumably. It looks like top brass are looking to cause as much discomfort to campers as possible, despite paying lip-service with the softly softly police liaison teams. These have tried to get a police caravan on site – which was turned down – and last year’s arrangements of an escorted police beat every couple of hours is not happening. With the stand-off hardening, each night the camp has been awoken two or three times to deal with the threat of a raid with increased numbers pigging out the front and rear access points.

    Vehicles have been impounded — included the camp shuttle bus running from Strood to site on one occasion — and most of the supplies have as a result had to be carried in on bikes/wheelbarrows and Shanks pony.

    Still, not to be put off, the camp is proving popular with locals around the Medway area, despite the welcoming local paper A-boards (‘Medway invaded by eco-warriors’ and the like). More families, pensioners, and terrible teens have been turning up than did last year at Heathrow.

    With Saturday’s shenanighans to come it’s looking like Kingsnorth could be a timely reminder to Brown and co. that we won’t be taking their greenwash lying down. For more info on the mass action and the reasons behind the No New Coal message go to www.climatecamp.org.uk

    F.B.I. Says It Obtained Reporters’ Phone Records

    0

    WASHINGTON – The Federal Bureau of Investigation said Friday that it had improperly obtained the phone records of reporters for The New York Times and The Washington Post in the newspapers’ Indonesia bureaus in 2004.

    Robert S. Mueller III, director of the F.B.I., disclosed the episode in a phone call to Bill Keller, the executive editor of The Times, and apologized for it. He also spoke with Leonard Downie Jr., the executive editor of The Washington Post, to apologize.

    F.B.I. officials said the incident came to light as part of the continuing review by the Justice Department inspector general’s office into the bureau’s improper collection of telephone records through “emergency” records demands issued to phone providers.

    The records were apparently sought as part of a terrorism investigation, but the F.B.I. did not explain what was being investigated or why the reporters’ phone records were considered relevant.

    The Justice Department places a high bar on the collection of reporters’ records in investigations because of First Amendment concerns, and obtaining such records requires the approval of the deputy attorney general. That requirement was not followed when the F.B.I. obtained the records of two reporters for The Times in Indonesia, Raymond Bonner and Jane Perlez, as well as two reporters there for The Post, Ellen Nakashima and Natasha Tampubolon, officials said.

    “The F.B.I. is committed to protecting the news media consistent with the First Amendment and Department of Justice policies, and we very much regret that this situation occurred,” Valerie Caproni, general counsel for the bureau, wrote in a letter to Mr. Keller faxed Friday.

    Ms. Caproni said the telephone records, which list the numbers that were called but do not show the calls’ content, had been purged from the F.B.I.’s databases. She also said the records were not used as part of any investigation.

    But Mr. Downie said it was not clear to him why the F.B.I. was interested in his reporters’ records in the first place.

    “I want to find more about what this is about,” he said. “We will be asking our general counsel to advise us on what more we should be doing about this.”

    Mr. Keller said: “I told the director that it was gracious of him to apologize. Of course, we’d still like to know more about how this happened and how the bureau is securing against similar violations in the future.”

    An initial report by the inspector general last year found that the F.B.I. had violated its own policies in tens of thousands of cases by obtaining phone records in terrorism investigations through what are known as national security letters, without first getting needed approval or meeting other standards. In some cases, the F.B.I. used a whole new class of demands – emergency or “exigent” letters – that are not authorized by law. The emergency records were used in the Indonesian episode.

    The inspector general’s findings have prompted outrage in Congress, with leading lawmakers calling for greater checks on the F.B.I.’s ability to gather private information in terrorism investigations. But bureau officials say they have instituted internal reforms to solve the problem.

    THE NEW YORK TIMES

    Class War Reply To The New Statesman

    9

    Class War | The 7 August issue of the New Statesman has a lengthy piece by Stephan Armstrong on “The New Spies”. 

    Amongst an analysis of the private security industry targeting protesters at events like the Kent climate camp, Armstrong makes the curious claim that Class War was run by the security services in the 1990s. News to us.

    Below is a reply from a member of London Class War to the New Statesman:

    As a member of Class War since 1992, I was staggered to read a line in Stephen Armstrong’s article (the New Statesman 7 August 2008) on “The New Spies”. Your reporter writes:

    “Like the state security services, which ended up running Class War in the 1990s after a hugely successful penetration……”

    Can you back that claim up with facts, or is any old rubbish acceptable when it comes to Anarchist organisations?

    We do hope you have not been taken in by 9/11 ‘truth’ activists (and ex-MI5 officers) Annie Machon and David Shayler, who have both come out with conflicting claims about attempted state inflitration of Class War in the early 1990s.

    Shayler withdrew his (contradictory) claims about Class War at a public debate with Notes From the Borderland magazine at Conway Hall in 2005. He now makes a living claiming to be the messiah.
    As for his former partner Annie Machon (freely quoted in your piece) the New Statesman should treat with caution a woman who has pushed red baiting pieces about Tony Benn, Jack Jones and the KGB in the Mail on Sunday, and who has worked alongside some extremely dubious characters in the nuttier fringes of the 9/11 ‘truth’ movement.

    As a revolutionary organisation, Class War is bound to be targeted – on occasion – by the police and security services. Such is life – especially in a society with seemingly never ending funds for public order policing and the secret state.

    That situation will not be improved as long as we have ‘experts’ with the limited or biased knowledge of Stephan Armstrong, Annie Machon and David Shayler. It will certainly continue until we have the sort of radical change this society needs.

    Climate protesters arrested after gluing themselves to bank

    0

    guardian.co.uk | Two environmental activists who glued themselves to the front doors of a bank in London today have been arrested for a breach of the peace, police said.

    A group of four protesters calling themselves Rising Tide held a banner outside the Royal Bank of Scotland reading: “RBS – cashing in on coal” and handed out leaflets.

    The protest was part of the week-long camp for climate action, taking place outside Kingsnorth power station in Kent.

    Protesters are campaigning against a new generation of coal-fired electricity plants.

    The activists staged the demonstration at the entrance to the RBS oil and gas division to highlight the relationship between the financial sector, the fossil fuel industry and climate change.

    In another protest, the Eon-sponsored Lego model of Kingsnorth power station at the Legoland Park in Windsor was “occupied” by tiny Lego eco-activists with a banner reading: “Stop climate change.”

    The actions followed a series of protests yesterday when green campaigners blockaded a biofuel depot in Essex, unfurled banners at Gatwick airport and staged a “die-in” at the RBS headquarters by lying in a pool of oil outside the building.

    Around 1,500 people have now converged on the climate camp site amid a heavy police presence to prepare for tomorrow’s day of mass action.

    Protesters have planned an assault by land, water and air to “shut down” Kingsnorth.

    One group of campaigners will lead a procession to the power station’s main gates, while another will reach it through undergrowth.

    A third aims to make a secret air approach, while a fourth plans to stage a “great rebel raft regatta” despite moves by police to ban the flotilla on health and safety grounds.

    Some politicians have expressed concerns over policing at the climate camp, which has been described as “heavyhanded” by protesters.

    The Green party MEP for the south-east, Dr Caroline Lucas, the Liberal Democrat MP for Lewes, Norman Baker, and the Morley and Rothwell Labour MP, Colin Challen, have written to Kent police calling for action to resolve the “increasingly threatening confrontation”.

    They said the escalating situation had been caused, in part, by “a disproportionate police response”.

    The comments came as Kent police extended stop and search powers for officers policing the protests yesterday.

    ‘No to Olympics without human rights’

    0

    A protester tried to set himself alight outside the Chinese embassy in Ankara on Friday as Chinese Muslims denounced human rights violations in China ahead of the opening of the Olympic Games.

    About 300 people, mostly Uighur refugees from China’s Muslim-majority region of Xinjiang, were seen gathered amid tight security outside the embassy to denounce the Olympic Games being held in Beijing.

    While a spokesperson was reading a statement to the press, one of the demonstrators set himself alight, burning his face and hands before the police intervened and extinguished the flames.

    The man, in his 30s, was sent to hospital.

    “No to Olympics without human rights,” “Killer China” and “Save East Turkestan,” read some of the placards the demonstrators brandished.

    The population in Xinjiang, in China’s far north-west, is made of predominantly Muslim Turkic-origin Uighurs, many of whom say they have been subjected to 60 years of communist repression.

    Many Uighurs have sought refuge in Turkey, where some Islamist and nationalist groups lend support to demands for an independent Uighur homeland in the region, which they refer to as East Turkestan.

    Uighur refugees staged demonstrations in Turkey in April when the Olympic torch passed through Istanbul.

    Chinese authorities on Friday announced stepped-up controls on religious figures and potential “trouble-makers” in the Xinjiang city of Kashgar to guard against attacks on the Beijing Olympics.

    The order followed an attack Monday that killed 16 police officers and a new threat by Xinjiang separatists to attack the Games.

    Source

    Call to crack down on police taser use

    0

    By Mark Davis | CIVIL rights advocates have seized on Federal Government plans for legal bans on torture to argue for tighter controls on the use of tasers by police.

    The Attorney-General, Robert McClelland, said yesterday the Government was taking steps to ratify the optional protocol to the United Nations convention against torture, which would allow international inspectors to visit Australian prisons.

    He said the Government was also considering making torture an offence under federal law, which would bolster state prohibitions and might also apply to Australians overseas.

    The president of the Australian Council for Civil Liberties, Terry O’Gorman, called on the Government to push for stricter state rules on the use of tasers by police.

    Tasers – electronic stun guns used to paralyse offenders – are used by police in NSW, Queensland and Western Australia.

    Mr O’Gorman said they were extremely painful, potentially lethal and overused by police.

    But Mr McClelland said the UN anti-torture rules and the use of tasers were separate issues.

    “Clearly, if a taser is used as an alternative to shooting someone dead, then that is one thing,” he said. “If, on the other hand, a taser was used to repeatedly fire into someone for the purpose of eliciting information, then obviously that is a different situation.”

    Australia has already ratified the UN convention against torture, which requires signatories to stop torture inside their borders.

    But the Howard government refused to ratify the convention’s optional protocol, which allows for inspections of signatories’ prisons, detention centres and psychiatric institutions.

    While neither the convention nor the protocol prohibits tasers, the UN’s committee against torture has said they can cause acute pain amounting to torture.

    A spokesman for the NSW Police Minister, David Campbell, said the UN convention would not affect the use of tasers by NSW police because they were tightly monitored and were not used in questioning of offenders or suspects.

    “The taser has been issued to specially trained NSW police officers and is used to subdue an offender who presents an immediate threat to the public and/or police,” the spokesman said.

     

    Waterboard torture a theme park attraction

    0

    By Ritsuko Ando in New York | A MAN with a black hood pours water on the face of a prisoner in an orange jumpsuit strapped to a table: no, it’s not Guantanamo Bay naval base, but New York’s Coney Island amusement park.

    The scene using robotic dolls is an installation built by artist Steve Powers to criticise waterboarding, a simulated drowning technique the US has admitted using on terrorism suspects, but that rights group say is torture.

    “Waterboard Thrill Ride” beckons a sign, along with cartoon character SpongeBob SquarePants who appears tied down and exclaiming: “It don’t Gitmo better!”

    The public can peek through window bars and feed a dollar into the slot to bring the robotic dolls into action, one more attraction in the beachfront amusement park in the New York neighborhood of Brooklyn.

    “Anyone can see this is painful from 50 feet away,” said Mr Powers, who had previously been painting signs and storefronts in the area. “I wanted people to understand the psychological ramifications of this.”

    Marion Tracey, 57, from New Jersey, said she found the installation disturbing. It made her think of her father who had nightmares after returning from World War II.

    “In all wars, horrible things happen,” she said. “I’d rather not see it.”

    Alex Soto, 23, said he thought it was a good thing for people to learn about waterboarding, but he added: “It is pretty twisted.”

    Why DNA databases are doomed

    0

    By Glyn Moody | I’ve been against DNA databases for years, but I’ve always felt that the generic arguments I’ve been using were a little pallid, shall we say. And now, in what amounts to almost a throwaway comment, the wonderful Reg gives me what I’ve been looking for:

    Although police are keen to bang the drum for cases where DNA evidence has proved vital, there are obvious privacy objections as well as fears that over-reliance on DNA evidence will lead criminals to use it as an alibi – infecting a crime scene with someone else’s DNA.

    At the moment, there’s not much point doing that because DNA isn’t regarded as as an indispensable, infallible tool. Put everyone’s DNA in a database, and the police are bound to get lazy – that’s human nature – using it as a quick and foolproof method for finding perpetrators.

    At that point, it will be worth seeding crime scenes with some judiciously-chosen DNA – secure in the knowledge that the rozzers will be able to work out whose it is. At this point, DNA begins to lose its value, as everyone starts sprinkling the stuff everywhere, utterly confusing the DNA bloodhounds.

    And so, inevitably, we will be left with a huge DNA database, useless for its original purpose, built at enormous cost, posing an even huger security risk. Great. Not.

    DMCA Does Not Apply to U.S. Government

    0

    Via Bruce Schneier |  According to a recent court ruling, we are all subject to the provisions of the DMCA, but the government is not:

    he Court of Federal Claims that first heard the case threw it out, and the new Appellate ruling upholds that decision. The reasoning behind the decisions focuses on the US government’s sovereign immunity, which the court describes thusly: “The United States, as [a] sovereign, ‘is immune from suit save as it consents to be sued . . . and the terms of its consent to be sued in any court define that court’s jurisdiction to entertain the suit.'”In the case of copyright law, the US has given up much of its immunity, but the government retains a few noteworthy exceptions. The one most relevant to this case says that when a government employee is in a position to induce the use of the copyrighted material, “[the provision] does not provide a Government employee a right of action ‘where he was in a position to order, influence, or induce use of the copyrighted work by the Government.'” Given that Davenport used his position as part of the relevant Air Force office to get his peers to use his software, the case fails this test.

    But the court also addressed the DMCA claims made by Blueport, and its decision here is quite striking. “The DMCA itself contains no express waiver of sovereign immunity,” the judge wrote, “Indeed, the substantive prohibitions of the DMCA refer to individual persons, not the Government.” Thus, because sovereign immunity is not explicitly eliminated, and the phrasing of the statute does not mention organizations, the DMCA cannot be applied to the US government, even in cases where the more general immunity to copyright claims does not apply.

    It appears that Congress took a “do as we say, not as we need to do” approach to strengthening digital copyrights.

    Peaceful Protesters Become Terrorists in a Federal Database

    2

    By Patty Donovan | According to documents released on Thursday, July 17, 2008, undercover state troopers in Maryland infiltrated at least three groups peacefully protesting the death penalty and advocating peace. These troopers illegally sent reports of the activities of these groups to U.S. intelligence and military agencies. The Maryland chapter of the ACLU was able to obtain these documents through a Freedom of Information lawsuit claiming the state police refused to release the documents proving they illegally spied on peace activists.

    This illegal, clandestine reporting occurred from March 2005 to May 2006. The officers involved used false names or “covert identities” to open special email accounts in order to receive messages from the groups. They participated fully in these groups, attending meetings and protests.

    Within these 46 pages of documents is an account of an activist’s name being entered into a federal database of terrorist and drug trafficking suspects. This particular database is termed HIDTA for the (Washington-Baltimore) High Intensity Drug Trafficking Area and was formed to enable local, state and federal law-enforcement agencies to share information on such suspects.

    Activist Max Obuszewski, whose only “crime” was opposition of the death penalty was listed in the database as a terrorist. His “primary” crime was “terrorism-anti-government” with a secondary crime of “terrorism-anti-war protesters”.

    According to ACLU attorney David Rocah, federal laws prohibit departments that receive federal funds from maintaining databases of political activities and affiliations and state police violated these laws. Mr. Rocah stated: “This is not supposed to happen in America. In a free society, which relies on the engagement of citizens in debate and protest and political activity to maintain that freedom… you should be able to attend a meeting about an issue you care about without having to worry that government spies are entering your name into a database used to track alleged terrorists and drug traffickers.” He called the surveillance “Kafka-esque insanity.”

    The unlawful surveillance of Mr. Obuszewski and his group, Pledge of Resistance-Baltimore, was exposed during his trial for trespass and disorderly conduct in a 2004 protest outside the National Security Agency’s headquarters in Fort Meade, Maryland. These documents indicate that the undercover state troopers from Maryland’s Homeland Security and Intelligence Division infiltrated 3 groups. These include Mr. Obuszewski’s group: the Coalition to End the Death Penalty; and the Committee to Save Vernon Evans, a murderer slated for execution.

    These pages highlight at least 288 hours of surveillance. Officers attended at least 20 meetings and a dozen rallies against the death penalty. Some of these rallies took place at the SuperMax jail in Baltimore. The documents reference a proposed sit-in at the offices of Baltimore County State’s Attorney Sandra A. O’Connor. They contain No reports of violence or even any threat of violence. In fact, they show how the organizers repeatedly stressed the importance of peaceful and orderly demonstrations.

    A report about a demonstration at the jail contains the following: “There were about 75-80 protesters at the rally and none participated in any type of civil disobedience or illegal acts. Protesters were even careful to move out of the way for Division of Correction employees who were going into the parking lot for work.”

    Even though these meetings and protests were carried out peacefully and in full compliance with all laws, the information about the protesters and their activities was sent to seven agencies, including the National Security Agency and an unnamed military intelligence official.

    “Americans have the right to peaceably assemble with others of a like mind and speak out about what they believe in,” Mr. Rocah said. “For state agencies to spend hundreds of hours entering information about lawful and peaceful political activities into a criminal database is beyond unconscionable. It is a waste of taxpayer dollars, which does nothing to make us safer from actual terrorists or drug dealers.”

    ((http://washtimes.com/news/2008/jul/18/m…)

    When I first read this article, I was completely appalled. The inferences for all of us are huge. Are we already living in a police state? Are all of us reading this, because we are non-conformists, targeted and in terrorist databases?

    Bin Laden Firm to Build Saudi Arabian Prisons to Replace Guantanamo Bay

    4

    Saudi Arabia prisons to replace Guantanamo bay
    Pakistan Daily 

    Saudi Arabia is to build five modern prisons in the kingdom to replace US Guantanamo detention facility, a new report has revealed.

    Jordanian daily quoted unnamed sources as saying that US Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) and Saudi officials are cooperating to construct the prisons which are to replace Guantanamo and US secret prisons in Europe.

    Riyadh is to spent about two billion Saudi Rials for the project which can accommodate up to 18000 inmates, they added.

    Bin laden firm and with the help of German engineers will build the prisons in the Saudi cities of Mecca, Haer, Demmam, and Qasim.

    The US has been under pressure due to violating individual rights in its detention camps in Europe and Guantanamo Bay.

    UN human rights investigators have urged the White House to shut down the Guantanamo camp.

    Guantanamo detainee petitions rights panel over torture

    0

    A Guantanamo detainee on Wednesday urged a human rights panel that investigates abuse cases in the Americas to review his accusations that he was tortured in the US “war on terror” prison.

    Djamel Ameziane, an Algerian who has been held at the US naval base in Cuba for six years as an “enemy combatant” without charge, became the first Guantanamo detainee to file a petition with the Inter-American Commission on Human Rights (IACHR).

    The panel is an autonomous organ of the 35-nation Organization of American States (OAS), a multilateral forum of which the United States is a member.

    Two groups that represent Guantanamo detainees — the Center for Constitutional Rights (CCR) and the Center for Justice and International Law (CEJIL) — filed the petition on Ameziane’s behalf.

    “Guantanamo Bay has become a global symbol of impunity and inhumanity,” CEJIL attorney Michael Camilleri said in a statement.

    “Now an international body will have the opportunity to demand that the United States hold accountable those responsible for Mr. Ameziane’s torture and abuse,” he said.

    Ameziane alleges that he was subjected to a form of waterboarding, with guards holding his head back and placing a water hose between his nose and mouth, running it for several minutes over his face and suffocating him.

    In another instance, his entire body was sprayed with cayenne pepper and then hosed down with pepper to simulate the skin-burning effect of pepper spray, CCR and CEJIL said.

    “Guards then cuffed and chained him and took him to an interrogation room, where he was left for several hours, writhing in pain, his clothes soaked while air conditioning blasted in the room, and his body burning from the pepper spray,” they said.

    The detainee also charges that he has been held in solitary confinement without a window for the past year.

    Ameziane fled Algeria about 16 years ago to “escape persecution and seek a better life,” CCR and CEJIL said. He lived in Austria and Canada, where he was denied political asylum.

    He then traveled to Afghanistan, where he was captured by corrupt local police while trying to cross the border into Pakistan and sold to US military forces for a bounty, according to the two groups.

    AFP American Edition

    Anthrax case against bio-weapons expert ‘staggering for lack of evidence’

    0

    The case against the lone suspect in the 2001 anthrax case, who killed himself last week, has been blasted by his lawyer as based on nothing but “innuendo and a staggering lack of real evidence”. 

    By Guillaume Simard-Morissette 

    Justice Department officials claim that Bruce Ivins, 62, a US government bio-weapons scientist, posted envelopes containing anthrax spores to members of Congress and the media in the aftermath of the September 11th terrorist attacks, spreading fear across America.

    Mr Ivins took an overdose of sleeping pills after what his family and friends describe as persecution by the FBI, which told him he was about to be charged with murder. He worked at the Fort Detrick military base facility in Frederick, Maryland.

    On Wednesday, Justice Department officials made their evidence against Mr Ivins public. Their case rested primarily on his possession of strands of anthrax genetically virtually identical to those used in the attacks, work in the laboratory at late hours during the months of the attacks and a history of paranoia.

    Paul Kemp, Mr Ivins’s lawyer, described the case as “an orchestrated dance of carefully worded statements, heaps of innuendo and a staggering lack of real evidence – all contorted to create the illusion of guilt by Dr Ivins”.

    Prosecutors could not place Mr Ivins in Princeton, New Jersey, where the letters were posted and there was no match between Ivins’s handwriting and that found in the anthrax laden letters.

    Congressman Rush Holt of New Jersey questioned the government’s insistence that the complex attack could have been orchestrated by one individual.

    Those close to Mr Ivins have suggested he was driven to suicide by investigators in much the same way as David Kelly, the British biological warfare expert, killed himself in 2003 amid a furore over justifications for the Iraq war.

    The $15 million investigation lasted five years and led to a fruitless investigation of Steven Hatfill, another Fort Detrick researcher.

    Mr Hatfill’s lawsuit against the US government was resolved in June with a $5.8 million settlement.

    During a memorial service for Ivins on Wednesday at the Fort Detrick base, attended by hundreds of family, friends and colleagues, the dead researcher, who was married with two children, was praised as a dedicated servant to his country and a mentor to young scientists.

    US accused of backing terrorism in Pakistan

    1

    Indo-Asian News Service | Pakistan has accused the US of backing militancy within the country, saying this goes against the grain of the Washington-led global war against terror.

     

    Quoting “impeccable official sources”, The News reported on Tuesday that “strong evidence and circumstantial evidence of American acquiescence to terrorism inside Pakistan” was outlined by President Pervez Musharraf, army chief General Ashfaq Pervez Kayani and Inter-Services Intelligence (ISI) chief Lt. Gen. Nadeem Taj in separate meetings with two senior US officials in Islamabad on July 12.

    The visit of the Chairman Joint Chiefs of Staff Admiral Michael Mullen and CIA Deputy Director Stephen R. Kappes, “carrying what were seen as India-influenced intelligence inputs had hardened the resolve of Pakistan’s security establishment to keep supreme Pakistan’s national security interest even if it meant straining ties with the US and NATO”, the newspaper said.

    It quoted a senior official with direct knowledge of the meetings as saying that Pakistan’s military leadership and the president asked the American visitors “not to distinguish between a terrorist for the United States and Afghanistan and a terrorist for Pakistan”.

    “For reasons best known to Langley, the CIA headquarters, as well as the Pentagon, Pakistani officials say the Americans were not interested in disrupting the Kabul-based fountainhead of terrorism in Balochistan nor do they want to allocate the marvellous Predator (unmanned armed aerial combat vehicle) resource to neutralise the kingpin of suicide bombings against the Pakistani military establishment now hiding near the Pakistan-Afghan border,” The News said.

    During the meetings, the US officials were also asked why the CIA-run Predators and the US military did not swing into action when they were provided the exact location of tribal leader Baitullah Mehsud, “Pakistan’s enemy number one and the mastermind of almost every suicide operation against the Pakistan Army and the ISI since June 2006”, the newspaper added.

    One such precise piece of information was made available to the CIA May 24 when Mehsud drove to a remote South Waziristan mountain post in his Toyota Land Cruiser to address the media and returned to his safe abode.

    “The United States military has the capacity to direct a missile to a precise location at very short notice as it has done close to 20 times in the last few years to hit Al Qaeda targets inside Pakistan,” The News noted.

    Pakistani officials, according to the newspaper, “have long been intrigued by the presence of highly encrypted communications gear with Mehsud. This communication gear enables him to collect real-time information on Pakistani troop movements from an unidentified foreign source without being intercepted by Pakistani intelligence”.

    Mullen and the CIA official were in Pakistan on an unannounced visit July 12 to present what the US media claimed was evidence of the ISI’s ties with Taliban commander Maulana Sirajuddin Haqqani and the alleged involvement of Pakistani agents in the bombing of the Indian embassy in Kabul.

    “Pakistani military leaders rubbished the American information and evidence on the Kabul bombing but provided some rationale for keeping a window open with Haqqani, just as the British government had decided to open talks with some Taliban leaders in southern Afghanistan last year,” The News said.

    White House press corps plane detained in China

    0

    BEIJING – A charter airplane carrying the White House press corps was detained for nearly three hours Friday at Beijing’s international airport not long after President Bush arrived to attend the Olympic Games.

    The flight crew of the Northwest Airlines 747 had been expecting to park at a VIP terminal, but after landing was instead directed by the control tower to a normal international gate.

    White House officials would say only there were “logistical problems” getting clearance to unload the aircraft. The flight crew was told the Chinese were insisting that all luggage be inspected.

    Typically, the White House press charter receives the “custom of the port,” meaning reporters, photographers and camera crews are able to get off the plane right after landing, board buses and head to their hotels and work areas while U.S. State Department officials process immigration and customs details.

    Delays on landing have happened before, but no one on the plane was able to recall one this long.

    The plane landed at 2:10 a.m. local time. Passengers finally were able to get off the plane shortly after 5 a.m. However, they were made to pass through Chinese immigration control individually, and baggage was still being screened.

    Many of those on the plane – roughly 40 journalists – were due to cover the president’s first appearance of the day: the opening of the new Beijing U.S. Embassy complex.

    AP

    Candidates for Sale

    0

    What do Obama and McCain have in common? The same big donors, who will expect to have their way no matter who wins

    Remember the total, hideous, inexcusable absence of oversight that has been the great hallmark of George Bush’s America for almost eight years now? Well, now we’re getting to see that same regulatory malfeasance applied to yet another cornerstone of our political system. The Federal Election Commission – the body that supposedly enforces campaign-finance laws in this country – has been out of business for more than six months. That’s because Congress was dragging its feet over confirmation hearings for new FEC commissioners, leaving the agency without a quorum. The commission just started work again for the first time on July 10th under its new chairman, Donald McGahn, a classic Republican Party yahoo whose chief qualifications include representing Tom DeLay, the corrupt ex-speaker of the House, in matters of campaign finance.

    Apart from the obvious absurdity of not having a functioning election-policing mechanism in an election year in the world’s richest democracy, the late start by the FEC makes it almost impossible for the agency to do its job. The commission has a long-standing reluctance to take action in the last months before a vote, a policy designed to help prevent federal regulators from influencing election outcomes. Normally, the FEC tries to root out infractions and loopholes – fining campaigns for incomplete reporting, or for taking shortcuts around spending limits – in the early months of a campaign season. But that ship sailed way too long ago to take the stink off the 2008 race.

    “The time for setting the ground rules was earlier,” says Craig Holman, a lobbyist with the watchdog group Public Citizen. “There isn’t time to do much now.”

    That’s especially true given the magnitude of what we’re dealing with here: the biggest pile of political contributions in the history of free elections, nearly a billion dollars given to presidential candidates in this season alone. Because the FEC has been dead in the water for so long, it’s likely that we’ll still be in the dark about a large chunk of this record manure pile of campaign contributions when we go to vote in November.

    But that doesn’t mean that a little sifting through campaign records doesn’t tell us quite a lot about who’s backing whom in these races. The truth is that the campaigns of both Barack Obama and John McCain are being inundated with cash from more or less exactly the same gorgons of the corporate scene. From Wall Street to the Big Oil powerhouses to the military-industrial complex, America’s fat-cat business leaders know that the Animal House-style party of the last eight years that made almost all of them rich with bonuses, government contracts and bubble profits is about to come to an end, and someone is going to have to pay to clean up the mess. They want that someone to be you, not them, and they’ve spared no expense to make sure both presidential candidates will be there to bail them out next year.

    They’re succeeding. Both would-be presidents have already sold us out. They’ve taken the money and run – completing the cyclical transformation of the American political narrative from one of monopolistic Republican iniquity to an even more depressing tale about the overweening power of corporate money and the essentially fictitious nature of our two-party system.

    In layman’s terms, we’ve gone from being screwed to being fucked. Who knows – maybe Barack Obama will surprise us if he wins the election. But if you look at the money, it doesn’t look good.

    Continue http://www.rollingstone.com/politics/story/22210615/candidates_for_sale/2

    America’s never-ending prohibition

    0

    WASHINGTON (Reuters) – America’s alcohol prohibition lasted 13 years, filled the country’s prisons, inspired contempt for the law among millions, bred corruption and produced Al Capone. What it did not do was keep Americans from drinking.

     

    America’s marijuana prohibition drew into its 72nd year this month. It has created a huge underground industry catering to users, helped the U.S. prison population balloon into the world’s largest, and diverted the resources of American law enforcement. What it has not done is keep Americans from using marijuana.

     

    On the contrary. Since 1937, the year marijuana was outlawed, its use in the United States has gone up by 4,000 percent, according to the Marijuana Policy Project, a Washington-based lobby group which advocates regulating the drug similar to alcohol. A recent World Health Organization study of marijuana use in 17 countries placed Americans at the top of the list.

     

    The 1920-1933 prohibition on the sale, production and transportation of alcohol is now seen as a dismal failure of social engineering. Will the prohibition on marijuana ever be seen in a similar light?

     

    For the first time in a generation, there is a bill before Congress that would eliminate federal penalties “for the personal use of marijuana by responsible adults.” But not even the congressman who introduced the bill, Democrat Barney Frank, sees bright prospects for swift passage.

     

    The last time the U.S. Congress dealt with legislation that would have decriminalized marijuana was in 1978, when a bill introduced by Senator Edward Kennedy was passed by the Senate but never got to a vote in the House.

     

    The case for legalizing marijuana, the most widely used drug after alcohol and tobacco, rests on several planks – the most obvious being that prohibition simply hasn’t worked despite extraordinarily labor-intensive and costly government efforts. In 2006, the last year for which figures from the Federal Bureau of Investigation are available, 830,000 Americans were arrested on marijuana charges, most of them for possession rather than trafficking. 

    That works out at a marijuana arrest every 38 seconds. A study last year estimated the cost of these arrests at $10.7 billion.

     

    “This is an enormous waste of law enforcement resources that should be focused on violent and serious crime,” says Allen St. Pierre, who heads the National Organization for the Reform of Marijuana Laws (NORML), the marijuana smokers’ lobby in Washington.

     

    NO DISTINCTION BETWEEN USE AND ABUSE

     

    “With alcohol we acknowledge the distinction between use and abuse, and we focus our law enforcement on efforts to stop irresponsible use. We do not arrest or jail responsible drinkers. That should be our policy for marijuana as well.”

     

    The Bush administration’s drug czar, John Walters, will have none of this. He talks about marijuana in terms reminiscent of the apocalyptic warnings issued by Harry Anslinger, the first head of the Bureau of Narcotics in the 1930s and a driving force behind the 1937 marijuana prohibition.

     

    Anslinger deemed marijuana “an addictive drug which induces in its users insanity, criminality and death.” Walters often takes issue with “the perception that marijuana is about fun and freedom. It isn’t. It’s about dependency, disease and dysfunction.”

     

    (For a vivid portrayal of the dysfunction Walters warns about, see a mock documentary produced for the White House Office of National Drug Policy. It is entitled Stoners in the Mist, a play on the 1988 film on mountain gorillas in the Congo. here)

     

    Americans who have admitted smoking marijuana at one point or another but escaped dependency, disease and dysfunction include President George W. Bush, Supreme Court Judge Clarence Thomas, California Governor Arnold Schwarzenegger, New York Mayor Michael Bloomberg, Senator John Kerry, former Speaker of the House Newt Gingrich, former Vice President Al Gore and Barack Obama, the Democratic nominee for next November’s presidential election.

     

    Former President Bill Clinton falls into a special category. When he studied in England, away from the long reach of U.S. law, he experimented with marijuana “a time or two,” he once told a television interviewer. “I didn’t inhale and I didn’t try again.”

    Hollywood, conscious of a mass audience that does inhale, has produced a slew of new “stoner” movies this year. The pot-smoking protagonists include an investment banker and a medical student (Harold & Kumar), a psychiatrist (The Wackness), and a process server (Pineapple Express).

     

    But sympathetic portrayals of marijuana use in popular culture do not necessarily translate into faster progress towards legalization. Government anti-drug fighters are serious in their opposition.

     

    When Barney Frank, at a news conference to explain the rationale for his bill, was asked what timeline he had in mind, he quipped: “Not soon … but eventually, you’ll see the development of a marijuana futures market.” David Murray, the chief scientist in the drug czar’s office who had listened to the briefing, was not amused. “It’s not funny,” he said, “not funny at all.”

     

    But not impossible either, in the long run

    Who Is Bush to Lecture China?

    0

    By Matthew Rothschild

    Who is Bush to lecture the Chinese–or anyone, for that matter–on human rights?

    There he was in Thailand, pressing China to uphold human rights when he has done more than any other President to heap scorn on them.

    After 9/11, he said, “I don’t care what the international lawyers say. We’re going to kick some ass.”

    And Cheney said, it was time to go over to the “dark side.”

    And that’s exactly what Bush and Cheney have done.

    They’ve illegally kidnapped hundreds of people and disappeared them into black sites.

    They’ve had some of these victims tortured with waterboarding and made many others hang by their arms for hours on end.

    They’ve held hundreds of people without charge for years in Guantanamo and at Bagram Air Force Base in Afghanistan.

    And they’ve held thousands of people without charge for years in Iraq, often caging them in brutal containers.

    Time and time again, Bush and Cheney and their apologists in the Justice Department have asserted the right to flout international treaties on human rights essentially whenever they feel like it.

    They are serial human rights abusers.

    Here’s what Amnesty International says in its 2008 annual report.

    “With breathtaking legal obfuscation, the US administration has continued its efforts to weaken the absolute prohibition against torture and other ill-treatment,” the report notes. It denounced “the hollowness of the US administration’s call for democracy and freedom abroad,” and said that the Bush Administration “has distinguished itself in recent years through its defiance of international law.”

    Bush has no standing whatsoever to be lecturing China–even on labor rights, which he also did in Thailand.

    The Bush Administration has fined only 6 percent of the companies that had been violating federal wage laws, according to its own Labor Department. The rest got off.

    This is not to say that Bush’s human rights abuses are equal to China’s.

    But it is to say that he has left an indelible black mark on our own reputation.

    He has disgraced the values we’re supposed to hold dear, and he’s given an invitation to other countries to trample all over human rights with impunity.

    That’s what China has done.

    And Bush is in no position to scold them about it.

    He should scold himself first.

    Pakistani president to be impeached

    0

    guardian.co.uk | Pakistan’s fragile coalition government today announced plans to impeach President Pervez Musharraf, throwing the country into new political turmoil.

    Musharraf was today plotting his response with advisers and finally cancelled an on-off trip to the opening ceremony of the Olympic games. Pakistan’s top military commanders also reportedly met today and the reaction of the army – which was, until recently, led by Musharraf – will now be key.

    The breakthrough for the coalition – which has been able to agree on little since coming to office four months ago – came after three days of talks between the parties that came to power after elections in February, led by Asif Zardari of the Pakistan People’s party (PPP) and Nawaz Sharif of the Pakistan Muslim League-N (PML-N).

    “We want to make a new Pakistan,” said Zardari, sitting with his coalition partners at a press conference in Islamabad. “We have the votes and the political will.”

    The coalition must prove that the president has subverted the constitution or is guilty of gross misconduct. Musharraf’s decision to dismiss the country’s judiciary and suspend the constitution for a six-week period last November may form the basis of the impeachment.

    But impeachment will not be easy; it requires a two-thirds majority in parliament, and while the elections brought Musharraf’s opponents to power, the numbers are close. The bigger immediate concern is Musharraf’s constitutional power to dismiss the parliament, under a mechanism that was used three times in the 1990s to sack governments.

    If the president believes that the army is with him, he may be tempted to use this authority. Impeachment has never been used in Pakistan before and there are fears that it could provoke another military intervention.

    “This decision was taken in haste. They are playing with fire,” said Amin Fahim, an estranged senior member of the PPP. “Every action has a reaction.”

    The president has repeatedly said he will not allow himself to be forced from power. Earlier this year, Musharraf – whose autobiography is pointedly called In the Line of Fire – warned that “I cannot preside over the downfall of Pakistan”.

    The Pakistan military has indicated that it wishes to stay out of politics following Musharraf’s decision to give up the job of army chief in November, when he stubbornly clung on to his other role of president.

    However, it is unclear whether the men in uniform, who have staged multiple coups in Pakistan’s turbulent history, will stand aside while a former army chief is humiliated and dragged out of office.

    Sharif said today that he was confident that “this is not the Pakistan of the 80s and 90s”. Zardari said that it was the wish of his late wife, Benazir Bhutto, who was assassinated in December last year, that her death would become “a catalyst of change”.

    Sharif’s current politics are based on two themes: removing Musharraf and restoring to office the judges he sacked in November. However, many remain sceptical about Zardari’s sincerity about either of those causes.

    In March Zardari made another dramatic announcement, also sitting alongside Sharif, that he would reinstate the judiciary. After four months in government, those judges remain out of office, and the PPP has come up with a series of reasons why it could not happen yet. However, impeachment is a far more complicated and risky manoeuvre than bringing the judges back.

    The PPP came to power after months of careful secret negotiations with Musharraf and many believe that it continues to work on the basis of a “deal” that it forged with him. Under that arrangement, dozens of criminal charges against Zardari and Bhutto were dropped.

    “Asif [Zardari] and Pervez Musharraf are inseparable, for their own self-interest,” said Iqbal Haider, a former law minister under Bhutto’s government of the 1990s. “Impeachment is a device to distract attention from the restoration of the judges.”

    In the past, Musharraf has enjoyed strong support from Washington, as a major ally in the “war on terror”, which has given Pakistan billions of dollars in military aid. But it is now widely thought that he can no longer rely on the White House to bail him out.

    Analyst: Beware of the Google Gadgets

    2

    By William Jackson | One fun thing about the interactive world of Web 2.0 is the online applications you can take advantage of, such as Google Gadgets.

     

    Google describes Gadgets as “miniature objects that offer cool and dynamic content that can be placed on any page on the Web. They’re free and available for you to add to any Webpage that you own,” including personalized Google properties such as iGoogle and Google Desktop.

    However, one person’s cool functionality can be another’s security vulnerability.

    “The architecture right now is highly insecure,” said Tom Stracener, a senior analyst with the application security company Cenzic Inc. of Santa Clara, Calif. “It is not clear to me that Google Gadgets have been adopted in a widespread fashion,” but they are being used by people without a lot of security awareness or expertise. “The current environment is high-risk,” Stracener added.

    Stracener and security consultant Robert Hansen — known to the online world as “Rsnake” — demonstrated some malicious exploits for Gadgets, such as internal port scanning and JavaScript hacks, at this week’s Black Hat Briefings security conference.

    “I love being on the bleeding edge of what’s coming next” in the world of security threats, Stracener said. And one of the things coming next might be “Gmalware” — Gadgets optimized for evil instead of good.

    There are thousands of Gadgets available and most of them tend to be basic and innocuous, such as calendars, to-do lists and photo displays. Also, there are some more serious applications for accessing financial programs or making online transactions. This area has not taken off yet, but Google is offering seed money for development of transactional applications for the platform, according to Stracener.

    “Google Gadgets are designed with an open architecture so that anyone can produce them,” he said. He called the Google vision “revolutionary,” but said that as in much of the rest of the online world, functionality is being promoted before security. “The net result is that unless you look at a Gadget’s code, you can’t be sure what it is doing.”

    Some examples of what it could be doing were presented as proof-of-concept exploits developed by Stracener and Hansen. One of Stracener’s first Gadget exploits was a calendar that would read the user’s clipboard periodically and export the data. That one took advantage of an Internet Explorer 6 vulnerability that no longer is available.

    Hansen developed a Gadget that would probe other Gadgets and steal information from them. Other Gadgets could be used to spider internal Web pages. There is one that could be used to perform cross-site request forgery, sending the user to a malicious page where malware could be uploaded or log-in credentials captured. A variation of this could log a user into an attacker’s account when logging onto a personalized iGoogle page.

    “That’s a fairly significant privacy exposure,” Stracener said.

    Google Gadget exploits have not been found in the wild, and Stracener and Hansen describe the attacks they demonstrated as largely theoretical because the exploits do not pose a great risk to sensitive information at this point. However, wider adoption of more powerful Gadgets could create more significant exposures.

    Stracener said that although the current architecture is risky, Google is responding to reports of vulnerabilities. It could take a while to fix all of the problems, however. Although some fixes will be simple, others might require more fundamental changes in the architecture.

    Boycott these companies – they support human rights violations

    7

    foobar | Here is the link to the sponsors for this year’s Olympic Games in Beijing. As I wrote before, if freedom and human rights mean anything to us, we owe it ourselves and to those who are suffering from censorship and oppression to do something – anything! – about it.

    The one thing where it hurts these days is always the money. The games were given to China despite it’s terrible human rights record purely for financial reasons. China gets away with what it does, because we let it – purely for financial reasons.

    Thus, the one action we can take that will be noticed is to show our discontent with our wallets. Boycott Chinese products, and the sponsors of these games, who with their financial support and their good names end up supporting the regime in China.

    Main sponsors with products in our markets:

    • Coca Cola
    • GE
    • Johnson&Johnson
    • Kodak
    • Lenovo
    • VW
    • Manulife
    • McDonalds
    • Adidas
    • Omega
    • Panasonic
    • Samsung
    • Visa
    • UPS
    • Haier
    • Budweiser

    Boycotting the sponsors hopefully will send a message that this kind of support cannot be tolerated.

    Bush scolds China over human rights… then flies in for Games

    0
    Just hours before flying to Beijing for the Olympics on Thursday, US president George Bush used some of his bluntest language yet in publicly pressing China to improve its human rights record.

    In a speech in Bangkok, when the eyes of the world will be on Beijing, Bush voiced “firm opposition” to China’s detention of dissidents, human rights advocates and religious activists. “The US believes the people of China deserve the fundamental liberty that is the natural right of all human beings,” he said in comments likely to anger China’s communist leadership. “We speak out for a free press, freedom of assembly, and labour rights not to antagonize China’s leaders, but because trusting its people with greater freedom is the only way for China to develop its full potential,” he said. Beijing is accused of cracking down on dissent ahead of the Games instead of granting more freedoms, as originally promised.

    REUTERS

    Police chief calls for universal DNA database

    0

    By Auslan Cramb | Stephen House, Chief Constable of Strathclyde, said that storing the genetic profiles of every man, woman and child would help catch more criminals.

    He also called for Scotland to adopt the English DNA system that allows the profiles of suspects to be kept even if they are not charged with any wrongdoing.

    Police in Scotland have to destroy the DNA records of innocent people but can keep samples of those accused of sexual or violent crimes for three years.

    There are around 4.2 million DNA profiles stored in England, which has the biggest genetic database in the world.

    However, a government inquiry recommended last week that one million of these should be destroyed because they came from people who had never been convicted.

    Increasing DNA databases north or south of the border would also be strongly opposed by human rights groups and by many politicians. In Scotland, the database currently holds the genetic profiles of around 200,000 Scots.

    Mr House said he was pressing minister adopt the English system, and used the case of the murdered teenager Sally Anne Bowman to support his case.

    Her killer was caught by the Metropolitan Police largely through a DNA sample collected after an unrelated incident that was already in the system.

    He added: “In Scotland the chances are that the DNA would be destroyed but in England it wasn’t, it was put on the database and matched. There are numerous examples of where that has happened.

    “An even more complete system is to say we will go the whole hog. Forget criminality, we’ll take DNA from everyone in the country.

    “If the public and the government decide they want to do it, you would do it gradually.

    “One of the ways to do it is that you would say all newborn children would have DNA recorded and when you apply for a driver’s licence your DNA would be taken and gradually over the years would start to develop a 100 per cent database. Would it deter people? That’s less certain, but we would detect more crime.”

    Last year, a senior judge called for the entire UK population, and every visitor to Britain to be put on the DNA database.

    Lord Justice Sedley, one of England’s most experienced appeal court judges, described the country’s current system as “indefensible”.

    However, any move towards a national database would meet with fierce opposition. Nick Clegg, leader of the Lib Dems, has described the British public as the most “spied upon on the planet”.

    The organisation Liberty said a database of every man, woman and child in the country was a “chilling proposal, ripe for indignity, error and abuse”.

    And the human rights lawyer John Scott said yesterday that the plan would “disturb the balance between the state and the individual”.

    He added: “At a time when people are calling for the English system to be closer to our own, we shouldn’t be going in the opposite direction.

    “We could get a situation where outside bodies like insurance firms manage to get hold of DNA from innocent people and use it for their own purposes.”

    The issue is being reviewed for the Scottish Executive by Prof James Fraser of Strathclyde University’s centre for forensic science.

    Simon Davies, of the human rights watchdog organisation Privacy International, said the Strathclyde force had a history of “obsession with DNA collection” and it was time it was “reined in”.

    He added: “It was Strathclyde that proposed many years ago mandatory DNA collection for even minor offences. What it is proposing is a step too far.”

    Cloned e-passports fiasco renews calls for £4.7bn ID card scheme to be axed

    1

    Opposition MPs accused the Government last night of being naive in believing that new microchipped passports would be foolproof against criminals involved in identity theft.

    After The Times disclosed that new passports could be cloned and manipulated in minutes and would then be accepted as genuine, MPs also gave warning of serious implications for the security of the Government’s £4.7 billion identity card scheme.

    The identity card project, which starts this year when cards are issued to foreign nationals from outside Europe, relies on microchips similar to those cloned in minutes by a computer researcher as part of tests conducted for The Times.

    Chris Huhne, the Liberal Democrat home affairs spokesman, joined calls for the whole project to be scrapped. “The Government is clearly incapable of creating a criminal-proof gold standard for identity,” he said.

    David Davis, who quit as shadow home secretary to fight a by-election on the issue of the growth of the “Big Brother” state, said: “The Government are incredibly naive about this system.

    “There will never be a foolproof system, and there will always be an arms race between those who are developing the system and those who want to crack it.

    “This is a massive flaw: a loophole the size of Traitor’s Gate. It is also profligate in financial terms, and what we are all being asked to do is give up our freedom and privacy in exchange for a bogus deal on security.”

    Opponents of the identity cards said that putting private personal information on a chip in a passport or identity card would make it easier for people to steal a person’s life. Phil Booth, national co-ordinator of the No2ID cards campaign, said: “With an ID card or chipped passport, you’ll never know who’s walking around pretending to be you. The e-passports fiasco illustrates why the National Identity Scheme must be scrapped now.”

    The criticisms came as ministers said yesterday that moves by the European Union could also prevent Britain from using airline passenger lists to combat illegal immigration.

    The Home Office started collecting records on airline passengers in 2005 and gathers information on an estimated 30 million passenger movements annually. Among the information collected is a traveller’s name, the date of reservation and issue of their ticket, the person’s address and telephone number and payment details.

    The EU initiative would require all member states to collect the information, known as passenger name records (PNR) and store it for 13 years. At present Britain is the only EU state with a fully operational PNR system.

    However, under the draft EU proposal, PNR data could be collected only for the purposes of “fighting terrorism and organised crime” and not, as Britain does, for tackling serious crime and for immigration control.

    A House of Lords report gives warning that if the Government fails to persuade the EU to allow the gathering and sharing of the data for immigration control reasons, it is faced with the difficult decision of opting out of the deal.Yesterday’s response to the Lords EU select committee report also revealed that the Government is powerless to collect PNR-style data on travellers who arrive in Britain by coach.

    Source

    Infosecurity adviser says there are greater intrusions to fear than the DNA database

    0

    Mike Barwise, from Infosecurity Adviser, the online forum run by the Infosecurity Europe team, has revealed he is less concerned about the privacy issues that the National DNA Database creates than other planned government files.

    “The media seems preoccupied at the moment about people’s DNA being stored centrally, but the reality is that the database is really a one-dimensional invasion of citizen’s privacy,” he said.

    “Two-dimensional databases, such as the planned telecommunications database of the numbers that people call from their landlines and mobile phones, are much more worrying,” he added.

    According to Barwise, when you factor in the time element to the planned government telecommunications database and add in location-based data from the cellular carriers, you create a three-dimensional view of the person concerned.

    “Not only do you have the numbers called and the locations called from, but you have a time-based diary from which you can extrapolate their movements,” he explained.  

    In his online blog, Barwise notes that a sample of 30 ordinary UK citizens were assembled back in January to debate the pros and cons of the national DNA database.

    “This has been a highly charged subject for years, not least due to the progressive extension of the scope of the database, culminating in recent proposals to include young children who might offend in the future – or indeed everyone in the country,” he said, adding that the issue arouses strong emotions.

    The proposed telecommunications database, however, he adds, would disclose your circle of business and social contacts, as well as your Web browsing habits.

    This would, says Barwise, reveal vast amounts of information about your lifestyle.

    Small wonder then, that Barwise says that, against this backdrop, concerns about a DNA database start to pale into insignificance…

    Source

    Police Extend Stop & Search Powers at Climate Camp

    0

    Police powers to stop and search people at Climate Camp have been extended. Officers can now stop and search anyone without needing to have reasonable grounds to do so.

    Police powers to stop and search people at Climate Camp have been extended.

    Officers can now stop and search anyone without needing to have reasonable grounds to do so.

    The command team say they took the decision after stopping people with items that could be used as weapons.

    There is also heightened tension with a hardcore group of people police say are intent on criminal activity.

    The extended powers — under Section 60 of the Criminal Justice and Public Order Act — are now in place across the Hoo peninsula.

    It means anyone, including visitors to the area, or residents are subject to a stop and search if requested by a police officer.

    These powers are subject to legal review every 24 hours.

    Assistant Chief Constable Gary Beautridge said: “Kent Police has held back from extending stop and search powers since the climate camp protestors arrived.

    “But today we have felt it is necessary to put an order in place that covers the whole of the Hoo peninsula.

    “So far we have arrested three people for possessing bladed instruments.

    “We’re also finding people who are carrying items that could be used as weapons.

    “We want local people to feel safe in the knowledge that we are seizing these items.

    “We have a duty to keep local residents, protestors and our officers safe.

    “We ask that people on the Hoo peninsula continue to support us and we are really appreciative of their continuing patience and understanding.

    “When the camp ends next week we hope the communities in the area can return to normal quickly.

    ACC Beautridge added that Kent Police will continue to allow peaceful protest and endeavour to keep disruption for local people to a minimum.

    http://212.58.50.37/news/default.asp?article_id=46044&newspage=1

    Unmanned spy planes to police Britain

    0

    By Kim Sengupta | The Government is drawing up plans to use unmanned “drone” aircraft currently deployed in Iraq and Afghanistan to counter terrorism and aid police operations in Britain.

     

    The MoD is carrying out research and development to enable the spy planes, which are equipped with highly sophisticated monitoring equipment that allows them to secretly track and photograph suspects without their knowledge, to be deployed within three years.

    The plans have been backed by the House of Commons Defence Committee but have attracted criticism from civil liberties campaigners concerned about the implications of covert surveillance of civilians.

    The unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) can obtain clear images while flying at up to 50,000ft. If ministers give the scheme the go-ahead the UK will be among the first countries to use UAVs to monitor its own citizens.

    The Israeli military operates them over Palestinian cities such as Gaza and Ramallah, while the US Customs and Border Protection agency flies them over the Mexican border to detect illegal migrants along specified routes.

    Gareth Crossman, director of policy at the civil rights watchdog Liberty, said: “The question is not so much about the technology but what one does with it. We have quite definite laws about where CCTV can be used but of course with UAVs you have much greater ability to gather material in private spaces and this would lead to concern.”

    He added: “If they are used to simply hover to gain random information then that would obviously be a matter of worry and a civil liberty issue.”

    UAVs are currently restricted to military installations in Salisbury Plain because of regulations banning them from using the same airspace as civil aircraft. However, a commercial consortium led by BAE Systems will provide the safety measures necessary for the planes to fly over the UK within three years.

    The MPs’ report says the MoD is “closely involved with the development of procedures and regulations which allow UAVs to operate in national and Nato airspace. But the committee indicates that the ministry should do more.”

    The BAE Systems consortium is partly funded by a number of government agencies, but not the MoD, which has an observer status on the project, called the Astraea programme. The next stage of the project is due to cost £44m, with private companies providing half of that.

    The committee says: “In the response to our report we expect the MoD to set out why it supports the Astraea programme only in an ‘observer role’ and its future plans with regard to this programme.”

    The MPs say full consideration should be given to evidence given to the committee by a weapons company that meeting the air safety requirements would open the way for UAVs to be used in disaster relief, crowd control, anti-terror surveillance, maritime searches and support for the Coastguard, police, fire and intelligence services.

    The UAVs will give law enforcement agencies huge scope for surveillance. Robert Emerson, a security analyst who specialises in deciphering aerial images, said: “Satellite images can be affected by clouds and lack of light, with UAVs you can avoid that by choosing the height at which you fly. There is now also Google Earth, but these are often old images out of date. There is tremendous potential in material gathered by UAVs.”

    He added: “There will obviously be implications for privacy, human rights, etc. That is something the Government will have to address and I imagine that there will be protests from some quarters. But you certainly cannot blame police and intelligence services for wanting to use them.”

    There are also concerns over safety, however. In April 2006 a UAV used by US Customs and Border Protection crashed in Arizona when its engine was accidentally turned off by the team piloting it. At the end of the first investigation into an un-manned aircraft accident, America’s National Transportation Safety Board issued 22 recommendations and its chairman talked of a “wide range of safety issues involving the civilian use of unmanned aircraft”.

    Feds say Irvins alone caused 2001 anthrax attacks

    0

    Army scientist Bruce Ivins “was the only person responsible” for anthrax attacks in 2001 that killed five and rattled the nation, the Justice Department said Wednesday, buttressing its claim with the release of dozens of documents all pointing to his guilt.

    Ivins, who committed suicide last week, had sole custody of highly purified anthrax spores with “certain genetic mutations identical” to the poison used in the attacks, according to the documents. Investigators also said they had traced back to his lab the type of envelopes used to send the deadly powder through the mails.

    Ivins killed himself last week as investigators closed in, and U.S. Attorney Jeffrey Taylor said, “We regret that we will not have the opportunity to present evidence to the jury.”

    Ivins’ attorney, Paul Kemp, has repeatedly asserted his late client’s innocence.

    The prosecutor’s news conference capped a fast-paced series of events in which the government partially lifted its veil of secrecy in the investigation of the poisonings that followed closely after the airliner terror attacks of Sept. 11, 2001.

    The newly released records depict the scientist as deeply troubled, increasingly so as he confronted the possibility of being charged.

    “He said he was not going to face the death penalty, but instead had a plan to kill co-workers and other individuals who had wronged him,” according to one affidavit. In e-mails to colleagues, Ivins described a feeling of dual personalities, the material said.

    The affidavits also said Ivins submitted false anthrax samples to the FBI, was unable to give investigators “an adequate explanation for his late laboratory work hours around the time of” the attacks and sought to frame unnamed co-workers.

    In addition, he was said to have received immunizations against anthrax and yellow fever in early September 2001, several weeks before the first anthrax-laced envelope was received in the mail.

    Authorities say that language Ivins used in an e-mail days before the 2001 anthrax attacks was similar to the messages in anthrax-laced letters to Democratic Sens. Tom Daschle and Patrick Leahy.

    In the e-mail, Ivins wrote that “Bin Laden terrorists for sure have anthrax and sarin gas” and have “just decreed death to all Jews and all Americans.” The letters to Daschle and Leahy said: “WE HAVE THIS ANTHRAX . . . DEATH TO AMERICA . . . DEATH TO ISRAEL.”

    Wednesday’s documents were released as the FBI held a private briefing for families of the victims of the attacks and officials said the agency was preparing to close the case.

    As for motive, investigators seemed to offer two possible reasons for the attacks: that the brilliant scientist wanted to bolster support for a vaccine he helped create and that the anti-abortion Catholic targeted two pro-choice Catholic lawmakers.

    “We are confident that Dr. Ivins was the only person responsible for these attacks,” Taylor told a news conference at the Justice Department.

    Noting that Ivins would have been entitled to a presumption of innocence, Taylor nevertheless said prosecutors were confident “we could prove his guilt to a jury beyond a reasonable doubt.”

    The events in Washington unfolded as a memorial service was held for Ivins at Fort Detrick, the secret government installation in Frederick, Md., where he worked. Reporters were barred.

    More than 200 pages of documents were made public by the FBI, virtually all of them describing the government’s attempts to link Ivins to the crimes.

    “It is a very compelling case,” said Rep. Chris Smith, R-N.J., who attended a briefing for lawmakers and staff.

    The government material describes at length painstaking scientific efforts to trace the source of the anthrax that was used in the attacks.

    It says that in his lab, Ivins had custody of a flask of anthrax termed “the genetic parent” to the powder involved – a source that investigators say was used to grow spores for the attacks on “at least two separate occasions.”

    Anthrax culled from the letters was quickly discovered to be the so-called Ames strain of bacteria, but with genetic mutations that made it distinct. Scientists developed more sophisticated tests for four of those mutations, and concluded that all the samples that matched came from a single batch, code-named RMR-1029, stored at Fort Detrick.

    Ivins “has been the sole custodian of RMR-1029 since it was first grown in 1997,” said one affidavit.

    Powder from anthrax-laden letters sent to the New York Post and Tom Brokaw of NBC contained a bacterial contaminant not found in the anthrax-containing envelopes mailed to Sens. Patrick Leahy or Tom Daschle, the affidavit said.

    Investigators concluded that “the contaminant must have been introduced during the production of the Post and Brokaw spores,” the affidavit said.

    The documents disclosed that authorities searched Ivins’ home on Nov. 2, 2007, taking 22 swabs of vacuum filters and radiators and seizing dozens of items. Among them were video cassettes, family photos, information about guns and a copy of “The Plague” by Albert Camus.

    Investigators also reported seizing three cardboard boxes labeled “Paul Kemp … attorney client privilege.”

    Ivins’ cars and his safe deposit box also were searched as investigators closed in on the respected government scientist who had been troubled by mental health problems for years.

    According to an affidavit filed by Charles B. Wickersham, a postal inspector, the scientist told an unnamed co-worker “that he had `incredible paranoid, delusional thoughts at times’ and ‘feared that he might not be able to control his behavior.'”

    A mental health worker who was involved in treating Ivins disclosed last week that she was so concerned about his behavior that she recently sought a court order to keep him away from her.

    Allegations that Ivins sought to mislead investigators ran through the material made public.

    One FBI document said Ivins “repeatedly named other researchers as possible mailers and claimed that the anthrax used in the attacks resembled that of another researcher” at the same facility.

    The name of the other researcher was not disclosed.

    Stephen A. Hatfill’s career as a bioscientist was ruined after then-Attorney General John Ashcroft named him a “person of interest” in the probe. The government recently paid $6 million to settle a lawsuit by Hatfill, who worked in the same lab.

    The documents made public painted a picture of Ivins seeking to mislead investigators beginning in 2002, when he allegedly submitted the wrong samples to FBI investigators.

    It wasn’t until more than two years later, in March 2005, that he was confronted with the alleged switch, according to U.S. Postal Inspector Thomas Dellafera, who added that Ivins insisted he had not sought to deceive.

    The documents were released following an order from U.S. District Judge Royce Lamberth. Among them were more than a dozen search warrants issued as the government closed in on Ivins in an investigation into the terrifying mail poisonings a few weeks after the Sept. 11, 2001, terror attacks.

    Lamberth ordered the release after consultation with Amy Jeffress, a national security prosecutor at the Department of Justice.

    The investigation dates to 2001, when anthrax-laced mail turned up in two Senate offices as well as news media offices and elsewhere. At the time, the events were widely viewed as the work of terrorists, and delivery of mail was crippled when anthrax spores were discovered in mailing equipment that had processed the contaminated envelopes.

    The FBI’s investigation had dragged on for years, tarnishing the reputation of the agency in the process.

    AP News

    Secret EU security draft risks uproar with call to pool policing and give US personal data

    0

    Europe should consider sharing vast amounts of intelligence and information on its citizens with the US to establish a “Euro-Atlantic area of cooperation” to combat terrorism, according to a high-level confidential report on future security.

    The 27 members of the EU should also pool intelligence on terrorism, develop joint video-surveillance and unmanned drone aircraft, start networks of anti-terrorism centres, and boost the role and powers of an intelligence-coordinating body in Brussels, said senior officials.

    The 53-page report drafted by the Future Group of interior and justice ministers from six EU member states – Germany, France, Sweden, Portugal, Slovenia, and the Czech Republic -argues Europe will need to integrate much of its policing, intelligence-gathering, and policy-making if it is to tackle terrorism, organised crime, and legal and illegal immigration.

    The report, seen by the Guardian, was submitted to EU governments last month following 18 months of work. The group, which also includes senior officials from the European Commission, was established by Germany last year and charged with drafting a blueprint for security and justice policy over the next five years.

    Baroness Scotland, the UK attorney general, had observer status with the group to assess the implications for Britain, whose legal system, unlike continental Europe, is based on the common law.

    The group’s controversial proposals are certain to trigger major disputes, not least its calls for Europe to create an expeditionary corps of armed gendarmerie for paramilitary intervention overseas.

    The report said the EU would fail to beat terrorism unless it developed a full partnership with Washington, a process currently pushing ahead in fits and starts.

    “The EU should make up its mind with regard to the political objective of achieving a Euro-Atlantic area of cooperation with the United States in the field of freedom, security and justice,” it said.

    Such a pact, which should be finalised by 2014 at the latest, would entail the transfer of vast volumes of information on European citizens and travellers to the US authorities. Negotiations have long been under way to agree such a pact, but have been bedevilled by divergences in privacy law and data protection regimes.

    The US is already demanding that EU countries sign up for a battery of security measures on transatlantic flights and the supply of personal information on passengers if they are to enjoy visa-free travel to the US. Under one such accord struck in March between Washington and Berlin, the Germans are to make DNA and biometric information on travellers available.

    The European Commission and the US homeland security department are also trying to iron out discrepancies in privacy laws to allow the wholesale exchange of data. The aim is to reach a binding international agreement this year or next.

    Last month the American Civil Liberties Union wrote to MEPs pressing Brussels to reject US pressure because the US is “a country that, in privacy terms, is all but lawless … US privacy laws are weak. They offer little protection to citizens and virtually none to non-citizens.”

    While urging a comprehensive transatlantic electronic pact, the Future Group focuses mainly on boosting police cooperation and integration between EU states, policies which would reinforce the powers of European agencies and institutions bearing acronyms such as Europol, Eurojust, Frontex, and Sitcen and perhaps see new agencies established to deal with security and intelligence operations.

    Several member states, not least Britain, will have deep qualms about the proposals, with the British likely to balk at automatic pooling of national intelligence.

    Anti-terrorist campaigns can only be effective if “maximum information flow between [EU] member states is guaranteed,” the report said. “Relevant security-related information should be available to all security authorities in the member states.” It said “networks of anti-terrorist centres” was a possible solution.

    While cooperation between national police forces in the EU was advancing, the report conceded that the sharing of espionage and intelligence material was a “considerable challenge” as it clashed with the “principle of confidentiality” that is the basis for successful exchanges.

    The report calls for a bigger role for “Sitcen” in coordinating intelligence sharing. Sitcen, or the Joint Situation Centre, is a shadowy intelligence body based in Brussels which started as a foreign policy tool supplying analysis on international crises to Javier Solana, the EU foreign policy chief, but which now focuses on counter-terrorism and internal security policy.

    Key points

    · National police forces to cooperate and integrate

    · Improve European-level crisis management

    · Need to harness the talents of “different actors” in fighting terrorism

    · National security services and intelligence agencies need to collaborate much more closely

    · New EU internet-based propaganda campaign to defeat radicalisation and terrorist recruitment

    · Create “European Gendarmerie Force” for deployment and intervention abroad. Pooling of EU funds for such missions

    · Common EU immigration policies. By 2014, EU leaders should make the political decision on whether to enter a “Euro-Atlantic area of freedom, security, and justice” with the Americans

    http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2008/aug/07/eu.uksecurity

    Police bullying at Camp Kingsnorth

    0

    I’ve just returned from a 2-3 day sojourn at the Climate Camp at Kingsnorth — site of a proposed new coal-fired power station — which is now gearing up towards its climax. As usual the headlines focus upon policing and the inevitable ‘discovery’ of a weapons cache, more on which below. But once you make the effort — a word I use advisedly — to get through police lines and into the camp itself the overwhelming impression is of a D.I.Y. heaven: solar panels and a wind turbine being erected, water pipes connected, sanitation systems constructed, media and cinema tents put up, impromptu kitchens, cleaning zones … an al fresco and non-commercial soukh catering to the pleasures and necessities of daily life.

    The Camp’s great strength is that theory and practice share a space for a week. Having kicked off with marches and due to finish on Saturday with direct action, in the days between there are workshops galore — a hundred or more — covering the usual themes as well as not a few tailored to specialist tastes: “the world lawn tango championships,” “five-finger direct action training,” and — one cannot but wonder whether practice and theory were united here — “safe sex for activists.” That Arthur Scargill made an appearance was welcome, although it was disappointing to see that he has not yet got it. (In the USA at the outset of World War Two it was union leaders who, against bitter resistance from big business, championed the conversion of auto plants to make planes. In the war upon climate change, just think: the skills of power station engineers; solar, wave and wind; surely a no-brainer.) The high-point was a session (pictured below) at which George Monbiot spoke on the role of the state in mitigating climate chaos — although it was marred when that organ itself, in the shape of riot police, threatened to enter the camp, prompting most of the 250-strong audience to exit theory in a headlong rush to practice.

    A degree of division arose with regard to the appropriate tactics for countering the police, but it was a no-win situation. Agreement to allow the police onto site — with their batons and video cameras, their bullying, snooping, sniffing and otherwise canine ways — would have necessitated constant surveillance of the surveillers, a continuous and enervating tug-of-war. The other option, the one taken, was to concentrate forces at the gates, to keep them at bay. With this, the boys in blue-and-dayglow-yellow needed only to build up forces at one gate, deploy riot police to the fore, or engage in any minor feint, in order to panic and disrupt the Camp. Which of course they did. In afternoons, during workshops. At two a.m. — waking all with a cacophony of sirens that sparked a mass exit from tents, followed by the thuds of sleepy running bodies tripping over guy ropes. And then again, after adrenaline levels had subsided and campers had returned to sleep, at the break of dawn.

    The question is, why have Her Majesty’s police force decided to subject a crew of campers to such astonishing levels of harassment? What tactics are involved, and at what level were they authorised?

    On harassment and intimidation the litany is endless. We observed their tactics, aghast. They must’ve looked up and memorised every petty by-law they could find, in addition to compendia of recent legislation. (Thanks to the cop who dropped his copy of the ‘Pocket Legislation Guide on Policing Protest,’ which gives an overview of legislation that can be used to stifle any form of legitimate protest, we know a bit more about an organisation, the National Extremism Tactical Coordination Unit, that assisted them in this.) They terminated our shuttlebus service (for ferrying participants from rail station to campsite) and arrested the driver on the grounds that one copper, claiming to have witnessed a passenger give a driver a donation, deemed it to be an unlicensed taxi. They filmed everyone. There were interminable and repeated searches of anyone entering or exiting camp — and these were not the usual cursory pat down. In my case (not an extreme one): in addition to searching all bags and pockets they were uncommonly interested in the linings of my trousers; and they dismantled my mobile phone and took the battery out (“in case there’s a razor blade concealed inside”). From me they took nothing but others were less fortunate. The innumerable items confiscated included: plywood, wheelie bins, a track for wheelchair access, a puncture repair kit, carpet, a board game and part of a windmill. And, of course, childrens’ crayons. (They’re a graffiti hazard, don’t you know?)

    Arguably the most visible and unarguably the most audible police presence is the helicopter. Upon arrival, I asked the copper who was searching me — time for such conversations was not rationed — why the chopper was in the air. “It’s because an incident is going on. Don’t worry, it costs a fortune to keep it up there, it’ll only be sent up when there’s something going on.” In fact, it was airborne about one minute in every three; deafening, menacing, watching. Even at night it hovered above us, and would sometimes swoop low — perhaps in case its clatter at normal altitude hadn’t yet woken a few of those below.

    So we may return to the question: why apply these tactics? The resources involved, in terms of manpower, equipment and fuel, are colossal. In conversation with a senior police officer, I listened to his point of view. “Don’t get us wrong: we know very well that 99% of the people in the camp are completely non-violent. It’s the other 1% we’re concerned about.” A machete, he claimed, had been found in nearby undergrowth. During my days there, I saw nothing to suggest a potentially violent “1%” — and, unlike the officer, I was observing campers up close. The machete story is a smear. Chances are it is a fiction, or planted, or belonged to a nearby villager. Activists, being ecologically aware, know full well that to approach Kingsnorth does not require hacking paths through jungle. But let’s assume for a moment that he is right. There are around 1,000 people at the Camp. If that same officer were responsible for policing a village of 1,000 people, and was informed that 10 were potentially violent, would he call up a fleet of fully-manned vans from the North Wales Heddlu, alongside similar convoys from the West Mids, South Yorks, the Met, Essex, Kent and all? Rumour has it that 27 forces were involved! Would he call in a helicopter, and riot police? Or would he think “me oh my what an English idyll — a pity, perhaps, about one or two delinquents at closing time on a Friday night, but a token presence should deal with that”?

    Perhaps there is a better reason: the police tactic is all about defending Kingsnorth. After all, the Camp’s clearly and openly stated aim is to shut it down. But this explanation has no more traction than does the “violent 1%.” Participants show no sign of going anywhere near Kingsnorth until Saturday, so why police the Camp, which is situated many miles away, all week long? To the possible rejoinder that an absence of police attention would encourage activists to approach the power station sooner than declared, there is an obvious reply. With the same police numbers deployed to harass the Camp, the power station could be thrice encircled: it could be sealed off by land, sea, air and any other conceivable avenue of approach, and with enough spare policepower to boot (no pun intended) that the Heddlu and the Brummies could be sent back home. Just think of all the trouble and tension that could be spared, not to mention police overspend.

    The only possible reason for this level of intimidation — apart, perhaps, from an interest in giving riot cops some live training — is that the police force is hell bent on hounding and intimidating the movement against climate chaos. This does not represent a departure from recent trends in policing — as witnessed in London at the anti-Bush protest (with its use of agent provocateurs) and the ‘Circle Line Party.’ Yet it is an escalation.

    The question that remains is: who authorised this strategy? Downing Street, one would suppose, but we should be told.

    Iraqis: Deal close on plan for US troops to leave

    0

    AP | BAGHDAD – Iraq and the U.S. are near an agreement on all American combat troops leaving Iraq by October 2010, with the last soldiers out three years after that, two Iraqi officials told The Associated Press on Thursday. U.S. officials, however, insisted no dates had been agreed.

    The proposed agreement calls for Americans to hand over parts of Baghdad’s Green Zone – where the U.S. Embassy is located – to the Iraqis by the end of 2008. It would also remove U.S. forces from Iraqi cities by June 30, 2009, according to the two senior officials, both close to Iraqi Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki and familiar with the negotiations.

    The officials, who spoke separately on condition of anonymity because the talks are ongoing, said all U.S. combat troops would leave Iraq by October 2010, with the remaining support personnel gone “around 2013.” The schedule could be amended if both sides agree – a face-saving escape clause that would extend the presence of U.S. forces if security conditions warrant it.

    U.S. acceptance – even tentatively – of a specific timeline would represent a dramatic reversal of American policy in place since the war began in March 2003.

    Both Iraqi and American officials agreed that the deal is not final and that a major unresolved issue is the U.S. demand for immunity for U.S. soldiers from prosecution under Iraqi law.

    Throughout the conflict, President Bush steadfastly refused to accept any timetable for bringing U.S. troops home. Last month, however, Bush and al-Maliki agreed to set a “general time horizon” for ending the U.S. mission.

    Bush’s shift to a timeline was seen as a move to speed agreement on a security pact governing the U.S. military presence in Iraq after the U.N. mandate expires at the end of the year.

    Iraq’s Shiite-led government has been holding firm for some sort of withdrawal schedule – a move the Iraqis said was essential to win parliamentary approval.

    The U.S. Embassy in Baghdad declined to comment on details of the talks. Embassy spokeswoman Mirembe Nangtongo said the negotiations were taking place “in a constructive spirit” based on respect for Iraqi sovereignty.

    In Washington, U.S. officials acknowledged that some progress has been made on the timelines for troop withdrawals but that the immunity issue remained a huge problem. One senior U.S. official close to the discussion said no dates have been agreed upon.

    They spoke on condition of anonymity because the negotiations have not been finished.

    But the Iraqis insisted the dates had been settled preliminarily between the two sides, although they acknowledged that nothing is final until the entire negotiations have been completed.

    One Iraqi official said persuading the Americans to accept a timetable was a “key achievement” of the talks and that the government would seek parliamentary ratification as soon as the deal is signed.

    But differences over immunity could scuttle the whole deal, the Iraqis said. One of the officials described immunity as a “minefield” and said each side was sticking by its position.

    One official said U.S. negotiator David Satterfield told him that immunity for soldiers was a “red line” for the United States. The official said he replied that issue was “a red line for us too.”

    The official said the Iraqis were willing to grant immunity for actions committed on American bases and during combat operations – but not a blanket exemption from Iraqi law.

    The Iraqis also want American forces hand over any Iraqi they detain. The U.S. insists that detainees must be “ready” for handover, which the Iraqi officials assume means the Americans want to interrogate them first.

    As the talks drag on, American officials said the Bush administration is losing patience with the Iraqis over the negotiations, which both sides had hoped to wrap up by the end of July.

    Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice and al-Maliki had a long and “very difficult” phone conversation about the situation on Wednesday during which she pressed the Iraqi leader for more flexibility particularly on immunity, one U.S. senior official said.

    “The sovereignty issue is very big for the Iraqis and we understand that. But we are losing patience,” the official said. “The process needs to get moving and get moving quickly.”

    The official could not say how long the call lasted but said it was “not brief” and “tense at times.”

    In London, Britain’s defense ministry said it is also in talks with Iraq’s government over the role of British troops after the U.N. mandate runs out. Prime Minister Gordon Brown recently said that early next year Britain will reduce its troops in Iraq, now at about 4,100, and that Britain’s role in the country will change fundamentally.

    Iraq’s position in the U.S. talks hardened after a series of Iraqi military successes against Shiite and Sunni extremists in Basra, Baghdad, Mosul and other major cities and after the rise in world oil prices flooded the country with petrodollars.

    As the government’s confidence rose, Iraqi officials believed they were in a strong negotiating position – especially with the presumptive Democratic presidential nominee, Sen. Barack Obama, pledging to remove all combat forces within his first 16 months in office if security conditions allow.

    Standing firm against the Americans also enhances al-Maliki’s nationalist credentials, enabling him to appeal for support from Iraqis long opposed to the U.S. presence.

    On Thursday, a spokesman for Muqtada al-Sadr said the Shiite cleric will call on his fighters to maintain a cease-fire against American troops – but may lift the order if the security agreement fails to contain a timetable for a U.S. withdrawal.

    The statement by Sheik Salah al-Obeidi came as al-Sadr planned to spell out details of a formula to reorganize his Mahdi Army militia by separating it into an unarmed cultural organization and elite fighting cells.

    The announcement is expected during weekly Islamic prayer services on Friday.

    “This move is meant to offer an incentive for the foreign forces to withdraw,” al-Obeidi said. “The special cells of fighters will not strike against foreign forces until the situation becomes clear vis-a-vis the Iraq-U.S. agreement on the presence of American forces here.”

    Several cease-fires by al-Sadr have been key to a sharp decline in violence over the past year. But American officials still consider his militiamen a threat and have backed the Iraqi military in operations to try to oust them from their power bases in Baghdad and elsewhere in Iraq.

    How Much Do You Want to Bet Bush Issues Pardons of the Crimes You Claim Don’t Exist?

    1

    Dear Congress,

    Many of you, including both of your nominees for the throne and your Speaker and Minority Leader, claim to believe that George W. Bush and gang have not committed any crimes. To reward your perceptiveness, courage, and integrity, I would like to offer to contribute to your campaigns for reelection (in 2010 or later) if Bush does not issue any pardons for any of the crimes found in Congressman Kucinich’s articles of impeachment. I’m making this easy on you, because you’ve already pardoned Bush himself and all of his accomplices, through legislation, for violations of FISA and for illegal detentions. You have time remaining to legislatively pardon everything else. Plus, by failing to uphold the old laws (such as the Constitution) on spying and election fraud you are setting us up for a “victory” by John McCain, who could be counted on by Bush to issue pardons. Nonetheless, I am willing to bet you that Bush issues pardons. He may even attempt self-pardons, but what I am predicting are pardons of others or blanket pardons of anyone (perhaps including himself) involved in particular crimes. To claim a contribution to your reelection campaign, you have to publicly commit right now to making a contribution to AfterDowningStreet.org if Bush DOES issue pardons of any of the crimes found in the articles of impeachment. I am confident you will make this commitment given your refusal to impeach and the absurdity of thinking that someone might issue pardons for crimes his administration is not guilty of.

    Sincerely,
    David Swanson

    War with Iran – On, Off or Undecided?

    0

    By Stephen Lendman – RINF |

    There’s good news and bad, mostly the latter but don’t
    discount the good. On May 22, (non-binding) HR 362 was
    introduced in the House – with charges and proposals
    so outlandish that if passed and implemented will be a
    blockade and act of war. It accused Iran of:

    — pursuing “nuclear weapons and regional hegemony”
    that threatens international peace and America’s
    national security interests;

    — overtly sponsoring “several terrorist groups,
    including Hamas and Hezbollah;”

    — having close ties to Syria;

    — possibly sharing “its nuclear materials and
    technology with others;”

    — developing “ballistic technology” and ICBMs
    exclusively to deliver nuclear weapons;

    — calling for the “destruction of Israel;”

    — refusing to suspend its uranium enrichment program
    despite its legality;

    — using its banking system to support proliferation
    and terrorist groups;

    — supporting Hezbollah to dominate Lebanon and wage
    war on its government (of which Hezbollah is part);

    — helping Hamas “illegally seize control of Gaza”
    (and) continuously bombard Israeli civilians with
    rockets and mortars;”

    — financing Iraqi “Shia militant groups (and) Afghan
    warlords (to) attack American and allied forces;”

    — destabilizing the Middle East “by underwriting a
    massive rearmament campaign by Syria;” and

    — seeking regional hegemony to undermine “vital
    American national security interests.”

    While stopping short of overtly declaring war, it
    proposes Congress:

    — prevent Iran from acquiring nuclear weapons
    “through all appropriate economic, political and
    diplomatic means;”

    — urges the President to impose sanctions on:

    (1) Iran’s Central Bank and all others supporting
    proliferation and terrorist groups;

    (2) international banks that do business with
    proscribed Iranian banks;

    (3) energy companies with $20 million or more
    investments in Iran’s oil or natural gas sectors since
    the 1996 Iran Sanctions Act; and

    (4) all companies doing business with Iran’s Islamic
    Revolutionary Guard.

    It further:

    — demands that the President prohibit export of all
    refined oil products to Iran; impose “stringent
    inspection requirements” on everything entering and
    departing the country, including international
    movement of its officials;

    — aims to deny foreign investors greater access to
    Iran’s economy and give US companies preferential
    treatment if and when sanctions are lifted; and

    — enlists regional support against Iran and makes
    clear that America will protect its “vital national
    security interests in the Middle East,” implying by
    war if necessary.

    Sanctions As A Form of War

    Under the UN Charter’s Article 41, the Security
    Council (SC) may impose economic sanctions to deter
    (as Article 39 states) “any threat to the peace,
    breach of the peace, or act of aggression.” Specific
    measures “may include complete or partial interruption
    of economic relations and of rail, sea, air, postal,
    telegraphic, radio, and other means of communication,
    and the severance of diplomatic relations.” Prior to
    imposition, however, the SC should determine if
    they’re warranted, “call upon the parties concerned to
    comply with such provisional measures,” make
    appropriate recommendations, and decide which specific
    ones, if any, to use short of armed force.

    Under appropriate circumstances, and if imposed
    responsibly, sanctions may be warranted and have
    greater impact than diplomatic protests or posturing.
    They’re also hugely less problematic and costly than
    conflict. However, when irresponsibly used, for
    imperial gain, or as acts of vengeance or political
    punishment, they become siege warfare and should be
    judged accordingly. Most often, US pressure is for
    these purposes in violation of the UN Charter’s intent
    and spirit. As a result, grievous harm is caused –
    nowhere more horrifically than in Iraq from 1990 –
    2003 when around 1.5 million Iraqis died and millions
    more suffered tragically and needlessly.

    In far less extreme form, a similar strategy is being
    used against Iran – with no justification whatever.
    Last March, after a year of deliberations, the
    Security Council approved SC 1803 – a third set of
    Iranian sanctions for refusing to suspend its legal
    right to enrich uranium as the Nuclear
    Non-Proliferation Treaty allows. It followed two
    earlier rounds in July 2006 (SC 1696) demanding that
    Iran suspend uranium enrichment by August 31. When it
    refused, SC 1737 passed in December imposing limited
    sanctions. SC 1747 then tightened them in March 2007.
    It imposed a ban on arms sales and expanded a freeze
    on Iranian assets.

    New sanctions extend the earlier ones but not as
    harshly as Washington wanted. Still they restrict
    dual-use technologies and authorize cargo inspections
    to and from the country suspected of carrying
    prohibited equipment and materials. They also tighten
    the monitoring of Iranian financial institutions and
    extend travel bans and asset freezes against persons
    and companies involved in Iran’s nuclear program.

    On August 5, AP reported that Germany and the SC’s
    five permanent members (the so-called P5 + 1) “agreed
    yesterday to ‘seek’ new sanctions against Iran over
    its nuclear program after the country failed to meet a
    weekend deadline to respond to an offer” discussed
    below. Its source is US State Department spokesman
    Gonzalo Gallegos saying “we have no choice but to
    pursue further measures against Iran.”

    Now the good news. By mid to late June, HR 362 had 169
    co-sponsors. More were being added, and by August 1,
    252 were on board. For a time it looked sure to pass
    quickly. Then anti-war groups reacted – with a tsunami
    of emails, phone calls, letters and visits to
    congressional members and their staffs. In spite of
    heavy AIPAC pressure for the resolution it wrote, they
    suspended action until the bill’s language is
    softened, so for now it’s stalled in committee (but
    not halted), and Congress is on recess until September
    7 after both parties hold their conventions.

    Talking Peace, Planning War

    On July 16, the New York Times called Under Secretary
    of State for Political Affairs William Burns’ presence
    at the July 19 Geneva talks “the most significant
    diplomatic contact with Iran since” the 1979
    revolution. It followed a June meeting (attended by no
    US representative) at which Germany and the Security
    Council’s five permanent members presented a package
    of “economic and diplomatic incentives” that failed to
    impress the Iranians. Predictably, neither did the
    July 19 meeting that ended in “deadlock” because
    America doesn’t “negotiate.” It demands.

    In this case, the proposal offered a so-called
    “freeze-for-freeze” formula, with imprecise terms,
    under which Iran would stop enriching uranium in
    return for no additional sanctions for six weeks. At
    that point, formal negotiations would begin with no
    promises of concessions or compromise. Iran was given
    two weeks to reply. The US delegation said that Burns’
    appearance was a one-time event, and by so doing
    revealed its deceit. For its part, Iran rejects
    deadlines, and its IAEA representative, Ali Asghar
    Soltanieh, expressed “grave concern” over America’s
    double standards on nuclear policy.

    For the Bush administration, Iran’s nuclear program
    isn’t the issue. It’s mere subterfuge for what’s
    really at stake, but first a little background. Under
    Reza Shah Pahlevi, Iran undertook a nuclear program in
    1957 and got a US research reactor in 1967. After the
    1974 oil shock, and in spite of the country’s vast oil
    reserves, he established the Atomic Energy
    Organization of Iran to use nuclear power generation
    for a modern energy infrastructure that would
    transform the entire Middle East’s power needs. He
    also wanted to reduce Iran’s dependence on oil, lessen
    its pressure to recycle petrodollars, and ally more
    closely with European companies through investments.

    In the 1970s, W. Germany began Iran’s Bushehr civilian
    reactor complex. In 1978, Iran had the world’s fourth
    largest nuclear program, the largest in the developing
    world, and planned to build 20 new reactors by 1995.
    That year, it contracted with Russia to complete the
    Bushehr project, supply it with nuclear fuel, and
    transfer potentially dangerous technology, including a
    centrifuge plant for fissile material. Washington
    became alarmed. It got the Yeltsin government to back
    out, but Iran’s efforts continued with Russia
    supplying nuclear fuel, and it still does.

    Earlier in 2002, the National Council of Resistance of
    Iran (NCRI – the opposition parliament in exile)
    claimed the country was pursuing a secret nuclear
    weapons program – including a Natanz uranium
    enrichment facility and an Arak heavy water one. US –
    Iranian confrontation followed using Iran’s nuclear
    program as pretext. Here’s what’s really at issue:

    — Iranian sovereignty;

    — its independence from US control;

    — its immense proved oil reserves – third or fourth
    largest in the world by most estimates; also its vast
    proved natural gas reserves – ranked second largest in
    the world after Russia;

    — America’s resolve to control and have veto power
    over them;

    — Big Oil’s desire to profit from them;

    — Iran’s size and location in the strategically
    important Middle East; its chokehold over the Strait
    of Hormuz through which millions of barrels of oil
    flow daily – about 20% of world production of around
    88 million barrels;

    — its strategic ties to Russia and China on energy,
    other commercial, and weapons deals; both countries
    are Iran’s largest foreign investors; Iran has vital
    security ties with them as well;

    — these relationships’ spillover for control of
    Eurasia and the Caspian region’s vast oil and gas
    reserves through two organizations – the Asian
    Security Grid and more important Shanghai Cooperation
    Organization (SCO) as a counterweight to an
    encroaching US-dominated NATO;

    — its power and influence in a region the US and
    Israel want to dominate; and

    — the immense power of the Israeli Lobby to influence
    US policy, including a possible war on Iran or
    minimally the harshest measures just short of one.

    Congress On Board with the Israeli Lobby

    At AIPAC’s June 2008 annual conference, most
    congressional members (over 300 attended), the
    leadership, and both parties’ presidential candidates
    expressed uncompromising support for Israel. They also
    backed harsh sanctions against Iran and even war if
    they prove ineffective.

    For its part, AIPAC’s action agenda urged:

    — stopping Iran’s nuclear program; getting Congress
    to pass HR 362 and the Senate’s equivalent SR 580;
    “calling on the administration to focus on the urgency
    of the Iranian threat and to impose tougher sanctions
    on Tehran;”

    — urging the Senate to pass the Iran
    Counter-Proliferation Act of 2007 (S.970) – “to
    enhance United States diplomatic efforts with respect
    to Iran by imposing additional economic sanctions
    against Iran, and for other purposes;” on September
    25, 2007, it passed the House overwhelmingly; the
    Senate Finance and Banking Committees passed key
    provisions of the Senate version in two Iran sanctions
    bills;

    — supporting the Iran Sanctions Enabling Act of 2007
    (HR 2347) that “authorize(s) State and local
    governments to direct divestiture from, and prevent
    investment in, companies with investments of
    $20,000,000 or more in Iran’s energy sector;” and

    — urging additional aid for Israel as the president
    requested, “support(ing) Israel’s quest for peace,
    (and) press(ing) the Arab states to do more to support
    Israeli-Palestinian talks.”

    An earlier August 14, 2007 AIPAC “Issue Brief” is
    titled “Iran’s Support for Terrorism.” It claims that:

    — “the radical regime in Iran has sponsored terrorism
    against the United States, Israel and the West for
    decades;”

    — the State Department designates Iran “the world’s
    leading state sponsor of terror, noting its support
    for groups such as Hamas, ‘Hizballah’ and Islamic
    Jihad;”

    — Tehran also sponsors the “insurgency in Iraq,
    supplied arms to the Taliban and hosted al-Qaeda
    terrorists;”

    — it also “relentlessly pursu(es) nuclear weapons
    (and thus is) a particularly implacable and lethal
    regime;” and

    — “only a sustained, unified international effort to
    isolate and sanction Iran is likely to convince it to
    give up these dangerous activities.”

    The Bush administration agrees. So do most members of
    Congress, the leadership, and both parties’
    presumptive presidential candidates in speeches at the
    June AIPAC conference. Obama oozed obeisance –
    “speaking from the heart as a true friend of
    Israel….when I visit with AIPAC, I am among friends.
    Good friends….who share my strong commitment (that)
    the bond between the United States and Israel is
    unbreakable today, tomorrow, and forever.” Though far
    less eloquent, McCain was equally supportive.

    Obama assured attendees that he stands “by Israel in
    the face of all threats..speak(s) up when Israel’s
    security is at risk (and voices concern that)
    America’s recent foreign policy (hasn’t) made Israel
    more secure. Hamas now controls Gaza. Hizbollah has
    tightened its grip on southern Lebanon, and is flexing
    its muscles in Beirut. Because of the war in Iraq,
    Iran – which always posed a greater threat to Israel
    than Iraq – is emboldened and poses the greatest
    strategic challenge to the US and Israel in the Middle
    East in a generation….We must isolate Hamas….Syria
    continues its support for terror and meddling in
    Lebanon (and) pursu(es) weapons of mass
    destruction….There is no greater threat to Israel –
    or to the peace and stability of the region – than
    Iran. (It) supports violent extremists….pursues a
    nuclear capability….and threatens to wipe Israel off
    the map….my goal will be to eliminate this threat.”

    AIPAC attendees loved it and his receptivity to
    attacking Iran. McCain’s comments no less plus his bad
    humor earlier in singing “bomb, bomb Iran” to the tune
    of a popular song on a May campaign stop. At AIPAC, he
    was just as supportive as Obama, wants increased
    military aid for Israel in FY 2009, and “foremost in
    (his mind) is the threat posed by the regime in
    Tehran….The Iranian President calls Israel a
    stinking corpse….it uses violence to undermine
    Israel in the Middle East peace process….(it
    supports) extremists in Iraq (killing) American
    soldiers….remains the world’s chief sponsor of
    terrorism….(and its) pursuit of nuclear weapons
    poses an unacceptable risk, a danger we cannot allow”
    with clear implications of what he means and what he
    may do as president.

    Christians United for Israel (CUFI) on the “Iranian
    Threat”

    Along with the Israeli Lobby, Bush neocons, and most
    Washington officials, Christian extremists from
    organizations like CUFI cite the “Iranian threat” as a
    recurrent theme, the country’s hostility to Israel and
    desire to “eliminate” the Jewish state, the danger it
    may do so if it acquires nuclear weapons, and the need
    to confront Iran preemptively – through sanctions,
    isolation and war if other measures fail.

    Controversial Pastor and John McCain supporter John
    Hagee is its founder and national chairman, and his
    influence is considerable. He has 18,000 supporters in
    his San Antonio Cornerstone Church and far more
    through CUFI and his global television ministry. His
    ideology is chilling, and as the most powerful and
    influential American Christian Zionist, he’s a man to
    be reckoned with. He calls Muslims “Islamic fascists,”
    claims they’re at war with western civilization, and
    believes preemptive countermeasures, including
    belligerent ones against Iran, are a proper defense.

    As keynote speaker at AIPAC’s 2007 conference, he
    called Iran “the most dangerous regime in the Middle
    East (characterized by its) cruel despotism (and)
    fanatic militancy. If this regime (acquires) nuclear
    weapons this would presage catastrophic consequences
    not only for my country, not only for the Middle East,
    but for all of mankind….The fact that Iran is
    building nuclear weapons is beyond question….and
    they may be the world’s first ‘un-deterable’ nuclear
    power….So the danger is clear and the question is
    what do we do about it…My message to you
    is….divest Iran,” impose sanctions, isolate the
    country, and if these measures fail choose a “second
    course,” the other two being “nothing” or
    “non-military action.” From his rhetoric at AIPAC and
    fundamentalist preaching to his followers, it’s clear
    which one Hagee prefers and may get if enough others
    in high places share his views.

    Israeli Defense Minister and former Labor Prime
    Minister Ehud Barak may one of them. On July 30, he
    told top US officials that Israel won’t rule out a
    military strike against Iraq, but there’s still time
    to pursue diplomacy. Like other Israeli officials
    (past and present), he stressed Iran’s global threat
    so that for Israel “no option would be removed from
    the table.”

    Israeli Deputy Defense Minister (and possible next
    Prime Minister) Shaul Mofaz stated similar views. In
    an August 1 speech to the Washington Institute for
    Near East Policy (a pro-Israeli think tank), he called
    Iran an existential threat, recommended diplomacy
    first, then added “all options are on the table” to
    prevent Iran from developing nuclear weapons – “as
    soon as 2010” as some in Israel claim.

    Israeli Foreign Minister Tzipi Livni (and Mofaz rival
    for Prime Minister) may be one of them. On CNN August
    3, she called for a fourth round of sanctions against
    Iran and urged the world community to support them.
    “Iran doesn’t pay attention to talks,” she said, and
    “time is of the essence.” On the same day, US
    spokesperson for the US’s UN mission, Richard Grenell,
    (in a Reuters report) voiced the same view in saying
    “Iran has not complied with the international
    community’s demand to stop enriching uranium (so) the
    Security Council (has) no choice but to increase the
    sanctions….”

    High Level US Opposition to War on Iran

    Key Obama foreign policy advisor and former Carter
    administration National Security Advisor, Zbigniew
    Brzezinski, is one of them. In a Washington Post March
    2008 op-ed, he called the Iraq war a “national
    tragedy, (demagogically justified), an economic
    catastrophe, a regional disaster, and a global
    boomerang for the United States.” Earlier in February
    2007, in testimony before the Senate Foreign Relations
    Committee, he said it was “a historic, strategic, and
    moral calamity. Undertaken under false assumptions, it
    is undermining America’s global
    legitimacy….tarnishing (our) moral credentials (and)
    intensifying regional instability.”

    He then laid out a “plausible scenario for a military
    collision with Iran (based on) Iraqi failure to meet
    the benchmarks, followed by accusations of Iranian
    responsibility for the failure, then by some
    provocation in Iraq or a terrorist act in the US
    blamed on Iran, culminating in a ‘defensive’ US
    military action” in response. This would plunge “a
    lonely America into a spreading and deepening quagmire
    eventually ranging across Iraq, Iran, Afghanistan and
    Pakistan.” Brzezinski’s remarks were an unmistakable
    warning that the Bush administration may try to
    stampede the country into a calamitous conflict it
    must avoid, and it’s up to Congress to stop it. He
    also practically called Bush neocons a cabal and
    warned Congress to be alert.

    Later last September, Brzezinski repeated the same
    warning on CNN – that the Bush administration (Bush
    and Cheney mainly) is “hyp(ing) the atmosphere (and)
    “stampeding” the country to war with Iran. “When the
    president flatly asserts (Iran is) seeking nuclear
    weapons, he’s overstating the facts….we have very
    scant (supportive) evidence (and after the Iraq
    calamity he) should be very careful about the veracity
    of his public assertions.” Based on his own experience
    in Afghanistan in the 1980s, he’s also very leery
    about “running the (same) risk of unintentionally”
    falling into Russia’s trap – overreaching, paying
    “little regard for civilian casualties,” turning
    Afghans against us, and being defeated and forced out
    of the country.

    Brzezinski supports a less confrontational occupation
    and had this to say about a McCain administration: “if
    his Secretary of State is Joe Lieberman and his
    Secretary of Defense is (Rudy) Giuliani, we will be
    moving towards the WW IV (counting the Cold War as WW
    III) that they have been both favoring and
    predicting….an appalling concept” he says must be
    avoided.

    It will be if global intelligence company Stratfor
    founder and head George Friedman is right. In an
    August 4 Barrons interview (reported on Iran’s Press
    TV), he called Israeli war games and tough US talk
    geopolitical head-fake leading to an “amicable endgame
    in Iran.” Why? Because given today’s global economy,
    the alternative risks far outweigh potential benefits.
    Besides, Iran poses at most a “negligible nuclear
    threat” and nowhere near reason enough to go to war
    over.

    Further, Iran has helped reduce sectarian violence in
    Iraq by reigning in Shia militias, and that’s a key
    reason for lower US casualties. Barrons noted that
    Stratfor has a record of making accurate assessments
    and gained a large client base as a result. Friedman
    believes the US and Israel are using psychological
    warfare to intimidate Iran to make it more
    accommodative to their policies. He also says a major
    attack would have grave repercussions for the global
    economy at a time when it’s most vulnerable. Iran’s
    potential retaliatory strength might cripple a sizable
    amount of world oil trade, cause prices to skyrocket,
    and exacerbate an already shaky situation at the worst
    time.

    He says the Pentagon has war-gamed an attack, and
    believes it can make short work of Iran’s shore-based
    missile batteries and attack ships. De-mining
    operations would take much longer. In the meantime,
    oil prices could hit $300 a barrel, shipping insurance
    and tanker lease rates would soar, and economic
    stability would collapse. In the near-term, it would
    be “cataclysmic to the global economy and stock
    market.”

    Up to now, two years of talks on Iran’s nuclear
    program have been more “Kabuki theater” than a real
    effort at serious negotiation. In addition, Friedman
    says Iran is “decades away” from developing a credible
    nuclear weapons capacity even if it intends to pursue
    one. At best, in his judgment, it may be able to come
    up with a crude device like the North Koreans managed
    and apparently tested in 2006. No reason to go to war
    over if he’s right and one among many more vital
    issues that influential American figures cite to
    oppose one.

    Pentagon Crosscurrents on Iran

    In late June, Joint Chiefs of Staff Chairman, Michael
    Mullen, visited Israel – his second trip there since
    his October 1 appointment, but this time with a clear
    (official US) message according to defense analyst and
    former Pentagon official Anthony Cordesman of the
    Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS).
    It was that “the US did not give the green light for
    an Israeli attack on Iran….George Bush made it clear
    to all parties that the first option is diplomacy,”
    and no attack should be undertaken without White House
    approval. Mullen further suggested that US policy
    likely will remain unchanged under George Bush, and
    that future plans will be up to the next incumbent – a
    strong hint that cooler high-level Washington figures
    know the folly of a wider Middle East war and want no
    part of one.

    Nonetheless, there’s no assurance they’ll win out, and
    analyst Michael Oren of the Shalem Centre told CBS
    News that Bush administration officials assured
    Israelis that Iran wouldn’t be allowed to develop a
    nuclear weapons capacity with strong hints of an
    attack if one continues. Then on March 11, CENTCOM
    commander William Fallon was sacked following reports
    that he sharply disagreed with Bush administration
    Middle East policy. On April 24 Iraq commander, and
    noted super-hawk, David Petraeus was named to replace
    him, and following an easy Senate confirmation will
    take over in September.

    In June 2007, another change of command occurred when
    George Bush replaced Joint Chiefs Chairman Peter Pace
    because of his public disagreement over policy. On
    February 17, 2006 at a National Press Club luncheon,
    he responded to a question: “It is the absolute
    responsibility of everybody in uniform to disobey an
    order that is either illegal or immoral.” He later
    added that commanders should “not obey illegal and
    immoral orders to use weapons of mass
    destruction….They cannot commit crimes against
    humanity.” Nor should they go along with wrong-headed
    illegal schemes of remaking the Middle East and other
    regions militarily, but until Admiral Mullen’s
    comments to Israelis it looked like a compliant
    Pentagon team was in place to pursue it.

    Whatever’s ahead, it appears high-level opposition
    figures have surfaced with practical (past and
    present) trilateralists among them. Figures like
    Brzezinski, Jim Baker, Henry Kissinger, George Tenet,
    Paul Volker, Jimmy Carter, George Soros, David
    Rockefeller, many other top business executives, and
    even GHW Bush. Their concern over present policy is
    having an effect, but there’s no certainty about which
    side will prevail. However, with Congress out until
    September, things are on hold, and time is fast
    running out on a lamer-than-lame duck administration,
    according to some.

    Even The New York Times is sending mixed messages it
    will have to clarify in coming weeks. In a June 10
    editorial, it said: “If sanctions and incentives
    cannot be made to work, the voices for military action
    will only get louder. No matter what aides may be
    telling Mr. Bush and Mr. Olmert – or what they may be
    telling each other – an attack on Iran would be a
    disaster,” implying it’s wrong, won’t work and will
    devastate the economy. Then on July 18, it then gave
    Israeli historian and apologist Benny Morris op-ed
    space for a vicious and Orwellian headlined diatribe:
    “Using Bombs to Stave Off War.”

    In it, he states “Israel will almost surely attack
    Iran’s nuclear sites in the next four to seven months
    (conventionally).” Should that “assault fail to
    significantly harm or stall the Iranian program….a
    nuclear (attack) will most likely follow.” The world
    has “only one option if it wishes to halt Iran’s march
    toward nuclear weaponry: the military” one by “either
    the United States or Israel.” But America is bogged
    down in two wars, and “the American public has little
    enthusiasm” for more.

    “Which leaves only Israel – the country threatened
    almost daily with destruction by Iran’s
    leaders….Iran’s leaders would do well to rethink
    their gamble and suspend their nuclear program.”
    Otherwise, an Israeli attack “will destroy their
    nuclear facilities (even though) this would mean
    thousands of Iranian casualties and international
    humiliation.”

    It’s high time The New York Times (and other major
    media voices) took a stand. Is it opposed to further
    regional conflict, or in James Petras’ words: is it
    for “the nuclear incineration of 70 million Iranians
    and the contamination of the better part of a billion
    people in the Middle East, Asia and Europe” plus an
    unimaginable amount of retaliatory fallout with the
    entire Muslim world against the West and Israel.

    Yet a June 2008 Presidential Task Force on the Future
    of US-Israeli Relations statement calls for
    “Cooperation on the Iranian Nuclear Challenge” and to
    consider “coercive options” against it, including
    embargoing Iranian oil and “preventive military
    action.” It was at the time Haaretz reported that
    Israel conducted large-scale exercises (focusing on
    long-range strikes) “that appeared to be a rehearsal
    for a potential bombing attack” on Iran. Statfor’s
    George Friedman downplayed them, called them
    “psychological warfare” saber-rattling, not
    preparations for war, and why would Israel telegraph
    plans if that’s what it has in mind. In 1981, it gave
    no hint it intended to bomb Iraq’s Osirak reactor, and
    when it came it was a surprise.

    Other Crosscurrents

    For brief moments earlier, positive developments
    surfaced, only to be swept aside by a torrent of
    anti-Iranian hostility. The Baker Commission December
    2006 report recommended engaging Iran and Syria
    “constructively” and called for a “New Diplomatic
    Offensive without preconditions,” all for naught. Then
    last December the National Intelligence Assessment
    (representing the consensus of all 16 US spy agencies)
    concluded that Iran “halted” its nuclear weapons
    program in 2003, and it remains frozen, again without
    effect.

    At the same time, battle plans are in place under code
    name TIRRANT for Theater Iran Near Term. And under a
    top secret “Interim Global Strike Alert Order” and
    CONPLAN (contingency/concept plan) 8022, Washington
    may preemptively strike targets anywhere in the world
    using so-called low-yield extremely powerful nuclear
    bunker buster weapons. Iran is the apparent first
    target of choice, and US Naval carrier strike groups
    are strategically positioned in the Persian Gulf and
    Mediterranean to proceed on command.

    A recent May World Tribune report cited a second
    carrier group in the Gulf and secret (approved but not
    implemented) US naval and air plans for an Iran
    “counterstrike” in response to “escalating tensions
    that would peak with an Iranian-inspired insurgency
    strike against US” forces – that might easily be
    another Gulf of Tonkin-type incident. So the question
    remains, are we heading for war or is it just
    “head-fake” as George Friedman believes?

    Sy Hersh On “Preparing the Battlefield”

    On June 29 in the New Yorker magazine, Hersh reported
    more crosscurrents and added to what’s covered above.
    On the one hand, Congress will fund “a major
    escalation of covert operations against Iran,”
    according to his high-level sources. As much as $400
    million will go to minority Ahwazi Arab and Baluchi
    dissident groups, to “destabilize the country’s
    religious leadership,” aim for regime change, and gain
    intelligence on Iran’s “suspected nuclear-weapons
    program.”

    The plan apparently involves stepped up covert CIA and
    Joint Special Operations Command (JSOC) operations
    authorized by a highly classified Presidential Finding
    about which some congressional leaders have little
    knowledge and have voiced concern. By law, party
    leaders and ranking intelligence committee members
    must be briefed, but apparently it’s been done
    selectively.

    On the other hand, Hersh says Pentagon military and
    civilian leaders are concerned about “Iran’s nuclear
    ambitions,” but disagree “whether a military strike is
    the right solution.” Some oppose one, want diplomacy
    instead, and apparently Robert Gates is one of them –
    a former Iraq Study Group member until he became
    Secretary of Defense in December 2006. In late 2007,
    he apparently warned the Democrat Senate caucus of
    grave consequences if the Bush administration
    preemptively attacked Iran – saying it would create
    “generations of jihadists, and our grandchildren will
    be battling (them) in America.”

    Admiral Mullen also is “pushing back very hard”
    against an attack along with “at least ten senior flag
    and general officers, including combatant commanders”
    in charge of military operations around the world. One
    of them is Admiral Fallon who lost his CENTCOM job for
    opposing an attack even though he agrees on Iran’s
    possible threat.

    Looking Ahead

    More good news for what it’s worth. On August 2, tens
    of thousands across the US and Canada protested
    against a possible attack on Iran. On the bad side,
    unprecedented numbers, in vain, did as well ahead of
    the Iraq war, but this time influential Washington
    figures support them.

    With Congress on recess, it’s too soon to know what’s
    ahead, but one thing’s for sure. Neocons still run
    things. Dick Cheney leads them, and he claims Iran
    intends to destroy Israel, is developing nuclear
    weapons, and is a “darkening cloud….right at the top
    of the list” of world trouble spots and needs to be
    addressed (along with Syria) as the next phase of “the
    road map to war.” With five months to go and heavy
    firepower to call on, he and George Bush have plenty
    of time left (as this writer said earlier) to
    incinerate Iran and end the republic if that’s what
    they have in mind. Better hope they don’t or that
    cooler heads win out for a different way.

    The New American Empire

    Congress no longer chooses to read new legislation before voting it into law. Bills are switched at the last minute for unread, substitute legislation. New laws say ANYONE can now be followed and watched – for ANY reason… or for NO reason. …. and the list goes on… http://www.washingtonyourefired.com/

    “We Were Basically Hiring Terrorists”

    0

    Salon – Aug. 6, 2008 | BAGHDAD, Iraq — Donning pale yellow shirts with Iraqi flags stitched on the chest, Alah al-Janabi and Mahmoud al-Samorai stood recently in the blistering sun at the crowded entrance to the bustling Dora Market. Al-Janabi, 30, proudly displayed a shiny black pistol on his hip; al-Samorai, 25, slung his Kalashnikov assault rifle over his shoulder as he patted down a shopper entering the market. Nine months ago, the two men joined the Sons of Iraq — the U.S.-funded, mostly Sunni organization of 103,000 armed guards that functions as part neighborhood security watch and part paramilitary force, and has been instrumental in tamping down violence in Iraq.

    What these men did prior to this work — when sectarian militias and Iraqi security forces fought pitched battles through the Dora neighborhood, killing and wounding scores of people — is unclear. When asked, the two looked at each other and shrugged. “There were no jobs,” al-Samorai finally said. Maybe he and his colleague hid in their homes while sectarian fighting raged outside. But it is also possible that they fought alongside the Sunni militias, as did many Sons of Iraq members, according to American forces that patrol the area.

    “When the SOIs stood up, we were basically hiring terrorists,” said Lt. Justin Chabalko, using the military acronym for the Sons of Iraq. Chabalko’s 2-4 Infantry Battalion of the 4th Brigade, 10th Mountain Division frequently patrols the Dora Market.

    The Sons of Iraq was formed in 2007, when Sunni tribal leaders, tired of violence and disillusioned with Islamic fundamentalists such as al-Qaida in Iraq, encouraged tribal members — including some former militia members — to guard Sunni and mixed neighborhoods against takeover by sectarian gangs. The Americans touted the creation of the Sons of Iraq as a major diplomatic success and agreed to finance the organization, paying each member a monthly salary of $300, despite the protests from the Shiite-dominated Iraqi government, which never liked the idea of legitimizing the Sunni-dominated fighting force.

    The force helped quell the Sunni insurgency in Baghdad and in Iraq’s tribal heartlands, such as the restive Anbar province. But what a year ago looked like a brilliant solution to sectarian violence is now looking like a time bomb. Many of the force’s members once fought alongside al-Qaida in Iraq and other Sunni insurgency organizations against American troops and the predominantly Shiite Iraqi security forces. And now, a joint U.S.-Iraqi government plan to disband the force could put up to 80,000 men out of work — and leave them armed and disgruntled.

    As Iraq becomes safer, the Sons of Iraq are less essential to security. Under a draft plan by U.S. forces and the Iraqi government, 20 percent of the force will be gradually folded into Iraqi security forces, after careful screening and additional training. The rest, Americans say, will be offered basic vocational training, which would allow them to take up such jobs as janitors, secretaries, electricians and plumbers. As of June, approximately 17,000 Sons of Iraq members have joined Iraqi security forces.

    But conversations with the Sons of Iraq members and their leaders suggest that the majority of them do not want to do anything that does not involve carrying weapons, traditionally an honorable status in Iraqi society.

    “A lot of them would prefer doing that because it gives them power of carrying a weapon and providing security,” said Capt. Emiliano Tellado, a member of the 2-4 Infantry Battalion.

    Potentially, 80,000 armed and trained fighters could soon find themselves unemployed, or employed in jobs they do not want — and angry at the American forces and Iraqi government because they didn’t get picked for service in the security forces.

    Al-Janabi and al-Samorai applied for jobs in the Iraqi police nine months ago for the first time, and reapplied twice since. They have not heard back from the Iraqi government, and they could well be among the many thousands who don’t get to join Iraqi security forces. But both dismissed the idea that they would lay down their guns and take up other work tools.

    “That is not my job,” al-Samorai responded, firmly.

    “I want to defend my people,” said al-Janabi.

    A key question is, to what extent have members of the Sons of Iraq such as these severed their past allegiances. Working as U.S.-paid neighborhood guards was supposed to rehabilitate those who once fought against American and Iraqi forces, said Capt. Brett Walker, the spokesman for the 2-4 Infantry Battalion. Over time, approximately 18,000 Shiite members joined the force as well, working mostly in Shiite and mixed neighborhoods and ostensibly bringing some sense of sectarian rapprochement.

    But some of the organization’s Sunni members may still be cooperating with sectarian militias, acknowledged Tellado. Even if the Sons of Iraq continues to function in its current format, the organization is a wild card as far as its members’ loyalties are concerned.

    Several months ago, the 2-4’s soldiers detained one Sons of Iraq leader who was once associated with al-Qaida in Iraq, Tellado said. “He had a bad background, and it finally caught up with him,” he explained. “There was a possibility that he was still active” in the extremist Sunni organization. The man is now in Camp Bucca, a giant American detention center in southern Iraq.

    “Sometimes they don’t reform,” Tellado said.

    Chabalko said that some Sons of Iraq in his area use their positions “as an opportunity to play both sides of the fence, usually the guys at checkpoints.” American soldiers say that Sunni members of the force extorted money from Shiite civilians and attacked people they believed were members of Shiite militias.

    In Baghdad’s religiously mixed Risala neighborhood in May, U.S. Army medics treated a man who had been beaten and kicked in the face and torso by Sons of Iraq, who believed that the man was an informant for the Mahdi army, the militia loyal to the anti-American cleric Muqtada al-Sadr. The man survived because the local Sons of Iraq leader, Karim al-Gortani, happened by and ordered them to stop, said U.S. Army Capt. Sean Chase, whose soldiers treated the man. Chase suspects that Gortani, a former Iraqi army colonel under Saddam Hussein, at one point was either a member of al-Qaida in Iraq or Jaish al-Islami, another Sunni extremist group.

    In Dora, where 450,000 people live, the Sons of Iraq have not carried out any overt acts of violence, U.S. soldiers say — at least not to the Americans’ knowledge. But that could be because Dora, a middle-class neighborhood that is home to many former officials of Saddam Hussein’s government, is almost homogenously Sunni.

    Yet, even here the Sons of Iraq have a potential nemesis — the Iraqi National Police, a SWAT-like organization that patrols Dora. On many streets, members of the two armed groups man checkpoints together, but there is little amicability between them. “At first there was no open conflict, but there was open verbal conflict,” Tellado recalls.

    In order to create a rapport between the Sunni guards and the Shiite officers, who also enjoy little trust from Dora’s Sunni population, the Americans have made the Sons of Iraq formally subordinate to the police force.

    “On payday, I hand the money over to the [National Police] supervisor, and he hands the money to the SOI leader, and that guy hands the money to SOI members,” Tellado said. “It literally takes place in the same room.”

    American military leaders understand the fragility of the peace between the Sons of Iraq and Shiite security forces, and the importance of keeping the Sunni force happy. “We’re gonna continue to pay the SOI guys until the government takes over or until they transition into other jobs,” said 4th Infantry Division Lt. Col. Steven Stover, the spokesman for American troops in Baghdad.

    “These Sons of Iraq will eventually go away, and now the most important thing is to find jobs for all those individuals,” Lt. Col. Timothy Watson, the 2-4 commander, recently told a gathering of Sunni leaders in Dora. “It’s just as important providing jobs as it is security.”

    Nonetheless, local leaders say the Sons of Iraq remains suspicious of the policemen. Hashem Ajili, one of the senior neighborhood leaders in northern Dora, said American presence is crucial to mediate any potential conflicts between the two groups.

    “Currently the relations are getting better — with the support of coalition forces,” Ajili said. If the Americans leave, will the two groups be at each other’s throats? Ajili smiled, and responded diplomatically: “If the coalition forces go back to the States, I am afraid I don’t know what will happen between those two elements.”

    Eddie Bello, an Iraqi-born cultural advisor to the American military in Iraq, was more specific. “It is like sitting on a volcano,” he said. “You never know when it will explode.”

    Anna Badkhen has reported from Iraq, Afghanistan, Chechnya, Somalia, the West Bank and Gaza. She lives in Massachusetts with her husband, David Filipov, and their two sons.

    US: Amnesty slams Bin Laden driver’s Guantanamo trial

    0

    AKI | Al-Qaeda leader Osama Bin Laden’s former driver, Salim Hamdan, convicted by a US military jury on Wednesday of supporting terrorism, did not receive a fair trial, said rights group Amnesty International.

    “The conviction of Salim Hamdan under procedures that do not meet international fair trial standards compounds the injustice of his more than five years’ unlawful detention in Guantanamo,” London-based Amnesty International stated.

    The verdict on Yemeni-born Hamdan is the first to be delivered in a full war crimes trial at the US prison in Guantanamo Bay, Cuba.

    The US government said Hamdan had received “a fair trial”.

    Sentencing was due to begin later on Wednesday and Hamdan, aged around 40, faces a possible life term.

    The case could yet go to the US Supreme Court.

    Amnesty said it believed the entire military commission system to be “fundamentally flawed”.

    Military Commissions Law allows hearsay evidence and evidence gathered from coercive interrogation methods to be used. The public is not allowed to attend trials and legal documents are often never released.

    Amnesty called for military tribunals to be abandoned and for terrorism suspects detained at Guantanamo to be tried in ordinary civilian courts in the US “without resort to the death penalty.”

    The group also reiterated earlier calls for the Guantanamo prison camp to be shut down. About 270 suspects remain in detention there.

    Hamdan was convicted by a panel of six US military officers of “providing material support for terrorism” and acquitted of “conspiracy”.

    The US Pentagon confirmed on Tuesday that Hamdan would remain in indefinite detention as an “enemy combatant” regardless of the verdict.

    The prosecution had said Hamdan played a “vital role” in the conspiracy behind Al-Qaeda’s 9/11 attacks against the US and was “an uncontrollably enthusiastic warrior” for the terror network.

    But defence lawyers claimed Hamdan was a low-level employee.

    Hamdan had admitted working for Bin Laden in Afghanistan from 1997 to 2001 for 200 dollars a month, but said he worked for wages, not to make war on the US.

    The i-9-11 event and the end of the Internet as we know it?

    1

    foobar 

    After the terrible events of September 11, 2001 it didn’t take long for a piece of legislature to be passed in the US, called the Patriot Act. That is a massive set of laws ostensibly designed to help in the fight against terrorism, with the initially ignored but now widely recognised ‘side effect’ of weakening civil liberties and disregarding human rights when convenient.

    This exhaustive set of laws was passed just 20 days after the attacks. Of course, the law wasn’t just created in those 20 days. Instead, it had been written many years before already and was just sitting in the drawers waiting for the right time to be passed. The ‘right time’ here being a state of fear and panic, which would make the passing of such a controversial law possible.

    What does this have to do with us and this Internet/computer related blog and site? Well, as it turns out, a similar law is already written and waiting to be dropped ‘on the Internet’ in case of a major security event in that space. Take a look at this video here, where Lawrence Lessig recalls a conversation with Richard Clarke, the former US government counter-terrorism czar. The video is long, but you just have to watch from 4:30 to 5:55 for that.

    Lessig had asked Clarke if the Department of Justice had something like the Patriot Act, an “i-Patriot Act” if you will, ready to be applied to the Internet in the event of a “cyber-9/11.” Clarke responded, “Of course they do. And Vint Cerf won’t like it.”.

    You can also follow the discussion about it here on Slashdot.

    With the Patriot Act many got the impression that some ‘hawks’ in the government probably were quite grateful for whatever happened on 9/11, so that they finally had a chance to pass these laws. I’m not into conspiracy theories and I don’t believe that the US government had any hand in these attacks. But one can’t help the impression that the event and the resulting fear and panic was certainly taken advantage of to get rid of some of those pesky human rights and civil liberties. Not even by all of the government, but just by some people within it.

    I think in the case of the Internet the desire of the same type of people to limit its inherent freedom is even greater. These people don’t understand the Internet, or they fear that with the freedoms that it brings we are not as easily controllable anymore. And as we are removing ourselves from control and censorship, we are to be feared for our free will and opinions and ideas. Thus, a reason needs to be found to bring us back under control.

    What forms will this take? Exhaustive monitoring of communication, gathering of data, possible bans on encryption, limits on what can and cannot be trasmitted over the Internet, etc. Basically, all the things the Patriot Acts did, just applied to the Internet. As we know now, the law for this is already written. Its proponents are just waiting for the right time.

    On one hand, a security event in ‘cyper space’ is not going to as horrifying to most people as planes crashing into sky scrapers. But on the other hand, most people don’t understand the technology on the Internet anyway, they don’t understand that the Internet has the potential to change human civilisation in a profound and positive way. And because they don’t understand… well, there will be even less outrage about draconian laws being passed. In the end, it probably doesn’t take an event of the same horrific scale to get this new legislation through.

    This is something to be very worried about, because we know that there is a Damocles Sword hanging over the Internet that we know and over the freedoms that it brings. And some people are just waiting to cut the string.

    And before we get all high and mighty about this being a US issue only, and how we (in other countries) would never do something like this… well, get off your high horses! After 9/11 many governments in the western world had nothing better to do than to follow the examples set in the US and to willingly, even eagerly follow along with it. Because the very same people that passed those laws in the US also exist in other countries, of course. The same would happen again.

    This is truly an issue affecting all of us.

    US, UK activists protest under Olympic spotlight

    2

    BEIJING (AP) – Activists from the U.S. and U.K. unfurled pro-Tibet banners and spoke out against China’s rights record in Tiananmen Square on Wednesday in the first attempts by foreigners in the Chinese capital to stage protests under the spotlight of the Olympic Games.

    All of the groups had run-ins with Chinese authorities, who are determined to make sure the Beijing Olympics go off without a hitch and become an international showcase for the country.

    No arrests were reported despite the rare displays of dissent in the capital, where normally stringent controls over criticism of the government have been tightened even further for the 17-day Olympic competition.

    Four foreign activists were led away by police after they hung pro-Tibet banners outside Beijing’s National Stadium, where Friday’s opening ceremony will be held.

    Two men from Students for a Free Tibet each climbed an electrical pole in front of the so-called Bird’s Nest and put up the banners at dawn, said Lhadon Tethong, the New York-based group’s executive director. The other two _ a man and a woman _ provided support from the base of the poles, she said.

    One of the banners said “Tibet will be free” and “Tibet Freedom” in Chinese. The other said “One World, One Dream” _ the slogan for the Beijing Olympics _ followed by “Free Tibet.” One of the men also flew the flag of the Dalai Lama’s exiled Tibetan government.

    The group identified the protesters as Iain Thom, 24, of Scotland; Lucy Marion, 23, of England; Phill Bartell, 34, of Bridgewater, New Jersey; and Tirian Mink, 32, of Portland, Oregon.

    It was the first such demonstration at a games venue. Beijing organizers condemned the protest.

    “We express our strong opposition,” said Sun Weide, spokesman for the Beijing Olympics organizing committee. “In terms of assembly and demonstrations, China has related laws and regulations. We hope that foreigners will respect the related Chinese laws and regulations.”

    Sun said the demonstrators were “persuaded to leave” by police, who received tips from local residents about the protest. The four have not been arrested or taken to a police station, he said.

    E-Passports ‘can be cloned’

    1

    Microchipped passports the Government claim are foolproof can be cloned in minutes, it has been reported. 

    By Jon Swaine

    Test results suggest that criminals could copy innocent travellers’ passports and manipulate their data, replacing the photograph or other information with their own.

    The apparent flaws cast doubt on the Government’s insistence that 3,000 blank passports stolen from a vehicle last week are worthless and could not be used. The security of the Government’s £4bn Identity Card scheme, which is expected to use very similar technology, could also be called into question.

    The tests saw Jeroen van Beek, a security researcher from the University of Amsterdam, clone the microchips from the passports of a baby boy and a 36-year-old woman. He was able to manipulate their data on a computer, replacing their photographs, and then transferred it on to two blank £10 chips, ready to be implanted in blank passports.

    The altered chips were then accepted as genuine by Golden Reader, the software recommended for use at airports by the UN agency that sets standards for electronic passports and the International Civil Aviation Organisation.

    Mr van Beek’s success suggests that holidaymakers who leave their passports at hotels or car rental centres could be leaving themselves vulnerable to identity theft.

    Dominic Grieve, the shadow home secretary, said: “It is of deep concern that the technology underpinning a key part of the UK’s security can be compromised so easily.”

    A Home Office spokesman would only repeated the department’s previous denial that data could be manipulated in an e-passport. She said “if any data were changed it would be obvious and the holder would be apprehended.” She refused to comment further.

    The department’s claim seems to centre on an insistence that faked or cloned chips would trigger an alert by not having a key code to match up with an international database called the Public Key Directory (PKD). However, Britain will not begin using the PKD until next year, and only ten of the 45 countries that use e-passports have signed up to introduce it at all.

    An Identity and Passport Service spokesman said: “We take security and privacy very seriously, which is why the British biometric passport meets international standards as set out by International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO) and we remain confident that it is one of the most secure passports available.

    “Continuing investment in biometric technology and enhanced security measures will help ensure that passport security is maintained now and in the future.”

    The Inside Story of How The War on Terror Turned into a War on American Ideals

    In the days immediately following September 11th, the most powerful people in the country were panic-stricken. The radical decisions about how to combat terrorists and strengthen national security were made in a state of utter chaos and fear, but the key players, Vice President Dick Cheney and his powerful, secretive adviser David Addington, used the crisis to further a long held agenda to enhance Presidential powers to a degree never known in U.S. history, and obliterate Constitutional protections that define the very essence of the American experiment.

    THE DARK SIDE is a dramatic, riveting, and definitive narrative account of how the United States made terrible decisions in the pursuit of terrorists around the world– decisions that not only violated the Constitution to which White House officials took an oath to uphold, but also hampered the pursuit of Al Qaeda. In gripping detail, acclaimed New Yorker writer and bestselling author, Jane Mayer, relates the impact of these decisions—U.S.-held prisoners, some of them completely innocent, were subjected to treatment more reminiscent of the Spanish Inquisition than the twenty-first century.

    THE DARK SIDE will chronicle real, specific cases, shown in real time against the larger tableau of what was happening in Washington, looking at the intelligence gained—or not—and the price paid. In some instances, torture worked. In many more, it led to false information, sometimes with devastating results. For instance, there is the stunning admission of one of the detainees, Sheikh Ibn al-Libi, that the confession he gave under duress—which provided a key piece of evidence buttressing congressional support of going to war against Iraq–was in fact fabricated, to make the torture stop.

    In all cases, whatever the short term gains, there were incalculable losses in terms of moral standing, and our country’s place in the world, and its sense of itself. THE DARK SIDE chronicles one of the most disturbing chapters in American history, one that will serve as the lasting legacy of the George W. Bush presidency.

    Source

    South Korea arrests 167 after anti-Bush protests

    1

    SEOUL — South Korean police used water cannon and arrested 167 people to break up protests in the evening and overnight against the visit of US President George W. Bush, officers said Wednesday.

    A total of 155 people were arrested overnight, a spokesman for the National Police Agency told AFP.

    Twelve others were held earlier for staging an anti-war rally at a military airport near Seoul, where Air Force One landed Tuesday evening.

    Demonstrators protesting against Korea’s resumption of US beef imports and against Bush’s visit held a peaceful candlelit rally in a central Seoul plaza later in the evening.

    Police fired water cannon, laced with tear-causing chemicals and dye to identify offenders, after the crowd dispersed into neighboring streets. Unauthorized political protest marches after sunset are illegal in South Korea.

    Police said 2,700 people took part in the candlelit rally while organizers put the number at 10,000.

    “Down with Lee Myung-Bak!” and “We oppose Bush’s trip,” demonstrators chanted. A student trampled on a picture of Bush and South Korean President Lee Myung-Bak bearing the slogan: “No Bush. No mad cow.”

    Police have stationed about 7,000 officers to guard Bush while 17,000 more are being deployed to control protests.

    South Korea’s April decision to resume US beef imports, which were suspended in 2003 over mad cow disease fears, sparked months of street protests.

    The rallies largely subsided after Seoul secured extra health safeguards for US beef imports. Attendance Tuesday was tiny compared to protests earlier in the summer.

    On Tuesday afternoon some 30,000 military veterans, rightwing activists and conservative Christians staged a rally in support of Bush’s visit, according to police estimates.

    Gitmo Detainees Subject to Detention Even If Acquitted: Pentagon

    0

    Some detainees at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba will likely never be released because of the danger they pose, and those tried and acquitted will still be subject to continued detention as enemy combatants, a Pentagon spokesman said Tuesday.

    Geoff Morrell, the Pentagon press secretary, made the remarks as Salim Hamdan, a Yemeni, awaited a verdict in the first war crimes trial to be held under a special regime created for “war on terror” suspects.

    Morrell said Hamdan, a former driver of Al-Qaeda leader Osama bin Laden, could appeal the verdict in US courts.

    “But in the near term, at least, we would consider him an enemy combatant and still a danger and would likely still be detained for some period of time thereafter,” he said.

    Morrell said there were plans for at least 20 more such trials at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba but he said a significant portion of the detainees being held there would neither be tried nor released.

    He said efforts were being made to reduce the size of the population through transfers of prisoners to their home countries for incarceration or release.

    “But I think, you know, there are still a significant population within Guantanamo who will likely never be released because of the threat they pose to the world, for that matter,” he said.

    AFP

    Bin Laden driver convicted in war crimes trial

    0

    MSNBC | GUANTANAMO BAY NAVAL BASE, Cuba – A military jury on Wednesday found a former driver for Osama bin Laden guilty on some counts but cleared him of others in the first Guantanamo war crimes trial.

    A panel of six American military officers delivered the decision in the case against Salim Hamdan, a Yemeni.

    The jury deliberated for about eight hours over three days before convicting Hamdan of supporting terrorism. He was cleared of the conspiracy charge.

    Hamdan held his head in his hands and wept at the defense table after a Navy captain presiding over the jury read the sentence in a hilltop courtroom on this U.S. Navy base.

    He now faces up to a life sentence after the 10-day trial, which provided the first demonstration of a special tribunal system for prosecuting alleged terrorists.

    The jury reconvened hours later for a sentencing hearing. It is unclear where he would serve his time.

    It was the Bush administration’s third attempt to try Hamdan, who won a Supreme Court victory that scrapped the first version of the Guantanamo court system. The charges were twice dropped and refiled.

    The charges he was cleared of on Wednesday – two of conspiring with al-Qaida to attack civilians, destroy property, commit murder in violation of the laws of war – were the only charges against him in the first prosecution attempt.

    He was convicted of five counts of providing material support for terrorism, specifically that his personal services to al-Qaida included driving and acting as a bodyguard for a man he knew to be the leader of an international terrorist organization.

    The 11-page verdict form was so complicated that the judge called for a yellow highlighter pen and marked the portions the jury president was to read. Jurors were allowed to strike some of the language in the charges, so some specifics of the verdict were not immediately clear.

    Rules skewed, defense argues
    Defense lawyers had feared a guilty verdict was inevitable.

    The rules of the tribunal system at the U.S. Navy base appeared designed to achieve convictions, Navy Lt. Cmdr. Brian Mizer, Salim Hamdan’s Pentagon-appointed attorney, said before the verdict.

    “I don’t know if the panel can render fair what has already happened,” Mizer told reporters as the jury deliberated.

    Hamdan’s attorneys said the judge allowed evidence that would not have been admitted by any civilian or military U.S. court, and that interrogations at the center of the government’s case were tainted by coercive tactics, including sleep deprivation and solitary confinement.

    The tribunal system allows for an appeal before a federal judge, and Hamdan’s team is expected to go there next.

    Appeal likely
    Before the trial started, the team asked a federal judge to declare the process so legally flawed that it was unconstitutional. The judge, at a hearing in Washington, ruled to let the trial proceed, after which he would be open to reviewing whether it was proper.

    The rules allow four levels of appeal, first to the Pentagon appointee overseeing the Guantanamo tribunals. She can overturn convictions and shorten the sentence but cannot add convictions or lengthen the sentence.

    After that, Hamdan could appeal to a special military appeals court, then to the U.S. federal appeals court in Washington and finally to the U.S. Supreme Court.

    Supporters of the tribunals said the Bush administration’s system provided extraordinary due process rights for defendants.

    “This military judge is to be commended for providing a fair and internationally legally sufficient trial for the accused and the government – regardless of the ultimate verdict,” said Charles “Cully” Stimson, a former deputy assistant secretary of defense for detainee affairs.

    Hamdan was captured at a roadblock in southern Afghanistan in November 2001 and taken to Guantanamo in May 2002.

    The military accused him of transporting missiles for al-Qaida and helping bin Laden escape U.S. retribution following the Sept. 11 attacks by driving him around Afghanistan. Defense attorneys said he was merely a low-level bin Laden employee.

    FBI used aggressive tactics in anthrax probe

    0

    Ap | WASHINGTON – Before killing himself last week, Army scientist Bruce Ivins told friends that government agents had stalked him and his family for months, offered his son $2.5 million to rat him out and tried to turn his hospitalized daughter against him with photographs of dead anthrax victims.

    The pressure on Ivins was extreme, a high-risk strategy that has failed the FBI before. The government was determined to find the villain in the 2001 anthrax attacks; it was too many years without a solution to the case that shocked and terrified a post-9/11 nation.

    The last thing the FBI needed was another embarrassment. Overreaching damaged the FBI’s reputation in the high-profile investigations: the Centennial Olympic Park bombing probe that falsely accused Richard Jewell; the theft of nuclear secrets and botched prosecution of scientist Wen Ho Lee; and, in this same anthrax probe, the smearing of an innocent man – Ivins’ colleague Steven Hatfill.

    In the current case, Ivins complained privately that FBI agents had offered his son, Andy, $2.5 million, plus “the sports car of his choice” late last year if he would turn over evidence implicating his father in the anthrax attacks, according to a former U.S. scientist who described himself as a friend of Ivins.

    Ivins also said the FBI confronted Ivins’ daughter, Amanda, with photographs of victims of the anthrax attacks and told her, “This is what your father did,” according to the scientist, who spoke only on condition of anonymity because their conversation was confidential.

    The scientist said Ivins was angered by the FBI’s alleged actions, which he said included following Ivins’ family on shopping trips.

    Washington attorney Barry Coburn, who represents Amanda Ivins, declined to comment on the investigation. An attorney for Andy Ivins also declined to comment.

    The FBI declined to describe its investigative techniques of Ivins.

    FBI official John Miller said that “what we have seen over the past few days has been a mix of improper disclosures of partial information mixed with inaccurate information and then drawn into unfounded conclusions. None of that serves the victims, their families or the public.”

    The FBI “always moves aggressively to get to the bottom of the facts, but that does not include mistreatment of anybody and I don’t know of any case where that’s happened,” said former FBI deputy director Weldon Kennedy, who was with the bureau for 34 years. “That doesn’t mean that from time to time people don’t make mistakes,” he added.

    Dr. W. Russell Byrne, a friend and former supervisor of Ivins at the U.S. Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases at Fort Detrick, Md., said he had heard from other Ivins associates that investigators were going after Ivins’ daughter. But Byrne said those conversations were always short because people were afraid to talk.

    “The FBI had asked everybody to sign these nondisclosure things,” Byrne said. “They didn’t want to run afoul of the FBI.”

    Byrne, who retired from the lab four years ago, said FBI agents interviewed him seven to 12 times since the investigation began – and he got off easy.

    “I think I’m the only person at USAMRIID who didn’t get polygraphed,” he said.

    Byrne said he was told by people who had recently worked with Ivins that the investigation had taken an emotional toll on the researcher. “One person said he’d sit at his desk and weep,” he said.

    Questions about the FBI’s conduct come as the government takes steps that could signal an end to its investigation. On Wednesday, FBI officials plan to begin briefing family members of victims in the 2001 attacks.

    The government is expected to declare the case solved but will keep it open for now, according to two U.S. officials who spoke on condition of anonymity because of the ongoing investigation. Several legal and investigatory matters need to be wrapped up before the case can officially be closed, they said.

    Some questions may be answered when documents related to the case are released, as soon as Wednesday. For others, the answers may be incomplete, even bizarre. Some may simply never be answered.

    It is unclear how the FBI eliminated as suspects others in the lab who had access to the anthrax. It’s not clear what, if any, evidence bolsters the theory that the attacks may have been a twisted effort to test a cure for the toxin. Investigators also can’t place Ivins in Princeton, N.J., when the letters were mailed from a mailbox there.

    Richard Schuler, attorney for anthrax victim Robert Stevens’ widow, Maureen Stevens, said his client will attend Wednesday’s FBI briefing with a list of questions.

    “No. 1 is, ‘Did Bruce Ivins mail the anthrax that killed Robert Stevens?'” Schuler said, adding, “I’ve got healthy skepticism.”

    Critics of the bureau in and out of government say that in major cases, like the anthrax investigation, it can be difficult for the bureau to stop once it embarks on a single-minded pursuit of a suspect, with any internal dissenters shut out as disloyal subordinates.

    Before the FBI focused on Ivins, its sights were set on Hatfill, whose career as a bioscientist was ruined after then-Attorney General John Ashcroft named him a “person of interest” in the probe.

    Hatfill sued the agency, which recently agreed to pay Hatfill nearly $6 million to settle the lawsuit.

    Complaints that the FBI behaved too aggressively conflict with its straight-laced, crime-fighting image of starched agents hunting terrorists.

    During its focus on Hatfill, the FBI conducted what became known as “bumper lock surveillance,” in which investigators trailed Hatfill so closely that he accused agents of running over his foot with their surveillance vehicle.

    FBI agents showed up once to videotape Hatfill in a hotel hallway in Tyson’s Corner, Va., when Hatfill was meeting with a prospective employer, according to FBI depositions filed in Hatfill’s lawsuit against the government. He didn’t get the job.

    One of the FBI agents who helped run the anthrax investigation, Robert Roth, said FBI Director Robert Mueller had expressed frustration with the pace of the investigation. He also acknowledged that, under FBI guidelines, targets of surveillance aren’t supposed to know they’re being followed.

    “Generally, it’s supposed to be covert,” Roth told lawyers in Hatfill’s lawsuit.

    In the 1996 Atlanta Olympic park bombing that dragged Jewell into the limelight, the security guard became the focus of the FBI probe for three months, after initially being hailed as a hero for moving people away from the bomb before it exploded.

    The bomber turned out to be anti-government extremist Eric Rudolph, who also planted three other bombs in the Atlanta area and in Birmingham, Ala. Those explosives killed a police officer, maimed a nurse and injured several other people.

    In another case, the FBI used as evidence the secrets that a person tells a therapist.

    In the Wen Ho Lee case, Lee became the focus of a federal probe into how China may have obtained classified nuclear warhead blueprints. Prosecutors eventually charged him only with mishandling nuclear data, and held him for nine months. In what amounted to a collapse of the government’s case, prosecutors agreed to a plea bargain in which Lee pleaded guilty to one of 59 counts.

    In 2004, the FBI wrongly arrested lawyer Brandon Mayfield after the Madrid terrorist bombings, due to a misidentified fingerprint. The Justice Department’s internal watchdog faulted the bureau for sloppy work. Spanish authorities had doubted the validity of the fingerprint match, but the U.S. government initiated a lengthy investigation, eventually settling with Mayfield for $2 million.

    White House ‘buried British intelligence on Iraq WMDs’

    0

    MI6 told Tony Blair before the invasion of Iraq that a high-placed Iraqi source said that Saddam Hussein had no weapons of mass destruction. The intelligence was passed to the US but was buried by the White House, according to a new book.

    The book claimed that the former Prime Minister sent a top British spy to the Middle East in 2003 – three months before the invasion – to dig up enough intelligence to avoid war but that President Bush and Dick Cheney, the Vice-President, dismissed any claims or possible evidence that would stop military action.

    In The Way of the World, the Pulitzer prize-winning author Ron Suskind also claimed that the White House ordered the CIA to forge a backdated, handwritten letter purportedly from the head of Iraqi Intelligence to Saddam. The letter, which came to light nine months after the invasion, was meant to demonstrate a link between the Baathist regime and al-Qaeda.

    The forgery, adamantly denied by the White House, was passed to a British journalist in Baghdad and written about as if genuine by The Sunday Telegraph on December 14, 2003. The article received significant attention in the US and provided the White House with a new rationale for the invasion, Suskind claimed. The White House called the allegation absurd.

    Suskind said that at the beginning of 2003 MI6 sent one of its top agents, Michael Shipster, to the region. Mr Shipster held secret meetings in Jordan with Tahir Jalil Habbush, the head of Iraqi Intelligence. The meetings were confirmed by Nigel Inkster, former assistant director of MI6.

    Mr Inkster also confirmed that Mr Shipster was told by Mr Habbush that there were no illicit weapons in Iraq. Mr Inkster refused to comment last night.

    Sir Richard Dearlove, the former head of British Intelligence, was also interviewed by Suskind. The author said that Sir Richard confirmed the Shipster meetings and report. He added that he asked why Mr Blair had not acted on the intelligence.

    Sir Richard was quoted as saying that the mission was an eleventh-hour “attempt to try, as it were, I’d say, to diffuse \ the whole situation”. He added: “The problem was the Cheney crowd was in too much of a hurry, really. Bush never resisted them quite strongly enough.”

    Suskind wrote that Sir Richard flew to Washington in February 2003 to present the Habbush report to George Tenet, then the Director of the CIA. The report stated that according to Mr Habbush, Saddam had ended his nuclear programme in 1991 – the same year that he destroyed his chemical weapons programme – and ended his biological weapons programme in 1996. These assertions turned out to be true.

    Mr Tenet briefed Mr Bush and Condoleezza Rice, at the time his National Security Adviser.

    Suskind wrote: “The White House then buried the Habbush report. They instructed the British that they were no longer interested in keeping the channel open.”

    Rob Richer, a former CIA officer in the Near East division, told Suskind: “The Brits wanted to avoid war – which was what was driving them. Bush wanted to go to war in Iraq from the very first days he was in office.”

    Mr Habbush was put on the White House’s list of most-wanted Iraqis but according to Suskind he was paid by the CIA in October 2003 to write the forged letter to Saddam, dated July 1, 2001, saying that the putative September 11 ringleader Mohammed Atta had trained for his mission in Iraq. This was the letter publicised in The Sunday Telegraph.

    Of the forgery allegation, Mr Tenet said: “There was no such order from the White House to me or, to the best of my knowledge, was anyone from the CIA ever involved in any such effort.” Of Mr Habbush, Mr Tenet said that the claims in the book were a complete fabrication. He said that Mr Habbush had “failed to persuade” the British that he had “anything new to offer by way of intelligence”.

    Delving deep

    – Ron Suskind was a reporter for The Wall Street Journal from 1993 to 2000

    – His serialised stories, following a religious student from a blighted inner-city school to the Ivy League Brown University, won the Pulitzer Prize for Feature Writing in 1995

    – His 2004 book The Price of Loyalty penetrated the inner sanctum of the Bush Administration

    – Excepts of his last book, The One Percent Doctrine, were published last month in Time magazine

    Iraq’s oil-fueled surplus could hit $80 billion, report says

    1

    WASHINGTON (CNN) — Iraq is raking in more money from oil exports than it is spending, amassing a projected four-year budget surplus of up to $80 billion, U.S. auditors reported Tuesday.

    Leading members of Congress, noting that Washington is paying for reconstruction in Iraq, expressed outrage at the assessment. One called the findings “inexcusable.”

    “We should not be paying for Iraqi projects while Iraqi oil revenues continue to pile up in the bank, including outrageous profits from $4-a-gallon gas prices in the U.S.,” said Sen. Carl Levin, the chairman of the Senate Armed Services Committee. “We should require that U.S. taxpayers be reimbursed for the cost of large projects.”

    Baghdad had a $29 billion budget surplus between 2005 to 2007. With the price of crude roughly doubling in the past year, Iraq’s surplus for 2008 is expected to run between $38 billion and $50 billion, according to a report from the U.S. Government Accountability Office.

    The United States has put about $48 billion toward reconstruction since the 2003 invasion of Iraq, auditors reported. About $23 billion of that was spent on the oil and electricity industries, water systems and security.

    Iraq spent $3.9 billion on those sectors from 2005 through April 2008, according to the GAO, the investigative arm of Congress. The ongoing fighting there, a shortage of trained staff and weak controls have made it difficult for the Iraqi government to spend its surplus on needed projects, the agency’s report concluded.

    Levin, a Michigan Democrat, has been an outspoken critic of the slow progress of reconstruction and an advocate of a U.S. withdrawal from Iraq. His criticism Tuesday was echoed by Sen. John Warner, a Virginia Republican who is the former chairman and now a leading member of Levin’s committee.

    “Despite Iraq earning billions of dollars in oil revenue in the past five years, U.S. taxpayer money has been the overwhelming source of Iraq reconstruction funds,” Warner said in a joint statement with Levin. “It is time for the sovereign government of Iraq, using its revenues, expenditures and surpluses, to fully assume the responsibility to provide essential services and improve the quality of life for the Iraqi people.”

    In its written response to the audit report, the Treasury Department said U.S. officials are working with Iraqis to address the issue, “and we believe progress is being made.”

    “The report shows Iraq’s budget surplus is likely to grow significantly over the course of 2008, but it is equally important to realize that spending in Iraq is also increasing,” Deputy Assistant Treasury Secretary Andy Baukol wrote to the GAO.

    Prime Minister Nuri al-Maliki’s government submitted a $22 billion supplemental budget to the Iraqi parliament in July, including $8 billion in proposed capital expenditures, Baukol wrote.

    The issue raised the hackles of several members of Congress earlier this year — particularly because Bush administration officials said on the eve of the war that Iraqi oil money would pay for reconstruction.

    In 2003, then-Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul Wolfowitz told the House Appropriations Committee: “We’re dealing with a country that can really finance its own reconstruction, and relatively soon.”

    Rep. Henry Waxman, D-California, said Tuesday’s report “is going to make a lot of American families very angry.”

    “The record gas prices they are paying have turned into an economic windfall for Iraq, but the Iraqi government isn’t spending the money on rebuilding,” said Waxman, the chairman of the House Oversight and Government Reform Committee.

    Levin spokeswoman Tara Andringa said the senator hopes to tighten rules governing U.S. expenditures on Iraqi reconstruction efforts in the next Pentagon authorization bill.

    The Iraqi surplus has piled up even though the country’s oil production has only recently matched prewar levels, according to the Brookings Institution’s latest Iraq Index.

    The country spent about 80 percent of its $29 billion operating budget in 2007, including public services and salaries, but only 28 percent of its $12 billion investment budget, the GAO found.

    The export of crude oil accounted for 94 percent of Iraq’s revenues from 2005 to 2007, the GAO reported.

    RINF Advertising

    0

    Target intelligent audiences at competitive rates. 

    Our advertising format is easy to use, features same day set up and best of all we guarantee a minimum number of views so you know exactly what you’re paying for.

    From Just £5!

    Choose your weapon:

    * Must supply own 468×60 banner image.

    Industry rates are usually £1 for 1,000 views. For every 1,000 people who see your advert – it only costs a fee of £1. However, we provide attractive price breaks so the more impressions you have, the more money you save.

    All adverts are 468×60 in size and are located at the top right hand side of each newswire page, every archive page, each category page and the front page. You may also host your own image if you wish.

    Not only do you receive a high volume of traffic viewing your advert, you also gain an abundant amount of incoming links towards your web site, each of which is considered positive by the search engines, bumping your overall traffic from all the major search engines. This will improve your ranks for your target keywords.

    You can expect over 100 new pages linking to your web site each week, that’s more than enough for all search engines to sit up and take notice.

    Recent Site Stats

    Here’s a monthly average of RINF traffic so you can see for yourself the value of our banner space.

    Customer reviews:

    “The phone hasn’t stopped ringing, we are now taking more bookings than ever. And our site is on the front page of search engines! Brilliant!”

    – The Ashley Guest House

    Climate change protesters deny they are armed

    2

    guardian.co.uk | Climate change protesters today accused police of conducting a smear campaign after officers said they had recovered knives and makeshift weapons during searches of the protest camp at Kingsnorth power station in Kent.

    Police said the confiscated items “strongly indicated” that a hardcore group of protesters intended to break the law. Gary Beautridge, the assistant chief constable of Kent police, said that while most of the people at the camp were peaceful, it was “clear” a minority intended to use the equipment for “criminal purposes”.

    The weapons, which officers said included an adapted knife, a knife block containing knives and a large chain with a padlock, had been found in woods near the camp. “There is no justification whatsoever for having these weapons,” Beautridge said in a statement.

    “I would suggest that a minority of people had hidden them with the intention of causing harm to police officers, and possibly to the horses or dogs we are using on patrol.”

    Camp organisers reacted angrily to the claims, condemning the statement as “an irresponsible stunt” intended to deter people from attending the camp.

    “To link a stash of knives allegedly found somewhere in the Hoo peninsula [in Kent] to the Camp for Climate Action is nothing but a smear campaign against us,” said Ester Davies, one of the camp organisers.

    “To suggest that the campers – environmentalists living at a camp serving only vegan food – would even consider hurting a police horse shows the police’s press release to be nothing but political policing.”

    Other equipment seized since the camp began on Thursday included bolt croppers, climbing ropes and padded suits, which police said suggested that protesters were intending to break into the power station.

    Isabelle Michel, another camper, said demonstrators had not made any secret of the fact that they intended to take direct action at the power plant. “This in no way justifies the way the police are treating the camp,” she said. “It is disgraceful to suggest that the campers have criminal intent.

    “This is obviously an attempt by the police to distract us from raising issues about climate change.”

    Organisers have urged MPs Bob Marshall-Andrews and Colin Challen and MEPs Caroline Lucas and Chris Davies, who have already written to Beautridge to complain about his policing of the event, to investigate the latest claims.

    Demonstrators and police have been involved in repeated standoffs since the camp opened. Protesters have accused police of being heavy-handed, while officers said they were forced to use riot shields in clashes yesterday.

    Beautridge defended the police’s actions in entering the camp to remove obstacles to two access points, saying officers “will not compromise on safety”.

    Campaigners are protesting against proposals by the plant’s owners, Eon, for a coal-fired facility – the first such plant to be built in Britain for over 30 years. More than 1,000 protesters are expected to try to shut down the power station in a planned day of mass action on Saturday.

    Twelve people were arrested yesterday. Seven have been charged with offences including possessing a blade, driving without insurance and obstructing and resisting a police officer.

    S. Koreans fire water cannons at Bush protesters

    0

    SEOUL, South Korea – Police fired water cannons at thousands of protesters Tuesday as President Bush got a volatile reception in South Korea at the start of his three-nation Asian trip.

    Dueling demonstrations reflected mixed sentiments in this U.S. ally, where public opinion surveys remain generally positive about America, though many people decry Washington for a variety of issues. Bush will meet Wednesday with President Lee Myung-bak for the third time since the conservative, pro-American leader took office in February.

    Some 18,300 police were on high alert with riot gear and bomb-sniffing dogs to maintain order during Bush’s brief visit, the National Police Agency said.

    About 30,000 people gathered in front of Seoul City Hall for an afternoon Christian prayer service supporting Bush’s trip. Large South Korean and U.S. flags were held aloft by balloons overhead along with a banner reading, “Welcome President Bush.”

    “The United States made sacrifices for South Korea during the Korean War and helped us live well,” said Kim Jung-kwang, a 67-year-old retired air force colonel who wore his military uniform to the rally. “The United States is not our enemy. Without the U.S., we will die.”

    As evening approached, an estimated 20,000 anti-Bush protesters gathered nearby. Police turned water cannons on them as they tried to move onto the main central downtown boulevard, telling the crowd that the liquid contained markers to tag them so they could be identified later.

    “I don’t have anti-U.S. sentiment. I’m just anti-Bush and anti-Lee Myung-bak,” said Uhm Ki-woong, 36, a businessman who was wearing a mask and hat like other demonstrators in an apparent attempt to conceal his identity.

    The anti-Bush crowd dwindled later in the evening to several thousand people, with the hard-core remnants turning aggressive. Protesters shattered the windows of a police bus and authorities responded by again firing water cannons.

    About 70 demonstrators were arrested, police said, in addition to another 12 near the military airport where Bush landed.

    Bush held off on visiting Seoul earlier this year when protesters staged nightly candlelight vigils and repeatedly clashed with riot police over imports of American beef, saying Lee ignored public health concerns over the possibility of mad cow disease and failed to consult with citizens. Lee has promised to patch up relations with Washington that became strained under Seoul’s previous decade of liberal governments.

    Bush calls Lee a friend, which is good considering the raft of sensitive topics they will tackle before the American president heads to Thailand, then to the Beijing Olympics.

    At the top of the list is getting North Korea to live up to its commitment to dismantle its nuclear weapons program.

    Sunday is the earliest that Washington could move to strike North Korea from a list of state-sponsors of terrorism, a long-held demand from Pyongyang. But first, Washington wants the North to agree to procedures for verifying a declaration of its nuclear programs that Pyongyang submitted to the international arms talks – six months late and with fewer details than the U.S. originally demanded.

    Washington has called for North Korea to allow thorough inspections and interviews with nuclear scientists, but Pyongyang has so far not accepted the proposal.

    “We’re at a very critical moment now for the North Korean government to make a decision as to whether or not they’re going to verify what they said they would do,” Bush said in an interview with China’s state-run CCTV last week. “It’s one thing to say it, but I think it’s going to be very important for them to understand that we expect them to show us.”

    Grateful for South Korea’s troop contribution in Iraq, Bush also will try to persuade Lee to make a bigger contribution in Afghanistan to help deal with the Taliban’s resurgence.

    “Obviously we’d like to see a greater role for South Koreans in Afghanistan, if the South Korean people are willing to move in that direction,” Dennis Wilder, the National Security Council’s senior director for Asian affairs, told reporters on Air Force One.

    Also on the agenda will be efforts by both presidents to have their legislatures approve a free trade agreement, with estimates it could increase bilateral trade by 25 percent. But with free trade deals with Colombia and Panama stalled in Congress, the prospects for ratification by the end of the year are unlikely.

    Bush will meet with U.S. troops based in South Korea, as he did during a stopover in Alaska, where he expressed gratitude for their role in fighting terrorism.

    “About a year ago, people thought Iraq was lost and hopeless,” Bush said at Eielson Air Force Base, where he posed for photos with airmen and soldiers and worked the crowd, at one point lifting a baby in the air. “People were saying, ‘Let’s get out of there, it doesn’t matter to our national security.’

    “Iraq has changed – a lot – thanks to the bravery of people in this hangar and the bravery of troops all across our country. The terrorists (are) on the run. The terrorists will be denied a safe haven, and freedom is on the march. And as a result, our children are more likely to grow up in a peaceful world.”

    Bush’s Asia trip also includes stops in Thailand and China. In an interview aboard Air Force One with The Washington Post, Bush said it was “really hard to tell” whether human rights in China had improved over the past eight years.

    Bush said he speaks candidly with Chinese President Hu Jintao about human rights, but he skirted a question about a pre-Olympics security drive by Chinese authorities.

    “They’re hypersensitive to a potential terrorist attack,” Bush said in the article for Tuesday’s editions of the paper. “And my hope is, of course, that as they have their security in place, that they’re mindful of the spirit of the Games, and that if there is a provocation, they handle it in a responsible way without violence.”

    AP

    MP accuses Government of building DNA database by stealth

    0

    By Shahid Naqvi | A Tory MP whose Black Country uncle was murdered more than a year ago has accused the Government of creating a “DNA database by stealth” after police failed to return his genetic details taken during the investigation.

    Greg Hands, MP for Hammersmith and Fulham, allowed detectives with West Midlands Police to take his fingerprints and swabs after widower Les Ince was found stabbed to death with a barbecue meat skewer in February 2007.

    The father-of-two claims he is one of a million innocent people whose DNA is being held by the state without permission and despite no law being passed by Parliament to allow such information to be held.

    West Midlands Police has promised to return his details but Mr Hands accused the force of dragging its heels due to a reluctance to let go of the information.

    “I am not attacking West Midlands Police in anyway,” said the MP. “What I am saying is the Government needs to establish a set of proper procedures for keeping people’s DNA. Parliament has never approved there being a national database. We have a situation where a million people’s DNA has been taken and put on this database even if they have no connection with crime.

    “I think the Government are building a national database by stealth. They are finding whatever means they can to get your DNA sample. I think that is wrong without it being properly debated in Parliament and without proper safeguards.”

    Mr Hands said recent history had demonstrated Government offices could not be trusted to hold on to data in the wake of a series of high-profile security lapses with data.

    Though accepting there may be good arguments for creating a national DNA database, he insisted the authorities had no powers to hold genetic information against people’s will.

    “I am not necessarily against it. I would listen very carefully to the arguments. I would look at what safeguards are in place and who can access the information. But until we have a debate in Parliament it remains a grey area.

    “My case has had a certain amount of publicity. But there are one million people like me who have never been charged with any crime whose DNA is being held.”

    Pensioner Mr Ince, aged 80, was brutally attacked at his home in Walsall on February 21, 2007. He was found injured in an under-stairs cupboard and later died in hospital. An X-ray showed the skewer had penetrated his body.

    Police believe he may have been attacked a few days before he was discovered.

    Despite a £5,000 reward for information leading to the arrest of his attackers, police have so far made no arrests in connection with the crime.

    Mr Hands said: “It is one of those murders that I think will be quite hard to solve because there is no apparent motive. My uncle as far as we are aware had no enemies in life. He was an 80-year-old man living on his own and wasn’t well off. My best guess is it was a burglary gone wrong.”

    Mr Hands said “ironically” DNA samples taken at the scene of the crime could end up holding the key to solving the crime.

    West Midlands Police said Mr Hands was sent a letter in June confirming his DNA samples will be removed from the national DNA database and his fingerprints returned.

    “He has received correspondence saying this request will be honoured,” said a spokeswoman for the force.

    DNA database least of our concerns

    1

    By Ian Williams | Privacy concerns over the details of innocents being held in the UK’s National DNA Database are not nearly as worrying as other planned government files.

    This is the revelation from Mike Barwise, a security expert from Infosecurity Adviser, the online forum run by the Infosecurity Europe team.

    “The media seems preoccupied at the moment about people’s DNA being stored centrally, but the reality is that the database is really a one-dimensional invasion of citizens’ privacy,” said Barwise.

    “Two-dimensional databases, such as the planned telecommunications database of the numbers people call from their landlines and mobile phones, are much more worrying.”

    According to Barwise, when you factor in the time element to the planned government telecommunications database and add in location-based data from the cellular carriers, you create a three-dimensional view of the person concerned.

    “Not only do you have the numbers called and the locations called from, but you have a time-based diary from which you can extrapolate their movements,” he explained.

    Because we do increasingly more on our mobiles, Irwin highlights that the proposed telecommunications database would reveal a vast amount about a person’s circle of business and social contacts, as well as web browsing habits and other very personal information.

    “This has been a highly charged subject for years, not least due to the progressive extension of the scope of the database, culminating in recent proposals to include young children who might offend in the future — or indeed everyone in the country,” he said, adding that the issue arouses strong emotions.

    Fortunately for those equally concerned by the proposal, the creation of the database has been called into question by Information Commissioner Richard Thomas who described it as “a step too far for the British way of life”.

    Diego Garcia: the UK’s shame

    0

    By Andy Worthington | The ancient Greek dramatist Aeschylus wrote: “In war, truth is the first casualty.” These words are particularly apt in relation to the British Overseas Territory of Diego Garcia, leased to the United States in 1971, where the truth — that a secret “War on Terror” prison existed from 2002 until as recently as 2006 — has been persistently denied by both the British and American governments.

    Yesterday, Time magazine reported that a “senior American official” (now retired), who was “a frequent participant in White House Situation Room meetings” after the 9/11 attacks, stated that “a CIA counter-terrorism official twice said that a high-value prisoner or prisoners were being interrogated on the island” in 2002, and possibly 2003. This is the highest-level admission to date that a secret prison existed on Diego Garcia, but it is by no means the first time that the prison’s existence has been revealed.

    In 2003, Time reported that Hambali, an Indonesian “high-value detainee”, who was transferred to Guantanamo in September 2006, was being held on Diego Garcia, and in May this year, El Pais [in Spanish] reported that Mustafa Setmariam Nasar, a joint Syrian-Spanish national who was seized in Pakistan in October 2005, was held on the island in the months after his capture. Unlike Hambali, Nasar’s current whereabouts are completely unknown; he is, in effect, one of “America’s disappeared.”

    The reality of Diego Garcia’s secret prison has also been confirmed by retired US general Barry McCaffrey in 2004 and 2006, in a report by Swiss Senator Dick Marty for the Council of Europe and in a statement made to the Observer in March this year by Manfred Novak, the UN’s special rapporteur on torture. In contrast, the position taken by both the British and American governments occupies a parallel universe, in which the timeless resonance of Aeschylus’ words is confirmed.

    For five years, since questions were first asked about the secret prison by Lord Wallace of Saltaire in January 2003, the British government refused to acknowledge its existence, and its first denial was indicative of what was to come. “The United States Government,” Baroness Amos explained, “would need to ask for our permission to bring any suspects to Diego Garcia. They have not done so and no suspected terrorists are being held on Diego Garcia.”

    The blanket denials finally came to an end this February, when David Miliband announced that his US counterparts had checked their records and had discovered that two rendition flights, each carrying one prisoner, had passed through Diego Garcia in 2002. He maintained, however, that he had been assured that the planes had only landed for refuelling, and that no prisoner had ever set foot on the island. Mr. Miliband repeated these claims just four weeks ago, after apparently receiving further confirmation from his US counterparts that no other rendition flights had passed through British territory.

    The latest revelations about Diego Garcia make it abundantly clear that the British government can no longer accept any kind of “assurances” from its US counterparts regarding the use of the island. Ignoring Aeschylus’ sage advice, Ministers have, to put it bluntly, fooled themselves into thinking that ignorance is a substitute for accountability. The truth, of course, is that they are both morally and legally responsible for what takes place on Diego Garcia, and have a duty to address crimes committed on British territory.

    As these crimes include kidnapping, “extraordinary rendition” and illegal imprisonment, which are prohibited under domestic UK and international law, and quite possibly torture, which is prohibited under the terms of the UN Convention Against Torture, the British government must immediately initiate a full and open public inquiry into Diego Garcia’s true role in the “War on Terror”.

    Pressure Grows for F.B.I.’s Anthrax Evidence

    1

    WASHINGTON – After four years of painstaking scientific research, the F.B.I. by 2005 had traced the anthrax in the poisoned letters of 2001 to a single flask of the bacteria at the Army biodefense laboratory at Fort Detrick, Md., according to government scientists and bureau officials.

    But at least 10 scientists had regular access to the laboratory and its anthrax stock – and possibly quite a few more, counting visitors from other institutions, and workers at laboratories in Ohio and New Mexico that had received anthrax samples from the flask at the Army laboratory.

    To get that far, the Federal Bureau of Investigation had helped invent what was virtually a new science, microbial forensics, the use of biochemical clues to track a germ weapon to its source.

    The bureau sponsored research at a score of government and university laboratories intended to estimate the age of the anthrax, tracing the water used to grow it, assessing how it was made into an inhalable powder and, perhaps most important, taking its genetic fingerprint.

    But at that point, the science had largely reached its limits. To figure out who in the narrowed pool of scientist-suspects was the perpetrator, the F.B.I. would have to rely on traditional gumshoe investigative methods: interviewing colleagues and family members, searching houses and cars, doing surveillance, and assessing personalities.

    About 18 months ago, investigators appeared to sharpen their focus on Bruce E. Ivins, a veteran anthrax researcher, whom they placed under intensive surveillance as they examined every aspect of his life and work.

    Since Dr. Ivins’s suicide last week, F.B.I. officials have said prosecutors were preparing to indict him for sending the anthrax letters, which killed five people, although charges appear to have been a few weeks away.

    Dr. Ivins had been a respected microbiologist for three decades at the United States Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases at Fort Detrick. He was a popular neighbor in Frederick, Md., a Red Cross volunteer and an amateur juggler who played keyboards at his church.

    But the investigators found some personal quirks, according to law enforcement officials and people who knew the scientist well. They found that Dr. Ivins, who had a history of alcohol abuse, had for years maintained a post office box under an assumed name that he used to receive pornographic pictures of blindfolded women.

    Years ago, he had visited Kappa Kappa Gamma sorority houses at universities in Maryland, Virginia and West Virginia, an obsession growing out of a romance with a sorority sister in his own college days at the University of Cincinnati – although someone who knew him well said the last such visit was in 1981.

    What is more relevant, agents focused new attention on a 2002 Army investigation of a spill of anthrax the same year outside the secure laboratory that Dr. Ivins worked in, and his puzzling behavior in trying to clean the area with bleach while failing to report the contamination. They studied his anthrax vaccine patents and considered whether the promise of royalties after a bioterrorism scare might have been a motive. They noted that he had a lyophilizer, which could be used to dry wet anthrax into powder, a form not ordinarily used at Fort Detrick.

    They had even intensively questioned his adopted children, Andrew and Amanda, now both 24, with the authorities telling his son that he might be able to collect the $2.5 million reward for solving the case and buy a sports car, and showing his daughter gruesome photographs of victims of the anthrax letters and telling her, “Your father did this,” according to the account Dr. Ivins gave a close friend.

    As the investigation wore on, some colleagues thought the F.B.I.’s methods were increasingly coercive, as the agency tried to turn Army scientists against one another and reinterviewed family members.

    One former colleague, Dr. W. Russell Byrne, said the agents pressed Dr. Ivins’s daughter repeatedly to acknowledge that her father was involved in the attacks.

    “It was not an interview,” Dr. Byrne said. “It was a frank attempt at intimidation.”

    Dr. Byrne said he believed Dr. Ivins was singled out partly because of his personal weaknesses. “They figured he was the weakest link,” Dr. Byrne said. “If they had real evidence on him, why did they not just arrest him?”

    Another former co-worker, Dr. Kenneth W. Hedlund, who collaborated on anthrax research with Dr. Ivins in the 1980s, had a similar theory.

    “The investigators looked around, they decided they had to find somebody. They went after all of them but he looked the most susceptible to pressure,” Dr. Hedlund said. “It is like prisoners of war: if they are harassed enough, they will be driven to do anything. But I don’t believe he would have done what they say he did.”

    With such views voiced by Dr. Ivins’s acquaintances – and vocal skepticism from key members of Congress – the pressure is growing on the F.B.I. to unveil its evidence.

    On Monday, officials began to contact survivors of the anthrax attacks and family members of the five who died to say they would get a briefing, in person or by telephone, before the case against Dr. Ivins was made public.

    Shirley Davis, the primary caretaker for Ottilie W. Lundgren of Oxford, Conn., a 94-year-old woman who was killed in the anthrax letter attack, said that she received a call on Monday.

    “They asked if we could put together a list of questions we would like to have answered, just to get an idea of just exactly what happened,” Ms. Davis, 78, said. She said she had not yet been given a day or time for the briefing.

    “It is a relief to know that they have found something,” Ms. Davis said. “It has been seven years now. But it may end up still that they don’t really know why this happened or what happened.”

    F.B.I. officials say they do know a great deal about what happened and will make it public, possibly as early as Wednesday. They say the core of their case will be the science, which produced the giant step from a globe of possible suspects to a single lab and a single flask.

    Faced with the scientific mystery of the powder, government and outside scientists first looked at chemical isotopes in the attack strain for clues as to when and where the bacteria had been grown. Analyzing traces of the beef broth used to grow the anthrax, scientists measured carbon-14 left from nuclear weapons tests in the 1950s, whose quantity diminishes every year.

    By calculating the ratio of carbon-14 to the normal kind in residue of plants eaten by the cow from which the broth was made, investigators learned by June 2002 that the anthrax had been grown within the last two years.

    A second clue was developed from the new ability to sequence, or decode, the chemical letters of DNA. Scientists at the Institute for Genomic Research, a pioneer in genome sequencing, sequenced the full genome of the anthrax recovered from the blood of Robert Stevens, the first victim of the attacks.

    The genome of various stocks of the Ames strain of anthrax used in the attacks were almost identical in all the 5 million chemical letters of their DNA. But researchers found enough differences in the attack strain to provide a reasonable chance of identifying its source.

    The chief difference was that a stretch of DNA was flipped head to tail in some bacteria in the attack strain, but not in any other samples.

    Further, the attack strain contained bacteria with both the flipped and the unflipped DNA, showing that it was a mixture of two strains, which analysts later found reflected a mix of origins – 85 percent from the Dugway Proving Ground of the Army in Utah and 15 percent added at Fort Detrick, according to one person close to the investigation.

    To make sure the case for the distinctive features of the attack anthrax could hold up in court, agents collected thousands of samples of Ames strain anthrax from labs around the world, said scientists familiar with the F.B.I.’s thinking. “This is the step that took so long,” one scientist said.

    Decoding the genome of a bacterium like anthrax may have cost around $500,000 in 2002, and even the F.B.I.’s budget would have been strained to decode thousands of genomes. A new generation of sequencing machines can now sequence bacterial genomes for around $500. But those machines did not become available until about 2005, which may have been another reason for the delay.

    Despite speculation that the anthrax had a special coating to make it more deadly, an F.B.I. scientist, Douglas Beecher, published an article in 2006 saying no such sophisticated additives had been found. That finding broadened the number of scientists and technicians who could have made the anthrax, another obstacle to a quick resolution.

    Richard Ebright, a Rutgers University biochemist and an opponent of the rapid expansion of biodefense research since 2001, said the F.B.I. should long ago have released some of its scientific conclusions.

    “The finding that the attack material could be traced definitively to a U.S. bioweapons research lab could, and should, have been released as soon is it was obtained,” Dr. Ebright said, noting that the finding could raise questions about the wisdom of proliferating stocks of anthrax and other pathogens.

    “This is not just a finding with Agatha Christie-Perry Mason implications,” he said.

    U.S. May Have Taped Visits to Detainees

    0

    The Bush administration informed all foreign intelligence and law enforcement teams visiting their citizens held at Guantanamo Bay that video and sound from their interrogation sessions would be recorded, according to documents obtained by The Washington Post. The policy suggests that the United States could possess hundreds or thousands of hours of secret taped conversations between detainees and representatives from nearly three dozen countries.

    Numerous State Department cables to foreign government delegations in 2002 and 2003 show that each country was subject to rules and regulations “to protect the interests and ensure the safety of all concerned.” Condition No. 1 stated that U.S. authorities would closely monitor the interrogations, a practice that the Defense Department confirmed last week was also carried out to gather intelligence.

    “The United States will video tape and sound record the interviews between representatives of your government and the detainee(s) named above,” read several of the nearly identical cables, obtained via a Freedom of Information Act request.

    Should such videotapes exist, they would reveal how representatives from countries such as China, Egypt, Jordan, Libya, Russia, Saudi Arabia and Tunisia treated detainees in small interrogation booths at the U.S. detention facility at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba — sessions that some detainees have said were abusive and at times contained threats of torture or even death. Though attorneys for the detainees have long sought to obtain such evidence, the administration has thus far denied the requests and has not indicated that such tapes exist.

    The Defense Department has long maintained that it did not regularly videotape interrogations at Guantanamo Bay, and only last month acknowledged recording at least seven hours of Canadian officials interrogating terrorism suspect Omar Khadr after the Canadian Supreme Court ordered Canadian officials to release those tapes. The Khadr tapes show that U.S. officials had the capability and infrastructure to record the conversations from several angles.

    In the Khadr tapes, the young Canadian is shown having polite but tense conversations with Canadian intelligence officers in a small booth with a table, chairs and a wall-mounted air conditioner. At times, Khadr appears frustrated and distraught, complaining about his treatment during captivity. The videos captured images from multiple vantage points, including from behind the slats of a vent, and also captured audio from the sessions.

    Navy Cmdr. J.D. Gordon, a Pentagon spokesman, said that the videotaping of visits by foreign delegations was not “standard operating procedure” but that such monitoring was done to protect the detainees, the foreign officials and the United States. He also said it was conducted for “intelligence-collection purposes.”

    “If videotapes were made, they were likely used for translators to transcribe and/or for intelligence officers to clarify their notes after the fact,” Gordon said. Defense officials declined to list the countries that had sent intelligence agents because the roster is classified, but they put the number at more than 30. They declined to say how many tapes were made.

    The documents show that the State Department was working with several governments in early 2002, allowing them to bring three-person teams to Guantanamo Bay for week-long visits. Early delegations were from such countries as Bahrain, Belgium, France and Russia, according to e-mails provided to The Post, just as the facility’s detainee population was dramatically increasing.

    Officials from governments that visited detainees at Guantanamo Bay said they understood that the sessions would be taped and expected that it would happen, both for security and intelligence purposes.

    “We knew for a while that all the interrogations and questioning was being recorded, and that that was the routine,” said one Yemeni official who spoke on the condition of anonymity for lack of authorization to discuss the visits. “We sent a total of three teams, and it was common knowledge that all the interviews with the detainees were videotaped and recorded.”

    Current and former U.S. government officials said the foreign delegation visits in 2002 — shortly after the facility was opened — were key to intelligence gathering because foreign agents could speak a detainee’s language and could put the conversations in a context that eluded U.S. interrogators.

    U.S. officials required the foreign delegations to share their final reports from such visits, as well as any recordings the foreign agents made themselves. A U.S. official also witnessed the conversations, often from within the same room.

    “The value we saw was that these guys would know their nationals and could get information better than we could,” said a U.S. official familiar with the visits. “We were pretty green in this area at that time. We also wanted to know what was going on in the room, because we were on the hook for the well-being of everyone that came in there.”

    Every country that has received a detainee transfer from Guantanamo Bay at one point visited the facility to identify its nationals and to question them from an intelligence and law enforcement perspective, two U.S. officials said.

    Some countries visited numerous times, including Bahrain, which sent a delegation in April 2002 and then about once a year after that, according to Joshua Colangelo-Bryan, a lawyer who represented six Bahraini nationals and described the meetings as tense.

    “There was nothing comforting about the visits,” he said. “I don’t remember anyone talking about knowing they were being videotaped in those meetings, but if you have the Khadr videotape and this statement, that seems pretty clear. The question is: Did the U.S. destroy everything?”

    In 2005, lawyers representing the detainees obtained an order from a judge in the U.S. District Court in the District of Columbia forcing the government to preserve all evidence of possible coercion, including videotapes. After the CIA acknowledged last year that it destroyed tapes of detainee interrogations, Pentagon officials said they were continuing to preserve evidence in the case of Hani Saleh Rashid Abdullah, a Yemeni detainee at Guantanamo Bay, but have never specified what evidence they have.

    Detainees have for years reported being threatened by their home governments in interrogations at the facility, some to the point of trying to commit suicide after the meetings for fear of having to return home to face possible torture or death. The Center for Constitutional Rights, which has represented hundreds of Guantanamo Bay detainees, has criticized the U.S. government, saying that it ushers “interrogators from recognized human rights abusing regimes onto the U.S. military base” and that it allows threats and abuse “with the active involvement of U.S. forces.”

    The lawyers have vowed to push for evidence of such abuse at the Supreme Court-mandated habeas corpus hearings that are scheduled to begin soon.

    George Brent Mickum IV, a Washington lawyer who represents Guantanamo Bay detainees, said he has learned from a former interrogator at the facility that U.S. officials kept an index listing all the videotapes of the foreign delegations. He also said that one of his clients — Bisher al-Rawi, who was returned to England from Guantanamo Bay — was interviewed by Britain’s MI-5 intelligence service at least five times at the facility, conversations Mickum says would show that Rawi should not have been imprisoned.

    “There is absolutely no doubt in my mind that these tapes did in fact exist and that, contrary to what the military says, it was absolutely SOP,” Mickum said. “I would be shocked if they had not been destroyed.”

    Zachary Katznelson, legal director of Reprieve, which represents 32 Guantanamo Bay detainees, said that foreign governments have threatened some of his clients and that he would be interested in seeing the interrogation tapes as potential evidence that the United States has been complicit in sending detainees to countries that are known to torture.

    “I think there’s no question, if you invite someone in, and they threaten them, the person who invited them in should be held accountable,” Katznelson said. “We will request any and all videotapes by U.S. and foreign intelligence services to find out what was being done to them and what threats were made against them.”

    One of Reprieve’s clients, Hisham Sliti, a Tunisian who remains detained, told the organization that the Tunisian government sent three people to interrogate him and that they threatened him with “water torture in the barrel” upon his return.

    Staff researcher Julie Tate contributed to this report.

    http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2008/08/04/AR2008080402321_2.html?sid=ST2008080402411&pos=

    Secret deal kept British Army out of battle for Basra

    0

    A secret deal between Britain and the notorious al-Mahdi militia prevented British Forces from coming to the aid of their US and Iraqi allies for nearly a week during the battle for Basra this year, The Times has learnt.

    Four thousand British troops — including elements of the SAS and an entire mechanised brigade — watched from the sidelines for six days because of an “accommodation” with the Iranian-backed group, according to American and Iraqi officers who took part in the assault.

    US Marines and soldiers had to be rushed in to fill the void, fighting bitter street battles and facing mortar fire, rockets and roadside bombs with their Iraqi counterparts.

    Hundreds of militiamen were killed or arrested in the fighting. About 60 Iraqis were killed or injured. One US Marine died and sevenwere wounded.

    US advisers who accompanied the Iraqi forces into the fight were shocked to learn of the accommodation made last summer by British Intelligence and elements of al-Mahdi Army, the militia loyal to Moqtada al-Sadr, the radical Shia Muslim cleric.

    The deal, which aimed to encourage the Shia movement back into the political process and marginalise extremist factions, has dealt a huge blow to Britain’s reputation in Iraq.  

    Under its terms, no British soldier could enter Basra without the permission of Des Browne, the Defence Secretary. By the time he gave his approval, most of the fighting was over and the damage to Britain’s reputation had already been done.

    Senior British defence sources told The Times that Nouri al-Maliki, the Iraqi Prime Minister, who ordered the assault, and high-ranking US military officers had become disillusioned with the British as a result of their failure to act. Another confirmed that the deal, negotiated by British Intelligence, had been a costly mistake.

    The Ministry of Defence has never confirmed that there was a deal with al-Mahdi Army, but one official denied that the delay in sending in troops was because of the arrangement agreed with the Shia militia.

    A spokesman for the MoD said that the reason why troops were not sent immediately into Basra was because there was “no structure in place” in the city for units to go back in to start mentoring the Iraqi troops.

    Colonel Imad, who heads the 2nd Battalion, 1st Brigade, 1st Iraqi Army Division, the most experienced division, commanded one of the quick-reaction battalions summoned to assist British-trained local forces, who faltered from the outset because of inexperience and lack of support.

    He said: “Without the support of the Americans we would not have accomplished the mission because the British Forces had done nothing there.

    “I do not trust the British Forces. They did not want to lose any soldiers for the mission.”

    Lieutenant-Colonel Chuck Western, a senior US Marine advising the Iraqi Army, told The Times: “I was not happy. Everybody just assumed that because this deal was cut nobody was going in. Cutting a deal with the bad guys is generally not a good idea.”

    He emphasised, however, that he was not being critical of the British military, which he described as first-rate.

    Captain Eric Whyne, another US Marine officer who took part in the battle, said that he was astounded that “a coalition force would make a pact with essentially their enemy and promise not to go into their area so as not to get attacked”. He alleged that “some horrific atrocities” were committed by the militia in Basra during the British watch.

    A senior British defence source agreed that the battle for Basra had been damaging to Britain’s reputation in Iraq. “Maliki, and the Americans, felt the British were morally impugned by the deal they had reached with the militia. The British were accused of trying to find the line of least resistance in dealing with the Shia militia,” said the source.

    “You can accuse the Americans of many things, such as hamfistedness, but you can’t accuse them of not addressing a situation when it arises. While we had a strategy of evasion, the Americans just went in and addressed the problem.”

    Another British official said that the deal was intended as an IRA-style reconciliation. “That is what we were trying to do but it did not work.” The official added that “accommodation” had become a dirty word.

    US officials knew of the discussions, which continued until March this year. They facilitated the peaceful exit of British troops from a palace compound in Basra last September in return for the release of a number of prisoners. The arrangement fell apart on March 25 when Mr al-Maliki ordered his surprise assault on Basra, catching both the Americans and British off-guard.

    The Americans responded by flying in reinforcements, providing air cover and offering the logistical and other support needed for the Iraqis to win.

    The British were partly handicapped because their commander, Major-General Barney White-Spunner, was away on a skiing holiday when the attack began. When Brigadier Julian Free, his deputy, arrived to discuss the situation with Mr al-Maliki at the presidential palace in Basra, he was made to wait outside.

    The first British troops only entered the city on March 31.

    The MoD spokesman said that the operation was launched at such short notice that the only support that could be given in the first few days was air power — in the form of Tornado ground attack aircraft — and logistics.

    He said that after British troops were withdrawn from Basra last year it was realised that the Iraqi forces still needed help, which was why the current British force contained more instructors and trainers.

    Marines ordered to stay longer in Afghanistan

    0

    WASHINGTON – The Pentagon has ordered roughly 1,250 Marines serving as trainers for the Afghan security forces to stay on the warfront about a month longer to continue a mission that military leaders say is a top priority, according to a senior military official.

    In addition, Defense Secretary Robert Gates has authorized the deployment of up to 200 other troops to Afghanistan to support the Marines. That includes eight helicopter crews that could be shifted from Iraq if commanders decide.

    The senior military official spoke to The Associated Press on Monday on condition of anonymity because the formal announcement has not yet been made.

    The decision to extend the tour of the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marine Regiment in Afghanistan comes just a month after defense officials told the 24th Marine Expeditionary Unit that it would stay an extra month in Afghanistan.

    According to the official, the decision to hold the battalion there longer is part of an effort to capitalize on the gains the Marines have made in the training mission. The extension means that the battalion would return home in late November.

    Gates’ decision to send the other support forces comes after weeks of discussions by top military leaders who scrambled to find needed troops. He authorized Army Lt. Gen. Martin E. Dempsey, who is temporarily in charge of U.S. Central Command, to shift up to eight helicopter units from Iraq to Afghanistan – four Cobra attack aircraft and four MH-53 heavy lift helicopters.

    The remainder of the support forces being deployed are smaller units, including engineers, route clearance troops and explosive ordnance disposal teams. It was not clear Monday whether those support forces also would return home in late November, or if they would stay longer in Afghanistan.

    Late last week Gates hinted at the moves, saying the Pentagon was “looking at” sending a couple hundred troops at the most to Afghanistan soon.

    The Pentagon announced in January that the Marine Expeditionary Unit, which is based at Camp Lejeune, N.C., was being ordered to Afghanistan, largely because efforts to press other NATO nations to increase their troop levels at the time had failed. The MEU has been fighting Taliban militants in the volatile south.

    At the same time, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marine Regiment, which is based at Twentynine Palms, Calif., was ordered to deploy also.

    Gates has said he would not replace the Marines with other U.S. troops when they left later this year. But commanders have said they need three more combat brigades – or as many as 10,000 troops – to bolster the fight in Afghanistan. And U.S. officials have indicated they would like to send extra brigades there next year.

    Military leaders, however, have made it clear they need to free units from Iraq deployments in order to send more troops to Afghanistan. As security in Iraq continues to improve, officials have suggested that units initially headed for Iraq late this year or early next year could be sent to Afghanistan instead.

    AP

    Union slams EPA chief for ignoring staff on global warming

    0

    By Renee Schoof, McClatchy Newspapers

    WASHINGTON – Environmental Protection Agency chief Stephen Johnson stunned his staff last month when he publicly opposed their proposals for regulating greenhouse gas emissions, four union officials representing EPA staff working on global warming policies said in a letter provided to McClatchy Monday.

    The letter alleges that Johnson subverted the work of EPA staff and damaged the agency’s reputation for “sound science and policy.” The EPA needs public respect and support in order to implement the nation’s environmental laws, it said.

    Several Democratic senators recently have called for Johnson to resign, charging that he disregarded science and the law and may have misled them when he testified on Capitol Hill. Congressional committees are investigating whether the EPA’s decisions have been made in accord with the conclusions of its staff and whether the White House interfered with some of the agency’s work.

    “I’m sensing there’s built-up frustration among EPA employees,” said one of the authors of the letter, Mark Coryell, president of the American Federation of Government Employees Local 3907, which represents staff members at the EPA’s National Vehicle and Fuel Emissions Laboratory.

    “Their best efforts to do right by the law and sound science have been subverted by actions taken by or not taken by Johnson, our administrator,” Coryell said. “A lot of them are certainly hurt by the impact on their professional reputations.”

    The environmental group Public Employees for Environmental Responsibility gave a copy of the letter by Coryell and the others to McClatchy.

    EPA spokesman Jonathan Shradar said Monday that the science of the document released last month “speaks for itself and the administrator is proud of the work the staff completed at his direction.”

    The Supreme Court in 2007 found that the EPA has the authority to regulate emissions of greenhouse gases from motor vehicles. The court said that under the Clean Air Act, the EPA should determine whether the emissions endanger the public and, if so, regulate them.

    Johnson hasn’t issued an endangerment finding. Last month, in response to the high court’s ruling, he released a wide range of proposals by his staff for controlling greenhouse gas emissions and called for comment through Nov. 28.

    But Johnson also argued that the federal Clean Air Act was “ill-suited” for regulating greenhouse gases, that the regulations would be “very complicated, time-consuming and, likely, convoluted,” and that they’d be “relatively ineffective at reducing greenhouse gas concentrations given the potentially damaging effect on jobs and the U.S. economy.”

    In addition, Johnson attached letters from the White House’s Office of Management and Budget and department secretaries in the Bush cabinet who disagreed with the EPA staff’s proposals on legal, economic and scientific grounds.

    The letter from Coryell and the other union officials said that EPA staff members who worked on the proposed regulations weren’t given a chance to read the critiques or respond to them before the document was made public.

    The letter said Johnson’s actions were “troubling and, quite frankly, unprofessional,” adding: “We believe EPA’s hardworking, dedicated staff has earned more respect than you are giving.”

    The letter was dated July 30 and signed by Coryell and Silvia Saracco, president of American Federation of Government Employees Local 3347 at EPA’s Research Triangle Park in North Carolina, and William Evans and J. William Hirzy, president and vice president, respectively, of National Treasury Employees Union Chapter 280 at EPA headquarters.

    The union leaders also wrote that Johnson should release documents and testify as requested by Congress.

    George Tenet And White House Admit Iraq Intelligence Chief Told Them Iraq Had No WMD

    1

    Ron Suskind was on NPR this morning to discuss his new book The Way of the World, which alleges Iraq’s intelligence chief Tahir Jalil Habbush told the US before the war that Iraq had no WMD.

    NPR asked George Tenet and the White House for comment, and, remarkably enough, they both essentially admitted this was true.

    SUSKIND: What we now know from this investigation is that a secret mission was conducted in which a British manager, intelligence agent, met with the head of Iraqi intelligence in a secret location in Amman, Jordan. And what the Iraqi intelligence chief told the British–and essentially the Americans, because we’re all in this together–is that there were no WMD in Iraq. And what that meant is that we knew everything that became so obvious by the summer after the invasion. And the president made a decision essentially to ignore that intelligence…

    NPR: We have called key players in Ron Suskind’s account…George Tenet says the Iraqi failed to persuade, and a White House spokesman adds that any information the Iraqi may have provided was, quote, “immaterial.”

    Further corroboration appears in a November, 2003 New York Times story by James Risen. Risen’s article is about last-minute attempts by Iraq to avert war, using a Lebanese-American intermediary named Imad Hage who knew Richard Perle:

    A week [after February, 2003 meetings in Beirut with the Iraqi Intelligence Service’s chief of foreign operations], Mr. Hage said, he agreed to hold further meetings in Baghdad. When he arrived, he was driven to a large, well-guarded compound, where he was met by a gray-haired man in a military uniform. It was Tahir Jalil Habbush, the director of the Iraqi Intelligence Service, who is No. 16 on the United States list of most wanted Iraqi leaders. Mr. Hage said Mr. Habbush asked him if it was true that he knew Mr. Perle. “Have you met him?”

    Mr. Hage said Mr. Habbush began to vent his frustration over what the Americans really wanted. He said that to demonstrate the Iraqis’ willingness to help fight terrorism, Mr. Habbush offered to hand over Abdul Rahman Yasin, who has been indicted in United States in connection with the 1993 World Trade Center bombing. Mr. Yasin fled to Iraq after the bombing, and the United States put up a $25 million reward for his capture.

    Mr. Hage said Mr. Habbush offered to turn him over to Mr. Hage, but Mr. Hage said he would pass on the message that Mr. Yasin was available.

    Mr. Hage said Mr. Habbush also insisted that Iraq had no weapons of mass destruction and added, “Let your friends send in people and we will open everything to them.”

    Mr. Hage said he asked Mr. Habbush, “Why don’t you tell this to the Bush administration?” He said Mr. Habbush replied cryptically, “We have talks with people.”

    Mr. Hage said he later learned that one contact was in Rome between the C.I.A. and representatives of the Iraqi intelligence service. American officials confirm that the meeting took place, but say that the Iraqi representative was not a current intelligence official and that the meeting was not productive.

    In addition, there was an attempt to set up a meeting in Morocco between Mr. Habbush and United States officials, but it never took place, according to American officials.

    This can be added onto the pile:

    – The CIA sent thirty relatives of Iraqi scientists to Iraq to ask them what WMD Iraq had, and they uniformly reported it had nothing.
    – Iraq’s foreign minister Nouri Sabri secretly told the US in 2002 that Iraq had no active WMD programs.
    – Alan Foley, the head of the CIA’s Weapons Intelligence Non-Proliferation and Arms Control Center, told an acquaintance just before the war that he expected we would find “Not much, if anything.”

    http://www.tinyrevolution.com/mt/archives/002473.html

    Study: 1 in 4 soldiers at war have hearing loss

    0

    By Gregg Zoroya | The bombs along the Baghdad road exploded one after the other, leaving one soldier unconscious and another screaming from his wounds. Staff Sgt. Kevin Dunne’s squad was under attack. Rifle and machine gun fire pinned them down. Then, shots from a sniper.

    Dunne yelled orders, but he and his squad were at a disadvantage.

    Dunne said he couldn’t hear well enough to tell where the sniper fire was coming from.

    “I had no idea,” he wrote in an e-mail to USA Today.

    In the four months before the April 7 attack, the chief physician at Fort Hood, Texas, had warned that Dunne’s hearing was so bad that he should be removed from combat duties. Others in the Army overruled him and sent Dunne back to Iraq for his third combat tour.

    Now, a member of Dunne’s squad – Sgt. Richard Vaughn, 22, of San Diego – lay dead from a sniper’s bullet.

    “He was lying in the middle of the street motionless,” Dunne wrote. “I blame myself a lot for not being able to identify the threat simply because of the way I heard the shots.”

    Hearing loss is one of the most common ailments that affects troops sent back to combat, according to the Pentagon and government researchers. One in four soldiers serving in Iraq or Afghanistan have damaged hearing, the Army said. In addition, a recent study from the Rand Corp. reported one in five combat veterans suffer post-traumatic stress disorder or depression. Back pain, leg injuries and other musculoskeletal problems are the top ailments of troops in the war zone, said Ellen Embrey, deputy assistant secretary of Defense for force health protection and readiness.

    Dunne, who in Iraq was part of the 4th Infantry Division at Fort Hood, is now back home. Besides his hearing problems, he shows signs of PTSD and has severe back problems.

    After more than five years of war marked by multiple deployments, many combat veterans are developing long-term health problems, raising the risk that ailing troops are being sent back into combat.

    Since 2003, 43,000 troops who were classified as medically unfit in the weeks prior to deployment were still sent to war, Pentagon statistics show. That number began to drop after 2003, but the trend has reversed in the last two years. Central Command, which oversees troops in Iraq and Afghanistan, is drafting rules that could make it more difficult to send unfit troops to war.

    “As much as I wanted to get out there …, I’m seriously physically challenged by not being able to hear,” Dunne wrote. “The guys to my left and right don’t deserve anything to happen to them because of my personal pride.”

    ‘Feeling like I’m 50’

    Dunne returned from Iraq in June.

    “I’m now at 29, feeling like I’m 50,” he wrote before leaving Baghdad.

    He has fought off and on in Iraq since 2003, when his unit was profiled by USA Today. Dunne has been in occasional contact with the newspaper since then.

    Meanwhile, Dunne began a series of routine medical exams and screenings to understand the war’s toll on him. Doctors found:

    – Hearing loss. His hearing declined dramatically during Dunne’s first tour. Army audiological records show loss in various frequencies, particularly in his left ear, said Anthony Cacace, an audiologist and professor at Wayne State University in Detroit. Cacace reviewed Dunne’s medical test records provided by USA Today.

    The weakness leaves him struggling to hear consonant sounds, especially if there is background noise.

    “He’s going to have one hell of a time understanding what people say if he can’t get visual cues,” Cacace said, adding Dunne has the hearing of a 70-year-old in his right ear and worse than that in his left.

    – Severe lower back pain dating to his first Iraq tour from April 2003 to April 2004. By his third tour, Dunne required regular painkiller injections.

    – PTSD symptoms after his second tour, when Dunne was near a suicide bomb explosion.

    – Tinnitus, or ringing in the ears that never stops. To sleep, he listens to rock music on his iPod, a common means of coping for troops with tinnitus, said Army Maj. Dan Ohama, an audiologist working in Baghdad.

    Service-connected back and neck injuries have left nearly 50,000 Iraq- and Afghanistan-era veterans permanently disabled, Department of Veterans Affairs records show. VA has treated 75,000 such veterans for PTSD and placed nearly 35,000 on permanent disability. And almost 70,000 suffer from tinnitus, VA records show.

    In December, weeks before Dunne went to Iraq for his third tour, his company commander spelled out the staff sergeant’s chief physical problems. The soldier’s battle-damaged hearing, Capt. Alex Garn wrote, “limits his ability to identify enemy locations by sound, hear commands from his team leaders, hear radio traffic over a squad radio, or speak with local nationals in combat, which could have negative ramifications to the mission.”

    On Dec. 19, the chief physician and medical commander at Fort Hood, Texas, where Dunne is based, urged that he be taken out of infantry. “At risk of continued hearing loss,” Col. Jeffrey Clark wrote.

    Clark was the only doctor on a five-member panel reviewing Dunne’s fitness for combat on Dec. 19. He was overruled by the other four panelists. Dunne’s brigade commander and three senior sergeants agreed that Dunne should stay in infantry and go to Iraq.

    “Hearing loss is present in all forms … in the Army,” wrote one panelist, Master Sgt. Ulysses Martin. “It’s impossible to validate whether he will lose his hearing more or less in the future. I feel that infantry is his best place.”

    One factor in their decision was Dunne’s desire to return despite his hearing loss. He said he felt a responsibility to be with his platoon. His unit’s young soldiers, he wrote from Iraq, “needed as much help as they can get.”

    “That’s pride,” said Geni Gillaspie, Dunne’s girlfriend and the mother of his two children. “That’s Kevin … wanting to lead his men and do the right thing.”

    The attitude impressed Dunne’s brigade commander, Col. Theodore Martin.

    “Very dedicated soldier,” Martin wrote during the review. “Wants to stay infantry. This is his life. I vote he stays infantry.”

    Despite his desire to deploy, Dunne thought his commanders would limit his combat exposure because of his hearing loss. Garn had recommended in his memorandum that Dunne be given a hearing aid to wear into combat.

    Neither happened. During that April firefight, Dunne realized he was truly handicapped.

    “I came to terms with myself and realized that I was not as confident in my ability to continue my job,” he wrote in an e-mail May 6. “It was better for me to realize this than to ignore it.”

    Even then, he said, he hesitated to speak up.

    “I don’t know how to approach [commanders] and tell them of what my feelings are,” he wrote in an e-mail April 26, “because I’ve been around long enough to know that I’ll be looked at as a quitter.”

    Rules not followed

    Army regulations allow troops with health problems to go to war if their job comports with their physical limitations and if there are resources in the combat zone – such as psychological counseling – to treat them.

    But a Government Accountability Office report released June 10 found the rules are not always followed. It said that after doctors identified significant health issues among dozens of soldiers from three installations – Fort Drum in New York and Forts Stewart and Benning in Georgia – infantry commanders failed to limit their duties or schedule review boards to determine whether they should be moved to different jobs or out of the Army.

    Troops with hearing unfit for combat are showing up in the war zone, Ohama said.

    “We see cases of soldiers deploying when they did not meet the hearing standards,” he said.

    As troops prepare for war, medical officers need to be forceful, said S. Ward Casscells, the Pentagon’s chief of military medicine.

    “The commander has to make the call based on the mission, but the doctors should make the case very clearly that deploying Cpl. X against his or her medical judgment is a decision that could be held against the commander,” Casscells wrote in his Internet blog.

    The risks of a mistake are too high, said James Martin, a retired colonel and expert on military culture at Bryn Mawr College in Pennsylvania.

    “This is a disability you don’t want to get worse,” he said. “You don’t want this person to be put in a position where he might hurt himself or others.”

    A new assignment

    At the time of the April attack, the forward operating base in Baghdad where Dunne was deployed was under constant mortar and rocket fire. He sought counseling with one of the Army’s combat stress teams.

    “They say my symptoms are mimicking signs of depression. Who the hell knows what that means?” he wrote on May 6. “They gave me three sheets of paper with breathing techniques, another describing how to imagine being in a happy place … and to remind myself to relax when I started getting anxious.”

    With the installation under daily rocket or mortar fire, Dunne said, the recommendations were impractical.

    “For them to tell me to think happy [thoughts] is what will resolve my issues immediately – I have no faith in their judgment,” he wrote May 22.

    Dunne finally was moved from the front lines only after he complained by e-mail to Gillaspie; his mother, Diann Dunne; and after USA Today inquired about Dunne’s combat fitness. He was given another hearing exam by Ohama in Baghdad. The results confirmed the earlier findings.

    His current brigade commander, Col. Mark Dewhurst, cites the review board’s decision in December as the reason Dunne was in combat.

    “Staff Sgt. Dunne attested that he could fulfill his duties,” Dewhurst said.

    The commander said he was not aware of any problems until the USA Today query.

    “Dunne relayed that he did not want to let down his soldiers, so he did not report his condition,” he said.

    Martin said it is a mistake to rely too heavily on the service member suffering the disability when it comes to the question of fitness.

    “You can’t ask the person to make the determination because emotionally, they’re too connected to wanting to overcome their disability.”

    In a telephone interview from Texas, Dunne said he is uncertain about his long-term future.

    Another fitness hearing is scheduled and he has been assigned to a rear-detachment unit. Dunne said he once dreamed of law enforcement, but his hearing loss has put that out of reach.

    So shortly before coming home, Dunne accepted an offer to re-enlist for three years with an $11,000 bonus. He hoped the Army would find a place for him away from combat.

    Last week, he said he received some good news on that front – a new assignment as a casualty liaison officer for 4th Infantry Division wounded who arrive at the Army’s Landstuhl Regional Medical Center in Germany. All casualties from Iraq and Afghanistan pass through that facility.

    “I get back to helping out and doing things for these guys,” he said. “I’m really excited.”

    Would Obama prosecute the Bush administration for torture?

    4

    By Mark Benjamin | On the campaign trail in April, Barack Obama was asked whether, if elected, he would prosecute Bush administration officials for establishing torture as American policy. The candidate demurred. “If crimes have been committed, they should be investigated,” he said. But he quickly added, “I would not want my first term consumed by what was perceived on the part of the Republicans as a partisan witch hunt, because I think we’ve got too many problems to solve.”

    People who have given advice to the Obama campaign say they see little political advantage in the candidate discussing during a general election campaign how his administration might investigate or prosecute Bush administration officials for torture. Other than the response above, prompted by a question from Will Bunch of the Philadelphia Daily News, he has said little about his plans. But behind the scenes, a slate of foreign policy and human rights experts with various degrees of connections to the Obama campaign, some of them likely to occupy positions of authority in an Obama administration, have begun to discuss that very issue, and in great detail. What they’re likely to recommend to Obama, should he become president, won’t fulfill the dreams of those who’ve hoped for immediate criminal accountability for Bush administration officials.

    Members and advisors of the administration-in-waiting have formed largely informal working groups to take up a whole host of issues related to the Bush administration’s legacy, like what to do about the Guantánamo detainees. While they have not been asked to develop a formal recommendation for Obama on the question of criminal accountability for torture, those who are weighing the issue, a group that includes some of the 300 people the New York Times recently described as Obama’s “mini State Department,” are moving toward consensus on some key points. Specifically, don’t hold your breath waiting for Dick Cheney to be frog-marched into federal court. Prosecution of any officials, if it were to occur, would probably not occur during Obama’s first term. Instead, we may well see a congressionally empowered commission that would seek testimony from witnesses in search of the truth about what occurred. Though some witnesses might be offered immunity in exchange for testimony, the question of whether anybody would be prosecuted would be deferred to a later date — meaning Obama’s second term, if such is forthcoming.

    While there are certainly participants in these discussions who believe that top-level administration officials deserve to be hauled before a judge, even the harshest critics of the current administration’s torture policies don’t think there will be an immediate effort by the next president to prosecute anyone from the Bush administration. “I don’t sense the political appetite for it,” said Tom Malinowski, Washington advocacy director at Human Rights Watch, who is involved in the informal discussions about what Obama could do about investigating torture. “I don’t think the next president will do that no matter who he is.”

    Attorneys say successful prosecutions would be tough anyway. The Justice Department approved the abuse and Congress changed the War Crimes Act in 2006 to make prosecutions more difficult. There is also speculation that any end-of-term presidential pardons by Bush might include some of the likely torture defendants.

    But the avenues of investigation being discussed don’t necessarily rule out at least an attempt at prosecuting Bush officials at some later date. The nonpartisan presidential commission that Malinowski and other people involved in the discussions are advocating would have considerable power, granted by Congress, to force cooperation. The commission would ultimately deliver recommendations to the president that would include, among other things, whether or not Cheney deserves that walk up the courthouse steps.

    The first order of business, however, would be learning the truth. “I think a lot of us feel that the American people are entitled to the whole truth,” said another person who knows about the discussions. “The American people are entitled to [an investigation] from an official body that has access to the classified documents that makes as much public as it can,” that person added.

    The commission would focus strictly on detention, torture and extraordinary rendition, or the practice of spiriting detainees to a third country for abusive interrogations. The panel would focus strictly on these abuses, leaving out any other allegedly illegal activities during the Bush administration, such as domestic spying.

    It would also try to confirm or debunk, once and for all, the claims of high-level Bush administration officials that the use of abusive interrogations worked and resulted in significant intelligence gains.

    This might include claims made by the president. In a Sept. 6, 2006, White House address, Bush admitted to a network of secret CIA prisons and the use of “tough” interrogation techniques by the agency. He then ticked off a treasure trove of intelligence he said the CIA pried out of Abu Zubaydah, a suspected al-Qaida operative captured on March 28, 2002, by intelligence agents from the United States and Pakistan.

    But FBI agents initially interrogated Zubaydah using tried and true, noncoercive techniques, reportedly with success. The CIA later took over and used coercive methods that included waterboarding. Controversy lingers over claims about the effectiveness of the CIA’s methods, particularly in comparison to the FBI’s approach.

    Like the 9-11 Commission, Congress could grant this panel the authority to issue subpoenas to compel witnesses to cooperate and leverage the production of documents. The panel might also have the power to grant witnesses immunity from prosecution in exchange for cooperation.

    Immunity, in fact, remains one of the thorniest issues in the ongoing discussions about how to investigate the Bush administration’s interrogation program. A recent Newsweek piece by Stuart Taylor Jr. suggested that Bush “pardon any official from cabinet secretary on down who might plausibly face prosecution” for torture during the Bush years. Taylor argued that this would encourage those individuals to testify freely in front of some sort of truth commission.

    That indemnity arrangement is more reminiscent of South Africa’s Truth and Reconciliation Commission, the 1990s-era investigation aimed at unearthing the sins of apartheid. But blanket indemnity would not be part of the commission under discussion. “A lot of people think that that is not something that goes over well with the American people,” said the person familiar with the discussions. “What we have much more of a tradition of is presidential fact-finding commissions.”

    Instead of offering a blanket amnesty, the fact-finding commission would delay any decisions on whether or not to attempt to prosecute any Bush administration officials for their transgressions. Given the time it would take for a commission to do its work, any such decision would probably not take place till Obama’s second term. That would be in accord with what Obama said in April, in what seems to be his lone statement on the issue of accountability, about not wanting his first term to be taken up by what critics would try to characterize as political retribution.

    “Something like this would be unprecedented in the American experience and I think it would be absolutely necessary,” Kenneth Kitts, author of “Presidential Commissions and National Security: The Politics of Damage Control,” said when informed of the rough plans for the commission. “We’ve had panels that have looked at scandals. We’ve had panels that have looked at intractable political problems,” said Kitts, a political science professor at South Carolina’s Francis Marion University. “But nothing in terms of looking at an issue that has this array of legal, moral and even spiritual questions attached to it.”

    Ben Rhodes, a foreign policy advisor to the Obama campaign, did not respond to Salon’s request for comment by press time.

    Suskind: Bush ordered fake letter linking Iraq to 9/11

    0

    By David Edwards and Nick Juliano | A blockbuster new book from investigative journalist Ron Suskind adds another revelation to the growing canon demonstrating the lengths to which President Bush and members of his administration lied, misled and deceived the American people to pursue its invasion of Iraq.

    Bush allegedly ordered the CIA to forge a handwritten letter from the head of Iraq’s intelligence service to Saddam Hussein that purported to link the Iraqi dictator to the ringleader of the hijackers who toppled the Twin Towers on 9/11, according to news accounts of Suskind’s new book, The Way of the World: A Story of Truth and Hope in an Age of Extremism. Such use of an intelligence service to influence domestic political debate could be an impeachable offense, Suskind writes.

    Politico’s Mike Allen reports:

    According to Suskind, the administration had been in contact with the director of the Iraqi intelligence service in the last years of Hussein’s regime, Tahir Jalil Habbush al-Tikriti.

    “The White House had concocted a fake letter from Habbush to Saddam, backdated to July 1, 2001,” Suskind writes. “It said that 9/11 ringleader Mohammad Atta had actually trained for his mission in Iraq — thus showing, finally, that there was an operational link between Saddam and al Qaeda, something the Vice President’s Office had been pressing CIA to prove since 9/11 as a justification to invade Iraq. There is no link.” […]

    The author claims that such an operation, part of “false pretenses” for war, would apparently constitute illegal White House use of the CIA to influence a domestic audience, an arguably impeachable offense.

    The faked letter was first reported as genuine by the conservative London Sunday Telegraph in December 2003. Right-wing commentators and Bush defenders harped on that disclosure as evidence of Saddam Hussein’s involvement in the 9/11 attacks. According to Suskind’s book, the CIA had been protecting Habbush in the early months of the invasion; the agency persuaded the Iraqi intelligence chief to write the letter in his own handwriting and paid him $5 million.

    CBS White House correspondent Bill Plante reported Tuesday that Suskind’s sources had seen a draft of the letter written on White House stationary.

    The Way of the World is Suskind’s third book on the inner workings of the Bush administration, joining The One Percent Doctrine, which outlined the often extreme anti-terror policies advanced by the likes of Vice President Dick Cheney, and The Price of Loyalty, which painted a picture of the early day’s of Bush’s presidency with the help of ousted former Treasury Secretary Paul O’Neill.

    Predictably, the White House is unhappy with Suskind’s latest offering and the Bush administration is relying on its trademark push-back of insulting the messenger. White House spokesman Tony Fratto insulted Suskind, who won a Pulitzer Prize for his work with the Wall Street Journal, as a practitioner of “gutter journalism,” and called the allegations “absurd.”

    Suskind appeared Tuesday on NBC’s Today Show for interviews about the latest book.

    New Book Claims Bush White House Used Forged Documents In Case For Iraq War

    0

    Haaretz | The Bush administration used forged documents that it presented as evidence of Saddam Hussein’s complicity in the September 11 terrorist attacks, and which were later used as a pretext to launch the American invasion of Iraq in March 2003, according to a newly released book by Pulitzer Prize-winning journalist Ron Suskind.

    In “The Way of the World,” Suskind writes that documents cited by the administration allege that Hussein’s regime permitted Al-Qaida operatives who carried out the 9/11 attacks to train on Iraqi soil, and that Saddam was seeking to obtain uranium in order to manufacture weapons of mass destruction.

    According to the book, the Central Intelligence Agency’s Directorate of Operations was responsible for fabricating the documents. The book goes on to say that the British intelligence agency MI6 recruited Saddam Hussein’s intelligence chief, Tahir Abd al-Jalil al-Tikriti, and questioned him in Amman two months before the war, and then handed him over to the CIA.

    Al-Tikriti continued to function as an agent for the Americans until after the invasion, when he was taken into custody by the U.S. military. His activities on behalf of the Americans remained a well-guarded secret, as his name continued to appear on a list of wanted members of Saddam’s regime. The Americans distributed decks of cards containing the names and pictures of wanted Iraqi officials, among them al-Tikriti.

    Months after the overthrow of the Ba’athist regime, al-Tikriti’s CIA handlers requested that he handwrite a letter on official Iraqi government letterhead stating that Mohammed Atta, the ringleader of the 9/11 hijackers, underwent training in Iraq prior to carrying out the attacks, according to Suskind. In addition, al-Tikriti wrote in the letter that Al-Qaida aided the Iraqi government in obtaining uranium in Niger. It is worth noting that evidence linking Saddam Hussein to Niger was discredited after the source of the information, an Italian informant, was discovered to have falsified his claims.

    The CIA was quick to disseminate the letter to journalists in Iraq, Britain, and the United States while creating the impression that it was discovered in the Iraqi Foreign Ministry archives by U.S. forces, Suskind writes. A short time later, the British Daily Telegraph was one of the first newspapers to publish the contents of the letter, which was touted as proof that there indeed was a link between Saddam Hussein and Al-Qaida, and that the Iraqi leader was intent on developing weapons of mass destruction. Other newspapers though were more skeptical of the document’s authenticity.

    © Copyright 2008 Haaretz. All rights reserved

    UK government spends 2 million on TV documentaries promoting their policies

    1
    The government’s Orwellian-named “Central Office of Information” has been funding a series of ITV documentaries which paint their policies in a positive light. The programmes were made to look like regular documentaries, and most viewers would not have known that they were government-funded.
    Back in 2006, the Times was reporting that the government were ploughing an estimated 200,000 pounds into a fly-on-the-wall ITV documentary, “Beat”, which painted a decidedly rosy picture of the controversial ‘plastic bobbies’, the Police Community Support Officers. The department in charge was the creepily-named “Central Office of Information”, a government department with a strikingly low profile. The COI describes itself as “the centre of marketing excellence for government. It provides strategic advice, consultancy, procurement and project management for public information campaigns”. The department is run by the former Chair of advertising giant Saatchi and Saatchi, Alan Bishop.

    Now the BBC reports that the broadcasting regulator Ofcom has launched an investigation into the programme – which is now revealed to have cost more than 800,000 pounds. Ofcom will be looking into a breach of broadcasting rules that “show sponsors must be clearly identified and not allowed to influence the content of programmes”. Home Office staff were reportedly closely involved – and the fact that the government had been funding the programme was not made clear to viewers. At least eight other documentaries have reportedly been funded by the government in the last five years, to the tune of nearly 2 million pounds.

    http://richardwilsonauthor.wordpress.com

    Climate camp raided for a second time

    0

    Six people have been arrested at Medway’s climate camp.

    The first arrest was at 12.30am today, when a 40-year-old man was quizzed on suspicion of possession of a prohibited weapon

    The other five were arrested between 5.50am and 6.30am, one of these a 27-year-old man arrested on suspicion of obstructing an officer.

    The remaining four, all male aged between 31 and 45, have been arrested for public order offences.

    Police say they were told to move their vehicles because of access for emergency vehicles.

    They were given three hours to move them. When the campaigners didn’t do so the vehicles were treated as abandoned. The police have attempted to seize them. The window of one of the vehicles was smashed in order to seize it.

    The move increases the tension between the two sides.

    Climate camp protesters say police have sprayed people with pepper spray.

    The eco-warriors say they were woken at about 5am today by police, who said they were going to take away their vehicles.

    The campaigners say they have already given the police the registration numbers of all vehicles on site.

    The protesters say the police, dressed in riot gear, have not listened to their pleas to leave the vehicles, a minibus and medical vehicle and another car, where they are.

    Protesters say they had no choice but to form an arm-linked ring of people around the vehicles to stop them from being taken and claim the vehilces are taxed, insured and have up-to-date MOTs.

    One protester who didn’t want to be named said: “The police have been really heavy-handed. All we want to do here in site is to have a peaceful protest, but the police seem to want confrontation.”

    Meanwhile, a small but energetic rally from Rochester to Kingsnorth took place on Sunday, organised by Camp supporters, Campaign Against Climate Change.

    Around 200 people turned out on Rochester High Street for the march, and listen to various speakers from Kent and further afield, including Green MEP Caroline Lucas.

    Protestors reached the power station just after 5pm, flanked by scores of police officers, including mounted units and a police helicopter.

    Many supporters then marched a further two miles to join the official camp.

    http://www.kentonline.co.uk/kol08/article/default.asp?article_id=45813

    Police get £160m of bonuses in one year

    0

    By Christopher Hope | The payments were condemned by frontline officers and even a police chief who benefited personally from them. Taxpayer groups said the payments raised “serious questions” about why so much was paid out.

    Officers of all ranks can earn thousands in bonuses for extra duties on top of their salaries and overtime allowances.

    Figures released under the Freedom of Information Act showed that police pocketed £157million last year, including foreign trips with the Royal Family.

    The average bonus payment ranged from £273 in Fife to £1,206 in Staffordshire. Some £3.4million was paid out for unpleasant work or particular dedication to duty.

    This included up to £500 for gruesome tasks such as dealing with a fatal road traffic accident.

    Other examples included:

    • £500 was paid to a sergeant for the removal of a 30 stone man in the advanced stages of decomposition
    • a police constable in Brent received £200 for the “setting up of a borough gym”
    • another officer received £500 for disposing of a large number of motorcycles on his days off
    • two Royal protection officers received £500 for being “regularly deployed overseas and regularly meeting high-ranking people in the host country”

    The payments were heavily criticised. Northumbria Chief Constable Mike Craik, who personally shared £47,000 with his deputy and three assistants, said: “Bonuses do not have a place in the police service.

    “Sometimes what officers have to do can be awful. I was a senior investigating officer in London. I have seen the most grisly things you could ever come across but that is the job I signed up to do.”

    He added: “Bonuses do not lead to improved performance. Our high performance has come from work we would have done anyway.”

    Police Federation chairman Paul McKeever described the system as “divisive and unfair”. He added: “We are fighting for the best pay deal possible and not to have officers reliant on ad-hoc bonuses.”

    Matthew Elliott, chief executive of the TaxPayers’ Alliance, added: “This seems to be an extraordinary amount of money to give in bonuses at a time when there is apparently not enough money to honour even the basic police pay settlement.

    “With some forces clearly struggling to protect the public adequately, there are serious questions to be asked about why so many bonuses are being paid out across the board.”

    The Association of Police Authorities, which is responsible for the bonus system, said: “We are committed to reviewing the bonus scheme in order to understand if and how it improves performance.”

    The Home Office said it had no plans to review the system.